关于知识产权 知识产权培训 树立尊重知识产权的风尚 知识产权外联 部门知识产权 知识产权和热点议题 特定领域知识产权 专利和技术信息 商标信息 工业品外观设计信息 地理标志信息 植物品种信息(UPOV) 知识产权法律、条约和判决 知识产权资源 知识产权报告 专利保护 商标保护 工业品外观设计保护 地理标志保护 植物品种保护(UPOV) 知识产权争议解决 知识产权局业务解决方案 知识产权服务缴费 谈判与决策 发展合作 创新支持 公私伙伴关系 人工智能工具和服务 组织简介 与产权组织合作 问责制 专利 商标 工业品外观设计 地理标志 版权 商业秘密 WIPO学院 讲习班和研讨会 知识产权执法 WIPO ALERT 宣传 世界知识产权日 WIPO杂志 案例研究和成功故事 知识产权新闻 产权组织奖 企业 高校 土著人民 司法机构 遗传资源、传统知识和传统文化表现形式 经济学 金融 无形资产 性别平等 全球卫生 气候变化 竞争政策 可持续发展目标 前沿技术 移动应用 体育 旅游 PATENTSCOPE 专利分析 国际专利分类 ARDI - 研究促进创新 ASPI - 专业化专利信息 全球品牌数据库 马德里监视器 Article 6ter Express数据库 尼斯分类 维也纳分类 全球外观设计数据库 国际外观设计公报 Hague Express数据库 洛迦诺分类 Lisbon Express数据库 全球品牌数据库地理标志信息 PLUTO植物品种数据库 GENIE数据库 产权组织管理的条约 WIPO Lex - 知识产权法律、条约和判决 产权组织标准 知识产权统计 WIPO Pearl(术语) 产权组织出版物 国家知识产权概况 产权组织知识中心 产权组织技术趋势 全球创新指数 世界知识产权报告 PCT - 国际专利体系 ePCT 布达佩斯 - 国际微生物保藏体系 马德里 - 国际商标体系 eMadrid 第六条之三(徽章、旗帜、国徽) 海牙 - 国际外观设计体系 eHague 里斯本 - 国际地理标志体系 eLisbon UPOV PRISMA UPOV e-PVP Administration UPOV e-PVP DUS Exchange 调解 仲裁 专家裁决 域名争议 检索和审查集中式接入(CASE) 数字查询服务(DAS) WIPO Pay 产权组织往来账户 产权组织各大会 常设委员会 会议日历 WIPO Webcast 产权组织正式文件 发展议程 技术援助 知识产权培训机构 COVID-19支持 国家知识产权战略 政策和立法咨询 合作枢纽 技术与创新支持中心(TISC) 技术转移 发明人援助计划(IAP) WIPO GREEN 产权组织的PAT-INFORMED 无障碍图书联合会 产权组织服务创作者 WIPO Translate 语音转文字 分类助手 成员国 观察员 总干事 部门活动 驻外办事处 职位空缺 采购 成果和预算 财务报告 监督
Arabic English Spanish French Russian Chinese
法律 条约 判决 按管辖区浏览

民法典(由1889年7月24日皇家法令批准), 西班牙

返回
被取代文本  转至WIPO Lex中的最新版本
详情 详情 版本年份 2009 日期 议定: 1889年7月24日 文本类型 框架法 主题 版权与相关权利(邻接权), 工业产权 主题(二级) 其他 民法典第10(4)条规定:“根据西班牙法律,在不与西班牙参加的国际条约规定冲突的情况下,知识产权和工业产权应受到保护。”
此外,民法典中涉及与知识产权保护相关的条款,尤其是与版权相关的规定(见第三章“知识产权”,第428条和第429条)。

可用资料

主要文本 相关文本
主要文本 主要文本 西班牙语 Código Civil (aprobado por Real Decreto de 24 de julio de 1889)         英语 Civil Code (approved by Royal Decree of July 24, 1889)        

Spanish Civil Code

2009

Colección:Traducciones del derecho español

Edita: © MINISTERIO DE JUSTICIA - SECRETARÍA GENERAL TÉCNICA

NIPO: 051-09-014-0 Traducción jurada realizada por: Dª Sofía de Ramón-Laca Clausen

Maquetación: DIN Impresores, S.L. Cabo Tortosa, 13-15. Pol. Ind Borondo - 28500 - Arganda del Rey (Madrid)

SPANISH CIVIL CODE

PRELIMINARY TITLE

On legal rules, their application and effectiveness

CHAPTER ONE

Sources of law

Article 1.

  1. The sources of the Spanish legal system are statutes, customs and general legal principles.
  2. Any provisions which contradict another of higher rank shall be invalid.
  3. Customs shall only apply in the absence of applicable statutes, provided that they are not contrary to morals or public policy, and that it is proven. Legal uses which are not merely for the interpretation of a declaration of will shall be considered customs.
  4. General legal principles shall apply in the absence of applicable statute or custom, without prejudice to the fact that they contribute to shape the legal system.
  5. Legal rules contained in international treaties shall have no direct application in Spain until they have become part of the domestic legal system by full publication thereof in the Spanish Official State Gazette.
  6. Case law shall complement the legal system by means of the doctrine repeatedly upheld by the Supreme Court in its interpretation and application of statutes, customs and general legal principles.
  7. Judges and Courts shall have the inexcusable duty to resolve in any event on the issues brought before them, abiding by system of sources set forth herein.

Article 2.

  1. Statutes shall enter into force twenty days after their full publication in the Official State Gazette, unless otherwise provided therein.
  2. Statutes may only be repealed by subsequent statutes. Such repeal shall have the scope expressly provided therein, and shall always extend to any provisions of the new statute on the same matter which are incompatible with the prior statute. Mere abrogation of a statute shall not entail recovery of the force and effect of any provisions repealed thereby.
  3. Statutes shall not have retroactive effect, unless otherwise provided therein.

CHAPTER 2º

Application of legal rules

Article 3.

  1. Rules shall be construed according to the proper meaning of their wording and in connection with the context, with their historical and legislative background and with the social reality of the time in which they are to be applied, mainly attending to their spirit and purpose.
  2. Equity must be taken into account in applying rules, but the resolutions of the Courts may only be based exclusively on equity when the law expressly allows this.

Article 4.

1. Where the relevant rules fail to contemplate a specific case, but do regulate another similar one in which the same ratio is perceived, the latter rule shall be applied by analogy.

  1. Criminal statutes, exceptional statutes and statutes of temporary nature shall not be applied in cases or times other than as expressly provided therein.
  2. The provisions of this Code shall be of subsidiary application in matters governed by other statutes.

Article 5.

  1. Unless otherwise provided, for periods stated in number of days, counting from a particular date, the latter shall be excluded from the calculation, which shall begin on the following day; and periods set in number of months or years shall be calculated from date to date. Where on the month of the expiration date there should be no date equivalent to the initial date of the period, the period shall be deemed to expire on the last day of the month.
  2. Calculation of periods according to civil law shall not exclude non-business days.

CHAPTER 3º

General effectiveness of legal rules.

Article 6.

  1. Ignorance of the law does not excuse from compliance thereof. Error in law shall only have the effects provided in the law.
  2. The voluntary exclusion of applicable law and the waiver of any rights acknowledged therein shall only be valid when they do not contradict the public interest or public policy or cause a detriment to third parties.
  3. Acts contrary to mandatory and prohibitive rules shall be null and void by operation of law, save where such rules should provide for a different effect in the event of violation.
  4. Acts performed pursuant to the text of a legal rule, which pursue a result forbidden by the legal system or contrary thereto shall be considered to be in fraud of the law and shall not prevent the due application of the rule which they purported to avoid.

Article 7.

  1. Rights must be exercised in accordance with the requirements of good faith.
  2. The law does not support abuse of rights or antisocial exercise thereof. Any act or omission which, as a result of the author’s intention, its purpose or the circumstances in which it is performed manifestly exceeds the normal limits to exercise a right, with damage to a third party, shall give rise to the corresponding compensation and the adoption of judicial or administrative measures preventing persistence in such abuse.

CHAPTER 4º

Rules of private international law

Article 8.

  1. Criminal, police and public security statutes shall be binding on all persons within Spanish territory.
  2. (repealed).

Article 9.

1. The personal law applicable to an individual shall be determined by his nationality. Such law shall govern capacity and civil status, family rights and duties and mortis causa succession. A change in personal law shall not affect the coming of age acquired in accordance with the former personal law.

  1. The effects of marriage shall be governed by the personal law common to the spouses at the time of the marriage; in the absence thereof, by the personal law or the law of the place of residence of any of them, chosen by both in an authentic instrument executed prior to the marriage ceremony; in the absence of such election, by the law of the place of habitual residence common to both immediately after the ceremony and, in the absence of such residence, by that of the place of the marriage ceremony. Legal separation and divorce shall be governed by the law provided in article 107.
  2. Covenants or marriage articles stipulating, amending or replacing the property regime of the marriage shall be valid when they are in accordance with either the law governing the effects of the marriage, or the law of the nationality or habitual residence of either party at the time of execution thereof.
  3. The nature and content of filiation, including filiation by adoption, and the relations between parents and their children, shall be governed by the personal law of the child and, if this cannot be determined, the law of his habitual residence.
  4. International adoption shall be governed by the provisions of the International Adoption Law. Likewise, adoptions decreed by foreign authorities shall be effective in Spain in accordance with the provisions of the aforementioned International Adoption Law.
  5. Guardianship and other institutions to protect incapable persons shall be regulated by the latter’s national law. Notwithstanding the foregoing, provisional or urgent protection measures shall be governed by the law of his habitual residence. The formalities to constitute guardianship and other protection institutions in which Spanish judicial or administrative authorities should participate shall in any event be performed in accordance with Spanish law. Spanish law shall apply to the taking of protective and educational measures relating to abandoned minors or incapable persons within Spanish territory.
  6. The right to support between relatives shall be governed by the common national law of the giver and the recipient of such support. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the law of the habitual residence of the person claiming such support shall apply where the latter cannot obtain it in accordance with the common national law. In the absence of both such laws, or where neither allows to obtain support, the domestic law of the authority hearing the claim shall apply. In the event of a change in the common nationality or habitual residence of the recipient of support, the new law shall apply from the time of such change.
  7. Succession mortis causa shall be governed by the national law of the decedent at the time of his death, whatever the nature of the property and the country in which it is located. However, testamentary provisions and covenants relating to future succession executed in accordance with the national law of the testator or bequeather at the time of execution thereof shall remain valid even if another law is to govern the succession. Rights attributed by operation of law to the surviving spouse shall be governed by the same law which governs the effects of marriage, respecting at all times the forced share allocated to the descendants.
  8. For the purposes of the present chapter, the provisions of the international treaties shall apply to situations of dual nationality provided under Spanish law, and, in the absence of such provisions, the nationality of the last place of habitual residence and, in the absence thereof, the last nationality acquired shall be preferred. In any event, Spanish nationality shall prevail for persons who also hold another nationality that is not provided for in Spanish statutes or international treaties. If such person should hold two or more nationalities, and none should be Spanish, the provisions of the following section shall apply.
  9. The law of the place of habitual residence shall be deemed to be the personal law of persons without nationality or with indeterminate nationality.
  10. The personal law corresponding to legal entities shall be determined by their nationality, and shall apply in all matters relating to their capacity, incorporation, representation, operation, transformation, dissolution and termination. In mergers between companies of different nationalities their respective personal laws shall be taken into account.

Article 10.

  1. Possession, ownership and other rights over immovable property and publicity thereof shall be governed by the law of the place where such property located. The same law shall apply to movable property. For the purposes of creating or assigning rights over goods in transit, the latter shall be deemed to be located at their place of dispatch, unless the sender and the recipient should have expressly or implicitly agreed to deem them to be located at their place of destination.
  2. Vessels, aircraft and railway transport vehicles, and all rights created thereon, shall be subject to the law of their flag, matriculation or registration. Automobiles and other road transport vehicles shall be subject to the law of the place where they are located.
  3. The issuance of securities shall be subject to the law of the place where it takes place.
  4. Intellectual and industrial property rights shall be protected within Spanish territory in accordance with Spanish law, without prejudice to the provisions of international treaties and conventions to which Spain is a party.
  5. The law to which the parties have expressly submitted shall apply to contractual obligations, provided that it has some connection with the transaction in question; in the absence thereof, the national law common to the parties shall apply; in the absence thereof, that of their common habitual residence and, lastly, the law of the place where the contract has been entered into. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding paragraph, in the absence of express submission, contracts relating to immovable property shall be governed by the law of the place of their location, and sale and purchases of material movable property in commercial establishments by the law of the location of such establishments.
  6. In the absence of express submission by the parties and without prejudice to the provisions of section 1 article 8, obligations resulting from a labour contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the services are provided.
  7. Gifts shall in any event be governed by the national law of the donor.
  8. Contracts for valuable consideration entered into in Spain by a foreigner without sufficient capacity according to his national law shall be valid for the purposes of Spanish law if the cause of his lack of capacity should not be recognised under Spanish law. This rule shall not apply to contracts relating to immovable property located abroad.
  9. Non-contractual obligations shall be governed by the law of the place where the event from which they result took place. The management of another’s business shall be governed by the law of the place of the manager’s main activity. Unjust enrichment shall be governed by the law pursuant to which the transfer of assets in favour of the enriched person took place.
  10. The law applicable to an obligation shall also govern the requirements for its performance and the consequences of its breach, and the extinction thereof. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the law of the place of performance shall apply to modes of enforcement which require judicial or administrative intervention.
  11. Legal representation shall be governed by the law regulating the legal relationship from which result the representative’s powers, voluntary representation, in the absence of express submission, by the law of the country where the powers conferred are to be exercised.

Article 11.

1. Forms and solemnities of contracts, wills and other legal acts shall be governed by the law of the country in which they are executed. Notwithstanding the foregoing, those entered into according to the forms and solemnities required by the law applicable to their content, and those entered into in accordance with the personal law of the grantor or the law common to the parties shall also be valid. Likewise, acts and contracts relating to immovable property executed in accordance with the forms and solemnities of the place where the property is located shall also be valid.

If such acts should be executed on board vessels or aircraft during navigation or flight, they shall be deemed entered into in the country of their flag, matriculation or registration. Military vessels and aircraft shall be deemed a part of the territory of the State to which they belong.

  1. If the law regulating the content of acts and contracts should require a particular form or solemnity for the validity thereof, this shall always apply, even if they are executed abroad.
  2. Spanish law shall apply to contracts, wills and other legal acts authorised by Spanish diplomatic or consular officers abroad.

Article 12.

  1. Classification to determine the applicable conflict of laws rule shall always be made in accordance with Spanish law.
  2. Referral to foreign law shall be deemed made to its material law, without taking into account any renvoi made by its conflict of laws rules to another law other than Spanish law
  3. In no event shall foreign law apply where it is contrary to public policy.
  4. The use of a conflict of laws rule to elude a mandatory Spanish law shall be deemed to constitute fraud of the law.
  5. Where a conflict of laws rule should refer to the legislation of a State in which different legislative systems should coexist, the determination of which one is applicable shall be made in accordance with the legislation of such State.
  6. The Courts and authorities shall apply Spanish conflict of laws rules ex officio.

CHAPTER 5º

Scope of application of coexisting civil law regulations within national territory

Article 13.

  1. The provisions of this preliminary title, to the extent that they determine the effects of laws and the general rules governing their application, and those of title IV book I, with the exception of the rules in the latter relating to marriage property regime, shall be of general and direct application in all of Spain.
  2. For the rest, fully respecting any specific or regional law of any provinces or territories in which such law should apply, the provisions of the Civil Code shall apply on a subsidiary basis, in the absence of a subsidiary law in each of them, according to their specific rules.

Article 14.

  1. Submission to common civil law or to specific or regional law is determined by civil residence.
  2. Persons born from parents with civil residence within common law territory or in specific or regional law territories shall have the same civil residence as their parents. The non-emancipated adoptee shall acquire the adoptive parents’ civil residence pursuant to the adoption.
  3. If the parents should have different civil residence upon the birth or adoption of their child, the child shall have the civil residence corresponding to the parent in respect of whom the child’s filiation should have been determined first; in the absence thereof, that of his place of birth and, lastly, the civil residence of common law. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the parents, or the parent who exercises or has been attributed parental authority, may attribute to the child the civil residence of either within six months following the birth or adoption. Deprivation or suspension in the exercise of parental authority, or a change of civil residence of the parents shall not affect the civil residence of their children. In any event, the child, from his fourteenth birthday and until one year after his emancipation, may either opt for the civil residence of his place of birth or the last civil residence of either parent. If he should not have been emancipated, he must be assisted in his choice by his legal representative.
  1. Marriage does not alter civil residence. Notwithstanding the foregoing, either of the spouses who is not legally or de facto separated may at any time opt for the civil residence of the other.
    1. Civil residence is acquired:
      1. By two years’ continued residence, provided that the interested party declares that such is his intention.
      2. By ten years’ continued residence, without declaration to the contrary during such period. Both declarations shall be noted in the Civil Registry and shall not require to be repeated.
  2. In case of doubt, the civil residence corresponding to the place of birth shall prevail.

Article 15.

    1. The foreigner who acquires Spanish nationality must, upon registration of the acquisition of such nationality,
    2. opt for any of the following civil residences: a) The one corresponding to the place of residence. b) The one corresponding to the place of birth. c) The last civil residence of any of his parents or adoptive parents. d) The spouse’s. Depending on the capacity of the interested party to acquire said nationality, such election shall be made by the relevant person himself or assisted by his legal representative, or by the representative. If nationality should be acquired as a result of a declaration or request by the legal representative, the necessary authorisation must determine which civil residence is to be chosen.
  1. The foreigner who acquires Spanish nationality by naturalisation shall have the civil residence determined in the Royal Decree granting such naturalisation, taking into account his choice, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding section or other circumstances present in the applicant.
  2. Recovery of Spanish nationality shall entail recovery of the civil residence held by the interested party at the time of its loss.
  3. Personal dependence in respect of a region or locality with a proprietary or different civil specialty, within specific or regional legislation applicable to the relevant territory shall be governed by the provisions of the present and of the preceding article.

Article 16.

1. Conflicts of laws which may arise as a result of the coexistence of different civil legislations within national territories shall be resolved according to the rules provided in chapter IV, with the following particularities:

  1. Personal law shall be as determined by civil residence.
  2. The provisions of sections 1, 2 and 3 article 12 on classification, referral and public policy shall not apply.
  1. The widowhood rights provided in the Compilation of Aragon shall correspond to spouses subject to the marriage property regime provided in such Compilation, even if they should later change their civil residence, excluding, in this case, the forced share set forth in the applicable succession law. Expectant widowhood rights shall not be effective against an acquirer for valuable consideration in good faith of any properties not located within the territory where such right is recognised, if the contract should have been entered into outside such territory without noting the transferor’s marriage property regime. The widow’s usufruct shall also correspond to the surviving spouse where the predeceased spouse should have civil residence in Aragon at the time of his death.
  2. The effects of marriage between Spaniards shall be governed by the applicable Spanish law according to the criteria provided in article 9 and, in the absence thereof, by the Civil Code. In this last case the separation of estates regime provided in the Civil Code shall apply if such kind of regime must apply according to the personal law of both of the spouses.
BOOK I

On persons

TITLE ONE

On Spaniards and foreigners

Article 17.

    1. The following persons are Spaniards by birth: a) Those born of a Spanish mother or father. b) Those born in Spain of foreign parents if at least one of them should also have been born in Spain. The
    2. children of a diplomatic or consular officer credentialed in Spain shall be excepted from this rule. c) Those born in Spain of foreign parents if both of them should be without nationality or if the legislation of neither should grant a nationality to the child. d) Those born in Spain of uncertain filiation. For these purposes, minors whose first known place of existence is in Spanish territory shall be presumed born within Spanish territory.
  1. Filiation or birth in Spain determined after the person is eighteen shall not by themselves constitute grounds to acquire Spanish nationality. The interested party shall then be entitled to opt for Spanish nationality by birth within two years counting from such determination.

Article 18. The possession and continued use of Spanish nationality for ten years, in good faith and based on a title registered in the Civil Registry shall constitute grounds for the consolidation of Spanish nationality, even if the title which originated should be annulled.

Article 19.

  1. A foreigner younger than eighteen adopted by a Spaniard shall acquire Spanish nationality by birth as of the adoption.
  2. If the adoptee should be older than eighteen, he may opt for Spanish nationality by birth within two years following the adoption.

Article 20.

1. Persons who are or have been subject to the parental authority of a Spaniard, and those comprised within the last section of articles 17 and 19 shall be entitled to opt for the Spanish nationality.

2. The declaration of option shall be formulated: a) By the legal representative of the person who makes the option where the latter should be younger than fourteen or incapacitated. In this case the option shall require the authorisation of the officer in charge of the Civil Registry of the domicile of the person who makes the declaration, after issuance of an opinion by the Public Prosecutor. Such authorisation shall be granted in the interests of the minor or incapacitated person. b) By the interested party, assisted by his legal representative, if he is older than fourteen or when, in spite of his incapacity, he should be allowed to do so by the incapacitation judgement. c) By the interested party, by himself, if he is emancipated or older than eighteen. The right to exercise the option will expire when he turns twenty, but if he should not be emancipated according to his personal law upon turning eighteen, the period to exercise the option shall be extended until two years after his emancipation.

d) By the interested party, by himself, within two years following recovery of full legal capacity. The case where the right to exercise the option should have expired in accordance with section c) shall be excepted therefrom.

Article 21.

  1. Spanish nationality shall be acquired by naturalisation, granted discretionally pursuant to Royal Decree, when special circumstances concur in the interested party.
  2. Spanish nationality shall also be acquired by residence in Spain, in the conditions provided in the following article, and shall be granted by the Minister of Justice, who may refuse it on reasoned grounds of public policy or national interest.
    1. In both cases, the application may be formulated by: a) The interested party who is emancipated or older than eighteen. b) The person older than fourteen assisted by his legal representative. c) The legal representative of a person younger than fourteen. d) The legal representative of the incapacitated person, or the incapacitated person by himself or duly
    2. assisted, as results from the incapacitation judgement. In this case and in the former, the legal representative may only formulate the application if he previously obtains an authorisation in accordance with the provisions of letter a) section 2 of the preceding article.
  3. The granting of nationality pursuant to naturalisation or residence shall expire after one hundred and eighty days if the interested party does not within such period appear before a competent officer to comply with the requirements provided in article 23.

Article 22.

  1. Granting of nationality pursuant to residence shall require ten years’ residence. Five years shall be sufficient for persons who have obtained asylum or refugees, and two years for citizens by birth of Latin-American countries, Andorra, the Philippines, Equatorial Guinea or Portugal, or for Sephardic Jews.
    1. One year’s residence shall be sufficient for: a) A person born within Spanish territory. b) A person who has not exercised his option right in due time. c) A person who has been legally subject to guardianship, custody or care by a Spanish citizen or institution
    2. for two consecutive years, even if such situation should persist at the time of the application. d) The person who, at the time of the application, has been married to a Spaniard for one year and is not legally or de facto separated. e) The widow or widower of a Spaniard if, upon the death of the spouse they should not be legally or de facto separated. f) The person born outside of Spain from a father or mother who were originally Spanish.
  2. In all cases residence must be legal, ongoing and immediately prior to the application. For the purposes of the provisions of letter d) of the preceding section, the spouse cohabiting with a Spanish diplomatic or consular officer credentialed abroad shall be deemed to have legal residence in Spain.
  3. The interested party must evidence good civic conduct and a sufficient degree of integration in Spanish society in the proceedings regulated by the Civil Registry legislation.
  4. The granting or refusal of nationality pursuant to residence shall be open to contentious administrative appeal.

Article 23. The following are common requirements for the validity of the acquisition of Spanish nationality by option, naturalisation or residence: a) For the person older than fourteen and capable of issuing a statement by himself to swear or promise fidelity to the King and obedience to the Constitution and the law. b) For the same person to declare that he renounces his prior nationality. Nationals of the countries mentioned in section 2 article 24 shall be excepted from this requirement. c) For the acquisition to be registered with the Spanish Civil Registry.

Article 24.

  1. Emancipated persons habitually resident abroad who voluntarily acquire another nationality or who exclusively use their foreign nationality attributed prior to their emancipation shall lose their Spanish nationality.
  2. Such loss shall take place after the lapse of tree years, counting, respectively, from the acquisition of the foreign nationality or from the emancipation. Acquisition of the nationality of Latin American countries, Andorra, the Philippines, Equatorial Guinea or Portugal shall not be sufficient to cause the loss of Spanish nationality by birth.
  3. In any event, emancipated Spaniards who expressly renounce their Spanish nationality shall lose it if they have another nationality and have their residence abroad.
  4. Loss of Spanish nationality shall not take place pursuant to the provisions of this rule if Spain should be at war.

Article 25.

    1. Spaniards who are not Spanish by birth shall lose their nationality: a) When for a period of three years they should exclusively use the nationality which they should have declared to have renounced upon acquiring Spanish nationality.
    2. b) When they should voluntarily enter the armed forces or exercise public office in a foreign State against the Government’s express prohibition.
  1. A final judgement holding that the relevant party has incurred in misrepresentation, concealment or fraud in the acquisition of Spanish nationality shall cause such acquisition’s being null and void, although no prejudicial effects shall result for third parties in good faith. The action for annulment must be exercised by the Public Prosecutor ex officio or pursuant to a complaint, within a period of fifteen years.

Article 26.

1. A person who has lost his Spanish nationality may recover it by meeting the following requirements:

a) Being a legal resident in Spain. This requirement shall not apply to emigrants or to the children of emigrants. In the remaining cases, it may be waived by the Minister of Justice in the event of exceptional circumstances.

b) Declaring before the officer in charge of the Civil Registry his intention to recover Spanish nationality, and c) Registering the recovery in the Civil Registry.

2. Persons incurring in any of the grounds provided in the preceding article may not recover or acquire, as the case may be, Spanish nationality, without the Government’s prior authorisation, to be granted discretionally:

Article 27. Foreigners shall enjoy in Spain the same civil rights as Spaniards, save as provided in specific statutes and Treaties.

Article 28. Corporations, foundations and associations recognised by the law and domiciled in Spain shall have Spanish nationality, provided that they are legal entities in accordance with the provisions of the present Code. Associations domiciled abroad shall have in Spain the consideration and rights determined in the treaties or specific statutes.

TITLE II

On the birth and extinguishing of civil personality

CHAPTER ONE

On natural persons

Article 29. Birth determines personality; but the child conceived shall be deemed already born for all purposes favourable to him, provided that he should be born meeting the conditions expressed in the following article.

Article 30. For civil purposes, only the foetus with human appearance that lives for twenty four hours fully separated from the mother’s womb shall be deemed to have been born.

Article 31. In the event of double births, priority in birth shall entitle the first child born to the rights recognised in the law to the firstborn.

Article 32. Civil personality shall be extinguished as a result of death.

Article 33. Between two persons called to succeed each other, in the event of doubt as to which of them died first, the person holding that one or the other died first must prove it; in the absence of evidence, they shall be presumed to have died at the same time, and no transfer of rights from one to the other shall take place.

Article 34. The provisions of title VIII of the present book shall apply to the presumption of the death of the absentee and its effects.

CHAPTER 2º

On legal entities

Article 35. The following shall be legal entities:

  1. Corporations, associations and foundations of public interest recognised by the law. Their personality shall begin from the very moment in which they should have been validly incorporated in accordance with the law.
  2. Associations of private interest, whether civil, commercial or industrial, to which the law grants legal personality independent of that of each member.

Article 36. Associations mentioned in number 2 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions relating to the partnership contract, depending on the nature thereof.

Article 37. The civil capacity of corporations shall be governed by the laws which have created or recognised them; that of associations, by their articles, and that of foundations by their regulations, duly approved by an administrative resolution, where this requirement should be necessary.

Article 38. Legal entities may acquire and possess property of all kinds, and contract obligations and exercise civil and criminal actions, in accordance with the laws and internal regulations. The Church shall be governed in this matter by the provisions of the concordat between both powers, and educational and charitable establishments by the provisions of specific statutes.

Article 39. If, as a result of expiration of their legal term, or as a result of the fulfilment of the purpose for which they were created, or of the impossibility of applying to the former the activity and the means available to them, corporations, associations and foundations should cease to operate, their property shall be allocated as provided in the laws, articles of association or foundational articles. In the absence of any prior provision, such property shall be allocated to the performance of analogous purposes in the interests of the region, province or Municipality principally entitled to receive the benefits of the extinguished institutions.

TITLE III

On domicile

Article 40. The domicile of natural persons for the purposes of the exercise of civil rights and the performance of civil obligations shall be their place of habitual residence and, as the case may be, their domicile as determined by the Civil Procedural Law. The domicile of diplomats resident abroad as a result of their post, who enjoy the right of extraterritoriality shall be their last domicile in Spanish territory.

Article 41. Where neither the law which created or recognised them or the articles of association or foundational articles should establish the domicile of legal entities, it shall be deemed to be in the place where their legal representation is located, or where they exercise their main institutional functions.

TITLE IV

On marriage

CHAPTER ONE

On the promise of marriage

Article 42. The promise of marriage does not give rise to the obligation to marry or to comply with the provisions thereof in the event of failure to perform the marriage. Any claim purporting compliance thereof shall not be granted leave to proceed.

Article 43.

Breach of a certain promise of marriage made by a person of legal age or by an emancipated minor, without cause, shall only give rise to the obligation to compensate the other party for expenses made and obligations contracted in consideration of the promised marriage. This action shall lapse by peremption after one year counting from the date of the refusal to enter into the marriage.

CHAPTER 2º

On the requirements of marriage

Article 44.

Men and women are entitled to marry in accordance with the provisions of this Code. Marriage shall have the same requirements and effects when both prospective spouses are of the same or different genders.

Article 45. There shall be no marriage without matrimonial consent. Any condition, term or mode limiting consent shall be deemed not to have been written.

Article 46. The following persons may not marry:

  1. Non-emancipated minors.
  2. Persons who are already joined in marriage.

Article 47. The following persons may also not marry each other:

  1. Direct line relatives by consanguinity or adoption.
  2. Collateral relatives by consanguinity up to the third degree.
  3. Persons sentenced as authors of or accomplices in the murder of the spouse of either of them.

Article 48. The Minister of Justice may waive the impediment of murder of the former spouse at the request of one of the parties. The First Instance Judge may waive, with just cause and at the request of one of the parties, impediments relating to third degree collateral consanguinity and the age impediment for persons older than fourteen. The minor and his parents or carers must be heard in proceedings to waive the age impediment. A subsequent waiver shall validate the marriage from the date of its performance, where neither party has applied to the court to have it declared null and void.

CHAPTER 3º

On the form of performing the marriage

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 49. Any Spaniard may marry inside or outside of Spain:

  1. Before the Judge, Mayor or public officer provided in this Code.
  2. According to the religious form provided in the law. He may also marry outside of Spain according to the form provided in the law of the place of the marriage ceremony.

Article 50. If both prospective spouses should be foreigners, the marriage may be performed in Spain in according to the form provided for Spaniards, or in compliance with the form set forth in the personal law applicable to either of them.

SECTION 2ª

On marriage performed before a Judge, Mayor or public officer in their stead

Article 51. The following persons shall be competent to authorise the marriage:

  1. The Judge in charge of the Civil Registry and the Mayor of the municipality where the marriage is performed, or the councillor in favour of whom the latter should have delegated.
  2. In municipalities where such a Judge should not be in residence, the delegate designated pursuant to applicable regulations.
  3. The diplomatic or consular officer in charge of the Civil Registry abroad.

Article 52. The following persons may authorise the marriage of persons in danger of death:

  1. The Judge in charge of the Civil Registry, the delegate or the Mayor, even if the prospective spouses do not reside in the relevant court district.
  2. In the absence of a Judge, for members of the military in military campaigns, the immediate superior Officer or Chief.
  3. For marriages performed on board a vessel or aircraft, the Captain or Commander thereof. Such marriage shall not require the prior creation of a record of the proceedings, but shall require the presence of two witnesses of legal age at the ceremony, save in the event of proven impossibility.

Article 53. The validity of the marriage shall not be affected by the incompetence or lack of legitimate appointment of the Judge, Mayor or officer who authorises it, provided that at least one of the spouses should have acted in good faith and the former should exercise their duties publicly.

Article 54. In the event of sufficiently proven serious grounds, the Minister of Justice may authorise a secret marriage. In such case, the record of proceedings shall be processed confidentially, without the publication of edicts or banns.

Article 55. The record of the marriage may authorise that the prospective spouse who does not reside in the district or district of the authorising Judge, Mayor or officer may enter into the marriage by means of an attorney who has been granted a special power of attorney in an authentic instrument, but the personal attendance of the other spouse shall always be required. The power of attorney shall determine the person with whom the marriage is to be performed, expressing the personal circumstances necessary to establish his identity. The power of attorney shall be terminated as a result of revocation by the grantor, resignation of the attorney or the death of either of them. In the event of revocation by the grantor, his statement in an authentic instrument prior to the performance of the marriage shall be sufficient for these purposes. Notice of such revocation shall be immediately given to the authorising Judge, Mayor or officer.

Article 56. Persons wishing to marry must previously evidence, in a record of proceedings processed in accordance with the Civil Registry legislation, that they meet the capacity requirements set forth in this Code. If either of the prospective spouses should be affected by mental deficiencies or anomalies, a medical opinion on his ability to give consent shall be required.

Article 57. The marriage must be performed before the Judge, Mayor or officer corresponding to the domicile of either prospective spouse, and two witnesses of legal age. Consent may also be given, by delegation of the officer in charge of the record of the proceedings, either at the request of the prospective spouses or ex officio, before the Judge, Mayor or officer of another location.

Article 58. The Judge, Mayor or officer, after reading articles 66, 67 and 68 hereof, shall ask each of the prospective spouses whether they consent to marry and effectively marry in such act, and, both of them answering in the affirmative, shall declare them joined in matrimony and shall extend the relevant entry or certificate.

SECTION 3ª

On marriage performed in religious form

Article 59. Matrimonial consent may be given in the form provided by a registered religious confession, in the terms agreed with the State or, in the absence thereof, in the terms provided by State legislation.

Article 60. A marriage performed in accordance with the provisions of Canon Law or in any of the religious forms provided in the preceding article shall have civil effect. The provisions of the following chapter shall apply as relates to the full recognition of such effects.

CHAPTER 4º

On registration of the marriage in the Civil Registry

Article 61. Marriage shall have civil effects from the time of its performance. The full recognition thereof shall require registration of the marriage in the Civil Registry. A marriage which has not been registered shall not be prejudicial to the rights acquired in good faith by third parties.

Article 62. The Judge, Mayor or officer before whom the marriage is performed shall, immediately after its performance, make the corresponding entry or certificate, with his signature and that of the spouses and witnesses. Likewise, after having made the entry or issued the certificate, the Judge, Mayor or officer shall deliver to each spouse a document evidencing the performance of the marriage.

Article 63. Registration of the marriage performed in Spain in religious form shall take place by the mere filing of the certification issued by the respective Church or confession, which must express the circumstances required by the Civil Registry legislation. Registration shall be refused where the documents submitted or the entries in the Registry should show that the marriage does not meet the requirements for its validity provided in this title.

Article 64. Registration in the special book carried by the Central Civil Registry shall suffice to recognise a secret marriage, but such marriage shall not be prejudicial to rights acquired by third parties in good faith until publication thereof in the ordinary Civil Registry.

Article 65. Save for the provisions of article 63, in all other cases where the marriage should have been performed without processing the relevant record of the proceedings, the Judge or officer in charge of the Registry must ascertain whether the legal requirements for its performance are met prior to registration thereof.

CHAPTER 5º

On the rights and duties of the spouses

Article 66. The spouses are equal in rights and duties.

Article 67. The spouses must respect and assist each other and act in the family interest.

Article 68. The spouses are obliged to live together, to be faithful to one another and to come to one another’s’ aid. They must, furthermore, share domestic responsibilities and the care and attendance of parents and descendants and other dependents in their charge.

Article 69. It shall be presumed, unless there is evidence to the contrary, that the spouses live together.

Article 70. The spouses shall set the marital domicile by common consent and any discrepancy shall be resolved by the Judge, taking into account the family interest.

Article 71. Neither spouse may attribute to himself the representation of the other unless it is conferred.

Article 72. (No content)

CHAPTER 6º

On the nullity of the marriage

Article 73. The marriage shall be null and void, whatever the form of its performance:

  1. Marriage performed without matrimonial consent.
  2. Marriage performed between the persons mentioned in articles 46 and 47, save in the event of waiver in accordance with article 48.
  3. Marriage performed without the intervention of the Judge, Mayor or officer before whom it is to be performed, or without the presence of witnesses.
  4. Marriage performed as a result of error as to the identity of the other spouse, or such personal qualities which, as a result of their importance, should have been decisive in the giving of consent.
  5. Marriage performed under duress or serious fear.

Article 74. The action for annulment of the marriage shall correspond to the spouses, to the Public Prosecutor or to any person with a direct and legitimate interest therein, save as provided in the following articles.

Article 75. If the grounds for nullity should be age, while the spouse remains underage the action may only be exercised by his parents, guardians or carers and, in any case, by the Public Prosecutor. On coming of age, the action may only be exercised by the spouse who was underage at the time, unless the spouses should have lived together during one year after he came of age.

Article 76. In cases of error, duress or serious fear, the action for annulment may only be exercised by the spouse who suffered the defect of consent. The action shall lapse by peremption and the marriage shall be validated if the spouses should have lived together for a year after the error should have disappeared, or the duress or the grounds for fear should have ceased.

Article 77. (No content)

Article 78. The judge shall not decree the annulment of a marriage as a result of a defect of form, where at least one of the spouses entered into it in good faith, save for the provisions of article 73 number 3.

Article 79. The declaration of the marriage being null and void shall not invalidate any effects already occurred in respect of the children and the spouse or spouses who acted in good faith. Good faith is presumed.

Article 80

Resolutions issued by Ecclesiastical Courts relating to the annulment of a canonical marriage, or the Pope’s decisions relating to ratified and non-consummated marriages shall be effective under Civil law, at the request of either party, if they are declared to adjust to the Law of the State in a resolution issued by the competent civil Judge in accordance with the conditions mentioned in article 954 of the Civil Procedural Law.

CHAPTER 7º

On separation

Article 81. Whatever the form of performance of the marriage, judicial separation shall be decreed:

  1. At the request of both spouses or of one with the consent of the other, after the lapse of three months from the performance of the marriage. The claimant must necessarily attach the proposal of settlement agreement, in accordance with article 90 of this Code.
  2. At the request of one of the spouses, after the lapse of three months from the performance of the marriage. The lapse of this period shall not be required to file the claim when there is evidence of the existence of risk to the life, physical integrity, freedom, moral integrity or sexual liberty and integrity of the spouse filing the claim or the children in common or any member of the marriage. The claim shall attach a reasoned proposal of the measures which are to regulate the effects of the separation.

Article 82. (No content)

Article 83. The separation judgement gives rise to suspension of the life in common of the married spouses, and ends the possibility of binding the property of the other spouse in the exercise of domestic authority.

Article 84. Reconciliation shall end separation proceedings, and shall render without subsequent force and effect the matters resolved therein, but both spouses must separately make the Judge who hears or has heard the case aware of such reconciliation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any measures adopted in connection with the children shall be maintained or amended by court resolution, in the event of a just cause which justifies them.

CHAPTER 8º

On the dissolution of the marriage

Article 85. The marriage shall be dissolved, whatever the form and time of its performance, by the death or the declaration of death of one of the spouses, and by divorce.

Article 86. Divorce shall be decreed by the court, whatever the form of performance of the marriage, at the request of one of the spouses, of both or of one with the consent of the other, when the requirements and circumstances of article 81 are met.

Article 87. (No content)

Article 88. The divorce action shall be extinguished as a result of the death of either spouse and by reconciliation, which must be express if it takes place after filing the claim. Reconciliation subsequent to the divorce shall have no legal effect, although the divorcees may marry again.

Article 89. Dissolution of the marriage by divorce may only take place by means of judgement declaring the divorce and shall be effective from the judgement’s becoming final. It shall not be prejudicial to third parties in good faith until after registration thereof with the Civil Registry.

CHAPTER 9º

On effects common to annulment, separation and divorce

Article 90. The settlement agreement mentioned in articles 81 and 86 of this Code must contain, at least the following items:

a) Care of the children subject to the parental authority of both spouses, the exercise thereof and, as the case may be, the schedule of communications and stays of the children with the parent who does not usually live with them.

b) If deemed necessary, the schedule of visits and communications between grandchildren and

grandparents, always taking into account the interests of the former. c) Attribution of the use of the family home and appurtenances. d) Contribution to the expenses of the marriage and support, and the basis on which it is to be updated,

and security thereof, the case may be. e) Liquidation, where applicable, of the marriage property regime. f) Allowance to be paid, as the case may be, in accordance with article 97, by one of the spouses.

Agreements between the spouses adopted to regulate the consequences of the annulment, separation or divorce shall be approved by the judge, unless they are detrimental to the children or seriously prejudicial to one of the spouses. If the parties propose a visit and communications schedule between grandchildren and grandparents, the judge may approve it after hearing the grandparents, at which hearing the grandparents must give their consent thereto. Rejection of the agreements must be made by a reasoned resolution, and, in this case, the spouses must submit a new proposal for the judge’s consideration, for his approval, where applicable. The agreements may be enforced by summary proceedings as of their judicial approval. The measures adopted by the Judge in the absence of an agreement, or those agreed between the spouses, may be amended by the Judge or by a new settlement agreement, in the event of a substantial alteration of the circumstances. The Judge may set any real or personal security required for the performance of the agreement.

Article 91. In annulment, separation or divorce judgements or the enforcement thereof, the Judge, in the absence of an agreement between the spouses or non-approval thereof, shall determine, in accordance with the provisions of the following articles, any measures which are to replace those already adopted previously in connection with the children, the family home, marital expenses e, liquidation of the marriage property regime and any respective precautions or security, establishing applicable measures if none should have been adopted in respect thereof. These measures may be amended in the event of substantial alteration of the circumstances.

Article 92

  1. Separation, annulment and divorce shall not exonerate parents from their obligations to their children.
  2. When the Judge is to adopt any measure relating to custody, care and education of underage children, he shall ensure compliance with their right to be heard.
  3. The judgement shall order the deprivation of parental authority when grounds for this should be revealed in the proceedings.
  4. The parents may agree in the settlement agreement, or the Judge may decide, for the benefit of the children, that parental authority be exercised in whole or in part by one of the spouses.
  5. Shared care and custody of the children shall be decreed where the parents should request it in the settlement agreement proposal or where both of them should agree on this during the proceedings. The Judge, in decreeing joint custody and after duly motivating his resolution, shall adopt the necessary precautions for the effective compliance of the agreed custody regime, trying not to separate siblings.
  1. In any event, after decreeing the care and custody regime, the Judge must ask the opinion of the Public Prosecutor and hear minors who have sufficient judgement, where this is deemed necessary ex officio or at the request of the Public Prosecutor, the parties or members of the Court Technical Team, or the minor himself, and evaluate the parties’ allegations at the hearing and the evidence practised therein, and the relationship between the parents themselves and with their children to determine the suitability of the custody regime.
  2. No joint custody shall be granted when either parent should be subject to criminal proceedings as a result of an attempt against the life, physical integrity, freedom, moral integrity or sexual liberty and integrity of the other spouse or the children who live with both of them. Neither shall it apply where the Judge should observe, from the parties’ allegations and the evidenced practiced, that there is well-founded circumstantial evidence of domestic violence.
  3. Exceptionally, even in the absence of the circumstances provided in section five of this article, the Judge, at the request of one of the parties, with the favourable report of the Public Prosecutor, may decree the shared care and custody based on the argument that only thus is the minor’s higher interest suitably protected.
  4. The Judge, before adopting any of the decisions mentioned in the preceding paragraphs, ex officio or ex parte, may ask for the opinion of duly qualified specialists relating to the suitability of the form of exercise of parental authority and the minors’ custody regime.

Article 93. The Judge shall in any event determine each parent’s contribution to pay child support and shall adopt convenient measures to ensure the effectiveness and suitability of the payments to economic circumstances and to the needs of the children from time to time. If children who are of legal age or emancipated but have no own resources should live in the family home, the Judge, in the same resolution, shall set any support which may be due n accordance with articles 142 et seq. of this Code.

Article 94. The parent who does not live with his underage or incapacitated children shall be entitled to visit them, communicate with them and have them in his company. The Judge shall determine the time, manner and place to exercise visitation rights, which may be limited or suspended in the event that serious circumstances should advise it or of serious and repeated breach of the duties imposed by the judicial resolution. Likewise, the Judge may determine, after hearing the parents and grandparents, who must give their consent, rights of communication and visitation between grandparents and grandchildren, in accordance with article 160 of this Code, always keeping in mind the interests of the minor.

Article 95. The final judgement shall give rise to the dissolution of the marriage property regime, as relates to the marriage property. If the judgement of annulment should declare the bad faith of one spouse only, the spouse who has acted in good faith may choose to apply the provisions relating to the participation regime to the liquidation of the marriage property regime, and the spouse acting in bad faith shall not be entitled to participate in the gains obtained by his consort.

Article 96. In the absence of an agreement between the spouses approved by the Judge, use of the family home and the objects of ordinary use therein shall correspond to the children and to the spouse in whose company they remain. Where some children remain in the company of one spouse and the rest with the other, the Judge shall resolve as deemed fit. In the absence of children, it may be resolved that the use of such property for the prudential time thus provided, shall correspond to the non-owner spouse, provided that, under the circumstances, this should be advisable, and that such spouse’s interest should in greater need of protection.

The consent of both parties or, as the case may be, judicial authorisation shall be required to dispose of the home and property mentioned above when their use should correspond to the non-owner spouse.

Article 97. The spouse for whom the separation or divorce should give rise to an economic imbalance in relation with the other’s position, involving a deterioration of his situation prior to the marriage, shall be entitled to compensation, which may consist of a temporary or indefinite allowance or a lump sum settlement, as determined in the settlement agreement or in the judgement In the absence of an agreement between the spouses, the Judge shall determine, pursuant to a judgement, the amount thereof, taking into account the following circumstances:

  1. Agreements reached by the spouses.
  2. Age and state of health.
  3. Professional qualifications and likelihood of getting a job.
  4. Past and future dedication to the family.
  5. Collaboration by working in the other spouse’s commercial, industrial or professional activities.
  6. The duration of the marriage and of their marital cohabitation.
  7. The possible loss of pension rights.
  8. Economic wealth and resources and the needs of each spouse. The judicial resolution shall set the bases to update the allowance and any guarantees to ensure its effectiveness.

Article 98. The spouse in good faith whose marriage has been declared null and void shall be entitled to compensation if there has been marital cohabitation, attending to the circumstances provided in article 97.

Article 99. At any time the parties may agree to replace the allowance set by the Judge in accordance with article 97 by the constitution of a life annuity, usufruct over certain property or payment of a capital sum in the form of property or cash.

Article 100. After the setting of the allowance and the bases to update it in the separation or divorce judgement, it may only be amended as a result of material alterations in the fortune of one or the other spouse.

Article 101. The right to receive the allowance shall be extinguished as a result of the removal of the cause which motivated it, or as a result of the creditor’s marrying again or living with another person in a situation akin to marriage. The right to receive the allowance shall not be extinguished by the mere fact of the debtor’s death. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the latter’s heirs may request the Judge to reduce or suppress it if the estate cannot satisfy the requirements of the debt or if it should affect their right to a forced share.

CHAPTER 10º

On interim measures as a result of the claim for annulment, separation or divorce

Article 102. Upon admission of the claim for annulment, separation or divorce, the following effects take place by operation of law:

  1. The spouses may live separately and the presumption of marital cohabitation shall cease.
  2. Consents and powers of attorney granted by either spouse to the other are revoked. Likewise, save as otherwise agreed, the possibility of binding the exclusive property of the other spouse in the exercise of domestic powers shall cease. For these purposes, either party may request the relevant note to be made in the Civil Registry and, as the case may be, in the Property and Commercial Registries.

Article 103. Upon admission of the claim, the Judge, in the absence of a judicially approved agreement between both spouses shall adopt, after hearing the latter, the following measures:

    1. To determine, in the interests of the children, with which spouse the children subject to the parental authority of both of them are to remain, and to make the appropriate decisions in accordance with the provisions of this Code and, in particular, the manner in which the spouse who does not exercise the custody and care of the children may comply with his obligation of watching over them, and the time, form and place in which he may communicate with them and have them in his company. Exceptionally, children may be entrusted to grandparents, relatives or other persons who consent to it, and, in the absence thereof, to a suitable institution, conferring on the latter the relevant guardianship duties, which they shall exercise under the judge’s authority. Where there should be a risk of abduction of the minor by one of the spouses or by third parties, the necessary measures may be adopted and, in particular, the following:
    2. a) Prohibition to exit national territory, save with a prior judicial authorisation. b) Prohibition to issue a passport to the minor, or removal thereof if one should already have been issued. c) Submission of any change of domicile of the minor to prior judicial authorisation.
  1. To determine, taking into account the family interest most requiring protection, which of the spouses shall continue using the family home and, likewise, after making an inventory thereof, which goods or objects pertaining to the appurtenances are to continue in the home and which are to be taken away by the other spouse, and the appropriate precautionary measures to preserve the rights of each of them.
  2. To set the contribution of each spouse to the marital expenses, including, if applicable, court costs, setting the basis to update any amounts and set any security, deposits, with holdings or other convenient precautionary measures, to ensure the enforcement of the amounts payable as a result by one spouse to the other. The work performed by one of the spouses to attend to the children in common subject to parental authority shall be considered a contribution to such expenses.
  3. To determine, attending to the circumstances, any common property which, after making an inventory, is to be delivered to one spouse or the other, and the rules to be observed in the Administration and disposal thereof, and in the mandatory rendering of accounts relating to common property or the part thereof received thereby, and any required thereafter.
  4. To determine, as the case may be, the arrangements for the administration and disposal of any exclusive property which, as a result of marriage articles or pursuant to a public deed, should be especially earmarked to pay the marital expenses.

Article 104. The spouse proposing to file a claim for annulment, separation or divorce may request the effects and measures mentioned in the two preceding articles. Such effects and measures shall only subsist if, within the following 30 days counting from initial adoption thereof, the relevant claim should be filed before the competent Judge or Court.

Article 105. The spouse who leaves the marital home for a just cause and within 30 days files the claim or request mentioned in the preceding articles shall not be in breach of the duty to cohabit.

Article 106. The effects and measures provided in this chapter shall terminate, in any event, upon replacement thereof by those provided in the judgement or in the event of termination of the proceedings in any other way. Revocation of any consents and powers of attorney shall be deemed to be final.

CHAPTER 11º

Law applicable to nullity, separation and divorce

Article 107.

  1. The nullity of the marriage and its effects shall be determined in accordance with the law applicable to its performance.
  2. Separation and divorce shall be governed either by the common national law of the spouses at the time of filing the claim; in the absence of a common nationality, by the law of the common habitual residence of the spouses at such time and, in the absence thereof, by the law of the last common habitual residence of the spouses, if one of the spouses should still be a resident in such State. In any event, Spanish law shall apply when one of the spouses is Spanish or a habitual resident in Spain:

a) If none of the laws mentioned above should apply. b) If both spouses, or one with the consent of the other, should request separation or divorce in the claim submitted before a Spanish court. c) If the laws mentioned in the first paragraph of this section should not acknowledge separation or divorce, or should do it in a manner which is discriminatory or contrary to public policy.

TITLE V

On paternity and filiation

CHAPTER ONE

On filiation and its effects

Article 108. Filiation may be by birth and by adoption. Filiation by birth may be matrimonial and non- matrimonial. It is matrimonial when the mother and father are married to each other. Matrimonial and non-matrimonial filiation, and adoptive filiation, shall have the same effects, in accordance with the provisions of the present Code.

Article 109. Filiation determines surnames, in accordance with the provisions of the law. Filiation is determined by both lines, the father and mother may decide by common consent the order of transfer of their respective first surname, prior to registration. If this option is not exercised, the provisions of the law shall apply. The order of surnames registered for the oldest child shall govern subsequent registrations of the birth of his siblings from the same union. The child, upon coming of age, may request to alter the order of the surnames.

Article 110. The father and mother, even if they do not hold parental authority, are obliged to care for their underage children and to provide them with support.

Article 111. The parent who fulfils the following circumstances shall be excluded from parental authority and other guardianship duties, and shall not be entitled to any rights by operation of Law in respect of the child or his descendants, or to their estates:

  1. If he has been sentenced as a result of the relations resulting in the conception, according to a final criminal judgement.
  2. If filiation was determined judicially against his opposition. In both cases, the child shall not bear the surname of the parent in question unless he or his legal representative should request it.

These restrictions shall cease to have effect by determination of the child’s legal representative, approved by the court, or by the will of the child himself upon reaching full legal capacity. Obligations to look after children and to support them shall subsist notwithstanding the foregoing.

CHAPTER 2º

On determination and evidence of filiation

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 112. Filiation shall be effective from the moment on which it takes place. Its legal determination shall have retroactive effect, provided that such retroactivity is compatible with the nature of such effects and that the Law does not provide otherwise. In any event, acts executed on behalf of the underage or incapable child by his legal representative before determination of filiation shall remain valid.

Article 113. Filiation shall be evidenced by registration in the Civil Registry, by the document or judgement which legally determines it, by the matrimonial presumption of paternity and, in the absence of the preceding means, by possession of status. The provisions of the Civil Registry Law shall apply to the admission of evidence contrary to the registered entry. The determination of filiation shall not be effective where another contradictory filiation should be on record.

Article 114. Filiation entries may be rectified in accordance with the Civil Registry Law, without prejudice to the specific provisions in the present title on actions to challenge filiation. Likewise, entries which contradict the facts declared proven by a criminal judgement may also be rectified at any time.

SECTION 2ª

On determination of matrimonial filiation

Article 115. Maternal and paternal matrimonial filiation shall be legally determined:

  1. By registration of the birth together with that of the parents’ marriage.
  2. By a final judgement.

Article 116. Children born after the marriage is performed and before three hundred days after the dissolution thereof, or after the legal or de facto separation of the spouses, shall be presumed to be children of the husband.

Article 117. If the child should be born within 180 days following performance of the marriage, the husband may destroy the presumption by declaring otherwise in a public instrument executed within six months of his becoming aware of the birth. The cases where he should have expressly or implicitly acknowledged his paternity, or should have been aware of the woman’s pregnancy prior to performing the marriage shall be excepted from the foregoing, save when, in the latter case, such declaration in a public instrument should have been executed, with the consent of both spouses, prior to the marriage or subsequently thereto, within six months following the birth of the child.

Article 118. Even in the absence of the presumption of paternity of her husband as a result of the spouses’ legal or de facto separation, filiation may be registered as matrimonial with the consent of both.

Article 119. Filiation shall become matrimonial from the date of the marriage of the parents, when the latter should take place subsequently to the birth of the child, provided that the fact of the filiation should be legally determined in accordance with the provisions of the following section. The provisions of the preceding paragraph shall, as the case may be, benefit the descendants of the deceased child.

SECTION 3ª

On the determination of non-matrimonial filiation

Article 120. Non-matrimonial filiation shall be legally determined:

  1. By recognition before the officer in charge of the Civil Registry, in a will or in another public document.
  2. By resolution issued in proceedings processed in accordance with the Civil Registry legislation.
  3. By final judgement.
  4. In respect of the mother, where maternal filiation should be provided in the registration of birth performed within the requisite period, in accordance with the provisions of the Civil Registry Law.

Article 121. Recognition made by incapable persons or persons who cannot marry by reason of their age shall require judicial approval, after hearing the Public Prosecutor, to be valid.

Article 122. When a parent should recognise a child separately, he shall not be entitled to declare the identity of the other parent therein, unless this should already be legally determined.

Article 123. Recognition of a child who is of legal age shall not be effective unless the latter’s express or implied consent is obtained.

Article 124. The effectiveness of recognition by a minor or incapable person shall require the express consent of his legal representative or judicial approval, after hearing the Public Prosecutor, and of the legally recognised parent. No consent or approval shall be necessary if recognition should have been made by will or within the period provided to register the birth. The registration of paternity thus practised may be suspended at the mere request of the mother during the year following the birth. If the father should request confirmation of the entry, judicial approval, after hearing the Public Prosecutor, will be required.

Article 125. When the minor’s or incapable person’s parents should be siblings or consanguineous relatives in direct line, upon legal determination of filiation in respect of one, such filiation may only be legally determined in respect of the other prior judicial authorisation, which shall be granted, after hearing the Public Prosecutor, when it should be in the interest of the minor or incapable person. When the latter should reach full capacity, he may, pursuant to statement in a public instrument, invalidate this last determination if he should not have consented to it.

Article 126. Recognition of a child already deceased shall only be effective if his descendants should consent to it, by themselves or by means of their legal representatives.

CHAPTER 3º

On filiation actions

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 127 to 130. (Repealed)

SECTION 2ª

On claims

Article 131. Any person with a legitimate interest shall be entitled to claim declaration of a filiation manifested by constant possession of status. The case where the claimed filiation should contradict another filiation legally determined shall be excepted therefrom.

Article 132. In the absence of the corresponding possession of status, the claim of matrimonial filiation, which shall not be subject to a statute of limitations, corresponds to the father, the mother or the child. If the child should die before the lapse of four years from his reaching full capacity, or during the year following discovery of the evidence on which the claim should be based, the action shall pass to his heirs for the time required to complete such periods.

Article 133. The action to claim non-matrimonial filiation, in the absence of the respective possession of status, shall correspond to the child during his whole life.

If the child should die before the lapse of four years from his reaching full capacity, or during the year following discovery of the evidence on which the claim should be based, the action shall pass to his heirs for the time required to complete such periods.

Article 134. Exercise of the claim by the child or the parent, in accordance with the preceding articles, shall in any event allow the challenging of contradictory filiation.

Article 135. (abrogated)

SECTION 3ª

On contesting paternity

Article 136. The husband may exercise the action to contest paternity within one year counting from registration of the filiation with the Civil Registry. Notwithstanding the foregoing, such periods shall not begin to count while the husband is unawares the birth.

If the husband should die before the lapse of the period provided in the preceding paragraph, the action shall correspond to each heir for the time remaining to complete such period. If the husband should die without being aware of the birth, the year shall count from the date on which the heir becomes aware of it.

Article 137. Paternity may be contested by the child during the year following registration of the filiation. If he should be underage or incapable, the period shall count from his coming of age or reaching full legal capacity. Exercise of the action on behalf of the child who is underage or incapacitated shall likewise correspond, during the year following registration of the filiation, to the mother holding parental authority, or to the Public Prosecutor If possession of status of matrimonial filiation should be absent from family relations, the claim may be filed at any time by the child or his heirs.

Article 138. The recognitions which determine matrimonial filiation in accordance with the Law may be contested as a result of a defect of consent, in accordance with the provisions of article 141. The contest of paternity for other causes shall be governed by the rules contained in this section.

Article 139. A woman may contest her maternity by justifying the simulation of the birth, or that the child’s identity is false.

Article 140. If possession of status should be absent from family relations, non-matrimonial paternal or maternal filiation may be contested by those to whom it is prejudicial. In the event of existence of possession of status, the contesting action shall correspond to the person who appears as child or parent, and to those who may be affected by the filiation as forced heirs. The action shall lapse by peremption after four years from the date on which the child, after registration of the filiation, should have the corresponding possession of status. Children shall in any event be entitled to exercise the action for one year after having reached full legal capacity.

Article 141. The action to contest the recognition of a child made under error, duress or intimidation shall correspond to the person who granted such recognition. The action shall lapse by peremption after one year from such recognition or from the time in which the defect of consent ceased, and may be exercised or continued by the latter’s heirs, if he should have deceased, before the lapse of one year.

TITLE VI

On support between relatives

Article 142. Support shall be deemed to mean everything which is indispensable for food, shelter, dress and medical assistance. Support shall also comprise education and instruction of the recipient of support while he is underage and even thereafter, when he has not finished his training for a cause not attributable to him. Support shall include pregnancy and delivery expenses, if not otherwise covered.

Article 143. The following persons shall be mutually obliged to give each other support with the scope provided in the preceding article:

  1. Spouses.
  2. Ascendants and descendants. Siblings shall only owe one another basic living needs, when needed for any reason not attributable to the recipient of support; these shall extend, as the case may be, to the support required for their education.

Article 144. The claim for support, where applicable and where two or more persons should be obliged to provide it shall be made in the following order:

  1. To the spouse.
  2. To descendants in the nearest degree.
  3. To ascendants, also in the nearest degree.
  4. To siblings, provided that uterine or consanguine siblings shall be obliged in the last place. Degree between descendants and ascendants shall be regulated by the order in which they are called to intestate succession of the person entitled to support.

Article 145. Where the obligation to provide support should fall on two or more persons, payment of the allowance shall be shared between them in proportion to their respective wealth. Notwithstanding the foregoing, in case of urgent need and as a result of special circumstances, the Judge may oblige a single one of them to provide it provisionally, without prejudice to his rights to claim from the remaining obligors the part which corresponds to them. When two or more recipient of supports should claim support at the same time from the same person legally obliged to provide them, and such person should not have sufficient wealth to attend to all of them, the order provided in the preceding article shall be followed, unless the recipient of supports should be the spouse and a child subject to parental authority, in which case the latter shall be preferred over the former.

Article 146. The amount of the support shall be proportional to the estate or resources of the person who provides it and the needs of the person receiving it.

Article 147. Support, in the cases mentioned in the preceding article, shall be proportionally reduced or increased according to the increase or reduction in the needs of the recipient of support and the wealth of the person obliged to satisfy it.

Article 148. The obligation to provide support shall be payable from the time on which the person entitled to receive them should need them to subsist; but they shall not be paid until after the date on which the relevant claim should be filed. Payment shall be verified monthly in advance and, upon the death of the recipient of support, his heirs shall not be obliged to return any amounts received by the latter in advance. The Judge, at the request of the recipient of support or of the Public Prosecutor, shall issue, on an urgent basis, the relevant precautionary measures to ensure payment of the advances made by a public Entity or by another person, and to provide for future needs.

Article 149. The person obliged to provide support may, at his discretion, satisfy it either by paying the allowance set, or receiving and keeping in his own home the person entitled to receive it. This choice shall not be possible to the extent that it contradicts the cohabitation arrangements provided under applicable law or by judicial resolution for the recipient of support. It may also be rejected in the event of just cause or where it should be prejudicial to the interests of the underage recipient of support.

Article 150. The obligation to provide support shall cease with the death of the obligor, even if he should provide it in compliance with a final judgement.

Article 151. The right to receive support cannot be waived or transferred to a third party. Neither may it be offset against the amounts owed by the recipient of support to the person obliged to provide it. However, outstanding support allowances may be subject to set-off and waived, and the right to claim them may be transferred for valuable consideration or as a gift.

Article 152. The obligation to provide support shall also cease:

1. By the death of the recipient of support.

  1. When the wealth of the person obliged to provide it should have been reduced to a point where he is unable to satisfy it without neglecting his own needs and those of his family
  2. When the recipient of support is able to carry out a trade, profession or industry, or has obtained a position or improved in wealth, so that the support allowance is no longer necessary for his subsistence.
  3. When the recipient of support, whether or not a forced heir, should have committed any offence giving rise to disinheritance.
  4. Where the recipient of support is a descendant of the person obliged to provide support, and the latter’s need should arise from his bad conduct or lack of application at work, while this cause subsists.

Article 153. The preceding provisions shall apply to the remaining cases where, pursuant to this Code, to a will or to an agreement, a person should be entitled to receive support, save as otherwise agreed, ordered by the testator or provided by the law for the relevant special case.

TITLE VII

On parent-child relations

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 154. Non-emancipated children shall be under the parents’ parental authority. Parental authority shall be exercised always for the benefit of the children, according to their personality, and respecting their physical and psychological integrity. This authority comprises the following duties and powers:

  1. To look after them, to have them in their company, feed them, educate them and provide them with a comprehensive upbringing.
  2. To represent them and to manage their property. If the children should have sufficient judgement, they must be heard always before adopting decisions that affect them. Parents may, in the exercise of their powers, request the assistance of the authorities.

Article 155. Children must:

  1. Obey their parents while they remain under their parental authority and always respect them.
  2. Equitably contribute, according to their possibilities, to the discharge of family expenses while they live with them.

Article 156. Parental authority shall be exercised jointly by both parents, or by one of them with the express or implied consent of the other. Acts performed by one of them according to social practice and circumstances or in situations of urgent need shall be valid. In the event of disagreement, either of them may appear before the Judge, who, after hearing both of them and the child, if he should have sufficient judgement and, as the case may be, if he should be older than twelve, shall confer without further recourse the ability to decide to the father or the mother. In the event of repeated disagreement, or if there should be any other cause which severely hinders the exercise of parental authority, he may confer it in whole or in part to one of the parents, or distribute duties between them. This measure shall remain in force during the period provided, which may never exceed two years. In the cases provided in the preceding paragraphs, in respect of third parties in good faith, each parent shall be presumed to act in the ordinary exercise parental authority with the consent of the other.

In the absence thereof, or as a result of the absence, incapacity or impossibility of one of the parents, parental authority shall be exclusively exercised by the other. If the parents should live separately, parental authority shall be exercised by the parent with whom the child lives. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Judge, at the duly justified request of the other parent, may, in the interests of the child, confer parental authority to the applicant, to be exercised jointly with the other parent, or distribute between the father and the mother the duties inherent to its exercise.

Article 157. The non-emancipated minor shall exercise parental authority over his children with the assistance of his parents and, in the absence thereof, his guardian; in the event of disagreement or impossibility, with that of the Judge.

Article 158. The Judge, ex officio or at the request of the child, of any relative or of the Public Prosecutor, shall order:

  1. Suitable measures to ensure the provision of support, and to provide for the future needs of the child by his parents, in the event of breach of such duty.
  2. Adequate provisions to prevent harmful disturbance to the children in cases of change of the holder of custody.
    1. Necessary measures to prevent the abduction of underage children by one of the parents or by third parties
    2. and, in particular, the following: a) Prohibition to exit national territory, save with a prior judicial authorisation. b) Prohibition to issue a passport to the minor, or removal thereof if one should already have been issued. c) Submission to prior judicial authorisation of any change of domicile of the minor.
  3. Generally, other provisions deemed suitable, to remove the minor from danger or to prevent any damages to him. All these measures may be adopted within any civil or criminal proceedings, or in voluntary jurisdiction proceedings.

Article 159. If the parents live separately and are unable to decide by common consent, the Judge shall decide, always for the benefit of the children, in the custody of which parent the underage children are to remain. The Judge, before taking this measure, shall hear the children who have sufficient judgement and, in any event, those older than twelve.

Article 160. The parents, even if they do not exercise parental authority, are entitled to a relationship with their underage children, except with those adopted by another, in accordance with the provisions of the judicial resolution. Personal relationships between the child and his grandparents and other relatives and close friends may not be prevented without just cause. In the event of opposition, the Judge, at the request of the minor, his grandparents, relatives or close friends, shall decide, attending to the circumstances. He must especially ensure that the measures which may be set to favour relations between grandparents and grandchildren do not enable the infringement of judicial resolutions restricting or suspending relations between the minors and one of the parents.

Article 161. In the case of a minor in foster care, the right of his parents, grandparents and other relatives to visit him and have a relationship with him may be regulated or suspended by the Judge, attending to the circumstances and in the interests of the minor.

CHAPTER 2º

Legal representation of children

Article 162. Parents who hold parental authority shall have the legal representation of their underage non- emancipated children. The following cases shall be excepted:

  1. Acts relating to rights of personality or others which the child, in accordance with the Law and to his maturity, may perform by himself.
  2. Those where there is a conflict of interest between the parent and the child.
  3. Those relating to property which is excluded from the parents’ administration. Entering into contracts which oblige the child to perform personal services shall require the child’s consent, if he should have sufficient judgement, without prejudice to the provisions of article 158.

Article 163. Whenever, in any affair, the father’s and mother’s interest should be opposed to that of their non-emancipated children, the latter shall be appointed a defender who shall represent them in court and out of court. This appointment shall also take place when the parents’ interest is opposed to that of the underage emancipated child whose capacity they are required to supplement. If the conflict of interest should exist only in respect of one of the parents, the other shall be entitled to represent the minor or supplement his capacity by operation of Law and without the need for a specific appointment.

CHAPTER 3º

On children’s property and its administration

Article 164. Parents shall administer their children’s property with the same diligence as they do their own, in compliance with the general obligations applicable to any administrator, and with the specific obligations set forth in the Mortgage Law. The following property shall be excepted from parental administration:

  1. Property acquired as a gift, where the grantor should have ordered it expressly. The will of the transferor on the administration of this property and the destination of its fruits shall be strictly complied with.
  2. Property acquired by succession when one or both of the persons exercising parental authority should have been justly disinherited or should have been unable to inherit as a result of being unworthy, which shall be administered by the person designated by the decedent and, in the absence thereof, successively, by the other parent or by a specially appointed judicial administrator.
  3. Property acquired by the child older than sixteen by his work or industry. Ordinary acts of administration shall be performed by the child, who shall need the parents’ consent for acts exceeding the former.

Article 165. The fruits of the property of the non-emancipated child, and anything acquired by his work or industry shall always belong to him. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the parents may destine the property of the minor who lives with both or with one of them, in the corresponding part, to the discharge of family expenses, and they shall not be obliged to render accounts of any property consumed for such purposes. For these purposes, the fruits of the property not administered by the parents shall be delivered to then. Fruits of property mentioned in numbers one and two of the preceding article and those gifted or left to children especially for their education or career shall be excepted from the above, but, if the parents should lack of means, they may request the Judge to have an equitable part delivered to them.

Article 166. Parents may not waive the rights held by the children, nor dispose of or encumber any real estate properties, commercial or industrial establishments, precious objects and securities, except for preferred subscription right over shares, save for a just cause of utility or necessity, prior authorisation of the Judge of their domicile, after hearing the Public Prosecutor. Parents must obtain judicial authorisation to reject an inheritance or legacy left to the child. If the Judge should refuse the authorisation, the inheritance may only be accepted under the benefit of inventory. No judicial authorisation shall be required if the minor should be sixteen years of age and should consent in a public document, nor to dispose of securities, provided that the proceeds are reinvested in safe goods or securities.

Article 167. Where the parents’ administration should endanger the net assets of the child, the Judge, at the request of the child himself, of the Public Prosecutor or of any relative of the minor, may issue any orders deemed necessary for the safety and safekeeping of the property, require security or a bond for their continuation in the administration thereof or even appoint an Administrator.

Article 168. Upon termination of parental authority, the children may require the parents to render accounts of the administration performed over the property until then. The action to enforce this obligation shall be statute barred after three years. In the event of loss or impairment of the property as a result of wilful misconduct or gross negligence, the parents shall be liable for any damages suffered.

CHAPTER 4º

On termination of parental authority

Article 169. Parental authority shall end:

  1. By the death or declaration of death of the parents or the child.
  2. By emancipation.
  3. By the adoption of the child.

Article 170. The father or the mother may be deprived in whole or in part of their authority pursuant to a judgement on grounds of the breach of the duties inherent thereto, or issued in criminal or matrimonial proceedings. The Courts may, for the benefit and in the interest of the child, decide the recovery of parental authority when the cause which motivated the deprivation should have ceased.

Article 171. Parental authority over children who should have been incapacitated shall be extended, by operation of Law, upon their coming of age. If a child who is of legal age, unmarried, and lives in the company of his parents or of any of them should be incapacitated, parental authority shall be restored, and shall be exercised by the person who would be entitled to do so if the child were underage. Extended parental authority in any of these two forms shall be exercised subject to the specific provisions of the incapacitation resolution and, on a subsidiary basis, to the rules of the present Title. Extended parental authority shall terminate:

  1. By the death or declaration of death of both parents or the child.
  2. By adoption of the child.
  3. By declaration of the incapacity having ceased.
  4. By marriage of the incapacitated person. If, upon termination of the extended parental authority, the incapacitation should subsist, guardianship or conservatorship shall be appointed, as applicable.

CHAPTER 5º

On adoption and other forms of protection of minors

SECTION ONE

On custody and foster care of minors

Article 172.

  1. When the public entity entrusted with the protection of minors in the respective territory should become aware that a minor is in a situation of neglect, it shall have by operation of Law the guardianship of such minor, and must adopt the necessary protection measures for his custody, making the Public Prosecutor aware of this, and giving notice to the parents, guardians or carers in due legal form, within forty eight hours. Whenever possible, at the time of giving such notice, they shall be informed in their presence and in a clear and comprehensible manner of the causes which have given rise to the Administration’s intervention and the possible effects of the decision adopted. A situation of neglect shall be deemed to exist de facto as a result of the breach or the impossible or inadequate exercise of the protection duties set forth by the laws for the custody of minors, when they should be deprived of the necessary moral or material assistance. The assumption of guardianship by the public entity shall entail the suspension of parental authority or ordinary guardianship. Notwithstanding the foregoing, acts of patrimonial content performed by the parents or guardians on behalf of the minor which are beneficial to the latter shall be valid.
  2. When the parents or guardians, as a result of serious circumstances, cannot take care of the minor, they may request the competent public entity to assume his custody for the necessary period of time. The transfer of custody shall be set forth in writing, expressly noting that the parents or guardians have been informed of their responsibilities they continue to hold in respect of the child, and the manner in which such custody will be exercised by the Administration. Any subsequent variation in the form of exercise shall be duly grounded and communicated to the former, and to the Public Prosecutor. Likewise, the public entity shall assume custody when so resolved by the Judge in cases where it is legally applicable.
  3. Custody assumed at the request of parents or guardians or as a result of guardianship assumed by operation of law shall be performed by means of family foster care or residential care. Family foster care shall be exercised by the person or persons determined by the public entity. Residential care shall be exercised by the Director of the centre where the minor is taken in. Within two months, the parents or guardians of the minor may challenge the administrative resolution deciding the foster care if they consider that the form of care decided is not the most convenient for the minor, or if there should exist other persons within the family circle more suitable to those designated.
  4. The interest of the minor shall always be sought, and the Administration shall try to achieve his reintegration into his own family, if not contrary to such interest, and to have siblings entrusted to the custody of the same institution or person.
  5. If serious problems should arise in the cohabitation between the minor and the person or persons who have been entrusted with his custody, the minor or an interested party may request his removal therefrom.
  6. Resolutions which acknowledge the existence of neglect and declare the assumption of guardianship by operation of law may be appealed before the civil jurisdiction, within the period and subject to the conditions set forth in the Civil Procedural Law, without the need to file a prior administrative claim.
  1. During a period of two years as from notice of the administrative resolution declaring the existence of neglect, parents who continue to hold parental authority but have been suspended in the exercise thereof in accordance with the provisions of number one of this article shall be entitled to request termination of such suspension, and revocation of the declaration of the minor’s neglect, if, as a result of a change in the circumstances which motivated it, they should understand that they are in a condition to assuming parental authority once again. They shall likewise be entitled to challenge any decisions adopted in respect of the minor’s protection during the same period. After such period has elapsed, their right to request or challenge decisions or measures adopted for the protection of the minor will lapse. Notwithstanding the foregoing, they may inform the public entity and the Public Prosecutor of any change in the circumstances which gave rise to the declaration of neglect.
  2. The public entity, ex officio, or at the request of the Public Prosecutor or of an interested person or entity, may at all times revoke the declaration of neglect and decide the return of the minor to his family, if he is not integrated in a stable manner in another family, or if it should understand that it is in the best interests of the minor. Such decision shall be notified to the Public Prosecutor.

Article 173.

  1. Family foster care produces the full participation of the minor in family life and imposes on the foster parent the obligations of taking care of him, having him in his company, feeding him, educating him and providing him with a comprehensive upbringing. This foster care may be exercised by the person or persons who replace the minor’s nuclear family or by the person responsible for the home.
    1. Foster care shall be executed in writing, with the consent of the public entity, whether or not it holds the guardianship or custody, of the persons who take the minor in, and of the minor if he should be older than twelve years old. When the parents who have not been deprived of parental authority or the guardian should be known, they shall also be required to give or to have given their consent, save in the event of provisional family foster care referred to in section 3 of this article. The document executing the family foster care mentioned in the preceding paragraph shall include the following items:
      1. The necessary consents.
      2. Form of the foster care and expected duration thereof.
        1. Rights and duties of each of the parties and, in particular: a) Regularity of any visits by the family of the minor taken into foster care. b) Coverage of the damage suffered by the minor or any damage which he may cause to third parties by
        2. the public entity or other persons liable from a civil standpoint. c) Assumption of food and board, education and health care expenses.
      3. The content of any monitoring to be performed by the public entity, depending on the purpose of the foster care, and the foster family’s undertaking to cooperate.
      4. Economic compensation to be received by the foster parents, as the case may be.
      5. It shall be expressly noted whether the foster parents act as professionals or if the foster care is to take place in a functional home.

7. Report by the childcare services. Such document shall be forwarded to Public Prosecutor.

3. If the parents or guardians should not consent or should challenge the foster care, such care may only be decided by the Judge, in the interests of the minor, in accordance with the formalities of the Civil Procedural Law. The proposal of the public entity shall contain the same items mentioned in the preceding number. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the public entity may decide, in the interests of the minor, a provisional family foster care, which will subsist until the relevant judicial resolution is passed. The public entity, after performing the requisite formalities and upon completion of the proceedings, must submit a proposal to the Judge immediately and, in any event, within fifteen days.

4. The foster care of the minor shall cease:

  1. By judicial resolution.
  2. By decision of the foster parents, prior notice thereof to the public entity.
  3. At the request of the guardian or the parents with parental authority wishing to have him in their company.
  4. By decision of the public entity who holds the guardianship or custody of the minor, when it deems it

necessary to safeguard the interests of the latter, after hearing the foster parents. A judicial resolution of cessation shall be required when the foster care should have been decided by the Judge.

5. All actions of execution and cessation of the foster care shall be practised with mandatory secrecy.

Article 173 bis. Family foster care may adopt the following forms, depending on its purpose:

  1. Simple family foster care, which shall be provisional, either because, as a result of the minor’s situation, he is expected to be reintegrated in his own family, or until a more stable protection measure is adopted.
  2. Permanent family foster care, when the age or other circumstances of the minor and his family advise it, and the child care services should have reported favourably on it. In such case, the public entity may request the Judge to confer on the foster parents those faculties of guardianship which facilitate the performance of their responsibilities, attending in any event to the higher interest of the minor.
  3. Pre-adoptive family foster care, which shall be executed by the public entity upon making the proposal for the adoption of the minor, prior report by the childcare services, to the judicial authority, provided that the foster parents meet the necessary requirements to adopt, have been selected and have given their consent to the adoption before the public entity, and that the minor is in a suitable legal situation to be adopted. The public entity may likewise execute pre-adoptive family foster care when it considers, prior to submitting the adoption proposal, that it is necessary to set a period for the minor to adapt to the family. This period shall be as brief as possible and, in any event, may not exceed one year.

Article 174.

  1. The Public Prosecutor shall be in charge of the higher supervision of the guardianship, foster care or custody of the minors mentioned in this Section.
  2. For such purposes, the public entity shall give immediate notice of any new entries of minors and shall forward a copy of the administrative resolutions and execution documents relating to the constitution, variation and cessation of any guardianship, custody and foster care. Likewise it will inform it of any interesting developments in the minor’s circumstances. The Public Prosecutor must check the situation of the minor at least every semester and shall propose to the Judge any protection measures deemed necessary.
  3. The Public Prosecutor’s vigilance shall not exempt the public entity from its responsibility vis-a-vis the minor and from its obligation to make the Public Prosecutor aware of any anomalies observed.

SECTION 2ª

On adoption

Article 175.

  1. Adoption shall require that the prospective adoptive parent is older than 25. In an adoption by both spouses, it will be sufficient for one of them to have reached such age. In any event, the prospective adoptive parents must be at least fourteen years older than the adoptee.
  2. Only non-emancipated minors may be adopted. As an exception, it will be possible to adopt a person of legal age or an emancipated minor when, immediately prior to the emancipation, there should have existed an uninterrupted situation of foster care or of cohabitation, initiated before the prospective adoptee became fourteen.
    1. One may not adopt:
      1. A descendant.
      2. A relative in the second degree in the collateral line by consanguinity or affinity.
      3. A ward by his guardian until final approval of the accounts of the guardianship.
  1. Nobody may be adopted by more than one person, unless the adoption is performed jointly or successively by both spouses. Marriage performed subsequently to the adoption shall allow the spouse to adopt the children of his consort. In the event of death of the adoptive parent, or when the adoptive parent should incur in the grounds for exclusion provided in article 179, a new adoption of the adoptee shall be possible.

Article 176.

  1. The adoption shall be constituted by judicial resolution, which shall take into account always the interests of the prospective adoptee and the suitability of the prospective adoptive parent or parents for the exercise of parental authority.
    1. To initiate the adoption proceedings, a prior proposal of the public entity shall be required in favour of the prospective adoptive parent or parents who have been declared suitable to exercise parental authority by the public entity. The declaration of suitability may be prior to the proposal. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no proposal shall be required when the prospective adoptee meets any of the following circumstances:
      1. Being an orphan and a relative of the prospective adoptive parent in the third degree by consanguinity or affinity.
      2. Being a child of the consort of the prospective adoptive parent.
      3. Having been in legal foster care under a measure of a pre-adoptive foster care, or having been under his guardianship for the same time.
      4. Being of legal age or an emancipated minor.
  2. In the first three cases of the preceding section, the adoption may be constituted even if the prospective adoptive parent should have deceased, if the latter should already have given his consent before the Judge. In this case, the judicial resolution shall have retroactive effect to the date of such consent.

Article 177.

  1. The prospective adoptive parent or parents and the adoptee older than twelve must consent to the adoption in the presence of the Judge.
    1. The following persons must consent to the adoption in the manner set forth in the Civil Procedural Law:
      1. The spouse of the prospective adoptive parent, save in the event of legal separation pursuant to a final judgement or de facto separation by mutual consent set forth in a public instrument.
      2. The parents of the prospective adoptee who is not emancipated, unless they should be deprived of parental authority by final judgement or they should incur in a legal cause for such deprivation. Such situation may only be appreciated in contradictory judicial proceedings, which may be processed as provided in article 1827 of the Civil Procedural Law.

Such consent shall not be required when it is impossible for those who must provide it to do so, which impossibility shall be duly grounded in the judicial resolution constituting the adoption. The consent of the mother may not be given until after 30 days have elapsed from the birth.

    1. The following persons must simply be heard by the Judge:
    2. 1. Parents who have not been deprived of parental authority where their consent should not be necessary for the adoption.
  1. The guardian and, as the case may be, the carer or carers.
  2. The adoptee who is younger than twelve, if he should have sufficient judgement.
  3. The public entity, in order to appreciate the suitability of the prospective adoptive parent, when the adoptee should have been legally under the former’s foster care for more than one year.

Article 178.

  1. The adoption gives rise to the extinction of any legal relations between the adoptee and his former family.
    1. As an exception, legal relations with the family of the parent shall subsist, as applicable, in the following cases:
      1. When the adoptee should be the child of the spouse of the prospective adoptive parent, even if the consort should have died.
      2. When only one of the parents has been legally determined, provided that it should have been requested by the prospective adoptive parent, the adoptee older than twelve and the parent whose relation therewith is to persist.
  2. The provisions of the preceding sections shall be understood to be without prejudice to the provisions relating to matrimonial impediments.

Article 179.

  1. The Judge, at the request of the Public Prosecutor, of the adoptee or of his legal representative, shall resolve that the adoptive parent who incurs in a cause for deprivation of parental authority shall be excluded from guardianship duties and from the rights to which he is entitled pursuant to the Law in respect of the adoptee or his descendants, or to their estates.
  2. Upon reaching full capacity, such exclusion may only be requested by the adoptee, within the following two years.
  3. These restrictions shall cease to be effective by determination of the child himself upon reaching full capacity.

Article 180.

  1. Adoption is irrevocable.
  2. The Judge shall resolve the extinction of adoption at the request of the father or the mother who, without fault on their part, should not have taken part in the proceedings in the terms expressed in article 177. The claim shall also be required to be filed within two years following the adoption, and that the requested extinction does not cause serious harm to the minor.
  3. Termination of the adoption shall not be a cause of loss of nationality or civil residence acquired, nor shall it affect any patrimonial effects which should have taken place before.
  4. Determination of the filiation corresponding to the adoptee by birth shall not affect adoption.
  5. Adopted persons, after reaching legal age or while being underage, represented by their parents, shall be entitled to know any data relating to their biological origin. Spanish childcare Public Entities, prior notice to any affected persons, shall provide, through their specialised services, the advice and assistance required by any applicants to bring this right to effect.

TITLE VIII

On absence

CHAPTER ONE

Declaration of absence and its effects

Article 181. In any event, upon the disappearance of the person from his domicile or from his last place of residence, without having any further news of him, the Judge may, at the request of the interested party or of

the Public Prosecutor, appoint a defender to protect and represent the disappeared person in court or in any business which does not admit delay without serious detriment. Those cases where the former should already have legal or voluntary representation in accordance with article 183 shall be excepted. The present spouse who is of legal age and not legally separated shall be the ex officio defender and representative of the disappeared person; and, in the absence thereof, the nearest relative up to the fourth degree, also of legal age. In the absence of relatives, lack of presence thereof or notorious urgency, the Judge shall appoint a solvent person with good background, after hearing the Public Prosecutor.

He may also adopt, at his proof discretion, any necessary orders for the preservation of the assets.

Article 182. The following persons shall have the obligation to promote and request the legal declaration of absence, without order of preference:

  1. The spouse of the absentee who is not legally separated from him.
  2. Consanguineous relatives up to the fourth degree.
  3. The Public Prosecutor, ex officio or pursuant to a complaint. Any person who rationally deems to have any right over the property of the disappeared person exercisable during his life or dependent on his death shall also be entitled to request such declaration.

Article 183. A person who has disappeared from his domicile or last place of residence shall be deemed to be under a situation of legal absence:

  1. After one year has elapsed from the last news of him, or, in the absence thereof, from his disappearance, if he should not have left an attorney with powers of administration over all his property.
  2. After three years have elapsed, if he should have empowered someone to the administration of all his property. The death or justified resignation of the attorney, or the expiration of the mandate, shall determine legal absence, if, upon occurrence thereof, the whereabouts of the disappeared person should be unknown and one year should have elapsed from the last news of him or, in the absence thereof, from his disappearance. Upon registration of the declaration of absence in the Central Registry, all general or special mandates executed by the absentee shall be terminated by operation of law.

Article 184. Save in the event of a serious reason appreciated by the Judge, the representation of the person declared an absentee, the investigation of his whereabouts, the protection and administration of his property and the performance of his obligations shall correspond to:

  1. The present spouse of legal age not legally or de facto separated from him.
  2. His child of legal age; if there should be several, those who lived with the absentee shall be preferred, and an older child shall be preferred over a younger child.
  3. The nearest youngest ascendant of either line.
  4. Siblings of legal age who have cohabited as a family with the absentee, with preference of older siblings over younger ones. In the absence of the aforementioned persons, such representation shall correspond, in all its scope, to the solvent person of good background designated by the Judge at his prudent discretion, after hearing the Public Prosecutor.

Article 185. The representative of the person declared an absentee shall be subject to the following obligations:

1. To make an inventory of movable property and to describe any immovable property of his principal. 2.To provide the bond prudentially set by the Judge. The representatives included in numbers 1, 2 and 3 of the preceding article shall be excepted.

3. To preserve and defend the assets of the absentee and obtain from his property any normal returns of which it is capable.

4. To comply with the rules provided in the Civil Procedural Law relating to possession and administration of the absentee’s property. The provisions governing the exercise of guardianship and grounds for ineligibility, removal and excuse of guardians shall apply to the appointed representatives of the absentee, to the extent that they are adapted to their special representation.

Article 186. The legitimate representatives of the person declared an absentee included in numbers 1, 2 and 3 of article 184 shall enjoy the temporary possession of the assets of the absentee and shall be entitled to the liquid products thereof in the amount set forth by the Judge, taking into account the amount of any fruits, rents and benefits, the number of children of the absentee and the obligations to support them, the care and actions required by the representation, any earmarks which encumber the assets and other circumstances of the kind. The legitimate representatives included in number 4 of the aforementioned article shall also enjoy the temporary possession of the assets and shall be entitled to their fruits, rent and benefits in the amount set forth by the Judge, without in any event being entitled to retain more than two thirds of any liquid products, and the remaining third shall be reserved for the absentees or, as the case may be, for his heirs or successors. Temporary possessors of the property of the absentee may not sell, encumber, mortgage or pledge, save in the event of evident need or utility, acknowledged and declared by the Judge, who, in authorising such acts, shall determine the destination to be given to the amount obtained therefrom.

Article 187. If, during the enjoyment of temporary possession or the exercise of the appointed representation, anyone should prove his preferential right to such possession, the current possessor shall be excluded, but the former shall not be entitled to the products but from the date of the filing of the claim. In the event of appearance of the absentee, his assets must be restored to him, but not the products received, save in the event of bad faith, in which case such restitution shall also comprise any fruits received and those which ought to have been received counting from the date on which the absence took place, according to the judicial declaration.

Article 188. If, during the course of the temporary possession or the exercise of the appointed representation, the death of the person declared an absentee should be proved, his succession shall be opened for the benefit of those who, at the time of his death, should have been his voluntary or legitimate successors, and the temporary possessor must deliver the estate of the decedent to them, retaining as his own the products received in the amount provided herein. If a third party should appear, evidencing by means of a public instrument having acquired, pursuant to purchase or by another title, property from the absentee, the representations shall cease in respect of such property, which shall be made available to its legitimate titleholders.

Article 189. The spouse of the absentee shall be entitled to separation of estates.

Article 190. In order to claim a right on behalf of the absentee it is necessary to evidence that this person existed at the time in which his existence was necessary to acquire it.

Article 191. Without prejudice to the provisions of the preceding article, upon opening of a succession to which an absentee should be called, his part shall accrue in favour of his co-heirs, if there is no person entitled to claim it. All of them, as the case may be, must make an inventory of such property, with the intervention of the Public Prosecutor, which shall be reserved until the declaration of death.

Article 192. The provisions of the preceding article shall be understood to be without prejudice of any actions to claim an inheritance or any rights to which the absentee, his representatives or his successors should be entitled. Such rights shall only be extinguished by the passage of the time provided as statute of limitations. Any

entry in the Registry of any immovable property accruing in favour of any co-heirs shall express the circumstance that they remain subject to the provisions of this article and the preceding one.

CHAPTER 2º

On the declaration of death

Article 193. The declaration of death shall apply:

  1. After ten years have elapsed since the last news of the absentee or, in the absence thereof, since his disappearance.
  2. After five years have elapsed since the last news of him or, in the absence thereof, since his disappearance, if, upon expiration of such period, the absentee should have reached seventy five. The aforementioned periods shall be calculated from the expiration of the calendar year on which the last news of him was received or, in the absence thereof, from the year of his disappearance.
  3. After two years have elapsed, counted from date to date, from an imminent risk of death as a result of accident or violence, suffered by a person without receiving any news of him subsequently to the accident or the violence. Violence shall be presumed if, in a state of political or social unrest, a person should have disappeared without receiving any news of him during the aforementioned period, provided that six months should have elapsed from the end of such unrest.

Article 194. The declaration of death shall also apply:

  1. In respect of persons who, belonging to an armed contingent or linked thereto as voluntary ancillary offices of, or as reporters, should have taken part in campaign operations and should have disappeared in them, after the lapse of two years, counted from the date of the peace treaty and, in the absence thereof, from the official declaration of the end of the war.
  2. In respect of those persons who should be on board a shipwreck or who should have disappeared as a result of immersion in the sea, after the lapse of three months from the ascertainment of the shipwreck or disappearance without having news of them. The shipwreck shall be presumed to have occurred if the vessel does not reach its destination or, if, lacking a fixed destination, it should not return, in both cases after the lapse of six months counting from the last news received of it or, in the absence thereof, from the date of departure of the vessel from the initial port of the journey.
  3. Of those persons who should be on board an aeroplane crash, after the lapse of three months from the ascertainment of the crash, without having had news of them or, in the event that human remains should have been found, if they should have been unable to be identified. An aeroplane crash shall be deemed to have occurred if, in a flight over the sea, or desert or uninhabited areas, six months should have elapsed from the last news received from the persons or from the aircraft and, in the absence thereof, from the date on which the journey should have begun. If the flight should be in stages, the aforementioned period shall be computed from the point of takeoff from which the last news should have been received.

Article 195. The declaration of death shall put an end to the situation of legal absence, but until such declaration takes place, the absentee shall be presumed to have lived until the time on which he must be reputed to have died, save as otherwise determined in an investigation. Any declaration of death shall express the date from which the death is deemed to have occurred, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding articles, unless there is evidence to the contrary.

Article 196. Upon the declaration of death of the absentee’s becoming final, succession to his estate shall be opened, and such estate shall be adjudicated pursuant to the formalities of testamentary or intestate proceedings, or out of court. The heirs may not dispose of the inheritance pursuant to gift until five years after the declaration of death. Until the lapse of this same period, no legacies, if any, shall be handed over, and the legatees shall not be entitled to request them, save for pious donations for the soul of the deceased, or legacies in favour of Charitable Institutions. The successors shall have the inescapable obligation, even if, there only being one of them, no partition should be necessary, to write a detailed inventory of movable property and a description of any real estate property before a notary public.

Article 197. If, after the declaration of death, the absentee should appear or his existence should be proved, he shall recover his property in its current condition, and shall be entitled to the price of any properties sold, or to any properties acquired with such price, but may not claim from his successors any rents, fruits or products obtained from the properties of his estate, until the day of his presence or of the declaration of not having died.

CHAPTER 3º

On the Central Registry of absentees

Article 198. The Central and public absentee registry shall register:

  1. Judicial declarations of legal absence.
  2. Judicial declarations of death.
  3. Legitimate and appointed representations resolved by the courts and termination thereof.
  4. A mention, including all circumstances thereof, of the place, date, executors and authorising Notary Public of the inventories of movable property and description of immovable properties provided in this title.
  5. A mention, including all circumstances thereof, of the order conferring such representation, and of the place, date, executors and authorising Notary Public of any public deeds of transfer and encumbrance made, with judicial authorisation, by absentees’ legitimate or appointed representatives; and
  6. A mention, including all circumstances thereof, of the place, date, executors and authorising Notary Public, of the public deed of description or inventory of properties, and of the public deeds of partition and adjudication executed pursuant to the declaration of death, or the deeds of validation of the partitional papers, as the case may be.
TITLE IX

On incapacitation

Article 199. No one may be declared incapable save pursuant to a court judgement pursuant to the causes set forth in the Law.

Article 200. Persistent physical or mental illnesses or deficiencies which prevent a person from governing himself shall be causes for incapacitation.

Article 201. Minors may be incapacitated if a cause for incapacitation should apply to them and is reasonably expected to persist after they come of age.

Article 202 to 214. (Abrogated)

TITLE X

On guardianship, conservatorship and custody of minors and incapacitated persons

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 215. The custody and protection of the person and property, or only of the person or the property of minors or incapacitated persons shall be performed, where applicable, by means of the following:

  1. Guardianship.
  2. Conservatorship.
  3. The judicial defender.

Article 216. Guardianship duties constitute an obligation, shall be exercised for the benefit of the ward and shall be subject to the supervision of the judicial authority. The Judge, ex officio or at the request of any interested party, may also decree the measures and provisions provided in article 158 of this Code in all cases of guardianship or custody, de facto or pursuant to the law, of minors and incapable persons, to the extent that the latters’ interest should require it.

Article 217. One may only be excused from accepting guardianship positions in the cases provided in the Law.

Article 218. Court resolutions relating to guardianship and conservatorship positions must be registered with the Civil Registry. Such resolutions shall not be enforceable against third parties until the relevant entries have been registered.

Article 219. Registration of the resolutions mentioned in the preceding article shall be made pursuant to the notice served by the judicial authority forthwith to the Officer in charge of the Civil Registry.

Article 220. A person who, in the exercise of a guardianship duty, should suffer any damages without fault on his part shall be entitled to be compensated for such damages with charge to the property of the ward, if he should be unable to obtain compensation otherwise.

Article 221. Persons exercising any guardianship positions are forbidden from:

  1. Receiving gifts from the ward or his successors, until final approval of his management.
  2. Representing the ward when acting in his own name or on behalf of a third party in the transaction, there being a conflict of interest.
  3. Acquiring for valuable consideration property belonging to the ward or transferring property to the latter for valuable consideration.

CHAPTER 2º

On guardianship

SECTION ONE

On guardianship in general

Article 222. The following persons shall be subject to guardianship:

  1. Non-emancipated minors not subject to parental authority.
  2. Incapacitated persons when the judgement has ruled it.
  3. Persons subject to extended parental authority, upon termination thereof, save in the event that conservatorship should apply.
  4. Minors who are in a situation of neglect.

Article 223. Parents may, pursuant to a will or in a notarial public document, appoint a guardian, establish the guardian’ s supervision bodies, and designate the persons who are to propose them or order any provision relating to the person or property of their underage or incapacitated children. Likewise, any person with sufficient civil capacity, expecting to be judicially incapacitated in the future may, in a public notarial document, adopt any disposition relating to his person or property, including the designation of a guardian. The public documents mentioned in the present article shall be communicated ex officio by the authorising Notary Public to the Civil Registry, to be registered in the entry corresponding to the birth of the interested party. In incapacitation proceedings, the judge shall request a certificate from the Civil Registry and, as the case may be, from the registry of last wills, in order to ascertain the existence of any dispositions mentioned in this article.

Article 224. The provisions mentioned in the preceding article shall be binding on the Judge upon constituting the guardianship, unless the benefit of the minor or incapacitated person should require otherwise, in which case he shall issue a reasoned ruling.

Article 225. In the event of the existence of testamentary dispositions or provisions set forth in a notarial public document executed by the father and by the mother, respectively, both shall apply jointly, to the extent that they should be compatible. If they are not, the Judge shall adopt, in a reasoned ruling, those which he considers most convenient for the ward.

Article 226. Dispositions made in a will or notarial public document concerning guardianship shall be ineffective if, at the time of their adoption, the executor thereof should have been deprived of parental authority.

Article 227. A person disposing of property as a gift in favour of a minor or incapacitated person may establish the rules governing the administration thereof and designate the person or persons who are to exercise it. Duties not conferred upon the administrator shall correspond to the guardian.

Article 228. If the Public Prosecutor or the competent Judge should become aware of any person in the territory of their jurisdiction who ought to be subject to guardianship, the former shall request and the latter shall rule, even ex officio, the constitution of the guardianship.

Article 229. Relatives called to exercise guardianship and the person in whose custody the minor or incapacitated person should live shall be obliged to promote the constitution of the guardianship and, if they should fail to do so, they shall be joint and severally liable for any damages caused.

Article 230. Any person may make the Public Prosecutor or the judicial authority aware of the fact which determines the necessity of the guardianship.

Article 231. The Judge shall constitute the guardianship, after hearing the nearest relatives, any persons deemed convenient and, in any event, the ward, if he should have sufficient judgement, and always if he should be older than twelve.

Article 232. Guardianship shall be exercised under the supervision of the Public Prosecutor, who shall act ex officio or at the request of any interested party. He may require the guardian to inform him of the situation of the minor or incapacitated person and of the state of administration of the guardianship at any time.

Article 233. The Judge may establish, in the resolution constituting the guardianship or in another subsequent resolution, any supervision and control measures deemed suitable for the benefit of the ward. Likewise, he may at any time require the tutor to inform him on the situation of the minor or incapacitated person and the state of administration of the guardianship.

SECTION 2ª

On designation of the guardianship and appointment of the guardian

Article 234. The following persons shall be preferred to appoint a guardian:

  1. The person designated by the ward himself, in accordance with the second paragraph of article 223.
  2. The spouse who lives with the ward.
  3. The parents.
  4. The person or persons designated by the latter in their testamentary dispositions.
  5. The descendant, ascendant or sibling designated by the judge. Exceptionally, the Judge, in a reasoned resolution, may alter the order of the preceding paragraph or dispense with all persons mentioned therein, if the benefit of the minor or incapacitated person should require it. Integration in the family life of the guardian shall be deemed beneficial for the minor.

Article 235. In the absence of the persons mentioned in the preceding article, the Judge shall designate as guardian the person he considers to be most suitable, as a result of his relations with the ward and for the benefit of the latter.

Article 236. Guardianship shall be exercised by single guardian, except:

  1. Where, as a result of special circumstances in the person of the ward or his property, it should be convenient to separate into different positions a guardian for his person and a guardian for his property, each of whom shall act independently within the scope of his competence, although decisions concerning both must be taken jointly.
  2. Where guardianship corresponds to the father and mother, it shall be exercised by both jointly in an analogous manner to parental authority.
  3. If a person should be designated guardian of his sibling’s children and it should be considered convenient that the spouse of the guardian should also exercise such guardianship.
  4. Where the Judge should appoint as guardians the persons designated by the parents of the ward in a will or notarial public document to exercise the guardianship jointly.

Article 237. In the case of number 4 of the preceding article, if the testator should have expressly provided it, and, in the case of number 2, if the parents should request it, the Judge may, upon appointing the guardians, rule that they may exercise the powers inherent to the guardianship joint and severally. In the absence of such kind of appointment, in all remaining cases and without prejudice to the provisions of numbers 1 and 2, the powers of the guardianship entrusted to several guardians must be exercised by them acting jointly, but any acts performed with the agreement of the largest number shall be valid. In the absence of such agreement, the Judge, after hearing the guardians and the ward if he should have sufficient judgement, shall rule, without further appeal, whatever he deems convenient. In the event that disagreements should be repeated and should seriously hinder the exercise of the guardianship, the Judge may reorganise the operation thereof and even appoint a new guardian.

Article 237 bis. If the guardians should have been granted powers to act jointly and any of them should incur in an incompatibility or conflict of interest in respect of any acts or contracts, these may be performed by the other guardian or, if there should be several, by the rest of them jointly.

Article 238. In cases where, for any reason, any of the guardians should be removed, the guardianship shall subsist with the remaining guardians, unless otherwise expressly provided upon making the appointment.

Article 239. The guardianship of neglected minors shall correspond by operation of Law to the entity mentioned in article 172. Notwithstanding the foregoing, a guardian shall be appointed in accordance with the ordinary rules in the event of existence of persons who, as a result of their relations with the minor or other circumstances, may assume the guardianship for the benefit of the former. The public entity entrusted with the guardianship of incapable persons in the respective territory when none of the persons provided in article 234 should be appointed guardian, shall assume by operation of law the guardianship of the incapable person when the latter should be in a situation of neglect. A de facto situation of neglect shall be deemed to exist as a result of the breach or of the impossible or inadequate exercise of the duties attributed in accordance with the laws, when such incapable persons are deprived of the necessary moral or material assistance.

Article 240. If it should be necessary to designate a guardian for several siblings, the Judge shall try to appoint a single person.

Article 241. All persons who are in full possession of their civil rights and who do not incur in any of the grounds for ineligibility set forth in the following articles may be guardians.

Article 242. Likewise, not-for-profit legal entities whose purposes include the protection of minors and incapacitated persons may also be guardians.

Article 243. The following persons may not be guardians:

  1. Persons deprived or suspended from the exercise of parental authority or from the rights of providing custody and education, in whole or in part, pursuant to a judicial resolution.
  2. Persons who have been legally removed from a prior guardianship.
  3. Persons sentenced to a term of imprisonment, while they are serving their sentence.
  4. Persons sentenced for any crime which makes one justifiably suppose that they shall not perform the guardianship properly.

Article 244. The following persons may also not be guardians:

  1. Persons who incur in absolute de facto impossibility.
  2. Persons who have a manifest enmity with the minor or incapacitated person.
  3. Persons of bad conduct or those with no known way of making a living.
  4. Persons with a major conflict of interest with the minor or incapacitated person, who are currently in litigation against him or in an action concerning civil status or title to property, or those who should owe him considerable sums.
  5. Bankrupt persons who have not been discharged, save in the event that the guardianship should only be over the ward’s person.

Article 245. Likewise, persons expressly excluded by the father or the mother in their testamentary dispositions or those provided in a notarial document may also not be guardians, unless the Judge, in a motivated resolution, should rule otherwise for the benefit of the minor or the incapacitated person.

Article 246. The grounds for ineligibility contemplated in articles 243.4 and 244.4 shall not apply to guardians designated pursuant to the testamentary dispositions of the parents when the latter should have been aware of them at the time of making the designation, unless the Judge, in a reasoned resolution, should rule otherwise for the benefit of the minor or the incapacitated person.

Article 247. Persons who, after their designation, should incur in a legal ground for ineligibility, or should conduct themselves ill in the exercise of the guardianship, by breaching the duties inherent to their position or notorious ineptitude in the exercise thereof, or when serious and ongoing problems should arise in their life together with the ward, shall be removed from the guardianship.

Article 248. The Judge, ex officio or at the request of the Public Prosecutor, of the ward or of another interested person, shall rule the removal of the guardian, after hearing the latter if, being summoned, he should appear in court. Likewise, the ward shall be heard if he should have sufficient judgement.

Article 249. During the processing of the removal proceedings, the Judge may suspend the guardian from his duties and appoint a judicial defender for the ward.

Article 250. After the judicial declaration of removal, a new guardian shall be appointed as provided in this Code.

Article 251. The performance of guardianship duties may be excused when, for reasons of age, illness, personal or professional occupations, as a result of the absence of any kind of tie between the guardian and the ward or for any other reason, the exercise of the position should be exceedingly burdensome. Legal entities may be excused where they lack sufficient resources for the proper performance of the guardianship.

Article 252. The interested party who alleges an excuse must do so within fifteen days counting from the date on which he became aware of the appointment.

Article 253. The guardian may be excused from continuing to exercise the guardianship, provided that there should be a person meeting similar conditions to replace him, when, during the exercise thereof, any of the excuses contemplated in article 251 should arise.

Article 254. The provisions of the preceding article shall not apply to guardianship entrusted to legal entities.

Article 255. If the excuse should arise subsequently, it may be alleged at any time.

Article 256. While the resolution relating to the excuse is pending, the person who has alleged it shall be obliged to exercise his duties. If he should fail to do so, the Judge shall appoint a defender to replace him, and the replaced guardian shall be liable for any expenses caused by the excuse proceedings if the excuse should be rejected.

Article 257. The guardian designated pursuant to a will who should be excused from the guardianship at the time of his appointment shall lose any property left by the testator in consideration of the appointment.

Article 258. Upon admission of the excuse, a new guardian shall be appointed.

SECTION 3ª

On the exercise of the guardianshi

Article 259. The judicial authority shall vest the appointed guardian in his duties.

Article 260. The Judge may require the guardian to provide a bond securing the performance of his obligations and shall determine the form and amount thereof. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the public entity that undertakes the guardianship of a minor by operation of law or performs such guardianship as a result of a judicial resolution shall not be required to provide a bond.

Article 261. The Judge may also, at any time and for a just cause, render ineffective or amend in whole or in part any security provided.

Article 262. The guardian shall be obliged to make an inventory of the property of the ward within sixty days, counting from the date on which he should have taken possession of his duties.

Article 263. The judicial authority may extend this period in a reasoned resolution if there are grounds to do so.

Article 264. The inventory shall be made in court with the intervention of the Public Prosecutor, summoning any persons which the Judge deems convenient.

Article 265. Any money, jewellery, precious objects and securities or documents which, in the opinion of the judicial authority, should not remain in the guardian’s possession, shall be consigned in an establishment destined for such purposes. Any expenses resulting from the foregoing measures shall be borne by the ward’s property.

Article 266. The guardian who does not include in the inventory any credits held against the ward shall be deemed to waive his right thereto.

Article 267. The guardian is the representative of the minor or incapacitated person, save for such acts which the latter may perform by himself, pursuant to the express provision of the Law or of the incapacitation judgement.

Article 268. Guardians shall exercise their position in accordance with the personality of their wards, respecting their physical and psychological integrity. When it should be necessary they may request the assistance of the authority for the exercise of their guardianship.

Article 269. The guardian shall be obliged to watch over his ward and, in particular:

  1. To provide him with support.
  2. To educate the minor and provide him with a comprehensive upbringing.
  3. To promote the ward’s acquisition or recovery of civil capacity, and his insertion into society.
  4. To inform me Judge on an annual basis on the minor’s or incapacitated person’s situation and to render accounts of his administration on an annual basis.

Article 270. The single guardian and, as the case may be, the guardian of the ward’s property, is the legal administrator of the patrimony of the ward and is obliged to exercise such administration with the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias.

Article 271. The guardian shall require judicial authorisation:

  1. To confine the ward in a mental health or special education or training establishment.
  2. To dispose of or encumber real estate properties, commercial or industrial undertakings, precious objects and securities belonging to minors or incapacitated persons, or to enter into contracts or perform acts which are acts of disposal and are capable of registration. The sale of preferred subscription rights relating to shares shall be excepted from the above.
  3. To waive rights, and to settle or submit to arbitration any matters in which the ward should have an interest.
  4. To accept any inheritance without the benefit of inventory, or to reject the inheritance or liberalities.
  5. To make extraordinary expenses in property.
  6. To file a claim in the name of the ward, save for urgent matters or those involving a small amount.
  7. To lease property for a period exceeding six years.
  8. To lend and borrow money.
  9. To dispose as a gift of property or rights belonging to the ward.
  10. To assign to third parties any credits held by the ward against him, or to acquire for valuable consideration any credits against the ward held by third parties.

Article 272. Partition of the estate or the division of common property performed by the guardian shall not require judicial authorisation, but, once practised, shall require judicial approval.

Article 273. Before authorising or approving any of the acts included in the two preceding articles, the Judge shall hear the Public Prosecutor and the ward, if he should be older than twelve or if the Judge should deem it convenient, and shall commission any reports requested or any he deems suitable.

Article 274. The guardian shall be entitled to remuneration, provided that the assets of the ward should allow it. The Judge shall be in charge of setting the amount thereof and the manner of perceiving it, for which he shall take into account the work to be performed and the value and returns of the property, to the extent possible attempting to achieve an amount of the remuneration not lower than 4% or higher than 20% of the net yield of the property.

Article 275. Only parents, in their testamentary dispositions, may establish that the guardian is entitled to appropriate the fruits of the ward’s property in exchange for providing support, save if the Judge, in a duly reasoned resolution, should rule otherwise.

SECTION 4ª

On termination of the guardianship and final rendering of accounts

Article 276. Guardianship shall terminate:

  1. When the minor turns eighteen, unless he should have been judicially incapacitated previously.
  2. By adoption of the underage ward.
  3. By the death of the ward.
  4. By the granting of the benefit of legal age to the minor.

Article 277. Guardianship shall also terminate:

  1. If it should have arisen as a result of deprivation or suspension parental authority, when the holder of such authority should recover it.
  2. Upon issuance of the judicial resolution ending the incapacitation or amending the incapacitation judgement, replacing the guardianship by a conservatorship.

Article 278. The guardian shall continue in the exercise of his position if the underage ward should have been incapacitated before coming of age, in accordance with the provisions of the incapacitation judgement.

Article 279. Upon ceasing in his duties, the guardian must render general justified accounts of his administration to the judicial authority, within three months, which period may be extended by any period required if there is a just cause for it. The action to require the rendering of accounts shall be subject to statute of limitations after five years from expiration of the period to perform it.

Article 280. Before issuing its resolution approving the accounts, the Judge shall hear the new guardian or, as the case may be the conservator or the judicial defender, and the ward or his heirs.

Article 281. Necessary expenses pertaining to the rendering of accounts shall be borne by the ward.

Article 282. The balance of the general account shall accrue legal interest, in favour or against the guardian.

Article 283. If the balance should be in favour of the guardian, it shall accrue legal interest from the date on which payment should be demanded of the ward, after delivering his property to him.

Article 284. If the balance should be against the guardian, it shall accrue legal interest as from the approval of the account.

Article 285. Judicial approval shall not prevent the exercise of any legal remedies to which the guardian and the ward or their successors may be reciprocally entitled as a result of the guardianship.

CHAPTER 3º

On conservatorship

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 286. The following persons shall be subject to conservatorship:

  1. Emancipated minors whose parents should have died or become unable to exercise the assistance provided in the Law.
  2. Persons who have obtained the benefit of legal age.
  3. Persons declared to be prodigal.

Article 287. Likewise a conservator shall be appointed for persons whose incapacitation judgement or, as the case may be, judicial resolution amending the former, should place them under this form of protection, based on their degree of discernment.

Article 288. In the cases mentioned in article 286, conservatorship shall have no other purpose than the participation of the conservator in the act which the minors or prodigal persons cannot perform by themselves.

Article 289. Conservatorship over incapacitated persons shall have as its purpose the conservator’s assisting in those acts expressly provided in the judgement which established it.

Article 290. If the incapacitation judgement should not have specified those acts in which the intervention of the conservator should be necessary, such intervention shall be deemed to extend to the same acts for which guardians require judicial authorisation, according to this Code.

Article 291. The rules governing appointment, ineligibility, excuse and removal applicable to guardians shall apply to conservators. Bankrupt persons who have not been discharged may not be conservators.

Article 292. If the person subject to conservatorship should have previously been subject to guardianship, the same person who was his guardian shall hold the position of conservator, unless otherwise provided by the Judge.

Article 293. Legal acts performed without the intervention of the conservator, where the latter is required, shall be voidable at the request of the conservator himself or of the ward, in accordance with articles 1301 et seq. of this Code.

SECTION 2ª

On conservatorship over prodigal persons

Article 294 -296. [Abrogated]

Article 297. The acts of the person declared to be prodigal performed prior to the claim requesting declaration of prodigality may not be challenged on these grounds.

Article 298. [Abrogated]

CHAPTER 4º

On the judicial defender

Article 299. The judicial defender shall be appointed to represent and protect the interests of persons who are in any of the following cases:

  1. In the event of a conflict of interest on any matter between the minors or incapacitated persons and their legal representatives or the conservator. In the event of joint guardianship exercised by both parents, when a conflict of interest should exist only with one of them, the other, by operation of law and without the need for a special appointment, shall be entitled to represent and protect the minor or incapacitated person.
  2. In the event that, for any reason, the guardian or conservator should fail to perform his duties, until termination of the cause of such failure or designation of another person for the position.
  3. In all other cases provided in this Code.

Article 299 bis. From the time of the awareness that a person ought to be subject to guardianship and until the issuance of the judicial resolution ending the proceedings, the Public Prosecutor shall assume his representation and defence. In such case, where, as well as the care of his person, such person’s property must also be administered, the Judge may designate an administrator thereof, who must render account of his management upon termination thereof.

Article 300. The Judge shall, in voluntary jurisdiction proceedings, ex officio or at the request of the Public Prosecutor, of the minor himself or of any person capable of appearing at court, shall appoint as defender whoever he deems most suitable for the position.

Article 301. The same grounds for ineligibility, excuses and causes for removal applicable to guardians and conservators shall apply to the defender.

Article 302. The judicial defender shall have the powers granted by the Judge, to whom he must render account of his management upon termination thereof.

CHAPTER 5º

On de facto custody

Article 303. Without prejudice to the provisions of articles 203 and 228, when the judicial authority should become aware of the existence of a de facto carer, it may request him to inform on the situation of the person and property of the minor or the allegedly incapable person and his actions in connection therewith, and may also set any control and supervision measures deemed suitable.

Article 304. Acts performed by the de facto carer in the interest of the minor or allegedly incapable person may not be challenged if they are to his benefit.

Article 305. (No content)

Article 306. The provisions of article 220 concerning the guardian shall apply to the de facto carer.

Article 307 -313. (No content)

TITLE XI

On legal age and emancipation

Article 314. Emancipation takes place:

  1. By coming of age.
  2. By marriage of the minor.
  3. By concession granted by persons exercising parental authority.
  4. By concession granted by the court.

Article 315. Legal age begins upon turning eighteen. The date of birth shall be included in full for the calculation of legal age.

Article 316. Marriage shall result in emancipation by operation of law.

Article 317. Emancipation by concession granted by the persons exercising parental authority shall require that the minor has turned sixteen and consents to the emancipation. Such emancipation shall be executed pursuant to public deed, or by appearing before the Judge in charge of the Registry.

Article 318. The granting of emancipation must be registered in the Civil Registry, and until then shall not be effective vis-à-vis third parties. Emancipation may not be revoked once granted.

Article 319. A child older than sixteen who should live independently of his parents with their consent shall be deemed emancipated for all purposes. The parents may revoke this consent.

Article 320. The Judge may grant the emancipation of children older than sixteen if they should request it, after hearing the parents:

  1. When the person exercising parental authority should marry or live together in marital fashion with a person other than the other parent.
  2. When the parents should be separated.
  3. In the event of any cause which seriously hinders the exercise of parental authority.

Article 321. The Judge, after receiving the Public Prosecutor’s report, may also grant the benefit of legal age to the person subject to guardianship who is older than sixteen and who should request it.

Article 322. A person who is of legal age has capacity for all acts of civil life, save for the exceptions set forth in this Code for special cases.

Article 323. Emancipation qualifies the minor to govern his person and property as if he were of legal age, but until he comes of age the emancipated minor may not borrow money, encumber or dispose of immovable properties and commercial or industrial undertakings or objects of extraordinary value without his parentsconsent and, in the absence of both, without his conservator’s consent. The emancipated minor may appear in court by himself. The provisions of this article shall also apply to the minor who has judicially obtained the benefit of legal age.

Article 324. For the married minor to dispose of or encumber immovable properties, commercial or industrial undertakings or objects of extraordinary value which are common to both spouses, the consent of both spouses shall suffice if the other spouse should be of legal age; if the other spouse should also be underage, the consent of the parents or conservators of both shall also be required.

TITLE XII

On the Registry of Civil Status

Article 325. Acts relating to the civil status of persons shall be registered in the Registry destined for such purposes.

Article 326. The Registry of Civil Status shall comprise all registrations or entries of births, marriages, emancipations, recognitions and legalisations, deaths, naturalisations and civil residence, and shall be entrusted to the municipal Judges or other officers of the civil jurisdiction in Spain, and consular or diplomatic Agents abroad.

Article 327. The Registry records shall constitute proof of civil status, which may only be supported by other evidence in the event that the former should never have existed, or if the Registry books should have disappeared, or if they should be challenged before the Courts.

Article 328. It shall not be necessary to physically present the newborn before the officer in charge of the Registry to register the birth, a statement by the person obliged to register the birth being sufficient. This statement shall include all circumstances required by the law; and shall be signed by the author, or two witnesses at his request, if he should be unable to sign.

Article 329. In canonical marriages, the spouses shall be obliged to provide to the Public officer attending the wedding all necessary information for the registration thereof with the Civil Registry. Data relating to banns, impediments and dispensation thereof shall be excepted therefrom, and shall not be included in the entry.

Article 330. Naturalisations shall have no legal effect whatsoever until registration thereof with the Registry, whatever the supporting evidence and the date on which they should have been granted.

Article 331. Municipal and first instance Judges, as the case may be, may punish any infringements of the provisions relating to the Civil Registry which do not constitute a crime or misdemeanour with a 20 to 100 peseta fine.

Article 332. Law of June 17, 1870 shall continue to apply to the extent that it has not been amended by the preceding articles.

BOOK II

On property, ownership and its modifications

TITLE ONE

On the classification of property

PRELIMINARY PROVISION

Article 333. All things which are or may be subject to appropriation are considered movable or immovable property.

CHAPTER ONE

On immovable property

Article 334. The following are immovable property:

  1. Land, buildings, roads and constructions of all kinds which are joined to the ground.
  2. Trees and plants and pending fruits, while they are joined to the earth or form integral part of an immovable property.
  3. Anything which is joined to an immovable property on a fixed basis, so that it cannot be separated therefrom without breaking the material or impairing the object.
  4. Statues, reliefs, paintings or other objects of use or ornamentation, placed on buildings or on land by the owner of the immovable property, in such a way that reveals the purpose of uniting them to the land on a permanent basis.
  5. Machines, vessels, instruments or utensils destined by the owner of the property to the industry or undertaking performed in the building or landed property, and which are directly destined to satisfy the needs of the undertaking itself.
  6. Animal farms, dovecotes, beehives, fish tanks or analogous hatcheries, when the owner has placed or preserved them for the purpose of keeping them joined to the property or forming part thereof on a permanent basis.
  7. Fertilisers destined for the cultivation of landed property, located in the land where it is to be used.
  8. Mines, quarries and dumps, while their matter remains joined to the source, and flowing or stagnant waters.
  9. Docks and constructions which, even if they float, are destined, as a result of their purpose and conditions, to remain in a fixed point of the river, lake or coast.
  10. Administrative concessions to perform public works, and easements and other rights in rem pertaining to immovable property.

CHAPTER 2º

On movable property

Article 335. Property capable of appropriation not included in the preceding chapter and, generally, all property which may be transported from one point to another without impairment of the immovable object to which it is joined shall be deemed to movable property.

Article 336. Income or pensions, whether life or hereditary annuities, attached to a person or family, provided that they do not encumber with a real lien an immovable object, positions subject to disposal, contracts relating to public services and certificates and securities representing mortgage loans shall also be considered movable property.

Article 337. Movable property shall be fungible or non-fungible. Property which cannot be properly used according to its nature without being consumed shall belong to the first species; other property shall belong to the second species.

CHAPTER 3º

On property based on the persons to which it belongs

Article 338. Property is either of public domain or private property.

Article 339. The following property is of public domain:

  1. Property destined for public use, such as roads, canals, rivers, torrents, ports and bridges built by the State, riverbanks, shores, bays and other analogous property.
  2. Property exclusively owned by the State, which is not for public use, and which is destined to any public services or to the fostering of national wealth, such as city walls, fortresses and other civil works for the defence of the territory, and mines, until the granting of a concession thereon.

Article 340. All other property belonging to the State in which the circumstances expressed in the preceding article do not concur shall be deemed to private property.

Article 341. When property of public domain ceases to be destined to general use or to the requirements of the defence of the territory, it shall become part of the property owned by the State.

Article 342. Property belonging to the Royal Patrimony shall be governed by a specific statute, and, for all matters not provided therein, by the general provisions governing private property set forth in this Code.

Article 343. Property belonging to provinces and towns is divided into property for public use and patrimonial property.

Article 344. In provinces and villages, provincial and neighbourhood parks, squares, streets, public fountains and waters, promenades and general service public works paid by the same villages or provinces shall be deemed property for public use. All remaining property held by one or the other shall be patrimonial property and shall be governed by the provisions of this Code, save as otherwise provided in specific statutes.

Article 345. Besides the patrimonial property of the State, the Province and the Municipality, property individually or jointly belonging to individuals shall be private property.

Provisions common to the three preceding chapters

Article 346. When, in a provision of law, or pursuant to an individual statement, the expression immovable property or things, or movable property or things should be used, the property listed in Chapter 1 and in Chapter 2, respectively, shall be deemed comprised therein. When only the word “movables” should be used, money, credits, commercial paper, securities, jewellery, scientific or artistic collections, books, medals, weapons, clothing, horses or carriages and their harness, grain, stock and merchandise, or other things the principal destination whereof is not to furnish or adorn rooms shall not be deemed comprised therein, save in the event that the context of the law or individual provision clearly provides otherwise.

Article 347. Where in any sale, legacy, gift or other disposition in which there is a reference to movable or immovable property, possession or ownership thereof should be transferred with everything located therein, any cash, securities, credits and shares whose documents are located within the transferred property shall not be deemed comprised therein, unless the intention to extend the transfer to such securities and rights should be clearly expressed.

TITLE II

On ownership

CHAPTER ONE

On ownership in general

Article 348. Ownership is the right to enjoy and dispose of a thing, without greater limitations than those set forth in the laws. The owner shall have an action against the holder and the possessor of the property to claim it.

Article 349. Nobody may be deprived of his property save by the competent Authority and for on justified grounds of public utility, always after the relevant compensation. In the absence of this requirement, Judges shall protect and, as the case may be, restore such person’s possessions.

Article 350. The owner of a plot of land is the owner of the surface and of what is underneath it, and may perform therein any building works, plantations and excavations which may be convenient, save for any easements, and subject to the provisions of the laws relating to mining and waters and police regulations.

Article 351. Hidden treasure shall belong to the owner of the land in which it is found. Notwithstanding the foregoing, when the discovery should be made by chance in another’s property, or in State property, half shall correspond to the discoverer. If the objects discovered should be of interest to science or art, the State may acquire them for their fair value, which shall be distributed in accordance with the above provisions.

Article 352. For the purposes provided in the law, treasure shall be deemed to mean the hidden and ignored deposit of money, jewellery or other precious objects, whose legitimate ownership is unknown.

CHAPTER 2º

On the right of accession

GENERAL PROVISION

Article 353. Ownership of the property shall, pursuant to the right of accession, entitle the owner to everything produced thereby, or naturally or artificially joined or incorporated thereto.

SECTION ONE

On the right of accession in respect of the products of the property

Article 354. The following shall belong to the owner:

  1. Natural fruits.
  2. Industrial fruits.
  3. Civil fruits.

Article 355. Natural fruits are the spontaneous produce of the land, and the brood and other products of animals. Industrial fruits are those produced by plots of land of any kind as a result of cultivation or work. Civil fruits are the rent on buildings, the lease on land and the amount of perpetual or life annuities or other analogous income.

Article 356. The person who receives the fruits has the obligation of paying the expenses made by a third party for their production, collection and preservation.

Article 357. Only fruits which are manifest or born shall be deemed natural or industrial fruits. As relates to animals, it will suffice if they are in their mother’s womb, even if they are not yet born.

SECTION 2ª

On the right of accession in respect of immovable property

Article 358. Anything built, planted or sown on another’s plot of land and any improvements or repairs made therein shall belong to the owner thereof, subject to the provisions of the following articles.

Article 359. Any works, sowings and plantations shall be presumed made by the owner at his expense, unless there is evidence to the contrary.

Article 360. The owner of the land who performs therein, by himself or by another, plantations, constructions or works with another’s materials, must pay the value thereof; and, if he should have acted in bad faith, he shall also be obliged to compensate any damages. The owner of the materials shall be entitled to remove them only if he can do so without impairment of the construction, or without destroying the plantations, constructions or works performed.

Article 361. The owner of the land on which another should build, sow or plant in good faith shall be entitled to appropriate the works, sowings or plantations, after paying the compensation set forth in articles 453 and 454, or to make the person who manufactured or planted it pay the price of the land, and the person who sowed it, the corresponding rent.

Article 362. The person who builds, plants or sows in bad faith on another’s land shall lose what he has built, planted or sown without being entitled to compensation.

Article 363. The owner of the land on which another has built, planted or sown in bad faith may request the demolition of the works or the uprooting of the plantation and sowing, returning things to their original condition at the expense of the person who built, planted or sowed.

Article 364. In the event of bad faith not only on the part of the person who builds, sows or plants on another’s land, but also on the part of the owner of the latter, the rights of one and the other shall be the same as if both had acted in good faith. The owner shall be deemed to have acted in bad faith whenever the deed should have been performed in his full sight, with his awareness and forbearance, and without opposition.

Article 365. If the materials, plants or seeds should belong to a third party who has not acted in bad faith, the owner of the land must be liable for their value on a subsidiary basis, only in the event that the person who used them does not have sufficient property to pay. This provision shall not apply if the owner should exercise the right provided in article 363.

Article 366. The accretion gradually obtained by riverbanks as a result of the water currents shall belong to the owners of the land and properties adjoining such banks.

Article 367. The owners of landed properties adjoining ponds or lagoons do not acquire the land uncovered by the natural decrease of the waters, nor lose the land flooded by the waters in extraordinary rises.

Article 368. Where the current of a river, stream or torrent should segregate from the bank of a landed property a known portion of land and should transport it to another property, the owner of the property to which the segregated part belonged shall remain the owner thereof.

Article 369. Trees which are uprooted and transported by the current of the waters shall belong to the owner of the land to which they are taken, if the former owners should not claim them within one month. If they should claim them, they must pay any expenses incurred in gathering them in or putting them in a safe place.

Article 370. Riverbeds which are abandoned as a result of natural variations in the course of the waters shall belong to the owners of the lands of the riverbanks, in their respective lengths. If the abandoned riverbeds should have separated plots of land belonging to different owners, the new dividing line shall be equidistant from such properties.

Article 371. Islands formed in the seas adjacent to the coasts of Spain and in navigable and floatable rivers belong to the State.

Article 372. Where a navigable and floatable river should vary its direction naturally, and open a new course in a private landed property, this course shall become part of the public domain. The owner of the property shall recover it when the waters should leave it dry again, either naturally or as a result of any legally authorised works for such purposes.

Article 373. Islands which are formed in rivers by successive accumulation of debris belong to the owners of the nearest banks or shores, or to those of both banks if the island should be in the middle of the river, and the island shall then be divided longitudinally in half. If a single island thus formed should be further away from one bank than from the other, the owner of the nearest bank shall own all of it.

Article 374. When the river current should divide it into two branches, leaving a plot of land or part of it isolated, its owner shall remain owner thereof. He shall likewise keep it if a portion of land is separated from the property by the current.

SECTION 3ª

On the right of accession in respect of movable property

Article 375. When two movable things belonging to different owners are joined in such a manner that they form a single thing, without bad faith, the owner of the principal thing shall acquire the accessory thing, compensating the former owner for its value.

Article 376. Between two things which have been incorporated together, the thing to which the other has been joined as an adornment, or for its use or perfection shall be deemed the principal thing.

Article 377. If, pursuant to the rule of the preceding article, it should be impossible to determine which of two things incorporated together is the principal thing, the thing of greater value shall be deemed principal, and, between two things of equal value, the one with the greater volume. In paintings and sculpture, in writings, printed documents, engravings and lithographs, the table, the metal, the stone, the canvas, the paper or the parchment shall be deemed accessory.

Article 378. When the things joined together can be separated without impairment, the respective owners may demand their separation. However, when the thing joined for the use, embellishment or perfection of another is much more precious than the principal thing, the owner of the former may demand separation thereof, even if the thing to which it was incorporated suffers any impairment.

Article 379. When the owner of the accessory things has incorporated it in bad faith, he shall lose the incorporated thing and shall be obliged to compensate the owner of the principal thing for any damages suffered. It the owner of the principal thing should have acted in bad faith, the owner of the accessory thing shall be entitled to choose between the former paying its value or the separation of the thing belonging to him, even if it should be necessary to destroy the principal thing; in both cases, compensation of damages shall also apply. If either owner should have performed the incorporation in the other’s sight, with his awareness and forbearance, and without opposition, their respective rights shall be determined as if they had acted in good faith.

Article 380. Whenever the owner of the materials employed without his consent should be entitled to compensation, he may request that this consist of delivery of a thing equal to the one employed in species and value, and all circumstances thereof, or the price thereof, according to expert appraisal.

Article 381. If, at the will of their owners, two things of the same or different species should be mixed, or if the mix should take place by chance, and in this last case the things should not be capable of separation without impairment, each owner shall acquire a proportional right to the part which corresponds to it based on the value of the things mixed or commingled.

Article 382. If, at the will of one owner only, but in good faith, two things of equal or different species should be mixed or commingled, the rights of the owners shall be determined according to the provisions of the preceding article.

If the person who performed the mix or commingling acted in bad faith, he shall lose the thing belonging to him which was mixed or commingled, and shall also be obliged to compensate any damages caused to the owner of the thing with which he performed the mix.

Article 383. The person who, acting in good faith, has used another’s materials in whole or in part to create a new work, shall be entitled to appropriate the work, compensating the owner of the materials for their value. If the materials should be more precious or of greater value than the work for which it was used, the owner of the former may, at his discretion, keep the new species, after compensating the value of the work, or request compensation for the materials. If bad faith should have intervened in the creation of a new species, the owner of the materials shall be entitled to keep the work without paying the author anything, or to request the latter to compensate him for the value of the materials and any damages caused.

CHAPTER 3º

On survey and marking of boundaries

Article 384. Every owner shall be entitled to mark the boundaries of his property, summoning the owners of the adjoining plots. Holders of rights in rem shall have the same right.

Article 385. The marking of boundaries shall be performed in accordance with the deeds held by each owner and, in the absence of sufficient title, as results from the possession of the adjoining owners.

Article 386. If the deeds should fail to determine the limits or area belonged to each owner, and the matter should not be capable of resolution in reference to possession or by another means of evidence, the marking of boundaries shall be performed by distributing in equal parts the land subject to dispute.

Article 387. If the deeds of the adjoining owners should indicate a greater or lower area than that which comprises the whole of the land, the excess or shortfall shall be distributed proportionally.

CHAPTER 4º

On the right to enclose rural properties

Article 388. Any owner may enclose or fence his landed properties by means of walls, ditches, live or dead hedges, or in any other way, without prejudice to any easements constituted thereon.

CHAPTER 5º

On ruinous buildings and trees which threaten to fall down

Article 389. If a building, wall, column or any other construction should threaten to collapse, its owner shall be obliged to undertake its demolition or perform the necessary works to prevent its collapse. If the owner of the ruinous building should not perform this, the Authorities may have it demolished at his expense.

Article 390. Where a sturdy tree should threaten to fall down in such a manner that it may cause damage to another’s landed property or to any passersby on a public or private road, the owner of the tree shall be obliged to uproot and remove it; and, if he should fail to do so, it shall be done at his expense by order of the Authorities.

Article 391. In the case of the two preceding articles, if the building or tree should fall down, the provisions of articles 1907 and 1908 shall apply.

TITLE III

On joint ownership

Article 392. There is joint ownership where ownership of a thing or right belongs pro indiviso to several persons. In the absence of a contract or of specific regulations, joint ownership shall be governed by the provisions of this title.

Article 393. The participants’ share in both benefits and charges shall be proportional to their respective interest. Portions corresponding to the participants of the community shall be presumed equal, unless evidence to the contrary is provided.

Article 394. Each participant may use the things owned in common, provided that he does so in accordance with their destination and in a manner which does not damage the interests of the community, or prevent coparticipants from using them according to their right.

Article 395. Every co-owner shall be entitled to oblige the participants to contribute to preservation expenses of the common thing or right. Only the person who renounces his part of the property shall be exempt from this obligation.

Article 396. The different flats or premises in a building, or the parts thereof capable of independent use, as a result of having their own exit to communal elements of the former or to the public road, may be subject to separate ownership, which shall carry an inherent co-ownership right over the communal elements of the building, which are all those necessary for its suitable use and enjoyment, such as the land, surface, foundations and roofs; structural elements, among them pillars, beams, frameworks and load-bearing walls; facades, with the external adornments of terraces, balconies and windows, including their look or configuration, the closing elements which form them and their external coatings; the foyer, stairs, caretaker’s cubicles, corridors, passageways, walls, pits, patios, wells and the spaces destined for lift shafts, tanks, meters, telephone or other communal services or facilities, even those which should be of exclusive use; lifts and facilities, conduits and pipes for drainage purposes and for the supply of water, gas or electricity, even for solar energy; and for hot water, heating, air conditioning, ventilation or smoke extraction; for fire detection and prevention purposes; for entry-phones and other security facilities of the buildings, and shared aerials and other facilities for audiovisual or telecommunications services, until they reach private spaces; easements and any other material or legal elements which are indivisible as a result of their nature or destination. The parts which are co-owned shall in no event to be capable of division, and may only be disposed of, encumbered or attached together with the exclusively owned specific portion to which they are inseparably attached. In the event of disposal of a flat or premises, the owners of the rest shall not be entitled to rights of pre-emption or first refusal. This form of ownership shall be governed by specific statutory provisions and, to the extent that they should permit, by the will of the interested parties.

Article 397. None of the co-owners may make alterations in the thing owned in common without the othersconsent, even though advantages for all of them should be had as a result thereof.

Article 398. The agreement of the majority of the participants shall be required for the administration and better enjoyment of the thing owned in common. There shall be no majority unless the resolution is passed by participants representing the majority of the interests constituting the subject matter of the joint ownership. In the absence of a majority, or if the resolution passed thereby should be seriously detrimental to the persons interested in the thing owned in common, the Judge shall provide what he deems suitable, at the request of any party, even by appointing an Administrator. When a part of the thing should belong exclusively to a participant or to some of them, and another should be owned in common, the provisions of the preceding paragraph shall only apply to the latter.

Article 399. Each co-owner shall have full ownership of his part and of the fruits and benefits corresponding to him, and may, as a result thereof, dispose of it, assign it or mortgage it and even delegate its use to another, save if they should be personal rights. However, the effect of the disposal or the mortgage in relation with the co-owners shall be limited to the portion awarded thereto in the division upon termination of the joint ownership.

Article 400. No co-owner shall be obliged to remain in the joint ownership. Each of them may request any time the division of the thing owned in common. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the covenant to preserve the thing undivided for a specific period, which shall not exceed ten years, shall be valid. This period may be extended by a new covenant.

Article 401. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the co-owners may not request the division of the thing owned in common when, if they should do so, it should become useless for its intended destination. If it should be a building whose characteristics should allow it, at the request of any of the co-owners, the division may take place by awarding separate flats or premises, with their attached communal elements, in the manner provided in article 396.

Article 402. The division of the thing owned in common may be performed by the interested parties, or by arbitrators or amicable compounders appointed at the will of the participants. If it should be performed by arbitrators or amicable compounders, they must create portions which are proportional to the rights of each of them, avoiding to the extent possible any supplements in cash.

Article 403. Creditors or assignees of the participants may attend the division of the thing owned in common and challenge any division performed without their attendance. However, they may not challenge the division which has already been completed, save in the event of fraud, or in the event that it should have taken place notwithstanding their formally filed opposition to prevent it, and always excepting the rights of the debtor or of the assignor to uphold its validity.

Article 404. Where the thing should be in essence indivisible, and the co-owners should not agree on its being awarded to one of them, compensating the rest, it shall be sold, and its price shall be distributed among them.

Article 405. The division of the thing owned in common shall not prejudice a third party, who shall retain any mortgage rights, easements or other rights in rem belonging to him prior to the division. Personal rights belonging to a third party against the joint ownership shall likewise remain in force notwithstanding the division.

Article 406. The rules concerning the partition of the estate shall apply to division between the participants in the joint ownership.

TITLE IV

On certain special properties

CHAPTER ONE

On water

SECTION ONE

On ownership of water

Article 407. The following waters are of public domain:

  1. Rivers and their natural courses.
  2. Continuous or discontinuous waters of springs and streams flowing in their natural courses, and the riverbeds.
  3. Waters which spring in a continuous or discontinuous manner in land which is of public domain.
  4. Lakes and lagoons created by nature in public land, and their rivulets.
  5. Rainwater which flows on cliffs or watercourses, where the course is also of public domain.
  6. Underground waters in public land.
  7. Water found in areas where public engineering works are taking place, even if performed by a concessionaire.
  8. Waters which spring in a continuous or discontinuous manner from the private property of individuals, of the State, the province or villages, from the time they exit such properties.
  9. Any excess from fountains, drains and public establishments.

Article 408. The following waters are private property:

  1. Continuous or discontinuous waters which spring from privately owned plots of land, while they remain in such land.
  2. Lakes and lagoons and their rivulets, created by nature in such plots of land.
  3. Underground waters located in such plots of land.
  4. Rainwater which falls therein, while it does not exit their boundaries.
  5. The beds of continuous or discontinuous running waters formed by rainwater, and those of any streams which flow through land and properties which are not public domain. In any irrigation channel or aqueduct, the water, the bed, the boxes and the banks shall be considered an integral part of the plot of land or the building for which the waters are destined. The owners of the plots of land through which or through whose boundaries the aqueduct should pass may not allege ownership thereof, nor any right to use its bed or banks, unless it is based on deeds of ownership which express the right or ownership claimed thereby.

SECTION 2ª

On the use of public waters

Article 409. The use of public waters is acquired:

  1. By administrative concession.
  2. By twenty years’ prescription. The limits of the rights and obligations of such uses shall be, in the first case, as results from the terms of the concession and, in the second, from the manner and form in which the waters have been used.

Article 410. Any concession to use waters is understood without prejudice to the rights of third parties.

Article 411. The right to use public waters shall terminate as a result of expiration of the concession and by lack of use for twenty years.

SECTION 3ª

On the use of private waters

Article 412. The owner of a plot of land in which a continuous or discontinuous spring or stream should be born may use its waters while they pass through it; but the remaining waters shall become public, and their use shall be governed by the special Law of Waters.

Article 413. Private property over rivulets of rainwater shall not authorise to perform tasks or works to change their course to the detriment of a third party, nor such works whose destruction may cause such detriment by the force of the current.

Article 414. Nobody may enter private property to search for waters or use them without licence from the owners.

Article 415. The ownership rights held by the owner of a plot of land over the waters which spring from it shall not prejudice any rights legitimately acquired to use them by the owners of lower plots.

Article 416. Any owner of a plot of land shall be entitled to build within his property deposits to preserve rainwater, provided that he does not cause any detriment to the public or to a third party.

SECTION 4ª

On underground waters

Article 417. Only the owner of a plot of land or another person with his licence may investigate underground waters therein. The investigation of underground waters in land belonging to the public domain may only be done with an administrative licence.

Article 418. Waters surfaced in accordance with the special Law of Waters belong to the person who brought them to the surface.

Article 419. If the owner of the waters surfaced should abandon them to their natural course, they shall become part of the public domain.

SECTION 5ª

General provisions

Article 420. The owner of a plot of land in which defensive works have been performed to contain the water or where, as a result of the variation of their course, it should be necessary to build them again, shall be obliged, at his discretion, to make any necessary repairs or constructions or to tolerate the performance thereof, without detriment to him, by the owners of the plots of land which may experience or be manifestly exposed to damage.

Article 421. The provisions of the preceding article shall apply to the case where it is necessary to clear any plot of land from materials whose accumulation or collapse should prevent the course of the waters with damage or danger to a third party.

Article 422. All owners who participate in the benefit resulting from the works mentioned in the two preceding articles shall be obliged to contribute to the expenses thereof in proportion to their interest. Those who should have caused the damage by their fault shall be liable for any expenses.

Article 423. Ownership and use of waters belonging to corporations or individuals shall be subject to the Expropriation Law for reasons of public utility.

Article 424. The provisions of this title shall not prejudice rights acquired prior hereto, or the private ownership of the owners of waters, irrigation canals, springs or streams pursuant to which they use, sell or exchange them as private property.

Article 425. For all that is not expressly provided in this chapter, the provisions of the special Law on Waters shall apply.

CHAPTER 2º

On minerals

Article 426. Any Spaniard or foreigner may freely perform in land of public domain samplings or excavations not exceeding 10 m in breadth or depth for the purpose of discovering minerals; but he must give prior notice thereof to the local Authorities. On private property no sampling may be performed without the authorisation of the owner or his representative.

Article 427. The limits of the rights mentioned in the preceding article, prior formalities and conditions for the exercise thereof, designation of materials to be considered minerals and determination of the rights corresponding to the owner of the land and to the discoverers of the minerals in the event of a concession, shall be governed by the special Mining Law.

CHAPTER 3º

On intellectual property

Article 428. The owner of a literary, scientific or artistic work shall be entitled to exploit it and dispose of it at will.

Article 429. The intellectual property law sets forth the persons to whom this right belongs, the manner of its exercise and its duration. In cases not provided or resolved by such specific statute, the general rules provided in this Code relating to property shall apply.

TITLE V

On possession

CHAPTER ONE

On possession and its species

Article 430. Natural possession is the holding of a thing or the enjoyment of a right by a person. Simple possession is that same holding or enjoyment joined with the intention of having the thing or right as one’s own.

Article 431. Possession is exercised on things or rights by the same person who holds and enjoys them, or by another in his name.

Article 432. Possession of property and rights may be held in one of two capacities: either as owner, or as holder of the thing or right, to preserve or enjoy them, while ownership belongs to another person.

Article 433. The person who is unaware that there is a defect which invalidates his title or manner of acquisition shall be deemed a possessor in good faith. Otherwise he shall be deemed a possessor in bad faith.

Article 434. Good faith is always presumed, and the person asserting a possessor’s bad faith shall have the burden of proving it.

Article 435. Possession acquired in good faith shall not lose this nature save if and when there are acts which evidence that the possessor is not unaware that he possesses the thing improperly.

Article 436. It shall be presumed that possession continues to be enjoyed in the same capacity in which it was acquired, unless there is evidence to the contrary.

Article 437. Only things and rights which are capable of appropriation may be subject to possession.

CHAPTER 2º

On acquisition of possession

Article 438. Possession is acquired by material occupation of the thing or right possessed, or by the latter becoming subject to our will, or pursuant to the acts and legal formalities set forth to acquire such right.

Article 439. Possession may be acquired by the same person who is to enjoy it, his legal representative, his attorney or by a third party without mandate; but this last case possession shall not be deemed to have been acquired until the person in whose name the act of possession has been verified should ratify it.

Article 440. Possession of hereditary property shall be deemed transferred to the heir without interruption from the time of death of the decedent, in the event that the former should finally accept the inheritance. The person who validly rejects an inheritance shall be deemed never to have possessed it.

Article 441. In no event may possession be acquired violently where there is a possessor who opposes this. A person who believes he has an action or right to deprive another of holding a thing, if the holder refuse to deliver it, must request the assistance of the competent Authority.

Article 442. A person succeeding by inheritance shall not suffer the consequences of his principal’s defective possession, if it is not proven that he was aware of the defects which affected it; however, the effects of possession in good faith shall only benefit him from the date of his decedent’s death.

Article 443. Minors and incapacitated persons may acquire possession over things; but they shall require the assistance of their legitimate representatives to use the rights arisen in their favour as a result of such possession.

Article 444. Acts which are merely tolerated, and those which are performed in a clandestine fashion and without the possessor of the thing being aware of them, or with violence, shall not affect possession.

Article 445. Possession, as a fact, may not be acknowledged in favour of two different persons, other than in cases of pro indiviso. If a dispute should arise on the fact of possession, the current possessor shall be preferred; if there should be two possessors, the oldest shall be preferred; if the dates of possession should be the same, the possessor who presents a title shall be preferred; and, all these conditions being equal, the thing shall be deposited or consigned with the court, until the possession or ownership thereof is determined pursuant to the corresponding proceedings.

CHAPTER 3º

On the effects of possession

Article 446. Any possessor is entitled to be respected in his possession; and, if he should be disturbed in it, he must be protected or such possession must be restored to him by the means set forth in procedural laws.

Article 447. Only possession acquired and enjoyed in the capacity of owner may serve as title to acquire ownership.

Article 448. The possessor in the capacity of owner has a legal presumption of possessing based on just title, and cannot be obliged to exhibit it.

Article 449. Possession of a real property shall involve possession of the furniture and objects located therein, unless it should be expressed or evidenced that they are to be excluded.

Article 450. Each participant of thing possessed in common shall be deemed to have possessed exclusively the part which, upon dividing the thing, should be allocated to him, during the whole period during which it remained undivided. Interruption in the possession of the whole or part of the thing possessed in common shall be to the equal detriment of all.

Article 451. The possessor in good faith shall make any fruits received his own unless he is legally interrupted in his possession. Natural and industrial fruits shall be deemed received from the time on which they arise or are separated. Civil fruits shall be deemed accrued on a daily basis, and shall belong to the possessor in good faith in such proportion.

Article 452. If at the time on which good faith should cease, any natural or industrial fruits should be pending, the possessor shall be entitled to recover any expenses made for their production, and also to the part of the liquid product of the harvest proportional to the time of his possession. Charges shall be allocated pro rata in the same manner among two possessors.

The owner of the thing may, if he wishes to, grant the possessor in good faith the power to finish cultivation and gathering of any fruits which are pending, as compensation for the part of the cultivation expenses and the liquid proceeds which belong to him; the possessor in good faith who for any reason does not wish to accept this grant, shall forfeit the right to be compensated in another manner.

Article 453. Necessary expenses shall be paid to every possessor; but only the possessor in good faith may retain the thing until satisfaction thereof. Useful expenses shall be paid to the possessor in good faith, who shall be entitled to the same right of retention, and the person who should have prevailed in the dispute over possession may choose to satisfy the amount of the expenses, or pay the increase in value of the thing as a result thereof.

Article 454. Purely luxurious or merely recreational expenses shall not be payable to the possessor in good faith; but he may take away any adornments with which he has embellished the principal thing if it should not suffer any impairment, and if his successor in possession does not prefer to pay the amount of the relevant expenses.

Article 455. The possessor in bad faith shall pay any fruits received and those which the legitimate possessor could have received, and shall only be entitled to be repaid any necessary expenses made for the preservation of the thing. Expenses made for luxurious and recreational improvements shall not be paid to the possessor in bad faith; but he may take the objects in which such expenses have been invested, provided that the thing suffers no impairment, and that the legitimate possessor does not prefer to keep them by paying their value at the time of becoming their possessor.

Article 456. Improvements resulting from nature or from time shall always inure to the benefit of the person who has won possession.

Article 457. The possessor in good faith shall not be liable for the impairment or loss of thing possessed, outside cases where he should be proved to have acted with malice. The possessor in bad faith shall be liable for impairment or loss in any case, and even for those caused by force majeure when he should have maliciously delayed delivery of the thing to its legitimate possessor.

Article 458. The person who obtains possession is not obliged to pay improvements which have ceased to exist upon acquiring the thing.

Article 459. The current possessor who proves having previously possessed the thing shall be presumed to have possessed it also during the time in between, unless evidence to the contrary is provided.

Article 460. The possessor may lose his possession:

  1. By abandonment of the thing.
  2. By assignment made in favour of another for valuable consideration or as a gift.
  3. By total destruction or loss of the thing, or as a result of its becoming beyond the bounds of commerce.
  4. By another’s possession, even against the will of the former possessor, if such new possession should have lasted more than one year.

Article 461. Possession of movable property shall not be deemed lost while it remains in the power of the possessor, even if the latter should accidentally be unaware of its whereabouts.

Article 462. Possession of immovable property and rights in rem shall only be deemed to have been lost or transferred, for the purposes of prescription to the detriment of a third-party, subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Law.

Article 463. Acts relating to possession, performed or consented by the person possessing a thing belonging to another as mere holder, to enjoy it or retain it in any capacity, shall not bind the owner nor inure to his detriment, unless the latter should have expressly granted to the former powers to perform them or should subsequently ratify them.

Article 464. Possession of movable property, acquired in good faith, is equivalent to title. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any person who has lost movable property or has been deprived of it illegally may claim it from its possessor. If the possessor of the lost or stolen movable property should have acquired it in good faith at a public sale, the owner may not have it restored to him without reimbursing the price paid for it. The owner of things pawned in Pawnshops created with governmental authorisation may not recover them, irrespective of who pawned them, without first reimbursing the Establishment the amount of the pledge and any interest payable. As relates to things acquired in an Exchange, fair or market, or from a legally established trader who regularly trades in analogous objects, the provisions of the Commercial Code shall apply.

Article 465. Wild animals are only possessed while they are in one’s power; domesticated or tamed animals shall be deemed tame or domestic pets, if they are in the habit of returning to the home of their possessor.

Article 466. A person who lawfully recovers the possession improperly lost shall be deemed for all purposes which may inure to his benefit to have enjoyed it without interruption.

TITLE VI

On usufruct, on use and on habitation

CHAPTER ONE

On usufruct

SECTION ONE

On usufruct in general

Article 467. Usufruct entitles one to enjoy another’s property with the obligation to preserve its form and substance, unless otherwise authorised by the deed pursuant to which it was created or the law.

Article 468. Usufruct is created by law, by the will of individuals expressed in acts inter vivos or in a last will and testament and by prescription.

Article 469. Usufruct may be created in respect of all or part of the fruits of the thing, in favour of one or several persons, simultaneously or successively, and in any event from or until a certain day, absolutely or subject to a condition. It may also be created over a right, provided that it is not a strictly personal or a non-transferable right.

Article 470. The rights and obligations of the usufructuary shall be as determined in the deed constituting the usufruct; in the event of absence or insufficiency thereof, the provisions contained in the two following sections shall be observed.

SECTION 2ª

On the rights of the usufructuary

Article 471. The usufructuary shall be entitled to receive all natural, industrial and civil fruits of the property subject to the usufruct. He shall be considered a stranger in respect of any treasures found on the property.

Article 472. Natural or industrial fruits which are pending at the start of the usufruct shall belong to the usufructuary. Those which are pending at end of the usufruct shall belong to the owner. In the above cases, the usufructuary, at the start of the usufruct, shall have no obligation to pay the owner any expenses made; but the owner shall be obliged to pay at the end of the usufruct, with the proceeds of the pending fruits, ordinary expenses incurred for cultivation, sowing and other similar expenses made by the usufructuary. The provisions of this article shall not prejudice the rights of a third party acquired at the start or at the end of the usufruct.

Article 473. If the usufructuary should have leased the land or properties given in usufruct and the latter should end prior to the end of the lease, he or his heirs and successors shall only receive the proportional part of the rent payable by the lessee.

Article 474. Civil fruits shall be deemed perceived per day, and shall belong to the usufructuary in proportion to the duration of the usufruct.

Article 475. If the usufruct is created over the right to receive a regular income or allowance, either in cash, or in fruits, or the interest on bearer notes or securities, each instalment shall be deemed products or fruits of the former right If it should consist of the enjoyment of the profits of a share in an industrial or commercial undertaking, without a fixed distribution date, such profit shall have the same consideration. In both cases the products shall be distributed as civil fruits, and shall be allocated as provided in the preceding article.

Article 476. In a plot of land which contains mines, the product of any mines discovered, granted or exploited at the start of the usufruct shall not correspond to the usufructuary unless expressly granted in the deed which created it, or unless the usufruct is universal. The usufructuary may, however, extract stones, lime and plaster from quarries for any repairs or works which he should be obliged to perform or which should be necessary.

Article 477. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, in a legal usufruct the usufructuary may exploit any mines discovered, granted or exploited existing in the property, keeping half of the resulting profits after deducting any expenses, which shall be paid by halves with the owner.

Article 478. The condition of usufructuary shall not deprive the person who holds it from the right granted to every person by the Mining Law to discover and obtain the concession of any mines existing in plots of land subject to usufruct, in the manner and under the conditions set forth in the same Law.

Article 479. The usufructuary shall be entitled to enjoy any increase in the thing subject to usufruct by accretion, any easements in its favour and generally all benefits inherent thereto.

Article 480. The usufructuary may use himself the thing subject to usufruct, lease it to another and dispose of his right of usufruct, even as a gift, but all contracts entered into as such usufructuary shall be terminated at

the end of the usufruct, save the lease of rural properties, which shall be deemed to subsist during the agricultural year.

Article 481. If the usufruct should comprise things which, although not consumed, are slowly impaired pursuant to wear and tear, the usufructuary shall be entitled to avail himself of them, using them in accordance with their purpose, and shall only be obliged to return them at the end of the usufruct in their current condition; but with the obligation to compensate the owner for any impairment suffered as a result of his wilful misconduct or negligence.

Article 482. If the usufruct should comprise things which cannot be used without consuming them, the usufructuary shall be entitled to avail himself of them with the obligation to pay their value upon expiration of the usufruct, if it should have been estimated. If it should not have been estimated, he shall be entitled to return them in the same amount or quality or to pay their current price at the end of the usufruct.

Article 483. The usufructuary of vineyards, olive groves or other trees or bushes may avail himself of any dead stumps and even of any which should be broken or uprooted by accident, with the obligation to replace them with others.

Article 484. If, as a result of an extraordinary accident or event, the vines, olive groves or other trees or bushes should have disappeared in such a considerable number that their replacement should be impossible or excessively burdensome, the usufructuary may leave the dead, fallen or broken stumps at the owner’s disposal and require the latter to remove them and leave the land bare.

Article 485. The usufructuary of woodland shall enjoy all the benefits produced thereby according to its nature. In timber or construction timber woodland, the usufructuary may perform any ordinary cutting or felling usually performed by the owner and, in the absence thereof, shall perform it in accordance with local custom as relates to manner, portions and season. In any event any felling or cutting shall be performed so as not to cause a detriment to the preservation of the property. In timber nurseries the usufructuary may perform the necessary selective felling so that the timber which remains may develop conveniently. Other than as provided in the preceding paragraphs, the usufructuary may not fell trees by the root other than to replace or improve any of the things subject to usufruct, and in this case, he shall give the owner prior notice of the need to perform such works.

Article 486. The usufructuary of an action to claim a plot of land or a right in rem or movable property shall be entitled to exercise it and to force the owner of the action to grant him powers of representation for such purpose and to provide any available means of evidence. If, as a result of the exercise of the action, he should acquire the thing subject to claim, the usufruct shall only be limited to the fruits, and the ownership shall be vested in the owner.

Article 487. The usufructuary may perform in the property constituting the subject matter of the usufruct any useful or recreational improvements deemed convenient, provided that he does not alter its form or substance; however, he shall not be entitled to compensation for this purpose. He may, notwithstanding the foregoing, remove such improvements, if it should be possible to do so without detriment to the property.

Article 488. The usufructuary may offset any damages to the property against any improvements performed therein.

Article 489. The owner of property held by another pursuant to usufruct may dispose of it, but not alter its form or substance, nor perform anything in it which may be to the detriment of the usufructuary.

Article 490. The usufructuary of part of the thing possessed in common shall exercise all rights corresponding to the owner thereof relating to its administration and to the perception of fruits or interest. If the joint ownership should cease as a result of division of the thing possessed in common, the usufructuary shall hold the usufruct of the part awarded to the owner or co-owner.

SECTION 3ª

On the obligations of the usufructuary

Article 491. The usufructuary, prior to beginning his enjoyment of the property, shall be obliged to do the following:

  1. To make an inventory of the property, summoning the owner or his legitimate representative for such purposes, obtaining appraisals of movable property and describing the condition of immovable property.
  2. To provide a bond, undertaking to comply with the obligations provided in this section.

Article 492. The provisions of number 2 of the preceding article shall not apply to the seller or donor who has reserved usufruct over the property sold or given, nor to parents who are usufructuaries of property belonging to their children, nor to the surviving spouse in respect of his legal share in usufruct, unless the parents or the spouse should subsequently marry.

Article 493. The usufructuary, whatever his title to the usufruct, may be excused of the obligation to make an inventory or provide a bond, where no detriment to anybody should result therefrom.

Article 494. If the usufructuary should fail to provide a bond in those cases where it is obliged to do so, the owner may request that any immovable property be placed under administration, that any movable property be sold, that any commercial paper, nominative or bearer credit facilities be registered in as account entries or be deposited in a Bank or public establishment and that any equity or cash sums and the price of disposal of any movable property be invested in blue-chip securities. The interest on the price of movable property and of commercial paper and securities and the products of the property placed under administration shall belong to the usufructuary. If the owner should prefer it, he may also, while the usufructuary does not provide a bond or if he is excused from doing so, retain in his possession the property subject to usufruct as administrator thereof, with the obligation to deliver to the usufructuary the liquid products thereof, after deducting the sum agreed or judicially decreed in consideration of such administration.

Article 495. If the usufructuary who has not provided a bond should demand, under oath, delivery of any furniture necessary for his use, and that he be provided with habitation for himself and his family in a house included in the usufruct, the Judge may assent to this request, after consulting the circumstances of the case. The same shall be understood in respect of any instruments, tools and other movable property necessary for the business he conducts. If the owner should wish that certain movable property not be sold because of its artistic merit or sentimental value, he may request delivery thereof, securing payment of the legal interest on its appraisal value.

Article 496. Upon delivery of the bond by the usufructuary, he shall be entitled to all products from the date on which he ought to have begun to receive them, in accordance with the deed which created the usufruct.

Article 497. The usufructuary must care for the things given in usufruct as an orderly paterfamilias.

Article 498. The usufructuary who disposes of or leases his usufruct right shall be liable for the impairment suffered by the things subject to usufruct as a result of the fault or negligence of the person replacing him.

Article 499. If the usufruct should be constituted over a herd or drove of livestock, the usufructuary shall be obliged to replace with the calves the heads of cattle which ordinarily die on an annual basis, or which should be missing as a result of harmful rapacious animals. If the livestock over which the usufruct should have been constituted should perish completely, without fault by the usufructuary, as a result of contagion or another uncommon event, the usufructuary shall meet his obligations by delivering to the owner any remains which should have been saved from this misfortune. If the herd should perish in part, also by accident and without fault by the usufructuary, the usufruct shall continue over the part which is preserved. If the usufruct should relate to sterile cattle, it shall be considered, as regards its effects, as if it had been constituted over a fungible thing.

Article 500. The usufructuary shall be obliged to make ordinary repairs required by the things given in usufruct. Ordinary repairs shall be deemed to mean those required as a result of any impairments or damage resulting from the natural use of things which are indispensable for their preservation. If he should fail to perform them after being demanded to do so by the owner, the latter may perform them by himself at the usufructuary’s expense.

Article 501. Extraordinary repairs shall be borne by the owner. The usufructuary is obliged to give the latter notice thereof in case of urgent need to perform them.

Article 502. If the owner should perform extraordinary repairs, he shall be entitled to request the usufructuary to pay legal interest on the amount invested therein for the duration of the usufruct. If he should fail to perform them when they should be indispensable for the subsistence of the thing, the usufructuary may perform them; but he shall be entitled to demand the owner, upon expiration of the usufruct, to pay the increase in value of the property as a result of such works. If the owner should refuse to satisfy such amount, the usufructuary shall be entitled to retain the thing until he is reimbursed with its products.

Article 503. The owner may perform any works and improvements of which the property subject to usufruct is capable, or new plantations therein if it should be a rural property, provided that the value of the usufruct should not be reduced or the right of the usufructuary damaged as a result of such acts.

Article 504 . Payment of charges and annual contributions and of those which are deemed to tax the fruits shall be borne by the usufructuary for the duration of the usufruct.

Article 505. Contributions imposed during the usufruct directly over the capital shall be borne by the owner. If the latter should have paid them, the usufructuary must pay interest corresponding to the sums paid for such purpose and, if the usufructuary should have advanced payment thereof, he must receive the amount thereof at the end of the usufruct.

Article 506. If the usufruct should be constituted over a whole patrimony, and, upon its creation the owner should have debts, the provisions of articles 642 and 643 in respect of gifts shall apply, both as relates to the subsistence of the usufruct and to the usufructuary’s obligation to pay them. The same provision shall apply in the event that the owner should be obliged, upon creation of the usufruct, to pay regular amounts, even if the principal thereof should be unknown.

Article 507. The usufructuary may claim by himself any matured credits which form part of the usufruct if he should have provided or should provide the corresponding bond. If he should be excused from providing a bond or should have been unable to provide it, or if the bond provided should not be sufficient, he shall require the owner’s authorisation to collect such credits, or that of the Judge in the absence of the former. The usufructuary who has provided a bond may give the capital any destination he deems convenient. The usufructuary who has not provided a bond must place such capital so as to generate interest by common consent with the owner; in the absence of an agreement between both, with judicial authorisation; and, in any event, with sufficient guarantees to preserve the integrity of the capital subject to usufruct.

Article 508. The universal usufructuary must pay in full the legacy consisting of a life annuity or support allowance. The usufructuary of a proportional share of the inheritance shall pay it in proportion to his share. In neither of these two cases shall the owner be obliged to reimburse him. The usufructuary of one or more specific things shall only pay the legacy when the annuity or allowance should be specifically created over the former.

Article 509. The usufructuary of a mortgaged property shall not be obliged to pay the debts for the security whereof the mortgage was established. If the property should be attached or judicially sold for the payment of the debt, the owner shall be liable to the usufructuary for the latter’s losses by reason thereof.

Article 510. If the usufruct should be for the whole or a proportional share of an inheritance, the usufructuary may anticipate the sums corresponding to the property subject to usufruct for the payment of the debts of the estate: and shall be entitled to require the return thereof, without interest, from the owner, upon expiration of the usufruct. If the usufructuary should refuse to make such an advance, the owner may request that the part of the property subject to usufruct necessary to pay such sums be sold, or pay them out of his own money, and in this last case shall be entitled to request from the usufructuary the corresponding interest.

Article 511. The usufructuary shall be obliged to give the owner notice of any third-party acts of which it should become aware capable of injuring the rights of ownership, and, if he should fail to do so, shall be liable for any damages, as if they had been caused by his fault.

Article 512. The usufructuary shall bear the expenses, costs and rulings of any litigation relating to the usufruct.

SECTION 4ª

On ways of extinguishing the usufruct

Article 513. The usufruct shall be extinguished:

  1. By the death of the usufructuary.
  2. By expiration of the period for which it was constituted, or performance of the condition subsequent set forth in the deed creating the usufruct.
  3. By the coincidence of the usufruct and ownership in the same person.
  4. By the renunciation of the usufructuary.
  5. By total loss of the thing constituting the subject matter of the usufruct.
  6. By termination of the right of the person who constituted the usufruct.
  7. By prescription.

Article 514. If the thing given in usufruct should be lost only in part, such right shall continue in the remaining particle.

Article 515. A usufruct may not be created in favour of a village or Corporation or Company for more than 30 years. If one should have been created, and before such time the village should be abandoned, or the Corporation or the Company dissolved, the usufruct shall be extinguished by reason thereof.

Article 516. The usufruct granted for the time it takes a third party to reach a certain age shall subsist for the preset number of years, even if the third party should die beforehand, unless such usufruct should have been expressly granted only on the basis of the existence of such person.

Article 517. If the usufruct should be created over a property of which a building forms part and such building should be destroyed in any way, the usufructuary shall be entitled to enjoy the land and materials. The same shall happen when the usufruct should be created only over a building and the latter should be destroyed. However, in such case, if the owner should wish to build another building, he shall be entitled to occupy the land and to avail himself of the materials, being obliged to pay the usufructuary, for the duration of the usufruct, the interest on the sums corresponding to the value of the land and materials.

Article 518. If the usufructuary should purchase with the owner insurance over a plot of land given in usufruct, in the event of loss, the former shall continue in the enjoyment of the new building if it should be built, or shall receive the interest on the insurance indemnity if it should not be in the owner’s interest to rebuild. If the owner should have refused to contribute to the insurance on the plot of land, and the usufructuary should have purchased it by himself, the latter shall be entitled to receive the insurance indemnity in full in the event of loss, but with the obligation to invest it in rebuilding the property. If the usufructuary should have refused to contribute to the insurance, and the owner should have purchased it by himself, the latter shall receive the insurance indemnity in full in the event of loss, always excepting the right granted to the usufructuary in the preceding article.

Article 519. If the thing subject to usufruct were expropriated for public use, the owner shall be obliged either to replace it with another of equal value and under analogous conditions, or to pay the usufructuary the legal interest on the amount of the indemnity for the duration of the usufruct. If the owner should choose the latter option, he must guarantee payment thereof.

Article 520. The usufruct shall not be extinguished as a result of misuse of the thing subject to usufruct; however, if such abuse should cause considerable damage to the owner, the latter may request delivery of the thing, undertaking to pay the usufructuary on an annual basis the net product thereof, after deducting any expenses and the fee set for the performance of his administration duties.

Article 521. The usufruct created in favour of several persons alive at the time of its creation shall not be extinguished until the death of the last surviving person.

Article 522. Upon expiration of the usufruct, the thing subject to usufruct shall be delivered to the owner, save for the right of retention assisting the usufructuary or his heirs for any disbursements to be repaid. Upon verification of such delivery, the bond or mortgage shall be cancelled.

CHAPTER 2º

On use and habitation

Article 523. The rights and obligations of the usuary and of the person entitled to habitation shall be regulated by the deed constituting these rights; and, in the absence thereof, by the following provisions.

Article 524. Use entitles a person to receive, out of the fruits of a thing belonging to another, those which are sufficient for the needs of the usuary and his family, even if the latter should increase in size. Habitation entitles a person to occupy in another’s house the necessary rooms for himself and the persons in his family.

Article 525. The rights of use and habitation may not be leased or transferred to another pursuant to any kind of title.

Article 526. A person entitled to use of a livestock flock or drove may benefit from the young, milk and wool thereof to the extent sufficient for consumption by himself and his family, and of the manure necessary to fertilise the land cultivated by him.

Article 527. If the usuary should consume all fruits of a thing belonging to another, or the person entitled to habitation should occupy the whole house, he shall be obliged to pay cultivation expenses, ordinary repairs for the purposes of preserving the thing and to pay contributions, in the same way as the usufructuary. If he should only receive a part of the fruits or live in part of the house, he must not contribute anything, provided that the owner is left with a part of the fruits or benefits sufficient to cover expenses and charges. If they should not be sufficient, the former shall pay the shortfall.

Article 528. The provisions governing usufruct shall apply to the rights of use and habitation to the extent that they do not oppose the provisions of the present chapter.

Article 529. The rights of use and habitation shall be extinguished on the same grounds as usufruct, and also as a result of serious abuse of the thing and the rooms.

TITLE VII

On easements

CHAPTER ONE

On easements in general

SECTION ONE

On the different kind of easements which may be established over properties

Article 530. An easement is an encumbrance imposed on an immovable property for the benefit of another belonging to a different owner. The immovable property in whose favour the easement is constituted is called dominant tenement; the property suffering it is the servient tenement.

Article 531. Easements may also be established for the benefit of one or several persons or a community to whom the encumbered property does not belong.

Article 532. Easements may be continuous or discontinuous, apparent or non-apparent. Continuous easements are those the use whereof is or may be incessant, without intervention of any human act. Discontinuous easements are those which are used in longer or shorter intervals, and which depend on human acts. Apparent easements are those which are publicly announced and are continuously in sight by external signs which reveal the use and benefit thereof. Non-apparent easements are those which present no external indication whatsoever of their existence.

Article 533. Easements can also be positive or negative. A positive easement is that which imposes on the owner of the servient tenement the obligation to allow something to be done or to do it himself, and a negative easement is that which forbids the owner of the servient tenement to do something which would be lawful without the easement.

Article 534. Easements are inseparable from the property to which they actively or passively belong.

Article 535. Easements are indivisible. If the servient tenement is divided between two or more persons, the easement shall not be amended, and each of them shall be obliged to tolerate it in the part which corresponds to him. If the dominant tenement is divided between two or more persons, the titleholder of each portion may use the easement in full, not altering the place of its use, or otherwise making it more burdensome.

Article 536. Easements are established pursuant to the law or to the will of the owners. The former shall be called statutory easements and the latter voluntary easements.

SECTION 2ª

On the ways of acquiring easements

Article 537. Continuous and apparent easements are required pursuant to title, or by 20 years’ prescription.

Article 538. In order to acquire by prescription the easements mentioned the preceding article, possession shall be counted: for positive easements from the date on which the owner of the dominant tenement or the person who has taken advantage of the easement should have begun to exercise it over the servient tenement; and in negative easements, from the date on which the owner of the dominant tenement should have forbidden, pursuant to a formal act, the owner of the servient tenement to perform the deed which would be lawful without the easement.

Article 539. Continuous and non-apparent and discontinuous easements, whether or not apparent, may only be acquired pursuant to title.

Article 540. Only a public deed of acknowledgement by the owner of the servient tenement, or a final judgement may compensate for the lack of a deed constituting the easement which cannot be acquired by prescription.

Article 541. The existence of an apparent sign of the easement between two properties, established by the owner of both, shall be considered, in the event of disposal of one of them, to constitute title for the easement to continue on an active and passive basis, unless, at the time of the split in ownership of both properties, the owner should express otherwise in the deed of disposal of either of them, or if such sign should be removed before execution of the public deed.

Article 542. When an easement is established, all rights necessary for its use are deemed to have been granted.

SECTION 3ª

Rights and obligations of the owners of the dominant tenement and the servient tenement

Article 543. The owner of the dominant tenement may perform, at his expense, in the servient tenement the necessary works for the use and preservation of the easement, but without altering it or making it more burdensome. He must choose for such purposes the most convenient time and manner in order to cause the least possible inconvenience to the owner of the servient tenement.

Article 544. If there should be several dominant tenements, the owners of all of them shall be obliged to contribute to the expenses mentioned in the preceding article, in proportion to the benefit derived by each of them from the works. The owner who does not wish to contribute may be exonerated by renouncing the easement for the benefit of the rest. If the owner of the servient tenement should in any way use the easement, he shall be obliged to contribute to such expenses in the aforementioned proportion, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 545. The owner of the servient tenement may not in any way impair the use of an existing easement. However, if, as a result of the place originally allocated, or the manner initially established to use the easement, it should become very inconvenient for the owner of the servient tenement or should prevent him from performing therein important works, repairs or improvements, it may be altered at his expense, provided that he offers another place or manner which is equally convenient, and which does not result in any detriment to the owner of the dominant tenement or to those who are entitled to use the easement.

SECTION 4ª

On the ways of extinguishing easements

Article 546. Easements are extinguished:

  1. By coincidence in the same person of ownership of the dominant tenement and the servient tenement.
  2. By failure to use it for 20 years. This period shall begin to count, for discontinuous easements, from the date on which the easement should have ceased to be used; and, for continuous easements, from the date on which an act contrary to the easement should have taken place.
  3. Where the properties should be in such a condition that the easement cannot be used; but the latter shall revive if, thereafter, the condition of the properties should allow its use, unless, when such use should again be possible, sufficient time should have elapsed for prescription purposes, in accordance with the provisions of the preceding number.
  4. Upon arrival of the relevant date or the performance of the condition, if the easement should be temporary or conditional.
  5. By renunciation of the owner of the dominant tenement.
  6. By redemption agreed between the owner of the dominant tenement and the servient tenement.

Article 547. The manner in which the easement is performed may be subject to prescription just as the easement itself, and in the same way.

Article 548. If the dominant tenement should belong to several persons in common, use of the easement by one of them shall prevent prescription in respect of the rest.

CHAPTER 2º

On statutory easements

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 549. Easements imposed by the law are for purposes of public benefit or in the interest of individuals.

Article 550. All matters concerning easements established for public or communal utility shall be governed by the specific statutes and regulations which establish them and, in the absence thereof, by the provisions of the present title.

Article 551. Easements imposed by the law in the interest of individuals or for reasons of private benefit shall be governed by the provisions of the present title, without prejudice to the provisions of any statutes, regulations and general or local urban or rural policing ordinances. These easements may be amended by agreement between the interested parties where this is not forbidden by the law or results in detriment to a third party.

SECTION 2ª

On easements relating to waters

Article 552. Lower plots are subject to receiving the waters which naturally descend, without human intervention, from higher plots, and the soil or stones dragged in their wake. The owner of the lower plot may not perform works which prevent the easement, nor may the owner of the higher property perform works which make it more burdensome.

Article 553. Riverbanks, even if they are private property, are subject to the easement of public use in an area amounting to three metres of their whole length and margins for the general interests of navigation, flotation, fishing and salvage. Plots of land adjoining the banks of navigable or floatable rivers are also subject to the easement of providing a tow path exclusively for river navigation and flotation purposes. If it should be necessary to occupy private land for such purpose, the corresponding compensation shall be paid.

Article 554. Where the diversion or taking of waters from a river or stream, or the use of other continuous or discontinuous currents should require building a dam, and the person who is to construct it does not own the banks or land on which he needs to support it, he may establish a easement to set up a dam support bracket, after paying the corresponding compensation.

Article 555. Mandatory easements for the drawing of waters or water troughs for animals may only be imposed on grounds of public benefit in favour of any village or hamlet, after paying the corresponding compensation.

Article 556. Mandatory easements for the drawing of waters or water troughs for animals entail the obligation by the servient tenements to give a right of way to persons and cattle after the point where they are to be used, and the compensation must extend to this service.

Article 557. Any person who wishes to avail himself of the water available to him for a property belonging to him is entitled to make it pass through intermediate plots of land, with the obligation to compensate their owners, and also the owners of the lower plots d to which the waters may be filtered or may fall.

Article 558. A person who purports to use the rights granted in the preceding article shall be obliged:

  1. To evidence that he can avail himself of the water and that it is sufficient for the use to which it is destined.
  2. To demonstrate that the right of way required is the most convenient and least burdensome for third parties.
  3. To compensate the owner of the servient tenement in the manner determined by statutes and regulations.

Article 559. Aqueduct easements cannot be imposed for reasons of private interest over buildings, their patios or rooms, or over existing gardens or vegetable gardens.

Article 560. The aqueduct easement shall not prevent the owner of the servient tenement from closing and fencing it, or from building over the same aqueduct in a manner which does not prejudice the latter or make it impossible to effect the necessary repairs and cleaning thereof.

Article 561. For the purposes provided in the law, the aqueduct easement shall be deemed continuous and apparent, even if the passage of water is not constant, or if its use depends on the needs of the dominant tenement, or of watering turns set in terms of days or hours.

Article 562. A person who, in order to water or improve his property, should need to build a lock or divider in the channel where he is to receive the water, may require the owners of the margins to allow construction thereof, after paying any damages, including damages suffered by such owners and other farmers as a result of the new easement.

Article 563. The creation, scope, form and conditions of the water easements mentioned in this section shall be governed by the specific statute on this issue in all matters not provided in this Code.

SECTION 3ª

On the right of way

Article 564. The owner of the property or land located between others belonging to third parties without exit to a public road is entitled to demand a right of way through the neighbouring properties, after paying the corresponding compensation. If this easement should be created so that its use may be continuous to serve all of the dominant tenement’s needs by establishing a permanent path, the compensation shall consist of the value of the land occupied, and of the damage caused to the servient tenement. When it should be limited to the right of way necessary for the cultivation of a property located between others and to collect its harvest through the servient tenement without a permanent path, the compensation shall consist of paying the damages caused by the encumbrance.

Article 565. The right of way must be given through the point which is least detrimental to the servient tenement and, to the extent that it can be conciliators with the preceding rule, through the shortest distance from the dominant tenement to the public road.

Article 566. The width of the right of way shall be sufficient to meet the needs of the dominant tenement.

Article 567. If, after acquisition of property as a result of sale, exchange or partition, such property should be enclosed between others belonging to the seller, exchanger or co-participant, the latter shall be obliged to give right of way without compensation, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 568. If the right of way granted to a property should cease to be necessary as a result of its owner’s having joined it to another which is adjacent to the public road, the owner of the servient tenement may request termination of the easement, returning what he received as compensation. The same shall be understood in the event that a new path should be opened giving access to the property.

Article 569. If it should be indispensable to pass materials through another’s plot of land or to place scaffolding or other objects pertaining to building works in order to build or repair any buildings, the owner of the latter plot shall be obliged to consent, receiving compensation corresponding to any damage suffered.

Article 570. Existing rights of way for farm animals, known as passages for sheep, trails for cattle or footpaths or any others, as well as water trough, resting place and shelter easements, shall be governed by the ordinances and regulations of the industry and, in the absence thereof, by the uses and customs of the land. Without prejudice to any rights legitimately acquired, the sheep passage cannot in any event exceed the width of 75 m, the cattle trail 37 m 50 cm and the footpath 20 m. Where it should be necessary to establish a mandatory right of way or water trough easement for livestock, the provisions of this section and of articles 555 and 556 shall apply. In this case its width may not exceed 10 m.

SECTION 4ª

On party wall easements

Article 571. Party wall easements shall be governed by the provisions of this title and by local ordinances and uses to the extent that they do not oppose them, or where nothing is provided herein.

Article 572. A party wall easement shall be presumed to exist, unless there is title, external sign or evidence to the contrary:

  1. In the walls dividing two adjoining buildings up to the common point of elevation.
  2. In the dividing walls of gardens or yards within a village or in the country.
  3. In the walls, fences and live hedges that divide rural properties.

Article 573. An external sign contrary to the party wall easement shall be deemed to exist:

  1. Where the dividing walls of buildings have windows or openings.
  2. Where the dividing wall is on one side plumb and square in the whole of its facing, and on the other has the same appearance in its higher end, edging outwards in its lower particle.
  3. Where the whole wall is built on land belonging to one of the properties, and not halfway between the two adjacent properties.
  4. Where it bears the load of the beams, floors and structures of one of the properties and not of the adjacent one.
  5. Where the dividing wall between patios, gardens and properties is built so that the coping pours water into one of the properties only.
  6. Where the dividing wall, built of masonry, should have stones, called passing stones, which from distance to distance should protrude from the surface only on one side and not on the other.
  7. Where properties adjacent to others that are defended by live hedges or fences are not enclosed.

In all these cases, ownership over the walls, fences or hedges shall be deemed to belong exclusively to the owner of the property or land in whose favour the presumption has been established based on any of the aforementioned signs.

Article 574. Ditches or irrigation channels opened between properties are also presumed to be party walls, unless a otherwise evidenced pursuant to title or sign. There is a sign contrary to the existence of a party wall where the soil or brush taken to dig the ditch or to clean it is on one side only, in which case ownership of the ditch shall belong exclusively to the owner of the property in whose favour this external sign appears.

Article 575. The reparation and construction of party walls and maintenance of party wall fences, live hedges, ditches and channels shall be borne by all owners of the properties in whose favour the party wall is deemed to exist, in proportion to the rights pertaining to each of them. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any owner may be dispensed from contributing to this burden by renouncing the party wall easement, save in the event that the party wall should support a building belonging to him.

Article 576. If the owner of the building supported by a party wall should wish to demolish it, he may likewise renounce the party wall easement, but he shall bear all repairs and building works necessary to prevent, in this particular instance only, any damage which the demolition may cause to the party wall.

Article 577. Any owner may raise the party wall at his expense, compensating any damages caused by the building works, even if they are temporary. He shall also bear the wall’s preservation expenses, to the extent that it has increased in height, or its foundations have been deepened compared to its previous condition; likewise, he must pay a compensation for the increase in the expense of preserving the party wall as a result of the increase in height or depth. If the party wall should not withstand the higher elevation, the owner who wishes to raise it shall have the obligation to reconstruct it at his expense; and, if it should be necessary to make it thicker for such purposes, he must provide the space from his own land.

Article 578. The remaining owners who have not contributed to increase the wall’s height, depth or thickness, may, however, acquire party wall rights therein, by paying proportionally the amount of the building works and half of the value of the land on which the increased thickness was built.

Article 579. Each owner of a party wall may use it in proportion to his right in the joint ownership; he may, therefore, support his building on the party wall, or introduce beams up to half of its width, without, however, preventing the communal and respective use of the remaining party wall owners. In order to use this right, the party wall owner must previously obtain the consent of the other parties with an interest in the party wall; and, if he should fail to obtain it, the necessary conditions required for the new building not to harm the rights of such other parties shall be set by experts.

SECTION 5ª

On the easement of light and view

Article 580. No owner may make in a party wall any window or opening without the other’s consent.

Article 581. The owner of a non-party wall adjacent to another’s property may open therein windows or make openings to receive light at the height of the top joists or immediately next to the roof, of the size of a 30 centimetre square and in any event with an inset iron grille on the wall and a wire net.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, the owner of the land or property adjacent to the wall on which the openings should have been made may close them if he acquires the party wall, unless otherwise agreed. He may also cover them by building on his land or by building a wall adjacent to the one on which such opening should have been made or window opened.

Article 582. It is forbidden to open windows with straight-line views, or balconies or other similar outcroppings over a neighbouring property, unless there is two metres distance between the wall on which they are built and such property. It is also forbidden to have sideways or oblique views over the same property unless there is a 60 centimetre distance.

Article 583. The distance is mentioned in the preceding article shall be counted, for straight-line views, from the exterior line of the wall for openings which do not include outcroppings, from the line of such outcroppings, if there should be any, and, for oblique views, from the line of separation between both properties.

Article 584. The provisions of article 582 shall not apply to buildings separated by a public road.

Article 585. In the event of acquisition, pursuant to any title, of the right to have direct views, balconies or windowed balconies over the adjoining property, the owner of the servient tenement may not built at less than three metres’ distance, which measurement shall be taken as indicated in article 583.

SECTION 6ª

On drainage of buildings

Article 586. The owner of the building shall be obliged to build his roofs or covering so that rainwater falls on his own land, or on the street or a public place, and not on his neighbour’s land. Even if it should fall on his own land, the owner shall be obliged to collect the waters so that they do not cause detriment to the adjoining property.

Article 587. The owner of the property which bears the easement of receiving rainwater from the roofs may build receiving the waters on his own roof or providing them with another way out, in accordance with local ordinances or customs, in a manner which does not result in any encumbrance or detriment for the dominant tenement.

Article 588. Where the yard or patio of a house is located between others and it should not be possible to find a way out for rainwater collected in such house through the same, the establishment of a drainage easement may be demanded, letting the waters pass through the point of the adjoining plots of land where its exit is easiest, and building the drain conducts in the manner which causes least detriment to the servient tenement, after paying the corresponding compensation.

SECTION 7ª

On distances and intermediate works for certain constructions and plantations

Article 589. It is forbidden to build or plant near strongholds or fortresses without submitting to the conditions required by the specific statutes, ordinances and regulations on the matter.

Article 590. Nobody may build near a wall belonging to another or a party wall wells, drains, aqueducts, ovens, forges, chimneys, stables, deposits of corrosive materials, artefacts which moved by steam engine, or

machines which, by themselves, or as a result of their products are dangerous or harmful, without keeping the distances provided in applicable regulations and local customs, and without performing the necessary protective works, subject to the conditions provided by the same regulations as to the manner of performing them. In the absence of regulations, the precautions deemed necessary to prevent any damage to the neighbouring properties or buildings shall be taken, after the issuance of an expert report.

Article 591. No trees may be planted near another’s land but at the distance authorised by local ordinances or local custom and, in the absence thereof, at a distance of two metres from the line dividing the properties, if the plantation concerns tall trees, and at a distance of 50 centimetres if the plantation is of bushes or small trees. Any owner is entitled to request the uprooting of any trees which hereinafter should be planted at a shorter distance from his property.

Article 592. If the branches of certain trees should extend over a neighbouring property, gardens or patios, the owner of the latter shall be entitled to claim that they be cut, to the extent that they extend over his property and, if the roots of neighbouring trees should extend into land belonging to another, the owner of the land into which they have been introduced may cut them himself within his property.

Article 593. Trees existing in a live hedge constituting a party wall are also presumed to constitute a party wall, and either owner is entitled to request their removal. Trees which serve as landmarks shall be excepted from the foregoing, and may not be uprooted unless it is with the common consent of the neighbouring owners.

CHAPTER 3º

On voluntary easements

Article 594. Any owner of a property may establish therein any easements he deems convenient, in the manner and form he deems fit, provided that he does not infringe the laws or public policy.

Article 595. The owner of the property whose usufruct belongs to another may impose on it, without the usufructuary’s consent, any easements which do not detriment the usufruct’s rights.

Article 596. Where one person holds direct ownership over a property and the other its useful ownership, no perpetual voluntary easement may be created upon it without the consent of both owners.

Article 597. The consent of all co-owners shall be required to impose an easement over a pro indiviso property. The granting of easement made only by some of them shall be suspended until the last of all participants or co-owners should grant it. However, the granting made by one of the co-owners separately from the others bind the grantor and his successors, even if they should be legatees, not to prevent the exercise of the right granted.

Article 598. The deed of the easement and, as the case may be, possession of an easement acquired by prescription, shall determine the rights of the dominant tenement and the obligations of the servient tenement. In the absence thereof, the easement shall be governed by the provisions of the present title which apply to it.

Article 599. If the owner of the servient tenement should have undertaken, upon creation of the easement, to bear the expense of the necessary works for the use and preservation thereof, he may be released from this encumbrance by abandoning his plot of land to the owner of the dominant tenement.

Article 600. Communal grazing easements may hereinafter only be created by express granting on the part of the owners, resulting from a contract or a last will and testament, and not in favour of universal group of individuals or over a universal group of properties, but in favour of specific individuals and over landed properties which are also specific and determined. The easement created in accordance with this article shall be governed by its deed of creation.

Article 601. Communal grazing on public land, whether belonging to Municipalities or to the State, shall be governed by administrative laws.

Article 602. If there should be communal grazing rights between the neighbours of one or several villages, the owner who fences a property with a wall or hedge shall release it from the easement. However, the remaining easements constituted on the property shall remain in force. The owner who fences his property shall keep his communal grazing rights over other properties which have not been fenced.

Article 603. The owner of land encumbered with a grazing easement may redeem this encumbrance by paying its value to those entitled to the easement. In the absence of an agreement, the capital required to redeem the easement shall be set at 4% of the annual value of the grazing, as determined by expert appraisal.

Article 604. The provisions of the preceding articles shall apply to easements for the use of firewood and other products of privately owned woodland.

TITLE VIII

On the Property Registry

SOLE CHAPTER

Article 605. The purpose of the property Registry is the registration or entry of acts and contracts relating to ownership and other rights in rem over immovable properties.

Article 606. Deeds of ownership or other rights in rem over immovable properties which are not duly registered or entered in the Property Registry shall not prejudice third parties.

Article 607. The Property Registry shall be public for anyone who has a known interest in finding out the condition of the immovable properties or rights in rem registered or entered therein.

Article 608. The provisions of the Mortgage Law shall apply to determine which deeds are subject to registration or entry, the form, effects and termination thereof, the manner of managing the Registry and the value of its book entries.

BOOK III

On the different ways of acquiring ownership

PRELIMINARY PROVISION

Article 609. Ownership is acquired by occupancy. Ownership and other rights over property are acquired by law, by gift, by testate and intestate succession and as a result of certain contracts by tradition. They may also be acquired by prescription.

TITLE ONE

On occupancy

Article 610. Property capable of appropriation without an owner, such as game or wild fish, hidden treasure and abandoned movable things are acquired by occupancy.

Article 611. Hunting and fishing law is governed by specific statutes.

Article 612. The owner of a swarm of bees shall be entitled to pursue it over another’s property, compensating the possessor of the latter for any damage caused. If the property should be fenced, he shall require the owner’s consent to enter it. When the owner should fails to pursue the swarm or should cease doing so for two consecutive days, the possessor of the property may take or retain it. The owner of tame animals may also claim them within twenty days, counting from their being taken by another. After the lapse of this period, they shall belong to the person who has taken and kept them.

Article 613. Doves, rabbits and fish that pass from their respective breeding place to another belonging to a different owner shall become the property of the latter, provided that they have not been attracted by an artifice or fraud.

Article 614. A person who by chance discovers a hidden treasure in another’s property, shall have the right granted pursuant to article 351 of this Code.

Article 615. A person who finds a movable thing, which is not a treasure, must return it to its former possessor. If such possessor should be unknown, he must immediately consign it in the possession of the Mayor of the village where it was found. The Mayor shall publish the finding as per local custom, on two consecutive Sundays. If the movable thing cannot be preserved without impairment or without making expenses which considerably reduce its value, it shall be sold in a public auction after the lapse of eight days from the second announcement without the owner having appeared, and the proceeds shall be deposited. After two years counting from the second publication without the owner having appeared, the thing found or its value shall be awarded to the person who found it. Both such person and the owner shall be obliged, each as applicable, to pay any expenses.

Article 616. If the owner should appear in time, he shall be obliged to pay, as a prize to the person who found it, one tenth of the amount or the price of the thing found. Where the value of the finding should exceed 2000 pesetas, the prize shall be reduced to one twentieth in respect of the excess.

Article 617. Rights over objects thrown into the sea or objects which the waves should bring to the beach, of whatever nature or over the plants and grasses which grow on its shores shall be determined by specific statutes.

TITLE II

On gifts

CHAPTER ONE

On the nature of gifts

Article 618. A gift is an active liberality whereby a person gratuitously disposes of the thing in favour of another person, who accepts it.

Article 619. Likewise, the gift made to a person for his merits or for services rendered to the donor shall also be deemed such, provided that they do not constitute payable debts, as also gifts where the donee is imposed an encumbrance of lesser value than the thing given.

Article 620. Gifts which are to be effective at the death of the donor shall have the same nature as testamentary dispositions, and shall be governed by the rules set forth in the chapter on testamentary succession.

Article 621. Gifts which are to be effective entre vivos shall be governed by the general provisions on contracts and obligations in all matters not provided for in this title.

Article 622. Gifts made for valuable consideration shall be governed by the rules relating to contracts, and remuneratory gifts by the provisions of the present title, as relates to the part exceeding the value of the burden imposed.

Article 623. Gifts are perfected from the time when the donor becomes aware of the donee’s acceptance.

CHAPTER 2º

On persons entitled to make or receive gifts

Article 624. All persons with the capacity to contract and dispose of their property may make gifts.

Article 625. All persons who are not especially incapacitated by the law for such purposes may accept gifts.

Article 626. Persons without the capacity to contract may not accept conditional gifts or gifts made for valuable consideration without the intervention of their legitimate representatives.

Article 627. Gifts made to conceived but unborn infants may be accepted by the persons who would legitimately represent them if they had already been born.

Article 628. Gifts made to ineligible persons are null and void, even if they have been simulated under the appearance of another contract by using a trustee.

Article 629. The gift is not binding on the donor, or effective, until acceptance thereof.

Article 630. The donee must accept the donation by himself, or by means of an authorised person with a special power of attorney, or with a general and sufficient power of attorney, under penalty of nullity of the gift.

Article 631. Persons who accept a gift on behalf of others who cannot accept it by themselves shall be obliged to give the notice and make the entry mentioned in article 633.

Article 632. The gift of a movable thing may be made orally or in writing. An oral gift shall require simultaneous delivery of the thing given. In the absence of this requirement, it shall not be effective unless it is both made and accepted in writing.

Article 633. For the gift of an immovable property to be valid, it must be performed in a public deed, individually expressing the properties given and the value of any charges to be paid by the donee. Acceptance may be given on the same public deed of gift or in another separate public deed; but it shall not be effective if it does not take place during the life of the donor. If it should be given in a separate public deed, the acceptance must be notified to the donor in an authentic instrument, and this formality shall be noted in both public deeds.

CHAPTER 3º

On the effects and limitations of gifts

Article 634. The gift may comprise all current properties of the donor, or parts of them, as long as the donor reserves, pursuant to full ownership or usufruct, whatever he requires to live in a condition corresponding to his circumstances.

Article 635. The gift may not comprise future property. Future property shall be deemed to mean property which the donor cannot dispose of at the time of making the gift.

Article 636. Notwithstanding the provisions of article 634, nobody may give or receive pursuant to gift more than he may give or receive pursuant to testament. The gift shall be deemed ineffective to the extent that it exceeds this measure.

Article 637. When the gift should have been made to several persons jointly, it shall be deemed to have been given in equal parts; and no right of accretion shall exist between them, unless otherwise provided by the donor. Gifts made jointly to husband and wife shall be excepted from the foregoing provision, and such right of accretion shall exist between them, unless otherwise provided by the donor.

Article 638. The donee shall be subrogated in all rights and remedies corresponding to the donor in the event of dispossession. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the latter shall not be obliged to clear the title of the things given, save if the gift should have been for valuable consideration, in which case the donor shall be liable for dispossession up to the amount of the encumbrance.

Article 639. The donor may reserve to himself the power to dispose of some of the properties given, or of an amount charged thereto; but, if he should die without having exercised this right, the reserved properties or amounts shall belong to the donee.

Article 640. The donor may also give the ownership of the property to one person and the usufruct thereon to another or others, with the limitations set forth in article 781 of this Code.

Article 641. The reversion of the gift only in favour of the donor may be provided for any events and circumstances, but the reversion in favour of other persons may only be provided in the same cases and with the same limitations as provided in this Code for testamentary substitutions. A reversion provided by the donor in favour of a third party contrary to the provisions of the preceding paragraph shall be null and void; but it shall not result in the nullity of the gift.

Article 642. If the gift should have been made imposing on the donee the obligation to pay the donor’s debts, the former shall only be deemed obliged to pay debts contracted beforehand, unless otherwise provided in the relevant clause.

Article 643. In the absence of stipulation in respect of the payment of debts, the donee shall only be liable for them where the gift should have been made in fraud of creditors. The gift shall always be presumed to have been made in fraud of creditors when the donor, in making it, has not reserved sufficient property to pay prior debts.

CHAPTER 4º

On the revocation and reduction of gifts

Article 644. Any gift made inter vivos by a person who has no children or descendants shall be revocable in the event of the mere occurrence of any of the following:

  1. The donor’s having children, even if they should be posthumous, after making the gift.
  2. That the donor’s child thought dead at the time of making the gift should turn out to be alive.

Article 645. After rescission of the gift as a result of any surviving children, the gifted properties, or their value, if the donee should have sold them, shall be returned to the donor. If the property should be mortgaged, the donor may release the mortgage by paying the amount secured thereby, and shall be entitled to claim such amount from the donee. When the property should be unable to be returned, it shall be appraised according to its value at the time of making the gift.

Article 646. The remedy of revocation as a result of subsequently born or surviving children shall be statute barred after five years, counting from the time of learning of the birth of the last child or of the existence of the child believed dead. This remedy cannot be waived and is transferred, by the death of the donor, to his children and descendants.

Article 647. The gift shall be revoked at the request of the donor, when the donee has failed to comply with any of the conditions imposed by the former. In this case, the gifted property shall be returned to the donor, and any disposals thereof made by the donee and any mortgages executed thereon shall be null and void, with the limitation set forth in the Mortgage Law as relates to third parties.

Article 648. The gift may also be revoked, at the request of the donor, on grounds of ingratitude in the following cases:

  1. If the donee should commit any crime against the donor’s person, honour or property.
  2. If the donee should attribute to the donor any of the crimes which give rise to ex officio proceedings or public charges, even if he should provide proof; unless the crime should have been committed against the donee, his spouse, or children under his authority.
  3. If he should unduly refuse to give the donor support.

Article 649. Upon revocation of the gift by reason of ingratitude, any prior disposals and mortgages prior to the entry of the claim for revocation in the Property Registry shall subsist. Subsequent ones shall be null and void.

Article 650. In the case provided in the first paragraph of the preceding article, the donor shall be entitled to request from the donee the value of the property disposed of which cannot be claimed from third parties, or the amount by which they should have been mortgaged. The time of the gift shall be taken into account to establish the value of such property.

Article 651. In the event of revocation on any of the grounds expressed in article 644, or on grounds of ingratitude, and in the event of reduction thereof as a result of its being inofficious, the donee shall not return the fruits obtained prior to the filing of the claim. If the revocation should be based on having failed to comply with any of the conditions imposed by the gift, the donee shall return, as well as the gifted properties, the fruits which it should have received after ceasing to meet the condition.

Article 652. The remedy granted to the donor on grounds of ingratitude may not be waived in advance. This remedy shall be statute barred after one year counting from the date on which the donor became aware of the fact and of the possibility to exercise the remedy.

Article 653. This remedy shall not be transferred to the donor’s heirs if the latter, being able to do so, should not have exercised it. Neither may it be exercised against the donee’s heir, unless, upon the death of the former, the claim should already have been filed.

Article 654. Gifts which, in accordance with the provisions of article 636, should be found to be inofficious after calculating the net value of the donor’s property at the time of his death, must be reduced by the excess; but this reduction shall not prevent their effectiveness during the life of the donor, or the donee from appropriating the fruits. The provisions of this chapter and of articles 820 and 821 of the present Code shall apply to the reduction of gifts.

Article 655. Only persons entitled to a forced share or to a proportional share in the inheritance and their heirs or successors shall be entitled to request the reduction of gifts. Persons comprised in the preceding paragraph may not waive their rights during the life of the donor, by express statement or by giving their consent to the gift. Donees, legatees of a thing other than a proportional share in the inheritance and the deceased’s creditors may not request the reduction or benefit from it.

Article 656. If, in the event of there being two or more gifts, the disposable part of the inheritance should not be sufficient to cover them, the most recent gifts shall be cancelled or reduced to cover the excess.

TITLE III

On successions

Article 657. The rights to a person’s succession are transferred from the time of his death.

Article 658. Succession takes place pursuant to the will of a person expressed in a testament and, in the absence thereof, by operation of law. The first is called testamentary succession, and the second legal succession. Succession may also take place in one part pursuant to the will of a person and in the other by operation of law.

Article 659. The estate comprises all properties, rights and obligations belonging to a person, unless they are extinguished as a result of his death.

Article 660. The person who succeeds pursuant to universal title shall be called heir, and the person who succeeds pursuant to specific title shall be called legatee.

Article 661. Heirs succeed the deceased pursuant to the sole fact of his death in all his rights and obligations.

Article 662. All persons who are not expressly forbidden to do so by the law may make a will.

CHAPTER ONE

On wills

SECTION ONE

On the capacity to dispose of property pursuant to will

Article 663. The following persons are incapable of making a will:

  1. Persons under fourteen years of age of both sexes.
  2. Any person who usually or accidentally is not of sound mind.

Article 664. The will made before the person’s insanity shall be valid.

Article 665. Whenever a person incapacitated pursuant to a judgement which does not contain a ruling concerning his capacity to make a will should wish to do so, the Notary Public shall designate two physicians to previously examine him, and shall not authorise it unless they vouch for his capacity.

Article 666. The only factor which shall be taken into account to assess the testator’s capacity is his condition at the time of making the will.

SECTION 2ª

On wills in general

Article 667. The act whereby a person disposes of all his property or part of it for after his death is called a will.

Article 668. The testator may dispose of his property by inheritance or by legacy. If there should be any doubt, the disposition shall be valid as inheritance even if the testator did not materially use the word heir, if his intention on this issue should be clear.

Article 669. Two or more persons may not make a will jointly or in the same instrument, irrespective of whether they do so for their reciprocal benefit, or for the benefit of a third party.

Article 670. Making a will is a strictly personal: it may not be left, in whole or in part, to the discretion of a third party, nor may it be made by means of an attorney or proxy. The subsistence of the appointment of heirs or legatees may also not be left at the discretion of a third party, and neither may the designation of the portions in which they are to succeed, when they should have been called by name.

Article 671. The testator may entrust to a third party the distribution of the amounts left generally to specific classes, such as relatives, the poor or charitable establishments, and the election of the persons or establishments to which they are to be allocated.

Article 672. Any disposition made by the testator relating to the appointment of an heir, bequests or legacies, with reference to private instruments or papers which after his death should appear within or outside his domicile, shall be null and void if such instruments or papers do not meet the requirements provided for holographic wills.

Article 673. A will made under violence, fraudulent misrepresentation or fraud shall be null and void.

Article 674. A person who, by fraudulent misrepresentation or fraud or with violence, should prevent another person, of whom he is the intestate heir, from freely making a testamentary disposition, shall be deprived of his inheritance rights, without prejudice to any criminal liability in which he may have incurred.

Article 675. Any testamentary disposition must be understood according to the literal meaning of its words, unless it should clearly appear that the testator’s intention was another. In the event of doubt, what seems better to conform to the testator’s intention, according to the wording of the will, shall be observed. The testator may not forbid the contesting of the will in cases where it is null and void as provided in the law.

SECTION 3ª

On the form of wills

Article 676. A will may be common or special. The common will may be holographic, open or closed.

Article 677. The military will, the maritime will and the will made in a foreign country shall be deemed special wills.

Article 678. A will shall be called holographic when the testator writes it by himself in the form and with the prerequisites set forth in article 688.

Article 679. A will shall be open whenever the testator should declare his last will in the presence of the persons who are to authorise the act, who are made aware of the dispositions made therein.

Article 680. A will shall be closed when the testator, without revealing his last will, declares that it is contained in the document presented to the persons who are to authorise the act.

Article 681. The following persons may not act as witnesses in wills:

  1. Minors, save as provided in article 701.
  2. Blind persons and wholly deaf or mute persons.
  3. Persons who do not understand the language of the testator.
  4. Persons who are of unsound mind.
  5. The spouse or relatives within the fourth degree of consanguinity or the second degree of affinity of the authorising Notary Public, and persons who have an employment relationship with the latter.

Article 682. In an open testament, heirs and legatees named therein, their spouses, or the relatives of the former within the fourth degree of consanguinity or the second degree of affinity may also not be witnesses. This prohibition does not include legatees or their spouses or relatives where the legacy is of a movable object or an amount of scarce importance in relation to the estate.

Article 683. For a witness to be declared ineligible, it is necessary that the cause of his incapacity should exist at the time of making the will.

Article 684. Where the testator should express his will in a language not known to the Notary Public, the presence of an interpreter chosen by the former shall be required to translate the testamentary disposition to the official language used by the Notary Public in the place of execution. The instrument shall be written in both languages, with indication of which language was employed by the testator. The open will and the deed of the closed will shall be written in the foreign language in which the testator has expressed himself and in the official language used by the Notary Public, even if the latter should know the former language.

Article 685. The Notary Public must know the testator and, if he does not know him, he shall identify his person by means of two witnesses who know him and who are known to the same Notary Public, or by means of documents issued by the public authorities for the purpose of identifying persons. The Notary Public must also ensure that, in his opinion, the testator has the necessary legal capacity to make a will. In the cases of article 700 and 701, the witnesses shall have the obligation of knowing the testator, and shall attempt to ascertain his capacity.

Article 686. If it should not be possible to identify the person of the testator as provided in the preceding article, the Notary Public, or the witnesses, as the case may be, shall declare such circumstance, with mention of the documents submitted by the testator for such purpose and his personal characteristics. If the will should be challenged on such grounds, the person upholding its validity shall have the burden of proving the testator’s identity.

Article 687. The will in whose execution the formalities respectively established in this chapter have not been observed shall be null and void.

SECTION 4ª

On the holographic will

Article 688. The holographic will may only be made by persons who are of legal age. In order to be valid, this will must be written out in full and signed by the testator, with expression of the year, month and day on which it is made. If it should contain words which have been crossed out, amended or written between the lines, the testator shall save such changes underneath his signature. Foreigners may make a holographic will in their own language.

Article 689. The holographic will must be legalised, and shall be submitted for these purposes to the Judge of first instance of the last domicile of the testator, or of the place of his death, within five years counting from the date of his death. It shall not be valid without this prerequisite.

Article 690. The person in whose possession such will has been consigned must submit it to the Court as soon as he has news of the testator’s death and, if he should fail to do so within the following 10 days, shall be liable for any damages caused by such delay. Any person with an interest in the will as heir, legatee, executor or in any other capacity may also submit it.

Article 691. After the holographic will has been submitted, and the death of the testator has been evidenced, the Judge shall open it, if it should be in a closed envelope, shall initial all pages thereof together with his clerk,

and shall ascertain its identity by means of three witnesses who know the handwriting and signature of the testator and who declare that they have no rational doubts that this is a will written and signed by the testator’s own hand. In the absence of suitable witnesses, or in the event that the witnesses who are examined should show doubts, and provided that the Judge deems it convenient, the handwriting may be appraised by experts.

Article 692. The surviving spouse, if any, the descendants and ascendants of the testator and, in the absence of both, his siblings, shall be summoned to practice the formalities expressed in the preceding article. If these persons should not reside within the court district, or if their existence should be ignored, or if, being minors or incapacitated persons, they should have no legitimate representatives, the Public Prosecutor shall be summoned. The persons summoned may be present in the practice of such formalities and make any relevant observations orally on the authenticity of the will at such time.

Article 693. If the Judge deems the identity of the will to have been proven, he shall resolve on its legalisation, including any formalities practised therein, in the files of the corresponding Notary Public, who shall give the interested parties any copies or extracts which may apply. Otherwise, he shall refuse its legalisation. Whatever the Judge’s resolution, it shall be enforced, notwithstanding any opposition, saving the right of the interested parties to challenge it in the relevant proceedings.

SECTION 5ª

On the open will

Article 694. The open will must be made before a Notary Public qualified to act in the place where it is made. Only the cases expressly determined in the same Section shall be excepted from this rule.

Article 695. The testator shall express, orally or in writing, his last will to the Notary Public. Upon the Notary’s drafting the will in accordance with such statements, and with expression of the place, year, month, day and time of its execution, and after warning the testator of his right to read it by himself, the Notary Public shall read it out loud for the testator to declare whether it conforms to his intentions. If so, it shall be signed in the same act by the testator who is able to do so and, as the case may be, by the witnesses and other persons required to appear. If the testator declares that he does not know how to or is unable to sign, one of the two witnesses shall do it for him at his request.

Article 696. The Notary Public shall witness knowing the testator or having duly identified him and, otherwise, shall make the statement provided in article 686. He shall also note that, in his opinion, the testator has the necessary legal capacity to make a will.

Article 697. Two suitable witnesses must be present in the act of making the will:

  1. When the testator declares that he does not know how to or is unable to sign the will.
  2. When the testator, although he is able to sign it, is blind, or declares that he does not know how to or is unable to read the will by himself. If the testator who does not know how to or is unable to read should be entirely deaf, the witnesses shall read the testament in the presence of the Notary Public, and must declare that it coincides with the declared intention.
  3. When the testator or the Notary Public should request it.

Article 698. The following persons must be present at the act of making the will:

  1. The witnesses of the testator’s identity, if any, who may also act as instrumental witnesses.
  2. The physicians who have examined the incapacitated testator.
  3. The interpreter who has translated the will of the testator to the official language employed by the Notary Public.

Article 699. All formalities expressed on this Section shall be performed in a single act, which shall begin with the reading of the will, without any interruption being allowed, unless it is motivated by a fleeting incident.

Article 700. If the testator should be in imminent danger of death, the will may be executed before five suitable witnesses, without the need for a Notary Public.

Article 701. In the event of an epidemic, the will may also be executed without intervention of a Notary Public, before three witnesses older than sixteen.

Article 702. In the cases of the two preceding articles, the will shall be written down, if possible; if not, the will shall be valid even if the witnesses do not know how to write.

Article 703. A will made in accordance with the provisions of the three preceding articles shall be ineffective if two months should elapse from the time when the testator is no longer in danger of death, or the epidemic has ceased. Where the testator should die within such period, the testament shall also be ineffective if, within three months following the death, the interested parties do not appear before the competent Court to raise it to public deed, irrespective of whether it was executed in writing, or orally.

Article 704. Wills made without the authorisation of a Notary Public shall be ineffective if not raised public deed and legalised as provided in the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 705. Upon an open will’s being declared null and void as a result of not observing the solemnities set forth for each specific case, the Notary Public who has authorised it shall be liable for any damages incurred, if the fault should result from his malice, inexcusable negligence or ignorance.

SECTION 6ª

On the closed will

Article 706. The closed will must be executed in writing. If the testator should write it in his own hand, he shall put his signature at the end. If it should be written by any mechanical means or by another person at the testator’s request, the latter shall sign in all pages thereof and at the end of the will. Where the testator does not know how to or is unable to sign, another person shall do so at his request at the end and in all pages thereof, expressing the cause of the impossibility. In any event, prior to his signature, any words amended, crossed out or written between the lines shall be validated.

Article 707. The following solemnities shall be observed in the execution of the closed will:

  1. The paper which contains the will shall be put inside the closed and sealed envelope, so that the former may not be taken out without breaking the latter.
  2. The testator shall appear with the closed and sealed will, or shall close it and seal it in the act, before the Notary Public who is to authorise it.
  3. The testator shall represent, in the presence of the Notary Public, by himself or by means of the interpreter provided in article 684, that the envelope which he submits contains his will, expressing whether it is written and signed by him, or whether it is written in another’s hand or by any mechanical means and signed at the end and in all pages thereof by him or by another person at his request.
  4. On the envelope of the will, the Notary Public shall extend the corresponding deed of execution, expressing the number and mark of the seals with which it has been closed, and witnessing that he knows the testator or

has identified his person in the manner provided in article since 685 and 686, and that the testator, in his opinion, has the necessary legal capacity to make a will.

  1. Having issued and read the deed, the testator who is able to do so and, as the case may be, the persons who must be present shall sign it, and the Notary Public shall authorise it with his stamp and signature. If the testator should declare that he does not know how to or is unable to sign, one of the two suitable witnesses who must be present in this case shall do so for him and at his request.
  2. The deed shall also express this circumstance, as well as the place, time, date, month and year of execution thereof.
  3. Two suitable witnesses shall be present in the act of execution, if the testator or the Notary Public should request it.

Article 708. Blind persons and persons who do not know how to or are unable to read may not make a closed will.

Article 709. Persons who cannot express themselves orally, but who are able to write, may make a closed will, observing the following formalities:

  1. The will must be signed by the testator. As concerns the remaining requirements, the provisions of article 706 shall apply.
  2. Upon submitting it, the testator shall write on the upper part of the envelope, in the presence of the Notary Public, that inside it is his will, expressing how it is written and that it has been signed by him.
  3. The deed of execution shall be extended below the words written by the testator, and the Notary Public shall witness having complied with the provisions of the preceding number and the remaining provisions of article 707 which apply to the case at hand.

Article 710. After authorisation of the closed will, the Notary Public shall deliver it to the testator, after including in his ordinary official files an authorised copy of the deed of execution.

Article 711. The testator may keep in his possession the closed will, or entrust it to the care of a trusted person, or consign it in the possession of the authorising Notary Public, to be kept in his files. In this last case, the Notary Public shall give the testator a receipt and shall enter in his ordinary files, in the margin or below the copy of the deed of execution, that the will is in his possession. If the testator should subsequently withdraw it, he shall sign a receipt below such note.

Article 712. The Notary Public or the person who holds in his possession a closed will must submit it to the competent Judge when he becomes aware of the death of the testator. If he should fail to do so within ten days, he shall be liable for any damages resulting from his negligence.

Article 713. A person who, by wilful misconduct, should fail to submit the closed will in his possession within the period provided in the second paragraph of the preceding article, as well as the liability provided therein, shall lose any right to the inheritance, if he should have any as intestate heir or as testamentary heir or legatee. This same penalty shall be incurred by the person who by wilful misconduct should remove the closed will from the testator’s domicile or that of the person in whose custody or deposit it has been left, and the person who hides it, breaks it or otherwise renders it useless, without prejudice to any applicable criminal liability.

Article 714. The provisions of the Civil Procedural Law shall be observed for the opening and legalisation of the closed will.

Article 715. The closed will shall be null and void if the formalities set forth in this section should not have been observed in its execution; and the Notary Public who authorises it shall be liable for any damages arisen, if it

should be proved that the fault resulted from his malice, inexcusable negligence or ignorance. However, it shall be valid as a holographic will if it should be entirely written and signed by the testator and if it should meet the remaining conditions inherent to this kind will.

SECTION 7ª

On the military will

Article 716. In time of war, any members of the military in campaign, volunteers, hostages, prisoners and other individuals employed in the Army, or following it, may make a will before an Official who has at least, the category of Captain. This provision shall apply to individuals in an army which is in a foreign country. If the testator should be ill or wounded, he may make the will before the Chaplain or Physician who attends him. If he should be with a detachment, he may make the will before his superior, even if he is a subaltern. In all cases mentioned in this article, the presence of two suitable witnesses shall always be necessary.

Article 717. The persons mentioned in the preceding article may also make a closed will before a War commissary, who shall in this case perform the duties of a Notary Public, observing the provisions of articles 706 et seq.

Article 718. Wills made in accordance with the two preceding articles must be forwarded as soon as possible to the general headquarters, and by the latter to the Minister of War. The Minister, if the testator should have died, shall forward the will to the Judge of the deceased’s last domicile, and, if he should not know such domicile, to the Dean of the Judges of Madrid, to summon ex officio the heirs and other parties interested in the succession. These persons must request to raise the will to public deed and to legalise it, in the manner provided in the Civil Procedural Law. If the will should be closed, the Judge shall proceed to open it ex officio in the manner provided in such Law, with the summons and intervention of the Public Prosecutor, and, after it has been opened, he shall give notice thereof to the heirs and other interested parties.

Article 719. Wills mentioned in article 716 shall become void four months after the testator ceases to be part of the campaign.

Article 720. During a battle, assault, combat and, generally, in any imminent danger of warlike actions, a military will may be executed orally before two witnesses. However, this will shall become ineffective if the testator should be saved from the danger in consideration of which he made the will. Even if he should not be saved, the will shall be ineffective if it is not legalised by the witnesses before the War auditor or officer of the Ministry of Justice following the Army, subsequently proceeding in the manner provided in article 718.

Article 721. If the military will should be a closed will, the provisions of article 706 and 707 shall be observed; however, it shall be executed before the Officer and the two witnesses required for the open will pursuant to article 716, and all of them must sign the deed of execution, as well as the testator, if he should be able to.

SECTION 8ª

On the maritime will

Article 722. Open or closed wills made by persons on board in a maritime journey, shall be executed in the following manner: If the vessel should be a warship, before the Paymaster or the person performing his duties, in the presence of two suitable witnesses, who can see and understand the testator. The Commander of the vessel, or the person acting in his stead, shall, further, give his approval. In merchant ships, the will shall be authorised by the Captain, or the person acting in his stead, with the attendance of two suitable witnesses. In both cases, the witnesses shall be chosen among the passengers, if any; but one of them, at least, must be able to sign, and shall do so for himself and for the testator, if the latter does not know how to or is unable to do so. If the will should be an open will, the provisions of article 695 shall likewise be observed, and, if it should be a closed will, the provisions of the sixth section of this chapter shall be observed, excluding the provisions relating to the number of witnesses and the intervention of the Notary Public.

Article 723. The will of the Paymaster of a warship and of the Captain of a merchant ship shall be authorised by the person who is to replace them in their position, observing, for all else, the provisions of the preceding article.

Article 724. Open wills made in the open sea shall be kept in the Commander’s or Captain’s custody, and a mention thereof shall be made in the Logbook. The same mention shall be made of holographic and closed wills.

Article 725. If the vessel should arrive at a foreign port where there is a Diplomatic or consular agent of Spain, the Commander of the warship, or the Captain of the merchant ship, shall deliver to such Agent a copy of the open will, or the deed of execution of the closed will, and the note taken in the Logbook. The copy of the will or the deed must include the same signatures as the original, if the persons who signed it are alive and on board; otherwise, it shall be authorised by the Paymaster or Captain who received the will, or the person acting in their stead, and shall also be signed by those of the persons who took part in the will who are currently on board. The Diplomatic or consular agent shall procure that the formality of delivery is laid down in writing and, having closed and sealed the copy of the will or that of the deed of execution in the event of a closed will, shall forward it, together with the note taken in the Logbook, to the Minister of the Navy by the corresponding channels, and the Minister shall order its deposit in the Files of his Ministry. The Commander or Captain who delivers the copy shall receive from the Diplomatic or consular agent a certificate of having performed such delivery, and shall make a note thereof in the Logbook.

Article 726. When the vessel, whether a warship or a merchant ship, arrives to the first port in the Kingdom, the Commander or Captain shall deliver the original will, closed and sealed, to the local naval Authority, with a copy of the note taken in the Logbook; and, if the testator should have died, a certificate evidencing the death. Delivery shall be evidenced in the manner provided in the preceding article, and the naval Authority shall forward it all without delay to the Minister of the Navy.

Article 727. If the testator should have died and the will should be an open will, the Minister of the Navy shall perform the actions provided in article 718.

Article 728. Where the will has been executed by a foreigner on board a Spanish vessel, the Minister of the Navy shall forward the will to the Minister of the State, to forward it as applicable by diplomatic channels.

Article 729. If the will should be holographic, and the testator should have died during the journey, the Commander or Captain shall keep the will in his custody, making a mention thereof in the Logbook, and shall deliver it to the local naval Authority, in the manner and for the purposes provided in the preceding article, when the vessel should arrive to the first port in the Kingdom. The same shall be done when the will is a closed will, if the testator had it in his possession at the time of his death.

Article 730. Open and closed wills made in accordance with the provisions of this section shall become void after four months, counting from the time where the testator should disembark at a point where he is able to make a will in an ordinary manner.

Article 731. If there should be danger of shipwreck, the provisions of article 720 shall apply to the crew and passengers of warships or merchant ships.

SECTION 9ª

On the will made in a foreign country

Article 732. Spaniards may make a will outside national territory, subject to the forms set forth by the laws of the country in which they are located. They may also make a will in the open sea during their journey in a foreign vessel, subject to the laws of the Nation to which the vessel belongs. They may also make a holographic will, in accordance with article 688, even in countries whose laws do not admit such a will.

Article 733. The joint will, forbidden by article 669, made by Spaniards in a foreign country shall not be valid, even if authorised by the laws of the Nation where it should have been executed.

Article 734. Spaniards who are in a foreign country may also make an open or closed will in a foreign country before the diplomatic or consular office of Spain who performs notarial duties at the place where it is executed. In these cases, all formalities set forth in Sections five and six of this chapter shall be respectively observed.

Article 735. The diplomatic or consular Agent shall forward a copy of the open will or of the deed of execution of the closed will, authorised with his signature and seal, to the Ministry of the State, to be consigned in his Files.

Article 736. The diplomatic or consular Agent in whose possession a Spaniard should have consigned his holographic or closed will, shall forward it to the Ministry of the State upon the death of the testator, together with the death certificate. The Ministry of the State shall publish in the “Madrid Gazette” news of the death, so that parties interested in the estate may collect the will and legalise it in the manner provided.

SECTION 10ª

On the revocation and ineffectiveness of wills

Article 737. All testamentary dispositions are essentially revocable, even if the testator should express in the will his intention or resolution not to revoke them. Clauses which cancel future dispositions and those where the testator should order the invalidity of the revocation of the will unless it should be performed using certain words or signs shall be deemed not written.

Article 738. The will may not be revoked in the whole or in part unless the solemnities required to make a will are observed.

Article 739. The prior will shall be revoked by operation of law by a subsequent perfect will, if the testator does not express in the latter his intention to have the former subsist in whole or in particle. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the prior will shall recover its legal force if the testator should subsequently revoke the subsequent will, and should expressly declare his intention that the former will be valid.

Article 740. The revocation shall be effective even if the second will should become void as a result of the incapacity of the heir or legatees appointed therein, or as a result of waiver by the former or the latter.

Article 741. The recognition of a child shall not lose its legal force even if the will in which it was made should be revoked, or it should not contain other dispositions, or the other dispositions contained in the will should be null and void.

Article 742. The closed will which appears at the testator’s domicile with the cover or seals broken, or with the signatures authorising it erased, scratched out or amended shall be deemed revoked. Notwithstanding the foregoing, this will shall be valid if it should be evidenced that the damage should have taken place without intention or awareness on the part of the testator, or upon the latter’s being of unsound mind; however, if the cover or the seals should be broken, for the will to be valid, it shall also be necessary to prove its authenticity. If the will should be in the possession of another person, if the cover or the seals should be broken the defect shall be deemed be such person’s fault, and the will shall not be valid unless its authenticity is proved; and, if both should be unharmed, but the signatures should have been erased, scratched out or amended, the will shall be valid unless it should be evidenced that the document was delivered by the testator in such condition.

Article 743. Wills shall become void and testamentary dispositions shall be ineffective, in whole or in part, only in the cases expressly provided in this Code.

CHAPTER 2º

On inheritance

SECTION ONE

On capacity to succeed by testament or ab intestato

Article 744. Persons who are not incapacitated by the law may succeed by testament or ab intestato.

Article 745. The following persons are incapable of succeeding:

  1. Abortive creatures, understanding as such those which do not meet the circumstances expressed in article 30.
  2. Associations or corporations which are not permitted under the law.

Article 746. Churches and church councils, provincial governments and provinces, town councils and municipalities, hospitals, charitable and public instruction establishments, associations authorised or recognised by the law and other legal entities may acquire by testament subject to the provisions of article 38.

Article 747. If the testator should dispose of all or part of his property for religious services or charitable works for the benefit of his soul, in an indeterminate manner and without specifying the allocation thereof, the executors

shall sell his property and shall distribute the amount thereof, giving half to the local Bishop so that he may allocate it to the aforementioned services and to the requirements and needs of the Church, and the other half to the relevant Civil Governor to give to the charitable establishments of the deceased’s domicile, and, in the absence thereof, those of the province.

Article 748. The disposition made in favour of a public establishment subject to a condition or imposing an encumbrance shall only be valid with the Government’s approval.

Article 749. Dispositions made in favour of the poor in general, without designating specific persons or locations, shall be deemed limited to the poor of the domicile of the testator at the time of his death, unless it should clearly result that his intention was another. The qualification of who are the poor and the distribution of the property shall be made by the person designated by the testator or, in the absence thereof, by the executors and, in the absence thereof, by the parish priest, the mayor and the municipal judge, who will resolve by majority vote any doubts which may arise. The same shall be done where the testator has disposed of his property in favour of the poor of a specific parish or village.

Article 750. Any disposition in favour of an unidentified person shall be null and void, unless such person may become identified as a result of any event.

Article 751. A disposition made generally in favour of the testator’s relatives shall be deemed made in favour of those nearest in degree.

Article 752. Testamentary dispositions made by the testator during his last illness in favour of the priest who confessed him, the latter’s relatives to the fourth degree, or his church, diocese, community or institution shall have no force or effect.

Article 753. A testamentary disposition in favour of the guardian or conservator of the testator shall have no force or effect, unless it has been made after final approval of the accounts or, if it should not be necessary to render accounts, after termination of the guardianship or conservatorship. Notwithstanding the foregoing, dispositions made in favour of the guardian or conservator who is an ascendant, descendant, brother, sister or spouse of the testator shall be valid.

Article 754. The testator may not dispose of all or part of his estate in favour of the Notary Public authorising his will, or the spouse, relatives or relatives by marriage of the latter up to the fourth degree, with the exception provided in article 682. This prohibition shall apply to witnesses of an open will, executed with or without a Notary Public. The provisions hereof shall also apply to witnesses and persons before whom special wills are executed.

Article 755. A testamentary disposition in favour of an incapable person shall be null and void, even if it should be disguised in the form of a contract for valuable consideration, or should be made on behalf of a trustee.

Article 756. The following persons are incapable of succeeding on grounds of unworthiness:

  1. Parents who should abandon, prostitute or corrupt their children.
  2. A person who is sentenced in court for an attempt to take the life of the testator, his spouse, descendants or ascendants. If the offender should be a forced heir, he shall forfeit his right to his forced share.
  3. A person who has accused the testator of a crime for which the law provides a sentence of long-term jail or imprisonment (presidio o prisión mayor), where the accusation is declared to be a calumny.
  1. The overage heir who, being aware of the testator’s violent death, should not have reported it within one month to the authorities, unless the authorities should have already acted ex officio. This prohibition shall cease in cases where, according to the law, there is no obligation to make an accusation.
  2. A person who, by threats, fraud or violence, should force the testator to make a will or to change it.
  3. A person who, with the same means, should prevent another from making a will, or from revoking a will previously made, or should replace, hide or alter another subsequent will.

Article 757. The grounds of unworthiness shall cease to be effective if the testator was aware of them at the time of making the will or if, having become aware of them later, he should forgive them in a public document.

Article 758. The time of death of the person whose succession is in question shall be taken into account to qualify the capacity of the heir or legatee. Cases 2 and 3 of article 756 shall require waiting for a final judgement, and number 4 shall require waiting until the month provided to report the violent death has elapsed. If the appointment of the heir or the legacy should be conditional, the time on which the condition is met shall also be taken into account.

Article 759. The heir or legatee who should die before fulfilling the condition, even if he should survive the testator, shall not transfer any rights to his heirs.

Article 760. A person incapable of succeeding who, against the prohibition provided in the preceding articles, should have taken the property of the estate into his possession, shall be obliged to return it with any accretions and any fruits and rents received.

Article 761. If the person excluded from the inheritance as a result of incapacity should be a child or descendant of the testator and should have children or descendants, the latter shall acquire his right to a forced share of the estate.

Article 762. No action to declare incapacity may be brought after five years from the time when the incapable person should have taken possession of the inheritance or legacy.

SECTION 2ª

On the appointment of an heir

Article 763. A person who has no forced heirs may dispose by a will of all his property or a part thereof in favour of any person with the capacity to acquire it. A person who has forced heirs may only dispose of his property in the manner and subject to the limitations set forth in section 5 of this chapter.

Article 764. The will shall be valid even if it does not contain the appointment of an heir, or if such appointment does not comprise all of the property, and even if the person thus appointed should not accept the inheritance or should be incapable of inheriting. In such cases the testamentary dispositions made in accordance with the law shall be complied with, and the remainder of the property shall pass to the intestate heirs.

Article 765. Heirs appointed without designation of shares shall inherit in equal shares.

Article 766. The voluntary heir who dies before the testator, the person incapable of inheriting and the person who waives the inheritance do not transfer any rights to their heirs, save as provided in articles 761 and 857.

Article 767. The expression of a false reason for appointing an heir or legatee shall be deemed not written, unless it should result from the will that the testator would not have made such appointment or legacy if he should have been aware that such reason was false. The expression of a reason which is against the law, even if it should be true, shall also be deemed not written.

Article 768. The heir appointed to inherit a certain and specific thing shall be deemed a legatee.

Article 769. Where the testator should appoint certain heirs individually and others jointly, for example if he says: “I hereby appoint as my heirs N and N, and the children of N”, those appointed jointly shall be deemed to have been had been appointed individually, unless it should clearly result that the intention of the testator was another.

Article 770. If the testator should appoint his siblings, and he should have full siblings and half siblings, the inheritance shall be divided as if he had died intestate.

Article 771. Where the testator should call to succession a person and his children, they shall all be deemed to have been appointed simultaneously and not successively.

Article 772. The testator shall designate the heir by his name and surnames, and, if there should be two persons with the same name, he must provide a circumstance by which the appointed heir may be identified. Even if the testator should have omitted the name of the heir, if the heir has designated so that there cannot be any doubt of who has been appointed, the appointment shall be valid. In the will of an adoptive parent, the generic expression child or children shall include adopted children.

Article 773. An error in the name, surname or qualities of the heir shall not vitiate the appointment, where the appointed person’s identity can be known for certain in another way. If there should be equal circumstances between persons of the same name and surname, and these are such that they do not allow identifying the appointed heir, neither shall be heir.

SECTION 3ª

On substitution

Article 774. The testator may substitute one or more persons instead of the appointed heir or heirs for the event that they should die before him, or should not wish to or be unable to accept the inheritance. Simple substitution, without expressing the specific case, comprises all three cases expressed in the preceding paragraph, unless the testator provides otherwise.

Article 775. Parents and other ascendants may appoint substitutes for their descendants who are under fourteen, of both sexes, for the event that they should die before reaching such age.

Article 776. The ascendant may appoint a substitute for his descendant older than fourteen who, in accordance with the law, has been declared incapable as a result of insanity. The substitution mentioned in the preceding paragraph shall become ineffective if the incapacitated person should make a will during a lucid interval or after having recovered his reason.

Article 777. The substitution cases mentioned in the two preceding articles, where the substituted person should have forced heirs, shall only be valid to the extent that they are not detrimental to the rights of such heirs to their forced share.

Article 778. A single person may be substituted by two or more persons; and, likewise, two or more persons may be substituted by a single person.

Article 779. If heirs appointed to unequal portions should be reciprocally substituted, they shall have the same portions in the substitution as they did in the appointment, unless the intention of the testator should clearly appear to be otherwise.

Article 780. The substitute shall be subject to the same liens and conditions imposed on the appointed heir, unless the testator should have expressly provided otherwise, or unless the liens or conditions are personal to the appointed heir.

Article 781. Fiduciary substitutions pursuant to which the heir is charged to preserve and transfer all or part of the estate to a third party shall be valid and effective provided that they do not go beyond the second degree of kinship, or are made in favour of persons who were alive at the time of the testator’s death.

Article 782. Fiduciary substitutions may never encumber the forced share of the estate, unless they should encumber the “strict” forced share, [the third of the estate to be divided equally among heirs] for the benefit of a child or descendant who has been judicially incapacitated in the terms provided in article 808. If they apply to the third of the estate destined to betterments, they may only be made in favour of descendants.

Article 783. Fiduciary substitutions must be express in order to be valid. The fiduciary trustee shall be obliged to deliver the estate to the beneficiary, without other deductions than those which correspond to legitimate expenses, credits and improvements, save as otherwise provided by the testator.

Article 784. The beneficiary shall acquire rights to the succession as of the testator’s death, even if he should die before the trustee. The rights of the beneficiary shall pass to his heirs.

Article 785. The following substitutions shall be without force and effect:

  1. Fiduciary substitutions which are not provided expressly, either by calling them by this name, or by imposing on the substitute the strict obligation to deliver the property to a second heir.
  2. Dispositions which contain a perpetual prohibition to dispose of the property, or even a temporary prohibition beyond the limits set in article 781.
  3. Those which impose on the heir the mandate to pay to several persons successively, beyond the second degree, a certain income or allowance.
  4. Those whose purpose is to leave to a person all or part of the estate to be applied or invested according to reserved instructions communicated by the testator.

Article 786. The nullity of the fiduciary substitution shall not prejudice the validity of the appointment to the heirs first called; only the fiduciary clause shall be deemed not written.

Article 787. The disposition whereby the testator should leave to one person all or part of the estate, and to another its usufruct, shall be valid. If several persons should be called to the usufruct not simultaneously but successively, the provisions of article 781 shall apply.

Article 788. The disposition imposing on the heir the obligation regularly to invest a certain amount on charitable works, such as dowries for poor maidens, allowances for students or in favour of the poor or of any charitable or public instruction establishment shall be valid subject to the following conditions: If the lien should be imposed on immovable property and should be temporary, the heir or heirs may dispose of the encumbered property, and the encumbrance shall not be lifted until its registration is cancelled.

If the lien should be perpetual, the heir may capitalise it and invest the capital to generate interest with a first and sufficient mortgage. Such capitalisation and investment of the capital shall be performed with the intervention of the Civil governor of the province, after hearing the Public Prosecutor. In any event, when the testator should not have set an order for the administration and application of the charitable bequest, this shall be done by the corresponding administrative authority in accordance with the laws.

Article 789. All of the provisions in this chapter concerning heirs shall also be deemed to apply to legatees.

SECTION 4ª

On the appointment of an heir or legacy subject to condition or term

Article 790. Both universal and particular testamentary dispositions may be subject to a condition.

Article 791. Conditions imposed on heirs and legatees, as relates to matters not provided for in this section, shall be governed by the rules set forth for conditional obligations.

Article 792. Impossible conditions and those contrary to the law or to good customs shall be deemed not written and shall in no way prejudice the heir or legatees, even if the testator should provide otherwise.

Article 793. The absolute condition of not making a first or subsequent marriage shall be deemed not written, unless it is imposed on the widow or widower by the deceased spouse, or by the ascendants or descendants of the latter. However, the usufruct, use or habitation, or a personal allowance or benefit may be bequeathed by legacy to any person for the time during which he remains single or widowed.

Article 794. The disposition made under the condition that the heir or legatee should make any disposition in his will in favour of the testator or another person shall be null and void.

Article 795. The purely discretionary condition imposed on the heir or legatee must be fulfilled by the latter, after becoming aware of it, after the testator’s death. The case where the condition has already been fulfilled and cannot be repeated shall be an exception to the foregoing.

Article 796. Where the condition should be casual or mixed, it shall be sufficient for it to be performed or fulfilled at any time, whether the testator is alive or dead, unless otherwise provided by the latter. If it should already have existed or been fulfilled at the time of making the will, and the testator should have been unaware of it, it shall be deemed to have been fulfilled. If he was aware of it, it shall only be deemed to have been fulfilled when its nature is such that it cannot exist or be fulfilled once again.

Article 797. The expression of the purpose of the appointment as heir or legacy, or the application to be given to the property left by the testator, or the liens imposed by the latter, shall not be deemed to be a condition, unless this should appear to have been the testator’s intention. Any property left in this manner may be claimed from the beginning, and is transferrable to any heirs who provide a bond securing their compliance of the testator’s mandate, with the obligation to return the property received, together with any fruits and interest, if they should fail to perform this obligation.

Article 798. Where, without fault or act performed personally by the heir or legatee, the appointment as heir or the legacy mentioned in the preceding article cannot take effect in the same terms ordered by the testator, it must be complied with in others, as closely analogous and adjusted to his intentions as possible. Where the party interested in the fulfilment or non- fulfilment of such condition should prevent the fulfilment thereof without fault or act performed personally by the heir or legatee, the condition shall be deemed to have been fulfilled.

Article 799. A condition precedent shall not prevent the heir or legatee from acquiring his respective rights and transferring them to his heirs, even before verification of its fulfilment.

Article 800. If the discretionary condition imposed on the heir or legatee should be negative, or should consist of an obligation not to do or not to give something, it shall be fulfilled by providing a bond guaranteeing that they shall not do or give that which was forbidden by the testator and that, in the event of violation, they shall return the property received, together with its fruits and interest.

Article 801. If the heir should be appointed subject to a condition precedent, the property of the estate shall be placed under administration, until fulfilment of the condition or until there is a certainty that it cannot be fulfilled. The same shall apply when the heir or legatee should fail to provide the bond in the case of the preceding article.

Article 802. The administration mentioned in the preceding article shall be entrusted to the appointed heir or heirs without condition, when between them and the conditional heir there should exist a right of accretion. The same shall be understood in respect of legatees.

Article 803. If the conditional heir should have no co-heirs, or, having them, there should be no right of accretion between them, the former shall be entrusted the administration of the estate, providing a bond. If he should fail to provide it, the administration shall be conferred upon the presumptive heir, also with a bond; and if neither one nor the other should provide a bond, the Courts shall appoint a third party, who shall take charge of the estate, also providing a bond with the intervention of the heir.

Article 804. The administrators shall have the same rights and obligations as the administrators of the absentee’s property.

Article 805. The designation of a date or time on which the effect of the appointment of the heir or the legacy is to begin or cease shall be valid. In both cases, until arrival of the term, or upon completion thereof, the intestate successor shall be deemed to have been called. However, in the first case, he shall not come into possession of the property until he has provided a sufficient bond, with the intervention of the appointed heir.

SECTION 5ª

On the forced shares of the estate

Article 806. The forced share of the estate is the portion of property which the testator cannot dispose of, because the law has reserved it to certain heirs, who are as a result called forced heirs.

Article 807. The following persons are forced heirs:

  1. Children and descendants in respect of their parents and ascendants.
  2. In the absence of the foregoing, the parents and ascendants in respect of their children and descendants.
  3. The widower or widow in the manner and to the extent set forth in this Code.

Article 808. Two thirds of the estate of the father and mother constitute the forced share corresponding to children and descendants. However, the parents may dispose of one of the two thirds which form the forced share, to apply it as betterment in favour of their children or descendants. The remaining third shall be freely disposed of.

Article 809. One half of the estate of children and descendants constitutes the forced share corresponding to parents or ascendants, save in the case where they should concur with the widowed spouse of the deceased descendant, in which case it shall be one third of the estate.

Article 810. The forced share reserved to parents shall be divided between both of them equally; if one of them should have died, all of it shall correspond to the surviving parent. Where the testator should not leave a father or mother, but does leave ascendants, in the same degree, from the paternal and maternal lines, the estate shall be divided in half between both lines. If the ascendants should be of different degree, the estate shall correspond in full to the nearest ascendants of one line or the other.

Article 811. The ascendant who inherits from his descendant property acquired by the latter as a gift from another ascendant, or from a sibling, shall be obliged to reserve the property acquired by operation of law in favour of relatives within the third degree, and who belong to the line where the property comes from.

Article 812. Ascendants shall succeed, to the exclusion of other persons, to things given by them to their children or descendants who have died without issue, where the same objects which were given should exist in the succession. If they should have been disposed of, they shall succeed to all actions held by the donee in connection therewith, and to the proceeds obtained if they should have been sold, or to the property for which they were exchanged, if they should have been exchanged or bartered.

Article 813. The testator may not deprive his heirs of their forced share is even the cases expressly provided in the law. Neither may he impose over such share any encumbrance, condition or substitution of any kind, save as provided in connection with the widow’s usufruct and excepting the provisions of article 808 in respect of judicially incapacitated children or descendants.

Article 814. The preterition of the forced heir shall not prejudice the forced share. The appointment of the heir shall be reduced prior to any legacies, betterments and other testamentary dispositions. However, the unintentional preterition of children or descendants shall have the following effect:

  1. If all heirs should be passed over, all patrimonial testamentary dispositions shall be annulled.
  2. Otherwise, the appointment of heirs shall be annulled, but any bequests and betterments ordered pursuant to any title shall be valid, to the extent that they are not inofficious. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the appointment of the spouse as heir shall only be annulled to the extent that it is prejudicial to the forced shares of the estate. Descendants of another descendant who has not been passed over shall represent the latter in the ascendant’s inheritance and shall not be deemed to have been passed over. If the forced heirs who have been passed over should die before the testator, the will shall have full force and effect. Except for the forced shares, the dispositions ordered by the testator shall have preference in any event.

Article 815. The forced heir who has been left less than the forced share which corresponds to him by the testator, , pursuant to any title, may demand that his share be supplemented.

Article 816. Any waiver or settlement regarding the future forced share between the person obliged to give it and his forced heirs shall be null and void, and the heirs may claim their share upon the decedent’s death; but they must bring to collation what they received in exchange for the waiver or settlement.

Article 817. Testamentary dispositions which reduce the forced share of the forced heirs shall be reduced, at the request of the heirs, to the extent that they are inofficious of excessive.

Article 818. In order to set the value of the forced share, the value of the property remaining at the time of the testator’s death shall be calculated, deducting any debts and liens, without including therein any which are imposed by the will. The value of any gifts capable of collation shall be added to the net value of the estate.

Article 819. Gifts made to children, which are not betterments, shall be attributed to their forced share. Gifts made to strangers shall be attributed to the part of the estate of which the testator would have been freely able to dispose by testamentary disposition. To the extent that they should be inofficious or should exceed the available share, they shall be reduced in accordance with the rules provided in the following articles.

Article 820. After establishing the forced share in accordance with the two preceding articles, the reduction shall be made as follows:

  1. Gifts shall be respected to the extent that the forced share is covered, reducing or annulling, if necessary, any bequests made in the will.
  2. The reduction of bequests shall be pro rata, without any distinction whatsoever. If the testator should have provided that a certain legacy must be paid with preference to the rest, the former shall suffer no reduction until after having applied the latter in full for the payment of the forced share.
  3. If the bequest should consist of a usufruct or life annuity, whose value is considered greater than the available portion, the forced heirs may choose between complying with the testamentary disposition or delivering to the legatee the part of the estate of which the testator could freely dispose.

Article 821. When the legacy is subject to reduction should consist of a property which cannot be divided easily, the property shall be left to the legatee if the reduction does not reach half of its value; otherwise, it shall be for the forced heirs; but the both must pay the other the respective value in money. The legatee entitled to a forced share may retain the whole property, as long as its value does not exceed the amount of the available portion and the share corresponding to him as forced share.

Article 822. If the heirs or legatees should not wish to exercise the right conferred in this article, the property shall be sold at a public auction, at the request of any of the interested parties.

SECTION 6ª

On betterments

Article 823. The mother or father may dispose, as betterment, in favour of one or several of their children or descendants, whether by birth or adoption, of one of the two thirds of the estate destined to the forced share.

Article 824. No encumbrances may be imposed over the betterment portion other than those set forth in favour of the forced heirs or their descendants.

Article 825. No gift pursuant to a contract inter vivos, whether a simple gift or a gift for valuable consideration, made in favour of children or descendants who are forced heirs shall be deemed a betterment, unless the donor has expressly declared his intention in this regard.

Article 826. The promised to make or not to make a betterment, made by public deed in marriage articles, shall be valid. The testator’s disposition contrary to this promise shall be without force or effect.

Article 827. Betterments, even if evidenced by delivery of property, shall be revocable, unless made pursuant to marriage articles or to a contract for valuable consideration entered into with a third party.

Article 828. A bequest or legacy made by the testator to one of the children or descendants shall not be reputed a betterment unless the testator has expressly declared this to be his intention, or when it should exceed the freely disposable portion.

Article 829. The betterment may refer to a specific thing. If the thing’s value should exceed the third of the estate destined to betterment and the part of the forced share corresponding to the heir who has received the betterment, the latter must pay the difference in cash to the remaining interested parties.

Article 830. The power to better may not be entrusted to another person.

Article 831.

  1. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the spouse may be granted powers in the will so that, upon the death of the testator, he may make betterments in favour of common children or descendants, even charged to the freely disposable third of the estate and, generally, adjudications or allocations of specific property pursuant to any title or in any capacity, or partitions, including those relating to property belonging to the marriage property community which has been dissolved and is pending liquidation. These betterments, adjudications or allocations may be performed by the spouse in one or several simultaneous or successive acts. If the deceased should not have conferred the power to do so in his will or should not have set a term to perform the, the spouse shall have two years counting from the opening of the succession or, as the case may be, from the emancipation of the last of the children had in common. Dispositions made by the spouse relating to specific and determined property, as well as granting ownership rights in favour of the child or descendant favoured with the betterment, shall also confer possession as a result of the latter’s acceptance, save as otherwise provided therein.
  2. The surviving spouse shall administer the property in respect which the powers mentioned in the preceding paragraph are pending.
  3. The spouse, upon exercising the powers entrusted to him, must respect the strict forced shares of any descendants had in common and any betterments and other dispositions made by the decedent in favour of the latter. If the strict forced share of any descendant had in common or the share in the estate provided in his favour by the decedent should not be respected, the aggrieved person may request the rescission of the act of the spouse to the extent necessary to satisfy the injured interest. The decedent’s dispositions in favour of children or descendants had in common and forced shares shall be deemed to have been respected when both are sufficiently satisfied, even if, in whole or in part, this has been done with property belonging only to the spouse who exercises the powers.
  4. The granting of the aforementioned powers to the spouse shall not alter the regime governing the forced shares or the decedent’s dispositions, when the person favoured by one or the other is not a descendant had in common. In such event, the spouse who is not a straight line relative of the person favoured by the betterment shall have powers, as relates to the property earmarked for the exercise of such powers, to act on behalf of

descendants in common in any acts of performance or adjudication relating to such forced shares or dispositions. When any descendant who is not a descendant of the surviving spouse should have been unintentionally passed over in the deceased’s inheritance, the exercise of the powers entrusted to the spouse may not prejudice the share corresponding to the person who was passed over.

  1. The powers bestowed on the spouse shall cease from the time such spouse should marry again or begin de facto a relationship akin to marriage, or have a child who is not a child had in common with the deceased, save as otherwise provided by the testator.
  2. The provisions of the preceding paragraphs shall also apply when persons with descendants in common are not married to each other.

Article 832. Where the betterment should not have been set in respect of a specific date, it shall be paid with the property belonging to the estate, observing, to the extent possible, the rules provided in articles 1061 and 1062 to ensure the equality of the heirs in the partition of the estate.

Article 833. The child or descendant who has been granted a betterment may waive the inheritance and accept the betterment.

SECTION 7ª

Rights of the widowed spouse

Article 834. The spouse who, upon the death of his consort, should not be judicially or de facto separated, if he takes part in the inheritance with children or descendants, shall be entitled to the usufruct of the third of the estate destined for betterment.

Article 835. If there should have been a reconciliation between separated spouses, notified to the Court who heard the separation proceedings in accordance with article 84 of this Code, the surviving spouse shall keep his rights.

Article 836. (No content)

Article 837. If there are no descendants but there are ascendants, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to usufruct over one half of the estate.

Article 838. In the absence of descendants or ascendants, the surviving spouse shall be entitled to the usufruct over two thirds of the estate.

Article 839. The heirs may pay the spouse his part of the usufruct by allocating to him a life annuity, the products of certain property or a sum of capital in cash, by mutual arrangement and, in the absence thereof, pursuant to a court order. Until this is performed, all property in the estate shall be earmarked to pay the part of the usufruct corresponding to the spouse.

Article 840. Where the widowed spouse should concur with children only of the decedent, the former may request that his right of usufruct be satisfied, at the children’s discretion, by allocating a capital sum in cash or a batch of property belonging to the estate.

SECTION 8ª

Payment of the hereditary portion in special cases

Article 841. The testator, or the partitioner expressly authorised by the former, may adjudicate all property in the estate or part of it to one of the children or descendants, ordering him to pay in cash the portion of the estate corresponding to the remaining forced heirs. The appointed partitioner mentioned in article 1057 of the Civil Code shall also have the ability to pay in cash in the same case as the preceding paragraph.

Article 842. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, any of the children or descendants obliged to pay in cash the share of the estate belonging to their siblings may request that such share be paid in property belonging to the estate, with the obligation to observe, in such case, the provisions of articles 1058 to 1063 of this Code.

Article 843. Save in the event of express confirmation thereof by all children or descendants, the partition mentioned in the two preceding articles shall require judicial approval.

Article 844. The decision to pay in cash shall not be effective unless it is communicated to the recipients within one year from the opening of the succession. Payment must be made within another year, save as otherwise agreed. The recipient of the amount shall be entitled to the legal warranties provided in favour of the legatee of a specific amount. After the lapse of such period without the payment having been made, the rights conferred by the testator or the partitioner to the children or descendants shall become void, and the estate shall be distributed according to the general provisions relating to partition.

Article 845. The option mentioned in the preceding articles shall not affect legacies of a specific thing.

Article 846. Such option shall not affect either the partitional provisions made by the testator referring to specific things.

Article 847. For the purpose of setting the sum to be paid to the children or descendants, the value of the property at the time of settling the corresponding portion shall be considered, taking into account any fruits or yields accrued until such time. As of such settlement, credits in cash shall accrue legal interest.

SECTION 9ª

On disinheritance

Article 848. Disinheritance may only take place on one of the grounds expressly set forth in the law.

Article 849. Disinheritance may only be made in a will, expressing therein the legal ground on which it is based.

Article 850. The burden of proof of the truth of the ground for disinheritance shall correspond to the testator’s heirs, if the disinherited heir should deny it.

Article 851. Disinheritance performed without expressing any ground, or on a ground whose certainty, if contradicted, should not be proven, or which is not included among those listed in the four following articles, shall annul the appointment of heir to the extent that it prejudices the disinherited heir; however, legacies, betterments and other testamentary dispositions shall be valid to the extent that they do not prejudice such forced share.

Article 852. Grounds of incapacity to succeed as a result of unworthiness set forth in article 756 under numbers 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6 shall be just grounds for disinheritance, in the terms specifically determined in articles 853, 854 and 855.

Article 853. The following grounds shall also be just grounds to disinherit children and descendants, as well as those provided in article 756 under numbers 2, 3, 5 and 6:

  1. Having refused, without legitimate reason, to support the parent or ascendant who disinherits him.
  2. Having mistreated him in deed or seriously insulted him in speech.

Article 854. The following grounds shall be just grounds to disinherit parents and ascendants, as well as those provided in article 756 under numbers 1, 2, 3, 5 and 6:

  1. Having forfeited parental authority on the grounds expressed in article 170.
  2. Having refused maintenance to his children or descendants without legitimate reason.
  3. An attempt by one of the parents against the other’s life, if no reconciliation between them has taken place.

Article 855. The following grounds shall also be just grounds to disinherit the spouse, as well as those provided in article 756 under numbers 2, 3, 5 and 6:

  1. Having seriously or repeatedly breached marital duties.
  2. Causes which entail forfeiting parental authority, in accordance with article 170.
  3. Having refused support to his children or to the other spouse.
  4. Having attempted to take the life of the testator spouse, if no reconciliation between them has taken place.

Article 856. The subsequent reconciliation between offender and offended shall deprive the latter of the right to disinherit, and shall render the disinheritance already performed without force and effect.

Article 857. The children or descendants of the disinherited heir shall occupy his place, and shall retain the rights pertaining to forced heirs in respect of the forced share.

SECTION 10ª

On bequests and legacies

Article 858. The testator may encumber with bequests and legacies, not only his heir, but also the legatees. The legatees shall only be liable for the encumbrance up to the value of the legacy.

Article 859. When the testator should encumber one of the heirs with the legacy, only such heir shall be obliged to perform it. If the legacy should not encumber any of them in particular, all of them shall be obliged in the same proportion in which they are heirs.

Article 860. The person obliged to deliver the legacy shall be liable for dispossession, if the thing should be indeterminate and should only be mentioned by type or species.

Article 861. The legacy of a thing belonging to another shall be valid if the testator, in making the legacy, should have been aware of the fact. The heir shall be obliged to acquire it and deliver it to the legatee; and, if this should not be possible, to give to the latter a fair estimate thereof.

The burden of proof that the testator knew that the thing belonged to another corresponds to the legatee.

Article 862. If the testator was unaware that the thing bequeathed belonged to another, the legacy shall be null and void. However, it shall be valid if he should acquire it after making the will.

Article 863. The legacy made to a third party of things belonging to the heir or legatee shall be valid, and the latter, in accepting the succession, must deliver the thing subject to the legacy or a fair estimate thereof, with the limitation provided in the following article. The provisions of the preceding paragraph shall be understood without prejudice to the forced share corresponding to forced heirs.

Article 864. When the testator, heir or legatee should only hold one part of or a right in the thing bequeathed, the legacy shall be deemed limited to such part or right, unless the testator should expressly declare that he bequeaths the whole thing.

Article 865. The legacy of things which are beyond the bounds of commerce shall be null and void.

Article 866. The legacy of a thing which, at the time of making the will, should already belong to the legatee, shall be without force and effect, even if any other person should hold a right over it. If the testator expressly provides that the thing is to be released of this right or encumbrance, the legacy shall be valid in this respect.

Article 867. When the testator should bequeath a thing which was pledged or mortgages as security for any payable debts, the heir shall be in charge of paying such debt. If, as a result of the heir’s failure to pay, the legatee should pay it, the latter shall become subrogated to the position and rights of the creditor to claim it from the heir. Any other perpetual or temporary lien to which the thing bequeathed should be earmarked shall pass to the legatee; but in both cases the income and interest or yield accrued until the testator’s death shall constitute a lien of the estate.

Article 868. If the thing bequeathed should be subject to usufruct, use or habitation, the legatee must respect these rights until they are legally extinguished.

Article 869. The legacy shall be rendered without force and effect:

  1. If the testator should transform the thing bequeathed, so that it does not keep the form or the name it had before.
  2. If the testator should dispose, pursuant to any title or for any reason, of the thing bequeathed or a part of it, understanding in this last case that the legacy shall only be rendered ineffective in respect of the part which has been disposed of. If, after such disposal, the thing should return to the testator’s ownership, even if this should be as a result of the nullity of the relevant contract, the legacy shall subsequently still be ineffective, unless the re-acquisition should result from a sell-back covenant.
  3. If the thing bequeathed should wholly perish during the life of the testator, or after his death without fault by the heir. However, the person obliged to pay the legacy shall be liable for dispossession if the thing bequeathed should not have been determined as to its species, according to the provisions of article 860.

Article 870. The legacy of a credit held against a third party, or the forgiveness or release of the legatee’s debt shall only be effective in the part of the credit or debt which subsists at the time of the testator’s death. In the first case, the heir shall fulfil his obligations by assigning to the legatee all remedies to which it is entitled against the debtor. In the second, he shall fulfil his obligations by giving the legatee a receipt of payment, if so requested. In both cases, the legacy shall include any interest owed on the credit or debt at the time of the testator’s death.

Article 871. The legacy mentioned in the preceding article shall become void if the testator, after having made it, should claim his debt from the debtor in court, even the debtor should not have paid at the time of the former’s death. The legacy of a thing which has been pledged made to the debtor shall only be deemed to comprise a waiver of the pledge.

Article 872. The generic legacy of release or forgiveness of debts comprises debts outstanding at the time of making the will, not any subsequent debts.

Article 873. The legacy made to a creditor shall not be allocated to the payment of his credit, unless expressly so provided by the testator. In this last case, the creditor shall be entitled to receive the excess of the credit or the legacy.

Article 874. In alternative legacies, the provisions hereof concerning obligations of the same kind shall be observed, except for any modifications resulting from the testator’s express intention.

Article 875. The legacy of a generic movable thing shall be valid even if the estate includes no things of such type. The legacy of an indeterminate immovable thing shall only be valid if a thing of this type exists in the estate. The choice shall correspond to the heir, who shall fulfil his obligation by giving a thing which is not of the lowest or of the highest quality.

Article 876. Whenever the testator should expressly leave the choice to the heir or the legatee, the former may give or the latter choose what they think best.

Article 877. If the heir or legatee should be unable to make the choice, if it should have been given to him, his right shall pass to the heirs; however, once made, such choice shall be irrevocable.

Article 878. If the thing bequeathed belonged to the legatee on the date of the will, the legacy shall be invalid, even if it should have been disposed of subsequently. If the legatee should have acquired it as a gift subsequently to such date, it may not request any amount as a result; however, if the acquisition should have been made for valuable consideration, he may request the heir to compensate him for the amount given to acquire it.

Article 879. The legacy consisting of paying for someone’s education shall last until the legatee comes of age. The legacy consisting of support shall subsist during the life of the legatee, unless otherwise provided by the testator. If the testator should not have provided a specific amount for such legacies, it shall be set according to the status and condition of the legatee and the amount of the estate. If the testator during his life used to give the legatee a certain amount of money or other things as support, the same amount shall be deemed to have been bequeathed, unless it is notably disproportionate in respect of the amount of the estate.

Article 880. In the event of a legacy of a regular allowance or a specific annual, monthly or weekly amount, the legatee may demand the amount corresponding to the first period from the time of the testator’s death, and for the following periods at the start of each of them, without any obligation to return such amounts even if the legatee should die before the end of the relevant period.

Article 881. The legatee shall be entitled to pure and simple legacies as of the testator’s death, and shall transfer this right to his heirs.

Article 882. When the legacy consists of a specific and determined thing owned by the testator, the legatee shall acquire ownership thereof as of the testator’s death, and shall be entitled to pending fruits or income, but not to income accrued and unpaid prior to such death. The thing bequeathed shall from such time be at the legatee’s own risk and venture, and the legatee shall therefore bear its loss or impairment, and shall benefit from any accretion or improvement thereof.

Article 883. The thing bequeathed must be delivered with all its fittings and in its current condition at the time of the testator’s death.

Article 884. If the legacy should not consist of a specific and determined thing, but of a generic thing or amount, the fruits and interest thereof from the testator’s death shall correspond to the legatee when the testator should have expressly so provided.

Article 885. The legatee may not take possession of the thing bequeathed by his own authority, but must request delivery and possession thereof to the heir or to the executor, where the latter is authorised to do so.

Article 886. The heir must give the exact thing bequeathed, if he is able to do so, and shall not fulfil his obligation by paying its estimated value. Legacies consisting of money must be paid in this species, even if there is none in the estate. Expenses necessary to deliver the thing bequeathed shall be borne by the estate, but without prejudice to the forced share.

Article 887. If the property of the estate should not be sufficient to cover all legacies, payment thereof shall be made in the following order:

  1. Remuneratory legacies.
  2. Legacies of a certain and specific thing which forms part of the estate.
  3. Legacies declared to be preferential by the testator.
  4. Legacies of support.
  5. Legacies of education.
  6. The rest shall be paid pro rata.

Article 888. Where the legatee is unable to or does not wish to honour the legacy, or where the latter should be without force and effect for any reason, it shall be return to the estate, save in the event of substitution or right of accretion.

Article 889. The legatee cannot accept one part of the legacy and reject another if the latter should be burdensome. If he should die before accepting the legacy, leaving several heirs, one of them may accept and the other reject their corresponding share in the legacy.

Article 890. The legatee of two legacies, one of which is burdensome, may not waive the latter and accept the former. If both of them are burdensome or gratuitous, he shall be free to accept them all or reject whichever one he wants. The heir who is at the same time a legatee may waive the inheritance and accept the legacy, or waive the latter and accept the former.

Article 891. If the whole estate is distributed in legacies, any debts and encumbrances thereof shall be distributed pro rata between the legatees in proportion to their shares, unless otherwise provided by the testator.

SECTION 11ª

On executors or administrators

Article 892. The testator may appoint one or more executors.

Article 893. A person incapable of contracting obligations may not be an executor. A minor may not be an executor, even with his parent’s or guardian’s authorisation.

Article 894. The executor may be a general or a specific executor. In any event, executors may be appointed jointly, successively or joint and severally.

Article 895. In the case of executors appointed jointly, only actions performed by all of them in agreement, or those performed by one of them with the legal authorisation of the rest or, in the event of disagreement, the actions agreed by the majority of them shall be valid.

Article 896. In cases of serious urgency, one of the joint executors may perform, under his personal responsibility, any actions which may be necessary, giving immediate account thereof to the rest.

Article 897. If the testator does not clearly provide that the executors are to act joint and severally, or set the order in which they are to fulfil their commission, they shall be deemed to have been appointed jointly and shall perform their duties as provided in the two preceding articles.

Article 898. Executorship is a voluntary appointment, and shall be deemed accepted by the appointee if he does not excuse himself within six days following that on which he becomes aware of his appointment or, if he should already be aware of it, within six days of his becoming aware of the testator’s death.

Article 899. The executor who accepts this position assumes the obligation to perform its duties; but may resign from it by alleging a just cause, at the Judge’s prudent discretion.

Article 900. The executor who does not accept the position or resigns from it without just cause shall forfeit anything which the testator has left him, always excepting his right to a forced share.

Article 901. Executors shall have all powers expressly conferred upon them by the testators which are not contrary to the law.

Article 902. In the absence of specific determination thereof by the testator, the executors shall have the following powers:

  1. To decide and pay for any religious services and for the testator’s funeral as provided by the latter in his will and, in the absence of any provision, according to local custom.
  2. To pay legacies consisting of cash, with the knowledge and approval of the heir.
  3. To supervise the performance of all other mandates contained in the will, and to uphold its validity, if this is just, in and out of court.
  4. To take the necessary precautions for the preservation and custody of the property, with the intervention of the heirs who are present.

Article 903. If the estate should not include sufficient money to pay funerals and legacies, and the heirs should not contribute from their own property, the executors shall promote the sale of any movable property; and, if such property should not be enough, immovable property, with intervention of the heirs. If any minor, absentee, corporation or public establishment should have an interest in the estate, the sale of the property shall be performed with the formalities provided in the law for such cases.

Article 904. The executor who has not been set a specific deadline by the testator, must fulfil his commission within one year counting from his acceptance, or from the end of any litigation initiated concerning the validity or nullity of the will or any provision thereof.

Article 905. If the testator should wish to extend the legal deadline, he must expressly determine the duration of the extension. If he fails to do so, such deadline shall be deemed extended for one year. If, after this extension, the testator’s intentions should still not have been fulfilled, the Judge may grant another extension for the period which is necessary, attending to the circumstances of the case.

Article 906. The heirs and legatees may, by common consent, extend the term of the executorship for the time they believe to be necessary; but, if the agreement should only have been adopted by a majority, the extension may not exceed one year.

Article 907. The executors must give account of the fulfilment of their commission to the heirs. If they should have been appointed not to deliver the property to specific heirs, but to invest or distribute it as provided by the testator in the cases permitted under the law, they shall render account to the Judge. Any disposition by the testator contrary to this article shall be null and void.

Article 908. Executorship is a gratuitous position. However, the testator may provide a remuneration for the executors deemed convenient; without prejudice to their right to charge any amount for any partition tasks or other optional tasks. If the testator should jointly bequeath or provide any remuneration to the executors, the part corresponding to those who do not accept the position shall accrue in favour of those who do exercise it.

Article 909. The executor may not delegate his position unless he has the testator’s express authorisation.

Article 910. Executorship shall terminate as a result of the death, impossibility, resignation or removal of the executor, and by expiration of the deadline provided by the testator, by the law and, as the case may be, by the interested parties.

Article 911. In the cases provided in the preceding article, and in the event that the executor has not accepted the position, the heirs shall be in charge of executing the testator’s intentions.

CHAPTER 3º

On intestate succession

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 912. Intestate succession shall occur:

  1. Where a person dies without having made a will, or his will is null and void or has subsequently become invalid.
  2. Where the will does not contain the appointment of an heir for the whole or part of the property, or does not dispose of the testator’s entire property. In this event, intestate succession shall only take place in respect of the property which has not been disposed of.
  3. In the event of non-fulfilment of a condition imposed on the appointment of the heir, or if the latter should die before the testator, or should reject the inheritance and have no substitute, and there is no right of accretion.
  4. Where the appointed heir is incapable of succeeding.

Article 913. In the absence of testamentary heirs, the law passes the estate on to the deceased’s relatives, the widower or widow and to the State.

Article 914. The provisions relating to incapacity to succeed pursuant to will shall likewise apply to intestate succession.

SECTION 2ª

On kinship

Article 915. Nearness of kin is determined by the number of generations. Each generation constitutes a degree.

Article 916. The series of degrees forms the line, which may be direct or collateral. The direct line is the line consisting of the series of degrees between persons who descend one from the other. The collateral line consists of the series of degrees between persons who do not descend one from the other, but who descend from common stock.

Article 917. The straight line distinguishes between descending and ascending lines. The first unites the head of the family with the persons who descend from him. The second links a person with those from whom he descends.

Article 918. In the different lines, as many degrees as there are generations or persons are counted, discounting that of the parent. In the direct line, one must only go up to the common stock. Thus, the child is one degree away from the parent, two from the grandparent and three from the great-grandparent. In the collateral line one must go up to the common stock, and then down to the persons in respect of whom kinship is calculated. Thus, the sibling is two degrees away from his sibling, three from his uncle who is the sibling of his father or mother, four from his first cousin and so forth.

Article 919. The calculation referred to in the preceding article shall apply for all matters.

Article 920. Kinship on the father’s and on the mother’s side is called full kinship.

Article 921. For inheritance purposes, the relative of nearest degree excludes the more distant relative, save for the right of representation, where applicable. Relatives of the same degree shall inherit in equal shares, save as provided in article 949 concerning full kinship.

Article 922. If there should be several relatives of the same degree, and one or some should not want to or should be unable to inherit, their part shall accrue in favour of the others of the same degree, save for the right of representation, where applicable.

Article 923. When the nearest relative, if there should only be one, or, if there should be several, all nearest relatives called by operation of law should reject the inheritance, the relatives of the next degree shall inherit in their own right without being entitled to represent the person who rejected the inheritance.

SECTION 3ª

On representation

Article 924. The right of representation is the right of the relatives of a person to succeed in all rights he would have had if he had lived or been able to inherit.

Article 925. The right of representation shall always take place in the descending direct line, but never in the ascending line. In the collateral line it shall only exist in favour of the issue of siblings, whether they are full or half-siblings.

Article 926. Whenever a person inherits by right of representation, distribution of the estate shall be made per stirpes, so that the person or persons acquiring by right of representation do not inherit more than their principal would inherit were he alive.

Article 927. If one or several siblings of the deceased should have left issue, the latter shall inherit from the former by right of representation if they stand to inherit in concurrence with their uncles. However, if they are alone, they shall inherit in equal shares.

Article 928. The right to represent a person is not be forfeited as a result of having waived his inheritance.

Article 929. One cannot represent a person who is alive except in the event of disinheritance or incapacity.

CHAPTER 4º

On the order of succession according to the different lines

SECTION ONE

On the descending direct line

Article 930. Succession corresponds in the first place to the descending direct line.

Article 931. Children and descendants succeed their parents and other ascendants, without any distinctions resulting from gender, age or filiation.

Article 932. The deceased’s children shall always inherit from him in their own right, dividing the estate into equal shares.

Article 933. Grandchildren and other descendants shall inherit by right of representation and, if any of them should have died leaving several heirs, the portion which corresponds to him shall be divided between the latter in equal shares.

Article 934. If there should be children and descendants of other predeceased children, the former shall inherit in their own right and the latter by right of representation.

SECTION 2ª

On the ascending direct line

Article 935. In the absence of children and descendants of the deceased, his ascendants shall inherit. Article 936. The father and the mother shall inherit in equal shares. Article 937. In the event that only one parent should survive, he shall inherit the whole estate from his child. Article 938. In the absence of both father and mother, the ascendants nearest in degree shall inherit. Article 939. If there are several ascendants of the same degree belonging to the same line, they shall divide

the estate per capita.

Article 940. If the ascendants should belong to different lines, but be of the same degree, half shall correspond to the paternal ascendants and the other half to the maternal ascendants. Article 941. Within each line, the distribution shall be made per capita. Article 942. The provisions of this Section shall be deemed to be without prejudice to the provisions of articles

811 and 812, which apply to both intestate and testamentary succession. SECTION 3ª

On succession by the spouse and collateral relatives

Article 943. In the absence of the persons comprised in the two preceding Sections, the spouse and collateral

relatives shall inherit, in the order set forth in the following articles. Article 944. In the absence of ascendants and descendants, and before any collateral relatives, the surviving spouse shall inherit all of the deceased’s property.

Article 945. The spouse shall not be called to inherit as mentioned in the preceding article if he should be judicially or de facto separated. Article 946. Siblings and children of siblings shall succeed with preference to other collateral relatives.

Article 947. If only full siblings exist, they shall inherit in equal shares. Article 948. If both siblings and nephews who are children of full siblings should stand to inherit, the former shall inherit per capita and the latter per stirpes.

Article 949. If both full siblings and half siblings should stand to inherit, the former shall take double the share

of the latter in the estate. Article 950. If only half-siblings should exist, some on the father’s side and some on the mother’s, they shall all inherit in equal shares, without any distinction between properties.

Article 951. Children of half-siblings shall inherit per capita or per stirpes, according to the rules set forth for full siblings.

Article 952. (No content)

Article 953. (No content)

Article 954. In the absence of a surviving spouse or siblings or children of siblings, the remaining relatives in the collateral line up to the fourth degree shall inherit, beyond which the right to inherit ab intestato shall not extend.

Article 955. Succession by these collateral relatives shall be verified without any distinction between lines, or preference between them as a result of any full kinship.

SECTION 4ª

On succession by the State

Article 956. In the absence of persons entitled to inherit in accordance with the provisions of the preceding Sections, the State shall inherit, and shall allocate one third of the estate to public or private municipal, charitable, instruction, social activism or professional institutions of the deceased’s domicile, and another third to provincial institutions of the same characteristics of the deceased’s province, with preference in both one and the others in favour of those to which the deceased should have belonged as a result of his profession and to which he dedicated the most activity, even of they are of a general nature. The other third shall be allocated to the Public Debt Redemption Reserve, unless, as a result of the nature of the inherited property, the Council of Ministers should resolve to give it another application, in whole or in particle.

Article 957. The rights and obligations of the State and of the Institutions or entities to whom two thirds of the estate should be allocated pursuant to article 956 shall be the same as for other heirs, but the inheritance shall always be deemed to have been accepted under the benefit of inventory, without the need to make any statement in this respect, for the purposes listed in article 1,023.

Article 958. The appropriation of the estate by the State must be preceded by a judicial declaration of heirship, adjudicating the property in the absence of heirs at law.

CHAPTER 5º

Provisions common to testamentary and intestate inheritances

SECTION ONE

On the precautions which must be adopted when the widow is pregnant

Article 959. Where the widow believes that she has become pregnant, she must report this fact to the persons who hold a right of such nature that it must disappear or be diminished as a result of the birth of the posthumous child.

Article 960. The interested persons mentioned in the preceding article may request the municipal Judge or first instance Judge, if there is one, to issue any orders convenient to prevent the birth from being faked, or to prevent passing off the creature that is born as viable when in fact it isn’t. The Judge shall take care that any measures adopted do not assault the widow’s modesty or freedom.

Article 961. Whether or not the notice mentioned in article 959 has been given, as the time of the birth approaches, the widow must report the fact to the same interested persons. Such persons shall be entitled to designate a trusted person to ascertain the fact of the delivery. If the designated person should be rejected by the patient, the Judge shall make the appointment, which must be of a physician or a woman.

Article 962. The omission of these formalities shall not by itself be sufficient to evidence the faking of the delivery or the newborn’s lack of viability.

Article 963. Where the husband should have acknowledged in a public or private document his certainty of his wife’s pregnancy, she shall be dispensed from the obligation to give notice as provided in article 959, but must comply with the provisions of article 961.

Article 964. The widow who is pregnant, even if she should be rich in her own right, must be supported by the property of the estate, taking into consideration the share to which the posthumous child shall be entitled, if he should be born and be viable.

Article 965. During the time until the delivery is verified, or it becomes certain that such delivery will not take place, either as a result of miscarriage or after exceeding the maximum gestational term, the necessary formalities shall be performed to have the estate secured and administered according to the provisions governing mandatory testamentary execution proceedings.

Article 966. The partition of the estate shall be suspended until verification of the delivery or the miscarriage, or until it results from the passage of time that the widow was not pregnant. However, the administrator may pay creditors, after obtaining a judicial order.

Article 967. After verifying the delivery or miscarriage or after expiration of the term of the pregnancy, the administrator of the estate shall be removed from his position and shall give account of his performance to the heirs or their legitimate representatives.

SECTION 2ª

On properties subject to reservation

Article 968. As well as the reservation provided in article 811, the widower or widow who marries again shall be obliged to reserve in favour of the children and descendants of the first spouse the ownership of all property acquired from his deceased spouse by will, by intestate succession, by gift or by another title for no consideration; but not his half of the marriage property community.

Article 969. The provisions of the preceding article shall apply to property which, pursuant to the title expressed therein, has been acquired by the widower or widow from any of the children of his first marriage and those received from the deceased’s relatives on account of the former.

Article 970. The obligation to reserve property shall cease where the children of the marriage, being of legal age, who are entitled to the property should expressly waive their rights to it, or in the event of things given of left by the children to their father or mother knowing that they had married again.

Article 971. Such reservation shall likewise cease if, upon the death of the father or the mother who married again,, there are no children or descendants from the first marriage.

Article 972. Notwithstanding the obligation to reserve, the father or mother who has married a second time may better any of the children or descendants of the first marriage with the property to be reserved, in accordance with the provisions of article 823.

Article 973. If the father or mother should not have used in whole or in part the power granted by the preceding article, the children and descendants of the first marriage shall inherit the property subject to reservation in accordance with the rules provided for succession in the descending line, even if, pursuant to the predeceased parent’s will, they should have inherited his estate unequally, or if they should have rejected the inheritance. The child who has been justly disinherited by the father or the mother shall forfeit all right to the reserve, but, if he should have children or descendants, the provisions of 857 and article 164 number 2 shall apply.

Article 974. Any disposals of immovable property made by the surviving spouse before marrying a second time shall be valid, with the obligation, as of such marriage, to provide security for the value thereof in favour of the children and descendants of the first marriage.

Article 975. Any disposal of the immovable property subject to reservation by the widower of widow after marrying a second time shall be valid only if, at the time of his death, there should be no children or descendants from the first marriage, without prejudice to the provisions of the Mortgage Law.

Article 976. Disposals of movable property made prior or subsequently to marrying a second time shall be valid, always except for the relevant obligation to compensate.

Article 977. The widower or widow, upon marrying again, shall order an inventory to be made of all the property subject to reservation, shall make an entry in the Property Registry noting the fact that any immovable property is subject to reservation in accordance with the provisions of the Mortgage Law and shall order an appraisal of any movable property to be made.

Article 978. The widower or widow shall likewise be obliged, upon marrying again, to secure by mortgage:

  1. The restitution of the movable property which has not been disposed of in its condition at the time of his death.
  2. Compensation for any impairments caused or which may have been caused as a result of his fault or negligence.
  3. Return of the price obtained for any movable property disposed of or of the price which would have been obtained at the time of their disposal, if it should have been disposed of by gift.
  4. The value of immovable property validly disposed of.

Article 979. The provisions of the preceding articles for the event of a second marriage shall likewise apply for third and subsequent marriages.

Article 980. The reservation obligation imposed in the preceding articles shall also apply:

  1. To the widower who, during the marriage or during his widowhood should have had a non-matrimonial child.
  2. To the widower who adopts another person. The case where the adoptee is a child of the spouse from whom the persons entitled to the reservation are descended shall be excepted. Such obligation to reserve shall be effective, respectively, from the birth or adoption of the child.

SECTION 3ª

On the right of accretion

Article 981. In intestate successions, the share of the heir who rejects the inheritance shall always accrue in favour of his co-heirs.

Article 982. The following is required for the right of accretion to occur in testamentary successions:

  1. Two or more persons must be called to inherit the same estate, or the same portion of the same, without specific designation of shares.
  2. One of the persons called must die before the testator, or reject the inheritance, or be incapable of receiving it.

Article 983. The designation shall be deemed made by parts only in the event that the testator should expressly have determined a share for each heir. The sentence “by halves or in equal shares” or others which, even if they should designate a proportional share do not set it numerically or by signs which make each heir the owner of a separate body of property shall not exclude the right of accretion.

Article 984. The heirs in favour of whom the inheritance accrues shall inherit all rights and obligations which would have been had by the heir who did not want to or was unable to receive it.

Article 985. Among forced heirs, the right of accretion shall only take place where the share of the estate subject to free disposal is left to two or more of them, or to some of them and a stranger. If the rejected share should be the forced share, the co-heirs shall inherit it in their own right, and not pursuant to a right of accretion.

Article 986. In testamentary successions, when the right of accretion does not apply, the vacant share pertaining to the appointed person for whom no substitute has been designated shall pass to the testator’s intestate heirs, who shall receive it with the same liens and obligations.

Article 987. The right of accretion shall also exist among legatees and usufructuaries in the same terms set forth for the heirs.

SECTION 4ª

On acceptance and rejection of the inheritance

Article 988. Acceptance and rejection of the inheritance are entirely voluntary and free acts.

Article 989. Acceptance and rejection of the inheritance shall always have retroactive effect to the time of the death of the decedent.

Article 990. Acceptance and rejection of the inheritance may not be done partially, or be subject to term or condition.

Article 991. No one may accept nor reject an inheritance without being certain of the death of the decedent and of his right to the inheritance.

Article 992. All persons who can freely dispose of their property may accept or reject an inheritance.

The acceptance of an estate left to the poor shall correspond o the persons designated by the testator to qualify such group and to distribute the property and, in the absence thereof, to the persons provided in article 749, and shall be deemed to have been accepted under the benefit of inventory.

Article 993. The legitimate representatives of associations, corporations and foundations capable of acquiring property may accept the inheritance bequeathed to them, but shall require judicial approval, after hearing the Public Prosecutor, to reject it.

Article 994. Official public establishments may neither accept nor reject an inheritance without the Government’s approval.

Article 995. Where the inheritance should be accepted without the benefit of inventory by a married person, and the other spouse should not also accept and give his consent to the acceptance, the property pertaining to the marriage property community shall not be liable for the debts of the estate.

Article 996. If the judgement decreeing incapacitation as a result of physical or mental illness should not provide otherwise, the person subject to conservatorship may accept the inheritance absolutely or under the benefit of inventory.

Article 997. Acceptance and rejection of the inheritance, once made, are irrevocable, and may not be challenged unless they are afflicted by one of the defects which render consent null and void, or in the event that a hitherto unknown will should appear.

Article 998. The inheritance may be accepted absolutely or under the benefit of inventory.

Article 999. Absolute acceptance may be express or implied. Express acceptance is that which is given in a public or private document. Implied acceptance is that which takes place as a result of acts which necessarily entail the will to accept, or which the person would not be entitled to perform without the condition of heir. Acts of mere preservation or provisional administration shall not imply acceptance of the inheritance if they do not entail taking the title or condition of heir.

Article 1,000. The inheritance is deemed to have been accepted:

  1. When the heir sells, gives or assigns his rights to a stranger, to all his co-heirs or to one of them.
  2. When the heir waives the inheritance, even if he does so gratuitously, for the benefit of one or more of his co-heirs.
  3. When he waives it in exchange for a price in favour of all his co-heirs indistinctly; however, if such waiver should be gratuitous and the co-heirs in whose favour it is made should be those in favour of whom the waived share is to accrue, the inheritance shall not be deemed to have been accepted.

Article 1,001. If the heir rejects the inheritance to the detriment of his own creditors, the latter may request the Judge to authorise them to accept it on behalf of the former. The acceptance shall only benefit of the creditors to the extent sufficient to cover the amount of their credits. The excess, if any, shall in no event belong to the heir who has waived it, but shall be adjudicated to the relevant persons according to the rules set forth in this Code.

Article 1,002. Heirs who have purloined or concealed any property of the estate shall forfeit the power to waive the inheritance, and shall become absolute heirs, without prejudice to any penalties in which they may have incurred.

Article 1,003. Absolute acceptance, without the benefit of inventory, shall make the heir liable for all liens of the estate, not just with the property pertaining to the estate, but also with his own property.

Article 1,004. No action may be initiated against the heir to force him to accept or waive the inheritance until nine days after the death of the deceased.

Article 1,005. Where an interested third party should demand in court that the heir accept or reject the inheritance, the Judge must set a deadline, not exceeding 30 days, for the former to make his statement; with the warning that, if he should fail to do so, the inheritance shall be deemed to have been accepted.

Article 1,006. If the heir should die without accepting or rejecting the inheritance, the same right held by him shall pass to his heirs.

Article 1,007. Where several heirs should be called to the inheritance, some of them may accept it and others reject it. Each heir shall have the same freedom to accept it absolutely or under the benefit of inventory.

Article 1,008. Rejection of the inheritance must be made in a public or authentic instrument or in a document submitted before the Judge who is competent to hear the testamentary or intestate proceedings.

Article 1,009. The person who is called to the same inheritance by testament and by intestate succession and rejects it pursuant to the former title shall be deemed to have rejected it pursuant to both. Having rejected it as intestate heir without having received notice of his testamentary title, he may still accept it pursuant to the latter.

SECTION 5ª

On the benefit of inventory and the right to deliberate

Article 1,010. Any heir may accept the inheritance under the benefit of inventory, even if the testator has forbidden it. He may also request the drawing up of an inventory before accepting or rejecting the inheritance, in order to deliberate on this issue.

Article 1,011. Acceptance of the inheritance under the benefit of inventory may be made before a Notary Public or in writing before any of the Judges who are competent to hear testamentary or intestate proceedings.

Article 1,012. If the heir mentioned in the preceding article should be in a foreign country, he may make such declaration before the Spanish diplomatic or consular Agent empowered to exercise the duties of a Notary Public at the place of execution.

Article 1,013. The declaration mentioned in the preceding articles shall have no force or effect if it is not preceded or followed by a true and accurate inventory of all the property of the estate, made with the formalities and within the periods expressed in the following articles.

Article 1,014. The heir who has in his possession the property pertaining to the estate or part of it, and wishes to avail himself of the benefit of inventory or of the right to deliberate, must declare it to the Judge who is competent to hear the testamentary or intestate proceedings, within 10 days following the date on which he should become aware of his condition of heir, if he should reside in the place where the decedent should have died. If he resides outside such place, the period shall be 30 days.

In both cases, the heir must request at the same time the drawing up of the inventory and the summons of any creditors and legatees, so that they may be present if it is to their interest.

Article 1,015. Where the heir does not have in his possession the estate or a part of it, nor has performed any formality in the capacity of heir, the periods expressed in the preceding article shall be counted from the date following expiration of the deadline set by the Judge to accept or reject the inheritance in accordance with article 1005, or from the day on which he should have accepted the inheritance or managed the estate in the capacity of heir.

Article 1,016. Outside the cases mentioned in the two preceding articles, if no claim should have been filed against the heir, the latter may accept the inheritance under the benefit of inventory, or with the right to deliberate, until the action to claim the inheritance should become barred by statute of limitations.

Article 1,017. The inventory shall begin to be drawn up within thirty days following the summons of the creditors and legatees, and shall be completed within another sixty days. If, as a result of the property being at a long distance, or being very substantial, or another just cause, such sixty day period should seem insufficient, the Judge may extend this term for the time deemed necessary, which may not exceed one year.

Article 1,018. If, as a result of the fault or negligence of the heir, the inventory should not begin to be drawn up or should not be completed within the periods and with the solemnities provided in the preceding articles, he shall be deemed to accept the inheritance absolutely.

Article 1,019. The heir who has reserved the right to deliberate must declare to the Court within thirty days counting from the date following completion of the inventory whether he accepts or rejects the inheritance. After the lapse of thirty days without having made such declaration, he shall be deemed to have accepted it absolutely.

Article 1,020. In any event, the Judge may provide for the administration and custody of the estate, at the request of an interested party, during the drawing up of the inventory and until acceptance of the inheritance, in accordance with the provisions applicable to testamentary proceedings of the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 1,021. A person who claims in court an inheritance of which another has been in possession for more than one year, if the court should find in his favour, shall have no obligation to make an inventory to enjoy this benefit, and shall only be liable for the liens of the estate with the property delivered to him.

Article 1,022. The inventory made by the heir who subsequently rejects the inheritance shall benefit any substitutes and intestate heirs thereof, in respect of whom the thirty day period provided to deliberate and to make the declaration provided in article 1019 shall be counted from the day following the date on which they should become aware of the rejection.

Article 1,023. The benefit of inventory generates the following effects in favour of the heir:

  1. The heir is only obliged to pay the debts and other liens of the estate to the extent that they are covered by the property of such estate.
  2. He shall keep all rights and remedies he may have held against the deceased against the estate.
  3. His own property shall not be commingled with the property pertaining to the estate for any purpose to the detriment of the heir.

Article 1,024. The heir shall forfeit the benefit of inventory:

1. If he should knowingly fail to include in the inventory any of the property, rights or remedies of the estate.

2. If, prior to completing the payment of debts and legacies, he should dispose of any property of the estate without judicial authorisation or the authorisation of all interested parties, or if he should fail to give to the sales price the application provided upon granting such authorisation.

Article 1,025. During the drawing up of the inventory and the period to deliberate, the legatees may not claim payment of their legacies.

Article 1,026. The estates shall be deemed to be under administration until all known creditors and legatees are paid. The administrator, whether the heir himself or any other person, shall have, in this capacity, the right to represent the estate to exercise any actions to which it is entitled and to respond to any claims lodged against the same.

Article 1,027. The administrator may only pay the legacies after having paid all creditors.

Article 1,028. If proceedings between the creditors are pending regarding the preference of their credits, such credits shall be paid in the order and according to the degree provided in the final judgement ruling on the graduation of the credits. In the absence of any pending proceedings between the creditors, the first creditors to appear shall be the first to be paid; however, if any of the credits should a preferential credit, no payment shall be made without first providing a surety bond in favour of the creditor with the better right.

Article 1,029. If, after paying the legacies, other creditors should appear, the latter may only claim against the legatees in the event that the estate does not have sufficient property to pay them.

Article 1,030. When it should be necessary to sell the property of the estate to pay the credits and legacies, this shall be done as provided in the Civil Procedural Law in respect of intestate and testamentary proceedings, unless all heirs, creditors and legatees should agree otherwise.

Article 1,031. If the property of the estate should not be sufficient to pay the debts and legacies, the administrator shall give account of his administration to the creditors and legatees who have been paid in full and shall be liable for any detriment to the estate as a result of his fault or negligence.

Article 1,032. After paying creditors and legatees, the heir shall have the full enjoyment of the residue of the estate. If the estate should have been administered by another person, the latter shall give account of his administration to the heir subject to the liability provided in the preceding article.

Article 1,033. The costs of drawing up the inventory and other expenses involved in the administration of the estate accepted under the benefit of inventory and the defence of its rights shall be borne by the same estate. Costs incurred by the heir personally as a result of his wilful misconduct or bad faith shall be excepted from the foregoing. The same shall be understood in respect of expenses incurred in the exercise of the right to deliberate, if the heir should reject the inheritance.

Article 1,034. The heir’s personal creditors may not be mixed in the transactions of the estate accepted by the former under the benefit of inventory until payment of the creditors of the estate and the legatees; however, they may demand the retention or attachment of the residue which may result in favour of the heir.

CHAPTER 6º

On collation and partition

SECTION ONE

On collation

Article 1,035. The forced heir who stands to inherit an estate together with other heirs, must bring to the estate any property or securities received from the decedent during the latter’s life, as dowry, gift or pursuant to any other gratuitous title, to account for it in the regulation of any forced shares and in the partition account.

Article 1,036. Collation shall not take place between forced heirs if the donor should have expressly provided it, or if the donee should reject the inheritance, save in the event that the donation is to be reduced as a result of being inofficious.

Article 1,037. Any property left by testament shall not be deemed subject to collation unless otherwise provided by the testator, in any event respecting any forced shares.

Article 1,038. When grandchildren inherit from their grandparents in representation of the parent, and stand to inherit together with their uncles or cousins, they shall bring to collation all which the parent ought to have collated if he had been alive, even if they should not have inherited it. They shall also bring to collation what they received from the decedent during his life, unless otherwise provided by the testator, in which case the latter’s intentions must be respected unless it should prejudice the co-heirsforced share.

Article 1,039. Parents shall not be obliged to bring to collation the inheritance of their ascendants the property given by the latter to their children.

Article 1,040. Gifts made to the child’s spouse shall also not be brought to collation; however, it they should have been made by the parent jointly to both of them, the child shall be obliged to bring to collation half of the thing given.

Article 1,041. Expenses relating to support, education, illness, even extraordinary illness, learning or ordinary equipment, or the usual presents, shall not be subject to collation. Neither shall expenses incurred by parents and ascendants to cover the special needs of their children or descendants with disabilities be subject to collation.

Article 1,042. Expenses incurred by the parent to give his children a professional or artistic career shall not be brought to collation unless the parent should provide it or they should prejudice the forced share; however, if they are to be brought to collation, the amount which the child would have spent living in the home and in the company of his parents shall be deducted therefrom.

Article 1,043. Amounts paid by the parent to prevent his children being drafted into the military, to pay their debts, obtain an honorific title and other similar expenses shall be subject to collation.

Article 1,044. Wedding presents consisting of jewellery, dress and equipment shall not be reduced as inofficious save in the part exceeding one tenth or more of the amount available by testament.

Article 1,045. It is not required to bring to collation or to the partition the things which were given themselves, but their value at the time of appraisal of the estate. Any physical accretion or impairment subsequent to the gift, and even its total loss by accident or negligence shall be at the donee’s account and risk or benefit.

Article 1,046. The dowry or gift made by both spouses shall be brought to collation by halves to the estate of each of them. The gift made by only one of them shall be brought to collation in his inheritance.

Article 1,047. The donee shall reduce his share in the estate to the extent that he has already received property, and his co-heirs shall receive the equivalent, if possible, in property of the same nature, species and quality.

Article 1,048. If the provisions of the preceding article cannot be verified, if the property given should be immovable property, the co-heirs shall be entitled to receive the same amount in cash or securities at their listed price; and, in the absence of money or listed securities in the estate, other properties shall be sold in a public auction to obtain the necessary amount. Where the property subject to gift should be immovable property, the co-heirs shall only be entitled to receive the same amount in other movable property of the estate at its fair value, at their discretion.

Article 1,049. Fruits and interest of the property subject to collation shall not be owed to the estate until the date on which the succession is opened. The income and interest of the property in the estate of the same species as the property brought to collation shall be taken into account in its regulation.

Article 1,050. If any dispute should arise among the co-heirs regarding the obligation to bring to collation or the objects which must be brought to collation, the partition shall not be interrupted for this reason, with the obligation to provide the corresponding bond.

SECTION 2ª

On partition

Article 1,051. No co-heir will be obliged to remain in a situation of indivision of the estate, unless the testator should have expressly forbidden division. Notwithstanding the foregoing, even if he should have forbidden it, the estate may always be divided based on the grounds of dissolution of companies.

Article 1,052. Every co-heir who has the free administration and disposal of his property may at any time request the partition of the estate. The legitimate representatives of incapacitated persons and absentees must request it on their behalf.

Article 1,053. Either spouse may request partition of the estate without intervention of the other.

Article 1,054. Heirs subject to a condition may not request partition until such condition is fulfilled. However, the other co-heirs may request it, properly securing the right of the former in the event that the condition should be fulfilled; and, until it is known that it has not been or can no longer be fulfilled, the partition shall be deemed to be provisional.

Article 1,055. If, prior to the partition, one of the co-heirs should die, leaving two or more heirs, it will be sufficient for one of the latter to request it; however, all those who take part in the partition in this last capacity must appear under a single representation.

Article 1,056. Where the testator should perform the partition of his estate inter vivos or in his will, such partition shall be applied to the extent that it does not prejudice the forced share of the forced heirs. The testator who, for the conservation of the business or in the interests of his family, wishes to preserve undivided an economic undertaking, or keep control of a capital corporation or a group of them may use the power granted in this article, providing for the payment in cash of the forced share to the remaining interested persons. For such purposes, it will not be necessary to have sufficient cash in the estate for such payment, it being possible to perform such payment with cash taken from outside the estate, and for the testator or the partitioner designated thereby to defer such payment, provided that such period does not exceed five years from the death of the testator; any other manner of extinguishing obligations may also be applied. If the form of payment should not have been set, any forced heir may request his forced share in property belonging to the estate. The provisions of article 843 and paragraph 1 of article 844 shall not apply to the partition thus performed.

Article 1,057. The testator may entrust, by way of an inter vivos or mortis causa act, for the event of his death, the mere power of making the partition to any person who is not one of the co-heirs. In the absence of a will or of a partitioner designated therein, or in the event that the position should be vacant, the Judge, at the request of heirs and legatees representing at least 50% of the estate, and summoning all other interested parties, if their domicile should be known, may appoint a court-appointed partitioner, according to the rules set forth in the Civil Procedural Law for the designation of experts. The partition thus performed shall require judicial approval, save in the event of express confirmation thereof by all heirs and legatees. The provisions of this article and of the preceding article shall be observed even if any of the co-heirs should be subject to parental authority or guardianship, or to conservatorship as a result of prodigality or physical or mental illnesses or deficiencies; but the partitioner must in these cases make an inventory of the properties of the estate, summoning the legal representatives or conservators of such persons.

Article 1,058. Where the testator should not have performed the partition, or entrusted this power to another, if the heirs should be of legal age and should have the free administration of their property, they may distribute the estate as they deem fit.

Article 1,059. Where the heirs who are of legal age should not agree on the manner of making the partition, they shall be free to exercise their rights as provided in the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 1,060. When minors or incapacitated persons are legally represented in the partition, no judicial intervention or approval shall be required. The judicial defender designated to represent a minor or incapacitated person in the partition must obtain the Judge’s approval, unless otherwise provided by the latter at the time of making the appointment.

Article 1,061. Equality must be maintained in the partition of the estate, by making lots or by adjudicating to each of the co-heirs things of the same nature, quality or species.

Article 1,062. Where a thing should be indivisible or would be seriously impaired by its division, it may be adjudicated to one of them, with the condition of paying the others the excess in cash. However, it will be sufficient for a single co-heir to request its sale in public auction, with admission of third party bidders, for this to be done.

Article 1,063. The co-heirs must pay one another in the partition the income and fruits received by each of them from the estate, useful and necessary expenses made therein, and any damages caused by their malice or negligence.

Article 1,064. The expenses of the partition, incurred in the common interest of all co-heirs, shall be deducted from the estate; those made for the particular interest of one of them shall be borne by the same.

Article 1,065. The deeds of acquisition or ownership shall be delivered to the coheir that was adjudicated the property or properties to which they refer.

Article 1,066. Where the same deed should comprise several properties adjudicated to different co-heirs, or a single one which has been divided between two or more of them, the deed shall remain in the possession of the co-heir with the largest interest in the property or properties, and the others shall be provided with authentic copies thereof, at the expense of the estate. If their interests should be the same, the deed shall be delivered, in the absence of an agreement, by lot. If it is an original deed, the person in whose possession remains must also show it to other interested parties at their request.

Article 1,067. If one of the heirs should sell to a stranger his right to the inheritance before the partition, any or all of the co-heirs may become subrogated to the position of the purchaser, reimbursing the purchase price, provided that they do so within one month, counting from the time when they are given notice thereof.

SECTION 3ª

On the effects of partition

Article 1,068. The partition legally performed confers upon each heir the exclusive ownership of the property adjudicated thereto.

Article 1,069. After performance of the partition, the co-heirs are reciprocally liable to each another for dispossession and warranty of the adjudicated property.

Article 1,070. The obligation mentioned in the preceding article shall only cease in the following cases:

  1. When the testator should have performed the partition himself, unless he should appear or may rationally be presumed to have wished otherwise, always respecting the forced share.
  2. When this should have been expressly agreed upon making the partition.
  3. When the dispossession should result from a cause subsequent to the partition, or should be the fault of the heir who was adjudicated the property.

Article 1,071. The co-heirs’ reciprocal obligation to be liable for dispossession is proportional to their respective share in the estate; however, if one of them should be insolvent, the remaining co-heirs shall be liable for his share in the same proportion, after deducting the share corresponding to the heir who is to be compensated. Those who pay on behalf of the insolvent heir shall maintain their action against him for the time when his fortunes should improve.

Article 1,072. If a credit should be adjudicated as a performing credit, the co-heirs shall not be liable for the subsequent insolvency of the debtor of the estate, and shall only be liable for his insolvency at the time of making the partition. There is no liability for credits classified as bad debts; however, if they should be recovered in whole or in part, the amount received shall be distributed proportionally between the co-heirs.

SECTION 4ª

On rescission of the partition

Article 1,073. Partitions may be rescinded on the same grounds as obligations.

Article 1,074. Partitions may also be rescinded on grounds of injury in excess of one fourth of the estate, attending to the value of the things when they were adjudicated.

Article 1,075. The partition made by the deceased may not be challenged on grounds of injury, save in the event that it should prejudice the forced share pertaining to the forced heirs, or if it the intention of the testator should appear or be rationally presumed to have been another.

Article 1,076. The action for rescission on grounds of injury shall last for years, counting from the performance of the partition.

Article 1,077. The heir against whom the claim was made may choose between compensating the damage or consenting to proceed to a new partition. Damages may be paid in cash or in the same things which resulted in the detriment. In the event of a new partition, it shall not affect those who have not been prejudiced or received more than their fair share.

Article 1,078. The heir who should have disposed of the whole or a considerable part of the immovable property which was adjudicated to him may not exercise the action for rescission on grounds of injury.

Article 1,079. The omission of one or several objects or securities of the estate shall not give rise to the rescission of the partition on grounds of injury, but to completion or addition to the estate of the omitted object or securities.

Article 1,080. A partition performed passing over one of the heirs shall not be rescinded unless it is proved that there was bad faith or wilful misconduct on the part of other interested parties; however, the others shall have the obligation to pay the heir who was passed over his proportional share.

Article 1,081. The partition made including a person who was wrongly believed to be an heir shall be null and void.

SECTION 5ª

On payment of the debts of the estate

Article 1,082. Creditors acknowledged as such may object to the partition of the estate until the amount of their credits is paid or secured.

Article 1,083. The creditors of one or several co-heirs may, at their expense, take part in the partition to prevent it being made in fraud or prejudice of their rights.

Article 1,084. After the partition is performed, creditors may request payment of their debts in full by any heir who has not accepted the inheritance under the benefit of inventory, or up to their share in the estate, if they should have admitted it under such benefit.

In both cases, the defendant shall be entitled to summon and call his co-heirs, unless, as a result of the testator’s dispositions or of the partition, he should be the only one obliged to pay the debt.

Article 1,085. The coheir who should have paid more than his share in the estate may claim his proportional share from the remaining heirs. This shall also be observed when he should have paid it in full because the debt was secured by a mortgage or consisted of a specific object. The heir adjudicated the property may in such case claim only the proportional part from his co-heirs, even if the creditor should have assigned his actions in this favour and he should have become subrogated to the latter’s position.

Article 1,086. If any of the properties of the estate should be encumbered with an annuity or perpetual real lien, such lien shall not be terminated, even if it should be redeemable, unless the majority of the co-heirs agree. If they should not agree, or if the lien should be irredeemable, its value or capital shall be deducted from the value of the property, and the latter shall pass, together with the lien, to the person who wins it by lot or by adjudication.

Article 1,087. The co-heir who is creditor of the deceased may claim from the others the payment of his credit, after deducting the proportional share which corresponds to him in his capacity as heir, and without prejudice to the provisions of section five chapter V of this title.

BOOK IV

On obligations and contracts

TITLE ONE

On obligations

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,088. All obligations consist of giving, doing or refraining from doing something.

Article 1,089. Obligations arise from the law, from contracts and quasi-contracts and from unlawful acts or omissions or those in which there is any kind of fault or negligence.

Article 1,090. Obligations arising from the law are not presumed. Only those expressly determined in this Code or in special statutes shall be enforceable, and they shall be governed by the provisions of the statute which created them; and, for matters not provided therein, by the provisions of the present book.

Article 1,091. Obligations arising from contracts have the force of law between the contracting parties and must be complied with in accordance with the provisions thereof.

Article 1,092. Civil obligations arising from crimes or misdemeanours shall be governed by the provisions of the Criminal Code.

Article 1,093. Those which arise from acts or omissions in which there has been fault or negligence, for which there is no criminal punishment under the law, shall be subject to the provisions of chapter 2 title XVI of this book.

CHAPTER 2º

On the nature and effects of obligations

Article 1,094. The person obliged to give something is also obliged to preserve it with the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias.

Article 1,095. The creditor is entitled to the fruits of the thing from the time when the obligation to deliver it should arise. Notwithstanding the foregoing, he shall not acquire a right in rem over it until it is delivered to him.

Article 1,096. Where a specific thing is to be delivered, the creditor may compel the debtor to perform delivery, irrespective of the rights granted to him under article 1101. If the thing should be indeterminate or generic he may request the performance of the obligation at the debtor’s expense. If the obligor should default on his obligation, or should have undertaken to deliver the same thing to two or more different persons, he shall be liable for any fortuitous events until delivery thereof.

Article 1,097. The obligation to give a specific thing comprises that of delivering all its fittings, even if they have not been mentioned.

Article 1,098. If the person obliged to do something should fail to do it, it shall be ordered to be done at his expense. The same shall also be observed if he should perform contravening the content of the obligation. Likewise, he may be ordered to undo anything which was done badly.

Article 1,099. The provisions of the second paragraph of the preceding article shall also be observed where the obligation consists of not doing something and the debtor should do what he was forbidden to do.

Article 1,100. Persons obliged to deliver or to do something shall incur in default from the time on which the creditor judicially or extra-judicially demands performance of their obligation. However, the creditor’s intimation shall not be necessary for the existence of default:

  1. Where the obligation or the law should expressly provide it.
  2. Where it should result from the nature and circumstances of the obligation that the designation of the time in which the thing was to be delivered or the service to be performed was a decisive factor to establish the obligation. In reciprocal obligations, neither of the obligors shall incur in default if the other does not perform or does not agree to duly perform of his obligation. Default shall begin for the other obligor from the time that one of the obligors performs his obligation.

Article 1,101. Persons who, in the performance of their obligations, should incur in wilful misconduct, negligence or default, and those who in any way should contravene the content of the obligation shall be subject to compensation of any damages caused.

Article 1,102. Liability arising from wilful misconduct is enforceable for all obligations. Waiver of the action to enforce it shall be null and void.

Article 1,103. Liability arising from negligence is equally enforceable in the performance of all kinds of obligations; but may be moderated by the Courts on a case-by-case basis.

Article 1,104

The debtor’s fault or negligence consists of the omission of the diligence required by the nature of the obligation that corresponds to the circumstances of the persons, the time and the place.

Where the obligation should not express the diligence to be used in its performance, the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias shall be required.

Article 1,105. Outside the cases expressly mentioned in the law, and those in which the obligation should require it, no one shall be liable for events which cannot be foreseen or which, being foreseen, should be inevitable.

Article 1,106. Damage compensation comprises not just the value of the loss suffered, but also that of the gain which the creditor has failed to obtain, save for the provisions of the following articles.

Article 1,107. The damages for which the debtor in good faith shall be liable are those which are foreseen or which could have been foreseen at the time of contracting the obligation and which are a necessary consequence of his failure to perform. In the event of wilful misconduct the debtor shall be liable for all damages which are known to have arisen from the failure to perform the obligation.

Article 1,108. If the obligation should consist of the payment of an amount of money, and the debtor should incur in default, unless otherwise agreed damages shall consist of paying the agreed interest and, in the absence of an agreement, the legal interest.

Article 1,109. Interest outstanding shall accrue the legal interest from the time that it is judicially demanded, even if the obligation is silent on this point. For commercial transactions the provisions of the Commercial Code shall apply. Pawnshops and Savings Banks shall be governed by their special regulations.

Article 1,110. Receipt by the creditor of the capital amount, without any reservation as to interest, shall extinguish the debtor’s obligations in respect of the latter. Receipt of the last instalment of the debt, where the creditor should also fail to make reservations, shall extinguish the obligation in respect of prior instalments.

Article 1,111. After pursuing all property in the debtor’s possession to enforce their debts, creditors may exercise all rights and remedies of the debtor for the same purpose, excepting those which are inherent to his person; they may also challenge any acts which the debtor has performed in fraud of their right.

Article 1,112. All rights acquired pursuant to an obligation are transferable subject to the laws, unless otherwise agreed.

CHAPTER 3º

On the different kinds of obligations

SECTION ONE

On pure and conditional obligations

Article 1,113. Any obligation whose performance does not depend on a future or uncertain event, or on a past event of which the interested parties are unaware, shall be enforceable from the present. Likewise, any obligation containing a condition subsequent shall be enforceable, without prejudice to the effects of termination thereof.

Article 1,114. In conditional obligations the acquisition of rights, and the termination or loss of rights already acquired, shall depend on the event constituting the condition.

Article 1,115. Where the performance of the condition should depend on the exclusive will of the debtor, the conditional obligation shall be null and void. It should depend on chance or on the will of the third party, the obligation shall have full force and effect in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

Article 1,116. Impossible conditions, those contrary to good customs and those forbidden by the law shall annul the obligation which depends on them. The condition of not doing an impossible thing shall be deemed not written.

Article 1,117. The condition that an event is to take place within a specific period shall extinguish the obligation upon the lapse of such period, or when it becomes evident that the event is not going to take place.

Article 1,118. The condition that a certain event does not take place within a specific time shall make the obligation become effective after the lapse of the period provided, or when it becomes evident that the event cannot occur. If no specific period should have been set, the condition must be deemed to have been fulfilled within the time which plausibly would have been set, attending to the nature of the obligation.

Article 1,119. The condition shall be deemed fulfilled when the obligor should voluntarily prevent its fulfilment.

Article 1,120. The effects of the conditional obligation to give, after fulfilment of the condition, shall retroact to the date of constitution of the obligation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, where the obligation should impose reciprocal obligations to the interested parties, the fruits and interest of the time in which the condition should have remained pending fulfilment shall be deemed offset against one another. If the obligation should be unilateral, the debtor shall be entitled to the fruits and interest received, unless, as a result of the nature and circumstances of the obligation, it should be inferred that the intention of the person who constituted it was another. In obligations to do and not to do something, the Court shall determine, on a case-by-case basis, the retroactive effect of the fulfilled condition.

Article 1,121. The creditor may exercise the relevant actions for the conservation of his right before fulfilment of the conditions. The debtor may recover anything he has paid during the same time.

Article 1,122. Where the conditions should have been set with the intention to suspend the effectiveness of the obligation to give, the following rules shall be observed, in the event that the thing should be improved, lost or impaired while the condition remains pending:

  1. If the thing was lost with no fault on the part of the debtor, the obligation shall be extinguished.
  2. If the thing was lost by the debtor’s fault, the latter shall be obliged to compensate any damages. The thing shall be deemed to have been lost when it should perish, become beyond the bounds of commerce or disappear in such a way that the parties are unaware of its existence or it cannot be recovered.
  3. Where the thing should be impaired with no fault on the part of the debtor, the impairment shall be borne by the creditor.
  4. If it should be lost by the debtor’s fault, the creditor may choose between termination of the obligation and performance thereof, with compensation of damages in both cases.
  5. If the thing should improve as a result of its nature or time, the improvements shall inure to the benefit of the creditor.

6. It should be improved at the debtor’s expense, he shall have no other right than that which is granted to the usufructuary.

Article 1,123. Where the purpose of the conditions is to terminate the obligation to give, the interested parties, upon fulfilment of the condition, must return to each other what they have received. In the event of loss, impairment or improvement of the thing, the provisions contained in the preceding article relating to the debtor shall be applied to the person who is to return the thing. As relates to obligations to do and not to do, the provisions of the second paragraph of article 1120 shall be observed as concerns the effects of termination.

Article 1,124. The power to terminate obligations is deemed to be implied in reciprocal obligations, where one of the obligor’s should not perform his obligation. The aggrieved party may choose between demanding performance or termination of the obligation, with compensation of damages and payment of interest in both cases. He may also request termination, even after having chosen specific performance, where the latter should be impossible. The Court shall order the requested termination, unless there are justified grounds which authorise him to set a term. The foregoing is understood without prejudice to the rights of third party acquirers, in accordance with articles 1295 and 1298 and with the provisions of the Mortgage Law.

SECTION 2ª

On obligations subject to a forward term

Article 1,125. Obligations for whose performance a certain day has been set shall only be enforceable upon arrival of such date. Certain day shall be deemed to mean a date which must necessarily arrive, even though it is uncertain when it will do so. If the uncertainty consists on whether the day will arrive or not, the obligation is conditional, and shall be governed by the rules of the preceding section.

Article 1,126. Anything paid in advance in obligations subject to a forward term may not be recovered. If the person who paid, when he did so, was unaware of the existence of the forward term, he shall be entitled to claim from the creditor any interest or fruits which the latter has received from the thing.

Article 1,127. Whenever a forward term is designated in obligations, it shall be presumed to have been established for the benefit of both creditor and debtor, unless it should result from the provisions of such obligations or from other circumstances that it has been set in favour of one or the other.

Article 1,128. If the obligation should not set a forward term, but it can be inferred from its nature and circumstances that the parties intended to grant a term to the debtor, the Courts shall set the duration thereof. The Courts shall also set the duration of the term where it has been left to the will of the debtor.

Article 1,129. The debtor shall lose any right to make use of the term:

  1. Where, after contracting the obligation, he should become insolvent, save if he should secure the debt.
  2. Where he should fail to provide the creditor with the security which he has undertaken to provide.
  3. Where, by his own acts, he should have reduced such security after having provided it, and when, as a result of a fortuitous event, such security should disappear, unless it is immediately replaced by other new equally safe security.

Article 1,130. If the term of the obligation is set by days counting from specific date, such date shall be excluded from the calculation, which must begin on the following day.

SECTION 3ª

On alternative obligations

Article 1,131. The obligor alternatively obliged to perform several undertakings must perform in full one of them. The creditor cannot be compelled to receive part of one part of the other.

Article 1,132. The choice corresponds to the debtor, unless expressly granted to the creditor. The debtor shall not be entitled to choose impossible or unlawful services, or those which could not have been the subject matter of the obligation.

Article 1,133. The choice shall only be effective as from notice thereof.

Article 1,134. The debtor shall lose his right to choose when, out of the undertakings which he is alternatively obliged to perform, only one should be capable of being performed.

Article 1,135. The creditor shall be entitled to damage compensation where, by the debtor’s fault, all things which alternatively constituted the subject matter of the obligation should have disappeared, or the performance thereof should have become impossible. The compensation shall be set taking as basis the value of the last thing which disappeared, or the undertaking which last became impossible.

Article 1,136. Where the choice should have been expressly attributed to the creditor, the obligation shall cease to be alternative from the date on which such choice is notified to the debtor. Until then, the debtor’s liabilities shall be governed by the following rules:

  1. If one of the things should have been lost by a fortuitous event, he shall perform his obligation by delivering the thing chosen by the creditor among the remainder, or the one left, if only one should remain.
  2. If the loss of one of the things should have occurred by the debtor’s fault, the creditor may claim any of the things which subsist, or the price of that which should have disappeared by the debtor’s fault.
  3. If all things should have been lost by the debtor’s fault, the creditor’s choice shall relate to the value of the things. The same rules shall apply to obligations to do or not do, in the event that one or all of the undertakings should become impossible.

SECTION 4ª

On joint and joint and several obligations

Article 1,137. The coincidence of two or more creditors or two or more debtors in a single obligation shall not imply that each of them is entitled to request or that each of them must perform in full the things constituting the subject matter thereof. This shall only take place where the obligation expressly determines it, being created as a joint and several obligation.

Article 1,138. Unless it should result otherwise from the text of the obligations mentioned in the preceding article, the credit or debit shall be presumed divided in as many equal shares as there are creditors or debtors, and they shall be deemed to be different credits or debits.

Article 1,139. If the division should be impossible, only a collective act of the creditors shall prejudice their rights, and the debt may only be enforced by acting against all debtors. If one of them should be insolvent, the others shall not be obliged to make up for his failure.

Article 1,140. Joint and severability may exist even if the creditors and debtors are not bound in the same manner and by the same terms and conditions.

Article 1,141. Each of the joint and several creditors may do what is useful to the rest, but not what is prejudicial to them. Actions exercised against any of the joint and several debtors shall prejudice all of them.

Article 1,142. The debtor may pay the debt to any of the joint and several creditors; but, if any of them should have filed a judicial claim against him, he must make his payment to such creditor.

Article 1,143. Novation, setoff, confusion or forgiveness of the debt made by any of the joint and several creditors or with any of the debtors of the same class shall extinguish the obligation, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1146. The creditor who has performed any of these acts and the creditor who collects the debt shall be liable to the others for their share of the obligation.

Article 1,144

The creditor may go against any of the joint and several debtors or against all of them simultaneously. Claims initiated against one of them shall not be an obstacle for any which may be subsequently filed against the rest, until the debt is collected in full.

Article 1,145. Payment made by one of the joint and several debtors shall extinguish the obligation. The debtor who made such payment may only claim against his co-debtors the part corresponding to each of them, plus the interest accrued on the advance. The failure by a joint and several debtor to perform his obligations as a result of insolvency shall be compensated by his co-debtors, pro rata to the debt of each of them.

Article 1,146. Acquittal or forgiveness by the creditor of the share affecting one of the joint and several debtors shall not release him from his liability to his co-debtors, in the event that the debt should have been paid in full by any of them.

Article 1,147. If the thing should have perished or the undertaking should have become impossible without fault by the joint and several debtors, the obligation shall be extinguished. If it should be the fault of any of them, they shall all be liable to the creditor for the price, and for compensation of any damages and payment of interest, without prejudice to the creditor’s action against the party who was negligent or at fault.

Article 1,148. The joint and several debtor may use against the creditor all exceptions resulting from the nature of the obligation and those which are personal to him. He may only avail himself of those which personally correspond to the rest in respect of the share of the debt for which they are liable.

SECTION 5ª

On divisible and indivisible obligations

Article 1,149. The divisibility or indivisibility of the things constituting the subject matter of obligations in which there is a single debtor and a single creditor does not alter or modify the provisions of chapter II of this title.

Article 1,150. Joint indivisible obligations shall be terminated with compensation of damages from the time that either debtor defaults on his undertaking. Debtors who were ready to perform theirs shall not contribute to the compensation with an amount higher than their corresponding share of the price of the thing or the service of which the obligation should consist.

Article 1,151. For the purposes of the preceding articles, obligations to give a specific thing “ad corpus(cuerpo cierto) and all those which are not capable of partial performance shall be deemed to be indivisible. Obligations to do something shall be divisible when their subject matter is the provision of a number of dayswork, the performance of works by metric units, or other analogous things which, by their nature, are capable of partial performance. The divisibility or indivisibility of obligations not to do something shall be decided pursuant to the nature of the undertaking in each specific case.

SECTION 6ª

On obligations with a penalty clause

Article 1,152. In obligations with a penalty clause, the penalty shall replace damage compensation and payment of interest in the event of breach, unless otherwise agreed. The penalty may only be enforced when it should be enforceable in accordance with the provisions of the present Code.

Article 1,153. The debtor may not be released from performing the obligation by paying the penalty, unless such right should have been expressly reserved. Neither may the creditor request jointly the performance of the obligation and the payment of the penalty, unless this power has been clearly granted.

Article 1,154. The Judge shall equitably modify the penalty where the principal obligation should have been performed partially or irregularly by the debtor.

Article 1,155. The nullity of the penalty clause shall not entail the nullity of the principal obligation. The nullity of the principal obligation shall entail the nullity of the penalty clause.

CHAPTER 4º

On the extinguishing of obligations

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Article 1,156. Obligations are extinguished: By their payment or performance. By the loss of the thing owed. By forgiveness of the debt. By confusion of the rights of creditor and debtor. By setoff. By novation.

SECTION ONE

On payment

Article 1,157. A debt shall not be deemed to have been paid until complete delivery of the things or performance of the undertaking of which the obligation consisted.

Article 1,158. Any person may perform payment, whether or not he has an interest in the performance of the obligation and irrespective of whether the debtor knows and approves or is unaware of it. A person who pays on behalf of another may claim against the debtor what he has paid, unless he has done so against the debtor’s express will. In this last case, he may only recover from the debtor the part in which such payment should have been useful to the latter.

Article 1,159. A person who pays in the debtor’s name where the latter is unaware of it may not compel the creditor to become subrogated to his rights.

Article 1,160. In obligations to give something, payment made by a person who did not have the free disposal of the thing owed and capacity to dispose of it shall not be valid. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the payment should have consisted in an amount of money or fungible thing, there shall be no claim may be brought against the creditor who has spent or consumed it in good faith.

Article 1,161. In obligations to do, the creditor may not be compelled to receive the benefit or service from a third party, when the conditions and circumstances of the debtor’s person should have been taken into account in establishing the obligation.

Article 1,162. Payment must be made to the person in whose favour the obligation should have been created, or to another authorised to receive it in his name.

Article 1,163. Payment made to a person incapable of administering his property shall be valid to the extent that it is to his benefit. Likewise, payment made to a third party, to the extent that it is to the benefit of the creditor shall also be valid.

Article 1,164. Payment made in good faith to the person who is in possession of the credit shall release the debtor.

Article 1,165. Payment made to the creditor by the debtor after having been ordered by the court to retain the debt shall not be valid.

Article 1,166

The debtor of the thing may not oblige his creditor to receive a different thing, even if it should have equal or greater value than the thing owed. Likewise, in obligations to do something, one act may not be replaced by another against the will of the creditor.

Article 1,167. Where the obligation consists of delivering an indeterminate or generic thing, whose condition and circumstances have not been expressed, the creditor may not demand that it be of the highest quality, nor the debtor deliver it of the lowest.

Article 1,168. Out-of-court expenses arisen on occasion of the payment shall be borne by the debtor. As regards court costs, the Court shall decide in accordance with the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 1,169. Unless the contract should expressly authorise it, the creditor cannot be compelled to receive partially the undertakings of which the obligation consists. However, when the debt should have a liquid and an illiquid part, the creditor may demand and the debtor may make payment of the former without waiting for the settlement of the latter.

Article 1,170. Payment of money debts must be made in the agreed species and, if it should not be possible to deliver such species, in the silver or gold coin which is accepted as legal tender in Spain. Delivery of negotiable promissory notes or bills of exchange or other commercial instruments shall only be effective as payment upon realisation thereof, or if they should have become impaired by the creditor’s fault. Meanwhile, the remedy resulting from the primitive obligation shall remain in suspense.

Article 1,171. Payment must be made at the place designated in the obligation. In the absence thereof, and if the obligation should consist of delivering a specific thing, payment must be made at the place where such thing existed at the time of creating the obligation. In any other case, the place of payment shall be the debtor’s domicile.

On the allocation of payments

Article 1,172. A person who has several debts of the same species in favour of a single creditor, may declare, at the time of making payment, to which of them it must be applied. If he should accept a receipt from the creditor applying the payment, he may not claim against such application, unless there is a cause which invalidates the contract.

Article 1,173. If the debt accrues interest, a payment cannot be deemed to have been made to pay the capital while the interest remains unpaid.

Article 1,174. When the payment cannot be allocated according to the preceding rules, the debtor shall be deemed to have discharged the debt which is most burdensome to him among those which are outstanding. If the latter should be of the same nature and be similarly burdensome, the payment shall be allocated to all of them pro rata.

On payment by assignment of property

Article 1,175. The debtor may assign his property to the creditors as payment for his debts. This assignment, unless otherwise agreed, shall release the debtor from liability up to the net amount of the assigned property. Any arrangements regarding the effect of the assignment entered into between the debtor and his creditors shall comply with the provisions of title VII of this book and with the provisions of the Civil Procedural Law.

On tender of payment and on deposit

Article 1,176. If the creditor to whom the tender of payment is made should unreasonably refuse to admit it, the debtor shall be released of liability by depositing the thing owed. The deposit by itself shall have the same effect where it is performed when the creditor is absent or incapacitated to receive payment when it becomes due, and when several persons purport to have the right to receive it, or when the deed of the obligation has been mislaid.

Article 1,177. In order for it to release the obligor, the deposit of the thing owed must be previously announced to the persons interested in the performance of the obligation. The deposit shall be ineffective if it does not strictly adjust to the provisions governing payments.

Article 1,178. The deposit shall take place by placing the things owed at the disposal of the judicial authority, before whom the tender of payment, where applicable, and the announcement of the deposit in other cases, shall be evidenced. After making the deposit, the interested persons must also be notified.

Article 1,179. The expenses of the deposit, where applicable, shall be borne by the creditor.

Article 1,180. If the deposit has been duly performed, the debtor may request the Judge to order the cancellation of the obligation. While the creditor has not accepted the deposit, or the judicial declaration of its having been properly performed has not been issued, the debtor may withdraw the thing or amount deposited, leaving the obligation to subsist.

Article 1,181. If, after performance of the deposit, the creditors should authorise the debtor to withdraw it, he shall lose any preference he should have over the thing. Co-debtors and co-guarantors shall be released.

SECTION 2ª

On the loss of the thing owed

Article 1,182. The obligation consisting of delivering a specific thing shall be extinguished when the thing should be lost or destroyed without fault on the part of the debtor and before the debtor has incurred in default.

Article 1,183. When the thing has been lost while in the debtor’s possession, the loss shall be presumed to have occurred by his fault and not by a fortuitous event unless there is evidence to the contrary, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1096.

Article 1,184. In obligations to do something, the debtor shall also be released when the undertaking should be legally or physically impossible.

Article 1,185. When the debt of a certain and specific thing should arise as a result of a crime or misdemeanour, the debtor shall not be released from paying its price, whatever the reason for its loss, unless, having offered the thing to the person who was to receive it, the latter should have unreasonably refused to accept it.

Article 1,186. After the obligation has been extinguished as a result of the loss of the thing, the creditor shall hold all actions held by the debtor against third parties as a result thereof.

SECTION 3ª

On remission of the debt

Article 1,187. Remission may be expressed or implied. Both shall be subject to the provisions governing inofficious gifts. Express remission must, furthermore, adjust to the forms governing gifts.

Article 1,188. The delivery of the private document evidencing the credit, made voluntarily by the creditor to the debtor, shall imply waiver of the action held by the former against the latter. If such waiver should be purported to be inofficious in order to invalidate it, the debtor and his heirs may uphold it by proving that the delivery of the document was made as a result of payment of the debt.

Article 1,189. Whenever the private document from which the debt results should be in the debtor’s possession, it shall be presumed that the creditor gave it voluntarily, unless there is evidence to the contrary.

Article 1,190. Remission of the principal debt shall extinguish ancillary obligations thereof; but in the event of remission of the latter, the former shall subsist.

Article 1,191. The ancillary pledge obligation shall be presumed to have been remitted where the thing which has been pledged should be in the debtor’s possession, after having been delivered to the creditor.

SECTION 4ª

On confusion of rights

Article 1,192. The obligation shall be extinguished from the moment when the condition of creditor and debtor are united in a single person. The case where this confusion should occur pursuant to an inheritance shall be excepted from the foregoing, if the inheritance should have been accepted under the benefit of inventory.

Article 1,193. The confusion in the person of the debtor or the principal creditor shall inure to the benefit of the guarantors. The confusion which takes place in the person of any of the guarantors shall not extinguish the obligation.

Article 1,194. Confusion does not extinguish the joint debt, save in the portion corresponding to the debtor or creditor in whom both conditions concur.

SECTION 5ª

On setoff

Article 1,195. Setoff shall take place when two persons, in their own right, are reciprocally creditors and debtors of one another.

Article 1,196. For setoff to apply, the following is required:

  1. That each obligor is a principal obligor and in his turn is the principal creditor of the other.
  2. That both debts consist of an amount of money or, if the things owed are fungible, that they are of the same species and also of the same quality, if the latter should have been designated.
  3. That both debts are outstanding.
  4. That they are due and payable.
  5. That there is no attachment or dispute initiated over any of them by third parties and duly notified to the debtor.

Article 1,197

Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the guarantor may allege setoff as defence in respect of what the creditor should owe his principal debtor.

Article 1,198

The debtor who has consented to the assignment of rights by the creditor in favour of a third party may not use as defence against the assignee the setoff to which he would be entitled against the assignor. If the creditor made the debtor aware of the assignment and the latter did not consent to it, he may use as defence the setoff of debts prior to such assignment, but not of subsequent debts.

If the assignment should take place without the debtor being aware of it, the latter may use as defence the setoff of credits which are prior to such assignment, and subsequent credits until he became aware of it.

Article 1,199. Debts payable in different places may be set off by compensating any freight or movement expenses to the place of payment.

Article 1,200. Setoff shall not apply where one of the debts should result from a deposit or from the obligations of the depositary or borrower under commodatum. Neither may it be used as a defence against a person entitled to support owed pursuant to gratuitous title.

Article 1,201. If several debts capable of setoff should exist against the same person, the order of setoff shall observe the provisions relating to allocation of payments.

Article 1,202. The effect of setoff is to extinguish both debts in the coinciding amount, even if creditors and debtors should be unaware of it.

SECTION 6ª

On novation

Article 1,203. Obligations may be amended:

  1. By changing their subject matter or main terms.
  2. By replacing the person of the debtor.
  3. By subrogating a third party to the creditor’s rights.

Article 1,204. For an obligation to be extinguished by another which replaces it, it is necessary that this be stated categorically, or for the old and new obligation to be wholly incompatible.

Article 1,205. Novation, which consists of replacing the original debtor with a new debtor, may take place without the former’s being aware of it, but not without the creditor’s consent.

Article 1,206. The insolvency of the new debtor who was accepted by the creditor shall not revive the creditor’s action against the original debtor, unless such insolvency should have been prior to the novation and public or known by the debtor upon delegating his debt.

Article 1,207. Where the principal obligation should be extinguished as a result of novation, ancillary obligations may only subsist to the extent that they benefit third parties who have not given their consent.

Article 1,208. Novation shall be null and void when the primitive obligation is null and void, unless the ground for nullity may only be claimed by the debtor, or if acts which are null and void at their source should be validated by ratification.

Article 1,209. Subrogation of a third party to the creditor’s rights cannot be presumed outside the cases expressly mentioned in this Code. For the rest, it will require clear evidence thereof to be effective.

Article 1,210. Subrogation shall be presumed to exist:

  1. When a creditor should pay another preferred creditor.
  2. When a third party who has no interest in the obligation should pay with the debtor’s express or implied approval.

3. When a person with an interest in the performance of the obligation should pay, except for the effects of confusion as concerns his corresponding share.

Article 1,211. The debtor may perform the subrogation without the creditor’s consent when, in order to pay the debt, he has taken the money on loan pursuant to a public deed, setting forth therein his purpose, and expressing in the payment receipt the origin of the amount paid.

Article 1,212. Subrogation transfers the credit to the subrogated person, with all rights ancillary thereto, either against the debtor or against third parties, whether guarantors or holders of a mortgage.

Article 1,213. The creditor to whom partial payment has been made may exercise his right to the remainder with preference to the person who has become subrogated in his position as a result of his partial payment of the same credit.

CHAPTER 5º

On the evidence of obligations

GENERAL PROVISIONS

Article 1,214. [repealed]

Article 1,215. [repealed]

SECTION ONE

On public instruments

Article 1,216. Public instruments are those authorised by a Notary Public or competent public employee, with the solemnities required by the law.

Article 1,217. Documents intervened by a Notary Public shall be governed by the notarial legislation.

Article 1,218. Public instruments constitute evidence, effective even against third parties, of the fact which motivates their execution and of the date thereof. They shall also constitute evidence effective against the contracting parties and their successors, as concerns the statements made therein by the former.

Article 1,219. Public deeds executed to invalidate another prior public deed between the same interested parties shall only be effective against third parties where the content of the former should be noted in the competent public registry or on the margin of the original public deed and of the extract or copy pursuant to which the third party should have acted.

Article 1,220. Copies of public instruments of which there is an original or an official file, challenged by those to whom they prejudice, shall only have evidentiary force when they have been duly collated. If there should be any difference between the original and the copy, the provisions of the former shall prevail.

Article 1,221. In the event of disappearance of the original public deed, the official files, or the original records, the following shall constitute evidence:

  1. First copies made by the public officer which authorised them.
  2. Subsequent copies issued pursuant to a court order, with summons of the interested parties.
  3. Those which, without a court order, should have been taken in the presence of the interested parties and with their consent. In the absence of the aforementioned copies, any others which are thirty or more years old shall constitute evidence, provided that they should have been taken from the original by the officer who authorised them or another person in charge of their custody. Copies which are less than thirty years old or those which were authorised by a public officer who does not meet the circumstances mentioned in the preceding paragraph shall only serve as prima facie documentary evidence. The Courts shall weigh the evidentiary force of copies depending on the circumstances.

Article 1,222. The registration of a document which has disappeared with any public registry shall be weighed according to the rules set forth in the last two paragraphs of the preceding article.

Article 1,223. A public deed which is defective as a result of the Notary Public’s incompetence or another formal defect shall be deemed a private document, if it should be signed by the executors.

Article 1,224. Public deeds of acknowledgement of an act or contract do not prove anything against the instrument in which such act or contract is set forth, if they should differ from it by excess or by omission, unless the novation of the former should be expressly set forth therein.

On private documents

Article 1,225. A legally recognised private document shall have the same value as a public deed between those who executed it and their successors.

Article 1,226. [repealed]

Article 1,227. The date of a private document shall only be effective against third parties from the day on which it should have been entered in or registered with a public registry, from the death of any of the persons who signed it, or from the day on which it should be delivered to a public officer in an official capacity.

Article 1,228. Private entries, records and papers only constitute evidence against the person who has written them in all matters which are clearly provided, but any person who wishes to benefit from them must accept them in the part which is prejudicial to him.

Article 1,229. A note written or signed by the creditor at the foot, in the margin or on the other side of a public deed which was in his possession shall constitute evidence for all matters favourable to the debtor. The same shall be understood of the note written or signed by the creditor on the other side, in the margin or at the foot of the duplicate of a document or receipt which is in possession of the debtor. In both cases, the debtor who wishes to benefit from the provisions which are favourable to him must also accept those which are prejudicial.

Article 1,230

Private documents executed to alter the covenants of a public deed shall not be effective against third parties.

SECTION 2ª

On confession

Article 1,231 to Article 1,239. [repealed]

SECTION 3ª

On personal inspection by the Judge

Article 1,240 to 1,241. [repealed] SECTION 4ª

On expert evidence

Article 1,242 to 1,243. [repealed] SECTION 5ª

On witness evidence

Article 1,244 to 1,248. [repealed] SECTION 6ª

On presumptions

Article 1,249 to 1,253. [repealed]

TITLE II

On contracts

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,254. The contract exists from the time where one or several persons consent to bind themselves vis-à-vis another or others to give something or to provide a service.

Article 1,255. The contracting parties may establish any covenants, clauses and conditions deemed convenient, provided that they are not contrary to the laws, to morals or to public policy.

Article 1,256. The validity and performance of contracts cannot be left to the discretion of one of the contracting parties.

Article 1,257. Contracts shall only be effective between the parties who execute them, and their heirs; except, in respect of the latter, in the event that the rights and obligations arising from the contract should not be transferable, either by nature, by covenant or by the provisions of the law.

If the contract should contain any stipulation in favour of a third party, the latter may demand performance thereof, provided that he should have made known his acceptance to the obligor before it is revoked.

Article 1,258. Contracts are perfected by mere consent, and since then bind the parties, not just to the performance of the matters expressly agreed therein, but also to all consequences which, according to their nature, are in accordance with good faith, custom and the law.

Article 1,259. No one may contract in the name of another without being authorised by the latter or without having his legal representation pursuant to the law. A contract entered into in the name of another by someone who does not have the latter’s authorisation or legal representations shall be null and void, unless it is ratified by the person in whose name it is executed before being revoked by the other contracting party.

Article 1,260. No oath shall be admitted in contracts. If it should be given it shall be deemed not written.

CHAPTER 2º

On the essential requirements for the validity of contracts

GENERAL PROVISION

Article 1,261. There is no contract unless the following requirements are present:

  1. Consent of the contracting parties.
  2. A certain object which is the subject matter of the agreement.
  3. Cause of the obligation established.

SECTION ONE

On consent

Article 1,262. Consent is manifested by the coincidence between the offer and the acceptance over the thing and the cause which are to constitute the contract. If the person who made the offer and the person who accepted it are in different places, there is consent from the time that the offeror becomes aware of the acceptance, or from the time when, after the recipient has sent his acceptance, the offeror cannot be unaware of it without lacking in good faith. The contract shall, in such case, be presumed to have been entered into at the place where the offer was made. In contracts entered into by means of automatic devices, there is consent from the time when acceptance is manifested.

Article 1,263. The following persons cannot give their consent:

  1. Non-emancipated minors.
  2. Incapacitated persons.

Article 1,264. Incapacity, as provided in the preceding article, is subject to the modifications provided in the law, and is understood without prejudice to any special incapacity set forth therein.

Article 1,265. Consent given pursuant to error, duress, intimidation or fraudulent misrepresentation shall be null and void.

Article 1,266. For error to invalidate consent, it must be about the substance of the thing which constituted the subject matter of the contract, or about the conditions thereof which should have been the main reason to enter into it. Error concerning the person shall only invalidate the contract where consideration for such person should have been the main cause thereof. A simple error in counting shall give rise only to its correction.

Article 1,267. There is duress when an irresistible force is applied to extract consent. There is intimidation where one of the contracting parties is induced a rational and founded fear of suffering an imminent and serious harm to his person or property, or to the person or property of his spouse, descendants or ascendants. In order to rate the existence of intimidation, the age and condition of the person must be taken into account. The fear of displeasing persons to whom one owes submission and respect shall not annul the contract.

Article 1,268. Duress and intimidation shall annul the obligation, even if they should have been used by third party who does not take part in the contract.

Article 1,269. Fraudulent misrepresentation exists where, with insidious words or machinations on the part of one of the contracting parties, the other is induced to enter into a contract which he would not have done without them.

Article 1,270. For fraudulent misrepresentation to render a contract null and void, it must be serious and must not have been used by the both contracting parties. Incidental malice shall only oblige the person who used it to compensate damages.

SECTION 2ª

On the subject matter of contracts

Article 1,271. All things which are not beyond the bounds of commerce between men may be the subject matter of a contract, even future things. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no contracts may be entered into regarding the future inheritance other than those whose purpose is to perform the division of an estate inter vivos and other partitional dispositions, in accordance with the provisions of article 1056. Likewise all services which are not contrary to the laws or to good customs may constitute the subject matter of a contract.

Article 1,272. Impossible things or services may not be the subject matter of a contract.

Article 1,273. The subject matter of any contract must be a thing determined as to its species. Indetermination as to amount shall not prevent the existence of a contract, provided that it is possible to determine it without the need for a new agreement with the contracting parties.

SECTION 3ª

On the cause of contracts

Article 1,274. In contracts for valuable consideration, the supply or promise of a thing or service by the other party shall be deemed to constitute the cause applicable to each contracting party; in remunerative contracts,

the service or benefit which is remunerated, and in contracts for pure beneficence, the mere liberality of the benefactor.

Article 1,275. Contracts without cause or with unlawful cause shall have no effect whatsoever. The cause is unlawful when it is against the law or good morals.

Article 1,276. In contracts, the statement of a false cause shall entail the nullity thereof, unless it should be proved that they were based on another true and lawful cause.

Article 1,277. Even if the cause is not expressed in the contract, it is presumed to exist and to be lawful, unless the debtor should prove otherwise.

CHAPTER 3º

On the effectiveness of contracts

Article 1,278. Contracts shall be binding, whatever the form under which they have been entered into, provided that they meet the essential conditions for their validity.

Article 1,279. If the law should require execution of a public deed or another special form for the obligations inherent to a contract to be effective, the contracting parties may compel each other reciprocally to fulfil such form from the moment when consent has been given and the remaining requirements necessary for its validity are present.

Article 1,280. The following must be set forth in a public instrument:

  1. Acts and contracts whose purpose is the creation, transfer, amendment or extinguishing of rights in rem over immovable property.
  2. Leases over the same property for six or more years, provided that they are effective against third parties.
  3. Marriage articles and amendments thereof.
  4. The assignment, rejection and waiver of inheritance rights or those pertaining to the marriage property community.
  5. The power of attorney to marry, the general litigation power of attorney and any special powers of attorney which are to be submitted to a court; the power attorney to administer property, and any other whose purpose is an act drafted or which must be drafted in a public deed, or which is be effective against third party.
  6. The assignment of actions or rights arising from an act which is set forth in a public deed. Likewise, other contracts where the amount of one of the undertakings to be provided by one or both contracting parties exceeds 1,500 pesetas must be set forth in writing, even in a private document.

CHAPTER 4º

On the interpretation of contracts

Article 1,281. If the terms of a contract are clear and do not leave any doubt as to the intention of the contracting parties, they shall abide by the literal meaning of its clauses. If the words seem contrary to the evident intention of the contracting parties, the latter shall prevail over the former.

Article 1,282. In order to judge the intention of the contracting parties, their acts at the time of and subsequently to the contract shall be mainly taken into account.

Article 1,283. However general the terms of the contract are, they must not be deemed to comprise things and cases different from those in respect of which the interested parties proposed to contract.

Article 1,284. If any clause of the contract should admit several meanings, it must be understood to have the meaning most suitable for it to be effective.

Article 1,285. Clauses in contracts must be interpreted in connection with each other, attributing to any doubtful clauses the meaning resulting from the whole.

Article 1,286. Words which may have different meanings shall be understood in the meaning which is most in accordance with the nature and subject matter of the agreement.

Article 1,287. Uses or customs of the country shall be taken into account to interpret any ambiguities in contracts, standing in for the omission of clauses which are usually set forth therein.

Article 1,288. The interpretation of obscure clauses in the contract must not favour the party who caused the obscurity.

Article 1,289. When it should be absolutely impossible to resolve any doubts pursuant to the rules set forth in the preceding articles, if the such doubts should be about accidental circumstances of the contract, and the contract is gratuitous, they shall be resolved in favour of the least transfer of rights and interests. If the contract is for valuable consideration, the doubt shall be resolved in favour of the greatest reciprocity of interests. If the doubts whose resolution is dealt with in the present article should be about the main subject matter of the contract, so that it the intention or will of the contracting parties cannot be known, the contract shall be null and void.

CHAPTER 5º

On the rescission of contracts

Article 1,290. Contracts which have been validly entered into may be rescinded in the cases set forth in the law.

Article 1,291. The following contracts are capable of rescission:

  1. Contracts entered into by guardians without judicial authorisation, provided that the persons who they represent have suffered an injury in more than one fourth of the value of the things which constituted the subject matter thereof.
  2. Contracts entered into on behalf of absentees, provided that the absentee has suffered the injury mentioned in the preceding number.
  3. Contracts entered into in fraud of creditors, when the creditors cannot otherwise recover what is owed to them.
  4. Contracts referring to litigious things, when they have been entered into by the defendant without the awareness and approval of the litigators or the competent judicial Authority.
  5. Any others in respect of which the law should especially provide it.

Article 1,292. Payments made in a state of insolvency on account of obligations which the debtor could not be compelled to fulfil at the time of making them shall also be capable of rescission.

Article 1,293. No contract shall be rescinded as a result of injury, outside the cases mentioned in numbers one and two of article 1,291.

Article 1,294. The action for rescission is subsidiary; it may not be exercised unless the aggrieved party lacks any other legal recourse to obtain reparation of the injury.

Article 1,295. Rescission shall oblige to return the things which constituted the subject matter of the contract, together with their fruits, and the price thereof with interest; consequently, it may only take place when the person who demands rescission may return what he is bound in its turn. Rescission shall also not take place when the things constituting the subject matter of the agreement should be legally in the power of third parties who have not acted in bad faith. In this case, it will be possible to claim for damages against the person who caused the injury.

Article 1,296. Rescission mentioned in number 2 article 1291 shall not take place in respect of contracts entered into with judicial authorisation.

Article 1,297. All contracts pursuant to which the debtor should dispose of property pursuant to gratuitous title are presumed to have been entered into in fraud of creditors. Likewise, disposals for valuable consideration made by persons sentenced in a judgement in any instance or an against which an order to attach property has been issued shall also be presumed to be fraudulent.

Article 1,298. The person who acquired in bad faith the things disposed of in fraud of creditors must compensate the creditors for any damages caused by the disposal, whenever, for any reason, it should be impossible for him to return them.

Article 1,299. The action to claim for rescission must be initiated within four years. For persons subject to guardianship and for absentees, these four years shall not begin to count until the incapacity of the former has ceased, or the domicile of the latter becomes known.

CHAPTER 6º

On the nullity of contracts

Article 1,300. Contracts which meet the requirements expressed in article 1261 may be annulled, even if there is no injury to the contracting parties, provided that they suffer from any defects which invalidate them in accordance with the law.

Article 1,301. The action for annulment must be initiated within four years. This period shall begin to count: In cases of duress or intimidation, from the date on which the latter should have ceased. In those of error, fraudulent misrepresentation, or falseness of the cause, the period shall count from the consummation of the contract. When the action refers to contracts entered into by minors and incapacitated persons, from the time when they cease to be under guardianship. If the action purports to invalidate acts or contracts performed by one of the spouses without the other’s consent, when this consent should be necessary, the period shall count from the date of dissolution of marriage property estate or the marriage, unless the spouse should have been sufficiently aware of such act or contract before that.

Article 1,302. The action for annulment of contracts may be exercised by those who are bound thereby on a principal or on a subsidiary basis. Capable persons may not, however, allege the incapacity of those with whom they contracted; neither may those who caused the duress or intimidation, or acted with fraudulent misrepresentation or provoked the error base their action in these defects of the contract.

Article 1,303. Upon an obligation’s being declared null and void, the contracting parties must reciprocally return to one another the things which constituted the subject matter of the contract, with their fruits, and the price, with interest, save as provided in the following articles.

Article 1,304. When the nullity should arise from the incapacity of one of the contracting parties, the incapable person is only obliged to return to the extent that he was enriched by the thing or price he received.

Article 1,305. Where the nullity should arise from the unlawfulness of the cause or subject matter of the contract, if such fact constitutes a crime or misdemeanour common to both contracting parties, they shall have no action against each other, and a criminal action shall be brought against them, and, further, the things or price which constituted the subject matter of the contract shall have the application provided in the Criminal Code as relates to the proceeds or instruments of the crime or misdemeanour. This provision shall apply to the case where there should only be a crime or misdemeanour on the part of one of the contracting parties; however, the party who was not guilty may claim what he has given, and shall not be obliged to perform what he should have promised.

Article 1,306. If the deed which constitutes the unlawful cause should not constitute a crime or misdemeanour, the following rules shall be observed:

  1. Where both contracting parties are at fault, none of them may recover what he has given pursuant to the contract, or claim the performance of what the other should have offered.
  2. Where only one contracting party is at fault, he may not recover what he has given pursuant to the contract, or demand the performance of what he should have been offered. The other, who was a stranger to the unlawful cause, may claim what he has given, without the obligation to perform what he should have offered.

Article 1,307. Whenever the person who is obliged pursuant to the declaration of nullity to return the thing cannot return it because it has been lost, he must return any fruits received and the value of the thing at the time of its loss, plus interest from the same date.

Article 1,308. While one of the contracting parties does not return that which he is obliged to return pursuant to the declaration of nullity, the other cannot be compelled to perform in his turn what is incumbent upon him.

Article 1,309. The action for annulment shall be extinguished from the moment where the contract is validly confirmed.

Article 1,310. Only contracts which meet the requirements expressed in article 1261 are capable of confirmation.

Article 1,311. Confirmation may be express or implied. Implied confirmation shall be deemed to exist where, knowing the grounds for nullity and after such grounds have ceased, the person entitled to invoke them should perform an act which necessarily implies the intention to waive them.

Article 1,312. Confirmation does not require the agreement of the contracting party who is not entitled to exercise the action for annulment.

Article 1,313. Confirmation purifies the contract from the defects from which it suffered from the time of its execution.

Article 1,314. The action for the annulment of contracts shall also be extinguished when the thing constituting their subject matter should have been lost pursuant to the wilful misconduct or negligence of the person entitled to exercise it.

If the ground for the action is the incapacity of one of the contracting parties, the loss of the thing shall not be an obstacle for the action to prevail, unless it should have taken place as a result of the wilful misconduct or negligence of the claimant, after having acquired full capacity.

TITLE III

On the marriage property regime

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,315. The property regime of the marriage shall be as stipulated by the spouses in marriage articles, without other limitations than as provided in this Code.

Article 1,316. In the absence of marriage articles, or if these should be ineffective, the regime shall be the community of joint assets (sociedad de gananciales).

Article 1,317. The amendments of the marriage property regime performed during the marriage shall in no event prejudice rights already acquired by third parties.

Article 1,318. The property of the spouses is subject to the payment of household expenses. Where one of the spouse is should breach his duty to contribute to the payment of these expenses, the Judge, at the request of the other, shall issue any precautionary measures deemed convenient, to ensure payment thereof, and the necessary advances, or to provide for future needs. When a spouse should lack sufficient property of his own, the necessary expenses caused in litigation against the other spouse, without bad faith or temerity, or against a third party if they inure to the benefit of the family, shall be charged to the common property and, in the absence thereof, shall be debited to the other spouse’s own property, when the latter’s economic position prevents the former from obtaining legal aid, pursuant to the provisions of the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 1,319. Either spouse may perform acts addressed to attending the ordinary needs of the family en trusted to his care, in accordance with local custom and with the circumstances of the family. The common property, the property belonging to the spouse who contracts the debt and, on a subsidiary basis, the property of the other spouse shall be liable for debts contracted in the exercise of this power. The spouse who should have contributed his own property for the discharge of such needs shall be entitled to reimbursement in accordance with his marriage property regime.

Article 1,320. The consent of both spouses or, as the case may be, judicial authorisation shall be required to dispose of rights over the marital home and the furniture ordinarily used by the family, even if such rights should belong to a single spouse. The erroneous or false declaration concerning the nature of the home by the person who disposes of it shall not prejudice the acquirer in good faith.

Article 1,321. Upon the death of one of the spouses, the clothes, furniture and fittings constituting the appurtenances of the common marital home of the spouses shall be delivered to the surviving spouse, without counting it as part of his assets. The appurtenances shall not be deemed to comprise any jewellery, artistic and historic objects and others of extraordinary value.

Article 1,322. Where the Law should require that one of the spouses must act with the other’s consent for an act of administration or disposal, acts performed without it and which are not confirmed in an express or implied manner, may be a annulled at the request of the spouse whose consent was lacking, or of his heirs. Notwithstanding the foregoing, acts pursuant to gratuitous title over common property shall be null and void in the absence of the consent of the other spouse.

Article 1,323. The husband and wife may transfer to one another property and rights pursuant to any title and enter into all kinds of contracts with each other.

Article 1,324. In order to prove between spouses that certain property is the property of one of them, the confession of the other shall be sufficient, but such confession in itself shall not prejudice the forced heirs of the spouse who makes the confession, or creditors, whether they are creditors of the community or of each of the spouses.

CHAPTER 2º

On marriage articles

Article 1,325. In marriage articles the executors may stipulate, amend or replace the property regime of their marriage or any other provisions as a result thereof.

Article 1,326. Marriage articles may be executed before or after performing the marriage.

Article 1,327. Marriage articles must be set forth in a public need to be valid.

Article 1,328. Any stipulation contrary to the Laws or to good customs, or which limits the equal rights of each spouse shall be null and void.

Article 1,329. The non-emancipated minor who, in accordance with the Law, is able to marry, may execute marriage articles, but he shall need the agreement and consent of his parents or guardian, unless he merely agrees to the separation or participation regime.

Article 1,330. The person who has been judicially incapacitated may only execute marriage articles with the assistance of his parents, guardian or conservator.

Article 1,331. The amendment of marriage articles shall require, to be valid, to have been performed with the attendance and agreement of the persons who took part therein as executors, if they should be alive and the amendment should affect rights granted by such persons.

Article 1,332. The existence of covenants which constitute amendments of prior marriage articles shall be indicated by means of a note in the public deed containing the prior stipulations, and the Notary Public shall include it in any copies he may issue.

Article 1,333. In any entry of a marriage in the Civil Registry, a mention shall be made, as the case may be, of any marriage articles executed, and of any covenants, judicial resolutions and other facts which amend the marriage property regime. If the former or the latter should affect immovable property, a note thereof shall be entered in the Property Registry, in the form and for the purposes provided in the Mortgage Law.

Article 1,334. All provisions of marriage articles for the event of a future marriage shall become without force and effect in the event that such marriage should not take place within one year.

Article 1,335. The invalidity of marriage articles shall be governed by the general rules governing contracts. The consequences of annulment shall not prejudice third parties in good faith.

CHAPTER 3º

On gifts by reason of marriage

Article 1,336. Gifts made by any person in favour of one or both spouses, before the marriage and in consideration thereof are gifts by reason of marriage.

Article 1,337. These gifts are governed by the ordinary rules to the extent that they are not amended by the following articles.

Article 1,338. The non-emancipated minor who is able to marry in accordance with the Law may also, in marriage articles or outside of them, make gifts by reason of his marriage, with the authorisation of his parent or guardian. To accept them, the provisions of title II of book III of this Code shall apply.

Article 1,339. Property donated jointly to the spouses shall belong to both of them on an ordinary pro indiviso basis and in equal shares, unless the donor has provided otherwise.

Article 1,340. A person who gives or promises by reason marriage shall only be liable for dispossession or hidden defects if he has acted in bad faith.

Article 1,341. The future spouses may give to each other their existing property by reason of marriage. Likewise, they may, in marriage articles, prior to the marriage, give each other future property, only for the event of death, and to the extent provided in the provisions concerning testamentary succession.

Article 1,342. Gifts pursuant to marriage shall be rendered without force and effect if the marriage should not take place within one year.

Article 1,343. These gifts shall be revocable on the grounds common to all gifts, except in the event of any surviving or subsequently born children. In gifts granted by third parties, the annulment of the marriage for any reason, and separation and divorce if the events which caused it are attributable to the donee spouse according to the judgement, shall be deemed breach of conditions, as well as any other specific conditions to which the gift may have been subject. In gifts granted by the prospective spouses, the annulment of the marriage if the donee should have acted in bad faith shall be deemed a breach of conditions, as well as any other specific conditions to which the gift may have been subject. The donee’s incurring in grounds for disinheritance pursuant to article 855 or where, according to the judgement, the grounds for separation or divorce should be attributable to him shall likewise be deemed to constitute ingratitude.

CHAPTER 4º

On the community of joint assets

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 1,344. The community of joint assets makes any gains or profits obtained indistinctly by either spouse common to the spouses, and shall be allocated by halves upon dissolution thereof.

Article 1,345. The community of joint assets shall begin upon entering the marriage or, subsequently, upon agreement thereof in marriage articles.

SECTION 2ª

On exclusive property and property held in common

Article 1,346. The following property is exclusive to each of the spouses:

  1. Property and rights which belonged to him at the start of the community.
  2. Those which he acquires subsequently pursuant to gratuitous title.
  3. Those acquired at the cost of or as a replacement for exclusive property.
  4. Those acquired pursuant to a right of pre-emption pertaining to a single spouse.
  5. Patrimonial property rights inherent to the person and which are not transferable inter vivos.
  6. Compensation and damages to the person of one of the spouses or to his exclusive property.
  7. Clothes and objects for personal use which are not of extraordinary value.
  8. The instruments necessary for the conduct of his profession or work, unless they form integral part of or are appurtenances of an establishment or undertaking held in common. Property mentioned in sections 4 and 8 shall not lose its nature as exclusive property if its acquisition was made with common funds; however, in this case, the community shall be the creditor of the spouse who owns it for the value paid for it.

Article 1,347. The following property is property held in common:

  1. Property obtained pursuant to the work or industry of either spouse.
  2. Fruits, income or interest generated by exclusive and common property.
  3. Property is acquired for valuable consideration charged to the assets held in common, irrespective of whether the acquisition is made to the community or for only one of the spouses.
  4. That which is acquired pursuant to a right of pre-emption held in common, even if it should be acquired with funds held on an exclusive basis, in which case the community shall owe the spouse for the value paid.
  5. Undertakings and establishments founded during the life of the community by either spouse at the expense of common property. If, at the time of creation of the Undertaking or establishment both exclusive and common capital should be used, the provisions of article 1354 shall apply.

Article 1,348. Whenever an amount or credit payable in a certain number of years belongs exclusively to one of the spouses, any sums collected for any instalments payable during the marriage shall not be common property, but shall be deemed to be capital of the husband or wife depending on who the credit belongs to.

Article 1,349. The right of usufruct or to an allowance belonging to one of the spouse is shall form part of his exclusive property; however, the fruits, allowances or interest accrued during the marriage shall be common property.

Article 1,350. The heads of livestock which, upon dissolution of the community, should exceed from the number contributed by each of the spouses on an exclusive basis shall be deemed property held in common.

Article 1,351. Profits obtained by either spouse from gambling or those resulting from other causes which are exempt from the obligation to return them shall belong to the community of joint assets.

Article 1,352. New shares or other securities or participations subscribed as a result of the holding of other securities held on an exclusive basis shall also be exclusive property. Likewise, amounts obtained as a result of the disposal of subscription rights shall also be exclusive property. If common funds should be used to pay the subscription or if the shares should be issued against profits, the value paid for them shall be reimbursed.

Article 1,353. Property given or left by will to the spouses jointly and without special designation of shares shall be deemed to be property held in common, if the community subsists, provided that the liberality was accepted by both of them and that the donor or testator has not provided otherwise.

Article 1,354. Property acquired in exchange for a price or for valuable consideration, which is in part held in common and in part exclusive property, shall correspond pro indiviso to the community of joint assets, and to the spouse or spouse is in proportion to the value of their respective contributions.

Article 1,355. The spouses may, by common consent, give the condition of common property to property acquired for valuable consideration during the marriage, whatever the origin of the price or consideration and the form and instalments in which it is paid. If the acquisition is made jointly and without allocation of shares, their intention shall be presumed favourable to the common nature of such property.

Article 1,356. Property acquired by one of the spouses, while the community remains in force, in instalments, shall be property held in common if the first payment should be of such nature, even if the remaining instalments are paid with money held on an exclusive basis. If the first payment should be made with exclusive property, the property shall have this nature.

Article 1,357. Property purchased in instalments by one of the spouses before the community begins shall always be exclusive property, even if the whole or part of the forward price is paid with money held in common. The family home and appurtenances shall be excepted from the foregoing, in respect of which article 1354 shall apply.

Article 1,358. Where, in accordance with this Code, the property is considered to be held exclusively or in common, irrespective of the origin of the funds with which the acquisition is performed, the value paid and charged, respectively, to t community property or to exclusive property must be reimbursed, by returning the amount thereof, updated as of the date of liquidation of the community.

Article 1,359. Buildings, plantations in any other improvements made to common property and to exclusive property shall have the nature corresponding to the property which they affect, without prejudice to the reimbursement of the value paid for them. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the improvement made in exclusive property should be due to the investment of common funds or to the activities of either spouse, the community shall be owed the increase in value experienced by the property as a result of the improvement, at the time of dissolution of the community or disposal of the improved property.

Article 1,360. The same rules of the preceding article shall apply to patrimonial gains of a business, commercial establishment or other kind of undertaking.

Article 1,361. Property existing in the marriage shall be deemed to be held in common unless it is proved that it belongs exclusively to one of both spouses.

SECTION 3ª

On the expenses and obligations of the community of joint assets

Article 1,362. Expenses originated by any of the following causes shall be borne by the community of joint assets:

  1. Maintenance of the family, food and education of children in common and insurance expenses adjusted to custom and to family circumstances. Food and education for the children of only one of the spouses shall be borne by the community of joint assets when they should live in the family home. Otherwise, expenses resulting from these items shall be paid by the community of joint assets, but shall give rise to reimbursement at the time of liquidation thereof.
  2. The acquisition, holding and enjoyment of common property.
  3. The ordinary administration of the exclusive property of either spouse.
  4. The regular exploitation of businesses or the conduct of the profession, art or trade of each spouse.

Article 1,363. Amounts given or promised by both spouses by common consent shall also be borne by the community, unless it should have been agreed that they are to be paid with the exclusive property of one of them in whole or in particle.

Article 1,364. The spouse who has contributed exclusive property for expenses or payments to be borne by the community shall be entitled to reimbursement of their value, charged to the common property.

Article 1,365. The common property shall be directly liable to the creditor for debts contracted by a spouse:

  1. In the exercise of domestic powers or the management or disposal of common property to which he is entitled pursuant to the law or to marriage articles.
  2. In the ordinary practice of his profession, art or trade or in the ordinary administration of the property itself. If one of the spouses should be a merchant, the provisions of the Commercial Code shall apply.

Article 1,366. The marriage property community shall be liable for and shall bear the expense of any non-contractual obligations pertaining to a spouse as a result of his actions for the benefit of the community or within the scope of the administration of the property, unless they are due to wilful misconduct or gross negligence on the part of the debtor spouse.

Article 1,367. Common property shall in any event be liable for obligations entered into by both spouses jointly or by one of them with the express consent of the other.

Article 1,368. Common property shall also be liable for obligations entered into by only one of the spouses, in the event of de facto separation, to attend to maintenance, insurance and education expenses of the children for whom the community of joint assets is responsible.

Article 1,369. The property belonging to the community shall also be joint and severally liable for the debts of a spouse which are likewise debts of the community.

Article 1,370. Without prejudice to the liability of any other property according to the rules of this Code, the common property acquired by a spouse without the other’s consent shall always be liable for its forward price.

Article 1,371. Amounts lost and paid during the marriage by either spouse in any kind of gambling shall not reduce their respective part of the common property, provided that the amount of such loss may be considered moderate in accordance with custom and family circumstances.

Article 1,372. Where the law provides an action to claim what has been won by gambling, the exclusive property of the debtor shall be exclusively liable for amounts lost and not paid by either of the spouses.

Article 1,373. Each spouse shall be liable with his personal property for his own debts and, if his exclusive property should not be sufficient to repay them, the creditor may request the attachment of common property, which shall be immediately notified to the other spouse, and the latter may request that in the attachment the common property be replaced by the part held by the debtor spouse in the community of joint assets, in which case the attachment shall entail dissolution of the community. If the attachment should affect common property, the debtor spouse shall be deemed to have received the value thereof on account of his share when he should pay with other funds of his own or at the time of liquidation of the community of joint assets.

Article 1,374. After the dissolution mentioned in the preceding article, the property separation regime shall apply, save if, within three months, the debtor’s spouse should choose in a public instrument to start a new community of joint assets.

SECTION 4ª

On the administration of the community of joint assets

Article 1,375. In the absence of an agreement made pursuant to marriage articles, the management and disposal of common property shall correspond jointly to the spouses, without prejudice to the provisions of the following articles.

Article 1,376. Where the consent of both spouses should be necessary for the performance of acts of administration, and one of them should be unable to give it or should unreasonably refused to do so, the Judge may give it in his stead if he should find the request to be well founded.

Article 1,377. The performance of acts of disposal for valuable consideration over common property shall require the consent of both spouses. Of one of them should refuse or should be unable to give it, the Judge, after summary information proceedings, may authorise one or several acts of disposal when he should consider it to be in the interest of the family. Exceptionally, he shall provide any limitations or precautions deemed convenient.

Article 1,378. Acts pursuant to gratuitous title shall be null and void unless both spouses consent to them. However, each of them may perform the accustomed liberalities with common property.

Article 1,379. Each of the spouses may dispose of half of the common property by testament.

Article 1,380. The testamentary disposition of a piece of common property shall have full force and effect if the property is adjudicated to the estate of the testator. Otherwise, the bequest shall be deemed to refer to its value at the time of his death.

Article 1,381. Fruits and gains of exclusive property and the gains obtained by any of the spouses shall form part of the assets of the community and shall be subject to the payment of the expenses and liabilities of the

community of joint assets. Notwithstanding the foregoing, each spouse, as administrator of his exclusive property, may for this sole purpose dispose of the fruits and products of his property.

Article 1,382. Each spouse may, without the other’s consent, but always with his knowledge, take in advance any common money which he needs, in accordance with custom and family circumstances, for the practice of his profession or the ordinary administration of his property.

Article 1,383. The spouses must inform each other on a regular basis on the status and returns of any economic activity they undertake.

Article 1,384. Acts of administration of property and acts of disposal of money or securities performed by the spouse in whose name they appear or who has them in his possession shall be valid.

Article 1,385. Credit rights, whatever their nature, shall be exercised by the spouse in whose name they appear. Either spouse may exercise the defence of common property and rights by bringing actions or opposing them.

Article 1,386. The consent of only one of the spouses shall be sufficient to make necessary urgent expenses, even if they are extraordinary expenses.

Article 1,387. The administration and disposal of the property pertaining to the community of joint assets shall be transferred by operation of law to the spouse who is the guardian or legal representative of his consort.

Article 1,388. The Courts may confer the power of administration to only one of the spouses where the other should be unable to give his consent or should have abandoned the family, or in the event of de facto separation.

Article 1,389. The spouse responsible for administration pursuant to the provisions of the two preceding articles shall have full powers for such purposes, unless the Judge, if he considers it to be in the interest of the family, and after summary information proceedings, should establish any precautions or limitations. In any event, he shall require judicial authorisation to perform acts of disposal over immovable property, commercial establishments, precious objects or securities, save for preferred subscription rights.

Article 1,390. If, as a result of an act of administration or disposal performed by only one of the spouses the latter should have obtained a benefit or profit of an exclusive nature, or should have caused, by wilful misconduct, damage to the community, he shall owe the community the amount thereof, even if the other spouse should not challenge the effectiveness of the act within the applicable period.

Article 1,391. Where a spouse should have performed an act in fraud of the rights of his consort, the provisions of the preceding article shall in any event apply and, likewise, if the acquirer should have acted in bad faith, the act shall be capable of rescission.

SECTION 5ª

On the dissolution and liquidation of the community of joint assets

Article 1,392. The community of joint assets shall end by operation of law:

  1. When the marriage is dissolved.
  2. When the marriage is declared null and void.
  3. When the separation of the spouses is judicially decreed.
  4. When the spouses agree upon a different marriage property regime in the manner provided in this Code.

Article 1,393. The community of joint assets shall also end by judicial decree, at the request of one of the spouses, in one of the following cases:

  1. Where the other spouse has been judicially incapacitated, or has been declared a prodigal, an absentee or bankrupt pursuant to civil or commercial law, or found guilty of abandoning his family. For the Judge to decree the dissolution it shall be sufficient for the spouse who requests it to present the corresponding judicial resolution.
  2. Where the other spouse has been performing by himself acts of disposal or management of assets which involve fraud, damage or danger to the rights of the other spouse in the community.
  3. To have been separated de facto of more than one year by mutual consent or as a result of abandonment.
  4. To have seriously and repeatedly breached the duty of informing of the results and returns of his economic activities. As regards the dissolution of the community as a result of the attachment of the share of one of the spouses as a result of his own debts, the special provisions of this Code shall apply.

Article 1,394. The effects of dissolution as provided in the preceding article shall take place from the date on which it is decreed. If there should be litigation concerning the existence of grounds for dissolution, after initiation of the proceedings, an inventory shall be drafted, and the Judge shall adopt the necessary measures to administer the property, and all acts which exceed ordinary administration shall require judicial authorisation.

Article 1,395. When the community of joint assets should be dissolved as a result of the marriage being null and void and with declaration that one of the spouses has acted in bad faith, the other may choose to liquidate the marriage property regime according to the rules of this Section or to the provisions relating to the participation regime, and the spouse in bad faith shall not be entitled to participate in the gains obtained by his consort.

Article 1,396. After its dissolution, the community shall be liquidated, beginning by drafting an inventory of the assets and liabilities thereof.

Article 1,397. The following must be included as assets:

  1. Common property existing at the time of dissolution.
  2. The updated amount of the value of the property at the time of its disposal as a result of an illegal or fraudulent transaction, if it should not have been recovered.
  3. The updated amount of the amounts paid by the community which are to be borne by only one spouse and, generally, amounts constituting credits held by the community against such spouse.

Article 1,398. The liabilities of the community shall consist of the following items:

  1. Outstanding debts borne by the community.
  2. The updated amount of the value of exclusive property, when such amount must be returned in cash, because such value has been spent in the interest of the community. The same rules shall apply to impairments suffered by such property as a result of its use for the benefit of the community.
  3. The updated amount of any sums which, having been paid by only one of the spouses, should be required to be borne by the community and, generally, those which constitute credits held by the spouses against the community.

Article 1,399. Upon completion of the inventory, the debts of the community shall be paid in the first place, starting with maintenance debts which, in any case, shall have preference. In respect of the rest, if the property subject to inventory should not be sufficient to pay them, the provisions relating to concurrence and order of priority of credits shall apply.

Article 1,400. When there should not be sufficient cash to pay the debts, allocations of common property may be offered in lieu of payment, but, if any participant or creditor should request it, they shall be disposed of and payment shall be made with the proceeds.

Article 1,401. Until the debts of the community have been paid in full, the creditors shall keep their credits against the debtor spouse. The non-debtor spouse shall be liable with the property adjudicated to him, if an inventory should have been duly drafted in or out of court. If, as a result thereof, one of the spouses should have paid an amount exceeding the amount attributable to him, he may recover it from the other.

Article 1,402. The creditors of the community of joint assets shall have upon its liquidation the same rights acknowledged by the Laws in respect of the partition and liquidation of estates.

Article 1,403. After paying the community’s debts and expenses, any compensations and reimbursement owed to each spouse shall be paid, up to the amount of the property that has been subject to inventory, performing any applicable setoffs when the spouse owes any debts to the community.

Article 1,404. After making any deductions to the property subject to inventory as provided in the preceding articles, the residue shall constitute the net assets of the community of joint assets, which shall be divided by halves between the spouses or their respective heirs.

Article 1,405. If one of the spouses should be, at the time of liquidation, a personal creditor of the other, he may demand satisfaction of his credit by being adjudicated common property, unless the debtor should pay voluntarily.

Article 1,406. Each spouse shall be entitled to request the inclusion as part of his assets, on a preferential basis and up to the full amount thereof:

  1. Property of personal use not included in number 7 of article 1,346.
  2. The economic undertaking he effectively manages.
  3. The premises where he has been conducting his profession.
  4. In the event of death of the other spouse, the dwelling which where he has his habitual residence.

Article 1,407. In the cases provided in numbers 3 and 4 of the preceding article, the spouse may, at its discretion, request to be allocated the ownership of property or to have constituted in his favour a right of use or habitation. If the value of the property or the right should exceed the assets corresponding to the spouse who is allocated the property, he must pay the difference in money.

Article 1,408. The spouses or, as the case may be to the surviving spouse and children, shall be provided with support from the common property while the liquidation of the property subject to inventory takes place and until they are given their assets; however, such support shall be deducted from their assets in the part exceeding the amounts which would have corresponded to them as fruits and rents.

Article 1,409. Whenever liquidation of the joint community of assets of two or more marriages entered into by the same person is to be performed simultaneously, in order to determine the capital corresponding to each estate all kinds of evidence shall be admitted in the absence of inventories. In the event of doubt, common property shall be allocated to the different communities proportionally, attending to their duration and to the property and income of the respective spouses.

Article 1,410. For matters not provided in this chapter concerning the drafting of the inventory, the rules regarding appraisal and sales of property, division of the property, adjudications to the participants and others which are not expressly determined herein, the provisions regarding partition and liquidation of estates shall be observed.

CHAPTER 5º

On the participation regime

Article 1,411. In the participation regime each spouse acquires a right to participate in the gains obtained by his consort during the time that such regime has remained in force.

Article 1,412. Each spouse shall have the administration, the enjoyment and the free disposal of both the property which belonged to him at the time of marrying and of any which he may acquire subsequently pursuant to any title.

Article 1,413. For all matters not provided in this chapter, the rules relating to separation of property shall apply during the term of the participation regime.

Article 1,414. If persons married pursuant to the participation regime should jointly acquire any property or right, it shall belong to them pursuant to the ordinary pro indiviso regime.

Article 1,415. The participation regime shall be extinguished in the same cases provided for the community of joint assets, applying the provisions of articles 1,394 and 1,395.

Article 1,416. One spouse may request termination of the participation regime when the irregular administration performed by the other should seriously compromise his interests.

Article 1,417. Upon termination, any gains shall be calculated by the difference between the initial and final net assets of each spouse.

Article 1,418. The initial net assets of each spouse shall be deemed to consist of:

  1. The property and rights belonging to him at the start of the regime.
  2. Those acquired subsequently as inheritance, gift or legacy.

Article 1,419. The obligations of the spouse at the start of the regime and, as the case may be, obligations inherent to the inheritance or encumbrances inherent to the gift or legacy, to the extent that they do not exceed the amount of the property bequeathed or given.

Article 1,420. If the liabilities should exceed the assets, there shall be no initial net assets.

Article 1,421. The property constituting the initial net assets shall be estimated according to its condition and value at the start of the regime or, as the case may be, at the time of its acquisition. The amount of the appraisal must be updated to the date on which the regime should cease.

Article 1,422. The final net assets of each spouse shall comprise the property rights of which he is the titleholder at the time of termination of the regime, deducting any outstanding obligations.

Article 1,423. The value of the property disposed of by one of the spouses pursuant to gratuitous title without his consort’s consent shall be included in the final net assets, unless it should refer to accustomed liberalities.

Article 1,424. The same rules shall apply in respect of acts performed by one of the spouses in fraud of the rights of the other.

Article 1,425. The property constituting the final net assets shall be estimated according to its condition and value at the time of termination of the regime, and property disposed of as gifts or fraudulently, according to its condition on the date of its disposal and for the value it would have had if it had been kept until the date of termination.

Article 1,426. Credits held by one of the spouses against the other, pursuant to any title, even as a result of having attended to or performed obligations of the former, shall be computed also as final net assets of the creditor’s spouse, and shall be deducted from the estate of the debtor spouse.

Article 1,427. Where the difference between the final and initial net assets of both spouses should show a positive result, the spouse whose net assets have experienced a lower increase shall receive half of the difference between his own increase and that of the other spouse.

Article 1,428. Where only one set of net assets should show positive results, the rights of participation shall consist of half of such increase in favour of the spouse who is not the titleholder of such net assets.

Article 1,429. At the time of constitution of the regime, the spouses may agree on a different participation than the one provided in the two preceding articles, but it must apply similarly and in the same proportion in respect of both sets of net assets and in favour of both spouses.

Article 1,430. If there are descendants who are not common to both, the only participation that may be agreed upon shall be by halves.

Article 1,431. The participation credit must be paid in money. If there are serious difficulties to make an immediate payment, the Judge may grant a deferral, provided that it does not exceed three years, and that the debt and its legal interest are sufficiently secured.

Article 1,432. The participation credit may be paid by adjudication of specific property, by agreement between the interested parties or if the Judge should allow it, upon duly grounded request by the debtor.

Article 1,433. If there should not be sufficient property in the debtor’s net assets to realise the right of participation in his gains, the creditor spouse may challenge any disposals he has made pursuant to gratuitous title without his consent and those which should have been made in fraud of his rights.

Article 1,434. The actions to challenge mentioned in the preceding article shall be lapsed by peremption two years after the participation regime is extinguished, and may not be initiated against third party acquirers for valuable consideration in good faith.

CHAPTER 6º

On the property separation regime

Article 1,435. There shall be property separation between the spouses:

  1. Where they should have agreed it.
  2. Where the spouses should have agreed in marriage articles that the community of joint assets shall not apply between them, without expressing the rules pursuant to which their property shall be governed.
  3. Upon termination of the community of joint assets or the participation regime while the marriage subsists, unless the regime should be replaced by another different one pursuant to the will of the interested parties.

Article 1,436. The claim requesting property separation and the final judgement declaring it must be entered and registered, respectively, in the relevant Property Registry, if it should refer to immovable property. The final judgement shall also be entered in the Civil Registry.

Article 1,437. In the property separation regime, the property held by each spouse at the start and any which he may subsequently acquire pursuant to any title shall belong to such spouse. Likewise, each spouse shall have the administration, enjoyment and free disposal of such property.

Article 1,438. The spouses shall contribute to the household expenses. In the absence of an agreement, they shall do so proportionally to their respective resources. Housework shall be computed as a contribution to household expenses and shall entitle the spouse to obtain a compensation, to be set by the Judge in the absence of an agreement, upon termination of the separation regime.

Article 1,439. If one of the spouses should have administered or managed property or interests of the other, he shall have the same obligations and liabilities as an attorney, but shall not have the obligation to give account of fruits received and consumed, unless should be proved that he invested them in items other than the discharge of household expenses.

Article 1,440. Each spouse shall be exclusively liable for obligations contracted by him. As relates to obligations contracted in the exercise of ordinary domestic powers, both spouses shall be liable as provided in article is 1,319 and 1,438 of this Code.

Article 1,441. Where it should not be possible to evidence to which of the spouses any property or rights belong, they shall correspond to both by halves.

Article 1,442. Upon declaration of civil or commercial bankruptcy of one spouse, the other spouse shall be presumed to have given him a half share of the property acquired for valuable consideration by him during the year prior to the declaration or during the period in respect of which the bankruptcy has retroactive effect, for the benefit of the creditors, unless evidence to the contrary is provided. This presumption shall not apply if the spouses are judicially or de facto separated.

Article 1,443. The property separation regime, once decreed, shall not be altered by the reconciliation of the spouses in the event of personal separation or as a result of the disappearance of any of the other grounds which should have motivated it.

Article 1,444. Notwithstanding the provisions of the preceding article, the spouses may agree in marriage articles that the same rules which applied prior to the property separation regime shall apply again. Such marriage articles shall set forth the property contributed by each of them once again, and these shall be considered exclusive property even if, in whole or in part, they should have been common property prior to the liquidation performed as a result of the separation.

TITLE IV

On the contract of sale and purchase

CHAPTER ONE

On the nature and form of this contract

Article 1,445. Pursuant to the contract of sale and purchase, one of the contracting parties undertakes to deliver a specific thing and the other to pay a certain price for it, in money or something which represents it.

Article 1,446. If the sale price should consist in part in money and in part in something else, the contract shall be classified according to the manifest intention of the contracting parties. If such intention is not expressed, the contract shall be deemed to be barter, if the value of the thing given as part of the price exceeds the amount of money or its equivalent; and a sale if otherwise.

Article 1,447. For the price to be considered certain, it will be sufficient that it be certain by reference to another certain thing, or that its determination is left to the discretion of a specific person. If such person should not be able to or should not want to set the price, the contract become without force and effect.

Article 1,448. Likewise, the price shall be deemed certain in the sale of securities, grains, liquids and other fungible things, where the value set should be the value which the things sold should have on a specific date, Exchange or market, or where an amount higher or lower than the price on the date, Exchange or market should be set, as long as it is certain.

Article 1,449. The setting of the price may never be left at the discretion of one of the contracting parties.

Article 1,450. The sale shall be perfected between the purchaser and the seller, and shall be binding on both, if they should have agreed on the thing constituting the subject matter of the contract and on the price, even if neither one or the other has been delivered yet.

Article 1,451. A promise to sell or purchase, if there is agreement as to the thing and the price, shall entitle the contracting parties to reciprocally claim the performance of the contract. Whenever the promise of sale and purchase cannot be kept, the provisions concerning obligations and contracts provided in the present Book shall apply to seller and purchaser, as the case may be.

Article 1,452. Damages or improvements in the things sold after perfecting the contract shall be regulated by the provisions of articles 1.096 and 1,182. This rule shall apply to the isolated sale of fungible things for a lump sum price, or without considering their weight, number or measurement. If the fungible things should be sold for a price set in relation to their weight, number or measurement, the risk shall not be transferred to the purchaser until they have been weighed, counted or measured, unless the latter has incurred in default.

Article 1,453. The sale made on trial or to test the things sold, and the sale of things which it is usual to taste or sample before receiving them shall always be presumed to have been made subject to a condition precedent.

Article 1,454. If earnest money or a deposit should have been provided in a contract of sale and purchase, the contract may be rescinded by the purchaser by agreeing to forfeit the earnest money or deposit, or the seller to return it in duplicate.

Article 1,455. The expenses of executing a public deed shall be borne by the seller, and those of the first copy and any other copies subsequent to the sale shall be borne by the purchaser, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 1,456. Forced sales for causes of public utility (eminent domain) shall be governed by the provisions of special laws.

CHAPTER 2º

On the capacity to purchase or sell

Article 1,457. All persons authorised by this Code to bind themselves may enter into the contract of sale and purchase, save for the modifications contained in the following articles.

Article 1,458. The spouses may reciprocally sell property to one another.

Article 1,459. The following persons may not acquire things by purchase, even if it is in a public or judicial auction, by themselves or using any intermediary:

  1. Persons who exercise any position of guardianship, in respect of the property of the person or persons who are under their custody or protection.
  2. Attorneys, in respect of the property whose administration or disposal is entrusted to them.
  3. Executors, in respect of the property entrusted to their care.
  4. Public employees, in respect of property belonging to the State, Municipalities, villages and public establishments, whereof they should be in charge of the administration. This provision shall apply for Judges and experts who in any way take part in the sale.
  5. Magistrates, Judges, Public Prosecutors, Secretaries of Courts and Court Officials, in respect of the property and rights subject to litigation before the Court in whose jurisdiction or territory they should perform their respective duties; this prohibition shall extend to the act of acquiring pursuant to assignment. The case of hereditary actions between co-heirs, or assignment in payment of credits, or to secure the property they possess shall be excepted from this rule. The prohibition contained in this number 5 shall comprise Solicitors and Court Representatives in respect of the properties and rights which should constitute the subject matter of the litigation in which they take part as a result of their profession and work.

CHAPTER 3º

On the effects of the contract of sale and purchase when the thing sold is lost

Article 1,460. If, at that time of entering into the sale, the thing constituting the subject matter thereof should have been lost in its entirety, the contract shall become without force and effect. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if it should have been lost only in part, the purchaser may choose between withdrawing from the contract or claiming the existing part, paying its price proportionally to the agreed total sum.

CHAPTER 4º

On the seller’s obligations

SECTION ONE

General provision

Article 1,461. The seller is bound to perform delivery of and provide warranty over the thing constituting the subject matter of the sale.

SECTION 2ª

On delivery of the thing sold

Article 1,462. The thing sold shall be deemed to have been delivered when it is put in the power and possession of the purchaser. Where the sale has been made pursuant to a public deed, the execution thereof shall be equivalent to the delivery of the thing constituting the subject matter of the contract, unless it should result or it should clearly be deduced otherwise from the public deed.

Article 1,463. Outside the cases expressed in the preceding article, delivery of movable property shall take place: by delivery of the keys of the place or location where they are stored or kept; and by mere agreement or conformity between the contracting parties, if the thing sold cannot be moved to the possession of the purchaser at the time of the sale, or if the latter already had it in its power for some other reason.

Article 1,464. In respect of incorporeal things, the provisions of the second paragraph of article 1462 shall apply. In any other case in which such provision does not apply, delivery shall be deemed to mean the fact of putting the deeds of ownership in the purchaser’s power, or the use of the right by the purchaser with the consent of the seller.

Article 1,465. Delivery expenses of the things sold shall be borne by the seller, and those relating to transport or freight shall be borne by the purchaser, unless there is a special stipulation.

Article 1,466. The seller shall not be obliged to deliver the thing sold if the purchaser has not paid the price or the contract has provided no period to pay.

Article 1,467. The seller shall also not be obliged to deliver the thing sold if a forward period or term for the payment has been agreed if, after the sale, it is discovered that the purchaser is insolvent, so that the seller runs an imminent risk of losing the price. The case where the purchaser should secure all his payment in the period provided shall be excepted from this rule.

Article 1,468. The seller must deliver the thing sold in its condition at the time of perfecting the contract. All fruits shall belong to the purchaser from the day on which the contract was perfected.

Article 1,469. The obligation to deliver the thing sold comprises the obligation of putting in the purchaser’s power anything expressed in the contract, according to the following rules: If a sale of immovable property should have taken place expressing its capacity, as a price per unit of measurement or number, the seller shall be obliged to deliver to the purchaser, at the latter’s request, all that has been expressed in the contract; however, if this should not be possible, the purchaser may choose between a proportional reduction of the price or the rescission of the contract, provided that, in this last case, the reduction should not be lower than one tenth of the capacity attributed to the property. The same shall be done, even if the capacity is the same, if a part of it is not of the quality expressed in the contract. In this case, rescission shall only take place at the will of the purchaser, when the reduction in value of the thing sold should exceed one tenth of the agreed price.

Article 1,470. If, in the case of the preceding article, the immovable property should have greater capacity or number than that which was expressed in the contract, the purchaser shall have the obligation to pay the

excess price if the greater capacity or number does not exceed one twentieth of the amount set forth in the same contract; however, it should exceed such one twentieth, the purchaser may choose between paying the higher value of the immovable property, or withdrawing from the contract.

Article 1,471. In the sale of an immovable property made for a lump sum and not at a rate per unit or number, no increase or reduction thereof shall take place, even if it should have greater or lower capacity or number than those expressed in the contract. This shall also occur where two or more properties are sold for a single price; however if, as well as expressing the boundaries, which is indispensable in any disposal of immovable properties, the contract should designate their capacity or number, the seller shall be obliged to deliver all that is comprised within the same boundaries, even if it should exceed the capacity or number expressed in the contract; and, if he is unable to, he shall suffer a reduction in the price, proportional to the shortfall in capacity or number, unless the contract should be annulled because the purchaser is not resigned to accepting the failure to deliver what was stipulated.

Article 1,472. Actions arisen as a result of the three preceding articles shall be barred by statute of limitations after six months, counted from the date of delivery.

Article 1,473. If the same thing should have been sold to different purchasers, ownership shall be transferred to the person who took possession of it in good faith, if it should be a movable thing. Of it should be an immovable property, ownership shall belong to the acquirer who first registered it with the Registry. In the absence of registration, ownership shall belong to the person who first takes possession of it in good faith; and, in the absence thereof, to the person who presents a deed with a prior date, provided that he has acted in good faith.

SECTION 3ª

On warranty

Article 1,474. Pursuant to the warranty mentioned in article 1461, the seller shall be liable to the purchaser:

  1. For the lawful and peaceful possession of the things sold.
  2. For any hidden faults or defects it should have.
1. On warranty against dispossession

Article 1,475. Dispossession shall take place when the purchaser is deprived of all or a part of the thing purchased by a final judgement and pursuant to a right prior to the purchase. The seller shall be liable for dispossession even if nothing has been expressed in the contract. However, the contracting parties may increase, reduce or suppress this legal obligation of the seller.

Article 1,476. Any covenant which exempts the seller from liability for dispossession shall be null and void, if he has acted in bad faith.

Article 1,477. Where the purchaser should have waived the warranty against dispossession, in the event that such dispossession should occur, the seller must deliver only the price of the things sold at the time of dispossession, unless the purchaser should have made the waiver being aware of the risk of dispossession and submitting to its consequences.

Article 1,478. Where a warranty has been stipulated, or where nothing has been agreed on this matter, in the event of dispossession the purchaser shall be entitled to request from the seller the following:

  1. Restitution of the price of the things sold at the time of dispossession, irrespective of whether it is higher or lower than the sale price.
  2. Fruits or returns, if he should have been sentenced to deliver them to the party who won the trial.
  3. Court costs of the proceedings which gave rise to dispossession and, as the case may be, court costs of the proceedings initiated against the debtor on account of the warranty.
  4. Contract expenses, if paid by the purchaser.
  5. Damages and interest and voluntary or purely recreational or decorative expenses, if the sale was performed in bad faith.

Article 1,479. If the purchaser should lose, as a result of the dispossession, a part of the things sold which is of such importance in connection to the whole that he would not have bought it without such a part, he may demand the rescission of the contract; with the obligation to return the thing without any other encumbrances than it had when he acquired it. The same shall be observed when two or more things are sold jointly for a lump sum, or for a specific sum for each of them, if it should be clearly set forth that the purchaser would not have bought the one without the other.

Article 1,480. The warranty may not be enforced until a final judgement has been issued sentencing the purchaser to forfeit the thing acquired or a part thereof.

Article 1,481. The seller shall be obliged to perform the relevant warranty whenever it should be proved that he was given notice of the claim of dispossession at the purchaser’s request. In the absence of such notice, the seller shall not be obliged to act on the warranty.

Article 1,482. The defendant purchaser shall request, within the period provided in the Civil Procedural Law to respond to the claim, notice thereof to be served to the seller or sellers within as brief a period as possible. Such notice shall be given as set forth in the same law to summon defendants. The period provided to the purchaser to respond to the claim shall be suspended until expiration of the periods provided to the seller or sellers to appear and respond to the claim, which shall be the same periods provided for all defendants in the aforementioned Civil Procedural Law, counting from the notice provided in paragraph 1 of this article. If the parties summoned in the dispossession proceedings should fail to appear in due time and form, the period provided to respond to the claim shall continue in respect of the purchaser.

Article 1,483. If the properties sold should be encumbered with any lien or non-apparent easement, of such nature that it must be presumed that the purchaser would not have acquired it if he had known it, and the public deed should have failed to mention it, the purchaser may request rescission of the contract, unless he prefers the corresponding compensation. For one year counting from the execution of the public deed, the purchaser may exercise the action for rescission, or request compensation. After the lapse of one year, he may only claim for damages within a similar period, counting from the date on which he discovered the lien or easement.

2. On the warranty against hidden defects or encumbrances of the thing sold

Article 1,484. The seller shall be obliged to provide a warranty for hidden defects of the things sold, if they render it unsuitable for the use to which it is destined, or if they reduce such use in such a way that, if the purchaser had known them, he would not have acquired it or would have given a lower price for it; but he shall not be liable for manifest defects or those which are in plain sight, nor for those which are not, if the purchaser is an expert who, as a result of his trade or profession, ought easily to have been aware of them.

Article 1,485. The seller shall be liable to the purchaser for the warranty for hidden defects or flaws of the things sold, even if he should have been unaware of them. This provision shall not apply when it has been stipulated otherwise and the seller should be unaware of the hidden defects or flaws of the thing sold.

Article 1,486. In the cases of the two preceding articles, the purchaser may choose between withdrawing from the contract, being paid any expenses he has paid or a reduction of the price in a proportional amount, pursuant to expert opinion. If the seller should have been aware of the hidden defects or flaws of the thing sold and did not represent them to the purchaser, the latter shall have the same option, and shall further be compensated for any damages if he should choose rescission.

Article 1,487. If the thing sold should be lost as a result of the hidden defects, and the seller should have been aware of them, the latter shall suffer the loss and must return the price and pay the contract expenses, together with any damages. If he was not aware of them, he must only return the price and pay the contract expenses paid by the purchaser.

Article 1,488. If the thing sold should have had any hidden defect at the time of the sale and it should subsequently be lost as a result of a fortuitous event or pursuant to the purchaser’s fault, the latter may claim from the seller the price he paid, with a reduction in value had by the thing at the time of its loss. If the seller acted in bad faith, he must pay the purchaser any damages and interest.

Article 1,489. In judicial sales, the liability for damages shall never apply; but the remaining provisions of the preceding articles shall apply.

Article 1,490. Actions resulting from the provisions of the five preceding articles shall be extinguished after six months, counting from delivery of the thing sold.

Article 1,491. If two or more animals should be sold together, either for a lump sum, or by paying a price for each of them, any redhibitory defect of each animal shall only give rise to the redhibition of such animal, and not of the others, unless it should be apparent that the purchaser would not have purchased the healthy animal or animals without the defective one. This last instance shall be presumed to be the case where a couple, yoke, pair or set of animals should have been purchased, even if a separate price has been set for each of the animals comprising it.

Article 1,492. The provisions of the preceding article relating to the sale of animals are deemed to apply equally to the sale of other things.

Article 1,493. The warranty for hidden defects of animals and livestock shall not apply to sales performed in a fair or a public auction, or to the sale of horses disposed of for slaughtering purposes, save in the event provided in the following article.

Article 1,494. Livestock and animals which suffer from contagious diseases may not be the subject matter of sale contracts. Any contract entered into in respect thereof shall be null and void. Likewise, a sales contract over livestock and animals shall also be null and void if the contract should express the service or use for which they are acquired and they should be useless for such purpose.

Article 1,495. Where, even if they have been examined by a vet, the nature of the animals’ hidden defect should be such that expert knowledge is not enough to discover it, the defect shall be deemed redhibitory. However, if the expert, as a result of ignorance or bad faith, should fail to discover or disclose it, he shall be liable for any damages.

Article 1,496. The redhibitory action based on animals’ hidden defects or flaws must be brought within forty days, counting from delivery thereof to the purchaser, unless local custom should provide longer or shorter periods. This action in respect of animal sales may only be exercised in respect of such defects or flaws thereof provided in the law or pursuant to local custom.

Article 1,497. If the animal should die within three days of its purchase, the seller shall be liable, provided that the illness which caused the death should have existed prior to the contract, in the Physicians’ opinion.

Article 1,498. Upon termination of the sale, the animal must be returned in the condition in which it was sold and delivered, and the purchaser shall be liable for any impairment resulting from his negligence, which was not originated by the redhibitory defect or flaw.

Article 1,499. In sales of animals and livestock with redhibitory defects, the purchaser shall also have the power expressed in article 1486; but he must exercise it within the same period respectively provided to exercise the redhibitory remedy.

CHAPTER 5º

On the purchaser’s obligations

Article 1,500. The purchaser is obliged to pay the price of the things sold in the time and place set forth in the contract. If none should have been set, payment must be made at the time and place in which the thing sold is delivered.

Article 1,501. The purchaser shall owe interest for the time elapsed between delivery of the thing and payment of the price, in the three following cases:

  1. If it has been thus agreed.
  2. If the thing sold and delivered produces fruits or rent.
  3. If the purchaser should be in default, in accordance with article 1,100.

Article 1,502. If the purchaser should be disturbed in the possession or ownership of the thing acquired, or should have a reasonable ground to fear being disturbed by an action of ejectment or a mortgage foreclosure, may suspend payment of the price until the seller has made the disturbance or the danger cease, unless the latter should secure the return of the price, as the case may be, or unless it should have been set forth that, notwithstanding any contingency, the purchaser shall be obliged to pay.

Article 1,503. If the seller should have reasonable grounds to fear the loss of the immovable property and the price, he may immediately terminate the sale. In the absence of such grounds, the provisions of article 1124 shall be observed.

Article 1,504. In the sale of immovable property, even if it should have been provided that termination of the contract shall take place by operation of law upon failure to pay the price within the agreed period, the purchaser may pay, even after expiration of the term, prior to being demanded to do so judicially or pursuant to notarial deed. After the demand has been made, the Judge may not grant a further period.

Article 1,505. In respect of immovable property, termination of the sale shall take place by operation of law, in the interests of the seller, where the purchaser, prior to expiration of the term provided to deliver the thing,

should not have appeared to receive it or, having appeared, should not have offered the price at the same time, save if a further deferment should have been agreed for such purposes.

CHAPTER 6º

On termination of the sale

Article 1,506. The sale shall be terminated on the same grounds as obligations, and, further, on the grounds expressed in the preceding chapters and pursuant to contractual repurchase or legal pre-emption.

SECTION ONE

On contractual repurchase

Article 1,507. Contractual repurchase shall take place where the seller reserves the right to recover the things sold, with the obligation to comply with the provisions of article 1518 and whatever else should have been agreed.

Article 1,508. The right mentioned in the preceding article, in the absence of an express agreement, shall last four years counted from the date of the contract. If a period is expressly provided, it may not exceed 10 years.

Article 1,509. If the seller should fail to comply with the provisions of article 1518, the purchaser shall irrevocably acquire ownership of the thing sold.

Article 1,510. The seller may exercise his action against any possessor whose right originates from the purchaser, even if no mention has been made to the contractual repurchase provision in the second contract; except for the provisions of the Mortgage Law with respect to third parties.

Article 1,511. The purchaser shall replace the seller in all rights and remedies thereof.

Article 1,512. The seller’s creditors may not exercise conventional repurchase against the purchaser until after excussion of the seller’s property.

Article 1,513. The purchaser subject to a repo agreement in respect of a part of an undivided property who subsequently acquires the whole of such property in the case provided in article 404 may oblige the seller to redeem the whole if the latter should wish to exercise their repurchase covenant.

Article 1,514. Where several persons should sell an undivided property jointly and in a single contract subject to a repo covenant, each of them may only exercise this right for his respective particle. The same shall be observed if the person who has sold a landed property on his own has left several heirs, in which case each of them may only redeem the part acquired thereby.

Article 1,515. In the cases mentioned in the preceding article, the purchaser may require all sellers or co-heirs to reach an agreement on the redemption of the entirety of the thing sold; if they should fail to do so, the purchaser may not be compelled to accept a partial repurchase.

Article 1,516. Each co-owner of an undivided property who has sold his part separately may exercise, with the same separation, the right of repurchase for his respective share, and the purchaser may not compel him to redeem the whole property.

Article 1,517. If the purchaser should leave several heirs, the action to repurchase may only be exercised against each one for his respective share, irrespective of whether the property remains undivided or has been distributed among them. However, if the estate has been divided and the thing has been adjudicated to one of the heirs, the repurchase action may only be addressed against him for the whole.

Article 1,518. The seller may not exercise the repurchase right without reimbursing the purchaser the sales price and, also:

  1. Contract expenses and any other lawful payment made pursuant to the sale.
  2. Necessary and useful expenses made in the thing sold.

Article 1,519. When, upon entering into the sale, the property should have fruits which are manifest or born, no payment or pro rating of any fruits existing at the time of the repurchase shall take place. If there should have been none at the time of the sale, and there are fruits at the time of the repurchase, they shall be prorated between the repurchaser and the purchaser, and the latter shall receive the share corresponding to the time during which he possessed the property in the past year, counting from the sale.

Article 1,520. The seller who recovers the thing sold shall receive it free from any lien or mortgage imposed by the purchaser, but shall be obliged to accept any leases performed by the latter in good faith, according to local custom.

SECTION 2ª

On legal redemption

Article 1,521. Legal redemption is the right to become subrogated, under the same conditions provided in the contract, in the position of the person who acquires the thing pursuant to a sale or dation in payment.

Article 1,522. The co-owner of a thing owned in common may use the right of redemption in the event that the shares of all other co-owners or of any of them should be disposed of to a stranger. Where two or more co-owners should wish to use the right of redemption, they may only do so pro rata to their share in the thing owned in common.

Article 1,523. Owners of adjoining lands shall also be entitled to redemption in sales of rural property the surface whereof does not exceed one hectare. The right mentioned in the preceding paragraph shall not apply to adjoining lands separated by streams, irrigation ditches, ravines, paths and other apparent easements for the benefit of other properties. If two or more adjoining owners should exercise the right of redemption at the same time, the owner of the adjoining land with less surface shall be preferred; and if they should have the same, the first who requests it.

Article 1,524. The legal right of redemption may only be exercised within nine days counting from registration of the sale in the Registry and, in the absence thereof, from the time in which the person entitled to redemption should have become aware of the sale. The right of redemption of co-owners excludes that of adjoining owners.

Article 1,525

The provisions of articles 1511 and 1518 shall apply to legal redemption.

CHAPTER 7º

On the transfer of credits and other incorporeal rights

Article 1,526. Assignment of a credit, right or action shall not be effective against third parties until the date on which it is to be considered certain in accordance with articles 1218 and 1227. If it should refer to immovable property, it shall be effective from the date of registration thereof in the Registry.

Article 1,527. The debtor who, prior to becoming aware of the assignment, should pay the creditor, shall be released from the obligation.

Article 1,528. The sale or assignment of a credit comprises that of all ancillary rights thereof, such as guaranty, mortgage, pledge or privilege.

Article 1,529. The seller in good faith shall be liable for the existence and lawfulness of the credits at the time of the sale, unless it has been sold as a doubtful credit; but not for the debtor’s solvency, unless expressly provided or unless the insolvency should be prior and publicly known. Even in these cases, he shall only be liable for the price received and any expenses mentioned in number 1 of article 1518. The seller in bad faith shall always be liable for the payment of all expenses and damages.

Article 1,530. Where the assignor in good faith should have agreed to be liable for the debtor’s solvency, and the contracting parties should have agreed no provision concerning the duration of such liability, it shall only last one year, counting from the assignment of the credit, if the term should have already expired. If the credit should be payable in a forward term or period which has not expired, liability shall cease one year after maturity thereof. If the credit should consist of a perpetual income, liability shall be extinguished after ten years, counting from the date of the assignment.

Article 1,531. A person who sells an estate without listing the things of which it is comprised shall only be liable for his capacity as heir.

Article 1,532. A person who sells for a lump sum or as a global sale a whole set of certain rights, income or products shall comply with his obligations by being liable for the lawfulness of the whole in general; but shall not be obliged to warrant each of the parts comprising it, save in the event of dispossession of the whole or of the majority.

Article 1,533. If the seller should have benefited from some fruits or should have perceived anything from the estate sold thereby, he must pay them to the purchaser, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 1,534. The purchaser must, in his turn, pay the seller all that the latter has paid for any debts and liens on the estate and for the credits held against it, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 1,535. In the event of sale of a litigious credit, the debtor shall be entitled to extinguish the same by reimbursing the assignee of the price paid, any costs incurred and interest on the price from the date on which it was paid. A credit shall be deemed litigious from the time that a response to the claim relating thereto is filed. The debtor may exercise his right within nine days, counting from the assignee’s demand for payment.

Article 1,536. The following assignments or sales shall be excepted from the provisions of the preceding article:

  1. Those made to a co-heir or co-owner of the assigned right.
  2. Those made to a creditor as payment of his credit.
  3. Those made to the possessor of a property subject to the litigious right thus assigned.

CHAPTER 8º

General provision

Article 1,537. The provisions of the present title are understood to be subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Law in respect of immovable property.

TITLE V

On barter

Article 1,538. Barter is a contract whereby one of the contracting parties undertakes to give a thing to receive another.

Article 1,539

If one of the contracting parties should have received the thing which was promised to him to be bartered, and should evidence that the thing did not belong to the person who gave it, he cannot be obliged to deliver the thing that he offered in exchange, and shall be released from his obligation by returning the thing he received.

Article 1,540. The person who was dispossessed of the thing received in a barter may choose between recovering the thing he gave in exchange, or claim for damages; but he may only exercise the right to recover the thing which he delivered while it remains in the possession of the other contracting party, without prejudice to rights acquired thereto in the meantime by a third party in good faith.

Article 1,541. For all matters not especially provided in this title, barters shall be governed by the provisions governing sales.

TITLE VI

On the lease contract

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,542. A lease may be of things, works or services.

Article 1,543. In a lease of things, one of the parties undertakes to give to the other the enjoyment or use of a thing for a specific time and at a certain price.

Article 1,544. In the lease of works or services, one of the parties undertakes to execute a work or provide a service to the other for a certain price.

Article 1,545. Fungible property which is consumed by its use cannot be the subject matter of this contract.

CHAPTER 2º

On leases of rural and urban properties

SECTION ONE

General provisions

Article 1,546. The person who undertakes to assign the use of the thing, execute the work or provide the service is called lessor; the person who acquires the use of the thing or the rights to the work or service, which he undertakes to pay, is called lessee.

Article 1,547. If the performance of a verbal lease contract should have begun without evidence of the agreed price, the lessee shall return to the lessor the thing subject to the lease, paying the regulated price for the time during which he has enjoyed it.

Article 1,548. Parents or guardians may not lease the property of the minors or incapacitated persons, and administrators without a special power of attorney may not lease property for a term exceeding six years.

Article 1,549. Leases of immovable property which are not duly registered in the Property Registry shall not be effective against third parties.

Article 1,550. Where it is not expressly forbidden in the contract to lease things, the lessee may sublease the thing subject to the lease in its entirety or in part, without prejudice to his liability for the performance of the contract against the lessor.

Article 1,551. Without prejudice to his obligation to the sub lessor, the sub lessee shall be obliged to perform in favour of the lessor all acts relating to the use and conservation of the thing subject to the lease in the manner agreed between the lessor and the lessee.

Article 1,552. The sub lessee shall also have an obligation towards the lessor to pay the amount of the price agreed in the sublease which may be owed at the time of the demand for payment, and any advance payments shall be deemed not to have been made, unless they have been verified according to local custom.

Article 1,553. The provisions contained in the title regulating the sale and purchase concerning warranty shall apply to the lease contract. In cases where the parties are obliged to return the price, such price shall be reduced proportionally to the time during which the lessee enjoyed the use of the thing.

SECTION 2ª

On the rights and obligations of the lessor and of the lessee

Article 1,554. The lessor is obliged:

  1. To deliver to the lessee the thing constituting the subject matter of the contract.
  2. To perform therein during the lease any repairs required to preserve it in a condition to serve for the use to which it has been destined.
  3. To maintain the lessee in the peaceful enjoyment of the lease for the whole term of the contract.

Article 1,555. The lessee is obliged:

  1. To pay the price of the lease in the agreed terms.
  2. To use the thing subject to the lease as an orderly paterfamilias, to use give it the agreed use; and, in the absence of agreement, the use which is inferred from the nature of the thing subject to the lease according to local custom.
  3. To pay any expenses arisen as a result of raising the contract to public deed.

Article 1,556. If the lessor or the lessee should fail to comply with the obligations expressed in the preceding articles, they may request rescission of the contract and claim for damages, or only the latter, leaving the contract to subsist.

Article 1,557. The lessor may not alter the form of the thing subject to the lease.

Article 1,558. If, during the lease, it should be necessary to make any urgent repair in the thing subject to the lease which cannot be delayed until expiration thereof, the lessee shall have the obligation to tolerate the works, even if they are very annoying to him, and even if he should be deprived of a part of the property during their performance. If the repair should last longer than forty days, the price of the lease must be reduced proportionally to the time and the part of the property of which the lessee has been deprived. If the nature of the works is such that it renders uninhabitable the part which the lessee and his family need to live in, the latter may rescind the contract.

Article 1,559. The lessee is obliged to make the owner aware, within as brief a period as possible, of any usurpation or harmful development performed or openly prepared by another in respect of the thing subject to the lease. He is also obliged to make the owner aware, with the same urgency, of the need for all repairs comprised in number 2 article 1554. In both cases, the lessee shall be liable for any damages caused to the owner as a result of his negligence.

Article 1,560. The lessor shall not be liable for a mere de facto disturbance caused by a third party in the use of the property subject to the lease; however, the lessee shall have a direct remedy against the disturber. No de facto disturbance shall exist where the third party, be it the Administration or an individual, has acted pursuant to a right to which it is entitled.

Article 1,561. The lessee must return the property, upon expiration of the lease, as he received it, save for anything which may have perished or may have become impaired by usual wear and tear or for an unavoidable cause.

Article 1,562. In the absence of a description of the condition of the property at the time of entering into the lease, the law presumes that the lessee received it in good condition, unless evidence to the contrary is provided.

Article 1,563. The lessee is liable for the impairment or loss of the thing subject to the lease, unless he should prove that it has been caused without fault on his particle.

Article 1,564. The lessee is liable for impairment caused by the persons in his household.

Article 1,565. If the lease was entered into for a specific period, it shall expire on the date provided without the need for prior notice.

Article 1,566. If, upon expiration of the contract, the lessee should remain in the enjoyment of the thing subject of the lease for fifteen with the lessor’s acquiescence, the lease shall be deemed implicitly renewed for the period provided in articles 1577 and 1581, unless a prior notice should have been given.

Article 1,567. In the event of implied renewal, any obligations entered into by a third party to secure the principal contract shall cease in respect of it.

Article 1,568. In the event of loss of the thing subject to the lease or if any of the contracting parties should fail to comply with the provisions of the lease, the provisions of articles 1182 and 1183 and 1101 and 1124 shall respectively apply.

Article 1,569. The lessor may judicially evict the lessee on any of the following grounds:

  1. Expiration of the agreed term or of the periods provided as term of leases in articles 1577 and 1581.
  2. Failure to pay the agreed price.
  3. Infringement of any of the conditions provided in the contract.
  4. Destining the thing subject to the lease to uses or services which have not been agreed to and which may impair it; or not to submit to the provisions of number 2 article 1555 in the use thereof.

Article 1,570. Outside the cases mentioned in the preceding article, the lessee shall be entitled to benefit from the terms provided in articles 1577 and 1581.

Article 1,571. The purchaser of a leased real property shall be entitled to terminate the lease currently in force upon execution of the sale, save as otherwise agreed, and except for the provisions of the Mortgage Law. If the purchaser should exercise this right, the lessee may request to be allowed to collect the fruits of the harvest corresponding to the current agricultural year, and to be compensated by the seller for any damages caused.

Article 1,572. The purchaser who has agreed to a contractual repurchase covenant may not exercise his power to evict the lessee until the period provided to exercise the right of repurchase.

Article 1,573. The lessee shall have the same right granted to the usufructuary in respect of useful and voluntary improvements.

Article 1,574. In the absence of an agreement on the place and time to pay the lease, the provisions of article 1171 shall apply in respect of the place; and local custom in respect of the time.

SECTION 3ª

Special provisions for leases of rural properties

Article 1,575. The lessee shall not be entitled to a reduction in the rent on account of the barrenness of the leased land or loss of fruits arisen as a result of ordinary fortuitous events; but he shall be entitled to such reduction in the event of loss of more than half of the fruits as a result of extraordinary and unforeseen fortuitous events, always unless otherwise agreed pursuant to special covenant. Extraordinary fortuitous events shall be deemed to mean: Fire, war, plague, unusual flooding, locusts, earthquake or other equally unaccustomed events, which the contracting parties should have been unable to foresee reasonably.

Article 1,576. The lessee shall also not be entitled to a reduction in the rent when the fruits should have been lost after being separated from their root or trunk.

Article 1,577

The lease of a rural plot of land, where its term should not have been set, shall be deemed to have been made for the whole time necessary to harvest the fruits given by the whole property in a year or those which it may produce in a single time, even if it takes two or more years to obtain. The lease of arable land divided into two or more strips shall be deemed to have been entered into for as many years as there are strips.

Article 1,578. The outgoing lessee must allow the incoming lessee use of the premises and other means necessary for the preparation work for the following year; reciprocally, the incoming lessee has the obligation to allow the outgoing lessee to harvest and benefit from the fruits, all in accordance with local custom.

Article 1,579. Sharecropping leases of arable land, breeding livestock or manufacturing and industrial undertakings shall be governed by the provisions relating to the partnership agreement and by the provisions agreed to by the parties and, in the absence thereof, by local custom.

SECTION 4ª

Special provisions for the lease of urban properties

Article 1,580. In the absence of a special covenant, local custom shall apply as regards which repairs on urban properties must be borne by the owner. In case of doubt, they shall be deemed to be borne by the latter.

Article 1,581. If no term should have been set for the lease, it shall be deemed to have been entered into from year to year where an annual lease has been set, from month to month where the lease is monthly, from day to day where it is daily. In any event the lease shall cease upon expiration of the term, without the need for a special notice.

Article 1,582. Where the lessor of a house, or part of it, destined for habitation by family, or a shop, or warehouse, or industrial establishment, should also lease the furniture, the lease of the latter shall be deemed to be for the same term as the lease relating to the leased property.

CHAPTER 3º

On the lease of works and services

SECTION ONE

On services by servants and salaried employees

Article 1,583. These kinds of services may be hired without a fixed term, for a certain time, or for a specific work. A lease entered into for life is null and void.

Article 1,584. The domestic servant destined to the personal service of his master, or his family, for a specific time, may resign and be dismissed prior to expiration of the term; but if the master should dismiss the servant without just cause, he must compensate him by paying him the salary due and fifteen more dayssalary. The master shall be believed, unless evidence to the contrary is provided:

  1. As concerns the amount of the salary of the domestic servant.
  2. As relates to the payment of salaries accrued in the current year.

Article 1,585. As well as the provisions of the preceding articles, the provisions of special laws and regulations shall be observed as regards masters and servants.

Article 1,586. Agricultural and manual workers, artisans and other salaried employees for a specific term for a specific work cannot resign or be dismissed prior to the performance of the contract, without just cause.

Article 1,587. The dismissal of servants, manual workers, artisans and other salaried employees mentioned in the preceding articles shall entitle the master to dispossess them of the tools and the buildings they should occupy by reason of their position.

SECTION 2ª

On works for a lump sum

Article 1,588. The execution of building works may be hired under the agreement that the executor must only provide his work or industry, or also supply materials.

Article 1,589. If the person who contracted the building works undertook to supply the materials, he must suffer their loss in the event that the building works should be destroyed before delivery, unless he should have delayed its acceptance.

Article 1,590. The party who has undertaken to provide only his work or industry may not claim any stipend if the work is destroyed prior to delivery, unless the other party should have delayed its acceptance, or the destruction has resulted from the inferior quality of the materials, provided that the former duly warned the owner of this circumstance.

Article 1,591. The contractor of a building which should collapse as a result of defects in its construction shall be liable for any damages if such collapse should take place within ten years, counting from completion of construction; the architect who manages the building works shall have the same liability for the same term if the collapse should result from a defect in the land or from his management. If the cause should be the fault of the contractor, the action to claim for damages shall last fifteen years.

Article 1,592. A person who undertakes to perform the work by pieces or measurements, may require the owner to receive it in parts and to pay in proportion. The part which has been paid shall be presumed to have been approved and accepted.

Article 1,593. The architect or contractor who undertakes to perform the construction of a building or other building works for a lump sum based on a plan agreed with the owner of the land may not request an increase in the price even in the event of increase in the price of wages or materials; he may, however, request such increase where any change has been made to the plan which involves an increase in the scope of the building works, provided that the owner has given his authorisation.

Article 1,594. The owner may desist, at his sole discretion, from the construction of the works even after they have begun, compensating the contractor for all his expenses, work and for the profit which the owner may have obtained .

Article 1,595. Where a certain work should have been entrusted to a person as a result of his personal qualities, the contract shall be rescinded by the death of such person. In this event, the owner must pay the builder’s heirs, in proportion to the agreed price, the value of the part of the work which was performed and the materials which were prepared, provided that any profit should result from these materials. The same shall be understood if the person who contracted the work cannot finish it for any reason beyond his will.

Article 1,596. The contractor is liable for the work performed by any persons hired to perform it.

Article 1,597. Persons who provide work and materials for building works which have been agreed for a lump sum by the contractor shall have no action against the owner thereof in excess of the amount owed by the owner to the contractor at the time of making the claim.

Article 1,598. Where it should be agreed that the building works are to be performed to the owner’s satisfaction, in the absence of acceptance, the owner’s approval shall be deemed subject to the relevant expert’s opinion. If the person who is to approve the works is a third party, the parties shall abide by his decision.

Article 1,599. Unless otherwise provided by covenant or custom, the price of the works must be paid upon delivery thereof.

Article 1,600. The person who has performed works in a movable thing shall be entitled to retain it as a pledge until he is paid.

SECTION 3ª

On transportation by water and land of both persons and things

Article 1,601. Carriers of shipments by land or water shall be subject to the same obligations set forth in articles 1783 and 1784 in respect of innkeepers, as relates to the care and conservation of the things entrusted to them. The provisions of this article shall be understood without prejudice to the provisions of the Commercial Code in respect of transportation by sea and land.

Article 1,602. Likewise, carriers shall be liable for the loss and average of the things received, unless they should prove that the loss or average has resulted from a fortuitous event or from force majeure.

Article 1,603. The provisions of these articles shall be understood without prejudice to the provisions of special statutes and regulations.

TITLE VII

On ground rents (censos)

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,604. A ground rent is constituted when certain immovable properties are earmarked for the payment of an annual rent or annuity as remuneration for a capital sum received in cash, or for the full or limited ownership transferred in respect of the same properties.

Article 1,605. The ground rent shall be emphyteutic where one person assigns in favour of the other useful ownership of a property, and reserves for himself direct ownership thereof and the right to receive from the emphyteutic lessee an annual pension in recognition of such ownership.

Article 1,606

The ground rent shall be consignative where the lessee subjects an immovable property owned by him to the encumbrance of paying a rent or annuity, which he undertakes to pay the lessor in exchange for the capital sum received from the latter in cash.

Article 1,607. The ground rent shall be reservative where a person assigns to the other full ownership over an immovable property, reserving for himself the right to receive from the same immovable property an annuity payable by the lessee.

Article 1,608. It is inherent to the nature of ground rents that the assignment of the capital sum or the immovable property be for perpetuity or for an indefinite period; however, the lessee may redeem the ground rent at his discretion, even in spite of any covenant to the contrary; this provision shall apply to all existing ground rents. The parties may, however, agree that redemption of the ground rent may not to take place during the life of the lessor or of a specific person, or that it may not be redeemed in a certain number of years, which shall not be greater than twenty for consignative ground rents or sixty for reservative and emphyteutic ground rents.

Article 1,609. In order to perform such redemption, the lessee must give one year’s notice thereof to the lessor, or pay an annuity in advance.

Article 1,610. Ground rents may not be redeemed in part unless expressly agreed. Neither may they be redeemed against the will of the lessor if the lessee is not up to date in the payment of any annuities.

Article 1,611. Redemption of ground rents created prior to the enactment of the present Code, if the relevant capital sum should be unknown, shall be governed by the amount resulting from capitalising the annuity at 3 per cent. If the annuity should be paid in fruits, the latter shall be estimated at their average price in the last five years in order to calculate the relevant capital sum. The provisions of this article shall not apply to foros, subforos, surface rights and any other similar encumbrances in respect of which the redemption of ownership rights is regulated by a special statute.

Article 1,612. Any expenses arisen upon redemption and release of the ground rent shall be borne by the lessee, save for any expenses caused by reckless opposition thereto, in the opinion of the Courts.

Article 1,613. The annuity or rent in ground rents shall be determined by the parties upon execution of the contract. It may consist of money or fruits.

Article 1,614. The annuities shall be paid within the agreed periods and, in the absence of agreement, if they should consist of monies, yearly in arrears counting from the date of the contract, and if they consist of fruits, upon completion of the respective harvest.

Article 1,615. If the contract should not have designated the place where the annuities are to be paid, this obligation shall be met at the location of the property encumbered by the ground rent, provided that the lessor or his attorney should be domiciled within the same municipality. Otherwise, if the lessee’s domicile should be located therein, payment shall take place in the latter’s domicile.

Article 1,616. The lessor, at the time of delivering any annuity, may make the lessee to provide a receipt evidencing payment thereof.

Article 1,617. Properties encumbered with ground rent may be transferred as gifts or in exchange for valuable consideration, and also the right to receive the annuity.

Article 1,618. Properties encumbered with ground rent may not be divided between two or more persons without the lessor’s express consent, even if they are acquired by inheritance. If the lessor allows the division, the part of the ground rent which shall encumber each share shall be designated with his consent, and as many ground rents shall be created as portions into which the property is divided.

Article 1,619. In the event of an attempt to adjudicate the property encumbered by a ground rent to several heirs where the lessor should fail to give his consent to the division, the property shall be auctioned between them. In the absence of an agreement or if none of the interested parties should bid the appraisal price, the property shall be sold with the encumbrance, and the price thereof shall be divided among the heirs.

Article 1,620. Both the capital sum and the annuities in ground rents are capable of prescription in accordance with the provisions of title XVIII of this book.

Article 1,621. Notwithstanding the provisions of article 1,110, payment of two consecutive annuities shall be required to presume all of the foregoing annuities to have been paid.

Article 1,622. The lessee is obliged to pay any contributions and other taxes affecting the property subject to the ground rent. The lessee, upon paying the annuity, may discount therefrom the part of such taxes corresponding to the lessor.

Article 1,623. Ground rents give rise to an action in rem over the encumbered property. As well as the action in rem, the lessee may exercise a personal remedy to claim payment of any annuities which are in arrears and any damages and interest, if applicable.

Article 1,624. The lessee may not request the release or reduction of the annuity as a result of accidental barrenness of the property or loss of its fruits.

Article 1,625. If the property encumbered by a ground rent should be fully lost or rendered useless, the ground rent shall be extinguished and payment of the annuity shall cease. If it should be lost only in part, the lessee shall not be exempted from paying the annuity, unless he should prefer to relinquish the property in favour of the lessor. If there should have been negligence on the part of the lessee, he shall be obliged in both cases to pay damages.

Article 1,626. In the case of the first paragraph of the preceding article, if the property should be insured, the value of the insurance shall be earmarked to the payment of the capital sum of the ground rent and any annuities due and payable, unless the lessee should prefer to invest it in rebuilding the property, in which case the ground rent shall be reinstated with full force and effect, including payment of any unpaid annuities. The lessor may require the lessee to ensure the investment of the sum of the insurance in rebuilding the property.

Article 1,627. If the property encumbered by a ground rent should be expropriated on grounds of public utility, the price thereof shall be earmarked for the payment of the capital sum of the ground rent and any annuities due and payable, and the ground rent shall be extinguished. The preceding provision shall also apply to the case where the expropriation should only affect one part of the property, when the price obtained should be sufficient to cover the capital sum of the ground rent. If it should not be sufficient, the ground rent shall continue to encumber the rest of the property, provided that the price thereof should be sufficient to cover the capital sum of the ground rent plus 25 per cent.

Otherwise, the lessee shall be obliged to replace the expropriated portion with another guarantee, or to redeem the ground rent, at his discretion, except for the provisions of article 1,631 relating to emphyteutic ground rents.

CHAPTER 2º

On emphyteutic ground rent

SECTION ONE

Provisions relating to emphyteusis

Article 1,628. The emphyteutic ground rent may only be created in respect of immovable property and pursuant to public deed.

Article 1,629. Upon creation of the emphyteutic ground rent, the contract shall determine the value of the property and the annuity to be paid, under penalty of nullity.

Article 1,630. Where the annuity should consist of a specific amount of fruits, the species and quality thereof shall be set forth in the contract. If it should consist of a proportional share of the fruits obtained by the property, in the absence of an express covenant relating to the intervention of the direct owner, the emphyteutic lessee must give the former or his representative prior notice of the day on which he proposes to begin harvesting each kind of fruit, so that the former may, by himself or through his representative, be present at all such operations until he receives the part corresponding to him. After giving notice, the emphyteutic lessee may proceed with the harvest, even if neither the direct owner or his representative or controller should be present.

Article 1,631. In the event of expropriation, the provisions of the first paragraph article 1,627 shall apply if the whole property is expropriated. In the event of expropriation of only one part of the property, the price obtained shall be distributed between the direct owner and the useful owner, and the former shall receive the part of the capital sum of the ground rent proportionally corresponding to the expropriated part, according to the value given to the whole property upon creation of the ground rent, or the value which has served as redemption price, and the rest shall correspond to the emphyteutic lessee. In this case, the ground rent shall continue in respect of the remainder of the property, with the corresponding reduction of the capital sum and the annuities, unless the emphyteutic lessee should opt for total redemption thereof or should choose to relinquish the property in favour of the direct owner. Where, in accordance with the contract, any laudemium should be payable, the direct owner shall receive any amount corresponding to him in this respect only from the part of the price belonging to the emphyteutic lessee.

Article 1,632. The emphyteutic lessee shall appropriate the produce of the property and any accessions thereof. He shall have the same rights to any treasures and mines discovered in the property constituting the subject matter of the emphyteutic ground rent which would correspond to the owner.

Article 1,633. The emphyteutic lessee may dispose of the emphyteutic property and any accessions thereof both pursuant to acts inter vivos and by last will and testament, except for the rights of the direct owner and subject to the provisions of the following articles. ,

Article 1,634. Where the annuity should consist of a proportional share of the fruits of the emphyteutic property, no easement or other lien may be created which reduces the products without the direct owner’s express consent.

Article 1,635. The emphyteutic lessee may freely give or swap the property, giving notice thereof to the direct owner.

Article 1,636. The direct and the useful owner shall reciprocally hold first refusal and redemption rights in the event of sale or dation in payment of their respective ownership rights over the emphyteutic property. This provision shall not apply to disposals for valuable consideration on grounds of public utility (eminent domain).

Article 1,637. For the purposes of the preceding article, any person purporting to dispose of the ownership of an emphyteutic property must give notice thereof to the other co-owner, stating the final price offered to him or at which he purports to dispose of his ownership rights. Within twenty days of such notice, the co-owner may exercise his right of first refusal paying the aforementioned price. If he should fail to do so, he shall forfeit such right and the disposal may proceed.

Article 1,638. Where the direct owner, or, as the case may be, the emphyteutic lessee, should not have exercised the right of first refusal mentioned in the preceding article, he may exercise his right of redemption to acquire the property for the price at which it is sold. In such case, the right of redemption must be exercised within nine days of execution of the public deed of sale. If such sale should be concealed, this period shall begin to count from registration thereof with the Property Registry. Concealment shall be presumed to exist where the public deed should not be submitted to the Registry within nine days following execution thereof. Irrespective of such presumption, concealment may be proven by other legal means.

Article 1,639. If such disposal should have taken place without the prior notice mentioned in article 1,637, the direct owner and, as the case may be, the useful owner, may exercise their right of redemption at all times until one year should elapse counting from registration of the disposal in the Property Registry.

Article 1,640. In judicial sales of emphyteutic properties, the direct and the useful owner, in their respective instances, may exercise the right of first refusal within the period provided in the relevant court order to place the final bid, paying the price which serves as rate for the auction, and the right of redemption within nine business days following execution of the relevant public deed. In this last case the prior notice required pursuant to article 1,637 shall not be necessary.

Article 1,641. Where several properties subject to the same ground rent should have been disposed of, neither the right of first refusal nor the right of redemption may be exercised only in respect of some and excluding the others.

Article 1,642. Where the direct or useful ownership should belong pro indiviso to several persons, each of them may exercise the right of first refusal subject to the rules set forth for co-owners, and the direct owner shall be preferred among them, in the event of disposal of part of the useful ownership; or the emphyteutic lessee, if the disposal refers to the direct ownership.

Article 1,643. If the emphyteutic lessee should be disturbed in his rights by a third party disputing direct ownership or challenging the validity of the emphyteusis, he may not claim compensation from the direct owner unless he summons him to the dispossession proceedings according to the provisions of article 1,481.

Article 1,644. In disposals of emphyteutic properties for valuable consideration, laudemium shall only be payable to the direct owner where it has been expressly provided in the emphyteusis contract. If no fixed sum should have been set by covenant, this shall consist of 2 per cent of the disposal price. For emphyteutic leases prior to the enactment of the present Code subject to the payment of laudemium, even if not expressly agreed, the provision shall continue as accustomed, but shall not exceed 2 per cent of the disposal price unless a greater sum should have been expressly agreed.

Article 1,645. The obligation to pay laudemium shall be borne by the acquirer, save as otherwise agreed.

Article 1,646. Where the emphyteutic lessee should have obtained from the direct owner an authorisation to perform the disposal, or should have given him prior notice thereof as provided in article 1,637, the direct owner may only claim, as the case may be, payment of the laudemium within one year following the date of registration of the public deed with the Property Registry. Outside such cases, the action shall be subject to ordinary statute of limitations.

Article 1,647. Every twenty nine years the direct owner may request the acknowledgement of his right by the possessor of the emphyteutic property. Acknowledgement expenses shall be borne by the emphyteutic lessee, who may not be required to perform anything else in this respect.

Article 1,648. The property shall be forfeited and the direct owner may demand restitution thereof:

  1. By failure to pay the annuity for three consecutive years.
  2. If the emphyteutic lessee does not fulfil the condition provided in the contract or should seriously impair the property.

Article 1,649. In the first case of the preceding article, the direct owner must, in order to request such forfeiture, demand payment from the emphyteutic lessee judicially or via a Notary Public; if the lessee should fail to pay within thirty days following the demand , the former shall be free to exercise his rights.

Article 1,650. The emphyteutic lessee may be released from such forfeiture in any event by redeeming the ground rent and paying all annuities due and payable within thirty days following the demand for payment or the summons pursuant to the claim. The creditors of the emphyteutic lessee may exercise the same right within thirty days following recovery of full ownership by the direct owner.

Article 1,651. Redemption of the emphyteutic ground rent shall consist of delivery in a lump sum in cash to the direct owner of the capital sum determined as the value of the property at the time of creating the ground rent, and no other undertaking may be required unless it has been set forth in the contract.

Article 1,652. In the event of forfeiture or rescission of the emphyteusis contract on any grounds, the direct owner must pay for any improvements which have increased the value of the property, provided that such increase should be subsisting at the time of returning the property. If the property should have suffered any impairments as a result of the fault or negligence of the emphyteutic lessee, these may be set off against any improvements and, to the extent that the latter are insufficient, the emphyteutic lessee shall have a personal obligation to pay them; the same shall apply to annuities due and payable which have not become statute barred.

Article 1,653. In the absence of testamentary heirs, descendants, ascendants, surviving spouse or relatives within the sixth degree of the last emphyteutic lessee, the property shall return to the direct owner in its current condition, unless otherwise provided by the emphyteutic lessee.

Article 1,654. The sub-emphyteusis contract shall hereafter be suppressed.

SECTION 2ª

On foros and other contracts analogous to emphyteusis

Article 1,655. Foros and any other analogous encumbrances established after the enactment of the present Code, for an indefinite term, shall be governed by the provisions set forth for emphyteutic ground rents in the preceding section. If they should be temporary or for a limited term, they shall be deemed to be leases, and shall be governed by the provisions relating to such contract.

Article 1,656. The contract whereby the owner of the land assigns the use thereof to plant vines for the life of the first stock, and the assignee pays the owner an annual rent or annuity in fruits or in cash shall be governed by the following rules:

  1. It shall be deemed to be extinguished fifty years from its granting, where no other term should have been expressly set.
  2. It shall also be extinguished as a result of the death of the first stock, or if two thirds of any planted stock should become barren.
  3. The assignee or colonist may perform cuttings or scions during the term of the contract.
  4. This contract shall not forfeit its character by the power to make other plantings in the land assigned, provided that the main purpose thereof is the planting of vines.
  5. The assignee may freely transfer his right for valuable consideration or as a gift, but without the ability to divide the use of the property, save with the owner’s express consent.
  6. In disposals for valuable consideration, the assignor and the assignee shall reciprocally hold rights of first refusal and redemption in accordance with the provisions applicable to emphyteusis, and with the obligation to give each other prior notice as provided in article 1,637.
  7. The colonist or assignee may resign or return the property to the assignor when he deems convenient, paying any impairments which were caused by his fault.
  8. The assignee shall not be entitled to appropriate any improvements made at the time of expiration of the contract, provided that they should have been necessary or should have been performed in compliance with the contract. As relates to useful and voluntary improvements, he shall not be entitled to receive compensation for them either, unless he should have performed them with the written consent of the owner of the land, wherein the latter should have undertaken to pay them. In this case, such improvements shall be paid at their value upon returning the property.
  9. The assignor may evict the assignee upon expiration of the term of the contract.
  10. Where, after expiration of the fifty-year term or the term expressly provided by the interested parties, the assignee should continue to use and benefit from the property with the assignor’s implied consent, the former may not be evicted without prior notice, to be given one year in advance of termination of the contract.

CHAPTER 3º

On consignative ground rent

Article 1,657. In the event that payment of the annuity in a consignative ground rent should be agreed to be made in fruits, the parties must set the species, amount and quality thereof, which may not consist of a proportional share in the fruits produced by the property constituting the subject matter of the ground rent.

Article 1,658. Redemption of the consignative ground rent shall consist of returning to the lessor in a lump sum in cash, the capital sum delivered by the latter to constitute the ground rent.

Article 1,659. In the event of initiation of an action in rem against the property constituting the subject matter of the ground rent to claim payment of any annuities, if the remaining value of the property should not be enough to cover the capital sum of the ground rent plus 25 per cent, the lessor may compel the lessee, at the latter’s discretion, to redeem the ground rent or to complete the guaranty, or to relinquish the remainder of the property in favour of the former.

Article 1,660. The lessor may also exercise the right set forth in the preceding article in the remaining cases where the value of the property should be insufficient to cover the capital of the annuity lease plus 25 per cent, in the event of any of the following circumstances:

  1. Reduction in the value of the property as a result of the lessee’s fault or negligence. In such case the latter shall also be liable for any damages.
  2. Failure to pay the annuity on two consecutive years.
  3. The declared civil or commercial bankruptcy or insolvency of the lessee.

CHAPTER 4º

On reservative ground rent

Article 1,661. No reservative ground rent may be validly constituted unless it is preceded by an appraisal of the property by an estimate agreed between the parties or a reasonable price determined by experts.

Article 1,662. Redemption of this ground rent shall take place by the lessee’s delivering to the lessor, in a lump sum in cash, the capital sum determined in accordance with the preceding article.

Article 1,663. The provisions of article 1,657 shall apply to reservative ground rents.

Article 1,664. In the cases provided in articles 1,659 and 1,660, the debtor in a reservative ground rent may only be compelled to redeem the ground rent or to relinquish the property in favour of the lessor.

TITLE VIII

On partnerships

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,665. A partnership is a contract whereby two or more persons undertake to put in common money, property or industry, with the intention of dividing any gains between them.

Article 1,666. The partnership must have a lawful purpose and be established for the common interest of the partners. In the event of dissolution of an unlawful partnership, any gains obtained shall be destined to charitable institutions of the partnership’s domicile and, in the absence thereof, those of the province.

Article 1,667. A civil partnership may be incorporated in any form, unless immovable properties or rights in rem should be contributed thereto, in which case a public deed shall be required.

Article 1,668. The partnership contract shall be null and void whenever immovable properties are contributed thereto, unless an inventory thereof is drafted and signed by the parties, which must be attached to the relevant public deed.

Article 1,669. Partnerships whose covenants are kept secret between the partners and those wherein each partner contracts in his own name with third parties shall have no legal personality. These kinds of partnerships shall be governed by the provisions regulating joint ownership.

Article 1,670. Civil partnerships may hold all forms recognised by the Commercial Code depending on their corporate purpose. In such case, the provisions thereof shall apply to the extent that they do not oppose the provisions of the present Code.

Article 1,671. A partnership is either universal or specific.

Article 1,672. A universal partnership may affect all existing property or all gains.

Article 1,673. A partnership affecting all existing property is the one whereby the parties put in common all property currently belonging to them, with the intention of dividing it between them, and all gains acquired as a result thereof.

Article 1,674. In a universal partnership of all existing property, any property which used to belong to each partner and all gains acquired as a result thereof shall become the common property of them all. The partners may also agree to share reciprocally any other gains; but the partnership may not comprise property which the partners may subsequently acquire pursuant to inheritance, legacy or gift, but may include the fruits thereof.

Article 1,675. The universal partnership of gains comprises everything which the partners may acquire as a result of their industry or work during the term of the partnership. Movable or immovable property held by each partner at the time of execution of the contract shall continue to be the private property of each of them, and the partnership shall only acquire the usufruct thereof.

Article 1,676. A universal partnership contract entered into without specification of the kind of partnership shall only create a universal partnership of gains.

Article 1,677. Persons to whom it is forbidden to reciprocally grant each other any gift or advantage may not create a universal partnership between them.

Article 1,678. The purpose of a specific partnership is only specific things, the use thereof or their fruits, or a specific undertaking, or the exercise of a profession or Article

CHAPTER 2º

On the obligations of the partners

SECTION ONE

On the obligations of the partners toward each other

Article 1,679. The partnership shall begin from the very moment of entering into the contract, unless otherwise agreed.

Article 1,680. The partnership shall last the agreed term; in the absence of an agreement, for the term of the business serving as exclusive purpose of the partnership, if the former should have a limited duration as a result of its nature; in any other case, for the whole life of the partners, save for the power reserved in article 1,700 and for the provisions of 1,704.

Article 1,681. Each partner shall owe the partnership what he has undertaken to contribute to it. He shall also be liable for dispossession of any certain and specific things contributed to the partnership in the same cases and in the same manner as the seller vis-à-vis the purchaser.

Article 1,682. The partner who has undertaken to contribute a sum of money and has failed to provide it shall owe by operation of law the interest thereon from the date on which he ought to have provided it, without prejudice to his liability for any damages caused. The same shall apply in respect of any sums taken from the partnership’s account, and interest shall be payable from the date on which he took them for his personal benefit.

Article 1,683. The industrial partner shall owe the partnership any gains obtained in the branch of industry constituting the purpose thereof.

Article 1,684. Where a partner authorised to administer the partnership should collect an amount due and payable to him on his own behalf, from a person who also owed the partnership another amount which was also due and payable, the amount collected must be attributed to both credits in proportion to their respective amounts, even if he should have issued a receipt only on account of his own assets; however, if he should have issued a receipt on account of the partnership’s assets, the whole amount thereof shall be attributed thereto. The provisions of this article shall be understood without prejudice to the debtor’s right to exercise the power granted pursuant to article 1,172, in the sole event that the partner’s personal credit should be more burdensome to him.

Article 1,685. The partner who has received his share in a credit held against the partnership without the other partners having received their share shall be obliged to contribute the amount received to the partnership’s assets if the debtor should later become insolvent, even if he should have issued a receipt only for his share of the credit.

Article 1,686. Any partner shall be liable to the partnership for any damages suffered by the latter by his fault, and may not set off such damages against any benefits obtained from his industry.

Article 1,687. The risk of specific and determined non-fungible things contributed to the partnership whereby only the use and fruits thereof are to be common property shall be borne by the partner who is their owner. If the things contributed should be fungible, or if they cannot be stored without impairment thereof, or if they should have been contributed in order to be sold, the risk shall be borne by the partnership. The risk of any things contributed including an appraisal thereof in the relevant inventory shall also be borne by the partnership, and in this case any claim shall be limited to their appraisal price.

Article 1,688. The partnership shall be liable to any partner for any amounts disbursed by the latter on behalf of the former plus applicable interest; it shall also be liable for any obligations undertaken in good faith by the partner on corporate business, and for the risks which are inseparable from the management of the partnership.

Article 1,689. Gains and losses shall be distributed as agreed. If only the share of each partner in any gains should have been agreed, the same share shall apply for losses.

In the absence of an agreement, the part of each partner in gains and losses must be proportional to his contribution. The share of the partner who only contributes his industry shall be equal to that of the partner who has contributed the least. If, as well as his industry, he should also have contributed some capital, he shall also receive the proportional share corresponding thereto.

Article 1,690. If the partners should have agreed to entrust to a third party the designation of the share corresponding to each partner in any gains and losses, such designation may only be challenged in the event that it should be manifestly inequitable. In no event may such decision be challenged by a partner who has begun to enforce the third party’s decision, or who has failed to challenge it within three months counting from the time he became aware of it. Designation of gains and losses may not be entrusted to one of the partners.

Article 1,691. An agreement excluding one or more partners from any share in gains or losses shall be null and void. Only the industrial partner may be released from liability for any losses.

Article 1,692. The partner appointed as director in the partnership contract may perform all acts of administration in spite of his partners’ opposition, unless he should act in bad faith; his powers shall be irrevocable unless there are legitimate grounds for it. A power of attorney granted after execution of the contract, where such contract should not include an agreement to confer it, may be revoked at any time.

Article 1,693. Where two or more partners should have been entrusted with the management of the partnership without determination of their duties, or without having expressed that the ones may not act without the others’ consent, each of them may exercise all acts of administration separately; but any of them may object to the transactions performed by another before they are legally effective.

Article 1,694. In the event of stipulation that the managing partners cannot act without the others’ consent, the consent of all of them shall be required for the validity of any acts, without the possibility of alleging absence or impossibility of any of them, save in the event of imminent danger of serious or irreparable harm to the partnership.

Article 1,695. In the absence of stipulations relating to the manner of administration, the following rules shall be observed:

  1. All partners shall be deemed to be attorneys, and whatever each of them performs by himself shall be binding on the partnership, but any of them may object to the transactions performed by the others before they become legally effective.
  2. Each partner may avail himself of the things which comprise the partnership’s funds according to local custom, as long as he does not do so against the interests of the partnership, or in such a way that it prevents the use thereof to which his partners are entitled.
  3. Any partner may make the rest bear with him any expenses necessary for the conservation of common property.
  4. No partner may undertake any development of the partnership’s immovable properties, even if he should allege that it is useful for the partnership.

Article 1,696. Each partner may by himself associate with a third party as regards his share; but the associate shall not become a member of the partnership without the partners’ unanimous consent, even if the former should be a director.

SECTION 2ª

On the partners’ obligations to third parties

Article 1,697. The following shall be required to bind the partnership vis-à-vis a third party as a result of the acts of one of the partners:

  1. For the partner to have acted as such, on behalf of the partnership.
  2. For the partner to have the power to bind the partnership pursuant to an express or implied mandate.
  3. For the partner to have acted within the limits provided in his power of attorney or mandate.

Article 1,698. The partners shall not be joint and severally bound by the debts of the partnership; and no partner may bind the rest as a result of an act undertaken by him personally unless they have conferred a power of attorney on him for such purpose. The partnership shall not be bound in respect of a third party for acts performed by a partner in his own name or without the partnership’s power of attorney; but it shall be bound vis-à-vis the partner to the extent that such acts have inured to its benefit. The provisions of this article shall be understood without prejudice to the provisions of rule 1 of article 1,695.

Article 1,699. The creditors of the partnership shall be preferred over the each partner’s creditors in respect of the property of the partnership. Without prejudice to this right, each partner’s particular creditors may request the attachment and auctioning of the latter’s share in the assets of the partnership.

CHAPTER 3º

On the ways in which partnerships are extinguished

Article 1,700. A partnership shall be extinguished:

  1. Upon expiration of the term for which it was created.
  2. Upon loss of the thing or termination of the business constituting its purpose.
  3. As a result of the death, insolvency, incapacitation or declaration of prodigality of any of the partners, and in the event provided in article 1,699.
  4. By the will of any of the partners, subject to the provisions of articles 1,705 and 1,707. Partnerships mentioned in article 1,670 shall be excepted from the provisions of numbers 3 and 4 of this article in the cases where they are to survive in accordance with the Commercial Code.

Article 1,701. Where the specific thing which a partner should have promised to contribute to the partnership should perish prior to delivery thereof, its loss shall trigger the dissolution of the partnership. The partnership shall also be dissolved in any event as a result of the loss of such thing where, the partner contributing it having reserved the ownership thereof, he should only have transferred the use or enjoyment thereof. However, the partnership shall not be dissolved as a result of the loss of the thing where such loss should take place after the partnership has acquired ownership thereof.

Article 1,702. A partnership created for a specific period may be extended with the consent of all partners. Such consent may be express or implied, and shall be evidenced by ordinary means.

Article 1,703. If the partnership should be extended after expiration of its term, a new partnership shall be deemed to have been created. If it should be extended prior to expiration of the term the original partnership shall continue.

Article 1,704. The agreement that, in the event of death of one of the partners the partnership shall continue between the surviving partners is valid. In such case, the deceased partner’s heir shall only be entitled to have the partition performed, as of the date of the deceased’s death; and he shall not participate in any subsequent rights and obligations save to the extent that they are a necessary result of acts undertaken prior to such date. If the agreement provides that the partnership is to continue with the heir, it shall be enforced,, without prejudice to the provisions of number 4 article 1,700.

Article 1,705. Dissolution of the partnership at the will or pursuant to the resignation of one of the partners shall only take place where no term of the partnership should have been set or no term should result from the nature of the business. For the resignation to be effective it must be given in good faith at the proper time; likewise it must be communicated to the other partners.

Article 1,706. A resignation shall be in bad faith where the resigning partner intends to appropriate for himself the profit which should have been common to all. In this case the resigning partner shall not be released vis-àvis his partners, and the latter shall be entitled to exclude him from the partnership. Resignation shall be deemed not to have been given in proper time where, things not being in order, the partnership should be interested in delaying its dissolution. In this case the partnership shall continue until the conclusion of any outstanding business.

Article 1,707. A partner cannot claim dissolution of a partnership which has been created for a specific term either pursuant to the provisions of the contract or to the nature of the business, unless he has just cause to do so, such as the breach by one of his partners of his obligations, or his becoming disqualified to conduct the business of the partnership or other similar grounds in the opinion of the Courts.

Article 1,708. Partition between the partners is governed by the rules applicable to estates, both as regards its form and the resulting obligations. The industrial partner cannot be adjudicated any share in the property provided, but only its fruits or profits, in accordance with the provisions of article 1,689, unless otherwise expressly agreed.

TITLE IX

On the mandate

CHAPTER ONE

On the nature, form and kinds of mandate

Article 1,709. Pursuant to the mandate contract one person undertakes to provide a service or to do something on account or on behalf of another.

Article 1,710. The mandate may be express or implied. An express mandate may be executed pursuant to a public or private instrument, and even verbally. Acceptance may also be express or implied, as deduced from the acts of the attorney.

Article 1,711. Save as otherwise agreed, the mandate shall be deemed to be gratuitous. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if the attorney’s occupation is the provision of services or the kind to which the mandate refers, the obligation to remunerate the mandate shall be presumed.

Article 1,712. The mandate is either general or special. The first comprises all of the principal’s business. The second comprises one or more specific business transactions.

Article 1,713. The mandate, conceived in general terms, only comprises acts of administration. An express mandate shall be required to settle, dispose of, mortgage or perform any other act inherent to ownership. The power to settle shall not authorise the attorney to delegate in favour of arbitrators or amicable compounders.

Article 1,714. The attorney cannot exceed the limits of the mandate.

Article 1,715. The limits of the mandate shall not be deemed to have been exceeded if the mandate should be complied with in a manner which is more advantageous to the principal than the manner set forth by the latter.

Article 1,716. The emancipated minor may be an attorney, but the principal shall only be entitled to bring an action against him in accordance with the provisions regulating the obligations of minors.

Article 1,717. Where the attorney should act in his own name, the principal shall have no action against the persons with whom the attorney has entered into any contract, nor the latter against the principal. In this case, the attorney shall be directly bound vis-à-vis the person with whom he has contracted, as if the affair were a personal affair of his own. The case where the affair should relate to things owned by the principal shall be excepted from the foregoing. The provisions of this article shall be understood without prejudice to any actions between principal and attorney.

CHAPTER 2º

On the attorney’s obligations

Article 1,718. By his acceptance, the attorney shall be obliged to perform the mandate and shall be liable for any damages caused to the principal if he should fail to perform it. He must also finish any business which should have been started prior to the death of the principal, if any danger should result from delay.

Article 1,719. The attorney must comply with the principal’s instructions in the performance of the mandate. In the absence thereof, he shall do all that an orderly paterfamilias would do, attending to the nature of the business.

Article 1,720. Any attorney is obliged to give account of his transactions and to pay the principal any amounts received pursuant to the mandate, even if the amount received should not have been owed to the latter.

Article 1,721. The attorney may appoint a substitute if the principal has not forbidden it; but he shall be liable for his substitute’s performance:

  1. When he was not granted the power to appoint one.
  2. When he was granted such power, but without designation of the specific person, and the appointee should have been notoriously incapable or insolvent. The actions of the substitute appointed against the principal’s prohibition shall be null and void.

Article 1,722. In the cases comprised in both numbers of the preceding article, the principal shall also be entitled to bring an action against the substitute.

Article 1,723. The liability of two or more attorneys, even if they were appointed simultaneously, is not joint and several unless otherwise provided.

Article 1,724. The attorney shall owe interest for any amounts applied to his own expenses from the date on which he did so, and for any amounts owed thereby after termination of the mandate, from the time when he should have incurred in default.

Article 1,725. The attorney acting as such shall not be personally liable to the party with whom he contracts except where he expressly undertakes to be liable or where he exceeds the limits of the mandate without making the other party sufficiently aware of his powers.

Article 1,726. The attorney is liable not just for wilful misconduct but also for negligence, which must be appreciated more or less rigorously by the Courts depending on whether the mandate was remunerated or not.

CHAPTER 3º

On the principal’s obligations

Article 1,727. The principal must fulfil all obligations undertaken by the attorney within the limits of the mandate. The principal shall not be bound insofar as the attorney has exceeded the mandate save where the principal should ratify such acts in an express or implied manner.

Article 1,728. The principal must advance the attorney, upon the latter’s request, the amounts necessary to perform the mandate. If the attorney should have advanced such amounts, the principal must reimburse them, even if the transaction has not been successful, provided that the attorney is not at fault. Reimbursement shall comprise interest on the amounts advanced, counting from the date of the advance.

Article 1,729. The principal must also compensate the attorney for any damages caused thereto as a result of the performance of the mandate, without fault or imprudence on the part of the attorney.

Article 1,730. The attorney may retain as pledge the things which constitute the subject matter of the mandate until the principal should compensate and reimburse him as provided in the two preceding articles.

Article 1,731. If two or more persons have appointed an attorney for a common transaction, they shall be joint and severally liable to him for all purposes relating to the mandate.

CHAPTER 4º

On the ways in which the mandate is terminated

Article 1,732. The mandate ends:

  1. By revocation thereof.
  2. By resignation of the attorney.
  3. By death, incapacitation, declaration of prodigality, bankruptcy or insolvency of the principal or the attorney.

Article 1,733. The principal may revoke the mandate at will, and compel the attorney to return the document in which the mandate is set forth.

Article 1,734. Where the mandate should have been issued to contract with specific persons, its revocation may not prejudice such persons unless they have been given notice thereof.

Article 1,735. The appointment of a new attorney for the same business transaction shall entail the revocation of the prior mandate from the date on which it was made known to the former attorney, save as provided in the preceding article.

Article 1,736. The attorney may resign from the mandate giving notice thereof to the principal. If the latter should suffer any detriment as a result of the resignation, the attorney must compensate them, unless he should have based his resignation on the impossibility to continue to exercise it without serious detriment to himself.

Article 1,737. Even if the attorney should resign from the mandate pursuant to a just cause, he must continue his commission until the principal is able to make the necessary dispositions to cover for his absence.

Article 1,738. The actions performed by the attorney being unaware of the death of the principal or any other causes which involve termination of the mandate shall be valid and fully effective against third parties who have transacted with him in good faith.

Article 1,739. In the event of the attorney’s death, his heirs must make the principal aware of it and in the meantime take any actions required by circumstances in the interests of the principal.

TITLE X

On the loan

GENERAL PROVISION

Article 1,740. Pursuant to the loan contract, one of the parties delivers to the other either a non-fungible thing so that the other may use it for a certain time and return it, in which case it shall be called commodatum, or money or another fungible thing, under the condition to return the same amount of the thing, and of the same kind and quality, in which case it shall simply be called a loan. Commodatum is in essence gratuitous. The simple loan may be gratuitous or include a covenant to pay interest.

CHAPTER ONE

On commodatum

SECTION ONE

On the nature of commodatum

Article 1,741. The lender under commodatum shall retain ownership of the thing loaned. The borrower under commodatum shall acquire the use thereof, but not its fruits; if any consideration should be payable by the person who acquires use of the thing, the contract shall cease to be commodatum.

Article 1,742. Rights and obligations which arise from commodatum shall pass to the heirs of both contracting parties, unless the loan was made in consideration of the person of the borrower under commodatum, in which case the latter’s heirs shall not be entitled to continue using the thing which has been loaned.

SECTION 2ª

On the borrower’s obligations under commodatum

Article 1,743. The borrower under commodatum shall be obliged to pay ordinary expenses required for the use and conservation of the thing loaned.

Article 1,744. If the borrower under commodatum should destine the thing to a use other than that for which it was loaned, or should keep it in his possession longer than agreed, he shall be liable for its loss, even if it should occur as a result of a fortuitous event.

Article 1,745. If the thing loaned was delivered subject to an appraisal and it should be lost, even if it should occur as a result of a fortuitous event, the borrower under commodatum shall be liable for the price thereof, unless it should have been expressly agreed that he is to be exonerated from liability.

Article 1,746. The borrower under commodatum shall not be liable for any impairments to the thing as a result of ordinary wear and tear and without negligence on his particle.

Article 1,747. The borrower under commodatum may not retain the thing loaned with the pretext that the lender under commodatum owes him an amount, even if such amount results from expenses.

Article 1,748. All borrowers under commodatum who are jointly lent something shall be joint and severally liable for such thing, pursuant to the provisions of the present section.

SECTION 3ª

On the lender’s obligations under commodatum

Article 1,749. The lender under commodatum may not claim the thing loaned until after the use for which it was loaned has been completed. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if, prior to such expiration, the lender under commodatum should have urgent need for the thing, he may claim its return.

Article 1,750. If no duration of the commodatum or use to which the thing loaned should have been destined should have been agreed, and if the latter should not be determined according to local custom, the lender under commodatum may claim it at will. In the event of doubt, the burden of proof shall rest on the borrower under commodatum.

Article 1,751. The lender under commodatum must pay any extraordinary expenses arisen during the term of the contract for the conservation of the thing loaned, provided that the borrower under commodatum should give him notice thereof before making them, save where they should be so urgent that one cannot wait for receipt of the notice without danger.

Article 1,752. The lender under commodatum who, being aware of the defects of the thing loaned, should not have made the borrower under commodatum aware of them shall be liable to the latter for any damages suffered thereby by reason thereof.

CHAPTER 2º

On the simple loan

Article 1,753. A person who receives as a loan money or another fungible thing, acquires the ownership thereof, and is obliged to return to the creditor the same amount thereof, of the same kind and quality.

Article 1,754. The obligation of the person who takes money out on loan shall be governed by the provisions of article 1,170 of this Code. If the thing loaned is another fungible thing, or an amount of un-minted metal, the debtor shall owe an amount equal to the amount received, of the same kind and quality, even if there should have been an alteration in its price.

Article 1,755. No interest shall be owed save as expressly agreed.

Article 1,756. The borrower who has paid interest without this being stipulated may not claim it or charge it to the principal.

Article 1,757. Pledge loan establishments shall likewise be subject to the regulations which affect them.

TITLE XI

On deposit

CHAPTER ONE

On deposits in general and the different kinds thereof

Article 1,758. A deposit is constituted from the time when a person receives a thing belonging to another with the obligation to keep it and return it. Article 1,759. Deposits may be constituted judicially or extrajudicially.

CHAPTER 2º

On deposit per se

SECTION ONE

On the nature and essence of the deposit contract

Article 1,760. Deposit is a gratuitous contract, save as otherwise agreed. Article 1,761. Only moveable property may be subject to deposit. Article 1,762. Extrajudicial deposit may be necessary or voluntary.

SECTION 2ª

On voluntary deposit

Article 1,763. Voluntary deposit takes place where delivery is made at the will of the depositor. The deposit may also be made by two or more persons who believe themselves entitled to the thing subject to deposit, with a third party, who shall deliver the thing to the person entitled to it, as the case may be.

Article 1,764. If a person capable of entering into a contract accepts a deposit made by an incapable person, he shall be subject to all obligations of the depository and may be compelled to return the thing by the guardian, conservator or administrator of the person who made the deposit, or by the latter, if he should subsequently achieve sufficient capacity.

Article 1,765. If the deposit was made by a capable person to another who is not, the depositor shall only have an action to claim the thing deposited while it remains in the possession of the depository, or to have the latter pay him the amount by which he should have been enriched by the thing, or its price.

SECTION 3ª

On the depository’s obligations

Article 1,766. The depository is obliged to keep the thing and to return it, upon request, to the depositor, or his successors, or to the person designated in the contract. His liability as regards the care and loss of the thing shall be governed by the provisions of title I of this book.

Article 1,767. The depository may not avail himself of the thing deposited without the depositor’s express consent. Otherwise, he shall be liable for any damages.

Article 1,768. Where the depository should have permission to avail himself of or to use the thing, the contract shall cease to be a deposit and shall become a loan or commodatum. Such permission shall not be presumed, and its existence must be proved.

Article 1,769. Where the thing given in deposit is delivered closed and sealed, the depository must return it in the same way, and shall be liable for any damages if the seal or lock should have been forced as a result of his negligence. The depository’s negligence shall be presumed, unless evidence to the contrary is provided. As concerns the value of the thing deposited, where the forcing of the lock or seal should be attributable to the depository, the depositor’s statement shall prevail, unless evidence to the contrary is provided.

Article 1,770. The thing deposited shall be returned with all products and accessions thereof. If the deposit should consist of money, the provisions of article 1,724 concerning the attorney shall be applied.

Article 1,771. The depository may not require the depositor to prove he is the owner of the thing subject to deposit. However, if he should discover that the thing has been stolen, and the identity of its rightful owner, he must make the latter aware of the deposit. If, in spite of this, the owner should not claim within one month, the depository shall be released from all liability by returning the thing subject to deposit to the person from whom he received it.

Article 1,772. If there are two or more depositors, if they should not be joint and severally liable and the thing should be capable of division, each of them may only claim his share. In the event of joint and severability, or if the thing should not be capable of division, the provisions of articles 1,141 and 1,142 of this Code shall apply.

Article 1,773. Where the depositor, after making the deposit, should lose his capacity to enter into contracts, the deposit may only be returned to the persons empowered to administer his property and rights.

Article 1,774. Where upon making the deposit a place should have been designated for its return, the depository must take the thing subject to deposit to such place, but any freight expenses shall be borne by the depositor. In the absence of designation of a place to make the return, it must be made at the place where the thing subject to deposit is located, even if it should not be the same as the place where the deposit was made, provided that there has been no malice on the part of the depository.

Article 1,775. The deposit must be restored to the depositor at his request, even if the contract should have set forth a specific period or time for such return. This provision shall not apply where the deposit in the depository’s possession should have been judicially attached, or where the latter has been notified of a third party’s opposition to the return or transfer of the thing subject to deposit.

Article 1,776. The depository who has just cause not to continue the deposit may, even before expiration of the term, return it to the depositor and, if the latter should resist, may obtain from the Judge the judicial deposit thereof.

Article 1,777. The depository who should have lost the thing subject to deposit as a result of force majeure and should have received another in its stead shall be obliged to deliver the latter to the depositor.

Article 1,778. The depository’s heir who has sold in good faith the thing which he was unaware was held under deposit shall only be obliged to return the price received or to assign his actions against the purchaser in the event that he should not have been paid the price.

SECTION 4ª

On the depositor’s obligations

Article 1,779. The depositor is obliged to reimburse the depository for any expenses made for the conservation of the thing subject to deposit and to compensate any damages incurred as a result of the deposit.

Article 1,780. The depository may retain as pledge the thing subject to deposit until full payment of any amounts owed pursuant to the deposit.

SECTION 5ª

On necessary deposit

Article 1,781. The deposit is necessary:

  1. Where it is made in compliance with a legal obligation.
  2. Where it takes place on occasion of any calamity, such as fire, collapse, pillage, shipwreck or other similar events.

Article 1,782. The deposit comprised in number 1 of the preceding article shall be governed by the provisions of the law which creates it and, in the absence thereof, by the provisions governing voluntary deposits. The deposit comprised in number 2 shall be governed by the rules applicable to voluntary deposits.

Article 1,783. The deposit of any personal effects introduced by travellers in inns and restaurants shall also be deemed a necessary deposit. The innkeepers or restaurateurs shall be liable for them as such depositories, provided that they or their employees should have been made aware of the personal effects introduced into their property, and that the travellers in their turn observe any precautions made by such innkeepers or their substitutes concerning the care and surveillance of such effects.

Article 1,784. The liability mentioned in the preceding article comprises any damages to the personal effects of travellers caused by both the servants and employees of the innkeepers or restaurateurs and by strangers, but not those incurred as a result of armed robbery or which are caused by another event of force majeure.

CHAPTER 3º

On sequestration

Article 1,785. Judicial deposit or sequestration takes place when the attachment or seizure of property under litigation is ordered.

Article 1,786. Sequestration may affect both movable and immovable property.

Article 1,787. The depository of the properties or objects subject to sequestration may not be released from his commission until termination of the controversy which motivated it, unless the Judge should order otherwise, with the consent of all interested parties or on other legitimate grounds.

Article 1,788. The depository of property subject to sequestration is obliged to fulfil all obligations of an orderly paterfamilias in respect thereof.

Article 1,789. For matters not provided in this Code, judicial sequestration shall be governed by the provisions of the Civil Procedural Law.

TITLE XII

On random or chance-based contracts

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,790. Pursuant to random contracts one of the parties, or both of them reciprocally, undertake to give or do something in consideration for something that the other party is to give or do in the event of occurrence of an uncertain event, or an event which must take place in an unspecified time.

CHAPTER 2º

On the contract of support

Article 1,791. Pursuant to the contract of support one of the parties undertakes to provide a person with a home, maintenance and assistance of all kinds during his whole life, in exchange for the transfer of a capital sum consisting of any kind of property and rights.

Article 1,792. In the event of the death of the person obliged to provide support or of any serious circumstance which prevents the peaceful coexistence of the parties, either of them may request that the agreed support be paid by means of an updatable pension payable regularly in advance provided for such purposes in the contract or, in the absence of any provision, the allowance set by the Court.

Article 1,793. The scope and quality of the support shall be as results from the contract and, unless otherwise agreed, shall not depend on the circumstances of the net worth and needs of the obligor or of the net worth of the person receiving it.

Article 1,794. The obligation to give support shall not cease for the reasons mentioned in article 152 save as provided in section one thereof.

Article 1,795. Breach of the obligation to give support shall entitle the supportee, without prejudice to the provisions of article 1,792, to choose between demanding performance thereof, including payment of support accrued prior to the claim, or termination of the contract, with application, in both cases, of the general rules governing reciprocal obligations. In the event that the supportee should choose termination, the person obliged to provide support must immediately return the property received pursuant to the contract, and the judge may, however, resolve that the restitution to which the supportee is entitled in compliance with the provisions of the following article be delayed in whole or in part, for the supportee’s benefit, for the period and with the security determined thereby.

Article 1,796. The supportee must receive at least a surplus sufficient to constitute once again an analogous pension for his remaining life as a result of termination of the contract.

Article 1,797. Where the property or rights transferred in exchange for the support are capable of registration, the rights of the supportee may be secured vis-à-vis third parties by means of a registered covenant whereby failure to pay shall be deemed an explicit condition subsequent, and by a mortgage, as regulated by article 157 of the Mortgage Law.

CHAPTER 3º

On gambling and betting

Article 1,798. The law does not provide any action to claim what has been won in a game of luck, gambling or chance; but the person who has lost money therein cannot recover what he has voluntarily paid, unless it should have been obtained pursuant to fraudulent misrepresentation, or such person should be a minor or should have been incapacitated to administer his own property.

Article 1,799. The provisions of the preceding article regarding gambling shall apply to betting. Betting which bears any analogy with forbidden gambling shall be deemed prohibited.

Article 1,800. Games which contribute to bodily exercise, such as those whose purpose is training in the use of weapons, running or horse racing, chariot races, ball games and other analogous games shall not be deemed to be prohibited.

Article 1,801. A person who loses in any gambling or betting in respect of non-prohibited games shall be liable under civil law. The judicial authority may, however, find against a claim where the amount exchanged in the gamble or wager should have been excessive, or reduce the obligation to the extent that it exceeds the custom of an orderly paterfamilias.

CHAPTER 4º

On life annuities

Article 1,802. The random life annuity contract binds the debtor to pay an annuity or annual income during the life of one or more specific persons in exchange for a capital sum consisting of movable or immovable property whose ownership is transferred from the time of the contract, with the encumbrance of paying the annuity.

Article 1,803. An annuity may be created based on the life of the person providing the capital sum, a third party or the life of several persons. It may also be created in favour of the person or person based on whose life it is granted, or in favour of another or other different persons.

Article 1,804. The annuity constituted based on the life of a person who is dead at the time of its execution, or who at the time suffers from an illness which causes his death within twenty days of such date shall be null and void.

Article 1,805. Failure to pay any annuities which are due and payable does not authorise the recipient of the life annuity to request reimbursement of the capital sum or recover possession of the transferred property; he shall only be entitled to claim in court the payment of any annuities in arrears and security for the payment of future annuities.

Article 1,806. The annuity corresponding to the year of the death of its recipient shall be paid in proportion to the days in which he was alive; if it was payable in advance, the total amount corresponding to the period which should have begun during his life shall be paid.

Article 1,807. A person who constitutes an annuity over his property as a gift may provide, at the time of execution thereof, that such annuity shall not be subject to attachment as a result of the pensioner’s obligations.

Article 1,808. The annuity may not be claimed without evidencing the existence of the person based on whose life it was constituted.

TITLE XIII

On settlements and compromises

CHAPTER ONE

On settlements

Article 1,809. Settlement is a contract whereby the parties, by each giving, receiving or retaining something, prevent a lawsuit or end one which has already begun.

Article 1,810. The same rules shall apply to settle in respect of the property and rights of children subject to parental authority as apply to their disposal.

Article 1,811. The guardian may not settle in respect of the rights of the person under his care save in the manner provided in the present Code.

Article 1,812. Corporations which are legal entities may only reach a settlement in the manner and meeting the requirements necessary to dispose of their property.

Article 1813. It is possible to reach a settlement in respect of the civil action resulting from a crime, but the public action to impose the legal sentence shall not be extinguished as a result thereof.

Article 1,814. It is not possible to reach a settlement in respect of the civil status of persons, matrimonial issues or future support.

Article 1,815. The settlement only comprises the subjects specifically expressed therein or which, by necessary induction based on the wording thereof, must be deemed to be comprised therein. A general waiver of rights shall be deemed to refer only to those which relate to the dispute to which the settlement refers.

Article 1,816. The settlement shall have the authority of res iudicata for the parties, but may only be enforced pursuant to enforcement proceedings in the event of enforcement of a court settlement.

Article 1,817. A settlement reached pursuant to error, fraudulent misrepresentation, duress or misstatement shall be subject to the provisions of article 1,265 of this Code. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither of the parties may use an error in fact as defence against the other whenever the latter should have settled to end a lawsuit already begun.

Article 1,818. Discovery of new documents shall not constitute grounds to annul or rescind the settlement, unless there has been bad faith.

Article 1,819. If, after a lawsuit is resolved by a final judgement, a settlement should be reached because one of the parties should be unaware of the existence of such final judgement, such party may request rescission of the settlement. Unawareness of a judgement which may be revoked does not constitute grounds to challenge the settlement.

CHAPTER 2º

On compromises

Article 1,820. (No content)

Article 1,821. (No content)

TITLE XIV

On guaranty

CHAPTER ONE

On the nature and scope of the guaranty

Article 1,822. Pursuant to a guaranty one person undertakes to pay or perform on behalf of a third party if the latter should fail to do so. If the guarantor should be joint and severally liable with the principal debtor, the provisions of section four, chapter III, title I of this book shall apply.

Article 1,823. Guaranty may be conventional, legal or judicial, gratuitous or for valuable consideration. It may also be created not only in favour of the principal debtor, but also in favour of another guarantor, with the latter’s consent, if he should be unaware of it or even if he should be against it.

Article 1,824. Guaranty cannot exist without a valid obligation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, it may refer to an obligation whose nullity may be claimed pursuant to a purely personal exception in favour of the obligor, such as the latter’s minority of age. The case of a loan made to the son of the family shall be excepted from the provisions of the preceding paragraph.

Article 1,825. A guaranty may also be provided to secure future debts whose amount is as yet unknown, but no claim may be brought against the guarantor until the debt is due and payable.

Article 1,826. The guarantor may undertake to pay more, but not less than the principal debtor, both as concerns the amount and the burdensomeness of the conditions. If he should have undertaken to pay more, his obligation shall be reduced to the limits of the debtor’s obligation.

Article 1,827. A guaranty cannot be implied: it must be express and may not extend beyond what is expressly provided therein. A simple or undefined guaranty shall comprise not only the principal obligation but also all ancillary obligations thereof, even legal expenses, understanding in respect of the latter that he shall only be liable for those which may accrue after the guarantor has been demanded to pay.

Article 1,828. The person obliged to provide a guarantor must present a person with the capacity to contract obligations and sufficient property to assume liability for the obligation guaranteed thereby. The guarantor shall be deemed subject to the jurisdiction of the Judge of the place where the obligation is to be performed.

Article 1,829. If the guarantor should become insolvent, the creditor may request another who meets the conditions required in the preceding article. The case where the creditor should have required and agreed to appoint a specific person as guarantor shall be excepted from the foregoing.

CHAPTER 2º

On the effects of the guaranty

SECTION ONE

On the effects of the guaranty between the guarantor and the creditor

Article 1,830. The guarantor may not be compelled to pay the creditor without first making excussion of all of the debtor’s property.

Article 1,831. Excussion shall not take place:

  1. In the event of express waiver thereof by the guarantor.
  2. Where the guarantor is joint and severally liable with the debtor.
  3. In the event of the debtor’s commercial or civil bankruptcy.
  4. When no judicial claim can be brought against the debtor within the Kingdom.

Article 1,832. For the guarantor to take advantage of the benefit of excussion, he must use it as defence against the creditor as soon as the latter should demand payment, and designate property belonging to the debtor capable of being realised within Spanish territory which is sufficient to cover the amount of the debt.

Article 1,833. If the guarantor fulfils all conditions provided in the preceding article, the creditor who has been negligent in the excussion of the property shown shall be liable, to the limit of the value of such property, for the debtor’s insolvency resulting from such oversight.

Article 1,834. The creditor may summon the guarantor in his claim against the principal debtor, but the benefit of excussion shall always remain in force, even if a judgement should find against both.

Article 1,835. A settlement reached with the guarantor shall not be effective vis-à-vis the principal debtor. Neither shall the settlement reached by the principal debtor be effective against the guarantor against his will.

Article 1,836. A guarantor’s guarantor shall enjoy the benefit of excussion both in respect of the guarantor and of the principal debtor.

Article 1,837. If there are several guarantors of the same debtor for the same debt, liability for such debt shall be divided between all of them. The creditor may only claim against each guarantor the part which he is obliged to pay, unless it has been expressly provided that the guarantors are joint and several. The benefit of division against co-guarantors shall cease in the same cases and on the same grounds as the benefit of excussion against the principal debtor.

SECTION 2ª

On the effects of the guaranty between the debtor and the guarantor

Article 1,838. The guarantor who pays on behalf of the debtor must be compensated by the latter.

Such compensation shall comprise:

  1. The total amount of the debt.
  2. Legal interest thereon from the time that the debtor is made aware of the payment, even if the debt did not accrue interest in favour of the creditor.
  3. Expenses incurred by the guarantor after making the debtor aware that he has received a demand for payment.
  4. Damages, where applicable. The provisions of this article shall apply even if the guaranty should have been provided without the debtor being aware of it.

Article 1,839. As a result of his payment the guarantor shall become subrogated to all rights held by the creditor against the debtor. If he has reached a settlement with the creditor, he may not request the debtor more than he has really paid.

Article 1,840. If the guarantor should pay without giving notice thereof to the debtor, the latter may allege any exceptions which he could have used as defence against the creditor at the time of payment.

Article 1,841. If the debt should be subject to a forward term and the guarantor should have paid it before it became due and payable, he may not request the debtor to reimburse him until expiration of the term.

Article 1,842. If the guarantor should have paid without giving notice thereof to the debtor, and the debtor, being unaware of such payment, should repeat it in his turn, the guarantor shall have no recourse against the debtor, but he shall have recourse against the creditor.

Article 1,843. Even before having paid, the guarantor may proceed against the principal debtor:

  1. When he receives a judicial demand for payment.
  2. In the event of commercial bankruptcy, civil bankruptcy or insolvency.
  3. When the debtor has undertaken to release him from the guaranty within a specific period, and such period has expired.
  4. When the debt has become payable as a result of expiration of the term in which it is to be paid.
  5. After ten years, when the principal obligation has no fixed term of maturity, unless its nature is such that it can only be extinguished later than ten years. In all such cases, the guarantor’s remedy shall tend to the release of the guaranty or to obtain security covering him against the proceedings initiated by the creditor, and against the danger of the debtor’s insolvency.

SECTION 3ª

On the effects of the guaranty between co-guarantors

Article 1,844. When there are two or more guarantors of the same debtor for the same debt, the guarantor among them who has paid it may claim from each of the others the part which he is proportionally obliged to pay. If any of them should be insolvent, his share shall pass to all of them in the same proportion. For the provisions of this article to apply, payment must have been made pursuant to a court claim, or in the event that the principal debtor should be subject to civil or commercial bankruptcy.

Article 1,845. In the case of the preceding article, the co-guarantors may use as defence against the one who paid the same exceptions to which the principal debtor would have been entitled against the creditor and which are not purely personal exceptions pertaining to such debtor.

Article 1,846. The sub-guarantor, in the event of insolvency of the guarantor in respect of which the former is bound, shall be liable against the co-guarantors in the same terms as the guarantor.

CHAPTER 3º

On the termination of the guaranty

Article 1,847. The guarantor’s obligation shall be extinguished at the same time as the debtor’s and on the same grounds as other obligations.

Article 1,848. Confusion between the person of the debtor and the guarantor when one of them inherits from the other shall not extinguish the sub-guarantor’s obligation.

Article 1,849. If the creditor voluntarily accepts an immovable property or any commercial paper as payment of the debt, the guarantor shall be released, even if the creditor should subsequently be dispossessed of them.

Article 1,850. Release by the debtor of one of the guarantors without the consent of the others shall benefit all of them, to the extent of the share of the guarantor in favour of whom it was granted.

Article 1,851. The extension granted by the creditor to the debtor without the guarantor’s consent shall extinguish the guaranty.

Article 1,852. The guarantors, even if they are joint and several, shall be released from their obligation whenever, as a result of any act of the creditor, they should become unable to be subrogated to the rights, mortgages and privileges thereof.

Article 1,853. The guarantor may use against the creditor all exceptions applicable to the principal debtor which are inherent to the debt; but not exceptions which are purely personal to the debtor.

CHAPTER 4º

On legal guaranty and judicial guaranty

Article 1,854. The guarantor required pursuant to the provisions of the law or a court order must meet the qualities provided in article 1,828.

Article 1,855. If the person obliged to provide a guaranty in the cases provided in the preceding article should be unable to find one, a pledge or mortgage deemed sufficient to cover his obligation shall be accepted in its stead.

Article 1,856. The judicial guarantor cannot request excussion of the property of the principal debtor. The sub-guarantor, in the same case, may not request excussion either of the debtor or of the guarantor.

TITLE XV

On the contracts of pledge, mortgage and antichresis

CHAPTER ONE

Provisions common to pledges and mortgages

Article 1,857. The following requirements are of the essence in contracts of pledge and mortgage:

  1. They must be created to secure the performance of a principal obligation.
  2. The thing pledged or mortgaged must be owned by the pledgor or mortgagor.
  3. The persons who constitute the pledge or mortgage may freely dispose of their property or, if not, must be legally authorised for such purposes. Third parties who are strangers to the principal obligation may secure it by pledging or mortgaging their own property.

Article 1,858. It is also of the essence in these contracts that, upon maturity of the principal obligation, the things constituting the pledge or mortgage may be disposed of to pay the creditor.

Article 1,859. The creditor cannot appropriate the things pledged or mortgaged, nor dispose of them.

Article 1,860. The pledge and the mortgage are indivisible, even if the debt should be divided between the successors of the debtor or the creditor. As a result, the heir of the debtor who has paid part of the debt may not request the proportional cancellation of the pledge or mortgage until the debt has been paid in full. Neither may the heir of the creditor who received his share return the pledge or cancel the mortgage to the detriment of the remaining heirs who have not been paid. The case where, there being several things mortgaged or pledged, each of them should secure only a specific portion of the credit, shall be excepted from the foregoing. In this case, the debtor shall be entitled to the cancellation of the pledge or mortgage to the extent that he should pay the part of debt for which each thing is especially liable.

Article 1,861. The contracts of pledge and mortgage may secure all kinds of obligations, whether pure or subject to conditions precedent or subsequent.

Article 1,862. The promise to constitute a pledge or mortgage shall only result in a personal action between the contracting parties, without prejudice to the criminal liability of a person who defrauds another by offering to pledge or mortgage, as free from liens, things which he knew were encumbered, or by pretending to be the owner of things which do not belong to him.

CHAPTER 2º

On the pledge

Article 1,863. As well as the requirements provided in article 1,857, the contract of pledge shall require giving possession of the thing to the creditor or to a third party agreed by common consent.

Article 1,864. All movable things which are subject to trade may be pledged, provided that they are capable of possession.

Article 1,865. No pledge shall be effective against a third party unless the certainty of its date is set forth in a public instrument.

Article 1,866. The contract of pledge entitles the creditor to retain the thing in his possession or in that of the third party to whom it was delivered until he is paid the credit. If, while the creditor retains the pledge, the debtor should contract another debt with the creditor, prior to the payment of the first debt, the creditor may extend such retention until payment of both credits, even in the absence of stipulation that the pledge also secures the second debt.

Article 1,867. The creditor must care for the thing pledged with the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias; he is entitled to be paid any expenses made for its conservation and shall be liable for its loss or impairment in accordance with the provisions of this Code.

Article 1,868. If the pledge should generate interest, the creditor shall set off any interest received against the interest owed by the creditor; and, if none should be owed or to the extent that such amount should exceed the interest legitimately owed, shall charge it to redeem the principal.

Article 1,869. Unless he is deprived of the thing given in pledge, the debtor shall continue to be its owner. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the creditor may exercise the actions for its recovery or defence against a third party to which the owner of the thing subject to pledge is entitled.

Article 1,870. The creditor may not use the thing pledged without the owner’s authorisation and, if he should do so or should abuse it in any other manner, the latter may request that it be placed in deposit.

Article 1,871. The debtor may not request the return of the pledge against the will of the creditor until he pays his debt plus interest, and any expenses, as the case may be.

Article 1,872. The creditor whose credit should not have been paid in due time may proceed to dispose of the thing subject to pledge before a Notary Public. Such disposal must specifically take place pursuant to a public auction, summoning the debtor and the owner of the thing subject to pledge, as the case may be. If the pledge should fail to be disposed of in the first auction, a second one may take place with the same formalities; if it should also fail, the creditor may become the owner of the thing subject to pledge. In such case he shall be obliged to issue a release for the full credit. If the pledge should consist of listed securities, they shall be sold in the manner provided in the Commercial Code.

Article 1,873. As concerns Pawnshops and other public establishments which, pursuant to their charter or profession, lend money accepting pledges as collateral, their special acts and regulations shall apply, and, on a subsidiary basis, the provisions of this title.

CHAPTER 3º

On the mortgage

Article 1,874. Only the following may be subject to the contract of mortgage:

  1. Immovable property.
  2. Rights in rem capable of disposal in accordance with the law, created on the above kind of property.

Article 1,875. As well as the requirements provided in article 1,857, it is indispensable, for the mortgage to be validly constituted, that the document of its constitution be registered in the Property Registry.

The persons in whose favour the law creates a mortgage shall have no other right than to demand the execution and registration of the document in which the mortgage is to be executed, save as provided in the Mortgage Law in favour of the State, provinces and villages as relates to taxes payable within the past year, and in favour of the insurers as relates to the insurance premium.

Article 1,876. The mortgage binds the property which it encumbers, whatever its possessor, directly and immediately to the performance of the obligation in security whereof it was constituted.

Article 1,877. The mortgage extends to natural accretion, improvements, pending fruits and rents which have not been received upon maturity of the obligation, and the indemnities granted or due to the owner by the insurers of the mortgaged properties, or as a result of expropriation on grounds of public utility, with the representations, extensions and limitations set forth in the law, irrespective of whether the property remains in the possession of the person who mortgaged it or if it has passed into the hands of a third party.

Article 1,878. The mortgage loan may be disposed of or assigned to a third party in whole or in part, in compliance with the formalities required by the law.

Article 1,879. The creditor may claim from the third party who is in possession of the mortgaged properties the part of the loan secured with the property possessed by the latter, under the terms and in compliance with the formalities set forth in the law.

Article 1,880. The form, the scope and the effects of the mortgage, and all matters relating to its creation, amendment and cancellation and remaining aspects not included in the present chapter shall be subject to the provisions of the Mortgage Law, which shall remain in force.

CHAPTER 4º

On antichresis

Article 1,881. Pursuant to antichresis the creditor acquires the right to receive the fruits of an immovable property belonging to the debtor, with the obligation to allocate them to the payment of any interest, if any is due, and subsequently to the principal of his credit.

Article 1,882. Unless otherwise agreed, the creditor is obliged to pay any taxes and charges to which the property is subject. He is also obliged to make the necessary expenses for the conservation and repair thereof. Any amounts spent on one or the other shall be deducted from the fruits.

Article 1,883. The debtor may not recover the enjoyment of the property without first paying in full the amount owed to the creditor. However, the latter may always, in order to be released from the obligations imposed in the preceding article, compel the debtor to recover enjoyment of the property, save as otherwise agreed.

Article 1,884. The creditor does not acquire ownership of the property as a result of the failure to pay the debt within the agreed period. Any agreement to the contrary shall be null and void. However, the creditor may in such case request payment of the debt or the sale of the property as provided in the Civil Procedural Law.

Article 1,885. The contracting parties may provide that the fruits of the property subject to antichresis be set off against the interest of the debt.

Article 1,886. The last paragraph of article 1,857, the second paragraph of article 1,866, and articles 1,860 and 1,861 shall apply to this contract.

TITLE XVI

On obligations which are entered into without an agreement

CHAPTER ONE

On quasi contracts

Article 1,887. Quasi contracts are lawful and purely voluntary acts which result in an obligation of the author thereof to a third party, and sometimes in a reciprocal obligation between the interested parties.

SECTION ONE

On the management of another’s business

Article 1,888. A person who voluntarily takes charge of the agency or administration of another’s business without the latter’s mandate shall be obliged to continue managing it until completion of the business and any incidents thereof, or to request the interested party to replace him in such management if he is in a condition to do so by himself.

Article 1,889. The unofficial manager must perform his duties with all the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias and compensate any damages caused to the owner of the properties or business managed thereby by his fault or negligence. The Courts may, however, moderate the importance of such damages depending on the circumstances of the case.

Article 1,890. If the manager should delegate to another person all or some of the duties of which he is in charge, he shall be liable for the acts of the delegate, without prejudice to the latter’s direct obligation to the owner of the business. If there should be two or more managers, they shall be joint and severally liable.

Article 1,891. The manager shall be liable for fortuitous events if he should undertake risky transactions which the owner was not accustomed to performing, or if he should have relegated the owner’s interest to his own.

Article 1,892. Ratification of the management by the owner of the business has the effect of an express mandate.

Article 1,893. Even in the absence of express ratification of another’s management, the owner of properties or business who profits from the benefits thereof shall be responsible for the obligations entered into in his interest, and shall compensate the manager for necessary and useful expenses made and any damages suffered in the exercise of his duties. The same obligation shall apply where the purpose of such management should have been to prevent an imminent and manifest damage, even if no benefit should have resulted therefrom.

Article 1,894. When a stranger should provide support, unknown to the person obliged to provide it, the former shall be entitled to claim such amounts from the latter, unless it should be evidenced that he gave it for reasons of piety and without the intention to claim them.

The persons who would have had the obligation to support the deceased must pay his funeral expenses proportional to his condition and to local custom, even if the deceased should not have left any property.

SECTION 2ª

On collection of things which were not due

Article 1,895. When something is received which one was not entitled to collect and which was unduly given by mistake, there arises the obligation to return it.

Article 1,896. The person who accepts an undue payment, if he should have acted in bad faith, must pay legal interest for the capital, or the fruits which were received or which should have been received where the thing which was received should produce them. Likewise, he shall be liable for any impairment suffered by the thing for any reason, and for any damages caused to the person who delivered it, until he recovers it. He shall not be liable for fortuitous events if they would have affected the things in the same way if they had been in the possession of the person who delivered them.

Article 1,897. The person who accepted in good faith payment of a certain and specific thing shall only be liable for impairments or losses thereof and accessions thereof to the extent that he was enriched by them. If he should have disposed of them, he shall return their price or assign the action to recover it.

Article 1,898. The provisions of title V Book Two shall apply to the payment of any improvements and expenses made by the person who unduly received the thing.

Article 1,899. The person who, believing in good faith that such payment was made on account of a legitimate and outstanding credit, should have cancelled the deed or let the action become barred by statute of limitations, or should have abandoned any pledges or cancelled any security to which he was entitled shall be exempted from the obligation to return it. The person who paid unduly may only claim against the real debtor or the guarantors in respect of whom the action should still be enforceable.

Article 1,900. The burden of proof of payment shall rest on the person who purports to have made it. He shall also have the burden of proving the error pursuant to which he made such payment, unless the defendant should deny having received the thing claimed. In this case, if the plaintiff should evidence delivery thereof, he shall be released from the burden of providing any other evidence. This shall not curtail the defendant’s right to evidence that he was owed what he allegedly received.

Article 1,901. Error in payment shall be presumed to exist where a thing is delivered which was never owed or which had already been paid, but the person requested to return it may prove that such delivery was made as a gift or pursuant to another just cause.

CHAPTER 2º

On obligations arising from fault or negligence

Article 1,902. The person who, as a result of an action or omission, causes damage to another by his fault or negligence shall be obliged to repair the damaged caused.

Article 1,903. The obligation imposed pursuant to the preceding article shall be enforceable not only as a result of one’s own actions or omissions but also of those of such persons for whom one is liable.

Parents are liable for damages caused by children under their care. Guardians are liable for damages caused by minors or incapacitated persons who are under their authority and who live in their company. Likewise, the owners or managers of an establishment or undertaking shall be liable for damages caused by their employees, in the service in which they are employed or in the performance of their duties. Persons or entities which own an educational centre other than a centre for higher education shall be liable for the damages caused by its underage students during the periods in which the latter are under the control or supervision of the Centre’s teaching staff, or while conducting school, extracurricular or complementary activities. The liability provided in the present article shall cease if the persons mentioned therein should evidence that they acted with all the diligence of an orderly paterfamilias to prevent the damage.

Article 1,904. The person who pays damages caused by his employees may recover from the latter the amount paid. The owners of educational centres other than centres for higher education may claim from the teachers the amounts paid by the former in the event of wilful misconduct or gross negligence in the exercise of their duties being the cause of the damage.

Article 1,905. The possessor or an animal, or the person who avails himself of it, is liable for any damages caused by the latter, even if it should have escaped or been lost. This liability shall only cease of the damage should result from force majeure or from the negligence of the person who has suffered the damage.

Article 1,906. The owner of a property used for hunting purposes shall be liable for the damages caused by the game in neighbouring properties, when he has not done all that is necessary to prevent their multiplication or has hindered the actions of the owners of such properties to pursue them.

Article 1,907. The owner of a building is liable for damages resulting from the collapse of all or part thereof, if such collapse should occur as a result of a failure to make the necessary repairs.

Article 1,908. Likewise, the owners shall be liable for damages caused:

  1. By the explosion of machines which have not been taken care of with due diligence, and by the inflammation of explosive substances which have not been put in a safe and suitable place.
  2. By excessive fumes which are harmful to persons or properties.
  3. By the fall of trees placed on transit spaces, unless it results from force majeure.
  4. By the emanations of drains or deposits of infectious materials which have been built without observing precautions appropriate to their location.

Article 1,909. If the damage mentioned in the two preceding articles should result from a construction defect, the third party who suffers it may only claim against the architect or, as the case may be, the builder, within the requisite legal period.

Article 1,910. The head of a family who lives in a house or part of it is liable for damages caused by things thrown or which should fall from it.

TITLE XVII

On the concurrence and priority of credits

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,911. The debtor is liable for the performance of his obligations with all present and future property.

Article 1,912 to 1,920. [Repealed]

CHAPTER 2º

On the classification of credits

Article 1,921. Credits shall be classified for the purpose of their graduation and payment, in the order and in the terms set forth in this chapter.

Article 1,922. In connection with specific property belonging to the debtor, the following credits shall be preferred:

  1. Credits granted for the construction, repair, conservation or sales price of movable property which is in the debtor’s possession, up to the value of such property.
  2. Credits secured by a pledge which is in possession of the creditor, in respect of the thing subject to the pledge and up to the value thereof.
  3. Credits secured by a deposit of commercial paper or securities executed in a public or commercial establishment, in respect of the deposit and for the value thereof.
  4. Credits relating to freight, in respect of the goods subject to transportation, for the price thereof, freight and conservation fees and expenses, until delivery thereof and thirty days thereafter.
  5. Credits relating to lodging, in respect of the debtor’s movable property left at the inn.
  6. Credits relating to seeds and cultivation and harvesting expenses advanced to the debtor, in respect of the fruits of the harvest for which they served.
  7. Credits for lease payments and income for one year, in respect of the lessee’s movable property existing in the leased property and of the fruits thereof. If the movable property preferred hereunder should have been removed, the creditor may claim it from its holder, within thirty days counting from its removal.

Article 1,923. In connection with certain specific immovable property and rights in rem belonging to the debtor, the following credits shall be preferred:

  1. Credits in favour of the State, in respect of the taxpayers’ property, for the amount of the last annual period accrued and unpaid for any taxes thereon.
  2. Credits held by insurers, in respect of the insured property, for the insurance premiums relating to the past two years and, in the case of mutual insurance, for the last two dividends distributed.
  3. Mortgage and construction credits (crédito refaccionario) entered and registered with the Property Registry, in respect of the mortgaged property or the property which backs the credit.
  4. Credits in respect of which a precautionary entry has been made in the Property Registry pursuant to a court order, as a result of attachment, sequestration or enforcement of judgements, in respect of the property subject to such entry and only with preference to subsequent credits.

5. Construction credits which have not been entered or registered over the immovable properties included as collateral, and only in respect of credits other than those mentioned in the four preceding numbers.

Article 1,924. In connection with the remaining movable and immovable property belonging to the debtor, the following credits shall be preferred:

  1. Credits in favour of the province or Municipality, in respect of taxes corresponding to the last annual period accrued and unpaid which are not comprised within article 1,923, number 1.
  2. Credits accrued: a) (Repealed) b) For the debtor’s funeral expenses, according to local custom, and also those of his spouse and children

under his parental authority, if they should have no property of their own.

c) As a result of expenses incurred in the final illness of the aforementioned persons, made in the last year,

counting until the date of decease.

d) For salaries and wages of employees and domestic servants corresponding to the last year.

e) For contributions corresponding to mandatory social subsidies, social insurance and labour mutual

insurance for the same period provided in the preceding section, provided that they are not recognised a greater preference in accordance with the preceding article. f) For advances made to the debtor, for himself and for his family who is under his authority, for food, dress or shoes, within the same period. g) (Repealed)

3. Credits not awarded any special preference with are set forth: a) In a public deed. b) In a final judgement, if they should have been subject to dispute. These credits shall have preference in respect of each other by order of priority of the dates of the public deeds and judgements.

Article 1,925. Credits of any other kind or pursuant to any other title, not comprised in the preceding articles, shall enjoy no preference whatsoever.

CHAPTER 3º

On the priority of credits

Article 1,926. Credits which are preferred in connection with specific movable property shall exclude all others up to the value of the movable property to which the preference refers. If two or more credits should be concurrent in respect of specific movable property, the following rules shall be observed to determine the order of payment thereof:

  1. The credit backed by pledge shall exclude the rest up to the value of the thing subject to the pledge.
  2. In the event of a guaranty, if such bond should have been legitimately executed in favour of more than one creditor, the priority between the latter shall be determined by the order of the dates on which the security was provided.
  3. Credits for advancing seeds, cultivation and harvesting expenses shall be preferred to credits for rents and leases in respect of the fruits of the harvest for which the former served.
  4. In all remaining cases, the price of the movable property shall be distributed pro rata between credits which enjoy a special preference in connection with such property.

Article 1,927. Credits preferred in connection with specific immovable properties or rights in rem shall exclude all others in the full amount thereof up to the value of the immovable property or right in rem to which the preference refers.

In the event of concurrence of two or more credits in respect of specific immovable properties or rights in rem, the following rules shall be observed to determine their respective priority:

  1. Credits provided in numbers 1 and 2 of article 1,923, shall be preferred, in the same order, to those comprised in the remaining numbers thereof.
  2. Mortgage or construction credits entered or registered in the Property Registry as provided in number 3 of the aforementioned article 1,923 and those comprised in number 4 thereof shall have priority in respect of each other according to the order of priority of their respective registration or entries in the Property Registry.
  3. Construction credits not registered or entered in the Property Registry mentioned in number 5 article 1,923, shall have priority in respect of each other in inverse order of their date.

Article 1,928. The remainder of the debtor’s property, after paying any credits preferred in connection with specific movable or immovable property, shall be accumulated to the property owned free and clear by the debtor for the payment of the remaining credits. Credits which, having preference in connection with certain movable or immovable property should not have been fully paid with the amount thereof shall be paid, as relates to the shortfall, in the order and with the priority corresponding to them according to their respective nature.

Article 1,929. Credits which have no preference in connection with specific property and those which do have such preference, for the amount outstanding, or in the event that the right to such preference should have become barred by statute of limitations, shall be paid in accordance with the following rules:

  1. In the order set forth in article 1,924.
  2. Credits which have preference according to their date, in the order thereof, and those subject to common preference, pro rata.
  3. Common credits mentioned in article 1,925, without consideration of their date.
TITLE XVIII

On prescription

CHAPTER ONE

General provisions

Article 1,930. Ownership and other rights in rem are acquired pursuant to prescription, in the manner and subject to the conditions provided in the law. Likewise, rights and actions of any kind are also extinguished by the running of their statute of limitations.

Article 1,931. Persons with the capacity to acquire property or rights by other legitimate means may also acquire them by prescription.

Article 1,932. Rights and actions are extinguished by the running of the statute of limitations to the detriment of all kinds of persons, even legal entities, in the terms provided in the law. Persons who are prevented from administering their property shall always remain entitled to claim against their legitimate representatives whose negligence should have caused the running of the statute of limitations.

Article 1,933. Prescription achieved by a co-owner or owner of property held in common shall benefit the rest.

Article 1,934. The legal effects of prescription in favour of and against the estate shall take place prior to acceptance thereof and during the time provided to make the inventory and to deliberate.

Article 1,935. Persons with the capacity to dispose of property may waive the prescription achieved, but not the right to acquire by prescription thereafter. Prescription shall be deemed implicitly waived where such waiver results from actions which make one suppose that the right acquired has been relinquished.

Article 1,936. All things which are within the bounds of trade between men are capable of prescription.

Article 1,937. Creditors, and any other person interested in enforcing prescription, may use it in spite of the express or implied waiver of the debtor or owner.

Article 1,938. The provisions of the present title shall be understood without prejudice to the provisions in this Code or in special acts in respect of specific instances of prescription.

Article 1,939. Prescription begun prior to the publication of the present Code shall be governed by the laws prior hereto; but if the whole period required herein for prescription should expire after the present Code enters into force, such prescription shall be effective, even if such prior laws should require a longer lapse of time.

CHAPTER 2º

On prescription of ownership and other rights in rem

Article 1,940. Ordinary prescription of ownership and remaining rights in rem shall require possession of the thing in good faith and pursuant to just title for the period provided in the law.

Article 1,941. Possession must be in the capacity of owner, and must be public, peaceful and uninterrupted.

Article 1,942. Acts of a possessory nature executed pursuant to licence or mere tolerance by the owner shall not serve to establish possession.

Article 1,943. For prescription purposes, possession is interrupted on a natural or on a civil basis.

Article 1,944. Possession is interrupted naturally when for any reason such possession should cease for more than one year.

Article 1,945. Civil interruption occurs as a result of the judicial summons to the possessor, even if it should be by order of an incompetent Judge.

Article 1,946. The judicial summons shall be deemed not to have been given, and shall cease to generate an interruption:

  1. If it should be null and void as a result of lack of the legal solemnities.
  2. If the plaintiff should abandon the claim or should let the action lapse.
  3. If the possessor should be acquitted.

Article 1,947. Civil interruption shall also take by an act of conciliation, provided that, within two months thereof, the claim concerning possession or ownership of the thing in question is submitted before the Judge.

Article 1,948. Any express or implied recognition by the possessor of the owner’s right shall likewise interrupt possession.

Article 1,949. Ordinary prescription of ownership or rights in rem to the detriment of a third party shall not take place against a title registered in the Property Registry, unless it is pursuant to another title which has also been registered, and the time shall begin to run from registration of the latter.

Article 1,950. The possessor’s good faith consists of the belief that the person from whom he received the thing was its owner, and could transfer ownership thereof.

Article 1,951. The conditions of good faith required for possession in articles 433, 434, 435 and 436 of this Code are likewise necessary to establish this prerequisite for the prescription of ownership and other rights in rem.

Article 1,952. Just title shall be deemed to mean a title legally sufficient to transfer ownership or the right in rem subject to prescription.

Article 1,953. For prescription purposes, title must be authentic and valid.

Article 1,954. Just title must be proved; it is never presumed.

Article 1,955. Ownership of movable property prescribes by three years of uninterrupted possession in good faith. Ownership of movable property also prescribes by six years of uninterrupted possession, without any other condition. The provisions of article 464 of this Code shall apply as related to the owner’s right to claim movable property which has been lost or of which he has been unlawfully deprived, and likewise as relates to movable property acquired in a public sale in an Exchange, fair or market or from a tradesman who is legally established and dedicated on a habitual basis to trading in similar objects.

Article 1,956. Movable property purloined or stolen may not prescribe in the possession of those who purloined or stole it, or their accomplices or accessories, unless the crime or misdemeanour or its sentence, and the action to claim civil liability arising therefrom, should have become barred by statute of limitations.

Article 1,957. Ownership and other rights in rem over immovable property prescribe by ten years’ possession among present persons, and twenty among absent persons, in good faith and with just title.

Article 1,958. For the purposes of prescription, foreign or overseas residents are deemed to be absent. If part of the time the owner should have been present and another part absent, two years of absence shall be deemed one year in order to complete the ten years of presence required. Absences for less than a whole continuous year shall not be taken into account for the calculation.

Article 1,959. Ownership and other rights in rem over immovable property also prescribe as a result of thirty years of uninterrupted possession, without requiring any title or good faith, and without distinction between persons present and absent, save for the exception provided in article 539.

Article 1,960. The following rules shall be observed to count the time required for prescription:

  1. The current possessor may complete the time required for prescription adding to his own that of his predecessor.
  2. The current possessor who was also a possessor in a previous time, shall be presumed to have continued to be so during the time in between, unless there is evidence to the contrary.
  3. The day on which such time begins to be counted shall be deemed to have been a full day; but the last day must be completed in full.

CHAPTER 3º

On the statute of limitations on actions

Article 1,961. Actions expire by the running of the statute of limitations by the mere lapse of the time set forth in the law.

Article 1,963. Actions in rem relating to immovable property shall become barred by statute of limitations after thirty years. This provision shall be understood without prejudice to the provisions relating to acquisition of ownership of rights in rem pursuant to prescription.

Article 1,964. The mortgage remedy shall become barred by statute of limitations after twenty years, and personal remedies for which no special statute of limitations has been provided, after fifteen years.

Article 1,965. The action between co-heirs, co-owners or owners of adjoining properties to request partition of the estate, division of common property or the setting of boundaries of the adjoining properties shall not be subject to statute of limitations.

Article 1,966. Actions to claim the performance of the following obligations shall be barred by statute of limitations after five years:

  1. The obligation to pay support.
  2. The obligation to pay leases, whether of rural or urban properties.
  3. Any other payments to be made on a yearly basis or in shorter time periods.

Article 1,967. Actions to claim the performance of the following obligations shall be barred by statute of limitations after three years:

  1. The obligation to pay Judges, Attorneys, Registrars, Notaries Public, Scriveners, experts, agents and clerks their fees and charges, and any expenses and disbursements made thereby in the performance of their duties or professions in the affairs to which such obligations refer.
  2. The obligation to pay Pharmacists the medicines they supplied; teachers and Masters their fees and stipends for their teaching, or for the exercise of their profession, art or trade.
  3. The obligation to pay manual workers, servants and agricultural labourers the amount for their services and any supplies or disbursements made in respect thereof.
  4. The obligation to pay innkeepers food and board, and merchants the price of the goods sold to others who are not or who, being merchants, deal in another trade. The time required for the statute of limitations to run in the actions mentioned in the three preceding paragraphs shall count from the date on which the respective services ceased to be provided.

Article 1,968. The following shall be barred by statute of limitations upon the lapse of one year:

  1. The action to recover or retain possession.
  2. The action to claim civil liability as a result of insults or slander, and for obligations resulting from fault or negligence as provided in article 1,902, from the date on which the injured party became aware of them.

Article 1,969. The time required for the barring of all kinds of actions by statute of limitations, unless otherwise provided by a specific provision, shall be counted from the day on which they could be exercised.

Article 1,970. The time required to bar by statute of limitations actions whose purpose is to claim the performance of obligations to pay capital with interest or rent shall run from the last payment of the rent or interest.

The same shall be understood of the capital sum in consignative ground rents. In emphyteutic and reservative ground rents, the time required for the running of the statute of limitations shall likewise be counted from the last payment of the pension or rent.

Article 1,971. The time required for the statute of limitations on actions to request performance of obligations declared in a judgement shall begin to run from the time when the judgement becomes final.

Article 1,972. The term of the statute of limitations on actions to require the giving of accounts shall run from the day on which those who are to give them were removed from their positions. The term corresponding to the action relating to the result of such accounts shall run from the date on which such result was acknowledged by agreement between the interested parties.

Article 1,973. The statute of limitations on actions is interrupted by the bringing of such actions before the Courts, by an out of court claim issued by the creditor and by any act of acknowledgement of the debt by the debtor.

Article 1,974. Interruption of the statute of limitations on actions in joint and several obligations shall inure to the benefit or detriment of all creditors and debtors equally. This provision shall also apply in respect of the heirs of the debtor in all kinds of obligations. In joint obligations, where the creditor only claims from one of the debtors the part which corresponds to him, the statute of limitations shall not be interrupted in respect of the other co-debtors as a result.

Article 1,975. Interruption of the statute of limitations against the principal debtor as a result of the judicial claiming of the debt shall also be effective against his guarantor; but the interruption occurred as a result of out of court claims by the creditor or private acknowledgements by the debtor shall not prejudice the guarantor.

FINAL PROVISION

Article 1,976. All laws, uses and customs which comprise Common Civil Law in all matters constituting the subject matter of this Code are hereby repealed, and they shall become without force and effect as directly enforceable laws and as subsidiary rules. This provision shall not apply to the laws that this Code has declared to subsist.

 Còdigo Civil

TÍTULO PRELIMINAR

De las normas jurídicas, su aplicación y eficacia

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO

Fuentes del Derecho

Artículo 1

1. Las fuentes del ordenamiento jurídico español son la ley, la costumbre y los principios generales del derecho. 2. Carecerán de validez las disposiciones que contradigan otra de rango superior. 3. La costumbre sólo regirá en defecto de ley aplicable, siempre que no sea contraria a la moral o al orden público y que resulte probada. Los usos jurídicos que no sean meramente interpretativos de una declaración de voluntad tendrán la consideración de costumbre. 4. Los principios generales del derecho se aplicarán en defecto de ley o costumbre, sin perjuicio de su carácter informador del ordenamiento jurídico. 5. Las normas jurídicas contenidas en los tratados internacionales no serán de aplicación directa en España en tanto no hayan pasado a formar parte del ordenamiento interno mediante su publicación íntegra en el Boletín Oficial del Estado. 6. La jurisprudencia complementará el ordenamiento jurídico con la doctrina que, de modo reiterado, establezca el Tribunal Supremo al interpretar y aplicar la ley, la costumbre y los principios generales del derecho. 7. Los Jueces y Tribunales tienen el deber inexcusable de resolver en todo caso los asuntos de que conozcan, ateniéndose al sistema de fuentes establecido.

Artículo 2

1.Las leyes entrarán en vigor a los veinte días de su completa publicación en el Boletín Oficial del Estado, si en ellas no se dispone otra cosa. 2. Las leyes sólo se derogan por otras posteriores. La derogación tendrá el alcance que expresamente se disponga y se extenderá siempre a todo aquello que en la ley nueva, sobre la misma materia, sea incompatible con la anterior. Por la simple derogación de una ley no recobran vigencia las que ésta hubiere derogado. 3. Las leyes no tendrán efecto retroactivo si no dispusieren lo contrario.

CAPÍTULO II Aplicación de las normas jurídicas

Artículo 3

1. Las normas se interpretarán según el sentido propio de sus palabras, en relación con el contexto, los antecedentes históricos y legislativos, y la realidad social del tiempo en que han de ser aplicadas, atendiendo fundamentalmente al espíritu y finalidad de aquellas. 2. La equidad habrá de ponderarse en la aplicación de las normas, si bien las resoluciones de los Tribunales sólo podrán descansar de manera exclusiva en ella cuando la ley expresamente lo permita.

Artículo 4

1. Procederá la aplicación analógica de las normas cuando éstas no contemplen un supuesto específico, pero

1

regulen otro semejante entre los que se aprecie identidad de razón. 2. Las leyes penales, las excepcionales y las de ámbito temporal no se aplicarán a supuestos ni en momentos distintos de los comprendidos expresamente. 3. Las disposiciones de este Código se aplicarán como supletorias en las materias regidas por otras leyes.

Artículo 5

1.Siempre que no se establezca otra cosa, en los plazos señalados por días, a contar de uno determinado, quedará éste excluido del cómputo, el cual deberá empezar en el día siguiente; y si los plazos estuviesen fijados por meses o años, se computarán de fecha a fecha. Cuando en el mes del vencimiento no hubiera día equivalente al inicial del cómputo, se entenderá que el plazo expira el último del mes. 2. En el cómputo civil de los plazos no se excluyen los días inhábiles.

CAPÍTULO III Eficacia general de las normas jurídicas

Artículo 6

1. La ignorancia de las leyes no excusa de su cumplimiento. El error de derecho producirá únicamente aquellos efectos que las leyes determinen. 2. La exclusión voluntaria de la ley aplicable y la renuncia a los derechos en ella reconocidos sólo serán válidas cuando no contraríen el interés o el orden público ni perjudiquen a terceros. 3. Los actos contrarios a las normas imperativas y a las prohibitivas son nulos de pleno derecho, salvo que en ellas se establezca un efecto distinto para el caso de contravención. 4. Los actos realizados al amparo del texto de una norma que persigan un resultado prohibido por el ordenamiento jurídico, o contrario a él, se considerarán ejecutados en fraude de ley y no impedirán la debida aplicación de la norma que se hubiere tratado de eludir.

Artículo 7

1. Los derechos deberán ejercitarse conforme a las exigencias de la buena fe. 2. La Ley no ampara el abuso del derecho o el ejercicio antisocial del mismo. Todo acto u omisión que por la intención de su autor, por su objeto o por las circunstancias en que se realice sobrepase manifiestamente los límites normales del ejercicio de un derecho, con daño para tercero, dará lugar a la correspondiente indemnización y a la adopción de las medidas judiciales o administrativas que impidan la persistencia en el abuso.

CAPÍTULO IV Normas de Derecho internacional privado

Artículo 8

1. Las leyes penales, las de policía y las de seguridad pública obligan a todos los que se hallen en territorio español. 2. Las leyes procesales españolas serán las únicas aplicables a las actuaciones que se sustancien en territorio español, sin perjuicio de las remisiones que las mismas puedan hacer a las leyes extranjeras, respecto a los actos procesales que hayan de realizarse fuera de España.

Artículo 9

1. La ley personal correspondiente a las personas físicas es la determinada por su nacionalidad. Dicha ley regirá la capacidad y el estado civil, los derechos y deberes de familia y la sucesión por causa de muerte. El cambio de ley personal no afectará a la mayoría de edad adquirida de conformidad con la ley personal anterior.

2

2. Los efectos del matrimonio se regirán por la ley personal común de los cónyuges al tiempo de contraerlo; en defecto de esta ley, por la ley personal o de la residencia habitual de cualquiera de ellos, elegida por ambos en documento auténtico otorgado antes de la celebración del matrimonio; a falta de esta elección, por la ley de la residencia habitual común inmediatamente posterior a la celebración, y, a falta de dicha residencia, por la del lugar de celebración del matrimonio. La separación y el divorcio se regirán por la ley que determina el artículo 107. 3. Los pactos o capitulaciones por los que se estipule, modifique o sustituya el régimen económico del matrimonio serán válidos cuando sean conformes bien a la ley que rija los efectos del matrimonio, bien a la ley de la nacionalidad o de la residencia habitual de cualquiera de las partes al tiempo del otorgamiento. 4. El carácter y contenido de la filiación, incluida la adoptiva y las relaciones paterno−filiales, se regirán por la Ley personal del hijo y si no pudiera determinarse ésta, se estará a la de la residencia habitual del hijo. 5. La adopción constituida por Juez español se regirá, en cuanto a los requisitos, por lo dispuesto en la Ley española. No obstante, deberá observarse la ley nacional del adoptando en lo que se refiere a su capacidad y consentimiento necesarios:

1.º Si tuviera su residencia habitual fuera de España. 2.º Aunque resida en España, si no adquiere, en virtud de la adopción, la nacionalidad española.

A petición del adoptante o del Ministerio Fiscal, el Juez, en interés del adoptando, podrá exigir, además, los consentimientos, audiencias o autorizaciones requeridas por la Ley nacional o por la Ley de la residencia habitual del adoptante o del adoptando. Para la constitución de la adopción, los Cónsules españoles tendrán las mismas atribuciones que el Juez, siempre que el adoptante sea español y el adoptando esté domiciliado en la demarcación consular. La propuesta previa será formulada por la entidad pública correspondiente al último lugar de residencia del adoptante en España. Si el adoptante no tuvo residencia en España en los dos últimos años, no será necesaria propuesta previa, pero el Cónsul recabará de las autoridades del lugar de residencia de aquél informes suficientes para valorar su idoneidad. En la adopción constituida por la competente autoridad extranjera, la Ley del adoptando regirá en cuanto a capacidad y consentimientos necesarios. Los consentimientos exigidos por tal Ley podrán prestarse ante una autoridad del país en que se inició la constitución o, posteriormente, ante cualquier otra autoridad competente. En su caso, para la adopción de un español será necesario el consentimiento de la entidad pública correspondiente a la última residencia del adoptando en España. No será reconocida en España como adopción la constituida en el extranjero por adoptante español, si los efectos de aquélla no se corresponden con los previstos por la legislación española. Tampoco lo será, mientras la entidad pública competente no haya declarado la idoneidad del adoptante, si éste fuera español y estuviera domiciliado en España al tiempo de la adopción. 6. La tutela y las demás instituciones de protección del incapaz se regularán por la Ley nacional de éste. Sin embargo, las medidas provisionales o urgentes de protección se regirán por la ley de su residencia habitual. Las formalidades de constitución de la tutela y demás instituciones de protección en que intervengan autoridades judiciales o administrativas españolas se sustanciarán, en todo caso, con arreglo a la ley española. Será aplicable la ley española para tomar las medidas de carácter protector y educativo respecto de los menores o incapaces abandonados que se hallen en territorio español. 7. El derecho a la prestación de alimentos entre parientes habrá de regularse por la ley nacional común del alimentista y del alimentante. No obstante se aplicará la ley de la residencia habitual de la persona que los reclame cuando ésta no pueda obtenerlos de acuerdo con la ley nacional común. En defecto de ambas leyes, o cuando ninguna de ellas permita la obtención de alimentos, se aplicará la ley interna de la autoridad que conoce de la reclamación. En caso de cambio de la nacionalidad común o de la residencia habitual del alimentista, la nueva ley se aplicará a partir del momento del cambio. 8. La sucesión por causa de muerte se regirá por la ley nacional del causante en el momento de su fallecimiento, cualesquiera que sean la naturaleza de los bienes y el país dónde se encuentren. Sin embargo, las disposiciones hechas en testamento y los pactos sucesorios ordenados conforme a la ley nacional del testador o del disponente en el momento de su otorgamiento conservarán su validez, aunque sea otra ley que rija la sucesión, si bien las legítimas se ajustarán, en su caso, a esta última. Los derechos que por ministerio de

3

la ley se atribuyan al cónyuge supérstite se regirán por la misma ley que regule los efectos del matrimonio, a salvo siempre las legítimas de los descendientes. 9. A los efectos de este capítulo, respecto de las situaciones de doble nacionalidad previstas en las leyes españolas se estará a lo que determinen los tratados internacionales, y, si nada estableciesen, será preferida la nacionalidad coincidente con la última residencia habitual y, en su defecto, la última adquirida. Prevalecerá en todo caso la nacionalidad española del que ostente además otra no prevista en nuestras leyes o en los tratados internacionales. Si ostentare dos o más nacionalidades y ninguna de ellas fuera la española, se estará a lo que establece el apartado siguiente. 10. Se considera como ley personal de los que carecieren de nacionalidad o la tuvieren indeterminada, la ley del lugar de su residencia habitual. 11. La ley personal correspondiente a las personas jurídicas es la determinada por su nacionalidad y regirá en todo lo relativo a capacidad, constitución, representación, funcionamiento, transformación, disolución y extinción. En la fusión de sociedades de distinta nacionalidad se tendrán en cuenta las respectivas leyes personales.

Artículo 10

1. La posesión, la propiedad y los demás derechos sobre bienes inmuebles, así como su publicidad, se regirán por la ley del lugar donde se hallen. La misma ley será aplicable a los bienes muebles. 2. A los efectos de la constitución o cesión de derechos sobre bienes en tránsito, éstos se considerarán situados en el lugar de su expedición, salvo que el remitente y el destinatario hayan convenido, expresa o tácitamente, que se consideren situados en el lugar de destino. 3. La emisión de los títulos−valores se atendrá a la ley del lugar en que se produzca. 4. Los derechos de propiedad intelectual e industrial se protegerán dentro del territorio español de acuerdo con la ley española, sin perjuicio de los establecido por los convenios y tratados internacionales en los que España sea parte. 5. Se aplicará a las obligaciones contractuales la ley a que las partes se hayan sometido expresamente, siempre que tenga alguna conexión con el negocio de que se trate; en su defecto, la ley nacional común a las partes; a falta de ella, la ley de residencia habitual común y, en último término, la ley del lugar de celebración del contrato. No obstante lo dispuesto en el párrafo anterior, a falta de sometimiento expreso, se aplicará a los contratos relativos a bienes inmuebles la ley del lugar donde estén sitos, y a la compraventa de muebles corporales realizada en establecimientos mercantiles, la ley del lugar en que éstos radiquen. 6. A las obligaciones derivadas del contrato de trabajo, en defecto de sometimiento expreso de las partes y sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en el apartado 1 del artículo 8., les será de aplicación la ley del lugar donde se presten los servicios. 7. Las donaciones se regirán, en todo caso, por la ley nacional del donante. 8. Serán válidos, a efectos del ordenamiento jurídico español, los contratos onerosos celebrados en España por extranjero incapaz según su ley nacional, si la causa de la incapacidad no estuviere reconocida en la legislación española. Esta regla no se aplicará a los contratos relativos a inmuebles situados en el extranjero. 9. Las obligaciones no contractuales se regirán por la ley del lugar donde hubiere ocurrido el hecho de que deriven. La gestión de negocios se regulará por la ley del lugar donde el gestor realice la principal actividad. En el enriquecimiento sin causa se aplicará la ley en virtud de la cual se produjo la transferencia del valor patrimonial en favor del enriquecido. 10. La ley reguladora de una obligación se extiende a los requisitos del cumplimiento y a las consecuencias del incumplimiento, así como a su extinción. Sin embargo, se aplicará la ley del lugar de cumplimiento a las modalidades de ejecución que requieran intervención judicial o administrativa. 11. A la representación legal se aplicará la ley reguladora de la relación jurídica de la que nacen las facultades del representante, y a la voluntaria, de no mediar sometimiento expreso, la ley del país en donde se ejerciten las facultades conferidas.

4

Artículo 11

1. Las formas y solemnidades de los contratos, testamentos y demás actos jurídicos se regirán por la ley del país en que se otorguen. No obstante, serán también válidos los celebrados con las formas y solemnidades exigibles por la ley aplicable a su contenido, así como los celebrados conforme a la ley personal del disponente o la común de los otorgantes. Igualmente serán válidos los actos y contratos relativos a bienes inmuebles otorgados con arreglo a las formas y solemnidades del lugar en que éstos radiquen. Si tales actos fueren otorgados a bordo de buques o aeronaves durante su navegación, se entenderán celebrados en el país de su abanderamiento, matrícula o registro. Los navíos o las aeronaves militares se consideran como parte del territorio del Estado al que pertenezcan. 2. Si la ley reguladora del contenido de los actos y contratos exigiere para su validez una determinada forma o solemnidad, será siempre aplicada, incluso en el caso de otorgarse aquéllos en el extranjero. 3. Será de aplicación la ley española a los contratos, testamentos y demás actos jurídicos autorizados por funcionarios diplomáticos o consulares de España en el extranjero.

Artículo 12

1.La calificación para determinar la norma de conflicto aplicable se hará siempre con arreglo a la ley española. 2. La remisión al derecho extranjero se entenderá hecha a su ley material, sin tener en cuenta el reenvío que sus normas de conflicto puedan hacer a otra ley que no sea la española. 3. En ningún caso tendrá aplicación la ley extranjera cuando resulte contraria al orden público. 4. Se considerará como fraude de ley la utilización de una norma de conflicto con el fin de eludir una ley imperativa española. 5. Cuando una norma de conflicto remita a la legislación de un Estado en el que coexistan diferentes sistemas legislativos, la determinación del que sea aplicable entre ellos se hará conforme a la legislación de dicho Estado. 6. Los Tribunales y autoridades aplicarán de oficio las normas de conflicto del derecho español. La persona que invoque el derecho extranjero deberá acreditar su contenido y vigencia por los medios de prueba admitidos en la ley española. Sin embargo, para su aplicación, el juzgador podrá valerse además de cuantos instrumentos de averiguación considere necesarios, dictando al efecto las providencias oportunas.

CAPÍTULO V

Ámbito de aplicación de los regímenes jurídicos civiles coexistentes en el territorio nacional.

Artículo 13

1. Las disposiciones de este título preliminar, en cuanto determinan los efectos de las leyes y las reglas generales para su aplicación, así como las del título IV del libro I, con excepción de las normas de este último relativas al régimen económico matrimonial, tendrán aplicación general y directa en toda España. 2. En lo demás, y con pleno respeto a los derechos especiales o forales de las provincias o territorios en que están vigentes, regirá el Código Civil como derecho supletorio, en defecto del que lo sea en cada una de aquéllas, según sus normas especiales.

Artículo 14

1. La sujeción al derecho civil común o al especial o foral se determina por la vecindad civil. 2. Tienen vecindad civil en territorio de derecho común, o en uno de los de derecho especial o foral, los nacidos de padres que tengan tal vecindad. Por la adopción, el adoptado no emancipado adquiere la vecindad civil de los adoptantes. 3. Si al nacer el hijo, o al ser adoptado, los padres tuvieren distinta vecindad civil, el hijo tendrá la que

5

corresponda a aquél de los dos respecto del cual la filiación haya sido determinada antes; en su defecto, tendrá la del lugar del nacimiento y, en último término, la vecindad de derecho común. Sin embargo, los padres, o el que de ellos ejerza o le haya sido atribuida la patria potestad, podrán atribuir al hijo la vecindad civil de cualquiera de ellos en tanto no transcurran los seis meses siguientes al nacimiento o a la adopción. La privación o suspensión en el ejercicio de la patria potestad, o el cambio de vecindad de los padres, no afectarán a la vecindad civil de los hijos. En todo caso el hijo desde que cumpla catorce años y hasta que transcurra un año después de su emancipación podrá optar bien por la vecindad civil del lugar de su nacimiento, bien por la última vecindad de cualquiera de sus padres. Si no estuviera emancipado, habrá de ser asistido en la opción por el representante legal. 4. El matrimonio no altera la vecindad civil. No obstante, cualquiera de los cónyuges no separados, ya sea legalmente o de hecho, podrá, en todo momento, optar por la vecindad civil del otro. 5. La vecindad civil se adquiere: 1. Por residencia continuada durante dos años, siempre que el interesado manifieste ser esa su voluntad. 2. Por residencia continuada de diez años, sin declaración en contrario durante este plazo. Ambas declaraciones se harán constar en el Registro Civil y no necesitan ser reiteradas. 6. En caso de duda prevalecerá la vecindad civil que corresponda al lugar de nacimiento.

Artículo 15

1. El extranjero que adquiera la nacionalidad española deberá optar, al inscribir la adquisición de la nacionalidad, por cualquiera de las vecindades siguientes: a) La correspondiente al lugar de residencia. b) La del lugar del nacimiento. c) La última vecindad de cualquiera de sus progenitores o adoptantes. d) La del cónyuge. Esta declaración de opción se formulará, atendiendo a la capacidad del interesado para adquirir la nacionalidad, por el propio optante, por sí o asistido de su representante legal, o por este último. Cuando la adquisición de la nacionalidad se haga por declaración o a petición del representante legal, la autorización necesaria deberá determinar la vecindad civil por la que se ha de optar. 2. El extranjero que adquiera la nacionalidad por carta de naturaleza tendrá la vecindad civil que el Real Decreto de concesión determine, teniendo en cuenta la opción de aquél, de acuerdo con lo que dispone el apartado anterior u otras circunstancias que concurran en el peticionario. 3. La recuperación de la nacionalidad española lleva consigo la de aquella vecindad civil que ostentara el interesado al tiempo de su pérdida. 4. La dependencia personal respecto a una comarca o localidad con especialidad civil propia o distinta, dentro de la legislación especial o foral del territorio correspondiente, se regirá por las disposiciones de este artículo y las del anterior.

Artículo 16

1. Los conflictos de leyes que puedan surgir por la coexistencia de distintas legislaciones civiles en el territorio nacional se resolverán según las normas contenidas en el capítulo IV con las siguientes particularidades: 1. Será ley personal la determinada por la vecindad civil. 2. No será aplicable lo dispuesto en los apartados 1, 2 y 3 del artículo 12 sobre calificación, remisión y orden público. 2. El derecho de viudedad regulado en la Compilación aragonesa corresponde a los cónyuges sometidos al régimen económico matrimonial de dicha Compilación, aunque después cambie su vecindad civil, con exclusión en este caso de la legítima que establezca la ley sucesoria. El derecho expectante de viudedad no podrá oponerse al adquirente a título oneroso y de buena fe de los bienes que no radiquen en territorio donde se reconozca tal derecho, si el contrato se hubiera celebrado fuera

6

de dicho territorio, sin haber hecho constar el régimen económico matrimonial del transmitente. El usufructo viudal corresponde también al cónyuge supérstite cuando el premuerto tuviese vecindad civil aragonesa en el momento de su muerte. 3. Los efectos del matrimonio entre españoles se regularán por la ley española que resulte aplicable según los criterios del artículo 9 y, en su defecto, por el Código civil. En este último caso se aplicará el régimen de separación de bienes del Código civil si conforme a una y otra ley personal de los contrayentes hubiera de regir un sistema de separación.

LIBRO PRIMERO. DE LAS PERSONAS

TÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LOS ESPAÑOLES Y EXTRANJEROS

Artículo 17.

Son españoles de origen:

Los nacidos de padre o madre españoles.• Los nacidos en España de padres extranjeros si, al menos, uno de ellos hubiera nacido también en España. Se exceptúan los hijos de funcionario diplomático o consular acreditado en España.

Los nacidos en España de padres extranjeros, si ambos carecieren de nacionalidad o si la legislación de ninguno de ellos atribuye al hijo una nacionalidad.

Los nacidos en España cuya filiación no resulte determinada. A estos efectos, se presumen nacidos en territorio español los menores de edad cuyo primer lugar conocido de estancia sea territorio español.

2. La filiación o el nacimiento en España, cuya determinación se produzca después de los dieciocho años de edad, no son por sí solos causa de adquisición de la nacionalidad española. El interesado tiene entonces derecho a optar por la nacionalidad española de origen en el plazo de dos años a contar desde aquella determinación.

Artículo 18.

La posesión y utilización continuada de la nacionalidad española durante diez años, con buena fe y basada en un título inscrito en el Registro Civil, es causa de consolidación de la nacionalidad aunque se anule el título que la originó.

Artículo 19.

1. El extranjero menor de dieciocho años adoptado por un español adquiere, desde la adopción, la nacionalidad española de origen.

2. Si el adoptado es mayor de dieciocho años podrá optar por la nacionalidad española de origen en el plazo de dos años a partir de la constitución de la adopción.

Artículo 20.

1. Tienen derecho a optar por la nacionalidad española las personas que están o hayan estado sujetas a la patria potestad de un español, así como las que se hallen comprendidas en el último apartado de los artículos 17 y 19.

2. La declaración de opción se formulará:

7

Por el representante legal del optante, menor de catorce años o incapacitado. En este caso la opción requiere autorización del encargado del Registro Civil del domicilio del declarante, previo dictamen del Ministerio Fiscal. Dicha autorización se concede en interés del menor o incapaz.

Por el propio interesado, asistido por su representante legal, cuando aquel sea mayor de catorce años o cuando, aun estando incapacitado, así lo permita la sentencia de incapacitación.

Por el interesado, por sí solo, si está emancipado o es mayor de dieciocho años. La opción caducará a los veinte años de edad pero si el optante no estuviera emancipado según su ley personal al llegar a los dieciocho años, el plazo para optar se prolongará hasta que transcurran dos años desde la emancipación.

Por el interesado, por sí solo, dentro de los dos años siguientes a la recuperación de la plena capacidad. Se exceptúa el caso en que haya caducado el derecho de opción conforme al apartado c.

Artículo 21.

1. La nacionalidad española se adquiere por carta de naturaleza, otorgada discrecionalmente mediante Real Decreto, cuando en el interesado concurran circunstancias excepcionales.

2. La nacionalidad española también se adquiere por residencia en España, en las condiciones que señala el artículo siguiente y mediante la concesión otorgada por el Ministro de Justicia, que podrá denegarla por motivos razonados de orden público o interés nacional.

3. En uno y otro caso la solicitud podrá formularla:

El interesado emancipado o mayor de dieciocho años• El mayor de catorce años asistido por su representante legal.• El representante legal del menor de catorce años.• El representante legal del incapacitado o el incapacita do, por sí solo o debidamente asistido, según resulte de la sentencia de incapacitación.

En este caso y en el anterior, el representante legal sólo podrá formular la solicitud si previamente ha obtenido autorización conforme a lo previsto en la letra a) del apartado 2 del artículo anterior.

4. Las concesiones por carta de naturaleza o por residencia caducan a los ciento ochenta días siguientes a su notificación, si en este plazo no comparece el interesado ante funcionario competente para cumplir los requisitos del artículo 23.

Artículo 22.

1. Para la concesión de la nacionalidad por residencia se requiere que ésta haya durado diez años. Serán suficientes cinco años para los que hayan obtenido asilo o refugio, y dos años cuando se trate de nacionales de origen de países iberoamericanos, Andorra, Filipinas, Guinea Ecuatorial o Portugal o de sefardíes.

2. Bastará el tiempo de residencia de un año para:

El que haya nacido en territorio español.• El que no haya ejercitado oportunamente la facultad de optar.• El que haya estado sujeto legalmente a la tutela, guarda o acogimiento de un ciudadano o institución españoles durante dos años consecutivos, incluso si continuare en esta situación en el momento de la solicitud.

El que al tiempo de la solicitud llevare un año casado con español o española y no estuviere separado legalmente o de hecho.

El viudo o viuda de española o español, si a la muerte del cónyuge no existiera separación legal o de hecho.• El nacido fuera de España de padre o madre que originariamente hubieran sido españoles.•

8

3. En todos los casos la residencia habrá de ser legal, continuada e inmediatamente anterior a la petición.

A los efectos de lo previsto en la letra d del número anterior, se entenderá que tiene residencia legal en España el cónyuge que conviva con funcionario diplomático o consular español acreditado en el extranjero.

4. El interesado deberá justificar, en el expediente regulado por la legislación del Registro Civil, buena conducta cívica y suficiente grado de integración en la sociedad española.

5. La concesión o denegación de la nacionalidad por residencia deja a salvo la vía judicial contencioso−administrativa.

Artículo 23.

Son requisitos comunes para la validez de la adquisición de la nacionalidad española por opción, carta de naturaleza o residencia:

Que el mayor de catorce años, y capaz para prestar una declaración por sí, jure o prometa fidelidad al Rey y obediencia a la Constitución y a las Leyes.

Que la misma persona declare que renuncia a su anterior nacionalidad. Quedan a salvo de este requisito los naturales de países mencionados en el apartado 2 del artículo 24.

Que la adquisición se inscriba en el Registro Civil español.•

Artículo 24.

1. Pierden la nacionalidad española los emancipados que, residiendo habitualmente en el extranjero, adquieran voluntariamente otra nacionalidad o utilicen exclusivamente la nacionalidad extranjera que tuvieran atribuida antes de la emancipación.

2. La pérdida se producirá una vez que transcurran tres años a contar, respectivamente, desde la adquisición de la nacionalidad extranjera o desde la emancipación.

La adquisición de la nacionalidad de países iberoamericanos, Andorra, Filipinas, Guinea Ecuatorial o Portugal, no es bastante para producir, conforme a este apartado, la pérdida de la nacionalidad española de origen.

3. En todo caso, pierden la nacionalidad española los españoles emancipados que renuncien expresamente a ella, si tienen otra nacionalidad y residen habitualmente en el extranjero.

4. No se pierde la nacionalidad española, en virtud de lo dispuesto en este precepto, si España se hallare en guerra.

Artículo 25.

1. Los españoles que no lo sean de origen perderán la nacionalidad:

Cuando por sentencia firme fueren condenados a su pérdida, conforme a lo establecido en las leyes penales.• Cuando entren voluntariamente al servicio de las armas o ejerzan cargo político en un Estado extranjero contra la prohibición expresa del Gobierno.

2. La sentencia firme que declare que el interesado ha incurrido en falsedad, ocultación o fraude en la adquisición de la nacionalidad española, produce la nulidad de tal adquisición, si bien no se derivarán de ella efectos perjudiciales para terceros de buena fe. La acción de nulidad deberá ejercitarse por el Ministerio Fiscal

9

de oficio o en virtud de denuncia, dentro del plazo de quince años.

Artículo 26.

1. Quien haya perdido la nacionalidad española podrá recuperarla cumpliendo los siguientes requisitos:

Ser residente legal en España. Este requisito no será de aplicación a los emigrantes ni a los hijos de emigrantes. En los demás casos podrá ser dispensado por el Ministro de Justicia e Interior cuando concurran circunstancias excepcionales.

Declarar ante el encargado del Registro Civil su voluntad de recuperar la nacionalidad española y su renuncia, salvo que se trate de naturales de los países mencionados en el artículo 24, a la nacionalidad anterior, y

Inscribir la recuperación en el Registro Civil.•

2. No podrán recuperar o adquirir, en su caso, la nacionalidad española, sin previa habilitación concedida discrecionalmente por el Gobierno:

Los que se encuentren incursos en cualquiera de los supuestos previstos en el artículo anterior.• Los que hayan perdido la nacionalidad sin haber cumplido el servicio militar español o la prestación social sustitutoria, estando obligados a ello. No obstante, la habilitación no será precisa cuando la declaración de recuperación se formule por varón mayor de cuarenta años.

Artículo 27.

Los extranjeros gozan en España de los mismos derechos civiles que los españoles, salvo lo dispuesto en las leyes especiales y en los Tratados.

Artículo 28.

Las corporaciones, fundaciones y asociaciones, reconocidas por la ley y domiciliadas en España, gozarán de la nacionalidad española, siempre que tengan el concepto de personas jurídicas con arreglo a las disposiciones del presente Código.

Las asociaciones domiciliadas en el extranjero tendrán en España la consideración y los derechos que determinen los tratados o leyes especiales.

TÍTULO II. DEL NACIMIENTO Y LA EXTINCIÓN DE LA PERSONALIDAD CIVIL.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LAS PERSONAS NATURALES

Artículo 29.

El nacimiento determinará la personalidad; pero el concebido se tiene por nacido para todos los efectos que le sean favorables, siempre que nazca con las condiciones que expresa el artículo siguiente.

Artículo 30.

Para los efectos civiles, sólo se reputará nacido el feto que tuviere figura humana y viviere veinticuatro horas enteramente desprendido del seno materno.

10

Artículo 31.

La prioridad del nacimiento, en el caso de partos dobles, da al primer nacido los derechos que la ley reconozca al primogénito.

Artículo 32.

La personalidad civil se extingue por la muerte de las personas.

Artículo 33.

Si se duda, entre dos o más personas llamadas a sucederse, quién de ellas ha muerto primero, el que sostenga la muerte anterior de una o de otra, debe probarla; a falta de prueba, se presumen muertas al mismo tiempo y no tiene lugar la transmisión de derechos de uno a otro.

Artículo 34.

Respecto a la presunción de muerte del ausente y sus efectos se estará a lo dispuesto en el título VIII de este libro.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS PERSONAS JURÍDICAS

Artículo 35.

Son personas jurídicas:

Las corporaciones, asociaciones y fundaciones de interés público reconocidas por la Ley.•

Su personalidad empieza desde el instante mismo en que, con arreglo a derecho, hubiesen quedado validamente constituidas.

Las asociaciones de interés particular, sean civiles, mercantiles o industriales, a las que la ley conceda personalidad propia, independiente de la de cada uno de sus asociados.

Artículo 36.

Las asociaciones a que se refiere el número 2) del artículo anterior se regirán por las disposiciones relativas al contrato de sociedad, según la naturaleza de éste.

Artículo 37.

La capacidad civil de las corporaciones se regulará por las leyes que las hayan creado o reconocido; la de las asociaciones por sus estatutos, y la de las fundaciones por las reglas de su institución, debidamente aprobadas por disposición administrativa, cuando este requisito fuese necesario.

Artículo 38.

Las personas jurídicas pueden adquirir y poseer bienes de todas clases, así como contraer obligaciones y ejercitar acciones civiles o criminales, conforme a las leyes y reglas de su constitución.

La Iglesia se regirá en este punto por lo concordado entre ambas potestades, y los establecimientos de

11

instrucción y beneficencia por lo que dispongan las leyes especiales.

Artículo 39.

Si por haber expirado el plazo durante el cual funcionaban legalmente, o por haber realizado el fin para el cual se constituyeron, o por ser ya imposible aplicar a éste la actividad y los medios de que disponían, dejasen de funcionar las corporaciones, asociaciones y fundaciones, se dará a sus bienes la aplicación que las leyes, o los estatutos, o las cláusulas fundacionales, les hubiesen en esta previsión asignado. Si nada se hubiere establecido previamente, se aplicaran esos bienes a la realización de fines análogos, en interés de la región, provincia o municipio que principalmente debieran recoger los beneficios de las instituciones extinguidas.

TÍTULO III. DEL DOMICILIO

Artículo 40.

Para el ejercicio de los derechos y el cumplimiento de obligaciones civiles, el domicilio de las personas naturales es el lugar de su residencia habitual, y, en su caso, el que determine la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

El domicilio de los diplomáticos residentes por razón de su cargo en el extranjero, que gocen del derecho de extraterritorialidad, será el último que hubieren tenido en territorio español.

Artículo 41.

Cuando ni la ley que las haya creado o reconocido, ni los estatutos o las reglas de fundación fijaren el domicilio de las personas jurídicas, se entenderá que lo tienen en el lugar en que se halle establecida su representación legal, o donde ejerzan las principales funciones de su instituto.

TÍTULO IV. DEL MATRIMONIO

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA PROMESA DE MATRIMONIO

Artículo 42.

La promesa de matrimonio no produce obligación de contraerlo ni de cumplir lo que se hubiere estipulado para el supuesto de su no celebración.

No se admitirá a trámite la demanda en que se pretenda su cumplimiento.

Artículo 43.

El incumplimiento sin causa de la promesa cierta de matrimonio hecha por persona mayor de edad o por menor emancipado sólo producirá la obligación de resarcir a la otra parte de los gastos hechos y las obligaciones contraídas en consideración al matrimonio prometido.

Esta acción caducará al año contado desde el día de la negativa a la celebración del matrimonio.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS REQUISITOS DEL MATRIMONIO

12

Artículo 44.

El hombre y la mujer tienen derecho a contraer matrimonio conforme a las disposiciones de este Código.

Artículo 45.

No hay matrimonio sin consentimiento matrimonial.

La condición, término o modo del consentimiento se tendrá por no puesta.

Artículo 46.

No pueden contraer matrimonio:

Los menores de edad no emancipados.• Los que estén ligados con vínculo matrimonial.•

Artículo 47.

Tampoco pueden contraer matrimonio entre sí.

Los parientes en línea recta por consanguinidad o adopción.• Los colaterales por consanguinidad hasta el tercer grado.• Los condenados como autores o cómplices de la muerte dolosa del cónyuge de cualquiera de ellos.•

Artículo 48.

El Ministro de Justicia puede dispensar, a instancia de parte, el impedimento de muerte dolosa del cónyuge anterior.

El Juez de Primera Instancia podrá dispensar, con justa causa o a instancia de parte, los impedimentos del grado tercero entre colaterales, y de edad a partir de los catorce años. En los expedientes de dispensa de edad deberán ser oídos el menor y sus padres o guardadores.

La dispensa ulterior convalida, desde su celebración, el matrimonio cuya nulidad no haya sido instada judicialmente por alguna de las partes.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA FORMA DE CELEBRACIÓN DEL MATRIMONIO

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 49.

Cualquier español podrá contraer matrimonio dentro o fuera de España:

Ante el Juez, Alcalde o funcionario señalado por este Código.• En la forma religiosa legalmente prevista.•

También podrá contraer matrimonio fuera de España con arreglo a la forma establecida por la Ley del lugar de celebración.

13

Artículo 50.

Si ambos contrayentes son extranjeros, podrá celebrarse el matrimonio en España con arreglo a la forma prescrita para los españoles o cumpliendo la establecida por la ley personal de cualquiera de ellos.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA.

DE LA CELEBRACIÓN ANTE EL JUEZ, ALCALDE O FUNCIONARIO QUE HAGA SUS VECES

Artículo 51.

Será competente para autorizar el matrimonio:

El Juez encargado del Registro Civil y el Alcalde del municipio donde se celebre el matrimonio o concejal en quien éste delegue.

En los municipios en que no resida dicho Juez, el delegado designado reglamentariamente.• El funcionario diplomático o consular encargado del Registro Civil en el extranjero.•

Artículo 52.

Podrá autorizar el matrimonio del que se halle en peligro de muerte:

El Juez encargado del Registro Civil, el delegado o el Alcalde, aunque los contrayentes no residan en la circunscripción respectiva.

En defecto del Juez, y respecto de los militares en campaña, el Oficial o Jefe superior inmediato.• Respecto de los matrimonios que se celebren a bordo de nave o aeronave, el Capitán o Comandante de la misma.

Este matrimonio no requerirá para su autorización la previa formación de expediente, pero sí la presencia, en su celebración, de dos testigos mayores de edad, salvo imposibilidad acreditada.

Artículo 53.

La validez del matrimonio no quedará afectada por la incompetencia o falta de nombramiento legítimo del Juez, Alcalde o funcionario que lo autorice, siempre que al menos uno de los cónyuges hubiera procedido de buena fe y aquéllos ejercieran sus funciones públicamente.

Artículo 54.

Cuando concurra causa grave suficientemente probada el Ministro de Justicia podrá autorizar el matrimonio secreto. En este caso, el expediente se tramitará reservadamente, sin la publicación de edictos o proclamas.

Artículo 55.

Podrá autorizarse en el expediente matrimonial que el contrayente que no resida en el distrito o demarcación del Juez, Alcalde o funcionario autorizante celebre el matrimonio por apoderado a quien haya concedido poder especial en forma auténtica, pero siempre será necesaria la asistencia personal del otro contrayente.

En el poder se determinará la persona con quien ha de celebrarse el matrimonio, con expresión de las circunstancias personales precisas para establecer su identidad.

El poder se extinguirá por la revocación del poderdante, por la renuncia del apoderado o por la muerte de

14

cualquiera de ellos. En caso de revocación por el poderdante bastará su manifestación en forma auténtica antes de la celebración del matrimonio. La revocación se notificará de inmediato al Juez, Alcalde o funcionario autorizante.

Artículo 56.

Quienes deseen contraer matrimonio acreditarán previamente, en expediente tramitado conforme a la legislación del Registro Civil, que reúnen los requisitos de capacidad establecidos en este Código.

Si alguno de los contrayentes estuviere afectado por deficiencias o anomalías psíquicas, se exigirá dictamen médico sobre su aptitud para prestar el consentimiento.

Artículo 57.

El matrimonio deberá celebrarse ante el Juez, Alcalde o funcionario correspondiente al domicilio de cualquiera de los contrayentes y dos testigos mayores de edad.

La prestación del consentimiento podrá también realizarse, por delegación del instructor del expediente, bien a petición de los contrayentes o bien de oficio, ante Juez, Alcalde o funcionario de otra población distinta.

Artículo 58.

El Juez, Alcalde o funcionario, después de leídos los artículos 66, 67 y 68, preguntará a cada uno de los contrayentes si consienten en contraer matrimonio con el otro y si efectivamente lo contraen en dicho acto y, respondiendo ambos afirmativamente, declarará que los mismos quedan unidos en matrimonio y extenderá la inscripción o el acta correspondiente.

SECCIÓN III.

DE LA CELEBRACIÓN EN FORMA RELIGIOSA.

Artículo 59.

El consentimiento matrimonial podrá prestarse en la forma prevista por una confesión religiosa inscrita, en los términos acordados con el Estado o, en su defecto, autorizados por la legislación de éste.

Artículo 60.

El matrimonio celebrado según las normas del Derecho canónico o en cualquiera de las formas religiosas previstas en el artículo anterior produce efectos civiles. Para el pleno reconocimiento de los mismos se estará a lo dispuesto en el capítulo siguiente.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA INSCRIPCIÓN DEL MATRIMONIO EN EL REGISTRO CIVIL

Artículo 61.

El matrimonio produce efectos civiles desde su celebración. Para el pleno reconocimiento de los mismos será necesaria su inscripción en el Registro Civil.

El matrimonio no inscrito no perjudicará los derechos adquiridos de buena fe por terceras personas.

15

Artículo 62.

El Juez, Alcalde o funcionario ante quien se celebre el matrimonio extenderá, inmediatamente después de celebrado, la inscripción o el acta correspondiente con su firma y la de los contrayentes y testigos.

Asimismo, practicada la inscripción o extendida el acta, el Juez, Alcalde o funcionario entregará a cada uno de los contrayentes documento acreditativo de la celebración del matrimonio.

Artículo 63.

La inscripción del matrimonio celebrado en España en forma religiosa se practicará con la simple presentación de la certificación de la Iglesia o confesión respectiva, que habrá de expresar las circunstancias exigidas por la legislación del Registro Civil.

Se denegará la práctica del asiento cuando de los documentos presentados o de los asientos del Registro conste que el matrimonio reúne los requisitos que para su validez se exigen en este título.

Artículo 64.

Para el reconocimiento del matrimonio secreto basta inscripción en el libro especial del Registro Civil Central, pero no perjudicará los derechos adquiridos de buena fe por terceras personas sino desde su publicación en el Registro Civil ordinario.

Artículo 65.

Salvo lo dispuesto en el artículo 63, en todos los demás casos en que el matrimonio se hubiere celebrado sin haberse tramitado correspondiente expediente, el Juez o funcionario encargado del Registro, antes de practicar la inscripción, deberá comprobar si concurren los requisitos legales para su celebración.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LOS DERECHOS Y DEBERES DE LOS CÓNYUGES

Artículo 66. El marido y la mujer son iguales en derechos y deberes.

Artículo 67. El marido y la mujer deben respetarse y ayudarse mutuamente y actuar en interés de la familia.

Artículo 68. Los cónyuges están obligados a vivir juntos, guardarse fidelidad y socorrerse mutuamente.

Artículo 69. Se presume, salvo prueba en contrario, que los cónyuges viven juntos.

Artículo 70. Los cónyuges fijarán de común acuerdo el domicilio conyugal y, en caso de discrepancia, resolverá el Juez, teniendo en cuenta interés de la familia.

Artículo 71. Ninguno de los cónyuges puede atribuirse la representación del otro sin que le hubiere sido conferida.

Artículo 72. (Derogado por la Ley 30/1981, de 7 de julio.)

CAPÍTULO VI. DE LA NULIDAD DEL MATRIMONIO

Artículo 73.

16

Es nulo cualquiera que sea la forma de su celebración:

El matrimonio celebrado sin consentimiento matrimonial.• El matrimonio celebrado entre las personas a que se refieren los artículos 46 y 47, salvo los casos de dispensa conforme al artículo 48.

El que se contraiga sin la intervención del Juez, Alcalde o funcionario ante quien deba celebrarse, o sin la de los testigos.

El celebrado por error en la identidad de la persona del otro contrayente o en aquellas cualidades personales que, por su entidad, hubieren sido determinantes de la prestación del consentimiento.

El contraído por coacción o miedo grave.•

Artículo 74.

La acción para pedir la nulidad del matrimonio corresponde a los cónyuges, al Ministerio Fiscal y a cualquier persona que tenga interés directo y legítimo en ella salvo lo dispuesto en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 75.

Si la causa de nulidad fuere la falta de edad, mientras el contrayente sea menor, sólo podrá ejercitar la acción cualquiera de sus padres, tutores o guardadores y, en todo caso, el Ministerio Fiscal.

Al llegar a la mayoría de edad sólo podrá ejercitar la acción el contrayente menor, salvo que los cónyuges hubieren vivido juntos durante un año después de alcanzada aquélla.

Artículo 76.

En los casos de error, coacción o miedo grave solamente podrá ejercitar la acción de nulidad el cónyuge que hubiera sufrido el vicio.

Caduca la acción y se convalida el matrimonio si los cónyuges hubieran vivido juntos durante un año después de desvanecido el error o de haber cesado la fuerza o la causa del miedo.

Artículo 77. (Derogado por la Ley 30/1981 de 7 de julio.)

Artículo 78.

El Juez no acordará la nulidad de un matrimonio por defecto de forma, si al menos uno de los cónyuges lo contrajo de buena fe salvo lo dispuesto en el número 3 del artículo 73.

Artículo 79.

La declaración de nulidad del matrimonio no invalidará los efectos ya producidos respecto de los hijos y del contrayente o contrayentes de buena fe.

La buena fe se presume.

Artículo 80.

Las resoluciones dictadas por los Tribunales eclesiásticos sobre nulidad de matrimonio canónico o las decisiones pontífices sobre matrimonio rato y no consumado tendrán eficacia en el ordenamiento civil, a solicitud de cualquiera de las partes, si se declaran ajustados al Derecho del Estado en resolución dictada por el Juez civil competente conforme a las condiciones a las que se refiere el artículo 954 de la Ley de

17

Enjuiciamiento Civil.

CAPÍTULO VII. DE LA SEPARACIÓN

Artículo 81.

Se decretará judicialmente la separación, cualquiera que sea la forma de celebración del matrimonio:

A petición de ambos cónyuges o de uno con el consentimiento del otro, una vez transcurrido el primer año del matrimonio. Deberá necesariamente acompañarse a la demanda la propuesta del convenio regulador de la separación conforme a los artículos 90 y 103 de este Código.

A petición de uno de los cónyuges, cuando el otro esté incurso en causa legal de separación.•

Artículo 82.

Son causas de separación:

El abandono injustificado del hogar, la infidelidad conyugal, la conducta injuriosa o vejatoria y cualquier otra violación grave o reiterada de los deberes conyugales.

No podrá invocarse como causa la infidelidad conyugal si existe previa separación de hecho libremente consentida por ambos o impuesta por el que la alegue.

Cualquier violación grave o reiterada de los deberes respecto de los hijos comunes o respecto de los de cualquiera de los cónyuges que convivan en el hogar familiar.

La condena a pena de privación de libertad por tiempo superior a seis años.• El alcoholismo, la toxicomanía o las perturbaciones mentales, siempre que el interés del otro cónyuge o el de la familia exijan la suspensión de la convivencia.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante seis meses libremente consentido. Se entenderá libremente prestado este consentimiento cuando un cónyuge requiriese fehacientemente al otro para prestarlo, apercibiéndole expresamente de las consecuencias de ello, y éste no mostrase su voluntad en contra por cualquier medio admitido en derecho o pidiese la separación o las medidas provisionales a que se refiere el artículo 103, en el plazo de seis meses a partir del citado requerimiento.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante el plazo de tres años.• Cualquiera de las causas de divorcio en los términos previstos en los números 3, 4. y 5 del artículo 86.•

Artículo 83.

La sentencia de separación produce la suspensión de la vida común de los casados y cesa la posibilidad de vincular bienes del otro cónyuge en el ejercicio de la potestad doméstica.

Artículo 84.

La reconciliación pone término al procedimiento de separación y deja sin efecto ulterior lo en él resuelto, pero los cónyuges deberán poner aquélla en conocimiento del Juez que entienda o haya entendido en el litigio.

Ello no obstante, mediante resolución judicial, serán mantenidas o modificadas las medidas adoptadas en relación a los hijos, cuando exista causa que lo justifique.

CAPÍTULO VIII. DE LA DISOLUCIÓN DEL MATRIMONIO

18

Artículo 85.

El matrimonio se disuelve, sea cual fuere la forma y el tiempo de su celebración, por la muerte o la declaración de fallecimiento de uno de los cónyuges y por el divorcio.

Artículo 86.

Son causas de divorcio:

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante, al menos, un año ininterrumpido desde la interposición de la demanda de separación formulada por ambos cónyuges o por uno de ellos con el consentimiento del otro, cuando aquélla se hubiera interpuesto una vez transcurrido un año desde la celebración del matrimonio.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante, al menos. un año ininterrumpido desde la interposición de la demanda de separación personal, a petición del demandante o de quien hubiere formulado reconvención conforme a lo establecido en el artículo 82, una vez firme la resolución estimatoria de la demanda de separación o, si transcurrido el expresado plazo, no hubiera recaído resolución en la primera instancia.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante, al menos, dos años ininterrumpidos:• Desde que se consienta libremente por ambos cónyuges la separación de hecho o desde la firmeza de la resolución judicial. o desde la declaración de ausencia legal de alguno de los cónyuges, a petición de cualquiera de ellos.

Cuando quien pide el divorcio acredite que, al iniciarse la separación de hecho, el otro estaba incurso en causa de separación.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal durante el transcurso de, al menos, cinco años, a petición de cualquiera de los cónyuges.

La condena en sentencia firme por atentar contra la vida del cónyuge, sus ascendientes o descendientes.•

Cuando el divorcio sea solicitado por ambos o por uno con el consentimiento del otro, deberá necesariamente acompañarse a la demanda o al escrito inicial la propuesta convenio regulador de sus efectos, conforme a los artículos 90 y 103 de este Código.

Artículo 87.

El cese efectivo de la convivencia conyugal, a que se refieren los artículos 82 y 86 de este Código, es compatible con el mantenimiento o la reanudación temporal de la vida en el mismo domicilio, cuando ello obedezca en uno o en ambos cónyuges a la necesidad, al intento de reconciliación o al interés de los hijos y así sea acreditado por cualquier medio admitido en derecho en el proceso de separación o de divorcio correspondiente.

La interrupción de la convivencia no implicará el cese efectivo de la misma si obedece a motivos laborales, profesionales o a cualesquiera otros de naturaleza análoga.

Artículo 88.

La acción de divorcio se extingue por la muerte de cualquiera de los cónyuges y por su reconciliación, que deberá ser expresa cuando se produzca después de interpuesta la demanda.

La reconciliación posterior al divorcio no produce efectos legales, si bien los divorciados podrán contraer entre sí nuevo matrimonio.

Artículo 89.

19

La disolución del matrimonio por divorcio sólo podrá tener lugar por sentencia que así lo declare y producirá efectos a partir de su firmeza. No perjudicará a terceros de buena fe sino a partir de su inscripción en el Registro Civil.

CAPÍTULO IX. DE LOS EFECTOS COMUNES A LA NULIDAD, SEPARACIÓN Y DIVORCIO

Artículo 90.

El convenio regulador a que se refieren los artículos 81 y 86 de este Código deberá referirse, al menos, a los siguientes extremos:

La determinación de la persona a cuyo cuidado hayan de quedar los hijos sujetos a la patria potestad de ambos, el ejercicio de ésta y el régimen de visitas, comunicación y estancia de los hijos con el progenitor que no viva con ellos.

La atribución del uso de la vivienda y ajuar familiar.• La contribución a las cargas del matrimonio y alimentos, así como sus bases de actualización y garantías, en su caso.

La liquidación, cuando proceda, del régimen económico del matrimonio.• La pensión que, conforme al artículo 97, correspondiere satisfacer, en su caso, a uno de los cónyuges.•

Los acuerdos de los cónyuges, adoptados para regular las consecuencias de la nulidad, separación o divorcio serán aprobados por el Juez, salvo si son dañosos para los hijos o gravemente perjudiciales para uno de los cónyuges. La denegación habrá de hacerse mediante resolución motivada y, en este caso, los cónyuges deben someter a la consideración del Juez nueva propuesta para su aprobación, si procede. Desde la aprobación judicial, podrán hacerse efectivos por la vía de apremio.

Las medidas que el Juez adopte en defecto de acuerdo o las convenidas por los cónyuges, podrán ser modificadas judicialmente o por nuevo convenio cuando se alteren sustancialmente las circunstancias.

El Juez podrá establecer las garantías reales o personales que requiera el cumplimiento del convenio.

Artículo 91.

En las sentencias de nulidad, separación o divorcio, o en ejecución de las mismas, el Juez, en defecto de acuerdo de los cónyuges o en caso de no aprobación del mismo, determinará conforme a lo establecido en los artículos siguientes las medidas que hayan de sustituir a las va adoptadas con anterioridad en relación con los hijos, la vivienda familiar, las cargas del matrimonio, liquidación del régimen económico y las cautelas o garantías respectivas, estableciendo las que procedan si para alguno de estos conceptos no se hubiera adoptado ninguna. Estas medidas podrán ser modificadas cuando se alteren sustancialmente las circunstancias.

Artículo 92.

La separación, la nulidad y el divorcio no eximen a los padres de sus obligaciones para con los hijos.

Las medidas judiciales sobre el cuidado y educación de los hijos serán adoptadas en beneficio de ellos, tras oírles si tuvieran suficiente juicio y siempre a los mayores de doce años.

En la sentencia se acordará la privación de la patria potestad cuando en el proceso se revele causa para ello.

Podrá también acordarse, cuando así convenga a los hijos, que la patria potestad sea ejercida total o parcialmente por uno de los cónyuges o que el cuidado de ellos corresponda a uno u otro, procurando no

20

separar a los hermanos.

El Juez de oficio o a petición de los interesados, podrá recabar el dictamen de especialistas.

Artículo 93.

El Juez, en todo caso, determinará la contribución de cada progenitor para satisfacer los alimentos y adoptará las medidas convenientes para asegurar la efectividad y acomodación de las prestaciones a las circunstancias económicas y necesidades de los hijos en cada momento.

Si convivieran en el domicilio familiar hijos mayores de edad o emancipados que carecieran de ingresos propios, el Juez, en la misma resolución, fijará los alimentos que sean debidos conforme a los artículos 142 y siguientes de este Código.

Artículo 94.

El progenitor que no tenga consigo a los hijos menores incapacitados gozará del derecho de visitarlos, comunicar con ellos y tenerlos en su compañía. El Juez determinará el tiempo, modo y lugar del ejercicio de este derecho, que podrá limitar o suspender si se dieren graves circunstancias que así lo aconsejen o se incumplieren grave o reiteradamente los deberes impuestos por la resolución judicial.

Artículo 95.

La sentencia firme producirá, respecto de los bienes de matrimonio, la disolución del régimen económico matrimonial. Si la sentencia de nulidad declara la mala fe de uno solo de los cónyuges, el que hubiere obrado de buena fe podrá optar por aplicar en la liquidación del régimen económico matrimonial las disposiciones relativas al régimen de participación y el de mala fe no tendrá derecho a participar en las ganancias obtenidas por su consorte.

Artículo 96.

En defecto de acuerdo de los cónyuges aprobado por el Juez el uso de la vivienda familiar y de los objetos de uso ordinario en ella corresponden a los hijos y al cónyuge en cuya compañía queden.

Cuando algunos de los hijos queden en la compañía de uno y lo restantes en la del otro, el Juez resolverá lo procedente.

No habiendo hijos, podrá acordarse que el uso de tales bienes, por el tiempo que prudencialmente se fije, corresponda al cónyuge no titular, siempre que, atendidas las circunstancias, lo hicieran aconsejable y su interés fuera el más necesitado de protección.

Para disponer de la vivienda y bienes indicados cuyo uso corresponda al cónyuge no titular se requerirá el consentimiento de ambas partes o, en su caso, autorización judicial.

Artículo 97.

El cónyuge al que la separación o divorcio produzca desequilibrio económico en relación con la posición del otro, que implique un empeoramiento en su situación anterior en el matrimonio, tiene derecho a una pensión que se fijará en la resolución judicial, teniendo en cuenta, entre otras, las siguientes circunstancias:

Los acuerdos a que hubieren llegado los cónyuges.• La edad y estado de salud.•

21

La cualificación profesional y las probabilidades de acceso a un empleo.• La dedicación pasada y futura a la familia.• La colaboración con su trabajo en las actividades mercantiles, industriales o profesionales del otro cónyuge.• La duración del matrimonio y de la convivencia conyugal.• La pérdida eventual de un derecho de pensión.• El caudal y medios económicos y las necesidades de uno y otro cónyuge.•

En la resolución judicial se fijarán las bases para actualizar la pensión y las garantías para su efectividad.

Artículo 98.

El cónyuge de buena fe cuyo matrimonio haya sido declarado nulo tendrá derecho a una indemnización si ha existido convivencia conyugal, atendidas las circunstancias previstas en el artículo 97.

Artículo 99.

En cualquier momento podrá convenirse la sustitución de la pensión fijada judicialmente conforme al artículo 97 por la constitución de una renta vitalicia, el usufructo de determinados bienes o entrega de un capital en bienes o en dinero.

Artículo 100.

Fijada la pensión y las bases de su actualización en la sentencia de separación o de divorcio, sólo podrá ser modificada por alteraciones sustanciales en la fortuna de uno u otro cónyuges.

Artículo 101.

El derecho a la pensión se extingue por el cese de la causa que lo motivó, por contraer el acreedor nuevo matrimonio o por vivir maritalmente con otra persona.

El derecho a la pensión no se extingue por el solo hecho de la muerte del deudor. No obstante, los herederos de éste podrán solicitar del Juez la reducción o supresión de aquélla, si el caudal hereditario no pudiera satisfacer las necesidades de la deuda o afectara a sus derechos en la legítima.

CAPÍTULO X. DE LAS MEDIDAS PROVISIONALES POR DEMANDA DE NULIDAD, SEPARACIÓN Y DIVORCIO

Artículo 102.

Admitida la demanda de nulidad, separación o divorcio, se producen, por ministerio de la Ley, los efectos siguientes:

Los cónyuges podrán vivir separados y cesa la presunción convivencia conyugal.• Quedan revocados los consentimientos y poderes que cualquiera de los cónyuges hubiera otorgado al otro.•

Asimismo, salvo pacto en contrario, cesa la posibilidad de vincular los bienes privativos del otro cónyuge en el ejercicio de la potestad doméstica.

A estos efectos, cualquiera de las partes podrá instar la oportuna anotación en el Registro Civil, y en su caso, en los de la Propiedad y Mercantil.

Artículo 103.

22

Admitida la demanda, el Juez, a falta de acuerdo de cónyuges aprobado judicialmente, adoptará, con audiencia de estos las medidas siguientes:

Determinar, en interés de los hijos, con cuál de los cónyuges han de quedar los sujetos a la patria potestad de ambos y tomar las disposiciones apropiadas de acuerdo con lo establecido en este Código y en particular la forma en que el cónyuge apartado de los hijos podrá cumplir el deber de velar por éstos y el tiempo, modo y lugar en que podrá comunicar con ellos y tenerlos en su compañía. Excepcionalmente, los hijos podrán ser encomendados a otra persona y, de no haberla, a una institución idónea, confiriéndoles las funciones tutelares que ejercerán bajo la autoridad del Juez.

Determinar, teniendo en cuenta el interés familiar más necesitado de protección, cuál de los cónyuges ha de continuar en el uso de la vivienda familiar y asimismo, previo inventario, los bienes y objetos del ajuar que continuarán en ésta y los que se ha de llevar el otro cónyuge, así como también las medidas cautelares convenientes para conservar el derecho de cada uno.

Fijar la contribución de cada cónyuge a las cargas del matrimonio, incluidas, si procede, las litis expensas, establecer las bases para la actualización de cantidades y disponer las garantías, depósitos, retenciones u otras medidas cautelares convenientes, a fin de asegurar la efectividad de lo que por estos conceptos un cónyuge haya de abonar al otro.

Se considerará contribución a dichas cargas el trabajo que uno de los cónyuges dedicara a la atención de los hijos comunes sujetos a patria potestad.

Señalar, atendidas las circunstancias, los bienes gananciales que, previo inventario, se hayan de entregar a uno u otro cónyuge y las reglas que deban observar en la administración y disposición, así como en la obligatoria rendición de cuentas sobre los bienes comunes o parte de ellos que reciban y los que adquieran en lo sucesivo.

Determinar, en su caso, el régimen de administración y disposición de aquellos bienes privativos que por capitulaciones o escritura pública estuvieran especialmente afectados a las cargas del matrimonio.

Artículo 104.

El cónyuge que se proponga demandar la nulidad, separación o divorcio de su matrimonio puede solicitar los efectos y medidas a que se refieren los dos artículos anteriores.

Estos efectos y medidas sólo subsistirán si, dentro de los treinta días siguientes a contar de que fueron inicialmente adoptados, se presenta la demanda ante el Juez o Tribunal competente.

Artículo 105.

No incumple el deber de convivencia el cónyuge que sale del domicilio conyugal por una causa razonable y en el plazo de treinta días presenta la demanda o solicitud a que se refieren los artículos anteriores.

Artículo 106.

Los efectos y medidas previstos en este capítulo terminan, en todo caso, cuando sean sustituidos por los de la sentencia estimatoria o se ponga fin al procedimiento de otro modo. La revocación de consentimientos y poderes se entiende definitiva.

CAPÍTULO XI. NORMAS DE DERECHO INTERNACIONAL PRIVADO

Artículo 107.

23

La separación y el divorcio se regirán por la ley nacional común de los cónyuges en el momento de la presentación de la demanda; a falta de nacionalidad común, por la ley de la residencia habitual del matrimonio y, si los esposos tuvieran su residencia habitual en diferentes Estados, por la ley española, siempre que los Tribunales españoles resulten competentes.

Las sentencias de separación y divorcio dictadas por Tribunales extranjeros producirán efectos en el ordenamiento español desde la fecha de su reconocimiento conforme a lo dispuesto en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

TÍTULO V. DE LA PATERNIDAD Y FILIACIÓN

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA FILIACIÓN Y SUS EFECTOS

Artículo 108.

La filiación puede tener lugar por naturaleza y por adopción. La filiación por naturaleza puede ser matrimonial y no matrimonial. Es matrimonial cuando el padre y la madre están casados entre sí. La filiación matrimonial y la no matrimonial, así como la adoptiva, surten los mismos efectos, conforme a las disposiciones de este Código.

Artículo 109.

La filiación determina los apellidos con arreglo a lo dispuesto en la Ley. El hijo, al alcanzar la mayor edad, podrá solicitar que se altere el orden de sus apellidos.

Artículo 110.

El padre y la madre, aunque no ostenten la patria potestad están obligados a velar por los hijos menores y a prestarles alimentos.

Artículo 111.

Quedará excluido de la patria potestad y demás funciones tuitivas y no ostentará derechos por ministerio de la Ley respecto del hijo o de sus descendientes, o en sus herencias, el progenitor:

Cuando haya sido condenado a causa de las relaciones a que obedezca la generación, según sentencia penal firme.

Cuando la filiación haya sido judicialmente determinada contra su oposición.•

En ambos supuestos, el hijo no ostentará el apellido del progenitor en cuestión más que si lo necesita él mismo o su representante legal. Dejarán de producir efecto estas restricciones por determinación del representante legal del hijo aprobada judicialmente, o por voluntad del propio hijo una vez alcanzada la plena capacidad. Quedarán siempre a salvo las obligaciones de velar por los hijos y prestarles alimentos.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA DETERMINACIÓN Y PRUEBA DE LA FILIACIÓN

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 112.

24

La filiación produce sus efectos desde que tiene lugar. Su determinación legal tiene efectos retroactivos siempre que la retroactividad sea compatible con la naturaleza de aquéllos y la ley no dispusiere lo contrario.

En todo caso, conservarán su validez los actos otorgados, en nombre del hijo menor o incapaz, por su representante legal, antes de que la filiación hubiere sido determinada.

Artículo 113.

La filiación se acredita por la inscripción en el Registro Civil, por el documento o sentencia que la determina legalmente, por la presunción de paternidad matrimonial y, a falta de los medios anteriores, por la posesión de estado. Para la admisión de pruebas distintas a la inscripción se estará a lo dispuesto en la Ley de Registro Civil.

No será eficaz la determinación de una filiación en tanto resulte acreditada otra contradictoria.

Artículo 114.

Los asientos de filiación podrán ser rectificados conforme a la Ley de Registro Civil, sin perjuicio de lo especialmente dispuesto en el presente título sobre acciones de impugnación.

Podrán también rectificarse en cualquier momento los asientos que resulten contradictorios con los hechos que una sentencia penal declare probados.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA DETERMINACIÓN DE LA FILIACIÓN MATRIMONIAL.

Artículo 115.

La filiación matrimonial materna y paterna quedará determinada legalmente:

Por la inscripción del nacimiento junto con la del matrimonio de los padres.• Por sentencia firme.•

Artículo 116.

Se presumen hijos del marido los nacidos después de la celebración del matrimonio y antes de los trescientos días siguientes a su disolución o a la separación legal o de hecho de los cónyuges.

Artículo 117.

Nacido el hijo dentro de los ciento ochenta días siguientes a la celebración del matrimonio, podrá el marido destruir la presunción mediante declaración auténtica en contrario formalizada dentro de los seis meses siguientes al conocimiento del parto. Se exceptúan los casos en que hubiere reconocido la paternidad expresa o tácitamente o hubiese conocido el embarazo de la mujer con anterioridad a la celebración del matrimonio, salvo que, en este último supuesto, la declaración auténtica se hubiera formalizado, con el consentimiento de ambos, antes del matrimonio o después del mismo, dentro de los seis meses siguientes al nacimiento del hijo.

Artículo 118.

Aun faltando la presunción de paternidad del marido por causa de la separación legal o de hecho de los cónyuges, podrá inscribirse la filiación como matrimonial si concurre el consentimiento de ambos.

Artículo 119.

25

La filiación adquiere el carácter de matrimonial desde la fecha del matrimonio de los progenitores cuando éste tenga lugar con posterioridad al nacimiento del hijo siempre que el hecho de la filiación quede determinado legalmente conforme a lo dispuesto en la sección siguiente.

Lo establecido en el párrafo anterior aprovechará, en su caso. a los descendientes del hijo fallecido.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA DETERMINACIÓN DE LA FILIACIÓN NO MATRIMONIAL

Artículo 120.

La filiación no matrimonial quedará determinada legalmente:

Por el reconocimiento ante el encargado del Registro Civil, en testamento o en otro documento público.• Por resolución recaída en expediente tramitado con arreglo a la legislación del Registro Civil.• Por sentencia firme.• Respecto de la madre, cuando se haga constar la filiación materna en la inscripción de nacimiento practicada dentro del plazo, de acuerdo con lo dispuesto en la Ley de Registro Civil.

Artículo 121.

El reconocimiento otorgado por los incapaces o por quienes no puedan contraer matrimonio por razón de edad necesitará para su validez aprobación judicial con audiencia del Ministerio Fiscal.

Artículo 122.

Cuando un progenitor hiciere el reconocimiento separadamente, no podrá manifestar en él la identidad del otro a no ser que esté ya determinada legalmente.

Artículo 123.

El reconocimiento de un hijo mayor de edad no producirá efectos sin su consentimiento expreso o tácito.

Artículo 124.

La eficacia del reconocimiento del menor o incapaz requerirá el consentimiento expreso de su representante legal o la aprobación judicial con audiencia del Ministerio Fiscal y del progenitor legalmente conocido.

No será necesario el consentimiento o la aprobación si el reconocimiento se hubiere efectuado en testamento o dentro del plazo establecido para practicar la inscripción del nacimiento. La inscripción de paternidad así practicada podrá suspenderse a simple petición de la madre durante el año siguiente al nacimiento. Si el padre solicitara la confirmación de la inscripción, será necesaria la aprobación judicial con audiencia del Ministerio Fiscal.

Artículo 125.

Cuando los progenitores del menor o incapaz fueren hermanos o consanguíneos en línea recta, legalmente determinada la filiación respecto de uno, sólo podrá quedar determinada legalmente respecto del otro, previa autorización judicial que se otorgará, con audiencia del Ministerio Fiscal, cuando convenga al menor o incapaz. Alcanzada por éste la plena capacidad, podrá, mediante declaración auténtica, invalidar esta última determinación si no la hubiere consentido.

Artículo 126.

26

El reconocimiento del ya fallecido sólo surtirá efecto si lo consintieren sus descendientes por sí o por sus representantes legales.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LAS ACCIONES DE FILIACIÓN

SECCIÓN PRIMERA.

DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 127.

En los juicios sobre filiación será admisible la investigación de la paternidad y de la maternidad mediante toda clase de pruebas, incluidas las biológicas.

El Juez no admitirá la demanda si con ella no se presenta un principio de prueba de los hechos en que se funde.

Artículo 128.

Mientras dure el procedimiento por el que se impugne la filiación, el Juez adoptará las medidas de protección oportunas sobre la persona y bienes del sometido a la potestad del que aparece como progenitor.

Reclamada judicialmente la filiación, el Juez podrá acordar alimentos provisionales a cargo del demandado y, en su caso, adoptar las medidas de protección a que se refiere el párrafo anterior.

Artículo 129.

Las acciones que correspondan al hijo menor de edad o incapaz podrán ser ejercitadas indistintamente por su representante legal o por el Ministerio Fiscal.

Artículo 130.

A la muerte del actor, sus herederos podrán continuar las acciones ya entabladas.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA RECLAMACIÓN

Artículo 131.

Cualquier persona con interés legítimo tiene acción para que se declare la filiación manifestada por la constante posesión de estado.

Se exceptúa el supuesto en que la filiación que se reclame contradiga otra legalmente determinada.

Artículo 132.

A falta de la correspondiente posesión de estado, la acción de reclamación de la filiación matrimonial, que es imprescriptible, corresponde al padre, a la madre o al hijo.

Si el hijo falleciere antes de transcurrir cuatro años desde que alcanzase plena capacidad, o durante el año siguiente al descubrimiento de las pruebas en que se haya de fundar la demanda, su acción corresponde a sus herederos por el tiempo que faltare para completar dichos plazos.

27

Artículo 133.

La acción de reclamación de filiación no matrimonial, cuando falte la respectiva posesión de estado, corresponde al hijo durante toda su vida.

Si el hijo falleciere antes de transcurrir cuatro años desde que alcanzare plena capacidad, o durante el año siguiente al descubrimiento de las pruebas en que se funde la demanda, su acción corresponde a sus herederos por el tiempo que faltare para completar dichos plazos.

Artículo 134.

El ejercicio de la acción de reclamación, conforme a los artículos anteriores, por el hijo o el progenitor, permitirá en todo caso la impugnación de la filiación contradictoria.

No podrá reclamarse una filiación que contradiga otra determinada en virtud de sentencia.

Artículo 135.

Aunque no haya prueba directa de la generación o del parto, podrá declararse la filiación que resulte del reconocimiento expreso o tácito, de la posesión de estado, de la convivencia con la madre en la época de la concepción, o de otros hechos de los que se infiera la filiación, de modo análogo.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA IMPUGNACIÓN

Artículo 136.

El marido podrá ejercitar la acción de impugnación de la paternidad en el plazo de un año contado desde la inscripción de la filiación en el Registro Civil. Sin embargo, el plazo no correrá mientras el marido ignore el nacimiento. Si el marido falleciere antes de transcurrir el plazo señalado en párrafo anterior, la acción corresponde a cada heredero por el tiempo que faltare para completar dicho plazo.

Fallecido el marido sin conocer el nacimiento, el año se contará desde que lo conozca el heredero.

Artículo 137.

La paternidad podrá ser impugnada por el hijo durante el año siguiente a la inscripción de la filiación. Si fuere menor o incapaz, el plazo contará desde que alcance la mayoría de edad o la plena capacidad legal.

El ejercicio de la acción, en interés del hijo que sea menor o incapacitado, corresponde, asimismo, durante el año siguiente a la inscripción de la filiación, a la madre que ostente la patria potestad o al Ministerio Fiscal.

Si falta en las relaciones familiares la posesión de estado de filiación matrimonial, la demanda podrá ser interpuesta en cualquier tiempo por el hijo o sus herederos.

Artículo 138.

Los reconocimientos que determinen conforme a la Ley una filiación matrimonial podrán ser impugnados por vicio de consentimiento conforme a lo dispuesto en el artículo 141. La impugnación de la paternidad por otras causas se atendrá a las normas contenidas en esta sección.

Artículo 139.

28

La mujer podrá ejercitar la acción de impugnación de su maternidad justificando la suposición del parto o no ser cierta la identidad del hijo.

Artículo 140.

Cuando falte en las relaciones familiares la posesión de estado, la filiación paterna o materna no matrimonial podrá ser impugnada por aquellos a quienes perjudique.

Cuando exista posesión de estado, la acción de impugnación corresponderá a quien aparece como hijo o progenitor y a quienes por la filiación puedan resultar afectados en su calidad de herederos forzosos. La acción caducará pasados cuatro años desde que el hijo, una vez inscrita la filiación, goce de la posesión de estado correspondiente.

Los hijos tendrán en todo caso acción durante un año después de haber llegado a la plena capacidad.

Artículo 141.

La acción de impugnación del reconocimiento realizado mediante error, violencia o intimidación corresponde a quien lo hubiere otorgado. La acción caducará al año del reconocimiento o desde que cesó el vicio de consentimiento, y podrá ser ejercitada o continuada por los herederos de aquél, si hubiere fallecido antes de transcurrir el año.

TÍTULO VI. DE LOS ALIMENTOS ENTRE PARIENTES

Artículo 142.

Se entiende por alimentos todo lo que es indispensable para el sustento, habitación, vestido y asistencia médica.

Los alimentos comprenden también la educación e instrucción del alimentista mientras sea menor de edad y aun después cuando no haya terminado su formación por causa que no le sea imputable.

Entre los alimentos se incluirán los gastos de embarazo y parto. en cuanto no estén cubiertos de otro modo.

Artículo 143.

Están obligados recíprocamente a darse alimentos en toda la extensión que señala el artículo precedente:

Los cónyuges.• Los ascendientes y descendientes.•

Los hermanos sólo se deben los auxilios necesarios para la vida cuando los necesiten por cualquier causa que no sea imputable al alimentista, y se extenderán en su caso a los que precisen para su educación.

Artículo 144.

La reclamación de alimentos cuando proceda y sean dos o más los obligados a prestarlos, se hará por el orden siguiente:

Al cónyuge.• A los descendientes de grado más próximo.•

29

A los ascendientes, también de grado más próximo.• A los hermanos, pero estando obligados en ultimo lugar los que sólo sean uterinos o consanguíneos.•

Entre los descendientes y ascendientes se regulará la gradación por el orden en que sean llamados a la sucesión legítima de la persona que tenga derecho a los alimentos.

Artículo 145.

Cuando recaiga sobre dos o más personas la obligación dar alimentos, se repartirá entre ellas el pago de la pensión en cantidad proporcional a su caudal respectivo.

Sin embargo, en caso de urgente necesidad y por circunstancias especiales, podrá el Juez obligar a una sola de ellas a que los preste provisionalmente, sin perjuicio de su derecho a reclamar de los demás obligados la parte que les corresponda.

Cuando dos o más alimentistas reclamaren a la vez alimentos de una misma persona obligada legalmente a darlos, y ésta no tuviere fortuna bastante para atender a todos, se guardará el orden establecido en el artículo anterior, a no ser que los alimentistas concurrentes fuesen el cónyuge y un hijo sujeto a la patria potestad, en cuyo caso éste será preferido a aquél.

Artículo 146.

La cuantía de los alimentos será proporcionada al caudal o medios de quien los da y a las necesidades de quien los recibe.

Artículo 147.

Los alimentos, en los casos a que se refiere el anterior, se reducirán o aumentarán proporcionalmente según el aumento o disminución que sufran las necesidades del alimentista y la fortuna del que hubiere de satisfacerlos.

Artículo 148.

La obligación de dar alimentos será exigible desde que los necesitare, para subsistir, la persona que tenga derecho a percibirlos pero no se abonarán sino desde la fecha en que se interponga la demanda.

Se verificará el pago por meses anticipados, y, cuando fallezca el alimentista, sus herederos no estarán obligados a devolver lo que éste hubiese recibido anticipadamente.

El Juez, a petición del alimentista o del Ministerio Fiscal, ordenará con urgencia las medidas cautelares oportunas para asegurar los anticipos que haga una entidad pública u otra persona y proveer a las futuras necesidades.

Artículo 149.

El obligado a prestar alimentos podrá, a su elección, satisfacerlos, o pagando la pensión que se fije, o recibiendo y manteniendo en su propia casa al que tiene derecho a ellos.

Esta elección no será posible en cuanto contradiga la situación de convivencia determinada para el alimentista por las normas aplicables o por resolución judicial. También podrá ser rechazada cuando concurra justa causa o perjudique el interés del alimentista menor de edad.

Artículo 150.

30

La obligación de suministrar alimentos cesa con la muerte del obligado, aunque los prestase en cumplimiento de una sentencia firme.

Artículo 151.

No es renunciable ni transmisible a un tercero el derecho a los alimentos. Tampoco pueden compensarse con lo que el alimentista deba al que ha de prestarlos.

Pero podrán compensarse y renunciarse las pensiones alimenticias atrasadas, y transmitirse a título oneroso o gratuito el derecho a demandarlas.

Artículo 152.

Cesará también la obligación de dar alimentos:

Por muerte del alimentista.• Cuando la fortuna del obligado a darlos se hubiere reducido hasta el punto de no poder satisfacerlos sin desatender sus propias necesidades y las de su familia.

Cuando el alimentista pueda ejercer un oficio, profesión o industria, o haya adquirido un destino o mejorado de fortuna, de suerte que no le sea necesaria la pensión alimenticia para su subsistencia.

Cuando el alimentista, sea o no heredero forzoso, hubiere cometido alguna falta de las que dan lugar a la desheredación.

Cuando el alimentista sea descendiente del obligado a dar alimentos y la necesidad de aquél provenga de mala conducta o de falta de aplicación al trabajo, mientras subsista esta causa.

Artículo 153.

Las disposiciones que preceden son aplicables a los demás casos en que por este Código, por testamento o por pacto se tenga derecho a alimentos, salvo lo pactado, lo ordenado por el testador o lo dispuesto por la ley para el caso especial de que se trate.

TÍTULO VII. DE LAS RELACIONES PATERNO−FILIALES

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 154.

Los hijos no emancipados están bajo la potestad del padre y la madre.

Artículo 155.

La patria potestad se ejercerá siempre en beneficio de los hijos de acuerdo con su personalidad, y comprende los siguientes deberes y facultades:

Velar por ellos, tenerlos en su compañía, alimentarlos, educarlos y procurarles una formación integral.• Representarlos y administrar sus bienes.•

Si los hijos tuvieren suficiente juicio deberán ser oídos siempre antes de adoptar decisiones que les afecten.

Los padres podrán en el ejercicio de su potestad recabar el auxilio de la autoridad. Podrán también corregir

31

razonable y moderadamente a los hijos.

Artículo 155.

Los hijos deben:

Obedecer a sus padres mientras permanezcan bajo su potestad y respetarles siempre.• Contribuir equitativamente, según sus posibilidades, al levantamiento de las cargas de la familia mientras convivan con ella.

Artículo 156.

La patria potestad se ejercerá conjuntamente por ambos progenitores o por uno solo con el consentimiento expreso o tácito del otro. Serán válidos los actos que realice uno de ellos conforme al uso social y a las circunstancias, o en situaciones de urgente necesidad.

En caso de desacuerdo, cualquiera de los dos podrá acudir al Juez quien, después de oír a ambos y al hijo si tuviera suficiente juicio y, en todo caso, si fuera mayor de doce años, atribuirá sin ulterior recurso la facultad de decidir al padre o a la madre. Si los desacuerdos fueran reiterados, o concurriera cualquier otra causa que entorpezca gravemente el ejercicio de la patria potestad, podrá atribuirla total o parcialmente a uno de los padres o distribuir entre ellos sus funciones. Esta medida tendrá vigencia durante el plazo que se fije, que no podrá nunca exceder de dos años.

En los supuestos de los párrafos anteriores, respecto de terceros de buena fe, se presumirá que cada uno de los progenitores actúa en el ejercicio ordinario de la patria potestad con el consentimiento del otro.

En defecto o por ausencia, incapacidad o imposibilidad de uno los padres, la patria potestad será ejercida exclusivamente por el otro.

Si los padres viven separados la patria potestad se ejercerá por aquel con quien el hijo conviva. Sin embargo el juez, a solicitud fundada del otro progenitor, podrá, en interés del hijo, atribuir al solicitante la patria potestad para que la ejerza conjuntamente con el otro progenitor, o distribuir entre el padre y la madre las funciones inherentes a su ejercicio.

Artículo 157.

El menor no emancipado ejercerá la patria potestad sobre sus hijos con la asistencia de sus padres, y a falta de ambos, de su tutor, en casos de desacuerdo o imposibilidad, con la del Juez.

Artículo 158.

El Juez, de oficio o a instancia del propio hijo, de cualquier pariente o del Ministerio Fiscal, dictará:

Las medidas convenientes para asegurar la prestación de alimentos y proveer a las futuras necesidades del hijo, en caso de incumplimiento de este deber, por sus padres.

Las disposiciones apropiadas a fin de evitar a los hijos perturbaciones dañosas en los casos de cambio de titular de la potestad de guarda.

En general, las demás disposiciones que considere oportunas, a fin de apartar al menor de un peligro o de evitarle perjuicios.

Todas estas medidas podrán adoptarse dentro de cualquier proceso civil o penal o bien en un procedimiento de jurisdicción voluntaria.

32

Artículo 159.

Si los padres viven separados y no decidieren de común acuerdo, el Juez decidirá, siempre en beneficio de los hijos, al cuidado de qué progenitor quedarán los hijos menores de edad. El Juez oirá, antes de tomar esta medida, a los hijos que tuvieran suficiente juicio y, en todo caso, a los que fueran mayores de doce años.

Artículo 160.

El padre y la madre, aunque no ejerzan la patria potestad, tienen el derecho de relacionarse con sus hijos menores, excepto con los adoptados por otro o conforme a lo dispuesto en resolución judicial.

No podrán impedirse sin justa causa las relaciones persona les entre el hijo y otros parientes y allegados.

En caso de oposición, el Juez, a petición del menor o del pariente o allegado, resolverá atendidas las circunstancias.

Artículo 161.

Tratándose del menor acogido, el derecho que a sus padres corresponde para visitarle y relacionarse con él podrá ser regulado o suspendido por el Juez, atendidas las circunstancias y el interés del menor.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA REPRESENTACIÓN LEGAL DE LOS HIJOS

Artículo 162.

Los padres que ostenten la patria potestad tienen la representación legal de sus hijos menores no emancipados.

Se exceptúan:

Los actos relativos a derechos de la personalidad u otros que el hijo, de acuerdo con las Leyes y con sus condiciones de madurez, pueda realizar por sí mismo.

Aquellos en que exista conflicto de intereses entre los padres y el hijo.• Los relativos a bienes que están excluidos de la administración de los padres.•

Para celebrar contratos que obliguen al hijo a realizar prestaciones personales se requiere el previo consentimiento de éste si tuviere suficiente juicio sin perjuicio de lo establecido en el artículo 158.

Artículo 163.

Siempre que en algún asunto el padre y la madre tengan un interés opuesto al de sus hijos no emancipados, se nombrará a éstos un defensor que los represente en juicio y fuera de él. Se procederá también a este nombramiento cuando los padres tengan un interés opuesto al del hijo menor emancipado cuya capacidad deban completar.

Si el conflicto de intereses existiera sólo con uno de los progenitores corresponde al otro por Ley y sin necesidad de especial nombramiento representar al menor o completar su capacidad.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS BIENES DE LOS HIJOS Y DE SU ADMINISTRACIÓN

Artículo 164.

33

Los padres administrarán los bienes de los hijos con la misma diligencia que los suyos propios, cumpliendo las obligaciones generales de todo administrador y las especiales establecidas en la Ley Hipotecaria.

Se exceptúan de la administración paterna:

Los bienes adquiridos por título gratuito cuando el disponente lo hubiere ordenado de manera expresa. Se cumplirá estrictamente la voluntad de éste sobre la administración de estos bienes y destino de sus frutos.

Los adquiridos por sucesión en que el padre, la madre o ambos hubieran sido justamente desheredados o no hubieran podido heredar por causa de indignidad, que serán administrados por la persona designada por el causante o, en su defecto y sucesivamente, por el otro progenitor o por un Administrador judicial especialmente nombrado.

Los que el hijo mayor de dieciséis años hubiera adquirido con su trabajo o industria. Los actos de administración ordinaria serán realizados por el hijo, que necesitará el consentimiento de los padres para los que excedan de ella.

Artículo 165.

Pertenecen siempre al hijo no emancipado los frutos de sus bienes, así como todo lo que adquiera con su trabajo o industria.

No obstante los padres podrán destinar los del menor que viva con ambos o con uno solo de ellos, en la parte que le corresponda, al levantamiento de las cargas familiares, y no estarán obligados a rendir cuentas de lo que hubieren consumido en tales atenciones.

Con este fin se entregarán a los padres, en la medida adecuada, los frutos de los bienes que ellos no administren. Se exceptúan los frutos de los bienes a que se refieren los números 1.2 y 3 del artículo anterior y los de aquellos donados o dejados a los hijos, especialmente para su educación o carrera; pero si los padres carecieren de medios, podrán pedir al Juez que se les entregue la parte que en equidad proceda.

Artículo 166.

Los padres no podrán renunciar a los derechos de que lo hijos sean titulares ni enajenar o gravar sus bienes inmueble establecimientos mercantiles o industriales, objetos preciosos y valores mobiliarios, salvo el derecho de suscripción preferente de acciones sino por causas justificadas de utilidad o necesidad y previa la autorización del Juez del domicilio, con audiencia del Ministerio Fiscal.

Los padres deberán recabar autorización judicial para repudiar la herencia o legado deferidos al hijo. Si el Juez denegase la autorización, la herencia sólo podrá ser aceptada a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 167.

Cuando la administración de los padres ponga en peligro el patrimonio del hijo, el Juez, a petición del propio hijo, del Ministerio Fiscal o de cualquier pariente del menor, podrá adoptar las providencias que estime necesarias para la seguridad y recaudo de los bienes, exigir caución o fianza para la continuación en la administración, o incluso nombrar un administrador.

Artículo 168.

Al término de la patria potestad podrán los hijos exigir a los padres la rendición de cuentas de la administración que ejercieron sobre sus bienes hasta entonces. La acción para exigir el cumplimiento de esta obligación prescribirá a los tres años.

34

En caso de pérdida o deterioro de los bienes por dolo o culpa grave, responderán los padres de los daños y perjuicios sufridos.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA EXTINCIÓN DE LA PATRIA POTESTAD

Artículo 169.

La patria potestad se acaba:

Por la muerte o la declaración de fallecimiento de los padres o del hijo.• Por la emancipación.• Por la adopción del hijo.•

Artículo 170.

El padre o la madre podrán ser privados total o parcialmente de su potestad por sentencia fundada en el incumplimiento de los deberes inherentes a la misma o dictada en causa criminal o matrimonial.

Los Tribunales podrán, en beneficio o interés del hijo, acordar la recuperación de la patria potestad cuando hubiere cesado la causa que motivó la privación.

Artículo 171.

La patria potestad sobre los hijos que hubieran sido incapacitados quedará prorrogada, por ministerio de la ley, al llegar aquéllos a la mayor edad. Si el hijo mayor de edad soltero que viviere en compañía de sus padres o de cualquiera de ellos fuere incapacitado, se rehabilitará la patria potestad que será ejercida por quien correspondiere si el hijo fuera menor de edad. La patria potestad prorrogada en cualquiera de estas dos formas se ejercerá con sujeción a lo especialmente dispuesto en la resolución de incapacitación y, subsidiariamente, en las reglas del presente título.

La patria potestad prorrogada terminará:

Por la muerte o declaración de fallecimiento de ambos padres o del hijo.• Por la adopción del hijo.• Por haberse declarado la cesación de la incapacidad.• Por haber contraído matrimonio el incapacitado.•

Si al cesar la patria potestad prorrogada subsistiere el estado de incapacitación, se constituirá la tutela o curatela, según proceda.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LA ADOPCIÓN Y OTRAS FORMAS DE PROTECCIÓN DE MENORES

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA GUARDA Y ACOGIMIENTO DE MENORES

Artículo 172.

1. La entidad pública a la que, en el respectivo territorio, esté encomendada la protección de los menores, cuando constate que un menor se encuentra en situación de desamparo, tiene por ministerio de la Ley la tutela del mismo y deberá adoptar las medidas de protección necesarias para su guarda, poniéndolo en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal, y notificando en legal forma a los padres, tutores o guardadores, en un plazo de cuarenta

35

y ocho horas. Siempre que sea posible, en el momento de la notificación se les informará de forma presencial y de modo claro y comprensible de las causas que dieron lugar a la intervención de la Administración y de los posibles efectos de la decisión adoptada.

Se considera como situación de desamparo la que se produce de hecho a causa del incumplimiento, o del imposible o inadecuado ejercicio de los deberes de protección establecidos por las leyes para la guarda de los menores, cuando éstos queden privados de la necesaria asistencia moral o material.

La asunción de la tutela atribuida a la entidad pública lleva consigo la suspensión de la patria potestad o de la tutela ordinaria. No obstante, serán válidos los actos de contenido patrimonial que realicen los padres o tutores en representación del menor y que sean beneficiosos para él.

2. Cuando los padres o tutores, por circunstancias graves, no puedan cuidar al menor, podrán solicitar de la entidad pública competente que ésta asuma su guarda durante el tiempo necesario.

La entrega de la guarda se hará constar por escrito dejando constancia de que los padres o tutores han sido informados de las responsabilidades que siguen manteniendo respecto del hijo, así como de la forma en que dicha guarda va a ejercerse por la Administración.

Cualquier variación posterior de la forma de ejercicio será fundamentada y comunicada a aquéllos y al Ministerio Fiscal.

Asimismo, se asumirá la guarda por la entidad pública cuando así lo acuerde el Juez en los casos en que legalmente proceda.

3. La guarda asumida a solicitud de los padres o tutores o como función de la tutela por ministerio de la Ley, se realizará mediante el acogimiento familiar o el acogimiento residencial. El acogimiento familiar se ejercerá por la persona o personas que determine la entidad pública. El acogimiento residencial se ejercerá por el Director del centro donde sea acogido el menor.

4. Se buscará siempre el interés del menor y se procurará, cuando no sea contrario a ese interés, su reinserción en la propia familia y que la guarda de los hermanos se confíe a una misma institución o persona.

5. Si surgieren problemas graves de convivencia entre el menor y la persona o personas a quien hubiere sido confiado en guarda, aquél o persona interesada podrá solicitar la remoción de ésta.

6. Las resoluciones que aprecien el desamparo y declaren la asunción de la tutela por ministerio de la Ley serán recurribles ante la jurisdicción civil sin necesidad de reclamación administrativa previa.

Artículo 173.

1. El acogimiento familiar produce la plena participación del menor en la vida de familia e impone a quien lo recibe las obligaciones de velar por él, tenerlo en su compañía, alimentarlo, educarlo y procurarle una formación integral.

Este acogimiento se podrá ejercer por la persona o personas que sustituyan al núcleo familiar del menor o por responsable del hogar funcional.

2. El acogimiento se formalizará por escrito, con el consentimiento de la entidad pública, tenga o no la tutela o la guarda, de las personas que reciban al menor y de éste si tuviera doce años cumplidos. Cuando fueran conocidos los padres que no estuvieran privados de la patria potestad, o el tutor, será necesario también que presten o hayan prestado su consentimiento, salvo que se trate de un acogimiento familiar provisional a que

36

hace referencia el apartado 3 de este artículo.

El documento de formalización del acogimiento familiar, a que se refiere el párrafo anterior, incluirá los siguientes extremos:

Los consentimientos necesarios.• Modalidad del acogimiento y duración prevista para el mismo.• Los derechos y deberes de cada una de las partes, y en particular:• La periodicidad de las visitas por parte de la familia del menor acogido.• El sistema de cobertura por parte de la entidad pública o de otros responsables civiles de los daños que sufra el menor o de los que pueda causar a terceros.

La asunción de los gastos de manutención, educación y atención sanitaria.• El contenido del seguimiento que, en función de la finalidad del acogimiento, vaya a realizar la entidad pública, y el compromiso de colaboración de la familia acogedora al mismo.

La compensación económica que, en su caso, vayan a recibir los acogedores.• Si los acogedores actúan con carácter profesionalizado o si el acogimiento se realiza en un hogar funcional, se señalará expresamente.

Informe de los servicios de atención a menores.•

Dicho documento se remitirá al Ministerio Fiscal. 3. Si los padres o el tutor no consienten o se oponen al mismo, el acogimiento sólo podrá ser acordado por el Juez, en interés del menor, conforme a los trámites de la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil. La propuesta de la entidad pública contendrá los mismos extremos referidos en el número anterior. No obstante, la entidad pública podrá acordar en interés del menor, un acogimiento familiar provisional, que subsistirá hasta tanto se produzca resolución judicial.

La entidad pública, una vez realizadas las diligencias oportunas, y concluido el expediente, deberá presentar la propuesta al Juez de manera inmediata y, en todo caso, en el plazo máximo de quince días.

4. El acogimiento del menor cesará:

Por decisión judicial.• Por decisión de las personas que lo tienen acogido, previa comunicación de éstas a la entidad pública.• A petición del tutor o de los padres que tengan la patria potestad y reclamen su compañía.• Por decisión de la entidad pública que tenga la tutela o guarda del menor, cuando lo considere necesario para salvaguardar el interés de éste oídos los acogedores.

Será precisa resolución judicial de cesación cuando el acogimiento haya sido dispuesto por el Juez.

5. Todas las actuaciones de formalización y cesación del acogimiento se practicarán con la obligada reserva.

Artículo 173 bis.

El acogimiento familiar, podrá adoptar las siguientes modalidades atendiendo a su finalidad:

Acogimiento familiar simple, que tendrá carácter transitorio, bien porque de la situación del menor se prevea la reinserción de éste en su propia familia bien en tanto se adopte una medida de protección que revista un carácter más estable.

Acogimiento familiar permanente, cuando la edad u otras circunstancias del menor y su familia así lo aconsejen y así lo informen los servicios de atención al menor. En tal supuesto, la entidad pública podrá solicitar del Juez que atribuya a los acogedores aquellas facultades de la tutela que faciliten el desempeño de sus responsabilidades, atendiendo en todo caso al interés superior del menor.

Acogimiento familiar preadoptivo, que se formalizará por la entidad pública cuando ésta eleve la propuesta•

37

de adopción del menor, informada por los servicios de atención al menor, ante la autoridad judicial, siempre que los acogedores reúnan los requisitos necesarios para adoptar, hayan sido seleccionados y hayan prestado ante la entidad pública su consentimiento a la adopción, y se encuentre el menor en situación jurídica adecuada para su adopción.

La entidad pública podrá formalizar, asimismo, un acogimiento familiar preadoptivo cuando considere, con anterioridad a la presentación de la propuesta de adopción, que fuera necesario establecer un período de adaptación del menor a la familia. Este período será lo más breve posible y, en todo caso, no podrá exceder del plazo de un año.

Artículo 174.

1. Incumbe al Fiscal la superior vigilancia de la tutela, acogimiento o guarda de los menores a que se refiere esta Sección.

2. A tal fin, la entidad pública le dará noticia inmediata de los nuevos ingresos de menores y le remitirá copia de las resoluciones administrativas y de los escritos de formalización relativos a la constitución, variación y cesación de las tutelas, guardas y acogimientos. Igualmente le dará cuenta de cualquier novedad de interés en las circunstancias del menor.

El Fiscal habrá de comprobar, al menos semestralmente, la situación del menor, y promoverá ante el Juez las medidas de protección que estime necesarias.

3. La vigilancia del Ministerio Fiscal no eximirá a la Entidad pública de su responsabilidad para con el menor y de su obligación de poner en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal las anomalías que observe.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA ADOPCIÓN

Artículo 175.

1. La adopción requiere que el adoptante sea mayor de veinticinco años. En la adopción por ambos cónyuges basta que uno de ellos haya alcanzado dicha edad. En todo caso, el adoptante habrá de tener, por lo menos, catorce años más que el adoptado.

2. Unicamente podrán ser adoptados los menores no emancipa dos. Por excepción, será posible la adopción de un mayor de edad o de un menor emancipado cuando, inmediatamente antes de la emancipación, hubiere existido una situación no interrumpida de acogimiento o convivencia, iniciada antes de que el adoptando hubiere cumplido los catorce años.

3. No puede adoptarse:

A un descendiente.• A un pariente en segundo grado de la línea colateral por consanguinidad o afinidad.• A un pupilo por su tutor hasta que haya sido aprobada definitivamente la cuenta general justificada de la tutela.

4. Fuera de la adopción por ambos cónyuges, nadie puede ser adoptado por más de una persona. En caso de muerte del adoptante, o cuando el adoptante sufra la exclusión prevista en el artículo 179, es posible una nueva adopción del adoptado.

Artículo 176.

38

1. La adopción se constituye por resolución judicial, que tendrá en cuenta siempre el interés del adoptando y la idoneidad del adoptante o adoptantes para el ejercicio de la patria potestad.

2. Para iniciar el expediente de adopción es necesaria la propuesta previa de la entidad pública a favor del adoptante o adoptantes que dicha entidad pública haya declarado idóneos para el ejercicio de la patria potestad. La declaración de idoneidad podrá ser previa a la propuesta.

No obstante, no se requiere propuesta cuando en el adoptando concurra alguna de las circunstancias siguientes:

Ser huérfano y pariente del adoptante en tercer grado por consanguinidad o afinidad.• Ser hijo del consorte del adoptante.• Llevar más de un año acogido legalmente bajo la medida de un acogimiento preadoptivo o haber estado bajo su tutela por el mismo tiempo.

Ser mayor de edad o menor emancipado.•

3. En los tres primeros supuestos del apartado anterior podrá constituirse la adopción, aunque el adoptante hubiere fallecido, si éste hubiese prestado ya ante el Juez su consentimiento. Los efectos de la resolución judicial en este caso se retrotraerán a la fecha de prestación de tal consentimiento.

Artículo 177.

1. Habrán de consentir la adopción, en presencia del Juez, el adoptante o adoptantes y el adoptando mayor de doce años.

2. Deberán asentir a la adopción en la forma establecida en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil:

El cónyuge del adoptante, salvo que medie separación legal por sentencia firme o separación de hecho por mutuo acuerdo que conste fehacientemente.

Los padres del adoptando que no se hallare emancipado, a menos que estuvieran privados de la patria potestad por sentencia firme o incursos en causa legal para tal privación. Esta situación sólo podrá apreciarse en procedimiento judicial contradictorio, el cual podrá tramitarse como dispone el artículo 1.827 de la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

No será necesario el asentimiento cuando los que deban prestarlo se encuentren imposibilitados para ello, imposibilidad que se apreciará motivadamente en la resolución judicial que constituya la adopción.

El asentimiento de la madre no podrá prestarse hasta que hayan transcurrido treinta días desde el parto.

3. Deberán ser simplemente oídos por el Juez:

Los padres que no hayan sido privados de la patria potestad, cuando su asentimiento no sea necesario para la adopción.

El tutor y, en su caso, el guardador o guardadores.• El adoptando menor de doce años, si tuviere suficiente juicio.• La entidad pública, a fin de apreciar la idoneidad del adoptante, cuando el adoptando lleve más de un año acogido legalmente por aquél.

Artículo 178.

1. La adopción produce la extinción de los vínculos jurídicos entre el adoptado y su familia anterior.

39

2. Por excepción subsistirán los vínculos jurídicos con la familia paterna o materna, según el caso:

Cuando el adoptado sea hijo del cónyuge del adoptante, aunque el consorte hubiere fallecido.• Cuando sólo uno de los progenitores haya sido legalmente determinado y el adoptante sea persona de distinto sexo al de dicho progenitor, siempre que tal efecto hubiere sido solicitado por el adoptante, el adoptado mayor de doce años y el padre o madre cuyo vínculo haya de persistir.

3. Lo establecido en los apartados anteriores se entiende sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto sobre impedimentos matrimoniales.

Artículo 179.

1. El Juez, a petición del Ministerio Fiscal, del adoptado o de su representante legal acordará que el adoptante que hubiere incurrido en causa de privación de la patria potestad quede excluido de las funciones tuitivas y de los derechos que por ley le correspondan respecto del adoptado o sus descendientes, o en sus herencias.

2. Una vez alcanzada la plena capacidad, la exclusión sólo podrá ser pedida por el adoptado dentro de los dos años siguientes.

3. Dejarán de producir efecto estas restricciones por determinación del propio hijo una vez alcanzada la plena capacidad.

Artículo 180.

1. La adopción es irrevocable.

2. El Juez acordará la extinción de la adopción a petición del padre o de la madre que. sin culpa suya, no hubieren intervenido en el expediente en los términos expresados en el artículo 177. Será también necesario que la demanda se interponga dentro de los dos años siguientes a la adopción y que la extinción solicitada no perjudique gravemente al menor.

3. La extinción de la adopción no es causa de pérdida de la nacionalidad ni de la vecindad civil adquiridas, ni alcanza a los efectos patrimoniales anteriormente producidos.

4. La determinación de la filiación que por naturaleza corresponda al adoptado no afecta a la adopción.

TÍTULO VIII. DE LA AUSENCIA.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DECLARACIÓN DE AUSENCIA Y SUS EFECTOS

Artículo 181.

En todo caso, desaparecida una persona de su domicilio o del lugar de su última residencia, sin haberse tenido en ella más noticias, podrá el Juez, a instancias de parte interesada o del Ministerio fiscal, nombrar un defensor que ampare y represente al desaparecido en juicio o en los negocios que no admitan demora sin perjuicio grave. Se exceptúan los casos en que aquél estuviese legítimamente representado voluntariamente conforme al artículo 183.

El cónyuge presente mayor de edad no separado legalmente será el representante y defensor nato del desaparecido, y por su falta, el pariente más próximo hasta el cuarto grado, también mayor de edad. En

40

defecto de parientes, no presencia de los mismos o urgencia notoria, el Juez nombrará persona solvente y de buenos antecedentes, previa audiencia del Ministerio fiscal.

También podrá adoptar, según su prudente arbitrio, las providencias necesarias a la conservación del patrimonio.

Artículo 182.

Tiene la obligación de promover e instar la declaración de ausencia legal, sin orden de preferencia:

El cónyuge del ausente no separado legalmente.• Los parientes consanguíneos hasta el cuarto grado.• El Ministerio fiscal de oficio o a virtud de denuncia.•

Podrá, también, pedir dicha declaración cualquiera persona que racionalmente estime tener sobre los bienes del desaparecido algún derecho ejercitable en vida del mismo o dependiente de su muerte.

Artículo 183.

Se considerará en situación de ausencia legal al desaparecido de su domicilio o de su última residencia:

Pasado un año desde las últimas noticias o, a falta de éstas. desde su desaparición, si no hubiese dejado apoderado con facultades de administración de todos sus bienes.

Pasados tres años, si hubiese dejado encomendada por apoderamiento la administración de todos sus bienes.•

La muerte o renuncia justificada del mandatario, o la caducidad del mandato, determina la ausencia legal, si al producirse aquellas se ignorase el paradero del desaparecido y hubiere transcurrido un año desde que se tuvieron las últimas noticias, y, en su defecto, desde su desaparición. Inscrita en el Registro Central la declaración de ausencia, quedan extinguidos de derecho todos los mandatos generales o especiales otorgados por el ausente.

Artículo 184.

Salvo motivo grave apreciado por el Juez, corresponde la representación del declarado ausente, la pesquisa de su persona, la protección y administración de sus bienes y el cumplimiento de sus obligaciones:

Al cónyuge presente mayor de edad no separado legalmente o de hecho.• Al hijo mayor de edad; si hubiese varios, serán preferidos los que convivían con el ausente y el mayor al menor.

Al ascendiente más próximo de menos edad de una u otra línea.• A los hermanos mayores de edad que hayan convivido familiarmente con el ausente, con preferencia del mayor sobre el menor.

En defecto de las personas expresadas, corresponde en toda su extensión a la persona solvente de buenos antecedentes que el Juez, oído el Ministerio fiscal, designe a su prudente arbitrio.

Artículo 185.

El representante del declarado ausente quedará atenido a las obligaciones siguientes:

Inventariar los bienes muebles y describir los inmuebles de su representado.• Prestar la garantía que el Juez prudencialmente fije. Quedan exceptuados los comprendidos en los números•

41

uno, dos y tres del artículo precedente Conservar y defender el patrimonio del ausente y obtener de sus bienes los rendimientos normales de que fueren susceptibles.

Ajustarse a las normas que en orden a la posesión y administración de los bienes del ausente se establecen en la Ley procesal civil.

Serán aplicables a los representantes dativos del ausente, en cuanto se adapten a su especial representación, los preceptos que regulan el ejercicio de la tutela y las causas de inhabilidad, remoción y excusa de los tutores.

Artículo 186.

Los representantes legítimos del declarado ausente comprendidos en los números primero, segundo y tercero del artículo 184 disfrutarán de la posesión temporal del patrimonio del ausente y harán suyos los productos líquidos en la cuantía que el Juez señale, habida consideración al importe de los frutos, rentas y aprovechamientos, número de hijos del ausente y obligaciones alimenticias para con los mismos, cuidados y actuaciones que la representación requiera, afecciones que graven el patrimonio y demás circunstancias de la propia índole.

Los representantes legítimos comprendidos en el número cuarto del expresado artículo disfrutarán también, de la posesión temporal y harán suyos los frutos, rentas y aprovechamientos en la cuantía que el Juez señale, sin que en ningún caso puedan retener más de los dos tercios de los productos líquidos, reservándose el tercio restante por el ausente, o, en su caso, para sus herederos o causahabientes.

Los poseedores temporales de los bienes del ausente no podrán venderlos, gravarlos, hipotecarlos o darlos en prenda, sino en caso de necesidad o utilidad evidente reconocida y declarada por el Juez, quien, al autorizar dichos actos, determinará el empleo de la cantidad obtenida.

Artículo 187.

Si durante el disfrute de la posesión temporal o del ejercicio de la representación dativa alguno probase su derecho preferente dicha posesión, será excluido el poseedor actual, pero aquél no tendrá derecho a los productos sino a partir del día de la presentación de la demanda.

Si apareciese el ausente, deberá restituírsele su patrimonio, pero no los productos percibidos, salvo mala fe interviniente, en cuyo caso la restitución comprenderá también los frutos percibidos y los debidos percibir a contar del día en que aquélla se produjo según la declaración judicial.

Artículo 188.

Si en el transcurso de la posesión temporal o del ejercicio de la representación dativa se probase la muerte del declarado ausente se abrirá la sucesión en beneficio de los que en el momento de fallecimiento fuesen sus sucesores voluntarios o legítimos, debiendo el poseedor temporal hacerles entrega del patrimonio del difunto pero reteniendo, como suyos, los productos recibidos en la cuantía señalada.

Si se presentare un tercero acreditando por documento fehaciente haber adquirido, por compra u otro título, bienes del ausente, cesará la representación respecto de dichos bienes, que quedarán a disposición de sus legítimos titulares.

Artículo 189.

El cónyuge del ausente tendrá derecho a la separación de bienes.

42

Artículo 190.

Para reclamar un derecho en nombre de la persona constituida en ausencia, es preciso probar que esta persona existía en el tiempo en que era necesaria su existencia para adquirirlo.

Artículo 191.

Sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, abierta una sucesión a la que estuviere llamado un ausente, acrecerá la parte de éste a sus coherederos, al no haber persona con derecho propio para reclamarla. Los unos y los otros, en su caso, deberán hacer, con intervención del Ministerio Fiscal, inventario de dichos bienes, los cuales reservarán hasta la declaración del fallecimiento,

Artículo 192.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior se entiende sin perjuicio de las acciones de petición de herencia u otros derechos que competan al ausente, sus representantes o causahabientes. Estos derechos no se extinguirán sino por el transcurso del tiempo fijado para la prescripción. En la inscripción que se haga en el Registro de los bienes inmuebles que acrezcan a los coherederos se expresará la circunstancia de quedar sujetos a lo que dispone este artículo y el anterior.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA DECLARACIÓN DE FALLECIMIENTO

Artículo 193.

Procede la declaración de fallecimiento:

Transcurridos diez años desde las últimas noticias habidas del ausente, o a falta de éstas, desde su desaparición.

Pasados cinco años desde las últimas noticias o, en defecto de éstas, desde su desaparición, si al expirar dicho plazo hubiere cumplido el ausente setenta y cinco años.

Los plazos expresados se computarán desde la expiración del año natural en que se tuvieron las últimas noticias, y, en su defecto, del en que ocurrió la desaparición.

Cumplidos dos años contados de fecha a fecha de un riesgo inminente de muerte por causa de siniestro o de violencia contra la vida, en que una persona se hubiese encontrado sin haberse tenido, con posterioridad al siniestro o a la violencia, noticias suyas.

Se presume la violencia si en una subversión de orden político o social hubiere desaparecido una persona sin volverse a tener. noticias sayas durante el tiempo expresado, siempre que hayan pasado seis meses desde la cesación de la subversión.

Artículo 194.

Procede también la declaración de fallecimiento:

De los que perteneciendo a un contingente armado o unidos a él en calidad de funcionarios auxiliares voluntarios, o en funciones informativas, hayan tomado parte en operaciones de campaña y desaparecido en ellas luego que hayan transcurrido dos años, contados desde la fecha del tratado de paz, y en caso de no haberse concertado, desde la declaración oficial del fin de la guerra.

De los tripulantes y pasajeros de una nave naufragada de quienes no se hubiesen tenido noticias, pasado el•

43

mismo tiempo desde la comprobación del naufragio.

Se presume ocurrido el naufragio, si el buque no llega a su destino; o si, careciendo de punto fijo de arribo, no retornase, luego que en cualquiera de los casos hayan transcurrido tres años, contados desde las últimas noticias recibidas o, por falta de éstas, desde la fecha de salida de la nave del puerto inicial del viaje.

De los pasajeros, tripulantes y auxiliares de una aeronave perecida, si hubiesen transcurrido dos años desde la comprobación del siniestro sin haberse tenido noticias de aquéllos, o, en caso de haberse encontrado restos humanos, no hubiesen podido ser identificados.

Se presume el siniestro si en viaje sobre mares, zonas desérticas o inhabitadas, transcurriesen tres años, contados desde las últimas noticias de las personas o de la aeronave, y en su defecto, desde la fecha de arranque del viaje.

Si éste se hiciese por etapas, el plazo indicado se computará desde el punto de despegue del que se recibieron las últimas noticias.

Artículo 195.

Por la declaración de fallecimiento cesa la situación de ausencia legal, paro mientras dicha declaración no se produzca, se presume que el ausente ha vivido hasta el momento en que deba reputársele fallecido, salvo investigaciones en contrario.

Toda declaración de fallecimiento expresará la fecha a partir de la cual se entienda sucedida la muerte, con arreglo a lo preceptuado en los artículos precedentes, salvo prueba en contrario.

Artículo 196.

Firme la declaración de fallecimiento del ausente, se abrirá la sucesión en los bienes del mismo, procediéndose a su adjudicación por los trámites de los juicios de testamentaría o abintestato, según los casos, o extrajudicialmente.

Los herederos no podrán disponer a título gratuito hasta cinco años después de la declaración del fallecimiento.

Hasta que transcurra este mismo plazo no serán entregados los legados, si los hubiese, ni tendrán derecho a exigirlos los legatarios, salvo las mandas piadosas en sufragio del alma del testador o los legados en favor de Instituciones de beneficencia.

Será obligación ineludible de los sucesores, aunque por tratarse de uno solo no fuere necesaria partición, la de formar notarialmente un inventario detallado de los bienes muebles y una descripción de los inmuebles.

Artículo 197.

Si después de la declaración de fallecimiento se presentase el ausente o se probase su existencia, recobrará sus bienes en el estado en que se encuentren y tendrá derecho al precio de los que se hubieran vendido, o a los bienes que con este precio se hayan adquirido, pero no podrá reclamar de sus sucesores rentas, frutos ni productos obtenidos con los bienes de su sucesión, sino desde el día de su presencia o de la declaración de no haber muerto.

CAPÍTULO III. DEL REGISTRO CENTRAL DE AUSENTES

44

Artículo 198.

En el Registro Central y público de ausentes se hará constar:

Los declaraciones judiciales de ausencia legal• Las declaraciones judiciales de fallecimiento.• Las representaciones legítimas y dativas acordadas judicialmente y la extinción de las mismas.• Mención circunstanciada del lugar, otorgantes y Notario autorizante de los inventarios de bienes muebles y descripción de inmuebles que en este título se ordenan.

Mención circunstanciada del auto de concesión y del lugar, fecha, otorgantes y Notario autorizante de las escrituras de transmisiones y gravámenes que con licencia judicial efectúen los representantes legítimos o dativos de los ausentes; y

Mención circunstanciada del lugar, fecha, otorgantes y Notario autorizante de la escritura de descripción o inventario de los bienes, así como de las escrituras de partición y adjudicación realizadas a virtud de la declaración de fallecimiento o de las actas de protocolización de los cuadernos particionales en sus respectivo casos,

TÍTULO IX. DE LA INCAPACITACIÓN

Artículo 199.

Nadie puede ser incapacitado sino por sentencia judicial en virtud de las causas establecidas en la Ley.

Artículo 200.

Son causas de incapacitación las enfermedades o deficiencias persistentes de carácter físico o psíquico que impidan a la persona gobernarse por sí misma.

Artículo 201.

Los menores de edad podrán ser incapacitados cuando concurra en ellos causa de incapacitación y se prevea razonablemente que la misma persistirá después de la mayoría de edad.

Artículo 202.

Corresponde promover la declaración al cónyuge o descendientes y, en defecto de éstos, a los ascendientes o hermanos del presunto incapaz.

Artículo 203.

El Ministerio Fiscal deberá promover la declaración si las personas mencionadas en el artículo anterior no existen o no lo hubieran solicitado. A este fin, las autoridades y funcionarios públicos que, por razón de sus cargos, conocieran la existencia de posible causa de incapacitación en una persona, deberán ponerlo en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal.

El Juez competente, en los mismos casos, adoptará de oficio las medidas que estime necesarias y pondrá el hecho en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal, quien deberá solicitar del Juez lo que proceda, dentro del plazo de quince días.

Artículo 204.

45

Cualquier persona está facultada para poner en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal los hechos que puedan ser determinantes de la incapacitación.

Artículo 205.

La incapacitación de los menores prevista en el artículo 20, sólo podrá ser solicitada por quienes ejerzan la patria potestad u la tutela.

Artículo 206.

En los procesos sobre incapacitación será siempre necesaria la intervención del Ministerio Fiscal, aunque no haya sido promotor de los mismos.

Artículo 207.

Si el Ministerio Fiscal hubiere promovido el procedimiento, el Juez designará un defensor al presunto incapaz a no ser que ya estuviere nombrado. En los demás casos será defensor el Ministerio Público.

El presunto incapaz puede comparecer en el proceso con su propia defensa y representación.

Artículo 208.

El Juez oirá a los parientes más próximos del presunto incapaz, examinará a este por sí mismo, oirá el dictamen de un facultativo y, sin perjuicio de las pruebas practicadas a instancia de parte, podrá decretar de oficio cuantas estime pertinentes.

Artículo 209.

El Juez, en cualquier estado del procedimiento, podrá, a instancia de parte o de oficio, adoptar las medidas que estime necesarias para la adecuada protección del presunto incapaz o de su patrimonio.

Artículo 210.

La sentencia que declare la incapacitación determinará la extensión y los límites de ésta, así como el régimen de tutela o guarda a que haya de quedar sometido el incapacitado.

Artículo 211.

El internamiento por razón de trastorno psíquico, de una persona que no esté en condiciones de decidirlo por sí, aunque esté sometida a la patria potestad, requerirá autorización judicial. Esta será previa al internamiento, salvo que razones de urgencia hiciesen necesaria la inmediata adopción de la medida, de la que se dará cuenta cuanto antes al Juez y, en todo caso, dentro del plazo de veinticuatro horas. El internamiento de menores, se realizará en todo caso en un establecimiento de salud mental adecuado a su edad, previo informe de los servicios de asistencia al menor.

Sin perjuicio de lo previsto en el artículo 269, 4), el Juez, de oficio, recabará información sobre la necesidad de proseguir el internamiento, cuando lo crea pertinente, y, en todo caso, cada seis meses, en forma igual a la prevista en el párrafo anterior, y acordará lo procedente sobre la continuación o no de internamiento.

Artículo 212.

La sentencia recaída en un procedimiento de incapacitación no impedirá que, sobrevenidas nuevas

46

circunstancias, pueda instarse judicialmente una nueva declaración que tenga por objeto dejar sin efecto o modificar el alcance de la incapacitación ya establecida.

Artículo 213.

Corresponde formular la petición, para iniciar el procedimiento a que se refiere el artículo anterior, a las personas mencionadas en el artículo 202, a las que ejercieren cargo tutelar o tuvieran bajo su guarda al incapacitado, al Ministerio Fiscal y al propio incapacitado.

Artículo 214.

Las resoluciones judiciales sobre incapacitación se anotarán o inscribirán en el Registro Civil, sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en la legislación hipotecaria y del Registro Mercantil.

TÍTULO X. DE LA TUTELA, DE LA CURATELA Y DE LA GUARDA DE LOS MENORES O INCAPACITADOS

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 215.

La guarda y protección de la persona y bienes o solamente de la persona o de los bienes de los menores o incapacitados, se realizará, en los casos que proceda, mediante:

La tutela.• La curatela.• El defensor judicial.•

Artículo 216.

Las medidas y disposiciones previstas en el artículo 158 de este Código podrán ser acordadas también por el Juez, de oficio o a instancia de cualquier interesado, en todos los supuestos de tutela o guarda, de hecho o de derecho, de menores e incapaces, en cuanto lo requiera el interés de éstos.

Artículo 217.

Sólo se admitirá la excusa de los cargos tutelares en los supuestos legalmente previstos.

Artículo 218.

Las resoluciones judiciales sobre los cargos tutelares habrán de inscribirse en el Registro Civil.

Dichas resoluciones no serán oponibles a terceros mientras no se hayan practicado las oportunas inscripciones.

Artículo 219.

La inscripción de las resoluciones a que se refiere el artículo anterior, se practicarán en virtud de la comunicación que la autoridad judicial deberá remitir sin dilación al encargado del Registro Civil.

Artículo 220.

47

La persona que en el ejercicio de una función tutelar sufra daños y perjuicios sin culpa por su parte, tendrá derecho a la indemnización de éstos con cargo a los bienes del tutelado, de no poder obtener por otro medio su resarcimiento.

Artículo 221.

Se prohibe a quien desempeñe algún cargo tutelar:

Recibir liberalidades del tutelado o de sus causahabientes, mientras que no se haya aprobado definitivamente su gestión.

Representar al tutelado cuando en el mismo acto intervenga en nombre propio o de un tercero y existiera conflicto de intereses.

Adquirir por título oneroso bienes del tutelado o transmitirle por su parte bienes por igual título.•

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA TUTELA

SECCIÓN I. DE LA TUTELA EN GENERAL.

Artículo 222.

Estarán sujetos a tutela:

Los menores no emancipados que no estén bajo la patria potestad.• Los incapacitados, cuando la sentencia lo haya establecido.• Los sujetos a la patria potestad prorrogada, al cesar ésta, salvo que proceda la curatela.• Los menores que se hallen en situación de desamparo.•

Artículo 223.

Los padres podrán, en testamento o documento público notarial, nombrar tutor, establecer órganos de fiscalización de la tutela así como designar las personas que hayan de integrarlos, u ordenar cualquier otra disposición sobre la persona o bienes de sus hijos menores o incapacitadas.

Artículo 224.

Las disposiciones aludidas en el artículo anterior vincularán al Juez, al constituir la tutela, salvo que el beneficio del menor o incapacitado exija otra cosa, en cuyo caso lo hará mediante decisión motivada.

Artículo 225.

Cuando existieren disposiciones en testamento o documento público notarial del padre y de la madre, se aplicarán unas y otras conjuntamente en cuanto fueran compatibles. De no serlo, se adoptarán por el Juez, en decisión motivada, las que considere más convenientes para el tutelado.

Artículo 226.

Serán ineficaces las disposiciones hechas en testamento o documento público o notarial sobre la tutela si, en el momento de adoptarlas, el disponente hubiese sido privado de la patria potestad.

Artículo 227.

48

El que disponga de bienes a título gratuito en favor de un menor o incapacitado, podrá establecer las reglas de administración de los mismos y designar la persona o personas que hayan de ejercitarla. Las funciones no conferidas al administrador corresponden al tutor.

Artículo 228.

Si el Ministerio Fiscal o el Juez competente tuvieren conocimiento de que existe en el territorio de su jurisdicción alguna persona que deba ser sometida a tutela, pedirá el primero y dispondrá el segundo, incluso de oficio, la constitución de la tutela.

Artículo 229.

Estarán obligados a promover la constitución de la tutela desde el momento en que conocieran el hecho que la motivaren, los parientes llamados a ella y la persona bajo cuya guarda se encuentre el menor o incapacitado, y, si no lo hicieren, serán responsables solidarios de la indemnización de los daños y perjuicios causados.

Artículo 230.

Cualquier persona podrá poner en conocimiento del Ministerio Fiscal o de la autoridad Judicial el hecho determinan te de la tutela.

Artículo 231.

El Juez constituirá la tutela previa audiencia de los parientes más próximos, de las personas que considere oportuno y, en todo caso, del tutelado si tuviera suficiente juicio y siempre si fuera mayor de doce años.

Artículo 232.

La tutela se ejercitará bajo la vigilancia del Ministerio Fiscal, que actuará de oficio o a instancia de cualquier interesado.

En cualquier momento podrá exigir del tutor que le informe sobre la situación del menor o del incapacitado y del estado de la administración de la tutela.

Artículo 233.

El Juez podrá establecer, en la resolución por la que se constituye la tutela o en otra posterior las medidas de vigilancia y control que estime oportunas en beneficio del tutelado, Asimismo podrá en cualquier momento exigir del tutor que informe sobre la situación del menor o del incapacitado y del estado de la administración.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA DELACIÓN DE LA TUTELA Y DEL NOMBRAMIENTO DEL TUTOR.

Artículo 234.

Para el nombramiento de tutor se preferirá:

Al cónyuge que conviva con el tutelado.• A los padres.• A la persona o personas designadas por éstos en sus disposiciones de última voluntad.• Al descendiente, ascendiente o hermano que designe el Juez. Excepcionalmente, el Juez, en resolución motivada, podrá alterar el orden del párrafo anterior o prescindir de todas las personas en él mencionadas, si

49

el beneficio del menor o del incapacitado así lo exigiere. Se considera beneficiosa para el menor la integración en la vida de familia del tutor.

Artículo 235.

En defecto de las personas mencionadas en el artículo anterior, el Juez designará tutor a quien, por sus relaciones con el tutelado, y en beneficio de éste, considere más idóneo.

Artículo 236.

La tutela se ejercerá por un solo tutor, salvo:

Cuando. por concurrir circunstancias especiales en la persona del tutelado o de su patrimonio, convenga separar como cargos distintos el de tutor de la persona y el de los bienes, cada uno de los cuales actuará independientemente en el ámbito de su competencia, si bien las decisiones que conciernan a ambos deberán tomarlas conjuntamente.

Cuando la tutela corresponda al padre y a la madre, será ejercida por ambos conjuntamente de modo análogo a la patria potestad.

Si se designa a alguna persona tutor de los hijos de su hermano y se considera conveniente que el cónyuge del tutor ejerza también la tutela.

Cuando el Juez nombre tutores a las personas que los padres del tutelado hayan designado en testamento o documento público notarial para ejercer la tutela conjuntamente.

Artículo 237.

En el caso del número 4 del artículo anterior, si el testador lo hubiere dispuesto de modo expreso, y en el caso del número 2, si los padres lo solicitaran, podrá el Juez, al efectuar el nombramiento de tutores, resolver que éstos puedan ejercitar las facultades de la tutela con carácter solidario.

De no mediar tal clase de nombramiento, en todos los demás casos, y sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en los números 1 y 2, las facultades de la tutela encomendada a varios tutores habrán de ser ejercitadas por éstos conjuntamente, pero valdrá lo que se haga con el acuerdo del mayor número. A falta de tal acuerdo, el Juez, después de oír a los tutores y al tutelado si tuviere suficiente juicio, resolverá sin ulterior recurso lo que estime conveniente. Para el caso de que los desacuerdos fueran reiterados y entorpeciesen gravemente el ejercicio de la tutela, podrá el Juez reorganizar su funcionamiento e incluso proveer de nuevo tutor.

Artículo 237 bis.

Si los tutores tuvieren sus facultades atribuidas conjuntamente y hubiere incompatibilidad u oposición de intereses en alguno de ellos para un acto o contrato, podrá éste ser realizado por el otro tutor, o, de ser varios, por los demás en forma conjunta.

Artículo 238.

En los casos de que por cualquier causa cese alguno de los tutores, la tutela subsistirá con los restantes, a no ser que al hacer el nombramiento se hubiera dispuesto otra cosa de modo expreso.

Artículo 239.

La tutela de los menores desamparados corresponde por Ley a la Entidad a que se refiere el artículo 172.

Se procederá, sin embargo, al nombramiento de tutor conforme a las reglas ordinarias, cuando existan

50

personas que, por sus relaciones con el menor o por otras circunstancias, puedan asumir la tutela en beneficio para éste.

Artículo 240.

Si hubiere que designar tutor para varios hermanos, el Juez procurará que el nombramiento recaiga en una misma persona.

Artículo 241.

Podrán ser tutores todas las personas que se encuentren en el pleno ejercicio de sus derechos civiles y en quienes no concurra alguna de las causas de inhabilidad establecidas en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 242.

Podrán ser también tutores las personas jurídicas que no tengan finalidad lucrativa y entre cuyos fines figure la protección de menores e incapacitados.

Artículo 243.

No pueden ser tutores:

Los que estuvieran privados o suspendidos en el ejercicio de la patria potestad o total u parcialmente de los derechos de guarda y educación, por resolución judicial.

Los que hubieren sido legalmente removidos de una tutela anterior.• Los condenados a cualquier pena privativa de libertad, mientras estén cumpliendo la condena.• Los condenados por cualquier delito que haga suponer fundadamente que no desempeñarán bien la tutela.•

Artículo 244.

Tampoco pueden ser tutores:

Las personas en quienes concurra imposibilidad absoluta de hecho.• Los que tuvieren enemistad manifiesta con el menor o incapacitado.• Las personas de mala conducta o que no tuvieren manera de vivir conocida.• Los que tuvieren importantes conflictos de intereses con el menor o incapacitado, mantengan con él pleito o actuaciones sobre el estado civil o sobre la titularidad de los bienes, o los que le adeudaren sumas de consideración.

Los quebrados y concursados no rehabilitados, salvo que la tutela lo sea solamente de la persona.•

Artículo 245.

Tampoco pueden ser tutores los excluidos expresa mente por el padre o por la madre en sus disposiciones en testamento o documento notarial, salvo que el Juez, en resolución motivada, estime otra cosa en beneficio del menor o del incapacitado.

Artículo 246.

Las causas de inhabilidad contempladas en los artículos 243.4) y 244.4) no se aplicarán a los tutores designa dos en las disposiciones de última voluntad de los padres cuando fueren conocidas por éstos en el momento de hacer la designación, salvo que el Juez, en resolución motivada, disponga otra cosa en beneficio del menor o del incapacitado.

51

Artículo 247.

Serán removidos de la tutela los que después de deferida incurran en causa legal de inhabilidad, o se conduzcan mal en el desempeño de la tutela, por incumplimiento de los deberes propios del cargo o por notoria ineptitud de su ejercicio, o cuando surgieran problemas de convivencia graves y continuados.

Artículo 248.

El Juez, de oficio o a solicitud del Ministerio Fiscal, del tutelado o de otra persona interesada, decretará la remoción del tutor, previa audiencia de éste si, citado, compareciere. Asimismo, se dará audiencia al tutelado si tuviere suficiente juicio.

Artículo 249.

Durante la tramitación del procedimiento de remoción, podrá el Juez suspender en sus funciones al tutor y nombrar al tutelado un defensor judicial.

Artículo 250.

Declarada judicialmente la remoción, se procederá al nombramiento de nuevo tutor en la forma establecida en este Código.

Artículo 251.

Será excusable el desempeño de la tutela cuando por razones de edad, enfermedad, ocupaciones personales o profesionales, por falta de vínculos de cualquier clase entre tutor y tutelado o por cualquier otra causa, resulte excesivamente gravoso el ejercicio del cargo, las personas jurídicas podrán excusarse cuando carezcan medios suficientes para el adecuado desempeño de la tutela.

Artículo 252.

El interesado que alegue causa de excusa deberá hacerlo dentro del plazo de quince días a contar desde que tuviera conocimiento del nombramiento.

Artículo 253.

El tutor podrá excusarse de continuar ejerciendo la tutela, siempre que hubiera persona de parecidas condiciones para sustituirle, cuando durante el desempeño de aquélla le sobrevenga cualquiera de los motivos de excusa contemplados en el artículo 251.

Artículo 254.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior no se aplicará a la tutela encomendada a las personas jurídicas.

Artículo 255.

Si la causa de excusa fuera sobrevenida, podrá ser alegada en cualquier momento.

Artículo 256.

Mientras se resuelva acerca de la excusa, el que la haya propuesto estará obligado a ejercer la función.

52

No haciéndolo así, el Juez nombrará un defensor que le sustituya, quedando el sustituido responsable de todos los gastos ocasionados por la excusa si ésta fuera rechazada.

Artículo 257.

El tutor designado en testamento que se excuse de la tutela al tiempo de su delación perderá lo que, en consideración al nombramiento, le hubiere dejado el testador.

Artículo 258.

Admitida la excusa se procederá al nombramiento de nuevo tutor.

SECCIÓN TERCERA.

DEL EJERCICIO DE LA TUTELA

Artículo 259.

La autoridad judicial dará posesión de su cargo al tutor nombrado.

Artículo 260.

El Juez podrá exigir al tutor la constitución de fianza que asegure el cumplimiento de sus obligaciones y determinará la modalidad y cuantía de la misma. No obstante, la entidad pública que asuma la tutela de un menor por ministerio de la Ley o la desempeñe por resolución judicial no precisará prestar fianza.

Artículo 261.

También podrá el Juez, en cualquier momento y con justa causa, dejar sin efecto o modificar en todo o en parte la garantía que se hubiese prestado.

Artículo 262.

El tutor está obligado a hacer inventario de los bienes del tutelado dentro del plazo de sesenta días, a contar de aquel en que hubiese tomado posesión de su cargo.

Artículo 263.

La autoridad judicial podrá prorrogar este plazo en resolución motivada si concurriere causa para ello.

Artículo 264.

El inventario se formará judicialmente con intervención del Ministerio Fiscal y con citación de las personas que el Juez estime conveniente.

Artículo 265.

El dinero, alhajas, objetos preciosos y valores mobiliarios o documentos que, a juicio de la autoridad judicial, no deban quedar en poder del tutor serán depositados en un establecimiento destinado a este efecto.

Los gastos que las anteriores medidas ocasionen correrán a cargo de los bienes del tutelado.

53

Artículo 266.

El tutor que no incluya en el inventario los créditos que tenga contra el tutelado, se entenderá que los renuncia,

Artículo 267.

El tutor es el representante del menor o incapacitado, salvo para aquellos actos que pueda realizar por sí sólo, ya sea por disposición expresa de la Ley o de la sentencia de incapacitación,

Artículo 268.

Los sujetos a tutela deben respeto y obediencia al tutor, los tutores podrán, en el ejercicio de su cargo, recabar el auxilio de la autoridad. Podrán también corregir a los menores razonable y moderadamente.

Artículo 269.

El tutor está obligado a velar por el tutelado y, en particular:

A procurarle alimentos.• A educar al menor y procurarle una formación integral.• A promover la adquisición o recuperación de la capacidad del tutelado y su mejor inserción en la sociedad.• A informar al Juez anualmente sobre la situación del menor o incapacitado y rendirle cuenta anual de su administración.

Artículo 270.

El tutor único y, en su caso, el de los bienes es el administrador legal del patrimonio de los tutelados y está obligado a ejercer dicha administración con la diligencia de un buen padre de familia.

Artículo 271.

El tutor necesita autorización judicial:

Para internar al tutelado en un establecimiento de salud mental o de educación o formación especial.• Para enajenar o gravar bienes inmuebles, establecimientos mercantiles o industriales, objetos preciosos y valores mobiliarios de los menores o incapacitados, o celebrar contratos o realizar actos que tengan carácter dispositivo y sean susceptibles de inscripción. Se exceptúa la venta del derecho de suscripción preferente de acciones.

Para renunciar derechos, así como transigir o someter a arbitraje cuestiones en que el tutelado estuviese interesado.

Para aceptar sin beneficio de inventario cualquier herencia, o para repudiar ésta o las liberalidades.• Para hacer gastos extraordinarios en los bienes.• Para entablar demanda en nombre de los sujetos a tutela, salvo en los asuntos urgentes o de escasa cuantía.• Para ceder bienes en arrendamiento por tiempo superior a seis años.• Para dar y tomar dinero a préstamo.• Para disponer a título gratuito de bienes o derechos del tutelado.• Para ceder a terceros los créditos que el tutelado tenga contra él, o adquirir a título oneroso los créditos de terceros contra el tutelado.

Artículo 272.

54

No necesitarán autorización judicial la partición de herencia ni la división de cosa común realizadas por el tutor, pero una vez practicadas requerirán aprobación judicial..

Artículo 273.

Antes de autorizar o aprobar cualquiera de los actos comprendidos en los dos artículos anteriores, el Juez oirá al Ministerio Fiscal y al tutelado, si fuese mayor de doce años o lo considera oportuno, y recabará los informes que le sean solicitados o estime pertinentes.

Artículo 274.

El tutor tiene derecho a una retribución, siempre que el patrimonio del tutelado lo permita. Corresponde al Juez fijar su importe y el modo de percibirlo, para lo cual tendrá en cuenta el trabajo a realizar y el valor y la rentabilidad de los bienes, procurando en lo posible que la cuantía de la retribución no baje del 4 por 100 ni exceda del 20 por 100 del rendimiento líquido de los bienes.

Artículo 275.

Sólo los padres, y en sus disposiciones de última voluntad, podrán establecer que el tutor haga suyos los frutos de los bienes del tutelado a cambio de prestarle los alimentos, salvo que el Juez, en resolución motivada, disponga otra cosa.

SECCIÓN CUARTA.

DE LA EXTINCIÓN DE LA TUTELA Y DE LA RENDICIÓN FINAL DE CUENTAS.

Artículo 276.

La tutela se extingue:

Cuando el menor de edad cumple los dieciocho años, a menos que con anterioridad hubiera sido judicialmente incapacitado.

Por la adopción del tutelado menor de edad.• Por fallecimiento de la persona sometida a tutela.• Por la concesión al menor del beneficio de la mayor edad.•

Artículo 277.

También se extingue la tutela:

Cuando habiéndose originado por privación o suspensión de la patria potestad, el titular de ésta la recupere.• Al dictarse la resolución judicial que ponga fin a la incapacitación, o que modifique la sentencia de incapacitación en virtud de la cual se sustituye la tutela por la curatela.

Artículo 278.

Continuará el tutor en el ejercicio de su cargo si el menor sujeto a tutela hubiese sido incapacitado antes de la mayoría de edad, conforme a lo dispuesto en la sentencia de incapacitación.

Artículo 279.

El tutor al cesar en sus funciones deberá rendir la cuenta general justificada de su administración ante la

55

autoridad judicial en el plazo de tres meses, prorrogable por el tiempo que fuere necesario si concurre justa causa.

La acción para exigir la rendición de esta cuenta prescribe a los cinco años, contados desde la terminación del plazo establecido para efectuarlo.

Artículo 280.

Antes de resolver sobre la aprobación de la cuenta, el Juez oirá al nuevo tutor o, en su caso, al curador o al defensor judicial, a la persona que hubiera estado sometida a tutela o a sus heredero

Artículo 281.

Los gastos necesarios de la rendición de cuentas, serán cargo del que estuvo sujeto a tutela.

Artículo 282.

El saldo de la cuenta general devengará interés legal, a favor o en contra del tutor.

Artículo 283.

Si el saldo es a favor del tutor, devengará interés legal desde que el que estuvo sometido a tutela sea requerido para el pago, previa entrega de sus bienes.

Artículo 284.

Si es en contra del tutor, devengará interés legal desde la aprobación de la cuenta.

Artículo 285.

La aprobación judicial no impedirá el ejercicio de las acciones que recíprocamente puedan asistir al tutor y al tutelado o sus causahabientes por razón de la tutela.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA CURATELA

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 286.

Están sujetos a curatela:

Los emancipados cuyos padres fallecieren o quedaran impedidos para el ejercicio de la asistencia prevenida por la Ley.

Los que obtuvieren el beneficio de la mayor edad.• Los declarados pródigos.•

Artículo 287.

Igualmente procede la curatela para las personas a quienes la sentencia de incapacitación o, en su caso, la resolución judicial que la modifique coloquen bajo esta forma de protección en atención a su grado de discernimiento.

56

Artículo 288.

En los casos del artículo 286, la curatela no tendrá otro efecto que la intervención del curador en los actos que los menores pródigos no puedan realizar por sí solos.

Artículo 289.

La curatela de los incapacitados tendrá por objeto la asistencia del curador para aquellos actos que expresamente imponga la sentencia que la haya establecido.

Artículo 290.

Si la sentencia de incapacitación no hubiese especificado lo actos en que deba ser necesaria la intervención del curador, se entenderá que ésta se extiende a los mismos actos en que los tutores necesitan, según este Código, autorización judicial.

Artículo 291.

Son aplicables a los curadores las normas sobre nombramiento, inhabilidad, excusa y remoción de los tutores. No podrán ser curadores los quebrados y concursados no rehabilita dos.

Artículo 292.

Si el sometido a curatela hubiese estado con anterioridad bajo tutela, desempeñará el cargo de curador el mismo que hubiese sido su tutor, a menos que el Juez disponga otra cosa.

Artículo 293.

Los actos jurídicos realizados sin la intervención del curador, cuando ésta sea preceptiva, serán anulables a instancia del propio curador o de la persona sujeta a curatela, de acuerdo con los artículos 1.301 y siguientes de este Código.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA CURATELA EN CASOS DE PRODIGALIDAD

Artículo 294.

Podrán pedir la declaración de prodigalidad el cónyuge, los descendientes o ascendientes que perciban alimentos del presunto pródigo o se encuentren en situación de reclamárselos, y los representantes legales de cualquiera de ellos. Si no la pidieren los representantes legales, lo hará el Ministerio Fiscal.

Artículo 295.

La declaración de prodigalidad debe hacerse en juicio contradictorio.

Artículo 296.

Cuando el demandado por prodigalidad no compareciese en el juicio, le representará el Ministerio Fiscal, y, si éste fuera parte, un defensor nombrado por el Juez, sin perjuicio de lo que determina la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil sobre los procedimientos en rebeldía.

Artículo 297.

57

Los actos del declarado pródigo anteriores a la demanda de prodigalidad no podrán ser atacados por esta causa.

Artículo 298.

La sentencia determinará los actos que el pródigo no puede realizar sin el consentimiento del curador.

CAPÍTULO IV. DEL DEFENSOR JUDICIAL

Artículo 299.

Se nombrará un defensor judicial que represente y ampare los intereses de quienes se hallen en alguno de los siguientes supuestos:

Cuando en algún asunto exista conflicto de intereses entre los menores o incapacitados y sus representantes legales o el curador, el caso de tutela conjunta ejercida por ambos padres, si el conflicto de intereses existiere sólo con uno de ellos, corresponderá al otro por Ley sin necesidad de especial nombramiento, representar y amparar menor o incapacitado.

En el supuesto de que, por cualquier causa, el tutor o curador no desempeñare sus funciones, hasta que cese la causa determinante o se designe otra persona para desempeñar el cargo.

En todos los demás casos previstos en este Código.•

Artículo 299 bis.

Cuando se tenga conocimiento de que una persona debe ser sometida a tutela y en tanto no recaiga resolución judicial que ponga fin al procedimiento, asumirá su representación y defensa Ministerio Fiscal. En tal caso, cuando además del cuidado de persona hubiera de procederse al de los bienes, el Juez podrá designar un administrador de los mismos, quien deberá rendirle cuentas de su gestión una vez concluida.

Artículo 300.

El Juez, en procedimiento de jurisdicción voluntaria, de oficio o a petición del Ministerio Fiscal, del propio menor o de cualquier persona capaz de comparecer en juicio, nombrará defensor a quien estime más idóneo para el cargo.

Artículo 301.

Serán aplicables al defensor judicial las causas de inhabilidad, excusas y remoción de los tutores y curadores.

Artículo 302.

El defensor judicial tendrá las atribuciones que le ha concedido el Juez, al que deberá rendir cuentas de su gestión una y concluida.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LA GUARDA DE HECHO

Artículo 303.

Sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en los artículos 203 y 22 cuando la autoridad judicial tenga conocimiento de la existencia de un guardador de hecho podrá requerirle para que informe de la situación de la persona y los

58

bienes del menor o del presunto incapaz y de su actuación en relación con los mismos, pudiendo establecer asimismo las medidas de control y vigilancia que considere oportunas.

Artículo 304.

Los actos realizados por el guardador de hecho en interés del menor o presunto incapaz no podrán ser impugnados si redundan en su utilidad.

Artículo 305. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 306.

Será aplicable al guardador de hecho lo dispuesto en el artículo 220 respecto del tutor.

Artículo 307. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 308. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 309. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 310. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 311. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 312. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

Artículo 313. (Derogado por el artículo 3 de la ley 13/1983 de 24 de octubre)

TÍTULO XI. DE LA MAYOR EDAD Y DE LA EMANCIPACIÓN

Artículo 314.

La emancipación tiene lugar:

Por la mayor edad.• Por el matrimonio del menor.• Por concesión de los que ejerzan la patria potestad.• Por concesión judicial.•

Artículo 315.

La mayor edad empieza a los dieciocho años cumplidos. Para el cómputo de los años de la mayoría de edad se incluirá completo el día del nacimiento.

Artículo 316.

El matrimonio produce de derecho la emancipación.

Artículo 317.

Para que tenga lugar la emancipación por concesión de quienes ejerzan la patria potestad, se requiere que el

59

menor tenga dieciséis años cumplidos y que la consienta. Esta emancipación se otorgará por escritura pública o por comparecencia ante el Juez encargado del Registro.

Artículo 318.

La concesión de emancipación habrá de inscribirse en el Registro Civil, no produciendo entre tanto efectos contra terceros. Concedida la emancipación, no podrá ser revocada.

Artículo 319.

Se reputará para todos los efectos como emancipado al hijo mayor de dieciséis años que con el consentimiento de los padres viviere independientemente de éstos, los padres podrán revocar este consentimiento.

Artículo 320.

El Juez podrá conceder la emancipación de los hijos mayores de dieciséis años, si éstos la pidieren y previa audiencia de los padres:

Cuando quien ejerce la patria potestad contrajere nupcias conviviere maritalmente con persona distinta del otro progenitor.

Cuando los padres vivieren separados.• Cuando concurra cualquier causa que entorpezca gravemente el ejercicio de la patria potestad.•

Artículo 321.

También podrá el Juez, previo informe del Ministerio Fiscal, conceder el beneficio de la mayor edad al sujeto a tutela mayor de dieciséis años que lo solicitare.

Artículo 322.

El mayor de edad es capaz para todos los actos de la vida civil, salvo las excepciones establecidas en casos especiales por este Código.

Artículo 323.

La emancipación habilita al menor para regir su persona y bienes como si fuera mayor: pero hasta que llegue a la mayor edad no podrá el emancipado tomar dinero a préstamo, gravar o enajenar bienes inmuebles y establecimientos mercantiles o industriales y, objetos de extraordinario valor sin consentimiento de sus padres, y a falta de ambos, sin el de su curador.

El menor emancipado podrá por sí solo comparecer en juicio.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo es aplicable también al menor que hubiere obtenido judicialmente el beneficio de la mayor edad.

Artículo 324.

Para que el casado menor de edad pueda enajenar o gravar bienes inmuebles, establecimientos mercantiles u objetos de extraordinario valor que sean comunes, basta, si es mayor el otro cónyuge, el consentimiento de los dos; si también es menor, se necesitará, además, el de los padres o curadores de uno y otro.

TÍTULO XII.

60

DEL REGISTRO DEL ESTADO CIVIL

Artículo 325.

Los actos concernientes al estado civil de las personas se harán constar en el Registro destinado a este efecto.

Artículo 326.

El Registro del estado civil comprenderá las inscripciones o anotaciones de nacimientos, matrimonios, emancipaciones, reconocimientos y legitimaciones, defunciones, naturalizaciones y vecindad, y estará a cargo de los Jueces municipales u otros funcionarios del orden civil en España y de los Agentes consulares o diplomáticos en el extranjero.

Artículo 327.

Las actas del Registro serán la prueba del estado civil, la cual sólo podrá ser suplida por otras en el caso de que no hayan existido aquéllas o hubiesen desaparecido los libros del Registro, o cuando ante los Tribunales se suscite contienda.

Artículo 328.

No será necesaria la presentación del recién nacido al funcionario encargado del registro para la inscripción del nacimiento, bastando la declaración de la persona obligada a hacerla. Esta declaración comprenderá todas las circunstancias exigidas por la ley; y será firmada por su autor, o por dos testigos a su ruego, si no pudiere firmar.

Artículo 329.

En los matrimonios canónicos será obligación de los contrayentes facilitar al funcionario representante del Estado que asista a su celebración todos los datos necesarios para su inscripción en el Registro civil. Exceptúanse los relativos a las amonestaciones, los impedimentos y su dispensa, los cuales no se harán constar en la inscripción.

Artículo 330.

No tendrán efecto alguno legal las naturalizaciones mientras no aparezcan inscritas en el Registro, cualquiera que sea la prueba con que se acrediten y la fecha en que hubiesen sido concedidas.

Artículo 331.

Los Jueces municipales y los de primera instancia, en su caso, podrán corregir las infracciones de lo dispuesto sobre el Registro civil, que no constituyan delito o falta, con multa de 20 a 100 pesetas.

Artículo 332.

Continuará rigiendo la Ley de 17 de junio de 1870 en cuanto no este modificada por los artículos precedentes.

LIBRO SEGUNDO. DE LOS BIENES, DE LA PROPIEDAD Y DE SUS MODIFICACIONES

TÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA CLASIFICACIÓN DE LOS BIENES

61

Disposición Preliminar

Artículo 333.

Todas las cosas que son o pueden ser objeto de apropiación consideran como bienes muebles o inmuebles.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LOS BIENES INMUEBLES

Artículo 334.

Son bienes inmuebles:

Las tierras, edificios, caminos y construcciones de todo género heridas al suelo.• Los árboles y plantas y los frutos pendientes, mientras estuvieren unidos a la tierra o formaren parte integrante de un inmueble.

Todo lo que esté unido a un inmueble de una manera fija, de suerte que no pueda separarse de él sin quebrantamiento de la materia deterioro del objeto.

Las estatuas, relieves, pinturas u otros objetos de uso u ornamentación, colocados en edificios o heredades por el dueño del mueble en tal forma que revele el propósito de unirlos de un modo permanente al fundo.

Las máquinas, vasos, instrumentos o utensilios destina dos por propietario de la finca a la industria o explotación que se realice en un edificio o heredad, y que directamente concurran a satisfacer las necesidades de la explotación misma.

Los viveros de animales, palomares, colmenas, estanques de peces o criaderos análogos cuando el propietario los haya colocado o los conserve con el propósito de mantenerlos unidos a la finca, y formando parte de ella de un modo permanente.

Los abonos destinados al cultivo de una heredad, que estén en las tierras donde hayan de utilizarse.• Las minas, canteras y escoriales, mientras su materia permanece unida al yacimiento y las aguas vivas o estancadas.

Los diques y construcciones que, aun cuando sean flotantes, estén destinados por su objeto y condiciones a permanecer en un punto fijo de un río, lago o costa.

Las concesiones administrativas de obras públicas y las servidumbres y demás derechos reales sobre bienes inmuebles.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS BIENES MUEBLES

Artículo 335.

Se reputan bienes muebles los susceptibles de apropiación no comprendidos en el capitulo anterior, y en general todos los que se puedan transportar de un punto a otro sin menoscabo de la cosa inmueble a que estuvieren unidos.

Artículo 336.

Tienen también la consideración de cosas muebles las rentas o pensiones, sean vitalicias o hereditarias, afectas a una persona o familia, siempre que no graven con carga real una cosa inmueble, los oficios enajenados, los contratos sobre servicios públicos y las cédulas y títulos representativos de préstamos hipotecarios.

Artículo 337.

Los bienes muebles son fungibles o no fungibles. A la primera especie pertenecen aquellos de que no puede

62

hacerse el uso adecuado a su naturaleza sin que se consuman; a la segunda especie corresponden los demás.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS BIENES SEGÚN LAS PERSONAS A QUE PERTENECEN

Artículo 338.

Los bienes son de dominio público o de propiedad privada.

Artículo 339.

Son bienes de dominio público:

Los destinados al uso público, como los caminos, canales, ríos, torrentes, puertos y puentes construidos por el Estado, las riberas, playas, radas y otros análogos.

Los que pertenecen privativamente al Estado, sin ser de uso común, y están destinados a algún servicio público o al fomento de la riqueza nacional, como las murallas, fortalezas y demás obras de defensa del territorio y las minas, mientras que no se otorgue su concesión.

Artículo 340.

Todos los demás bienes pertenecientes al Estado, en que no concurran las circunstancias expresadas en el artículo anterior, tienen el carácter de propiedad privada.

Artículo 341.

Los bienes de dominio público, cuando dejen de estar destinados al uso general o a las necesidades de la defensa del territorio, pasan a formar parte de los bienes de propiedad del Estado.

Artículo 342.

Los bienes del Patrimonio Real se rigen por su ley especial y, en lo que en ella no se halle previsto, por las disposiciones generales que sobre la propiedad particular se establecen en este Código.

Artículo 343.

Los bienes de las provincias y de los pueblos se dividen en bienes de uso público y bienes patrimoniales.

Artículo 344.

Son bienes de uso público, en las provincias y los pueblos, los caminos provinciales y los vecinales, las plazas, calles, fuentes y aguas públicas, los paseos y las obras públicas de servicio general, costeados por los mismos pueblos o provincias.

Todos los demás bienes que o nos y otros posean son patrimoniales y se regirán por las disposiciones de este Código, salvo lo dispuesto en leyes especiales.

Artículo 345.

Son bienes de propiedad privada, además de los patrimoniales del Estado, de la Provincia y del Municipio, los pertenecientes a particulares, individual o colectivamente.

63

(Disp.Comunes a los tres capitulos anteriores)

Artículo 346.

Cuando por disposición de la ley, o por declaración individual, se use la expresión de cosas o bienes inmuebles, o de cosas o bienes muebles, se entenderán comprendidas en ella respectivamente los enumerados en el capítulo 1 y en el capítulo 2.

Cuando se use tan sólo la palabra muebles no se entenderán comprendidos el dinero, los créditos, efectos de comercio, valores, alhajas, colecciones científicas o artísticas, libros, medallas, armas, ropas de vestir, caballerías o carruajes y sus arreos, granos, caldos y mercancías, ni otras cosas que no tengan por principal destino amueblar o alhajar las habitaciones, salvo el caso en que del contexto, de la ley o de la disposición individual resulte claramente lo contrario.

Artículo 347.

Cuando en venta, legado, donación o otra disposición en que se haga referencia a cosas muebles o inmuebles, se transmita su posesión o propiedad con todo lo que en ellas se halle, no se entenderán comprendidos en la transmisión el metálico, valores, créditos y acciones cuyos documentos se hallen en la cosa transmitida, a no ser que conste claramente la voluntad de extender la transmisión a tales valores y derechos.

TÍTULO II. DE LA PROPIEDAD.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA PROPIEDAD EN GENERAL

Artículo 348.

La propiedad es el derecho de gozar y disponer de una cosa, sin más limitaciones que las establecidas en las leyes. El propietario tiene acción contra el tenedor y el poseedor de la cosa para reivindicarla.

Artículo 349.

Nadie podrá ser privado de su propiedad sino por Autoridad competente y por causa justificada de utilidad pública, previa siempre la correspondiente indemnización.

Si no precediere este requisito, los Jueces ampararán y, en su caso, reintegrarán en la posesión al expropiado.

Artículo 350.

El propietario de o n terreno es dueño de su superficie y de lo que está debajo de ella, y puede hacer en el las obras, plantaciones y excavaciones que le convengan, salvas las servidumbres, y con sujeción a lo dispuesto en las leyes sobre Minas y Aguas y en los reglamentos de policía.

Artículo 351.

El tesoro pertenece al dueño del terreno en que se hallare.

Sin embargo, cuando fuere hecho el descubrimiento en propiedad ajena, o del Estado, y por casualidad, la mitad se aplicará al descubridor.

64

Si los efectos descubiertos fueren interesantes para las ciencias o las artes, podrá el Estado adquirirlos por su justo precio, que se distribuirá en conformidad a lo declarado.

Artículo 352.

Se entiende por tesoro, para los efectos de la ley, el depósito oculto e ignorado de dinero, alhajas u otros objetos preciosos, cuya legítima pertenencia no conste.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL DERECHO DE ACCESIÓN

Disposición general

Artículo 353.

La propiedad de los bienes da derecho por accesión a todo lo que ellos producen, use les une o incorpora, natural o artificialmente.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DEL DERECHO DE ACCESIÓN RESPECTO AL PRODUCTO DE LOS BIENES

Artículo 354.

Pertenecen al propietario:

Los frutos naturales.• Los frutos industriales.• Los frutos civiles.•

Artículo 355.

Son frutos naturales las producciones espontáneas de la tierra, y las crías y demás productos de los animales.

Son frutos industriales los que producen los predios de cualquiera especie a beneficio del cultivo o del trabajo.

Son frutos civiles el alquiler de los edificios, el precio del arrendamiento de tierras y el importe de las rentas perpetuas, vitalicias u otras análogas.

Artículo 356.

El que percibe los frutos tiene la obligación de abonar los gastos hechos por un tercero para su producción, recolección y conservación.

Artículo 357.

No se reputan frutos naturales, o industriales, sino los que están manifiestos o nacidos.

Respecto a los animales, hasta que estén en el vientre de su madre, aunque no hayan nacido.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL DERECHO DE ACCESIÓN RESPECTO A LOS BIENES INMUEBLES.

Artículo 358.

65

Lo edificado, plantado o sembrado en predios ajenos, y las mejoras o reparaciones hechas en ellos, pertenecen al dueño de los mismos con sujeción a lo que se dispone en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 359.

Todas las obras, siembras o plantaciones se presumen hechas por el propietario y a su costa, mientras no se pruebe lo contrario.

Artículo 360.

El propietario del suelo que hiciere en él, por sí o por otro, plantaciones, construcciones u obras con materia les ajenos, debe abonar su valor; y, si hubiere obrado de mala fe, estará, además, obligado al resarcimiento de daños y perjuicios. El dueño de los materiales tendrá derecho a retirar los sólo en el caso de que pueda hacerlo sin menoscabo de la obra construida, y sin que por ello perezcan las plantaciones construcciones u obras ejecutadas.

Artículo 361.

El dueño del terreno en que se edificare, sembrare o plantare de buena fe, tendrá derecho a hacer suya la obra, siembra o plantación, previa la indemnización establecida en los artículos 453 y 454, o a obligar al que fabricó o plantó a pagarle el precio del terreno, y al que sembró, la renta correspondiente.

Artículo 362.

El que edifica, planta o siembra de mala fe en terreno ajeno, pierde lo edificado, plantado o sembrado, sin derecho a indemnización.

Artículo 363.

El dueño del terreno en que se haya edificado, plantado o sembrado con mala fe puede exigir la demolición de la obra o que se arranque la plantación y siembra, reponiendo las cosas a su estado primitivo a costa del que edificó, plantó o sembró.

Artículo 364.

Cuando haya habido mala fe, no sólo por parte del que edifica, siembra o planta en terreno ajeno, sino también por parte del dueño de éste, los derechos de o no y otro serán los mismos que tendrían si hubieran procedido ambos de buena fe.

Se entiende haber mala fe por parte del dueño siempre que el hecho se hubiere ejecutado a su vista, ciencia y paciencia, sin oponerse.

Artículo 365.

Si los materiales, plantas o semillas pertenecen a un tercero que no ha procedido de mala de, el dueño del terreno deberá responder de su valor subsidiariamente y en el solo caso de que el que los empleó no tenga bienes con qué pagar.

No tendrá lugar esta disposición si el propietario usa del derecho que le concede el artículo 363.

Artículo 366.

66

Pertenece a los dueños de las heredades confinantes con las riberas de los ríos el acrecentamiento que aquéllas reciben paulatinamente por efecto de la corriente de las aguas.

Artículo 367.

Los dueños de las heredades confinantes con estanques o lagunas no adquieren el terreno descubierto por la disminución natural de las aguas, ni pierden el que éstas inundan en las crecidas extraordinarias.

Artículo 368.

Cuando la corriente de un río, arroyo o torrente segrega de una heredad de su ribera una porción conocida de terreno y la transporta a otra heredad, el dueño de la finca a que pertenecía la parte segregada conserva la propiedad de ésta.

Artículo 369.

Los árboles arrancados y transportados por la corriente de las aguas pertenecen al propietario del terreno a donde vayan a parar, si no los reclaman dentro de un mes los antiguos dueños, Si éstos los reclaman, deberán abonar los gastos ocasionados en recogerlos o ponerlos en lugar seguro.

Artículo 370.

Los cauces de los ríos, que quedan abandonados por variar naturalmente el curso de las aguas, pertenecen a los dueños de los terrenos ribereños en toda su longitud respectiva a cada uno, Si el cauce abandonado separaba heredades de distintos dueños, la nueva línea divisoria correrá equidistante de unas y otras.

Artículo 371.

Las islas que se forman en los mares adyacentes a las costas de España y en los ríos navegables y flotables, pertenecen al Estado.

Artículo 372.

Cuando en un río navegable y flotable, variando naturalmente de dirección, se abre un nuevo cauce en heredad privada, este cauce entrará en el dominio público. El dueño de la heredad lo recobrará siempre que las aguas vuelvan a dejarlo en seco, ya naturalmente, ya por trabajos legalmente autorizados al efecto.

Artículo 373.

Las islas que por sucesiva acumulación de arrastres superiores se van formando en los ríos, pertenecen a los dueños de las márgenes u orillas más cercanas a cada una, o a los de ambas márgenes si la isla se hallase en medio del río, dividiéndose entonces longitudinalmente por mitad. Si una sola isla así formada distase de una margen más que de otra, será por completo dueño de ella el de la margen más cercana.

Artículo 374.

Cuando se divide en brazos la corriente del río, dejando aislada una heredad o parte de ella, el dueño de la misma conserva su propiedad. Igualmente la conserva si queda separada de la heredad por la corriente una porción de terreno.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DEL DERECHO DE ACCESIÓN RESPECTO A LOS BIENES MUEBLES

67

Artículo 375.

Cuando dos cosas muebles, pertenecientes a distintos dueños, se unen de tal manera que vienen a formar una sola sin que intervenga mala fe, el propietario de la principal adquiere la accesoria, indemnizado su valor al anterior dueño.

Artículo 376.

Se reputa principal, entre dos cosas incorporadas, aquella a que se ha o nido otra por adorno, o para su uso de perfección.

Artículo 377.

Si no puede determinarse por la regla del artículo anterior cuál de las cosas incorporadas es la principal, se reputará tal el objeto de más valor, y entre dos objetos de igual valor, el de mayor volumen. En la pintura y escultura, en los escritos, impresos, grabados y litografías, se considerará accesoria la tabla, el metal, la piedra, el lienzo, el papel o el pergamino.

Artículo 378.

Cuando las cosas unidas pueden separarse sin detrimento, los dueños respectivos pueden exigir la separación.

Sin embargo, cuando la cosa unida para el uso, embellecimiento o perfección de otra, es mucho mas preciosa que la cosa principal el dueño de aquélla puede exigir su separación, aunque sufra algún detrimento la otra a la que se incorporó.

Artículo 379.

Cuando el dueño de la cosa accesoria ha hecho su incorporación de mala fe pierde la cosa incorporada y tiene la obligación de indemnizar al propietario de la principal los perjuicios que haya sufrido.

Si el que ha procedido de mala fe es el dueño de la cosa principal, el que lo sea de la accesoria tendrá derecho a optar entre que aquél le pague su valor o que la cosa de su pertenencia se separe, aunque para ello haya que destruir la principal; y en ambos casos, además, habrá lugar a la indemnización de daños y perjuicios.

Si cualquiera de los dueños ha hecho la incorporación a vista, ciencia y paciencia y sin oposición del otro, se determinarán los derechos respectivos en la forma dispuesta para el caso de haber obrado de buena fe.

Artículo 380.

Siempre que el dueño de la materia empleada sin su consentimiento tenga derecho a indemnización, puede exigir que ésta consista en la entrega de una cosa igual en especie y valor, y en todas sus circunstancias, a la empleada, o bien en el precio de ella, según tasación pericial.

Artículo 381.

Si por voluntad de sus dueños de mezclan dos cosas de igual o diferente especie, o si la mezcla se verifica por casualidad, y en este último caso las cosas no son separables sin detrimento, cada propietario adquirirá un derecho proporcional a la parte que le corresponda atendido el valor de las cosas mezcladas o confundidas.

Artículo 382.

68

Si por voluntad de uno sólo, pero con buena fe, se mezclan o confunden dos cosas de igual o diferente especie, los derechos de los propietarios se determinarán por, lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior. Si el que hizo la mezcla o confusión obró de mala fe, perderá la cosa de su pertenencia mezclada o confundida, además de quedar obligado a la indemnización de los perjuicios causados al dueño de la cosa con que hizo la mezcla.

Artículo 383.

El que de buena fe empleó materia ajena en todo o en parte para formar una obra de nueva especie, hará suya la obra, indemnizando el valor de la materia al dueño de ésta.

Si ésta es más preciosa que la obra en que se empleó o superior en valor, el dueño de ella podrá, a su elección, quedarse con la nueva especie, previa indemnización del valor de la obra, o pedir indemnización de la materia.

Si en la formación de la nueva especie intervino mala fe, el dueño de la materia tiene el derecho de quedarse con la obra sin pagar nada al autor, o de exigir de éste que le indemnice el valor de la materia y los perjuicios que se le hayan seguido.

CAPÍTULO III. DEL DESLINDE Y AMOJONAMIENTO

Artículo 384.

Todo propietario tiene derecho a deslindar su propiedad, con citación de los dueños de los predios colindantes.

La misma facultad corresponderá a los que tengan derechos reales.

Artículo 385.

El deslinde se hará en conformidad con los títulos de cada propietario, y, a falta de títulos suficientes, por lo que resultare de la posesión en que estuvieren los colindantes.

Artículo 386.

Si los títulos no determinasen el limite o área perteneciente a cada propietario, y la cuestión no pudiera resolverse por la posesión o por otro medio de prueba, el deslinde se hará distribuyendo el terreno objeto de la contienda en partes iguales.

Artículo 387.

Si los títulos de los colindantes indicasen un espacio mayor o menor del que comprende la totalidad del terreno, el aumento o la falta se distribuirá proporcionalmente.

CAPÍTULO IV. DEL DERECHO DE CERRAR LAS FINCAS RÚSTICAS

Artículo 388.

Todo propietario podrá cerrar o cercar sus heredades por medio de paredes, zanjas, setos vivos o muertos, o de cualquier otro modo, sin perjuicio de las servidumbres constituidas sobre las mismas.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LOS EDIFICIOS RUINOSOS Y DE LOS ARBOLES QUE AMENAZAN CAERSE

69

Artículo 389.

Si un edificio, pared, columna o cualquiera otra construcción amenazase ruina, el propietario estará obligado a su demolición, o a ejecutar las obras necesarias para evitar su caída.

Si no lo verificare el propietario de la obra ruinosa, la autoridad podrá hacerla demoler a costa del mismo.

Artículo 390.

Cuando algún árbol corpulento amenazare caerse de modo que pueda causar perjuicios a una finca ajena o a los transeúntes por una vía pública o particular, el dueño del árbol está obligado a arrancarlo y retirarlo; y si no lo verificare, se hará a su costa por mandato de la autoridad.

Artículo 391.

En los casos de los dos artículos anteriores, si el edificio o árbol se cayere, se estará a lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.907 y 1.908.

TÍTULO III. DE LA COMUNIDAD DE BIENES

Artículo 392.

Hay comunidad cuando la propiedad de una cosa o de un derecho pertenece pro indiviso a varias personas.

A falta de contratos, o de disposiciones especiales, se regirá la comunidad por las prescripciones de este título.

Artículo 393.

El concurso de los partícipes, tanto en los beneficios como en las cargas, será proporcional a sus respectivas cuotas. Se presumirán iguales, mientras no se pruebe lo contrario, las porciones correspondientes a los partícipes en la comunidad.

Artículo 394.

Cada partícipe podrá servirse de las cosas comunes, siempre que disponga de ellas conforme a su destino y de manera que no perjudique el interés de la comunidad, ni impida a los copartícipes utilizarlas según su derecho.

Artículo 395.

Todo copropietario tendrá derecho para obligar a los partícipes a contribuir a los gastos de conservación de la cosa o derecho común. Sólo podrá eximirse de esta obligación el que renuncie a la parte que le pertenece en el dominio.

Artículo 396.

Los diferentes pisos o locales de un edificio o las partes de ellos susceptibles de aprovechamiento independiente por tener salida propia a un elemento común de aquél o a la vía pública, podrán ser, objeto de propiedad separada, que llevará inherente un derecho de copropiedad sobre los demás elementos del edificio necesarios para su adecuado uso y disfrute, tales como el suelo, vuelo, cimentaciones, pasos, muros, fosos, patios, poyos, escaleras, porterías, ascensores, corredores, cubiertas, canalizaciones y servidumbres.

70

Las partes en copropiedad no son en ningún caso susceptibles de división y sólo podrán ser enajenadas, gravadas o embargadas juntamente con la parte determinada privativa de la que son anejo inseparable.

En caso de enajenación de un piso o local, los dueños de los demás, por este solo título, no tendrán derecho de tanteo ni de retracto.

Esta forma de propiedad se rige por las disposiciones legales especiales y, en lo que las mismas permitan, por la voluntad de los interesados.

Artículo 397.

Ninguno de los condueños podrá, sin consentimiento de los demás, hacer alteraciones en la cosa común, aunque de ellas pudieran resultar ventajas para todos.

Artículo 398.

Para la administración y mejor disfrute de la cosa común serán obligatorios los acuerdos de la mayoría de los participes, No habrá mayoría sino cuando el acuerdo esté tomado por los participes que representen la mayor cantidad de los intereses que constituyan el objeto de la comunidad.

Si no resultare mayoría, o el acuerdo de ésta fuere gravemente perjudicial a los interesados en la cosa común, el Juez proveerá, a instancia de parte, lo que corresponda, incluso nombrar un administrador.

Cuando parte de la cosa perteneciere privadamente a un partícipe o a algunos de ellos, y otra fuere común, sólo a ésta será aplicable la disposición anterior.

Artículo 399.

Todo condueño tendrá la plena propiedad de su parte y la de los frutos y utilidades que le correspondan, pudiendo en su consecuencia enajenarla, cederla o hipotecarla, y aun sustituir otro en su aprovechamiento, salvo si se tratare de derechos personales, Pero el efecto de la enajenación o de la hipoteca con relación a los condueños estará limitado a la porción que se le adjudique en la división al cesar la comunidad.

Artículo 400.

Ningún copropietario estará obligado a permanecer en la comunidad. Cada uno de ellos podrá pedir en cualquier tiempo que se divida la cosa común.

Esto no obstante, será válido el pacto de conservar la cosa indivisa por tiempo determinado, que no exceda de diez años. Este plazo podrá prorrogarse por nueva convención.

Artículo 401.

Sin embargo de lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, los copropietarios no podrán exigir la división de la cosa común, cuando de hacerla resulte inservible para el uso a que se destina.

Si se tratare de un edificio cuyas características lo permitan, a solicitud de cualquiera de los comuneros, la división podrá realizarse mediante la adjudicación de pisos o locales independientes, con sus elementos comunes anejos, en la forma prevista por el artículo 396.

Artículo 402.

71

La división de la cosa común podrá hacerse por los interesados, o por árbitros o amigables componedores nombrados a voluntad de los partícipes.

En el caso de verificarse por árbitros o amigables componedores, deberán formar partes proporcionales al derecho de cada uno, evitando en cuanto sea posible los suplementos a metálico.

Artículo 403.

Los acreedores o cesionarios de los partícipes podrán concurrir a la división de la cosa común y oponerse a la que se verifique sin su concurso, Pero no podrán impugnar la división consumada, excepto en caso de fraude, o en el de haberse verificado no obstante la oposición formalmente interpuesta para impedirla, y salvo siempre los derechos del deudor o del cedente para sostener su validez.

Artículo 404.

Cuando la cosa fuere esencialmente indivisible, y los condueños no convinieren en que se adjudique a uno de ellos indemnizado a los demás, se venderá y repartirá su precio

Artículo 405.

La división de una cosa común no perjudicará a tercero, el cual conservará los derechos de hipoteca, servidumbre u otros derechos reales que le pertenecieran antes de hacer la partición, Conservarán igualmente su fuerza, no obstante la división, los derechos personales que pertenezcan a un tercero contra la comunidad.

Artículo 406.

Serán aplicables a la división entre los partícipes en la comunidad las reglas concernientes a la división de la herencia.

TÍTULO IV. DE ALGUNAS PROPIEDADES ESPECIALES

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LAS AGUAS

Nota del Jurisweb; Estos artículos están derrogados por la Ley de aguas en cuanto se opongan a la misma.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DEL DOMINIO DE LAS AGUAS.

Artículo 407.

Son de dominio público;

Los ríos y sus cauces naturales.• Las aguas continuas o discontinuas de manantiales y arroyos que corran por sus cauces naturales, y estos mismos cauces.

Las aguas que nazcan continua o discontinuamente en terrenos del mismo dominio público.• Los lagos y lagunas formados por la naturaleza en terrenos públicos y sus álveos.• Las aguas pluviales que discurran por barrancos o ramblas, cuyo cauce sea también del dominio público.• Las aguas subterráneas que existan en terrenos públicos.• Las aguas halladas en la zona de trabajos de obras públicas, aunque se ejecuten por concesionario.• Las aguas que nazcan continua o discontinuamente en predios de particulares, del Estado, de la provincia o•

72

de los pueblos, desde que salgan de dichos predios. Los sobrantes de las fuentes, cloacas y establecimiento públicos.•

Artículo 408.

Son de dominio privado:

Las aguas continuas o discontinuas que nazcan en predios de dominio privado, mientras discurran por ellos.• Los lagos y lagunas y sus álveos, formados por la naturaleza en dichos predios.• Las aguas subterráneas que se hallen en éstos.• Las aguas pluviales que en los mismos caigan, mientras n traspasen sus linderos.• Los cauces de aguas corrientes, continuas o discontinuas formados por aguas pluviales, y los de los arroyos que atraviesen fincas que no sean de dominio público.

En toda acequia o acueducto, el agua, el cauce, los cajeros y las márgenes serán considerados como parte integrante de la heredad o edificio a que vayan destinadas las aguas. Los dueños de los predios, por los cuales o por cuyos linderos pase el acueducto, no podrán alegar dominio sobre él, ni derecho al aprovechamiento de su cauce o márgenes, a no fundarse en títulos de propiedad expresivos del derecho o dominio que reclamen.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL APROVECHAMIENTO DE LAS AGUAS PÚBLICAS.

Artículo 409.

El aprovechamiento de las aguas públicas se adquiere:

Por concesión administrativa.• Por prescripción de veinte años.•

Los límites de los derechos y obligaciones de estos aprovechamientos serán los que resulten, en el primer caso, de los términos de la concesión, y en el segundo, del modo y forma en que se haya usado de las aguas.

Artículo 410.

Toda concesión de aprovechamiento de aguas se entiende sin perjuicio de tercero.

Artículo 411.

El derecho al aprovechamiento de aguas publicas se extingue por la caducidad de la concesión y por el no uso durante veinte años.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DEL APROVECHAMIENTO DE LAS AGUAS DE DOMINIO PRIVADO.

Artículo 412.

El dueño de un predio en que nace un manantial o arroyo, continuo o discontinuo, puede aprovechar sus aguas mientras discurran por él; pero las sobrantes entran en la condición de públicas, y su aprovechamiento se rige por la Ley Especial de Aguas.

Artículo 413.

El dominio privado de los álveos de aguas pluviales no autoriza para hacer labores u obras que varíen su curso en perjuicio de tercero, ni tampoco aquellas cuya destrucción, por la fuerza de las avenidas, pueda causarlo.

73

Artículo 414.

Nadie puede penetrar en propiedad privada para buscar aguas u usar de ellas sin licencia de los propietarios.

Artículo 415.

El dominio del dueño de un predio sobre las aguas que nacen en él no perjudica los derechos que legítimamente hayan podido adquirir a su aprovechamiento los de los predios inferiores.

Artículo 416.

Todo dueño de un predio tiene la facultad de construir dentro de su propiedad depósitos para conservar las aguas pluviales, con tal que no cause perjuicio al público ni a tercero.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LAS AGUAS SUBTERRÁNEAS.

Artículo 417.

Sólo el propietario de un predio u otra persona con su licencia puede investigar en él aguas subterráneas.

La investigación de aguas subterráneas en terrenos de dominio público sólo puede hacerse con licencia administrativa.

Artículo 418.

Las aguas alumbradas conforme a la Ley Especial de Aguas pertenecen al que las alumbró.

Artículo 419.

Si el dueño de aguas alumbradas las dejare abandonadas a su curso natural, serán de dominio público.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 420.

El dueño de un predio en que existan obras defensivas para contener el agua, o en que por la variación de su curso sea necesario construirlas de nuevo, está obligado, a su elección, a hacer los reparos o construcciones necesarias o a tolerar que, sin perjuicio suyo, las hagan los dueños de los predios que experimenten o estén manifiestamente expuestos a experimentar daños.

Artículo 421.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior es aplicable al caso en que sea necesario desembarazar algún predio de las materias cuya acumulación o caída impida el curso de las aguas con daño o peligro de tercero.

Artículo 422.

Todos los propietarios que participen del beneficio proveniente de las obras de que tratan los dos artículos anteriores, están obligados a contribuir a los gastos de su ejecución en proporción a su interés. Los que por su culpa hubiesen ocasionado el daño serán responsables de los gastos.

Artículo 423.

74

La propiedad y uso de las aguas pertenecientes a corporaciones o particulares están sujetos a la Ley de Expropiación por causa de utilidad pública.

Artículo 424.

Las disposiciones de este título no perjudican los derechos adquiridos con anterioridad, ni tampoco al dominio privado que tienen los propietarios de aguas de acequias, fuentes o manantiales, en virtud del cual las aprovechan, venden o permutan como propiedad particular.

Artículo 425.

En todo lo que no esté expresamente prevenido por las disposiciones de este capítulo se estará a lo mandado por la Ley Especial de Aguas.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS MINERALES

Artículo 426.

Todo español o extranjero podrá hacer libremente en terreno de dominio público calicatas o excavaciones que no excedan de diez metros de extensión en longitud o profundidad con objeto de descubrir minerales, pero deberá dar aviso previamente a la autoridad local. En terrenos de propiedad privada no se podrán abrir calicatas sin que preceda permiso del dueño o del que le represente.

Artículo 427.

Los límites del derecho mencionado en el artículo anterior, las formalidades previas y condiciones para su ejercicio, la designación de las materias que deben considerarse como minerales, y la determinación de los derechos que corresponden al dueño del suelo y a los descubridores de los minerales en el caso de concesión, se regirán por la Ley Especial de Minería.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA PROPIEDAD INTELECTUAL

Artículo 428.

El autor de una obra literaria, científica o artística, tiene el derecho de explotarla y disponer de ella a su voluntad.

Artículo 429.

La Ley sobre propiedad intelectual determina las personas a quienes pertenece ese derecho, la forma de su ejercicio y el tiempo de su duración. En los casos no previstos ni resueltos por dicha ley especial se aplicarán las reglas generales establecidas en este Código sobre la propiedad.

TÍTULO V. DE LA POSESIÓN

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA POSESIÓN Y SUS ESPECIES

Artículo 430.

75

Posesión natural es la tenencia de una cosa o el disfrute de un derecho por una persona. Posesión civil es esa misma tenencia o disfrute o nidos a la intención de haber la cosa o derecho como suyos.

Artículo 431.

La posesión se ejerce en las cosas o en los derechos por la misma persona que los tiene y los disfruta, o por otra en su nombre.

Artículo 432.

La posesión en los bienes y derechos puede tenerse en uno de dos conceptos: o en el de dueño, o en el de tenedor de la cosa o derecho para conservarlos o disfrutarlos, perteneciendo el dominio a otra persona.

Artículo 433.

Se reputa poseedor de buena fe al que ignora que en su título o modo de adquirir exista vicio que lo invalide. Se reputa poseedor de mala fe al que se halla en el caso contrario.

Artículo 434.

La buena fe se presume siempre, y al que afirma la mala fe de un poseedor corresponde la prueba.

Artículo 435.

La posesión adquirida de buena fe no pierde este carácter sino en el caso y desde el momento en que existan actos que acrediten que el poseedor no ignora que posee la cosa indebidamente.

Artículo 436.

Se presume que la posesión se sigue disfrutando en el mismo concepto en que se adquirió, mientras no se pruebe lo contrario.

Artículo 437.

Sólo pueden ser objeto de posesión las cosas y derechos que sean susceptibles de apropiación.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA ADQUISICIÓN DE LA POSESIÓN

Artículo 438.

La posesión se adquiere por la ocupación material de la cosa o derecho poseído, o por el hecho de quedar éstos sujetos a la acción de nuestra voluntad, o por los actos propios y formalidades legales establecidas para adquirir tal derecho.

Artículo 439.

Puede adquirirse la posesión por la misma persona que va a disfrutarla, por su representante legal, por su mandatario y por un tercero sin mandato alguno; pero en este último caso no se entenderá adquirida la posesión hasta que la persona en cuyo nombre se haya verificado el acto posesorio lo ratifique.

Artículo 440.

76

La posesión de los bienes hereditarios se entiende transmitida al heredero sin interrupción y desde el momento de la muerte del causante, en el caso de que llegue a adirse la herencia. El que validamente repudia una herencia se entiende que no la ha poseído en ningún momento.

Artículo 441.

En ningún caso puede adquirirse violentamente la posesión mientras exista un poseedor que se oponga a ello. El que se crea con acción o derecho para privar a otro de la tenencia de una cosa, siempre que el tenedor resista la entrega, deberá solicitar el auxilio de la autoridad competente.

Artículo 442.

El que suceda por título hereditario no sufrirá las consecuencias de una posesión viciosa de su causante, si no se demuestra que tenía conocimiento de los vicios que la afectaban; pero los efectos de la posesión de buena fe no le aprovecharán sino desde la fecha de la muerte del causante.

Artículo 443.

Los menores y los incapacitados pueden adquirir la posesión de las cosas; pero necesitan de la asistencia de sus representantes legítimos para usar de los derechos que de la posesión nazcan a su favor.

Artículo 444.

Los actos meramente tolerados, y los ejecutados clandestinamente y sin conocimiento del poseedor de una cosa, o con violencia, no afectan a la posesión.

Artículo 445.

La posesión, como hecho, no puede reconocerse en dos personalidades distintas, fuera de los casos de indivisión. Si surgiere contienda sobre el hecho de la posesión, será preferido el poseedor actual; si resultaren dos poseedores, el más antiguo; si las fechas de las posesiones fueren las mismas, el que presente título; y, si todas estas condiciones fuesen iguales, se constituirá en depósito o guarda judicial la cosa, mientras se decide sobre su posesión o propiedad por los trámites correspondientes.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA POSESIÓN

Artículo 446.

Todo poseedor tiene derecho a ser respetado en su posesión; y, si fuere inquietado en ella, deberá ser amparado o restituido en dicha posesión por los medios que las leyes de procedimiento establecen.

Artículo 447.

Sólo la posesión que se adquiere y se disfruta en concepto de dueño puede servir de título para adquirir el dominio.

Artículo 448.

El poseedor en concepto de dueño tiene a su favor la presunción legal de que posee con justo título, y no se le puede obligar a exhibirlo.

77

Artículo 449.

La posesión de una cosa raíz supone la de los muebles y objetos que se hallen dentro de ella, mientras no conste o se acredite que deben ser excluidos.

Artículo 450.

Cada uno de los partícipes de una cosa que se posea en común, se entenderá que ha poseído exclusivamente la parte que al dividirse le cupiere durante todo el tiempo que duró la indivisión. La interrupción en la posesión del todo o parte de una cosa poseída en común perjudicará por igual a todos.

Artículo 451.

El poseedor de buena fe hace suyos los frutos por percibidos mientras no sea interrumpida legalmente la posesión.

Se entienden percibidos los frutos naturales e industriales desde que se alzan o separan.

Los frutos civiles se consideran producidos por días, y pertenecen al poseedor de buena fe en esa proporción.

Artículo 452.

Si al tiempo en que cesare la buena fe se hallaren pendientes algunos frutos naturales o industriales, tendrá el poseedor derecho a los gastos que hubiese hecho para su producción, y además a la parte del producto líquido de la cosecha proporcional al tiempo de su posesión.

Las cargas se prorratearán del mismo modo entre los dos poseedores.

El propietario de la cosa puede, si quiere, conceder al poseedor de buena fe la facultad de concluir el cultivo y la recolección de los frutos pendientes, como indemnización de la parte de gastos de cultivo y del producto liquido que le pertenece; el poseedor de buena fe que por cualquier motivo no quiera aceptar esta concesión, perderá el derecho a ser indemnizado de otro modo.

Artículo 453.

Los gastos necesarios se abonan a todo poseedor; pero sólo el de buena fe podrá retener la cosa hasta que se le satisfagan, los gastos útiles se abonan al poseedor de buena fe con el mismo derecho de retención, pudiendo optar el que le hubiese vencido en su posesión por satisfacer el importe de los gastos, o por abonar el aumento de valor que por ellos haya adquirido la cosa.

Artículo 454.

Los gastos de puro lujo o mero recreo no son abonables al poseedor de buena fe; pero podrá llevarse los adornos con que hubiese embellecido la cosa principal si no sufriere deterioro, y si el sucesor en la posesión no prefiere abonar el importe de lo gastado.

Artículo 455.

El poseedor de mala fe abonará los frutos percibidos y los que el poseedor legítimo hubiera podido percibir, y sólo tendrá derecho a ser reintegrado de los gastos necesarios hechos para la conservación de la cosa. Los gastos hechos en mejoras de lujo y recreo no se abonarán al poseedor de mala fe; pero podrá éste llevarse los objetos en que esos gastos se hayan invertido, siempre que la cosa no sufra deterioro, y el poseedor legítimo

78

no prefiera quedarse con ellos abonando el valor que tengan en el momento de entrar en la posesión.

Artículo 456.

Las mejoras provenientes de la naturaleza o del tiempo ceden siempre en beneficio del que haya vencido en la posesión.

Artículo 457.

El poseedor de buena fe no responde del deterioro o perdida de la cosa poseída, fuera de los casos en que se justifique haber procedido con dolo. El poseedor de mala fe responde del deterioro o pérdida en todo caso, y aun de los ocasionados por fuerza mayor cuando maliciosamente haya retrasado la entrega de la cosa a su poseedor legítimo.

Artículo 458.

El que obtenga la posesión no está obligado a abonar mejoras que hayan dejado de existir al adquirir la cosa.

Artículo 459.

El poseedor actual que demuestre su posesión en época anterior, se presume que ha poseído también durante el tiempo intermedio, mientras no se pruebe lo contrario.

Artículo 460.

El poseedor puede perder su posesión:

Por abandono de la cosa.• Por cesión hecha a otro por título oneroso o gratuito• Por destrucción o pérdida total de la cosa, o por quedar ésta fuera del comercio.• Por la posesión de otro, aun contra la voluntad del antiguo poseedor, si la nueva posesión hubiese durado más de un año.

Artículo 461.

La posesión de la cosa mueble no se entiende perdida mientras se halle bajo el poder del poseedor, aunque éste ignore accidentalmente su paradero.

Artículo 462.

La posesión de las cosas inmuebles y de los derechos reales no se entiende perdida, ni transmitida para los efectos de la prescripción en perjuicio de tercero, sino con sujeción a lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria.

Artículo 463.

Los actos relativos a la posesión, ejecutados o consentidos por el que posee una cosa ajena como mero tenedor para disfrutarla o retenerla en cualquier concepto, no obligan ni perjudican al dueño a no ser que éste hubiese otorgado a aquél facultades expresas para ejecutarlos o los ratificare con posterioridad.

Artículo 464.

La posesión de los bienes muebles adquirida de buena fe equivale al título. Sin embargo, el que hubiese

79

perdido una cosa mueble o hubiese sido privado de ella ilegalmente, podrá reivindicarla de quien la posea.

Si el poseedor de la cosa mueble perdida o sustraída la hubiese adquirido de buena fe en venta pública, no podrá el propietario obtener la restitución sin reembolsar el precio dado por ella.

Tampoco podrá el dueño de cosas empeñadas en los Montes de Piedad establecidos con autorización del Gobierno obtener la restitución, cualquiera que sea la persona que la hubiese empeñado, sin reintegrar antes al Establecimiento la cantidad del empeño y los intereses vencidos.

En cuanto a las adquiridas en Bolsa, feria o mercado, o de un comerciante legalmente establecido y dedicado habitualmente al tráfico de objetos análogos, se estará a lo que dispone el Código de Comercio.

Artículo 465.

Las animales fieros sólo se poseen mientras se hallen en nuestro poder; los domesticados o amansados se asimilan a los mansos o domésticos si conservan la costumbre de volver a la casa del poseedor.

Artículo 466.

El que recupera, conforme a derecho, la posesión indebidamente perdida, se entiende para todos los efectos que puedan redundar en su beneficio que la ha disfrutado sin interrupción.

TÍTULO VI. DEL USUFRUCTO, DEL USO Y DE LA HABITACIÓN

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DEL USUFRUCTO

SECCIÓN PRIMERA.

DEL USUFRUCTO EN GENERAL

Artículo 467.

El usufructo da derecho a disfrutar los bienes ajenos con la obligación de conservar su forma y sustancia, a no ser que el título de su constitución o la ley autoricen otra cosa.

Artículo 468.

El usufructo se constituye por la ley, por la voluntad de los particulares manifestada en actos entre vivos o en última voluntad, y por prescripción.

Artículo 469.

Podrá constituirse el usufructo en todo o parte de los frutos de la cosa, a favor de una o varias personas, simultánea o sucesivamente, y en todo caso desde o hasta cierto día, puramente o bajo condición.

También puede constituirse sobre un derecho, siempre que no sea personalísimo o intransmisible.

Artículo 470.

Los derechos y las obligaciones del usufructo serán los que determine el título constitutivo del usufructo, o

80

por insuficiencia de éstos, se observarán las disposiciones contenidas en las dos secciones siguientes.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS DERECHOS DEL USUFRUCTUARIO

Artículo 471.

El usufructuario tendrá derecho a percibir todos los frutos naturales, industriales y civiles de los bienes usufructuados. Respecto de los tesoros que se hallaren en la finca será considerado como extraño.

Artículo 472.

Los frutos naturales o industriales pendientes al tiempo de comenzar el usufructo pertenecen al usufructuario.

Los pendientes al tiempo de extinguirse el usufructo pertenecen al propietario.

En los precedentes casos, el usufructuario, al comenzar el usufructo, no tiene obligación de abonar al propietario ninguno de los gastos hechos; pero el propietario está obligado a abonar al fin del usufructo, con el producto de los frutos pendientes, los gastos ordinarios de cultivo, simientes y otros semejantes, hechos por el usufructuario.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo no perjudica los derechos de tercero, adquiridos al comenzar o terminar el usufructo.

Artículo 473.

Si el usufructuario hubiere arrendado las tierras o heredades dadas en usufructo y acabare éste antes de terminar el arriendo, sólo percibirán él o sus herederos y sucesores la parte proporcional de la renta que debiere pagar el arrendatario.

Artículo 474.

Los frutos civiles se entienden percibidos día por día, y pertenecen al usufructuario en proporción al tiempo que dure el usufructo.

Artículo 475.

Si el usufructo se constituye sobre el derecho a percibir una renta u una pensión periódica, bien consista en metálico, bien en frutos, o los intereses de obligaciones o títulos al portador, se considerará cada vencimiento como productos o frutos de aquel derecho.

Si consistiere en el goce de los beneficios que diese una participación en una explotación industrial o mercantil cuyo reparto no tuviese vencimiento fijo, tendrán aquéllos la misma consideración.

En uno y otro caso se repartirán como frutos civiles y se aplicarán en la forma que previene el artículo anterior.

Artículo 476.

No corresponden al usufructuario de un predio en que existen minas los productos de las denunciadas, concedidas o que se hallen en laboreo al principiar el usufructo, a no ser que expresamente se le concedan en el título constitutivo de éste, o que sea universal.

81

Podrá, sin embargo, el usufructuario extraer piedras, cal y yeso de las canteras para reparaciones u obras que estuviere obligado a hacer o que fueren necesarias.

Artículo 477.

Sin embargo de lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, en el usufructo legal podrá el usufructuario explotar las minas denunciadas, concedidas o en laboreo, existentes en el predio, haciendo suya la mitad de las utilidades que resulten después de rebajar los gastos, que satisfará por mitad con el propietario.

Artículo 478.

La calidad de usufructuario no priva al que la tiene del derecho que a todos concede la Ley de Minas para denunciar y obtener la concesión de las que existan en los predios usufructuados, en la forma y condiciones que la misma ley establece.

Artículo 479.

El usufructuario tendrá el derecho de disfrutar del aumento que reciba por accesión la cosa usufructuada, de las servidumbres que tenga a su favor, y en general de todos los beneficios inherentes a la misma.

Artículo 480.

Podrá el usufructuario aprovechar por sí mismo la cosa usufructuada, arrendarla a otro y enajenar su derecho de usufructo, aunque sea a título gratuito, pero todos los contratos que celebre como tal usufructuario se resolverán al fin del usufructo, salvo el arrendamiento de las fincas rústicas, el cual se considerará subsistente durante el año agrícola.

Artículo 481.

Si el usufructo comprendiera cosas que sin consumirse se deteriorasen poco a poco por el o so, el usufructuario tendrá derecho a servirse de ellas, empleándolas según su destino, y no estará obligado a restituirlas al concluir el usufructo sino en el estado en que encuentren; pero con la obligación de indemnizar al propietario del deterioro que hubieran sufrido por su dolo o negligencia.

Artículo 482.

Si el usufructo comprendiera cosas que no se puedan usar sin consumirlas, el usufructuario tendrá derecho a servirse de ellas con la obligación de pagar el importe de su avalúo al terminar el usufructo si se hubiesen dado estimadas. Cuando no se hubiesen estimado tendrá el derecho de restituirlas en igual cantidad y calidad, o pagar su precio corriente al tiempo de cesar el usufructo.

Artículo 483.

El usufructuario de viñas, olivares u otros árboles o arbustos podrá aprovecharse de los pies muertos, y aun de los tronchados o arrancados por accidente, con la obligación de reemplazarlos por otros.

Artículo 484.

Si a consecuencia de un siniestro o caso extraordinario, las viñas, olivares u otros árboles o arbustos hubieran desaparecido en número tan considerable que no fuese posible o resultase demasiado gravosa la reposición, el usufructuario podrá dejar los pies muertos, caídos o tronchados a disposición del propietario y exigir de éste que los retire o deje el suelo expedito.

82

Artículo 485.

El usufructuario de un monte disfrutará todos los aprovechamientos que pueda éste producir según su naturaleza.

Siendo el monte tallar o de maderas de construcción, podrá el usufructuario hacer en él las talas o las cortas ordinarias que solía hacer el dueño, y en su defecto las hará acomodándose en el modo, porción y épocas, a la costumbre del lugar.

En todo caso hará las talas o las cortas de modo que no perjudiquen a la conservación de la finca.

En los viveros de árboles podrá el usufructuario hacer la entresaca necesaria para que los que queden puedan desarrollarse convenientemente.

Fuera de lo establecido en los párrafos anteriores, el usufructuario no podrá cortar árboles por el pie como no sean para reponer o mejorar alguna de las cosas usufructuadas, y en este caso hará saber previamente al propietario la necesidad de la obra.

Artículo 486.

El usufructuario de una acción para reclamar un predio o derecho real, u un bien mueble, tiene derecho a ejercitarla y obligar al propietario de la acción a que le ceda para este fin su representación y le facilite los elementos de prueba de que disponga. Si por consecuencia del ejercicio de la acción adquiriese la cosa reclamada, el usufructo se limitará a sólo los frutos, quedando el dominio para el propietario.

Artículo 487.

El usufructuario podrá hacer en los bienes objeto del usufructo las mejoras útiles o de recreo que tuviere por conveniente, con tal que no altere su forma o su sustancia; pero no tendrá por ello derecho a indemnización, Podrá, no obstante, retirar dichas mejoras, si fuere posible hacerlo sin detrimento de los bienes.

Artículo 488.

El usufructuario podrá compensar los desperfectos de los bienes con las mejoras que en ellos hubiese hecho.

Artículo 489.

El propietario de bienes en que otro tenga el usufructo, podrá enajenarlos, pero no alterar su forma ni sustancia, ni hacer en ellos nada que perjudique al usufructuario.

Artículo 490.

El usufructuario de parte de una cosa poseída en común ejercerá todos los derechos que correspondan al propietario de ella referentes a la administración y a la percepción de frutos o intereses. Si cesare la comunidad por dividirse la cosa poseída en común, corresponderá al usufructuario el usufructo de la parte que se adjudicare al propietario o condueño.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL USUFRUCTUARIO

Artículo 491.

El usufructuario, antes de entrar en el goce de los bienes, está obligado:

83

A formar, con citación del propietario o de su legítimo representante, inventario de todos ellos, haciendo tasar los muebles y describiendo el estado de los inmuebles.

A prestar fianza, comprometiéndose a cumplir las obligaciones que le correspondan con arreglo a esta sección.

Artículo 492.

La disposición contenida en el número segundo del precedente artículo no es aplicable al vendedor o donante que se hubiere reservado el usufructo de los bienes vendidos o donados, ni a los padres usufructuarios de los bienes de los hijos, ni al cónyuge sobreviviente respecto de la cuota legal usufructuaria si no contrajeren los padres o el cónyuge ulterior matrimonio.

Artículo 493.

El usufructuario, cualquiera que sea el título del usufructo, podrá ser dispensado de la obligación de hacer inventario o de prestar fianza, cuando de ello no resultare perjuicio a nadie.

Artículo 494.

No prestando el usufructuario la fianza en los casos en que deba darla, podrá el propietario exigir que los inmuebles se pongan en administración, que los muebles se vendan, que los efectos públicos, títulos de crédito nominativos o al portador se conviertan en inscripciones o se depositen en un Banco o establecimiento público, y que los capitales o sumas en metálico y el precio de la enajenación de lo bienes muebles se inviertan en valores seguros.

El interés del precio de las cosas muebles y de los efectos públicos y valores, y los productos de los bienes puestos en administración pertenecen al usufructuario.

También podrá el propietario, si lo prefiere, mientras el usufructuario no preste fianza o quede dispensado de ella, retener en su poder los bienes del usufructo en calidad de administrador, y con la obligación de entregar al usufructuario su producto líquido, deducida la suma que por dicha administración se convenga o judicialmente se le señale.

Artículo 495.

Si el usufructuario que no haya prestado fianza reclamare bajo caución juratoria, la entrega de los muebles necesarios para su o so, y que se le asigne habitación para él y su familia en una casa comprendida en el usufructo, podrá el Juez acceder a esta petición, consultadas las circunstancias del caso.

Lo mismo se entenderá respecto de los instrumentos, herramientas y demás bienes muebles necesarios para la industria a que se dedique. Si no quisiere el propietario que se vendan algunos muebles por su mérito artístico o porque tengan un precio de afección, podrá exigir que se le entreguen, afianzando el abono del interés legal del valor en tasación.

Artículo 496.

Prestada la fianza por el usufructuario, tendrá derecho a todos los productos desde el día en que, conforme al título constitutivo del usufructo, debió comenzar a percibirlos.

Artículo 497.

El usufructuario deberá cuidar las cosas dadas en usufructo como un buen padre de familia.

84

Artículo 498.

El usufructuario que enajenare o diere en arrendamiento su derecho de usufructo, será responsable del menoscabo que sufran las cosas usufructuadas por culpa o negligencia de la persona que le sustituya.

Artículo 499.

Si el usufructo se constituyere sobre un rebaño o piara de ganados, el usufructuario estará obligado a reemplazar con las crías las cabezas que mueran anual y ordinariamente, o falten por la rapacidad de animales dañinos.

Si el ganado en que se constituyere el usufructo pereciese del todo sin culpa del usufructuario, por efecto de un contagio u otro acontecimiento no común, el usufructuario cumplirá con entregar al dueño los despojos que se hubiesen salvado de esta desgracia.

Si el rebaño pereciere en parte, también por un accidente, y sin culpa del usufructuario, continuará el usufructo en la parte que se conserve.

Si el usufructo fuere de ganado estéril, se considerará, en cuanto a sus efectos, como si se hubiese constituido sobre cosa fungible.

Artículo 500.

El usufructuario está obligado a hacer las reparaciones ordinarias que necesiten las cosas dadas en usufructo.

Se considerarán ordinarias las que exijan los deterioros o desperfectos que procedan del uso natural de las cosas y sean indispensables para su conservación. Si no las hiciere después de requerido por el propietario, podrá éste hacerlas por sí mismo a costa del usufructuario.

Artículo 501.

Las reparaciones extraordinarias serán de cuenta del propietario. El usufructuario está obligado a darle aviso cuando fuere urgente la necesidad de hacerlas.

Artículo 502.

Si el propietario hiciere las reparaciones extraordinarias tendrá derecho a exigir al usufructuario el interés legal de la cantidad invertida en ellas mientras dure el usufructo.

Si no las hiciere cuando fuesen indispensables para la subsistencia de la cosa, podrá hacerlas el usufructuario; pero tendrá derecho a exigir del propietario, al concluir el usufructo, el aumento de valor que tuviese la finca por efecto de las mismas obras.

Si el propietario se negare a satisfacer dicho importe, tendrá el usufructuario derecho a retener la cosa hasta reintegrarse con sus productos.

Artículo 503.

El propietario podrá hacer las obras y mejoras de que sea susceptible la finca usufructuada, o nuevas plantaciones en ella si fue rústica, siempre que por tales actos no resulte disminuido el valor del usufructo, ni se perjudique el derecho del usufructuario.

85

Artículo 504.

El pago de las cargas y contribuciones anuales y el de las que se consideran gravámenes de los frutos, será de cuenta del usufructuario todo el tiempo que el usufructo dure.

Artículo 505.

Las contribuciones que durante el usufructo se impongan directamente sobre el capital, serán de cargo del propietario. Si éste las hubiese satisfecho, deberá el usufructuario abonarle los intereses correspondientes a las sumas que en dicho concepto hubiese pagado y, si las anticipare el usufructuario, deberá recibir su importe al fin del usufructo.

Artículo 506.

Si se constituyere el usufructo sobre la totalidad de un patrimonio, y al constituirse tuviere deudas el propietario, se aplica tanto para la subsistencia del usufructo como para la obligación del usufructuario a satisfacerlas, lo establecido en los artículos 642 y 643 respecto de las donaciones.

Esta misma disposición es aplicable al caso en que el propietario viniese obligado, al constituirse el usufructo, al pago de prestaciones periódicas, aunque no tuvieran capital conocido.

Artículo 507.

El usufructuario podrá reclamar por sí los créditos vencidos que formen parte del usufructo si tuviese dada o diere la fianza correspondiente. Si estuviese dispensado de prestar fianza o no hubiere podido constituirla, o la constituida no fuese suficiente, necesitará autorización del propietario, o del Juez en su defecto, para cobrar dichos créditos.

El usufructuario con fianza podrá dar al capital que realice el destino conveniente. El usufructuario sin fianza deberá poner a interés dicho capital de acuerdo con el propietario; a falta de acuerdo entre ambos, con autorización judicial; y, en todo caso, con las garantías suficientes para mantener la integridad del capital usufructuado.

Artículo 508.

El usufructuario universal deberá pagar por entero el legado de renta vitalicia o pensión de alimentos.

El usufructuario de una parte alícuota de la herencia lo pagará en proporción a su cuota.

En ninguno de los dos casos quedará obligado el propietario al reembolso.

El usufructuario de una o más cosas particulares sólo pagará el legado cuando la renta o pensión estuviese constituida determinadamente sobre ellas.

Artículo 509.

El usufructuario de una finca hipotecada no estará obligado a pagar las deudas para cuya seguridad se estableció la hipoteca. Si la finca se embargare o vendiere judicialmente para el pago de la deuda, el propietario responderá al usufructuario de lo que pierda por este motivo.

Artículo 510.

86

Si el usufructo fuere de la totalidad o de parte alícuota de una herencia, el usufructuario podrá anticipar las sumas que para el pago de las deudas hereditarias correspondan a los bienes usufructuados, y tendrá derecho a exigir del propietario su restitución, sin interés, al extinguirse el usufructo.

Negándose el usufructuario a hacer esta anticipación, podrá el propietario pedir que se venda la parte de los bienes usufructuados que sea necesaria para pagar dichas sumas, o satisfacerlas de su dinero, con derecho, en este último caso, a exigir del usufructuario los intereses correspondientes.

Artículo 511.

El usufructuario estará obligado a poner en conocimiento del propietario cualquier acto de un tercero, de que tenga noticia, que sea capaz de lesionar los derechos de propiedad, y responderá, si no lo hiciere, de los daños y perjuicios, como si hubieran sido ocasionados por su culpa.

Artículo 512.

Serán de cuenta del usufructuario los gastos, costas y condenas de los pleitos sostenidos sobre el usufructo.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LOS MODOS DE EXTINGUIRSE EL USUFRUCTO

Artículo 513.

El usufructo se extingue:

Por muerte del usufructuario.• Por expirar el plazo por que se constituyó, o cumplirse la condición resolutoria consignada en el título constitutivo.

Por la reunión del usufructo y la propiedad en una misma persona.• Por la renuncia del usufructuario.• Por la pérdida total de la cosa objeto del usufructo.• Por la resolución del derecho del constituyente.• Por prescripción.•

Artículo 514.

Si la cosa dada en usufructo se perdiera sólo en parte, continuará este derecho en la parte restante.

Artículo 515.

No podrá constituirse el usufructo a favor de un pueblo o Corporación o Sociedad por más de treinta años. Si se hubiese constituido, y antes de este tiempo el pueblo quedara yermo, o la Corporación, o la Sociedad se disolviera, se extinguirá por este hecho el usufructo.

Artículo 516.

El usufructo concedido por el tiempo que tarde un tercero en llegar a cierta edad, subsistirá el número de años prefijado, aunque el tercero muera antes, salvo si dicho usufructo hubiese sido expresamente concedido sólo en atención a la existencia de dicha persona.

Artículo 517.

Si el usufructo estuviera constituido sobre una finca de la que forme parte un edificio, y éste llegare a perecer,

87

de cualquier modo que sea, el usufructuario tendrá derecho a disfrutar del suelo y de los materiales.

Lo mismo sucederá cuando el usufructo estuviera constituido solamente sobre un edificio y éste pereciere. Pero en tal caso, si el propietario quisiere construir otro edificio, tendrá derecho a ocupar el suelo y a servirse de los materiales, quedando obligado a pagar al usufructuario, mientras dure el usufructo, los intereses de las sumas correspondientes al valor del suelo y de los materiales.

Artículo 518.

Si el usufructuario concurriere con el propietario al seguro de un predio dado en usufructo, continuará aquél, en caso de siniestro, en el goce del nuevo edificio si se construye re, o percibirá los intereses del precio del seguro si la reedificación no conviniere al propietario.

Si el propietario se hubiera negado a contribuir al seguro del predio, constituyéndolo por sí solo el usufructuario, adquirirá éste el derecho de recibir por entero en caso de siniestro el precio del seguro, pero con obligación de invertirlo en la reedificación de la finca.

Si el usufructuario se hubiese negado a contribuir al seguro, constituyéndolo por sí solo el propietario, percibirá éste íntegro el precio del seguro en caso de siniestro, salvo siempre el derecho concedido al usufructuario en el artículo anterior.

Artículo 519.

Si la cosa usufructuada fuere expropiada por causa de utilidad pública, el propietario estará obligado, o bien a subrogarla con otra de igual valor y análogas condiciones, o bien a abonar al usufructuario el interés legal del importe de la indemnización por todo el tiempo que deba durar el usufructo.

Si el propietario optare por lo último, deberá afianzar el pago de los réditos.

Artículo 520.

El usufructo no se extingue por el mal uso de la cosa usufructuada; pero, si el abuso infiriese considerable perjuicio al propietario, podrá éste pedir que se le entregue la cosa, obligándose a pagar anualmente al usufructuario el producto líquido de la misma, después de deducir los gastos y el premio que se le asignare por su administración.

Artículo 521.

El usufructo constituido en provecho de varias personas vivas al tiempo de su constitución, no se extinguirá hasta la muerte de la última que sobreviviere.

Artículo 522.

Terminado el usufructo, se entregará al propietario la cosa usufructuada, salvo el derecho de retención que compete al usufructuario o a sus herederos por los desembolsos de que deban ser reintegrados.

Verificada la entrega se cancelará la fianza o hipoteca.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL USO Y DE LA HABITACIÓN

Artículo 523.

88

Las facultades y obligaciones del usuario y del que tiene derecho de habitación se regularán por el título constitutivo de estos derechos; y, en su defecto, por las disposiciones siguientes.

Artículo 524.

El uso da derecho a percibir de los frutos de la cosa ajena los que basten a las necesidades del usuario y de su familia, aunque ésta se aumente.

La habitación da a quien tiene este derecho la facultad de ocupar en una casa ajena las piezas necesarias para sí y para las personas de su familia.

Artículo 525.

Los derechos de uso y habitación no se pueden arrendar ni traspasar a otro por ninguna clase de título.

Artículo 526.

El que tuviere el uso de un rebaño o piara de ganado, podrá aprovecharse de las crías, leche y lana en cuanto baste para su consumo y el de su familia, así como también del estiércol necesario para el abono de las tierras que cultive.

Artículo 527.

Si el usuario consumiera todos los frutos de la cosa ajena, o el que tuviere derecho de habitación ocupara toda la casa, estará obligado a los gastos de cultivo, a los reparos ordinarios de conservación y al pago de las contribuciones, del mismo modo que el usufructuario.

Si sólo percibiera parte de los frutos o habitara parte de la casa, no deberá contribuir con nada, siempre que quede al propietario una parte de frutos o aprovechamientos bastantes para cubrir los gastos y las cargas. Si no fueren bastantes, suplirá aquél lo que falte.

Artículo 528. Las disposiciones establecidas para el usufructo son aplicables a los derechos de uso y habitación, en cuanto no se opongan a lo ordenado en el presente capítulo.

Artículo 529.

Los derechos de uso y habitación se extinguen por las mismas causas que el usufructo y además por abuso grave de la cosa y de la habitación.

TÍTULO VII. DE LAS SERVIDUMBRES

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LAS SERVIDUMBRES EN GENERAL

SECCIÓN PRIMERA.

DE LAS DIFERENTES CLASES DE SERVIDUMBRES QUE PUEDEN ESTABLECERSE SOBRE LAS FINCAS.

Artículo 530.

89

La servidumbre es un gravamen impuesto sobre un predio en beneficio de otro perteneciente a distinto dueño.

El inmueble a cuyo favor esté constituida la servidumbre se llama predio dominante; el que la sufre, predio sirviente.

Artículo 531.

También pueden establecerse servidumbres en provecho de una o más personas, o de una comunidad, a quienes no pertenezca la finca gravada.

Artículo 532.

Las servidumbres pueden ser continuas o discontinuas, aparentes o no aparentes.

Continuas son aquellas cuyo uso es o puede ser incesante, sin la intervención de ningún hecho del hombre.

Discontinuas son las que se o san a intervalos más o menos largos y dependen de los actos del hombre.

Aparentes, las que se anuncian y están continuamente a la vista por signos exteriores, que revelan el uso y aprovechamiento de las mismas.

No aparentes, las que no presentan indicio alguno exterior de su existencia.

Artículo 533.

Las servidumbres son además positivas o negativas. Se llama positiva la servidumbre que impone al dueño del predio sirviente la obligación de dejar hacer alguna cosa o de hacerla por sí mismo, y negativa la que prohibe al dueño del predio sirviente hacer algo que le seria lícito sin la servidumbre.

Artículo 534.

Las servidumbres son inseparables de la finca a la que activa o pasivamente pertenecen.

Artículo 535.

Las servidumbres son indivisibles. Si el predio sirviente se divide entre dos o más, la servidumbre no se modifica y cada uno de los ellos tiene que tolerarla en la parte que le corresponda.

Si es el predio dominante el que se divide entre dos o más, cada porcionero puede usar por entero de la servidumbre, no alterando el lugar de su uso ni agravándola de otra manera.

Artículo 536.

Las servidumbres se establecen por la ley o por la voluntad de los propietarios. Aquéllas se llaman legales, y éstas voluntarias.

Artículo 537.

Las servidumbres continuas y aparentes se adquieren en virtud de título, o por la prescripción de veinte años.

Artículo 538.

90

Para adquirir por prescripción las servidumbres a que se refiere el artículo anterior, el tiempo de la posesión se contará: en las positivas, desde el día en que el dueño del predio dominante, o el que haya aprovechado la servidumbre, hubiera empezado a ejercerla sobre el predio sirviente; y en las negativas, desde el día en que el dueño del predio dominante hubiera prohibido, por un acto formal, al del sirviente la ejecución del hecho que seria lícito sin la servidumbre.

Artículo 539.

Las servidumbres continuas no aparentes, y las discontinuas, sean o no aparentes, sólo podrán adquirirse en virtud de título.

Artículo 540.

La falta de título constitutivo de las servidumbres que no pueden adquirirse por prescripción, únicamente se puede suplir por la escritura de reconocimiento del dueño del predio sirviente, o por una sentencia firme.

Artículo 541.

La existencia de un signo aparente de servidumbre entre dos fincas, establecido por el propietario de ambas, se considerará, si se enajenare una, como título para que la servidumbre continúe activa y pasivamente, a no ser que, al tiempo de separarse la propiedad de las dos fincas, se exprese lo contrario en el título de enajenación de cualquiera de ellas, o se haga desaparecer aquel signo antes del otorgamiento de la escritura.

Artículo 542.

Al establecerse una servidumbre se entienden concedidos todos los derechos necesarios para su o so.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DERECHOS Y OBLIGACIONES DE LOS PROPIETARIOS DE LOS PREDIOS DOMINANTE Y SIRVIENTE

Artículo 543.

El dueño del predio dominante podrá hacer, a su costa, en el predio sirviente las obras necesarias para el uso y conservación de la servidumbre, pero sin alterarla ni hacerla más gravosa. Deberá elegir para ello el tiempo y la forma convenientes a fin de ocasionar la menor incomodidad posible al dueño del predio sirviente.

Artículo 544.

Si fuesen varios los predios dominantes, los dueños de todos ellos estarán obligados a contribuir a los gastos de que se trata en el artículo anterior, en proporción al beneficio que a cada cual reporte la obra. El que no quiera contribuir podrá eximirse renunciando a la servidumbre en provecho de los demás.

Si el dueño del predio sirviente se utilizare en algún modo de la servidumbre, estará obligado a contribuir a los gastos en la proporción antes expresada, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 545.

El dueño del predio sirviente no podrá menoscabar de modo alguno el uso de la servidumbre constituida.

Sin embargo, si por razón del lugar asignado primitivamente, o de la forma establecida para el uso de la servidumbre, llegara ésta a ser muy incómoda al dueño del predio sirviente, o le privase de hacer en él obras, reparos o mejoras importantes, podrá variarse a su costa, siempre que ofrezca otro lugar o forma igualmente

91

cómodos, y de suerte que no resulte perjuicio alguno al dueño del predio dominante o a los que tengan derecho al uso de la servidumbre.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LOS MODOS DE EXTINGUIRSE LAS SERVIDUMBRES

Artículo 546.

Las servidumbres se extinguen:

Por reunirse en una misma persona la propiedad del predio dominante y la del sirviente.• Por el no uso durante veinte años.•

Este término principiará a contarse desde el día en que hubiera dejado de usarse la servidumbre respecto a las discontinuas; y desde el día en que haya tenido lugar un acto contrario a la servidumbre respecto a las continuas.

Cuando los predios vengan a tal estado que no pueda usarse de la servidumbre; pero ésta revivirá si después el estado de los predios permitiera usar de ella, a no ser que cuando sea posible el uso, haya transcurrido el tiempo suficiente para la prescripción, conforme a lo dispuesto en el número anterior.

Por llegar el día o realizarse la condición, si la servidumbre fuera temporal o condicional.• Por la renuncia del dueño del predio dominante.• Por la redención convenida entre el dueño del predio dominante y el del sirviente.•

Artículo 547.

La forma de prestar la servidumbre puede prescribirse como la servidumbre misma, y de la misma manera.

Artículo 548.

Si el predio dominante perteneciera a varios en común, el uso de la servidumbre hecho por uno impide la prescripción respecto de los demás.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS SERVIDUMBRES LEGALES

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 549.

Las servidumbres impuestas por la ley tienen por objeto la utilidad pública o el interés de los particulares.

Artículo 550.

Todo lo concerniente a las servidumbres establecidas para utilidad pública o comunal se regirá por las leyes y reglamentos especiales que las determinan y, en su defecto, por las disposiciones del presente título.

Artículo 551.

Las servidumbres que impone la ley en interés de los particulares, o por causa de utilidad privada, se regirán por las disposiciones del presente título, sin perjuicio de lo que dispongan las leyes, reglamentos y ordenanzas generales u locales sobre policía urbana o rural.

92

Estas servidumbres podrán ser modificadas por convenio de los interesados cuando no lo prohiba la ley ni resulte perjuicio a tercero.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LAS SERVIDUMBRES EN MATERIA DE AGUAS

Artículo 552.

Los predios inferiores están sujetos a recibir las aguas, que, naturalmente y sin obra del hombre, descienden de los predios superiores, así como la tierra o piedra que arrastran en su curso. Ni el dueño del predio inferior puede hacer obras que impidan esta servidumbre, ni el del superior obras que la agraven.

Artículo 553.

Las riberas de los ríos, aun cuando sean de dominio privado, están sujetas en toda su extensión y sus márgenes, en una zona de tres metros, a la servidumbre de uso público en interés general de la navegación, la flotación, la pesca y el salvamento. Los predios contiguos a las riberas de los ríos navegables o flotables están además sujetos a la servidumbre de camino que sirva para el servicio exclusivo de la navegación y flotación fluvial.

Si fuere necesario ocupar para ello terrenos de propiedad particular, procederá la correspondiente indemnización.

Artículo 554.

Cuando para la derivación o toma de aguas de un río o arroyo, o para el aprovechamiento de otras corrientes continuas o discontinuas, fuere necesario establecer una presa, y el que haya de hacerlo no sea dueño de las riberas o terrenos en que necesite apoyarla, podrá establecer la servidumbre de estribo de presa, previa la indemnización correspondiente.

Artículo 555.

Las servidumbres forzosas de saca de agua y de abrevadero solamente podrán imponerse por causa de utilidad pública en favor de alguna población o caserío, previa la correspondiente indemnización.

Artículo 556.

Las servidumbres de saca de agua y de abrevadero lleva consigo la obligación en los predios sirvientes de dar paso a persona y ganados hasta el punto donde hayan de utilizarse aquéllas, debiendo ser extensiva a este servicio la indemnización.

Artículo 557.

Todo el que quiera servirse del agua de que pueda disponer para una finca suya, tiene derecho a hacerla pasar por los predios intermedios, con obligación de indemnizar a sus dueños, como también a los de los predios inferiores sobre los que se filtren o caigan las aguas.

Artículo 558.

El que pretenda usar del derecho concedido en el artículo anterior está obligado:

A justificar que puede disponer del agua y que ésta es suficiente para el uso a que la destina.• A demostrar que el paso que solicita es el más conveniente y menos oneroso para tercero.•

93

A indemnizar al dueño del predio sirviente en la forma que se determine por las leyes y reglamentos.•

Artículo 559.

No puede imponerse la servidumbre de acueducto, para objeto de interés privado, sobre edificios, ni sus patios o dependencias, ni sobre jardines o huertas ya existentes.

Artículo 560.

La servidumbre de acueducto no obsta para que el dueño del predio sirviente pueda cerrarlo y cercarlo, así como edificar sobre el mismo acueducto de manera que éste no experimente perjuicio, ni se imposibiliten las reparaciones y limpias necesarias.

Artículo 561.

Para los efectos legales, la servidumbre de acueducto será considerada como continua y aparente, aun cuando no sea constante el paso del agua, o su uso dependa de las necesidades del predio dominante, o de un turno establecido por días o por horas.

Artículo 562.

El que para dar riego a su heredad o mejorarla, necesite construir parada o partidor en el cauce por donde haya de recibir el agua, podrá exigir que los dueños de las márgenes permitan su construcción, previo abono de daños y perjuicios, incluso los que se originen de la nueva servidumbre a dichos dueños y a los demás regantes.

Artículo 563.

El establecimiento, extensión, forma y condiciones de las servidumbres de aguas de que se trata en esta sección, se regirán por la ley especial de la materia en cuanto no se halle previsto en este Código.

Artículo 564.

El propietario de una finca o heredad, enclavada entre otras ajenas y sin salida a camino público, tiene derecho a exigir paso por las heredades vecinas, previa la correspondiente indemnización.

Si esta servidumbre se constituye de manera que pueda ser continuo su uso para todas las necesidades del predio dominante estableciendo una vía permanente, la indemnización consistirá en el valor del terreno que se ocupe y en el importe de los perjuicios que se causen en el predio sirviente.

Cuando se limite al paso necesario para el cultivo de la finca enclavada entre otras y para la extracción de sus cosechas a través del predio sirviente sin vía permanente, la indemnización consistirá en el abono del perjuicio que ocasione este gravamen.

Artículo 565.

La servidumbre de paso debe darse por el punto menos perjudicial al predio sirviente, y, en cuanto fuere conciliable con esta regla, por donde sea menor la distancia del predio dominante al camino público.

Artículo 566.

La anchura de la servidumbre de paso será la que baste a las necesidades del predio dominante.

94

Artículo 567.

Si adquirida una finca por venta, permuta o partición, quedare enclavada entre otras del vendedor, permutante o copartícipe, éstos están obligados a dar paso sin indemnización, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 568.

Si el paso concedido a una finca enclavada deja de ser necesario por haberla reunido su dueño a otra que esté contigua al camino público, el dueño del predio sirviente podrá pedir que se extinga la servidumbre, devolviendo lo que hubiera recibido por indemnización.

Lo mismo se entenderá en el caso de abrirse un nuevo camino que dé acceso a la finca enclavada.

Artículo 569.

Si fuere indispensable para construir o reparar algún edificio pasar materiales por predio ajeno, o colocar en él andamios u otros objetos para la obra, el dueño de este predio está obligado a consentirlo, recibiendo la indemnización correspondiente al perjuicio que se le irrogue.

Artículo 570.

Las servidumbres existentes de paso para ganados, conocidas con los nombres de cañada, cordel, vereda o cualquiera otro, y las de abrevadero, descansadero y majada, se regirán por las ordenanzas y reglamentos del ramo y, en su defecto, por el uso y costumbre del lugar.

Sin perjuicio de los derechos legítimamente adquiridos, la cañada no podrá exceder en todo caso de la anchura de 75 metros; el cordel, de 37 metros 50 centímetros, y la vereda, de 20 metros.

Cuando sea necesario establecer la servidumbre forzosa de paso o la de abrevadero para ganados, se observará lo dispuesto en esta sección y en los artículos 555 y 556. En este caso la anchura no podrá exceder de 10 metros.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA SERVIDUMBRE DE MEDIANERÍA

Artículo 571.

La servidumbre de medianería se regirá por las disposiciones de este título y por las ordenanzas y usos locales en cuanto no se opongan a él, o no esté prevenido en el mismo.

Artículo 572.

Se presume la servidumbre de medianería mientras no haya un título, o signo exterior, o prueba en contrario:

En las paredes divisorias de los edificios contiguos hasta el punto común de elevación.• En las paredes divisorias de los jardines o corrales sitos en poblado o en el campo.• En las cercas, vallados y setos vivos que dividen los predios rústicos.•

Artículo 573.

Se entiende que hay signo exterior, contrario a la servidumbre de medianería:

Cuando en las paredes divisorias de los edificios haya ventanas o huecos abiertos.•

95

Cuando la pared divisoria esté por un lado recta y a plomo en todo su parámetro, y por el otro presente lo mismo en su parte superior, teniendo en la inferior relex o retallos.

Cuando resulte construida toda la pared sobre el terreno de una de las fincas, y no por mitad entre una y otra de las dos contiguas.

Cuando sufra las cargas de carreras, pisos y armaduras de una de las fincas, y no de la contigua.• Cuando la pared divisoria entre patios, jardines y heredades esté construida de modo que la albardilla vierta hacia una de las propiedades.

Cuando la pared divisoria, construida de mampostería, presente piedras llamadas pasaderas, que de distancia en distancia salgan fuera de la superficie sólo por un lado y no por el otro.

Cuando las heredades contiguas a otras defendidas por vallados o setos vivos no se hallen cerradas.•

En todos estos casos, la propiedad de las paredes, vallados o setos se entenderá que pertenece exclusivamente al dueño de la finca o heredad que tenga a su favor la presunción fundada en cualquiera de los signos indicados.

Artículo 574.

Las zanjas o acequias abiertas entre las heredades se presumen también medianerías, si no hay título o signo que demuestre lo contrario.

Hay signo contrario a la medianería cuando la tierra o broza sacada para abrir la zanja o para su limpieza se halla en un solo lado, en un solo lado, en cuyo caso la propiedad de la zanja pertenecerá exclusivamente al dueño de la heredad que tenga a su favor este signo exterior.

Artículo 575.

La reparación y construcción de las paredes medianeras y el mantenimiento de los vallados, setos vivos, zanjas y acequias, también medianeros, se costeará por todos los dueños de las fincas que tengan a su favor la medianería, en proporción al derecho de cada uno. Sin embargo, todo propietario puede dispensarse de contribuir a esta carga renunciando a la medianería, salvo el caso en que la pared medianera sostenga un edificio suyo.

Artículo 576.

Si el propietario de un edificio que se apoya en una pared medianera quisiera derribarlo, podrá igualmente renunciar a la medianería, pero serán de su cuenta todas las reparaciones y obras necesarias para evitar, por aquella vez solamente, los daños que el derribo pueda ocasionar a la pared medianera.

Artículo 577.

Todo propietario puede alzar la pared medianera, haciéndolo a sus expensas e indemnizando los perjuicios que se ocasionen con la obra, aunque sean temporales.

Serán igualmente de su cuenta los gastos de conservación de la pared, en lo que ésta se haya levantado o profundizado sus cimientos respecto de como estaba antes; y además la indemnización de los mayores gastos que haya que hacer para la conservación de la pared medianera por razón de la mayor altura o profundidad que se le haya dado.

Si la pared medianera no pudiese resistir la mayor elevación, el propietario que quisiera levantarla tendrá obligación de reconstituirla a su costa; y, si para ello fuere necesario darle mayor espesor, deberá darlo de su propio suelo.

96

Artículo 578.

Los demás propietarios que no hayan contribuido a dar más elevación, profundidad o espesor a la pared, podrán, sin embargo, adquirir en ella los derechos de medianería, pagando proporcionalmente el importe de la obra y la mitad del valor del terreno sobre el que se le hubiese dado mayor espesor.

Artículo 579.

Cada propietario de una pared medianera podrá usar de ella en proporción al derecho que tenga en la mancomunidad; podrá, por lo tanto, edificar apoyando su obra en la pared medianera, o introduciendo vigas hasta la mitad de su espesor, pero sin impedir el uso común y respectivo de los demás medianeros.

Para usar el medianero de este derecho ha de obtener previamente el consentimiento de los demás interesados en la medianería; y, si no lo obtuviere, se fijarán por peritos las condiciones necesarias para que la nueva obra no perjudique a los derechos de aquéllos.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LA SERVIDUMBRE DE LUCES Y VISTAS.

Artículo 580.

Ningún medianero puede sin consentimiento del otro abrir en pared medianera ventana ni hueco alguno.

Artículo 581.

El dueño de una pared no medianera, contigua a finca ajena, puede abrir en ella ventanas o huecos para recibir luces a la altura de las carreras, o inmediatos a los techos, y de las dimensiones de 30 centímetros en cuadro, y, en todo caso, con reja de hierro remetida en la pared y con red de alambre.

Sin embargo, el dueño de la finca o propiedad contigua a la pared en que estuvieren abiertos los huecos podrá cerrarlos si adquiere la medianería, y no se hubiera pactado lo contrario.

También podrá cubrirlos edificando en su terreno o levantando pared contigua a la que tenga dicho hueco o ventana.

Artículo 582.

No se puede abrir ventanas con vistas rectas, ni balcones u otros voladizos semejantes, sobre la finca del vecino, si no hay dos metros de distancia entre la pared en que se construyan y dicha propiedad.

Tampoco pueden tenerse vistas de costado u oblicuas sobre la misma propiedad, si no hay 60 centímetros de distancia.

Artículo 583.

Las distancias de que se habla en el artículo anterior se contarán en las vistas rectas desde la línea exterior de la pared en los huecos en que no haya voladizos, desde la línea de éstos donde los haya, y para las oblicuas, desde la línea de separación de las dos propiedades.

Artículo 584.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo 582 no es aplicable a los edificios separados por una vía pública.

97

Artículo 585.

Cuando por cualquier título se hubiere adquirido derecho a tener vistas directas, balcones o miradores sobre la propiedad colindante, el dueño del predio sirviente no podrá edificar a menos de tres metros de distancia, tomándose la medida de la misma manera indicada en el artículo 583.

SECCIÓN SEXTA. DEL DESAGÜE DE LOS EDIFICIOS

Artículo 586.

El propietario de un edificio está obligado a construir sus tejados o cubiertas de manera que las aguas pluviales caigan sobre su propio suelo o sobre la calle o sitio público, y no sobre el suelo del vecino. Aun cayendo sobre el propio suelo, el propietario está obligado a recoger las aguas de modo que no causen perjuicio al predio contiguo.

Artículo 587.

El dueño del predio que sufre la servidumbre de vertiente de los tejados, podrá edificar recibiendo las aguas sobre su propio tejado o dándoles otra salida conforme a las ordenanzas o costumbres locales, y de modo que no resulte gravamen ni perjuicio alguno para el predio dominante.

Artículo 588.

Cuando el corral o patio de una casa se halle enclavado entre otras, y no sea posible dar salida por la misma casa a las aguas pluviales que en él se recojan, podrá exigirse el establecimiento de la servidumbre de desagüe, dando paso a las aguas por el punto de los predios contiguos en que sea más fácil la salida, y estableciéndose el conducto de desagüe en la forma que menos perjuicios ocasione al predio sirviente, previa la indemnización que corresponda.

SECCIÓN SÉPTIMA. DE LAS DISTANCIAS Y OBRAS INTERMEDIAS PARA CIERTAS CONSTRUCCIONES Y PLANTACIONES.

Artículo 589.

No se podrá edificar ni hacer plantaciones cerca de las leyes, ordenanzas y reglamentos particulares de la materia.

Artículo 590.

Nadie podrá construir cerca de una pared ajena o medianera pozos, cloacas, acueductos, hornos, fraguas, chimeneas, establos, depósitos de materias corrosivas, artefactos que se muevan por el vapor, o fábricas que por sí mismas o por sus productos sean peligrosas o nocivas, sin guardar las distancias prescritas por los reglamentos y usos del lugar, y sin ejecutar las obras de resguardo necesarias, con sujeción, en el modo, a las condiciones que los mismos reglamentos prescriban.

A falta de reglamentos se tomarán las precauciones que se juzguen necesarias, previo dictamen pericial, a fin de evitar todo daño a las heredades o edificios vecinos.

Artículo 591.

No se podrá plantar árboles cerca de una heredad ajena sino a la distancia autorizada por las ordenanzas o la costumbre del lugar, y en su defecto, a la de dos metros de la línea divisoria de las heredades si la plantación

98

se hace de árboles altos, y a la de 50 centímetros si la plantación es de arbustos o árboles bajos.

Todo propietario tiene derecho a pedir que se arranquen los árboles que en adelante se plantaren a menor distancia de su heredad.

Artículo 592.

Si las ramas de algunos árboles se extendieren sobre una heredad, jardines o patios vecinos, tendrá el dueño de éstos derecho a reclamar que se corten en cuanto se extiendan sobre su propiedad, y, si fueren las raíces de los árboles vecinos las que se extendiesen en suelo de otro, el dueño del suelo en que se introduzcan podrá cortarlas por sí mismo dentro de su heredad.

Artículo 593.

Los árboles existentes en un seto vivo o medianero s presumen también medianeros, y cualquiera de los dueños tiene derecho a exigir su derribo.

Exceptúanse los árboles que sirvan de mojones, los cuales no podrán arrancarse sino de común acuerdo entre los colindantes

CAPÍTULO III. DE LAS SERVIDUMBRES VOLUNTARIAS

Artículo 594.

Todo propietario de una finca puede establecer en ella las servidumbres que tenga por conveniente, y en el modo y forma que bien le pareciere, siempre que no contravenga a las leyes ni al orden público.

Artículo 595.

El que tenga la propiedad de una finca cuyo usufructo pertenezca a otro, podrá imponer sobre ella, sin el consentimiento del usufructuario, las servidumbres que no perjudiquen al derecho de usufructo.

Artículo 596.

Cuando pertenezca a una persona el dominio directo de una finca y a otra el dominio útil, no podrá establecerse sobre ella servidumbre voluntaria perpetua sin el consentimiento de ambos dueños.

Artículo 597.

Para imponer una servidumbre sobre un fundo indiviso se necesita el consentimiento de todos los copropietarios.

La concesión hecha solamente por algunos, quedará en suspenso hasta tanto que la otorgue el último de todos los partícipes o comuneros.

Pero la concesión hecha por uno de los copropietarios separadamente de los otros obliga al concedente y a sus suceso res, aunque lo sean a título particular, a no impedir el ejercicio del derecho concedido.

Artículo 598.

El título y, en su caso, la posesión de la servidumbre adquirida por prescripción, determinan los derechos del

99

predio dominante y a las obligaciones del sirviente. En su defecto, se regirá la servidumbre por las disposiciones del presente título que le sean aplicables.

Artículo 599.

Si el dueño del predio sirviente se hubiere obligado, al constituirse la servidumbre, a costear las obras necesarias para el uso y conservación de la misma, podrá librarse de esta carga abandonando su predio al dueño del dominante.

Artículo 600.

La comunidad de pastos sólo podrá establecerse en lo sucesivo por concesión expresa de los propietarios, que resulte de contrato o de última voluntad, y no a favor de una universalidad de individuos y sobre una universalidad de bienes, sino a favor de determinados individuos y sobre predios también ciertos y determinados.

La servidumbre establecida conforme a este artículo se regirá por el título de su institución.

Artículo 601.

La comunidad de pastos en terrenos públicos, ya pertenezcan a los Municipios, ya al Estado, se regirá por las leyes administrativas.

Artículo 602.

Si entre los vecinos de uno o más pueblos existiere comunidad de pastos, el propietario que cercare con tapia o seto una finca, la hará libre de la comunidad. Quedarán, sin embargo, subsistentes las demás servidumbres que sobre la misma estuviesen establecidas.

El propietario que cercare su finca conservará su derecho a la comunidad de pastos en las otras fincas no cercadas.

Artículo 603.

El dueño de terrenos gravados con la servidumbre de pastos podrá redimir esta carga mediante el pago de su valor a los que tengan derecho a la servidumbre.

A falta de convenio, se fijará el capital para la redención sobre la base del 4 por 100 del valor anual de los pastos, regulado por tasación pericial.

Artículo 604.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior es aplicable a la servidumbres establecidas para el aprovechamiento de leñas y demás productos de los montes de propiedad particular.

TÍTULO VIII. DEL REGISTRO DE LA PROPIEDAD.

CAPÍTULO ÚNICO.

Artículo 605.

100

El Registro de la Propiedad tiene por objeto la inscripción o anotación de los actos y contratos relativos al dominio y demás derechos reales sobre bienes inmuebles.

Artículo 606.

Los títulos de dominio, o de otros derechos reales sobre bienes inmuebles, que no estén debidamente inscritos o anotados en Registro de la Propiedad, no perjudican a tercero.

Artículo 607.

El Registro de la Propiedad será público para los que tengan interés conocido en averiguar el estado de los bienes inmuebles o derechos reales anotados o inscritos.

Artículo 608.

Para determinar los títulos sujetos a inscripción o anotación, la forma, efectos y extinción de las mismas, la manera de llevar el Registro y el valor de los asientos de sus libros, se estará a lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria.

LIBRO TERCERO.

DE LOS DIFERENTES MODOS DE ADQUIRIR LA PROPIEDAD.

Diposición preliminar

Artículo 609.

La propiedad se adquiere por la ocupación. La propiedad y los demás derechos sobre los bienes se adquieren y transmiten por la ley, por donación, por sucesión testada e intestada, y por consecuencia de ciertos contratos mediante la tradición. Pueden también adquirirse por medio de la prescripción.

TÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA OCUPACIÓN

Artículo 610.

Se adquieren por la ocupación los bienes apropiables por su naturaleza que carecen de dueño, como los animales que son objeto de la caza y pesca, el tesoro oculto y las cosas muebles abandonadas.

Artículo 611.

El derecho de caza y pesca se rige por leyes especiales.

Artículo 612.

El propietario de un enjambre de abejas tendrá derecho a perseguirlo sobre el fundo ajeno, indemnizando al poseedor de éste el daño causado. Si estuviere cercado, necesitará el consentimiento del dueño para penetrar en él.

Cuando el propietario no haya perseguido, o cese de perseguir el enjambre dos días consecutivos, podrá el poseedor de la finca ocuparlo o retenerlo.

101

El propietario de animales amansados podrá también reclamar los dentro de veinte días, a contar desde su ocupación por otro. Pasado este término, pertenecerán al que los haya cogido y conservado.

Artículo 613.

Las palomas, conejos y peces que de su respectivo criadero pasaren a otro perteneciente a distinto dueño, serán de propiedad de éste, siempre que no hayan sido atraídos por medio de algún artificio o fraude.

Artículo 614.

El que por casualidad descubriese un tesoro oculto en propiedad ajena, tendrá el derecho que le concede el artículo 351 de este Código.

Artículo 615.

El que encontrare una cosa mueble, que no sea tesoro, debe restituirla a su anterior poseedor. Si éste no fuere conocido, deberá consignarla inmediatamente en poder del Alcalde del pueblo donde se hubiese verificado el hallazgo.

El Alcalde hará publicar éste, en la forma acostumbrada, dos domingos consecutivos.

Si la cosa mueble no pudiere conservarse sin deterioro o sin hacer gastos que disminuyan notablemente su valor, se venderá en pública subasta luego que hubiesen pasado ocho días desde el segundo anuncio sin haberse presentado el dueño, y se depositará su precio.

Pasados dos años, a contar desde el día de la segunda publicación, sin haberse presentado el dueño, se adjudicará la cosa encontrada o su valor al que la hubiese hallado.

Tanto éste como el propietario estarán obligados, cada cual en su caso, a satisfacer los gastos.

Artículo 616.

Si se presentare a tiempo el propietario, estará obligado abonar, a título de premio, al que hubiese hecho el hallazgo, la décima parte de la suma o del precio de la cosa encontrada, Cuando el valor del hallazgo excediese de 2.000 pesetas, el premio se reducirá a la vigésima parte en cuanto al exceso.

Artículo 617.

Los derechos sobre los objetos arrojados al mar o sobre lo que las olas arrojen a la playa, de cualquier naturaleza que sean, sobre las plantas y hierbas que crezcan en su ribera, se determinan por leyes especiales.

TÍTULO II. DE LA DONACIÓN

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA NATURALEZA DE LAS DONACIONES

Artículo 618.

La donación es un acto de liberalidad por el cual un persona dispone gratuitamente de una cosa en favor de otra, que la acepta.

102

Artículo 619.

Es también donación la que se hace a una persona por su méritos o por los servicios prestados al donante, siempre que no constituyan deudas exigibles, o aquella en que se impone al donatario un gravamen inferior al valor de lo donado.

Artículo 620.

Las donaciones que hayan de producir sus efectos por muerte del donante, participan de la naturaleza de las disposiciones de última voluntad, y se regirán por las reglas establecidas en el capítulo de la sucesión testamentaria.

Artículo 621.

Las donaciones que hayan de producir sus efectos entre vivos, se regirán por las disposiciones generales de los contratos y obligaciones en todo lo que no se halle determinado en este capitulo.

Artículo 622.

Las donaciones con causa onerosa se regirán por las reglas de los contratos, y las remuneratorias por las disposiciones del presente título en la parte que excedan del valor del gravamen impuesto.

Artículo 623.

La donación se perfecciona desde que el donante conoce la aceptación del donatario.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS PERSONAS QUE PUEDEN HACER O RECIBIR DONACIONES

Artículo 624.

Podrán hacer donación todos los que puedan contratar y disponer de sus bienes.

Artículo 625.

Podrán aceptar donaciones todos los que no estén especialmente incapacitados por la ley para ello.

Artículo 626.

Las personas que no pueden contratar no podrán aceptar donaciones condicionales u onerosas sin la intervención de sus legítimos representantes.

Artículo 627.

Las donaciones hechas a los concebidos y no nacidos podrán ser aceptadas por las personas que legítimamente los representarían, si se hubiera verificado ya su nacimiento.

Artículo 628.

Las donaciones hechas a personas inhábiles son nulas, aunque lo hayan sido simuladamente, bajo apariencia de otro contrato, por persona interpuesta.

103

Artículo 629.

La donación no obliga al donante, ni produce efecto, sino desde la aceptación.

Artículo 630.

El donatario debe, so pena de nulidad, aceptar la donación por si, o por medio de persona autorizada con poder especial para el caso, o con poder general y bastante.

Artículo 631.

Las personas que acepten una donación en representación de otras que no puedan hacerlo por si, estarán obligadas a procurar la notificación y anotación de que habla el artículo 633.

Artículo 632.

La donación de cosa mueble podrá hacerse verbal mente o por escrito.

La verbal requiere la entrega simultánea de la cosa donada, faltando este requisito, no surtirá efecto sí no se hace por escrito y consta en la misma forma la aceptación.

Artículo 633.

Para que sea válida la donación de cosa inmueble, ha de donarse en escritura pública, expresándose en ella individualmente los bienes donados y el valor de las cargas que deba satisfacer el donatario. La aceptación podrá hacerse en la misma escritura de donación o en otra separada; pero no surtirá efecto si no se hiciese en vida del donante.

Hecha en escritura separada, deberá notificarse la aceptación en forma auténtica al donante, y se anotará esta diligencia en ambas escrituras.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS EFECTOS Y LIMITACIÓN DE LAS DONACIONES

Artículo 634.

La donación podrá comprender, todos los bienes presentes del donante, o parte de ellos, con tal que éste se reserve, en plena propiedad o en usufructo, lo necesario para vivir en un estado correspondiente a sus circunstancias.

Artículo 635.

La donación no podrá comprender los bienes futuros. Por bienes futuros se entienden aquellos de que el donante no puede disponer al tiempo de la donación.

Artículo 636.

No obstante lo dispuesto en el artículo 634, ninguno podrá dar ni recibir, por vía de donación, más de lo que pueda dar o recibir por testamento.

La donación será inoficiosa en todo lo que exceda de esta medida.

104

Artículo 637.

Cuando la donación hubiere sido hecha a varias personas conjuntamente, se entenderá por partes iguales; y no se dará entre ellas el derecho de acrecer, si el donante no hubiese dispuesto otra cosa. Se exceptúan de esta disposición las donaciones hechas conjuntamente a marido y mujer, entre los cuales tendrá lugar aquel derecho si el donante no hubiese dispuesto lo contrario.

Artículo 638.

El donatario se subroga en todos los derechos y acciones que en caso evicción corresponderían al donante. Este, en cambio, no queda obligado al saneamiento de las cosas donadas, salvo si la donación fuere onerosa, en cuyo caso responderá el donante de la evicción hasta la concurrencia del gravamen.

Artículo 639.

Podrá reservarse el donante la facultad de disponer de algunos de los bienes donados, o de alguna cantidad con cargo a ellos; pero, si muriere sin haber hecho uso de este derecho, pertenecerán al donatario los bienes o la cantidad que se hubiese reservado.

Artículo 640.

También se podrá donar la propiedad a una persona y el usufructo a otra u otras, con la limitación establecida en el artículo 781 de este Código.

Artículo 641.

Podrá establecerse validamente la reversión en favor de sólo el donador para cualquier caso y circunstancias, pero no en favor de otras personas sino en los mismos casos y con iguales limitaciones que determina este Código para las sustituciones testamentarias.

La reversión estipulada por el donante en favor de tercero contra lo dispuesto en el párrafo anterior, es nula: pero no producirá la nulidad de la donación.

Artículo 642.

Si la donación se hubiere hecho imponiendo al donatario la obligación de pagar las deudas del donante, como la cláusula no contenga otra declaración, sólo se entenderá aquél obligado a pagar las que apareciesen contraídas antes.

Artículo 643.

No mediando estipulación respecto al pago de deudas, sólo responderá de ellas el donatario cuando la donación se haya hecho en fraude de los acreedores.

Se presumirá siempre hecha la donación en fraude de los acreedores cuando al hacerla no se haya reservado el donante bienes bastantes para pagar las deudas anteriores a ella.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA REVOCACIÓN Y REDUCCIÓN DE LAS DONACIONES

Artículo 644.

105

Toda donación entre vivos, hecha por persona que no tenga hijos ni descendientes, será revocable por el mero hecho de ocurrir cualquiera de los casos siguientes:

Que el donante tenga, después de la donación, hijos, aunque sean póstumos.• Que resulte vivo el hijo del donante que éste reputaba muerto cuando hizo la donación.•

Artículo 645.

Rescindida la donación por la supervivencia de hijos se restituirán al donante los bienes donados, o su valor si el donatario los hubiese vendido.

Si se hallaren hipotecados, podrá el donante liberar la hipoteca pagando la cantidad que garantice, con derecho a reclamarla del donatario. Cuando los bienes no pudieren ser restituidos, se apreciarán por lo que valían al tiempo de hacer la donación.

Artículo 646.

La acción de revocación por superveniencia o supervivencia de hijos prescribe por el transcurso de cinco años, contados desde que se tuvo noticia del nacimiento del último hijo o de la existencia del que se creía muerto.

Esta acción es irrenunciable y se transmite, por muerte del donante, a los hijos y sus descendientes.

Artículo 647.

La donación será revocada a instancia del donante, cuando el donatario haya dejado de cumplir alguna de las condiciones que aquél le impuso.

En este caso, los bienes donados volverán al donante, quedando nulas las enajenaciones que el donatario hubiese hecho y las hipotecas que sobre ellos hubiese impuesto, con la limitación establecida, en cuanto a terceros, por la Ley Hipotecaria.

Artículo 648.

También podrá ser revocada la donación, a instancia del donante, por causa de ingratitud en los casos siguientes:

Si el donatario cometiere algún delito contra la persona, el honor o los bienes del donante.• Si el donatario imputare al donante alguno de los delitos que dan lugar a procedimientos de oficio o acusación pública, aunque lo pruebe; a menos que el delito se hubiese cometido contra el mismo donatario, su cónyuge o los hijos constituidos bajo su autoridad.

Si le niega indebidamente los alimentos.•

Artículo 649.

Revocada la donación por causa de ingratitud, quedarán, sin embargo, subsistentes las enajenaciones e hipotecas anteriores a la anotación de la demanda de revocación en el Registro de la Propiedad, las posteriores serán nulas.

Artículo 650.

En el caso a que se refiere el primer párrafo del artículo anterior, tendrá derecho el donante para exigir del

106

donatario el valor de los bienes enajenados que no pueda reclamar de los terceros, o la cantidad en que hubiesen sido hipotecados.

Se atenderá al tiempo de la donación para regular el valor de dichos bienes.

Artículo 651.

Cuando se revocare la donación por alguna de las causas expresadas en el artículo 644, o por ingratitud, y cuando se redujere por inoficiosa, el donatario no devolverá los frutos sino desde la interposición de la demanda.

Si la revocación se fundare en haber dejado de cumplirse alguna de las condiciones impuestas en la donación, el donatario devolverá, además de los bienes, los frutos que hubiese percibido después de dejar de cumplir la condición.

Artículo 652.

La acción concedida al donante por causa de ingratitud no podrá renunciarse anticipadamente. Esta acción prescribe en el término de un año, contado desde que el donante tuvo conocimiento del hecho y posibilidad de ejercitar la acción.

Artículo 653.

No se transmitirá esta acción a los herederos del donante, si éste, pudiendo, no la hubiese ejercitado.

Tampoco se podrá ejercitar contra el heredero del donatario, a no ser que a la muerte de éste se hallase interpuesta la demanda.

Artículo 654.

Las donaciones que, con arreglo a lo dispuesto en el artículo 636, sean inoficiosas computado el valor líquido de los bienes del donante al tiempo de su muerte, deberán ser reducidas en cuanto al exceso; pero esta reducción no obstará para que tengan efecto durante la vida del donante y para que el donatario haga suyos los frutos.

Para la reducción de las donaciones se estará a lo dispuesto en este capítulo y en los artículos 820 y 821 del presente Código.

Artículo 655.

Sólo podrán pedir reducción de las donaciones aquellos que tengan derecho a legítima o a una parte alícuota de la herencia, y sus herederos o causahabientes.

Los comprendidos en el párrafo anterior no podrán renunciar su derecho durante la vida del donante, ni por declaración expresa, ni prestando su consentimiento a la donación.

Los donatarios, los legatarios que no lo sean de parte alícuota y los acreedores del difunto, no podrán pedir la reducción ni aprovecharse de ella.

Artículo 656.

Si, siendo dos o más las donaciones, no cupieren todas en la parte disponible, se suprimirán o reducirán en

107

cuanto al exceso las de fecha más reciente.

TÍTULO III. DE LAS SUCESIONES

Disposiciones Generales

Artículo 657.

Los derechos a la sucesión de una persona se transmiten desde el momento de su muerte.

Artículo 658.

La sucesión se defiere por la voluntad del hombre manifestada en testamento y, a falta de éste, por disposición de la Ley.

La primera se llama testamentaria, y la segunda legítima. Podrán también deferirse en una parte por voluntad del hombre y en otra por disposición de la Ley.

Artículo 659.

La herencia comprende todos los bienes, derechos y obligaciones de una persona que no se extingan por su muerte.

Artículo 660.

Llámase heredero al que sucede a título universal, y legatario al que sucede a título particular.

Artículo 661.

Los herederos suceden al difunto por el hecho solo de su muerte en todos sus derechos y obligaciones.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LOS TESTAMENTOS

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA CAPACIDAD PARA DISPONER POR TESTAMENTO

Artículo 662.

Pueden testar todos aquellos a quienes la ley no lo prohíbe expresamente.

Artículo 663.

Están incapacitados para testar:

Los menores de catorce años de uno y otro sexo.• El que habitual o accidentalmente no se hallare en su cabal juicio.•

Artículo 664.

El testamento hecho antes de la enajenación mental es válido.

108

Artículo 665.

Siempre que el incapacitado por virtud de sentencia que no contenga pronunciamiento acerca de su capacidad para testar pretenda otorgar testamento, el Notario designará dos facultativos que previamente le reconozcan y no lo autorizará sino cuando éstos respondan e su capacidad.

Artículo 666.

Para apreciar la capacidad del testador se atenderá únicamente al estado en que se halle al tiempo de otorgar el testamento.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS TESTAMENTOS EN GENERAL.

Artículo 667.

El acto por el cual una persona dispone para después de su muerte de todos sus bienes o de parte de ellos, se llama testamento.

Artículo 668.

El testador puede disponer de sus bienes a título de herencia o de legado.

En la duda, aunque el testador no haya usado materialmente la palabra heredero, si su voluntad está clara acerca de este concepto, valdrá la disposición como hecha a título universal o de herencia.

Artículo 669.

No podrán testar dos o más personas mancomunadamente, o en un mismo instrumento, ya lo hagan en provecho recíproco, ya en beneficio de un tercero.

Artículo 670.

El testamento es un acto personalísimo: no podrá dejarse su formación, en todo ni parte, al arbitrio de un tercero, ni hacerse por medio de comisario o mandatario.

Tampoco podrá dejarse al arbitrio de un tercero la subsistencia del nombramiento de herederos o legatarios, ni la designación de las porciones en que hayan de suceder cuando sean instituidos nominalmente.

Artículo 671.

Podrá el testador encomendar a un tercero la distribución de las cantidades que deje en general a clases determinadas, como a los parientes, a los pobres o a los establecimientos de beneficencia, así como la elección de las personas o establecimientos a quienes aquéllas deban aplicarse.

Artículo 672.

Toda disposición que sobre institución de heredero, mandas o legados haga el testador, refiriéndose a cédulas o papeles privados que después de su muerte aparezcan en su domicilio o fuera de él, será nula si en las cédulas o papeles no concurren los requisitos prevenidos en el testamento ológrafo.

Artículo 673.

109

Será nulo el testamento otorgado con violencia, dolo o fraude.

Artículo 674.

El que con dolo, fraude o violencia impidiere que una persona, de quien sea heredero abintestato, otorgue libremente su última voluntad, quedará privado de su derecho a la herencia, sin perjuicio de la responsabilidad criminal en que haya incurrido.

Artículo 675.

Toda disposición testamentaria deberá entenderse en el sentido literal de sus palabras, a no ser que aparezca claramente que fue otra la voluntad del testador. En caso de duda se observará lo que aparezca más conforme a la intención del testador según el tenor del mismo testamento.

El testador no puede prohibir que se impugne el testamento en los casos en que haya nulidad declarada por la Ley.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA FORMA DE LOS TESTAMENTOS

Artículo 676.

El testamento puede ser común o especial.

El común puede ser ológrafo, abierto o cerrado.

Artículo 677.

Se consideran testamentos especiales el militar, el marítimo y el hecho en país extranjero.

Artículo 678.

Se llama ológrafo el testamento cuando el testador lo escribe por sí mismo en la forma y con los requisitos que se determinan en el artículo 688.

Artículo 679.

Es abierto el testamento siempre que el testador manifiesta su última voluntad en presencia de las personas que deben autorizar el acto, quedando enteradas de lo que en él se dispone.

Artículo 680.

El testamento es cerrado cuando el testador, sin revelar su última voluntad, declara que ésta se halla contenida en el pliego que presenta a las personas que han de autorizar el acto.

Artículo 681.

No podrán ser testigos en los testamentos:

Los menores de edad, salvo lo dispuesto en el artículo 701.• Los ciegos y los totalmente sordos o mudos.• Los que no entiendan el idioma del testador.• Los que no estén en su sano juicio.•

110

El cónyuge o los parientes dentro del cuarto grado de consanguinidad o segundo de afinidad del Notario autorizante y quienes tengan con éste relación de trabajo.

Artículo 682.

En el testamento abierto tampoco podrán ser testigos los herederos y legatarios en él instituidos, sus cónyuges, ni los parientes de aquéllos, dentro del cuarto grado de consanguinidad o segundo de afinidad.

No están comprendidos en esta prohibición los legatarios ni sus cónyuges o parientes cuando el legado sea de algún objeto mueble o cantidad de poca importancia con relación al caudal hereditario.

Artículo 683.

Para que un testigo sea declarado inhábil es necesario que la causa de su incapacidad exista al tiempo de otorgarse el testamento.

Artículo 684.

Cuando el testador exprese su voluntad en lengua que el Notario no conozca, se requerirá la presencia de un intérprete, elegido por aquél, que traduzca la disposición testamentaria a la oficial en el lugar el otorgamiento que emplee el Notario. El instrumento se escribirá en las dos lenguas con indicación de cuál ha sido la empleada por el testador.

El testamento abierto y el acta del cerrado se escribirán en la lengua extranjera en que se exprese el testador y en la oficial que emplee el Notario, aun cuando éste conozca aquélla.

Artículo 685.

El Notario deberá conocer al testador y si no lo conociese se identificará su persona con dos testigos que le conozcan y sean conocidos del mismo Notario, o mediante la utilización de documentos expedidos por las autoridades públicas cuyo objeto sea identificar a las personas. También deberá el Notario asegurarse de que, a su juicio, tiene el testador la capacidad legal necesaria para testar. En los casos de los artículos 700 y 701 los testigos tendrán obligación de conocer al testador y procurarán asegurarse de su capacidad.

Artículo 686.

Si no pudiere identificarse la persona del testador en la forma prevenida en el artículo que precede, se declarará esta circunstancia por el Notario, o por los testigos en su caso, reseñando los documentos que el testador presente con dicho objeto y las señas personales del mismo.

Si fuere impugnado el testamento por tal motivo, corresponderá al que sostenga su validez la prueba de la identidad del testador.

Artículo 687.

Será nulo el testamento en cuyo otorgamiento no se hayan observado las formalidades respectivamente establecidas en este capítulo.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DEL TESTAMENTO OLÓGRAFO

Artículo 688.

111

El testamento ológrafo sólo podrá otorgarse por personas mayores de edad.

Para que sea válido este testamento deberá estar escrito todo él y firmado por el testador, con expresión del año, mes y día en que se otorgue.

Si contuviese palabras tachadas, enmendadas o entre renglones, las salvará el testador bajo su firma.

Los extranjeros podrán otorgar testamento ológrafo en su propio idioma.

Artículo 689.

El testamento ológrafo deberá protocolizarse presentándolo con este objeto al Juez de primera instancia del último domicilio del testador, o al del lugar en que éste hubiese fallecido, dentro de cinco años, contados desde el día del fallecimiento. Sin este requisito no será válido.

Artículo 690.

La persona en cuyo poder se halle depositado dicho testamento deberá presentarlo al Juzgado luego que tenga noticias de la muerte del testador, y, no verificándolo dentro de los diez días siguientes, será responsable de los daños perjuicios que se causen por la dilación.

También podrá presentarlo cualquiera que tenga interés en el testamento como heredero, legatario, albacea o en cualquier otro concepto.

Artículo 691.

Presentado el testamento ológrafo, y acreditado el fallecimiento del testador, el Juez lo abrirá si estuviere en pliego cerrado, rubricará con el actuario todas las hojas y comprobará su identidad por medio de tres testigos que conozcan la letra y firma del testador, y declaren que no abrigan duda racional de hallarse el testamento escrito y firmado de mano propia del mismo.

A falta de testigos idóneos, o si dudan los examinados, y siempre que el Juez lo estime conveniente, podrá emplearse con dicho objeto el cotejo pericial de letras.

Artículo 692.

Para la práctica de las diligencias expresadas en el artículo anterior serán citados, con la brevedad posible, el cónyuge sobreviviente, si lo hubiere, los descendientes y los ascendientes del testador y, en defecto de unos y otros, los hermanos.

Si estas personas no residieren dentro del partido, o se ignorase su existencia, o siendo menores o incapacitados carecieren de representación legítima, se hará la citación al Ministerio fiscal.

Los citados podrán presenciar la práctica de dichas diligencias y hacer en el acto, de palabra, las observaciones oportunas sobre la autenticidad del testamento.

Artículo 693.

Si el Juez estima justificada la identidad del testamento, acordará que se protocolice, con las diligencias practicadas, en los registros del Notario correspondiente, por el cual se darán a los interesados las copias o testimonios que procedan. En otro caso, denegará la protocolización.

112

Cualquiera que sea la resolución del Juez, se llevará a efecto, no obstante oposición, quedando la salvo el derecho de los interesados para ejercitarlo en el juicio que corresponda.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DEL TESTAMENTO ABIERTO

Artículo 694.

El testamento abierto deberá ser otorgado ante Notario hábil para actuar en el lugar del otorgamiento.

Sólo se exceptuarán de esta regla los casos expresamente determinados en esta misma Sección

Artículo 695.

El testador expresará oralmente o por escrito su última voluntad al Notario. Redactado por éste el testamento con arreglo a ella y con expresión del lugar, año, mes, día y hora de su otorgamiento y advertido el testador del derecho que tiene a leerlo por sí, lo leerá el Notario en alta voz para que el testador manifieste si está conforme con su voluntad. Si lo estuviere, será firmado en el acto por el testador que pueda hacerlo y, en su caso, por los testigos y demás personas que deban concurrir.

Si el testador declara que no sabe o no puede firmar, lo hará por él y a su ruego uno de los testigos.

Artículo 696.

El Notario dará fe de conocer al testador o de haberlo identificado debidamente y, en su defecto, efectuará la declaración prevista en el artículo 686. También hará constar que, a su juicio, se halla el testador con la capacidad legal necesaria para otorgar testamento.

Artículo 697.

Al acto de otorgamiento deberán concurrir dos testigos idóneos:

Cuando el testador declare que no sabe o no puede firmar el testamento.• Cuando el testador, aunque pueda firmarlo, sea ciego o declare que no sabe o no puede leer por sí el testamento.

Si el testador que no supiese o no pudiese leer fuera enteramente sordo, los testigos leerán el testamento en presencia del Notario y deberán declarar que coincide con la voluntad manifestada.

Cuando el testador o el Notario lo soliciten.•

Artículo 698.

Al otorgamiento también deberán concurrir:

Los testigos de conocimiento, si los hubiera quienes podrán intervenir además como testigos instrumentales.

Los facultativos que hubieran reconocido al testador incapacitado.• El intérprete que hubiera traducido la voluntad del testador ala lengua oficial empleada por el Notario.•

Artículo 699.

Todas las formalidades expresadas en esta Sección se practicarán en un solo acto, que comenzará con la

113

lectura del testamento, sin que sea lícita ninguna interrupción, salvo la que pueda ser motivada por algún accidente pasajero.

Artículo 700.

Si el testador se hallare en peligro inminente de muerte, puede otorgarse el testamento ante cinco testigos idóneos, sin necesidad de Notario.

Artículo 701.

En caso de epidemia puede igualmente otorgarse el testamento sin intervención de Notario ante tres testigos mayores de dieciséis años.

Artículo 702.

En los casos de los dos artículos anteriores se escribirá el testamento, siendo posible; no siéndolo, el testamento valdrá aunque los testigos no sepan escribir.

Artículo 703.

El testamento otorgado con arreglo a las disposiciones de los tres artículos anteriores quedará ineficaz si pasaren dos meses desde que el testador haya salido del peligro de muerte, o cesado la epidemia.

Cuando el testador falleciere en dicho plazo, también quedará ineficaz el testamento si dentro de los tres meses siguientes al fallecimiento no se acude al Tribunal competente para que se eleve a escritura pública, ya se haya otorgado por escrito, ya verbalmente.

Artículo 704.

Los testamentos otorgados sin autorización del Notario serán ineficaces si no se elevan a escritura pública y se protocolizan en la forma prevenida en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 705.

Declarado nulo un testamento abierto por no haberse observado las solemnidades establecidas para cada caso, el Notario que lo haya autorizado será responsable de los daños y perjuicios que sobrevengan, si la falta procediere de su malicia, o de negligencia o ignorancia inexcusables.

Artículo 706.

El testamento cerrado habrá de ser escrito.

Si lo escribiese por su puño y letra el testador pondrá al final su firma.

Si estuviese escrito por cualquier medio mecánico o por otra persona a ruego del testador, éste pondrá su firma en todas sus hojas y al pie del testamento.

Cuando el testador no sepa o no pueda firmar, lo hará a su ruego al pie y en todas las hojas otra persona, expresando la causa de la imposibilidad.

En todo caso, antes de la firma se salvarán las palabras enmendadas, tachadas o escritas entre renglones.

114

Artículo 707.

En el otorgamiento del testamento cerrado se observarán las solemnidades siguientes:

El papel que contenga el testamento se pondrá dentro de una cubierta cerrada y sellada de suerte que no pueda extraerse aquél sin romper ésta.

El testador comparecerá con el testamento cerrado y sellado o lo cerrará y sellará en el acto, ante el Notario que haya de autorizarlo.

En presencia del Notario, manifestará el testador por si, o por medio del intérprete previsto en el artículo 684 que el pliego que presenta contiene su testamento, expresando si se halla escrito y firmado por él o si está escrito de mano ajena o por cualquier medio mecánico y firmado al final y en todas sus hojas por él o por otra persona a su ruego.

Sobre la cubierta del testamento extenderá el Notario la correspondiente acta de su otorgamiento, expresando el número y la marca de los sellos con que está cerrado, y dando fe del conocimiento del testador o de haberse identificado su persona en la forma prevenida en los artículos 685 y 686, y de hallarse, a su juicio, el testador con la capacidad legal necesaria para otorgar testamento.

Extendida y leída el acta, la firmará el testador que pueda hacerlo y, en su caso, las personas que deban concurrir, y la autorizará el Notario con su signo y firma.

Si el testador declara que no sabe o no puede firmar, lo hará por él y a su ruego uno de los dos testigos idóneos que en este caso deben concurrir.

También se expresará en el acta esta circunstancia, además del lugar, hora, día, mes y año del otorgamiento.• Concurrirán al acto de otorgamiento dos testigos idóneos, si así lo solicitan el testador o el Notario.•

Artículo 708.

No pueden hacer testamento cerrado los ciegos y los que no sepan o no puedan leer.

Artículo 709.

Los que no puedan expresarse verbalmente, pero sí escribir, podrán otorgar testamento cerrado, observándose lo siguiente:

El testamento ha de estar firmado por el testador. En cuanto a los demás requisitos, se estará a lo dispuesto en el artículo 706.

Al hacer su presentación, el testador escribirá en la parte superior de la cubierta, a presencia del Notario, que dentro de ella se contiene su testamento, expresando cómo está escrito y que está firmado por él,

A continuación de lo escrito por el testador se extenderá el acta de otorgamiento, dando fe el Notario de haberse cumplido lo prevenido en el número anterior y lo demás que se dispone en el artículo 707 en lo que sea aplicable al caso.

Artículo 710.

Autorizado el testamento cerrado, el Notario lo entregará al testador, después de poner en el protocolo corriente copia autorizada del acta de otorgamiento.

Artículo 711.

El testador podrá conservar en su poder el testamento cerrado o encomendar su guarda a persona de su confianza, o depositarlo en poder del Notario autorizante para que lo guarde en su archivo.

115

En este último caso el Notario dará recibo al testador y hará constar en su protocolo corriente, al margen o a continuación de la copia del acta de otorgamiento, que queda el testamento en su poder. Si lo retirare después el testador, firmará un recibo a continuación de dicha nota.

Artículo 712.

El Notario o la persona que tenga en su poder un testamento cerrado, deberá presentarlo al Juez competente luego que sepa el fallecimiento del testador.

Si no lo verifica dentro de diez días, será responsable de los daños y perjuicios que ocasione su negligencia.

Artículo 713.

El que con dolo deje de presentar el testamento cerrado que obre en su poder dentro del plazo fijado en el párrafo segundo del artículo anterior, además de la responsabilidad que en él se determina, perderá todo derecho a la herencia, si lo tuviere como heredero abintestato o como heredero o legatario por testamento.

En esta misma pena incurrirán el que sustrajere dolosamente el testamento cerrado del domicilio del testador o de la persona que lo tenga en guarda o depósito, y que lo oculte, rompa o inutilice de otro modo, sin perjuicio de la responsabilidad criminal que proceda.

Artículo 714.

Para la apertura y protocolización del testamento cerrado se observará lo prevenido en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 715.

Es nulo el testamento cerrado en cuyo otorgamiento no se hayan observado las formalidades establecidas en esta sección; y el Notario que lo autorice será responsable de los daños y perjuicios que sobrevengan, si se probare que la falta procedió de su malicia o de negligencia o ignorancia inexcusables. Será válido, sin embargo, como testamento ológrafo, si todo él estuviere escrito y firmado por el testador y tuviere las demás condiciones propias de este testamento.

SECCIÓN SÉPTIMA. DEL TESTAMENTO MILITAR

Artículo 716.

En tiempo de guerra, los militares en campaña, voluntarios, rehenes, prisioneros y demás individuos empleados en el ejército, o que sigan a éste, podrán otorgar su testamento ante un Oficial que tenga por lo menos la categoría de Capitán.

Es aplicable esta disposición a los individuos de un ejército que se halle en país extranjero.

Si el testador estuviere enfermo o herido, será otorgarlo ante el Capellán o el Facultativo que le asista.

Si estuviere en destacamento, ante el que lo mande, aunque sea subalterno.

En todos los casos de este artículo será siempre necesaria la presencia de dos testigos idóneos.

Artículo 717.

116

También podrán las personas mencionadas en el artículo anterior otorgar testamento cerrado ante un Comisario de guerra, que ejercerá en este caso las funciones de Notario, observándose las disposiciones de los artículos 706 y siguientes.

Artículo 718.

Los testamentos otorgados con arreglo a los dos artículos anteriores deberán ser remitidos con la posible brevedad al cuartel general, y por éste al Ministro de la Guerra.

El Ministro, sí hubiese fallecido el testador, remitirá el testamento al Juez del último domicilio del difunto y, no siéndole conocido, al Decano de los de Madrid, para que de oficio cite a los herederos y demás interesados en la sucesión. Estos deberán solicitar que se eleve a escritura pública y se protocolice en la forma prevenida en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Cuando sea cerrado el testamento, el Juez procederá de oficio a su apertura en la forma prevenida en dicha ley, con citación e intervención del Ministerio fiscal y, después de abierto, lo pondrá en conocimiento de los herederos y demás interesados.

Artículo 719.

Los testamentos mencionados en el artículo 716 caducarán cuatro meses después que el testador haya dejado de estar en campaña.

Artículo 720.

Durante una batalla, asalto, combate y generalmente en todo peligro próximo de acción de guerra, podrá otorgarse testamento militar de palabra ante dos testigos.

Pero este testamento quedará ineficaz si el testador se salva del peligro en cuya consideración testó.

Aunque no se salvare, será ineficaz el testamento si no se formaliza por los testigos ante el Auditor de guerra o funcionario de justicia que siga al ejército, procediéndose después en la forma prevenida en el artículo 718.

Artículo 721.

Si fuese cerrado el testamento militar, se observará lo prevenido en los artículos 706 y 707; pero se otorgará ante el Oficial y los dos testigos que para el abierto exige el artículo 716, debiendo firmar todos ellos el acta de otorgamiento, como asimismo el testador, si pudiere.

SECCIÓN OCTAVA. DEL TESTAMENTO MARÍTIMO

Artículo 722.

Los testamentos, abiertos o cerrados, de los que durante un viaje marítimo vayan a bordo, se otorgarán en la forma siguiente:

Si el buque es de guerra, ante el Contador o el que ejerza sus funciones, en presencia de dos testigos idóneos, que vean y entiendan al testador. El Comandante del buque, o el que haga sus veces, pondrá además su visto bueno.

En los buques mercantes autorizará el testamento el Capitán, o el que haga sus veces, con asistencia de dos testigos idóneos.

117

En uno y otro caso los testigos se elegirán entre los pasajeros, si los hubiere; pero uno de ellos, por lo menos, ha de poder firmar, el cual lo hará por sí y por el testador, si éste no sabe o no puede hacerlo.

Si el testamento fuera abierto, se observará además lo prevenido en el artículo 695, y, si fuere cerrado, lo que se ordena en la sección sexta de este capítulo, con exclusión de lo relativo al número de testigos e intervención del Notario.

Artículo 723.

El testamento del Contador del buque de guerra y el del Capitán del mercante serán autorizados por quien deba sustituirlos en el cargo, observándose para lo demás lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior.

Artículo 724.

Los testamentos abiertos hechos en alta mar serán autorizados por el Comandante o por el Capitán, y se hará mención de ellos en el Diario de navegación.

La misma mención se hará de los ológrafos y los cerrados.

Artículo 725.

Si el buque arribase a un puerto extranjero donde haya Agente diplomático o consular de España, el Comandante del de guerra, o el Capitán del mercante, entregará a dicho Agente copia del testamento abierto o del acta de otorgamiento del cerrado, y de la nota tomada en el Diario.

La copia del testamento o del acta deberá llevar las mismas firmas que el original, si viven y están a bordo los que lo firmaron; en otro caso será autorizada por el Contador o Capitán que hubiese recibido el testamento, o el que haga sus veces, firmando también los que estén a bordo de los que intervinieron en el testamento.

El Agente diplomático o consular hará extender por escrito diligencia de la entrega y, cerrada y sellada la copia del testamento o la del acta del otorgamiento si fuere cerrado, la remitirá con la nota del Diario por el conducto correspondiente al Ministerio de Marina , quien mandará que se deposite en el Archivo de su Ministerio.

El Comandante o Capitán que haga la entrega recogerá del Agente diplomático o consular certificación de haberlo verifica do, y tomará nota de ella en el Diario de navegación.

Artículo 726.

Cuando el buque, sea de guerra o mercante, arribe al primer puerto del Reino, el Comandante o Capitán entregará el testamento original, cerrado y sellado, a la Autoridad marítima local, con copia de la nota tomada en el Diario; y, si hubiese fallecido el testador, certificación que lo acredite.

La entrega se acreditará en la forma prevenida en el artículo anterior, y la Autoridad marítima lo remitirá todo ello sin dilación al Ministro de Marina .

Artículo 727.

Si hubiese fallecido el testador y fuere abierto el testamento, el Ministro de Marina practicará lo que se dispone en el artículo 718.

Artículo 728.

118

Cuando el testamento haya sido otorgado por un extranjero en buque español, el Ministro de Marina remitirá el testamento al de Estado para que por la vía diplomática se le dé el curso que corresponda.

Artículo 729.

Si fuere ológrafo el testamento y durante el viaje falleciera el testador, el Comandante o Capitán recogerá el testamento para custodiarlo, haciendo mención de ello en el Diario, y lo entregará a la Autoridad marítima local, en la forma y para los efectos prevenidos en el artículo anterior, cuando el buque arribe al primer puerto del Reino.

Lo mismo se practicará cuando sea cerrado el testamento, si lo conservaba en su poder el testador al tiempo de su muerte.

Artículo 730.

Los testamentos, abiertos y cerrados, otorgados con arreglo a lo prevenido en esta sección, caducarán pasados cuatro meses, contados desde que el testador desembarque en un punto donde pueda testar en la forma ordinaria.

Artículo 731.

Si hubiere peligro de naufragio, será aplicable a las tripulaciones y pasajeros de los buques de guerra o mercantes lo dispuesto en el artículo 720.

SECCIÓN NOVENA. DEL TESTAMENTO HECHO EN PAÍS EXTRANJERO

Artículo 732.

Los españoles podrán testar fuera del territorio nacional, sujetándose a las formas establecidas por las leyes del país en que se hallen.

También podrán ser testigos en alta mar durante su navegación en un buque extranjero, con sujeción a las leyes de la Nación a que el buque pertenezca.

Podrán asimismo hacer testamento ológrafo, con arreglo al artículo 688, aun en los países cuyas leyes no admiten dicho testamento.

Artículo 733.

No será válido en España el testamento mancomunado, prohibido por el artículo 669, que los españoles otorguen en país extranjero, aunque lo autoricen las leyes de la Nación donde se hubiese otorgado.

Artículo 734.

También podrán los españoles que se encuentren en país extranjero otorgar su testamento, abierto o cerrado, ante el funcionario diplomático o consular de España que ejerza funciones notariales en el lugar del otorgamiento.

En estos casos se observarán respectivamente todas las formalidades establecidas en las Secciones quinta y sexta de este capítulo.

Artículo 735.

119

El Agente diplomático o consular remitirá, autorizada con su firma y sello, copia del testamento abierto, o del acta de otorgamiento del cerrado, al Ministerio de Estado para que se deposite en su Archivo.

Artículo 736.

El Agente diplomático o consular, en cuyo poder hubiese depositado su testamento ológrafo o cerrado un español, lo remitirá al Ministerio de Estado cuando fallezca el testador, con el certificado de defunción.

El Ministerio de Estado hará publicar en la Gaceta de Madrid la noticia del fallecimiento, para que los interesados en la herencia puedan recoger el testamento y gestionar su protocolización en la forma prevenida.

Artículo 737.

Todas las disposiciones testamentarias son esencialmente revocables, aunque el testador exprese en el testamento su voluntad o resolución de no revocarlas

Se tendrán por no puestas las cláusulas derogatorias de las disposiciones futuras, y aquellas en que ordene el testador que no valga la revocación del testamento si no la hiciere con ciertas palabras o señales.

Artículo 738.

El testamento no puede ser revocado en todo ni en parte sino con las solemnidades necesarias para testar.

Artículo 739.

El testamento anterior queda revocado de derecho por el posterior perfecto, si el testador no expresa en éste su voluntad de que aquél subsista en todo o en parte.

Sin embargo, el testamento anterior recobra su fuerza sí el testador revoca después el posterior y declara expresamente ser su voluntad que valga el primero.

Artículo 740.

La revocación producirá su efecto, aunque el segundo testamento caduque por incapacidad del heredero o de los legatarios en él nombrados, o por renuncia de aquél o de éstos.

Artículo 741.

El reconocimiento de un hijo no pierde su fuerza legal aunque se revoque el testamento en que se hizo o éste no contenga otras disposiciones, o sean nulas las demás que contuviere.

Artículo 742.

Se presume revocado el testamento cerrado que aparezca en el domicilio del testador con las cubiertas rotas o los sellos quebrantados, o borradas, raspadas o enmendadas las firmas que lo autoricen.

Este testamento será, sin embargo, válido cuando se probare haber ocurrido el desperfecto sin voluntad ni conocimiento del testador, o hallándose éste en estado de demencia; pero si aparecieren rota la cubierta o quebrantados los sellos, será necesario probar además la autenticidad del testamento para su validez.

Si el testamento se encontrare en poder de otra persona, se entenderá que el vicio procede de ella y no será aquél válido como no se pruebe su autenticidad, si estuvieren rota la cubierta o quebrantados los sellos; y si

120

una y otros se hallaren íntegros, pero con las firmas borradas, raspadas o enmendadas, será válido el testamento, como no se justifique haber sido entregado el pliego en esta forma por el mismo testador.

Artículo 743.

Caducarán los testamentos, o serán ineficaces en todo o en parte las disposiciones testamentarias, sólo en los casos expresamente prevenidos en este Código.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA HERENCIA

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA CAPACIDAD PARA SUCEDER POR TESTAMENTO Y SIN ÉL.

Artículo 744.

Podrán suceder por testamento o abintestato los que no estén incapacitados por la Ley.

Artículo 745.

Son incapaces de suceder:

Las criaturas abortivas, entendiéndose tales las que no reúnan las circunstancias expresadas en el artículo 30.

Las asociaciones o corporaciones no permitidas por la Ley.•

Artículo 746.

Las iglesias y los cabildos eclesiásticos, las Diputaciones provinciales y las provincias, los Ayuntamientos y Municipios, los establecimientos de hospitalidad, beneficencia e instrucción pública, las asociaciones autorizadas o reconocidas por la Ley y las demás personas jurídicas pueden adquirir por testamento con sujeción a lo dispuesto en el artículo 38.

Artículo 747.

Si el testador dispusiere del todo o parte de sus bienes para sufragios y obras piadosas en beneficio de su alma, haciéndolo indeterminadamente y sin especificar su aplicación, los albaceas venderán los bienes y distribuirán su importe, dando la mitad al diocesano para que lo destine a los indicados sufragios y a las atenciones y necesidades de la Iglesia, y la otra mitad al Gobernador civil correspondiente para los estable cimientos benéficos del domicilio del difunto, y, en su defecto, para los de la provincia.

Artículo 748.

La institución hecha a favor de un establecimiento público bajo condición o imponiéndole un gravamen, sólo será válida si el Gobierno la aprueba.

Artículo 749.

Las disposiciones hechas a favor de los pobres en general, sin designación de personas ni de población, se entenderán limitadas a los del domicilio del testador en la época de su muerte, si no constare claramente haber sido otra su voluntad.

La calificación de los pobres y la distribución de los bienes se harán por la persona que haya designado el

121

testador, en su defecto por los albaceas, y, si no los hubiere, por el Párroco, el Alcalde y el Juez municipal, los cuales resolverán, por mayoría de votos, las dudas que ocurran.

Esto mismo se hará cuando el testador haya dispuesto de sus bienes en favor de los pobres de una parroquia o pueblo determinado.

Artículo 750.

Toda disposición en favor de persona incierta será nula, a menos que por algún evento pueda resultar cierta.

Artículo 751.

La disposición hecha genéricamente en favor de los parientes del testador se entiende hecha en favor de los más próximos en grado.

Artículo 752.

No producirán efecto las disposiciones testamentarias que haga el testador durante su última enfermedad en favor del sacerdote que en ella le hubiese confesado, de los parientes del mismo dentro del cuarto grado, o de su iglesia, cabildo, comunidad o instituto.

Artículo 753.

Tampoco surtirá efecto la disposición testamentaria en favor de quien sea tutor o curador del testador, salvo cuando se haya hecho después de aprobadas definitivamente las cuentas o, en el caso en que no tuviese que rendirse éstas, después de la extinción de la tutela o curatela.

Serán, sin embargo, válidas las disposiciones hechas en favor del tutor o curador que sea ascendiente, descendiente, hermano, hermana o cónyuge del testador.

Artículo 754.

El testador no podrá disponer del todo o parte de su herencia en favor del Notario que autorice su testamento, o del cónyuge, parientes o afines del mismo dentro del cuarto grado, con la excepción establecida en el artículo 682.

Esta prohibición será aplicable a los testigos del testamento abierto, otorgado con o sin Notario.

Las disposiciones de este artículo son también aplicables a los testigos y personas ante quienes se otorguen los testamentos especiales.

Artículo 755.

Será nula la disposición testamentaría a favor de un incapaz, aunque se la disfrace bajo la forma de contrato oneroso o se haga a nombre de persona interpuesta.

Artículo 756.

Son incapaces de suceder por causa de indignidad:

Los padres que abandonaren, prostituyeren o corrompieren a sus hijos.• El que fuere condenado en juicio por haber atentado contra la vida del testador, de su cónyuge,•

122

descendientes o ascendientes.

Si el ofensor fuere heredero forzoso, perderá su derecho a la legítima.

El que hubiese acusado al testador de delito al que la ley señale pena no inferior a la de presidio o prisión mayor, cuando la acusación sea declarada calumniosa.

El heredero mayor de edad que, sabedor de la muerte violenta del testador, no la hubiese denunciado dentro de un mes a la justicia, cuando ésta no hubiera procedido ya de oficio.

Cesará esta prohibición en los casos en que, según la Ley, no hay la obligación de acusar.

El que, con amenaza, fraude o violencia, obligare al testador a hacer testamento o a cambiarlo.• El que por iguales medios impidiere a otro hacer testamento, o revocar el que tuviese hecho, o suplantare, ocultare o alterare otro posterior.

Artículo 757.

Las causas de indignidad dejan de surtir efectos si el testador las conocía al tiempo de hacer testamento, o si habiéndolas sabido después, las remitiere en documento público.

Artículo 758.

Para calificar la capacidad del heredero o legatario se atenderá al tiempo de la muerte de la persona de cuya sucesión se trate.

En los casos 2) y 3) del artículo 756 se esperará a que se dicte la sentencia firme, y en el número 4) a que transcurra el mes señalado para la denuncia.

Si la institución o legado fuere condicional, se atenderá además al tiempo en que se cumpla la condición.

Artículo 759.

El heredero o legatario que muera antes de que la condición se cumpla, aunque sobreviva al testador, no transmite derecho alguno a sus herederos.

Artículo 760.

El incapaz de suceder, que, contra la prohibición de los anteriores artículos, hubiese entrado en la posesión de los bienes hereditarios, estará obligado a restituirlos con sus accesiones y con todos los frutos y rentas que haya percibido.

Artículo 761.

Si el excluido de la herencia por incapacidad fuera hijo o descendiente del testador y tuviere hijos o descendientes, adquirirán éstos su derecho a la legítima.

Artículo 762.

No puede deducirse acción para declarar la incapacidad pasados cinco años desde que el incapaz esté en posesión de la herencia o legado.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA INSTITUCIÓN DE HEREDERO

123

Artículo 763.

El que no tuviere herederos forzosos puede disponer por testamento de todos sus bienes o de parte de ellos en favor de cualquiera persona que tenga capacidad para adquirirlos.

El que tuviere herederos forzosos sólo podrá disponer de sus bienes en la forma y con las limitaciones que se establecen en la sección quinta de este capítulo.

Artículo 764.

El testamento será válido aunque no contenga institución de heredero, o ésta no comprenda la totalidad de los bienes, y aunque el nombrado no acepte la herencia o sea incapaz de heredar.

En estos casos se cumplirán las disposiciones testamentarias hechas con arreglo a las leyes, y el remanente de los bienes pasará a los herederos legítimos.

Artículo 765.

Los herederos instituidos sin designación de partes heredarán por partes iguales.

Artículo 766.

El heredero voluntario que muere antes que el testador, el incapaz de heredar y el que renuncia a la herencia no transmiten ningún derecho a sus herederos, salvo lo dispuesto en los artículos 761 y 857.

Artículo 767.

La expresión de una causa falsa de la institución de heredero o del nombramiento de legatario será considerada como no escrita, a no ser que del testamento resulte que el testador no habría hecho tal institución o legado si hubiere conocido la falsedad de la causa.

La expresión de una causa contraria a derecho, aunque sea verdadera, se tendrá también por no escrita.

Artículo 768.

El heredero instituido en una cosa cierta y determinada será considerado como legatario.

Artículo 769.

Cuando el testador nombre unos herederos individualmente y otros colectivamente, como si dijere: "Instituyo por mis herederos a X. y a X. y a los hijos de X." , los colectivamente nombrados se considerarán como si lo fueran individualmente, a no ser que conste de un modo claro que ha sido otra la voluntad del testador.

Artículo 770.

Si el testador instituye a sus hermanos, y los tiene carnales y de padre o madre solamente, se dividirá la herencia como en el caso de morir intestado.

Artículo 771.

Cuando el testador llame a la sucesión a una persona, y a sus hijos, se entenderán todos instituidos simultánea y no sucesivamente.

124

Artículo 772.

El testador designará al heredero por su nombre y apellidos, y cuando haya dos que los tengan iguales deberá señalar alguna circunstancia por la que se conozca al instituido.

Aunque el testador haya omitido el nombre del heredero, si lo designare de modo que no pueda dudarse quién sea el instituido, valdrá la institución.

En el testamento del adoptante, la expresión genérica hijo o hijos comprende a los adoptivos.

Artículo 773.

El error en el nombre, apellido o cualidades del heredero no vicia la institución cuando de otra manera puede saberse ciertamente cuál sea la persona nombrada.

Si entre personas del mismo nombre y apellidos hay igualdad de circunstancias y éstas son tales que no permiten distinguir al instituido, ninguno será heredero.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA SUSTITUCIÓN

Artículo 774.

Puede el testador sustituir una o más personas al heredero o herederos instituidos para el caso en que mueran antes que él, o no quieran, o no puedan aceptar la herencia.

La sustitución simple, y sin expresión de casos, comprende los tres expresados en el párrafo anterior, a menos que el testador haya dispuesto lo contrario.

Artículo 775.

Los padres y demás ascendientes podrán nombrar sustitutos a sus descendientes menores de catorce años, de ambos sexos, para el caso de que mueran antes de dicha edad.

Artículo 776.

El ascendiente podrá nombrar sustituto al descendiente mayor de catorce años que, conforme a derecho, haya sido declarado incapaz por enajenación mental.

La sustitución de que habla el párrafo anterior quedará sin efecto por el testamento del incapacitado hecho durante un intervalo lúcido o después de haber recobrado la razón.

Artículo 777.

Las sustituciones de que hablan los dos artículos anteriores, cuando el sustituido tenga herederos forzosos, sólo serán válidas en cuanto no perjudiquen los derechos legitimarios de éstos.

Artículo 778.

Pueden ser sustituidas dos o más personas a una sola; y al contrario, una sola a dos o más herederos.

Artículo 779.

125

Si los herederos instituidos en partes desiguales fueren sustituidos recíprocamente, tendrán en la sustitución las mismas partes que en la institución, a no ser que claramente aparezca haber sido otra la voluntad del testador.

Artículo 780.

El sustituto quedará sujeto a las mismas cargas y condiciones impuestas al instituido, a menos que el testador haya dispuesto expresamente lo contrario, o que los gravámenes o condiciones sean meramente personales del instituido.

Artículo 781.

Las sustituciones fideicomisarias en cuya virtud se encarga al heredero que conserve y transmita a un tercero el todo o parte de la herencia, serán válidas y surtirán efecto siempre que no pasen del segundo grado, o que se hagan en favor de personas que vivan al tiempo del fallecimiento del testador.

Artículo 782.

Las sustituciones fideicomisarias nunca podrán gravar la legítima. Si recayeren sobre el tercio destinado a la mejora, sólo podrán hacerse en favor de los descendientes.

Artículo 783.

Para que sean válidos los llamamientos a la sustitución fideicomisaria, deberán ser expresos.

El fiduciario estará obligado a entregar la herencia al fideicomisario, sin otras deducciones que las que correspondan por gastos legítimos, créditos y mejoras, salvo el caso en que el testador haya dispuesto otra cosa.

Artículo 784.

El fideicomisario adquirirá derecho a la sucesión desde la muerte del testador, aunque muera antes que el fiduciario. El derecho de aquél pasará a sus herederos.

Artículo 785.

No surtirán efecto:

Las instituciones fideicomisarias que no se hagan de una manera expresa, ya dándoles este nombre, ya imponiendo al sustituido la obligación terminante de entregar los bienes a un segundo heredero.

Las disposiciones que contengan prohibición perpetua de enajenar, y aun la temporal, fuera del límite señalado en el artículo 781.

Las que impongan al heredero el encargo de pagar a varias personas sucesivamente, más allá del segundo grado, cierta renta o pensión.

Las que tengan por objeto dejar a una persona el todo o parte de los bienes hereditarios para que los aplique o invierta según instrucciones reservadas que le hubiese comunicado el testador.

Artículo 786.

La nulidad de la sustitución fideicomisaria no perjudicará a la validez de la institución ni a los herederos del primer llamamiento; sólo se tendrá por no escrita la cláusula fideicomisaria.

126

Artículo 787.

La disposición en que el testador deje a una persona el todo o parte de la herencia, y a otra el usufructo, será válida. Si llamare al usufructo a varias personas, no simultánea, sino sucesivamente, se estará a lo dispuesto en el artículo 781.

Artículo 788.

Será válida la disposición que imponga al heredero la obligación de invertir ciertas cantidades periódicamente en obras benéficas, como dotes para doncellas pobres, pensiones para estudiantes o en favor de los pobres o de cualquiera establecimiento de beneficencia o de instrucción pública, bajo las condiciones siguientes;

Si la carga se impusiere sobre bienes inmuebles y fuere temporal, el heredero o herederos podrán disponer de la finca gravada, sin que cese el gravamen mientras que su inscripción no se cancele.

Si la carga fuere perpetua, el heredero podrá capitalizarla e imponer el capital a interés con primera y suficiente hipoteca.

La capitalización e imposición del capital se hará interviniendo el Gobernador civil de la provincia y con audiencia del Ministerio público.

En todo caso, cuando el testador no hubiere establecido un orden para la administración y aplicación de la manda benéfica, lo hará la Autoridad administrativa a quien corresponda con arreglo a las leyes.

Artículo 789.

Todo lo dispuesto en este capítulo respecto a los herederos se entenderá también aplicable a los legatarios.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA INSTITUCIÓN DE HEREDERO Y DEL LEGADO CONDICIONAL O A TÉRMINO.

Artículo 790.

Las disposiciones testamentarias, tanto a título universal como particular, podrán hacerse bajo condición.

Artículo 791.

Las condiciones impuestas a los herederos y legatarios, en lo que no esté prevenido en esta sección, se regirán por las reglas establecidas para las obligaciones condicionales.

Artículo 792.

Las condiciones imposibles y las contrarias a las leyes o a las buenas costumbres se tendrán por no puestas y en nada perjudicarán al heredero o legatario, aun cuando el testador disponga otra cosa.

Artículo 793.

La condición absoluta de no contraer primero o ulterior matrimonio se tendrá por no puesta, a menos que lo haya sido al viudo o viuda por su difunto consorte o por los ascendientes o descendientes de éste.

Podrá, sin embargo, legarse a cualquiera el usufructo, uso o habitación, u una pensión o prestación personal, por el tiempo que permanezca soltero o viudo.

127

Artículo 794.

Será nula la disposición hecha bajo condición de que el heredero o legatario haga en su testamento alguna disposición en favor del testador o de otra persona.

Artículo 795.

La condición puramente potestativa impuesta al heredero o legatario ha de ser cumplida por éstos, una vez enterados de ella, después de la muerte del testador.

Exceptúase el caso en que la condición, ya cumplida, no pueda reiterarse.

Artículo 796.

Cuando la condición fuere casual o mixta, bastará que se realice o cumpla en cualquier tiempo, vivo o muerto el testador, si éste no hubiese dispuesto otra cosa.

Si hubiese existido o se hubiese cumplido al hacerse el testamento, y el testador lo ignoraba, se tendrá por cumplida.

Si lo sabia, sólo se tendrá por cumplida cuando fuere de tal naturaleza que no pueda ya existir o cumplirse de nuevo.

Artículo 797.

La expresión del objeto de la institución o legado, o la aplicación que haya de darse a lo dejado por el testador, o la carga que el mismo impusiere, no se entenderán como condición, a no parecer que ésta era su voluntad.

Lo dejado de esta manera puede pedirse desde luego, y es transmisible a los herederos que afiancen el cumplimiento de lo mandado por el testador y la devolución de lo percibido con sus frutos e intereses, si faltaren a esta obligación.

Artículo 798.

Cuando, sin culpa o hecho propio del heredero o legatario no pueda tener efecto la institución o el legado de que trata el artículo precedente en los mismos términos que haya ordenado el testador, deberá cumplirse en otros, los más análogos y conformes a su voluntad.

Cuando el interesado en que se cumpla, o no, impidiere su cumplimiento sin culpa o hecho propio del heredero o legatario, se considerará cumplida la condición.

Artículo 799.

La condición suspensiva no impide al heredero o legatario adquirir sus respectivos derechos y transmitirlos a sus herederos, aun antes de que se verifique su cumplimiento.

Artículo 800.

Si la condición potestativa impuesta al heredero o legatario fuere negativa, o de no hacer o no dar, cumplirán con afianzar que no harán o no darán lo que fue prohibido por el testador, y que, en caso de contravención, devolverán lo percibido con sus frutos e intereses.

128

Artículo 801.

Si el heredero fuere instituido bajo condición suspensiva, se pondrán los bienes de la herencia en administración hasta que la condición se realice o haya certeza de que no podrá cumplirse.

Lo mismo se hará cuando el heredero o legatario no preste la fianza en el caso del artículo anterior.

Artículo 802.

La administración de que habla el artículo precedente se confiará al heredero o herederos instituidos sin condición, cuando entre ellos y el heredero condicional hubiere derecho de acrecer. Lo mismo se entenderá respecto de los legatarios.

Artículo 803.

Si el heredero condicional no tuviere coherederos, o teniéndolos no existiese entre ellos derecho de acrecer, entrará aquél en la administración, dando fianza.

Si no la diere, se conferirá la administración al heredero presunto, también bajo fianza; y, si ni uno ni otro afianzaren, los Tribunales nombrarán tercera persona que se hará cargo de ella, también bajo fianza, la cual se prestará con intervención del heredero.

Artículo 804.

Los administradores tendrán los mismos derechos y obligaciones que los que lo son de los bienes de un ausente.

Artículo 805.

Será válida la designación de día o de tiempo en que haya de comenzar o cesar el efecto de la institución de heredero o del legado. En ambos casos, hasta que llegue el término señalado, o cuando éste concluya, se entenderá llamado el sucesor legítimo, Mas en el primer caso, no entrará éste en posesión de los bienes sino después de prestar caución suficiente, con intervención del instituido.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LAS LEGÍTIMAS.

Artículo 806.

Legítima es la porción de bienes de que el testador no puede disponer por haberla reservado la ley a determinados herederos, llamados por esto herederos forzosos.

Artículo 807.

Son herederos forzosos:

Los hijos y descendientes respecto de sus padres y ascendientes.• A falta de los anteriores, los padres y ascendientes respecto de sus hijos y descendientes.• El viudo o viuda en la forma y medida que establece este Código.•

Artículo 808.

Constituyen la legítima de los hijos y descendientes las dos terceras partes del haber hereditario del padre y de

129

la madre.

Sin embargo, podrán éstos disponer de una parte de las dos que forman la legítima, para aplicarla como mejora a sus hijos o descendientes.

La tercera parte restante será de libre disposición.

Artículo 809.

Constituyen la legítima de los padres o ascendientes la mitad del haber hereditario de los hijos y descendientes, salvo el caso en que concurrieren con el cónyuge viudo del descendiente causante, en cuyo supuesto será de una tercera parte de la herencia.

Artículo 810.

La legítima reservada a los padres se dividirá entre los dos por partes iguales: si uno de ellos hubiere muerto, recaerá toda en el sobreviviente.

Cuando el testador no deje padre ni madre, pero si ascendientes, en igual grado, de las líneas paterna y materna, se dividirá la herencia por mitad entre ambas líneas. Si los ascendientes fueren de grado diferente, corresponderá por entero a los más próximos de una u otra línea.

Artículo 811.

El ascendiente que heredare de su descendiente bienes que éste hubiese adquirido por título lucrativo de otro ascendiente, o de un hermano, se halla obligado a reservar los que hubiere adquirido por ministerio de la ley en favor de los parientes que estén dentro del tercer grado y pertenezcan a la línea de donde los bienes proceden.

Artículo 812.

Los ascendientes suceden con exclusión de otras personas en las cosas dadas por ellos a sus hijos o descendientes muertos sin posteridad, cuando los mismos objetos donados existan en la sucesión. Si hubieren sido enajenados, sucederán en todas las acciones que el donatario tuviera con relación a ellos, y en el precio si se hubieren vendido, o en los bienes con que se hayan sustituido, si los permutó o cambió.

Artículo 813.

El testador no podrá privar a los herederos de su legítima sino en los casos expresamente determinados por la ley.

Tampoco podrá imponer sobre ella gravamen, ni condición, ni sustitución de ninguna especie, salvo la dispuesto en cuanto al usufructo del viudo.

Artículo 814.

La preterición de un heredero forzoso no perjudica la legítima. Se reducirá la institución de heredero antes que los legados, mejoras y demás disposiciones testamentarias.

Sin embargo, la preterición no intencional de hijos y descendientes producirá los siguientes efectos:

Si resultaren preteridos todos, se anularán las disposiciones testamentarias de contenido patrimonial.•

130

En otro caso, se anulará la institución de herederos, pero valdrán las mandas y mejoras ordenadas por cualquier título, en cuanto unas y otras no sean inoficiosas, No obstante, la institución de heredero a favor del cónyuge sólo se anulará en cuanto perjudique a las legítimas.

Los descendientes de otro descendiente que no hubiere sido preterido, representan a éste en la herencia del ascendiente, y no se consideran preteridos.

Si los herederos forzosos preteridos mueren antes que el testador, el testamento surtirá todos sus efectos.

A salvo las legítimas, tendrá preferencia en todo caso lo ordenado por el testador.

Artículo 815.

El heredero forzoso a quien el testador haya dejado por cualquier título menos de la legítima que le corresponda, podrá pedir el complemento de la misma.

Artículo 816.

Toda renuncia o transacción sobre la legítima futura entre el que la debe y sus herederos forzosos es nula, y éstos podrán reclamarla cuando muera aquél; pero deberán traer a colación lo que hubiesen recibido por la renuncia o transacción.

Artículo 817.

Las disposiciones testamentarias que mengüen la legítima de los herederos forzosos se reducirán, a petición de éstos, en lo que fueren inoficiosas o excesivas.

Artículo 818.

Para fijar la legítima se atenderá al valor de los bienes que quedaren a la muerte del testador, con deducción de las deudas y cargas, sin comprender entre ellas las impuestas en el testamento.

Al valor líquido de los bienes hereditarios se agregará el de las donaciones colacionables.

Artículo 819.

Las donaciones hechas a los hijos, que no tengan el concepto de mejoras, se imputarán en su legítima.

Las donaciones hechas a extraños se imputarán a la parte libre de que el testador hubiese podido disponer por su última voluntad

En cuanto fueren inoficiosas o excedieren de la cuota disponible, se reducirán según las reglas de los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 820.

Fijada la legítima con arreglo a los dos artículos anteriores, se hará la reducción como sigue:

Se respetarán las donaciones mientras pueda cubrirse la legítima, reduciendo o anulando, si necesario fuere, las mandas hechas en testamento.

La reducción de éstas se hará a prorrata, sin distinción alguna. Si el testador hubiere dispuesto que se pague cierto legado con preferencia a otros, no sufrirá aquél reducción sino después de haberse aplicado éstos por

131

entero al pago de la legítima. Si la manda consiste en un usufructo o renta vitalicia, cuyo valor se tenga por superior a la parte disponible, los herederos forzosos podrán escoger entre cumplir la disposición testamentaria o entregar al legatario la parte de la herencia de que podía disponer libremente el testador.

Artículo 821.

Cuando el legado sujeto a reducción consista en una finca que no admita cómoda división, quedará ésta para el legatario si la reducción no absorbe la mitad de su valor, y en caso contrario para los herederos forzosos; pero aquél y éstos deberán abonarse su respectivo haber en dinero.

El legatario que tenga derecho a legítima podrá retener toda la finca, con tal que su valor no supere al importe de la porción disponible y de la cuota que le corresponda por legítima.

Artículo 822.

Si los herederos o legatarios no quieren usar del derecho que se les concede en el artículo anterior, podrá usarlo el que de ellos no lo tenía; si éste tampoco quiere usarlo, se venderá la finca en pública subasta, a instancia de cualquiera de los interesados.

SECCIÓN SEXTA. DE LAS MEJORAS

Artículo 823.

El padre o la madre podrán disponer en concepto de mejora a favor de alguno o algunos de sus hijos o descendientes, ya lo sean por naturaleza, ya por adopción, de una de las dos terceras partes destinadas a legítima.

Artículo 824.

No podrán imponerse sobre la mejora otros gravámenes que los que se establezcan en favor de los legitimarios o sus descendientes.

Artículo 825.

Ninguna donación por contrato entre vivos, sea simple o por causa onerosa, en favor de hijos o descendientes, que sean herederos forzosos, se reputará mejora, si el donante no ha declarado de una manera expresa su voluntad de mejorar.

Artículo 826.

La promesa de mejorar o no mejorar, hecha por escritura pública en capitulaciones matrimoniales, será válida.

La disposición del testador contraria a la promesa no producirá efecto.

Artículo 827.

La mejora, aunque se haya verificado con entrega de bienes, será revocable, a menos que se haya hecho por capitulaciones matrimoniales o por contrato oneroso celebrado con un tercero.

Artículo 828.

132

La manda o legado hecho por el testador a uno de los hijos o descendientes no se reputará mejora sino cuando el testador haya declarado expresamente ser ésta su voluntad, o cuando no quepa en la parte libre.

Artículo 829.

La mejora podrá señalarse en cosa determinada. Si el valor de ésta excediere del tercio destinado a la mejora y de la parte de legítima correspondiente al mejorado, deberá éste abonar la diferencia en metálico a los demás interesados.

Artículo 830.

La facultad de mejorar no puede encomendarse a otro.

Artículo 831.

No obstante lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, podrá ordenarse en testamento o en capitulaciones matrimoniales que. muriendo el cónyuge otorgante, pueda el viudo o viuda que no haya contraído nuevas nupcias distribuir, a su prudente arbitrio, los bienes del difunto y mejorar en ellos a los hijos comunes, sin perjuicio de las legítimas y de las mejoras y demás disposiciones del causante.

Si no se hubiere señalado plazo, el viudo o viuda tendrá el de un año, contado desde la apertura de la sucesión, o, en su caso, desde la emancipación del último de los hijos comunes.

Artículo 832.

Cuando la mejora no hubiere sido señalada en cosa determinada, será pagada con los mismos bienes hereditarios, observándose, en cuanto puedan tener lugar, las reglas establecidas en los artículos 1.061 y 1.062 para procurar la igualdad de los herederos en la partición de bienes.

Artículo 833.

El hijo o descendiente mejorado podrá renunciar a la herencia y aceptar la mejora.

SECCIÓN SÉPTIMA. DERECHOS DEL CÓNYUGE VIUDO

Artículo 834.

El cónyuge que al morir su consorte no se hallare separado o lo estuviere por culpa del difunto, si concurre a la herencia con hijos o descendientes tendrá derecho al usufructo del tercio destinado a mejora.

Artículo 835.

Cuando estuvieren los cónyuges separados en virtud de demanda, se esperará al resultado del pleito.

Si entre los cónyuges separados hubiere mediado perdón o reconciliación, el sobreviviente conservará sus derechos.

Artículo 836.

Suprimido por la Ley 11/1981, de 13 de mayo.

Artículo 837.

133

No existiendo descendientes, pero sí ascendientes, el cónyuge sobreviviente tendrá derecho al usufructo de la mitad de la herencia.

Igual extensión tendrá el usufructo cuando los únicos herederos forzosos que concurran con el viudo o, viuda sean hijos sólo de su consorte concebidos constante el matrimonio de ambos. La cuota usufructuaria recaerá en este caso sobre el tercio de mejora, gravando el resto el tercio de libre disposición.

Artículo 838.

No existiendo descendientes ni ascendientes el cónyuge sobreviviente tendrá derecho al usufructo de los dos tercios de la herencia.

Artículo 839.

Los herederos podrán satisfacer al cónyuge su parte de usufructo, asignándole una renta vitalicia, los productos de determinados bienes, u un capital en efectivo, procediendo de mutuo acuerdo y, en su defecto, por virtud de mandato judicial.

Mientras esto no se realice, estarán afectos todos los bienes de la herencia al pago de la parte de usufructo que corresponda al cónyuge.

Artículo 840.

Cuando se esté en el caso previsto por el párrafo segundo del artículo 837, el cónyuge podrá exigir que el usufructo que grave la parte que reciban los hijos le sea satisfecho, a elección de éstos, asignándole un capital en dinero o un lote de bienes hereditarios.

SECCIÓN OCTAVA. PAGO DE LA PORCIÓN HEREDITARIA EN CASOS ESPECIALES.

Artículo 841.

El testador, o el contador−partidor expresamente autorizado por aquél, podrá adjudicar todos los bienes hereditarios, o parte de ellos, a alguno de los hijos o descendientes, ordenando que se pague en metálico la porción hereditaria de los demás legitimarios.

También corresponderá la facultad de pago en metálico en el mismo supuesto del párrafo anterior al contador−partidor dativo a que se refiere el artículo 1.057 del Código Civil.

Artículo 842.

No obstante lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, cualquiera de los hijos o descendientes obligados a pagar en metálico la cuota hereditaria de sus hermanos podrá exigir que dicha cuota sea satisfecha en bienes de la herencia, debiendo observarse, en tal caso, lo prescrito por los artículos 1.058 a 1.063 de este Código.

Artículo 843.

Salvo confirmación expresa de todos los hijos o descendientes, la partición a que se refieren los dos artículos anteriores requerirá aprobación judicial.

Artículo 844.

La decisión de pago en metálico no producirá efectos si no se comunica a los perceptores en el plazo de un

134

año desde la apertura de la sucesión. El pago deberá hacerse en el plazo de otro año más, salvo pacto en contrario. Corresponderán al perceptor de la cantidad las garantías legales establecidas para el legatario de cantidad.

Transcurrido el plazo sin que el pago haya tenido lugar, caducará la facultad conferida a los hijos o descendientes por el testador o el contador−partidor y se procederá a repartir la herencia según las disposiciones generales sobre la partición.

Artículo 845.

La opción de que tratan los artículos anteriores no afectará a los legados de cosa específica.

Artículo 846.

Tampoco afectará a las disposiciones particionales del testador señaladas en cosas determinadas.

Artículo 847.

Para fijar la suma que haya de abonarse a los hijos o descendientes se atenderá al valor que tuvieren los bienes al tiempo de liquidarles la porción correspondiente, teniendo en cuenta los frutos o rentas hasta entonces producidas. Desde la liquidación, el crédito metálico devengará el interés legal.

SECCIÓN NOVENA. DE LA DESHEREDACIÓN

Artículo 848.

La desheredación sólo podrá tener lugar por alguna de las causas que expresamente señala la ley.

Artículo 849.

La desheredación sólo podrá hacerse en testamento, expresando en él la causa legal en que se funde.

Artículo 850.

La prueba de ser cierta la causa de la desheredación corresponderá a los herederos del testador si el desheredado lo negare.

Artículo 851.

La desheredación hecha sin expresión de causa, o por causa cuya certeza, sí fuere contradicha, no se probare, o que no sea una de las señaladas en los cuatro siguientes artículos, anulará la institución de heredero en cuanto perjudique al desheredado; pero valdrán los legados, mejoras y demás disposiciones testamentarias en lo que no perjudiquen a dicha legítima.

Artículo 852.

Son justas causas para la desheredación, en los términos que específicamente determinan los artículos 853, 854 y 855, las de incapacidad por indignidad para suceder señaladas en el artículo 756 con los números 1), 2), 3), 5) y 6)

Artículo 853.

135

Serán también justas causas para desheredar a los hijos y descendientes, además de las señaladas en el artículo 756 con los números 2), 3), 5) y 6), las siguientes:

Haber negado sin motivo legítimo los alimentos al padre o ascendiente que le deshereda.• Haberle maltratado de obra o injuriado gravemente de palabra.•

Artículo 854.

Serán justas causas para desheredar a los padres y ascendientes, además de las señaladas en el artículo 756 con los números 1), 2), 3), 5) y 6), las siguientes:

Haber perdido la patria potestad por las causas expresadas en el artículo 170.• Haber negado los alimentos a sus hijos o descendientes sin motivo legítimo.• Haber atentado uno de los padres contra la vida del otro si no hubiere habido entre ellos reconciliación.•

Artículo 855.

Serán justas causas para desheredar al cónyuge, además de las señaladas en el artículo 756 con los números 2), 3), 5) y 6), las siguientes:

Haber incumplido grave o reiteradamente los deberes conyugales.• Las que dan lugar a la pérdida de la patria potestad, conforme al artículo 170.• Haber negado alimentos a los hijos o al otro cónyuge• Haber atentado contra la vida del cónyuge testador, si no hubiere mediado la reconciliación.•

Artículo 856.

La reconciliación posterior del ofensor y del ofendido priva a éste del derecho de desheredar, y deja sin efecto la desheredación va hecha.

Artículo 857.

Los hijos o descendientes del desheredado ocuparán su lugar y conservarán los derechos de herederos forzosos respecto a la legítima.

SECCIÓN DÉCIMA. DE LAS MANDAS Y LEGADOS.

Artículo 858.

El testador podrá gravar con mandas y legados, no sólo a su heredero, sino también a los legatarios.

Estos no estarán obligados a responder del gravamen sino hasta donde alcance el valor del legado.

Artículo 859.

Cuando el testador grave con un legado a uno de los herederos, él sólo quedará obligado a su cumplimiento.

Si no gravase a ninguno en particular, quedarán obligados todos en la misma proporción en que sean herederos.

Artículo 860.

136

El obligado a la entrega del legado responderá en caso de evicción, si la cosa fuere indeterminada y se señalase sólo por género o especie.

Artículo 861.

El legado de cosa ajena si el testador, al legarla, sabia que lo era, es válido. El heredero estará obligado a adquirirla para entregarla al legatario; y, no siéndole posible, a dar a éste su justa estimación.

La prueba de que el testador sabía que la cosa era ajena corresponde al legatario.

Artículo 862.

Si el testador ignoraba que la cosa que legaba era ajena, será nulo el legado.

Pero será válido si la adquiere después de otorgado el testamento.

Artículo 863.

Será válido el legado hecho a un tercero de una cosa propia del heredero o de un legatario, quienes, al aceptar la sucesión, deberán entregar la cosa legada o su justa estimación, con la limitación establecida en el artículo siguiente.

Lo dispuesto en el párrafo anterior se entiende sin perjuicio de la legítima de los herederos forzosos.

Artículo 864.

Cuando el testador, heredero o legatario tuviesen sólo una parte u un derecho en la cosa legada, se entenderá limitado el legado a esta parte o derecho, a menos que el testador declare expresamente que lega la cosa por entero.

Artículo 865.

Es nulo el legado de cosas que están fuera del comercio.

Artículo 866.

No producirá efecto el legado de cosa que al tiempo de hacerse el testamento fuera ya propia del legatario, aunque en ella tuviese algún derecho otra persona.

Si el testador dispone expresamente que la cosa sea liberada de este derecho o gravamen, valdrá en cuanto a esto el legado.

Artículo 867.

Cuando el testador legare una cosa empeñada o hipotecada para la seguridad de alguna deuda exigible, el pago de ésta quedará a cargo del heredero.

Si por no pagar el heredero lo hiciera el legatario, quedará éste subrogado en el lugar y derechos del acreedor para reclamar contra el heredero.

Cualquiera otra carga perpetua o temporal, a que se halle afecta la cosa legada, pasa con ésta al legatario; pero en ambos casos las rentas y los intereses o réditos devengados hasta la muerte del testador son carga de la

137

herencia.

Artículo 868.

Si la cosa legada estuviera sujeta a usufructo, uso o habitación, el legatario deberá respetar estos derechos hasta que legalmente se extingan.

Artículo 869.

El legado quedará sin efecto:

Si el testador transforma la cosa legada, de modo que no conserve ni la forma ni la denominación que tenía.• Si el testador enajena, por cualquier título o causa, la cosa legada o parte de ella, entendiéndose en este último caso que el legado queda sólo sin efecto respecto a la parte enajena da. Si después de la enajenación volviere la cosa al dominio del testador, aunque sea por la nulidad del contrato, no tendrá después de este hecho fuerza el legado, salvo el caso en que la readquisición se verifique por pacto de retroventa.

Si la cosa legada perece del todo viviendo el testador, o después de su muerte sin culpa del heredero. Sin embargo, el obligado a pagar el legado responderá por evicción, si la cosa legada no hubiere sido determinada en especie, según lo dispuesto en el artículo 860.

Artículo 870.

El legado de un crédito contra tercero, o el de perdón o liberación de una deuda del legatario, sólo surtirá efecto en la parte del crédito o de la deuda subsistente al tiempo de morir el testador. En el primer caso, el heredero cumplirá con ceder al legatario todas las acciones que pudieran competirle contra el deudor.

En el segundo, con dar al legatario carta de pago, si la pidiere. En ambos casos, el legado comprenderá los intereses que por el crédito o la deuda se debieren al morir el testador.

Artículo 871.

Caduca el legado de que se habla en el artículo anterior sí el testador, después de haberlo hecho, demandare judicialmente al deudor para el pago de su deuda, aunque éste no se haya realizado al tiempo del fallecimiento.

Por el legado hecho al deudor de la cosa empeñada sólo se entiende remitido el derecho de prenda.

Artículo 872.

El legado genérico de liberación o perdón de las deudas comprende las existentes al tiempo de hacerse el testamento, no las posteriores.

Artículo 873.

El legado hecho a un acreedor no se imputará en pago de su crédito, a no ser que el testador lo declare expresa mente.

En este caso, el acreedor tendrá derecho a cobrar el exceso de crédito o del legado.

Artículo 874.

En los legados alternativos se observará lo dispuesto para las obligaciones de la misma especie, salvas las

138

modificaciones que se deriven de la voluntad expresa del testador.

Artículo 875.

El legado de cosa mueble genérica será válido aunque no haya cosas de su género en la herencia.

El legado de cosa inmueble no determinada sólo será válido si la hubiere de su género en la herencia.

La elección será del heredero, quien cumplirá con dar una cosa que no sea de la calidad inferior ni de la superior.

Artículo 876.

Siempre que el testador deje expresamente la elección al heredero o al legatario, el primero podrá dar, o el segundo elegir, lo que mejor les pareciere.

Artículo 877.

Si el heredero o legatario no pudiere hacer la elección en el caso de haberle sido concedida, pasará su derecho a los herederos; pero, una vez hecha la elección, será irrevocable.

Artículo 878.

Si la cosa legada era propia del legatario a la fecha del testamento, no vale el legado, aunque después haya sido enajenada.

Si el legatario la hubiese adquirido por título lucrativo después de aquella fecha, nada podrá pedir por ello; mas, si la adquisición se hubiese hecho por título oneroso, podrá pedir al heredero que le indemnice de lo que haya dado por adquirirla.

Artículo 879.

El legado de educación dura hasta que el legatario sea mayor de edad.

El de alimentos dura mientras viva el legatario, si el testador no dispone otra cosa.

Si el testador no hubiere señalado cantidad para estos legados, se fijará según el estado y condición del legatario y el importe de la herencia.

Si el testador acostumbró en vida dar al legatario cierta cantidad de dinero u otras cosas por vía de alimentos, se entenderá legada la misma cantidad, si no resultare en notable desproporción con la cuantía de la herencia.

Artículo 880.

Legada una pensión periódica o cierta cantidad anual, mensual o semanal, el legatario podrá exigir la del primer período así que muera el testador, y la de los siguientes en el principio de cada uno de ellos, sin que haya lugar a la devolución aunque el legatario muera antes que termine el período comenzado.

Artículo 881.

El legatario adquiere derecho a los legados puros y simples desde la muerte del testador, y lo transmite a sus herederos.

139

Artículo 882.

Cuando el legado es de cosa específica y determinada, propia del testador, el legatario adquiere su propiedad desde que aquél muere, y hace suyos los frutos o rentas pendientes, pero no las rentas devengadas y no satisfechas antes de la muerte.

La cosa legada correrá desde el mismo instante a riesgo del legatario, que sufrirá, por lo tanto, su pérdida o deterioro, como también se aprovechará de su aumento o mejora.

Artículo 883.

La cosa legada deberá ser entregada con todos sus accesorios y en el estado en que se halle al morir el testador.

Artículo 884.

Si el legado no fuere de cosa específica y determinada, sino genérico o de cantidad, sus frutos e intereses desde la muerte del testador corresponderán al legatario cuando el testador lo hubiese dispuesto expresamente.

Artículo 885.

El legatario no puede ocupar por su propia autoridad la cosa legada, sino que debe pedir su entrega y posesión al heredero o al albacea, cuando éste se halle autoriza do para darla.

Artículo 886.

El heredero debe dar la misma cosa legada, pudiendo hacerlo, y no cumple con dar su estimación.

Los legados en dinero deberán ser pagados en esta especie, aunque no lo haya en la herencia.

Los gastos necesarios para la entrega de la cosa legada serán a cargo de la herencia, pero sin perjuicio de la legítima.

Artículo 887.

Si los bienes de la herencia no alcanzaren para cubrir todos los legados, el pago se hará en el orden siguiente:

Los legados remuneratorios.• Los legados de cosa cierta y determinada, que forme parte del caudal hereditario.• Los legados que el testador haya declarado preferentes.• Los de alimentos.• Los de educación.• Los demás a prorrata.•

Artículo 888.

Cuando el legatario no pueda o no quiera admitir el legado, o éste, por cualquier causa, no tenga efecto, se refundirá en la masa de la herencia, fuera de los casos de sustitución y derecho de acrecer.

Artículo 889.

El legatario no podrá aceptar una parte del legado y repudiar la otra, si ésta fuere onerosa.

140

Si muriese antes de aceptar el legado dejando varios herederos, podrá uno de éstos aceptar y otro repudiar la parte que le corresponda en el legado.

Artículo 890.

El legatario de dos legados, de los que uno fuere oneroso, no podrá renunciar éste y aceptar el otro. Si los dos son onerosos o gratuitos, es libre para aceptarlos todos o repudiar el que quiera.

El heredero que sea al mismo tiempo legatario, podrá renunciar la herencia y aceptar el legado, o renunciar éste y aceptar aquélla.

Artículo 891.

Si toda la herencia se distribuye en legados, se prorratearán las deudas y gravámenes de ella entre los legatarios a proporción de sus cuotas, a no ser que el testador hubiera dispuesto otra cosa.

SECCIÓN UNDÉCIMA. DE LOS ALBACEAS O TESTAMENTARIOS.

Artículo 892.

El testador podrá nombrar uno o más albaceas.

Artículo 893.

No podrá ser albacea el que no tenga capacidad para obligarse.

El menor no podrá serlo, ni aun con la autorización del padre o del tutor.

Artículo 894.

El albacea puede ser universal o particular.

En todo caso, los albaceas podrán ser nombrados mancomunada, sucesiva o solidariamente.

Artículo 895.

Cuando los albaceas fueren mancomunados, sólo valdrá lo que todos hagan de consuno, o lo que haga uno dé ellos legalmente autorizado por los demás, o lo que, en caso de disidencia, acuerde el mayor número.

Artículo 896.

En los casos de suma urgencia podrá uno de los albaceas mancomunados practicar, bajo su responsabilidad personal, los actos que fueren necesarios, dando cuenta inmediatamente a los demás.

Artículo 897.

Si el testador no establece claramente la solidaridad de los albaceas, ni fija el orden en que deben desempeñar su encargo, se entenderán nombrados mancomunadamente y desempeñarán el cargo como previenen los dos artículos anteriores.

Artículo 898.

141

El albaceazgo es cargo voluntario, y se entenderá aceptado por el nombrado para desempeñarlo si no se excusa dentro de los seis días siguientes a aquel en que tenga noticia de su nombramiento, o, si éste le era ya conocido, dentro de los seis días siguientes al en que supo la muerte del testador.

Artículo 899.

El albacea que acepta este cargo se constituye en la obligación de desempeñarlo; pero lo podrá renunciar alegando causa justa al prudente arbitrio del Juez.

Artículo 900.

El albacea que no acepte el cargo, o lo renuncie sin justa causa, perderá lo que le hubiere dejado el testador, salvo siempre el derecho que tuviere a la legítima.

Artículo 901.

Los albaceas tendrán todas las facultades que expresamente les haya conferido el testador, y no sean contrarias a las leyes

Artículo 902.

No habiendo el testador determinado especialmente las facultades de los albaceas, tendrán las siguientes:

Disponer y pagar los sufragios y el funeral del testador con arreglo a lo dispuesto por él en el testamento; y, en su defecto, según la costumbre del pueblo.

Satisfacer los legados que consistan en metálico, con el conocimiento y el beneplácito del heredero.• Vigilar sobre la ejecución de todo lo demás ordenado en el testamento, y sostener, siendo justo, su validez en juicio y fuera de él,

Tomar las precauciones necesarias para la conservación y custodia de los bienes, con intervención de los herederos presentes

Artículo 903.

Si no hubiere en la herencia dinero bastante para el pago de funerales y legados, y los herederos no lo aportaren de lo suyo, promoverán los albaceas la venta de los bienes muebles; y no alcanzando éstos, la de los inmuebles, con intervención de los herederos. Si estuviere interesado en la herencia algún menor, ausente, corporación o establecimiento público, la venta de los bienes se hará con las formalidades prevenidas por las leyes para tales casos.

Artículo 904.

El albacea, a quien el testador no haya fijado plazo, deberá cumplir su encargo dentro de un año, contado desde su aceptación, o desde que terminen los litigios que se promovieren sobre la validez o nulidad del testamento o de algunas de sus disposiciones.

Artículo 905.

Si el testador quisiere ampliar el plazo legal, deberá señalar expresamente el de la prórroga. Si no lo hubiese señalado, se entenderá prorrogado el plazo por un año.

Si, transcurrida esta prórroga, no se hubiese todavía cumplido la voluntad del testador, podrá el Juez conceder otra por el tiempo que fuere necesario, atendidas las circunstancias del caso.

142

Artículo 906.

Los herederos y legatarios podrán, de común acuerdo prorrogar el plazo del albaceazgo por el tiempo que crean necesario; pero, si el acuerdo fuese sólo por mayoría, la prórroga no podrá exceder de un año.

Artículo 907.

Los albaceas deberán dar cuenta de su encargo a los herederos.

Si hubieren sido nombrados, no para entregar los bienes a herederos determinados, sino para darles la inversión o distribución que el testador hubiese dispuesto en los casos permitidos por derecho, rendirán cuentas al Juez.

Toda disposición del testador contraria a este artículo será nula.

Artículo 908.

El albaceazgo es cargo gratuito. Podrá, sin embargo, el testador señalar a los albaceas la remuneración que tenga por conveniente; todo sin perjuicio del derecho que les asista para cobrar lo que les corresponda por los trabajos de partición u otros facultativos

Si el testador lega o señala conjuntamente a los albaceas alguna retribución, la parte de los que no admitan el cargo acrecerá a los que lo desempeñen.

Artículo 909.

El albacea no podrá delegar el cargo si no tuviese expresa autorización del testador.

Artículo 910.

Termina el albaceazgo por la muerte, imposibilidad, renuncia o remoción del albacea, y por el lapso del término señalado por el testador, por la ley y, en su caso, por los interesados.

Artículo 911.

En los casos del artículo anterior, y en el de no haber el albacea aceptado el cargo, corresponderá a los herederos la ejecución de la voluntad del testador

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA SUCESIÓN INTESTADA

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 912.

La sucesión legítima tiene lugar:

Cuando uno muere sin testamento, o con testamento nulo, o que haya perdido después su validez.• Cuando el testamento no contiene institución de heredero en todo o en parte de los bienes, o no dispone de todos los que corresponden al testador. En este caso, la sucesión legítima tendrá lugar solamente respecto, de los bienes de que no hubiese dispuesto.

Cuando falta la condición puesta a la institución del heredero, o éste muere antes que el testador, o repudia•

143

la herencia sin tener sustituto y sin que haya lugar al derecho de acrecer. Cuando el heredero instituido es incapaz de suceder.•

Artículo 913.

A falta de herederos testamentarios, la Ley defiere la herencia a los parientes del difunto, al viudo o viuda y al Estado.

Artículo 914.

Lo dispuesto sobre la incapacidad para suceder por testamento es aplicable igualmente a la sucesión intestada.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL PARENTESCO

Artículo 915.

La proximidad del parentesco se determina por el número de generaciones. Cada generación forma un grado.

Artículo 916.

La serie de grados forma la línea, que puede ser directa o colateral.

Se llama directa la constituida por la serie de grados entre personas que descienden una de otra.

Y colateral la constituida por la serie de grados entre personas que no descienden unas de otras, pero que proceden de un tronco común.

Artículo 917.

Se distingue la línea recta en descendente y ascendente.

La primera une al cabeza de familia con los que descienden de él.

La segunda liga a una persona con aquellos de quienes desciende.

Artículo 918.

En las líneas se cuentan tantos grados como generaciones o como personas, descontando la del progenitor.

En la recta se sube únicamente hasta el tronco. Así, el hijo dista del padre un grado, dos del abuelo y tres del bisabuelo.

En la colateral se sube hasta el tronco común y después se baja hasta la persona con quien se hace la computación. Por esto, el hermano dista dos grados del hermano, tres del tío, hermano de su padre o madre, cuatro del primo hermano, y así en adelante.

Artículo 919.

El cómputo de que trata el artículo anterior rige en todas las materias.

Artículo 920.

144

Llámase doble vínculo al parentesco por parte del padre y de la madre conjuntamente.

Artículo 921.

En las herencias, el pariente más próximo en grado excluye al más remoto, salvo el derecho de representación en los casos en que deba tener lugar.

Los parientes que se hallaren en el mismo grado heredarán por partes iguales, salvo lo que se dispone en el artículo 949 sobre el doble vínculo.

Artículo 922.

Si hubiere varios parientes de un mismo grado, y alguno o algunos no quisieran o no pudieran suceder, su parte acrecerá a los otros del mismo grado, salvo el derecho de representación cuando deba tener lugar.

Artículo 923.

Repudiando la herencia el pariente más próximo, si es solo, o, si fueren varios, todos los parientes más próximos llamados por la ley, heredarán los del grado siguiente por su propio derecho y sin que puedan representar al repudiante.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA REPRESENTACIÓN

Artículo 924.

Llámase derecho de representación el que tienen los parientes de una persona para sucederle en todos los derechos que tendría si viviera o hubiera podido heredar.

Artículo 925.

El derecho de representación tendrá siempre lugar en línea recta descendente, pero nunca en la ascendente.

En la línea colateral sólo tendrá lugar en favor de los hijos de los hermanos, bien sean de doble vínculo, bien de un solo lado.

Artículo 926.

Siempre que se herede por representación, la división de la herencia se hará por estirpes, de modo que el representante o representantes no hereden más de lo que heredaría su representado, si viviera.

Artículo 927.

Quedando hijos de uno o más hermanos del difunto, heredarán a éste por representación si concurren con sus tíos. Pero si concurren solos, heredarán por partes iguales.

Artículo 928.

No se pierde el derecho de representar a una persona por haber renunciado su herencia.

Artículo 929.

No podrá representarse a una persona viva sino en los casos de desheredación o incapacidad.

145

CAPÍTULO IV. DEL ORDEN DE SUCEDER SEGÚN LA DIVERSIDAD DE LÍNEAS

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA LÍNEA RECTA DESCENDENTE

Artículo 930.

La sucesión corresponde en primer lugar a la línea recta descendente.

Artículo 931.

Los hijos y sus descendientes suceden a sus padres y demás ascendientes, sin distinción de sexo, edad o filiación.

Artículo 932.

Los hijos del difunto le heredarán siempre por su derecho propio, dividiendo la herencia en partes iguales.

Artículo 933.

Los nietos y demás descendientes heredarán por derecho de representación, y, si alguno hubiese fallecido dejando varios herederos, la porción que le corresponda se dividirá entre éstos por partes iguales.

Artículo 934.

Si quedaren hijos y descendientes de otros hijos que hubiesen fallecido, los primeros heredarán por derecho propio, y los segundos, por derecho de representación.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA LÍNEA RECTA ASCENDENTE

Artículo 935.

A falta de hijos y descendientes del difunto le heredarán sus ascendientes.

Artículo 936.

El padre y la madre heredarán por partes iguales.

Artículo 937.

En el caso de que sobreviva uno sólo de los padres, éste sucederá al hijo en toda su herencia.

Artículo 938.

A falta de padre y de madre, sucederán los ascendientes

Artículo 939.

Si hubiere varios ascendientes de igual grado pertenecientes a la misma línea, dividirán la herencia por cabezas.

Artículo 940.

146

Si los ascendientes fueren de líneas diferentes, pero de igual grado, la mitad corresponderá a los ascendientes paternos y la otra mitad a los maternos.

Artículo 941.

En cada línea la división se hará por cabezas.

Artículo 942.

Lo dispuesto en esta Sección se entiende sin perjuicio de lo ordenado en los artículos 811 y 812, que es aplicable a la sucesión intestada y a la testamentaria.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA SUCESIÓN DEL CÓNYUGE Y DE LOS COLATERALES.

Artículo 943.

A falta de las personas comprendidas en las dos Secciones que preceden, heredarán el cónyuge y los parientes colaterales por el orden que se establece en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 944.

En defecto de ascendientes y descendientes, y antes que los colaterales, sucederá en todos los bienes del difunto el cónyuge sobreviviente.

Artículo 945.

No tendrá lugar el llamamiento a que se refiere el artículo anterior si el cónyuge estuviera separado por sentencia firme, o separado de hecho por mutuo acuerdo que conste fehacientemente.

Artículo 946.

Los hermanos e hijos de hermanos suceden con preferencia a los demás colaterales.

Artículo 947.

Si no existieran más que hermanos de doble vínculo, éstos heredarán por partes iguales.

Artículo 948.

Si concurrieren hermanos con sobrinos, hijos de hermanos de doble vínculo, los primeros heredarán por cabezas y los segundos por estirpes.

Artículo 949.

Si concurrieren hermanos de padre y madre con medio hermanos, aquéllos tomarán doble porción que éstos en la herencia.

Artículo 950.

En el caso de no existir sino medio hermanos, unos por parte de padre y otros por la de la madre, heredarán todos por partes iguales, sin ninguna distinción de bienes.

147

Artículo 951.

Los hijos de los medio hermanos sucederán por cabezas o por estirpes, según las reglas establecidas para los hermanos de doble vínculo.

Artículo 952. (Derogado por la Ley 11/1981, de 13 de mayo.)

Artículo 953. (Derogado por la Ley 11/1981, de 13 de mayo.)

Artículo 954.

No habiendo cónyuge supérstite, ni hermanos, ni hijos de hermanos, sucederán en la herencia del difunto los demás parientes del mismo en línea colateral hasta el cuarto grado, más allá del cual no se extiende el derecho de heredar abintestato.

Artículo 955.

La sucesión de estos colaterales se verificará sin distinción de líneas ni preferencia entre ellos por razón de doble vínculo.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA SUCESIÓN DEL ESTADO.

Artículo 956.

A falta de personas que tengan derecho a heredar conforme a lo dispuesto en las precedentes Secciones, heredará el Estado, quien asignará una tercera parte de la herencia a Instituciones municipales del domicilio del difunto, de beneficencia, instrucción, acción social o profesionales, sean de carácter público o privado, y otra tercera parte, a Institutos provinciales de los mismos caracteres, de la provincia del finado, prefiriendo, tanto entre unas como entre otras, aquellas a las que el causante haya pertenecido por su profesión y haya consagrado su máxima actividad, aunque sean de carácter general. La otra tercera parte se destinará a la Caja de Amortización de la Deuda Pública, salvo que, por la naturaleza de los bienes heredados, el Consejo de Ministros acuerde darles, total o parcialmente, otra aplicación.

Artículo 957.

Los derechos y obligaciones del Estado, así como los de las Instituciones o entidades a quienes se asignen las dos terceras partes de los bienes, en el caso del artículo 956, serán los mismos que los de los demás herederos, pero se entenderá siempre aceptada la herencia a beneficio de inventario, sin necesidad de declaración alguna sobre ello, a los efectos que enumera el artículo 1.023.

Artículo 958.

Para que el Estado pueda apoderarse de los bienes hereditarios habrá de preceder declaración judicial de heredero, adjudicándole los bienes por falta de herederos legítimos.

CAPÍTULO V. DISPOSICIONES COMUNES A LAS HERENCIAS POR TESTAMENTO O SIN ÉL

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LAS PRECAUCIONES QUE DEBEN ADOPTARSE CUANDO LA VIUDA QUEDA ENCINTA.

Artículo 959.

148

Cuando la viuda crea haber quedado encinta, deberá ponerlo en conocimiento de los que tengan a la herencia un derecho de tal naturaleza que deba desaparecer o disminuir por el nacimiento del póstumo.

Artículo 960.

Los interesados a que se refiere el precedente artículo podrán pedir al Juez municipal o al de primera instancia, donde lo hubiere, que dicte las providencias convenientes para evitar la suposición de parto, o que la criatura que nazca pase por viable, no siéndolo en realidad.

Cuidará el Juez de que las medidas que dicte no ataquen al pudor ni a la libertad de la viuda.

Artículo 961.

Háyase o no dado el aviso de que habla el artículo 959 al aproximarse la época del parto, la viuda deberá ponerlo en conocimiento de los mismos interesados. Estos tendrán derecho a nombrar persona de su confianza que se cerciore de la realidad del alumbramiento.

Si la persona designada fuere rechazada por la paciente, hará el Juez el nombramiento, debiendo éste recaer en facultativo o en mujer.

Artículo 962.

La omisión de estas diligencias no basta por sí sola para acreditar la suposición del parto o la falta de viabilidad del nacido.

Artículo 963.

Cuando el marido hubiese reconocido en documento público o privado la certeza de la preñez de su esposa, estará ésta dispensada de dar el aviso que previene el artículo 959. pero quedará sujeta a cumplir lo dispuesto en el 961.

Artículo 964.

La viuda que quede encinta, aun cuando sea rica, deberá ser alimentada de los bienes hereditarios, habida consideración a la parte que en ellos pueda tener el póstumo, si naciere y fuere viable.

Artículo 965.

En el tiempo que medie hasta que se verifique el parto, o se adquiera la certidumbre de que éste no tendrá lugar, ya por haber ocurrido aborto, ya por haber pasado con exceso el término máximo para la gestación, se proveerá a la seguridad y administración de los bienes en la forma establecida para el juicio necesario de testamentaría.

Artículo 966.

La división de la herencia se suspenderá hasta que se verifique el parto o el aborto, o resulte por el transcurso del tiempo que la viuda no estaba encinta.

Sin embargo, el administrador podrá pagar a los acreedores, previo mandato judicial.

Artículo 967.

149

Verificado el parto o el aborto, o transcurrido el término de la gestación, el administrador de los bienes hereditarios cesará en su cargo y dará cuenta de su desempeño a los herederos o a sus legítimos representantes.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS BIENES SUJETOS A RESERVA

Artículo 968.

Además de la reserva impuesta en el artículo 811, el viudo o viuda que pase a segundo matrimonio estará obligado a reservar a los hijos y descendientes del primero la propiedad de todos los bienes que haya adquirido de su difunto consorte por testamento, por sucesión intestada, donación u otro cualquier título lucrativo; pero no su mitad de gananciales.

Artículo 969.

La disposición del artículo anterior es aplicable a los bienes que, por los títulos en él expresados, haya adquirido el viudo o viuda de cualquiera de los hijos de su primer matrimonio, y los que haya habido de los parientes del difunto por consideración a éste.

Artículo 970.

Cesará la obligación de reservar cuando los hijos de un matrimonio, mayores de edad, que tengan derecho a los bienes renuncien expresamente a él, o cuando se trate de cosas dadas o dejadas por los hijos a su padre o a su madre, sabiendo que estaban segunda vez casados.

Artículo 971.

Cesará además la reserva si al morir el padre o la madre que contrajo segundo matrimonio no existen hijos ni descendientes del primero.

Artículo 972.

A pesar de la obligación de reservar, podrá el padre, o madre, segunda vez casado, mejorar en los bienes reservables a cualquiera de los hijos o descendientes del primer matrimonio, conforme a lo dispuesto en el artículo 823.

Artículo 973.

Si el padre o la madre no hubiere usado, en todo o en parte, de la facultad que le concede el artículo anterior, los hijos y descendientes del primer matrimonio sucederán en los bienes sujetos a reserva conforme a las reglas prescritas para la sucesión en línea descendente, aunque a virtud de testamento hubiesen heredado desigualmente al cónyuge premuerto o hubiesen repudiado su herencia.

El hijo desheredado justamente por el padre o por la madre perderá todo derecho a la reserva, pero si tuviere hijos o descendientes, se estará a lo dispuesto en el artículo 857 y en el número 2 del artículo 164.

Artículo 974.

Serán válidas las enajenaciones de los bienes inmuebles reservables hechas por el cónyuge sobreviviente antes de celebrar segundas bodas, con la obligación, desde que las celebrare, de asegurar el valor de aquéllos a los hijos y descendientes del primer matrimonio.

150

Artículo 975.

La enajenación que de los bienes inmuebles sujetos a reserva hubiere hecho el viudo o la viuda después de contraer segundo matrimonio subsistirá únicamente si a su muerte no quedan hijos ni descendientes del primero, sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria.

Artículo 976.

Las enajenaciones de los bienes muebles hechas antes o después de contraer segundo matrimonio serán válidas, salva siempre la obligación de indemnizar.

Artículo 977.

El viudo o la viuda, al repetir matrimonio, hará inventariar todos los bienes sujetos a reserva, anotar en el Registro de la Propiedad la calidad de reservables de los inmuebles con arreglo a lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria, y tasar los muebles.

Artículo 978.

Estará, además, obligado el viudo o viuda, al repetir matrimonio, a asegurar con hipoteca:

La restitución de los bienes muebles no enajenados en el estado que tuvieren al tiempo de su muerte.• El abono de los deterioros ocasionados o que se ocasionaren por su culpa o negligencia.• La devolución del precio que hubiese recibido por los bienes muebles enajenados o la entrega del valor que tenían al tiempo de la enajenación, si ésta se hubiese hecho a título gratuito.

El valor de los bienes inmuebles validamente enajenados.•

Artículo 979.

Lo dispuesto en los artículos anteriores para el caso de segundo matrimonio rige igualmente en el tercero y ulteriores.

Artículo 980.

La obligación de reservar impuesta en los anteriores artículos será también aplicable:

Al viudo que durante el matrimonio haya tenido, o en estado de viudez, tenga un hijo no matrimonial.• Al viudo que adopte a otra persona. Se exceptúa el caso de que el adoptado sea hijo del consorte de quien descienden los que serían reservatarios.

Dicha obligación de reservar surtirá efecto, respectivamente, desde el nacimiento o la adopción del hijo.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DEL DERECHO DE ACRECER.

Artículo 981.

En las sucesiones legítimas la parte del que repudia la herencia acrecerá siempre a los coherederos.

Artículo 982.

Para que en la sucesión testamentaria tenga lugar el derecho de acrecer, se requiere:

151

Que dos o más sean llamados a una misma herencia, o a una misma porción de ella, sin especial designación de partes.

Que uno de los llamados muera antes que el testador, o que renuncie la herencia, o sea incapaz de recibirla.•

Artículo 983.

Se entenderá hecha la designación por partes sólo en el caso de que el testador haya determinado expresamente una cuota para cada heredero.

La frase por mitad o por partes iguales u otras que, aunque designen parte alícuota, no fijan ésta numéricamente o por señales que hagan a cada uno dueño de un cuerpo de bienes separado, no excluyen el derecho de acrecer.

Artículo 984.

Los herederos a quienes acrezca la herencia sucederán en todos los derechos y obligaciones que tendría el que no quiso o no pudo recibirla.

Artículo 985.

Entre los herederos forzosos el derecho de acrecer sólo tendrá lugar cuando la parte de libre disposición se deje a dos o más de ellos, o a alguno de ellos y a un extraño.

Si la parte repudiada fuere la legítima, sucederán en ella los coherederos por su derecho propio, y no por el derecho de acrecer.

Artículo 986.

En la sucesión testamentaria, cuando no tenga lugar el derecho de acrecer, la porción vacante del instituido, a quien no se hubiese designado sustituto, pasará a los herederos legítimos del testador, los cuales la recibirán con las mismas cargas y obligaciones.

Artículo 987.

El derecho de acrecer tendrá también lugar entre los legatarios y los usufructuarios en los términos establecidos para los herederos.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA ACEPTACIÓN Y REPUDIACIÓN DE LA HERENCIA.

Artículo 988.

La aceptación y repudiación de la herencia son actos enteramente voluntarios y libres.

Artículo 989.

Los efectos de la aceptación y de la repudiación se retrotraen siempre al momento de la muerte de la persona a quien se hereda.

Artículo 990.

La aceptación o la repudiación de la herencia no podrá hacerse en parte, a plazo, ni condicionalmente.

152

Artículo 991.

Nadie podrá aceptar ni repudiar sin estar cierto de la muerte de la persona a quien haya de heredar y de su derecho a la herencia.

Artículo 992.

Pueden aceptar o repudiar una herencia todos los que tienen la libre disposición de sus bienes.

La aceptación de la que se deje a los pobres corresponderá a las personas designadas por el testador para calificarlos y distribuir los bienes, y en su defecto a las que señala el artículo 749, y se entenderá aceptada a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 993.

Los legítimos representantes de las asociaciones, corporaciones y fundaciones capaces de adquirir podrán aceptar la herencia que a las mismas se dejare; mas para repudiarla necesitan la aprobación judicial, con audiencia del Ministerio público.

Artículo 994.

Los establecimientos públicos oficiales no podrán aceptar ni repudiar herencia sin la aprobación del Gobierno.

Artículo 995.

Cuando la herencia sea aceptada sin beneficio de inventario, por persona casada y no concurra el otro cónyuge, prestando su consentimiento a la aceptación, no responderán de las deudas hereditarias los bienes de la sociedad conyugal.

Artículo 996.

Si la sentencia de incapacitación por enfermedades o deficiencias físicas o psíquicas no dispusiere otra cosa, el sometido a curatela podrá, asistido del curador, aceptar la herencia pura y simplemente o a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 997.

La aceptación y la repudiación de la herencia, una vez hechas, son irrevocables, y no podrán ser impugnadas sino cuando adoleciesen de algunos de los vicios que anulan el consentimiento, o apareciese un testamento desconocido.

Artículo 998.

La herencia podrá ser aceptada pura y simplemente, o a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 999.

La aceptación pura y simple puede ser expresa o tácita.

Expresa es la que se hace en documento público o privado.

Tácita es la que se hace por actos que suponen necesariamente la voluntad de aceptar, o que no habría derecho

153

a ejecutar sino con la cualidad de heredero.

Los actos de mera conservación o administración provisional no implican la aceptación de la herencia, si con ellos no se ha tomado el título o la cualidad de heredero.

Artículo 1000.

Entiéndese aceptada la herencia:

Cuando el heredero vende, dona o cede su derecho a un extraño, a todos sus coherederos o a alguno de ellos.

Cuando el heredero la renuncia, aunque sea gratuitamente, a beneficio de uno o más de sus coherederos.• Cuando la renuncia por precio a favor de todos sus coherederos indistintamente; pero, si esta renuncia fuere gratuita y los coherederos a cuyo favor se haga son aquellos a quienes debe acrecer porción renunciada, no se entenderá aceptada la herencia.

Artículo 1001.

Si el heredero repudia la herencia en perjuicio de sus propios acreedores, podrán éstos pedir al Juez que los autorice para aceptarla en nombre de aquél.

La aceptación sólo aprovechará a los acreedores en cuanto baste a cubrir el importe de sus créditos. El exceso, si lo hubiere, no pertenecerá en ningún caso al renunciante, sino que se adjudicará a las personas a quienes corresponda según las reglas establecidas en este Código.

Artículo 1002.

Los herederos que hayan sustraído u ocultado algunos efectos de la herencia, pierden la facultad de renunciar la, y quedan con el carácter de herederos puros y simples, sin perjuicio de las penas en que hayan podido incurrir.

Artículo 1003.

Por la aceptación pura y simple, o sin beneficio de inventario, quedará el heredero responsable de todas las cargas de la herencia, no sólo con los bienes de ésta, sino también con los suyos propios.

Artículo 1004.

Hasta pasados nueve días después de la muerte de aquel de cuya herencia se trate, no podrá intentarse acción contra el heredero para que acepte o repudie.

Artículo 1005.

Instando, en juicio, un tercer interesado para que el heredero acepte o repudie, deberá el Juez señalar a éste un término, que no pase de treinta días, para que haga su declaración; apercibido de que, si no lo hace, se tendrá la herencia por aceptada.

Artículo 1006.

Por muerte del heredero sin aceptar ni repudiar la herencia pasará a los suyos el mismo derecho que él tenía.

Artículo 1007.

154

Cuando fueren varios los herederos llamados a la herencia, podrán los unos aceptarla y los otros repudiarla. De igual libertad gozará cada uno de los herederos para aceptarla pura y simplemente o a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 1008.

La repudiación de la herencia deberá hacerse en instrumento público o auténtico, o por escrito presentado ante el Juez competente para conocer de la testamentaría o del abintestato.

Artículo 1009.

El que es llamado a una misma herencia por testamento y ab intestato y la repudia por el primer título, se entiende haberla repudiado por los dos.

Repudiándola como heredero ab intestato y sin noticia de su título testamentario, podrá todavía aceptarla por éste.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DEL BENEFICIO DE INVENTARIO Y DEL DERECHO DE DELIBERAR

Artículo 1010.

Todo heredero puede aceptar la herencia a beneficio de inventario, aunque el testador se lo haya prohibido.

También podrá pedir la formación de inventario antes de aceptar o repudiar la herencia, para deliberar sobre este punto.

Artículo 1011.

La aceptación de la herencia a beneficio de inventario podrá hacerse ante Notario, o por escrito ante cualquiera de los Jueces, que sean competentes para prevenir el juicio de testamentaria o ab intestato.

Artículo 1012.

Si el heredero a que se refiere el artículo anterior se hallare en país extranjero, podrá hacer dicha declaración ante el Agente diplomático o consular de España que esté habilitado para ejercer las funciones de Notario en el lugar del otorgamiento.

Artículo 1013.

La declaración a que se refieren los artículos anteriores no producirá efecto alguno si no va precedida o seguida de un inventario fiel y exacto de todos los bienes de la herencia, hecho con las formalidades y dentro de los plazos que se expresarán en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1014.

El heredero que tenga en su poder los bienes de la herencia o parte de ellos y quiera utilizar el beneficio de inventario el derecho de deliberar, deberá manifestarlo al Juez competente por conocer de la testamentaria, o del ab intestato, dentro de diez días siguientes al en que supiere ser tal heredero, si reside en el lugar donde hubiese fallecido el causante de la herencia. Si residiere fuera, el plazo será de treinta días.

En uno y otro caso, el heredero deberá pedir a la vez la formación del inventario y la citación a los acreedores y legatarios para que acudan a presenciarlo si les conviniere.

155

Artículo 1015.

Cuando el heredero no tenga en su poder la herencia o parte de ella, ni haya practicado gestión alguna como tal heredero, los plazos expresados en el artículo anterior se contarán desde el día siguiente al en que expire el plazo que el Juez le hubiese fijado para aceptar o repudiar la herencia conforme al artículo 1.005, o desde el día en que la hubiese aceptado o hubiera gestionado como heredero

Artículo 1016.

Fuera de los casos a que se refieren los dos anteriores artículos, si no se hubiere presentado ninguna demanda contra el heredero, podrá éste aceptar a beneficio de inventario, o con el derecho de deliberar, mientras no prescriba la acción para reclamar la herencia.

Artículo 1017.

El inventario se principiará dentro de los treinta días siguientes a la citación de los acreedores y legatarios, y concluirá dentro de otros sesenta.

Si por hallarse los bienes a larga distancia, o ser muy cuantiosos, o por otra causa justa, parecieren insuficientes dichos sesenta días, podrá el Juez prorrogar este término por el tiempo que estime necesario, sin que pueda exceder de un año.

Artículo 1018.

Si por culpa o negligencia del heredero no se principiare o no se concluyere el inventario en los plazos y con las solemnidades prescritas en los artículos anteriores, se entenderá que acepta la herencia pura y simplemente.

Artículo 1019.

El heredero que se hubiese reservado el derecho de deliberar, deberá manifestar al Juzgado, dentro de treinta días contados desde el siguiente al en que se hubiese concluido el inventario, si acepta o repudia la herencia.

Pasados los treinta días sin hacer dicha manifestación, se entenderá que la acepta pura y simplemente.

Artículo 1020.

En todo caso el Juez podrá proveer, a instancia de parte interesada, durante la formación del inventario y hasta la aceptación de la herencia, a la administración y custodia de los bienes hereditarios con arreglo a lo que se prescriba para el juicio de testamentaria en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 1021.

El que reclame judicialmente una herencia de que otro se halle en posesión por más de un año, si venciere en el juicio, no tendrá obligación de hacer inventario para gozar de este beneficio, y sólo responderá de las cargas de la herencia con los bienes que le sean entregados

Artículo 1022.

El inventario hecho por el heredero que después repudie la herencia, aprovechará a los sustitutos y a los herederos ab intestato, respecto de los cuales los treinta días para deliberar y para hacer la manifestación que previene el artículo 1.019 se contarán desde el siguiente al en que tuvieren conocimiento de la repudiación.

156

Artículo 1023.

El beneficio de inventario produce en favor del heredero los efectos siguientes:

El heredero no queda obligado a pagar las deudas y demás cargas de la herencia sino hasta donde alcancen los bienes de la misma.

Conserva contra el caudal hereditario todos los derechos y acciones que tuviera contra el difunto.• No se confunden para ningún efecto, en daño del heredero, sus bienes particulares con los que pertenezcan a la herencia.

Artículo 1024.

El heredero perderá el beneficio de inventario:

Si a sabiendas dejare de incluir en el inventario alguno de los bienes, derechos o acciones de la herencia.• Si antes de completar el pago de las deudas y legados enajenase bienes de la herencia sin autorización judicial o la de todos los interesados, o no diese al precio de lo vendido la aplicación determinada al concederle la autorización.

Artículo 1025.

Durante la formación del inventario y el término para deliberar no podrán los legatarios demandar el pago de sus legados.

Artículo 1026.

Hasta que resulten pagados todos los acreedores conocidos y los legatarios, se entenderá que se halla la herencia en administración.

El administrador, ya lo sea el mismo heredero, ya cualquiera otra persona, tendrá, en ese concepto, la representación de la herencia para ejercitar las acciones que a ésta competan y contestar a las demandas que se interpongan contra la misma.

Artículo 1027.

El administrador no podrá pagar los legados sino después de haber pagado a todos los acreedores.

Artículo 1028.

Cuando haya juicio pendiente entre los acreedores sobre la preferencia de sus créditos, serán pagados por el orden y según el grado que señale la sentencia firme de graduación.

No habiendo juicio pendiente entre los acreedores, serán pagados los que primero se presenten; pero, constando que alguno de los créditos conocidos es preferente, no se hará el pago sin previa caución a favor del acreedor de mejor derecho.

Artículo 1029.

Si después de pagados los legados aparecieren otros acreedores, éstos sólo podrán reclamar contra los legatarios en el caso de no quedar en la herencia bienes suficientes para pagarles.

Artículo 1030.

157

Cuando para el pago de los créditos y legados sea necesaria la venta de bienes hereditarios, se realizará ésta en la forma establecida en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil respecto a los ab intestatos y testamentarias, salvo si todos los herederos, acreedores y legatarios acordaren otra cosa.

Artículo 1031.

No alcanzando los bienes hereditarios para el pago de las deudas y legados, el administrador dará cuenta de su administración a los acreedores y legatarios que no hubiesen cobrado por completo, y será responsable de los perjuicios causados a la herencia por culpa o negligencia suya.

Artículo 1032.

Pagados los acreedores y legatarios, quedará el heredero en el pleno goce del remanente de la herencia.

Si la herencia hubiese sido administrada por otra persona, ésta rendirá al heredero la cuenta de su administración, bajo la responsabilidad que impone el artículo anterior.

Artículo 1033.

Las costas del inventario y los demás gastos a que dé lugar la administración de la herencia aceptada a beneficio de inventario y la defensa de sus derechos, serán de cargo de la misma herencia. Exceptúanse aquellas costas en que el heredero hubiese sido condenado personalmente por su dolo o mala fe.

Lo mismo se entenderá respecto de las causadas para hacer uso del derecho de deliberar, si el heredero repudia la herencia.

Artículo 1034.

Los acreedores particulares del heredero no podrán mezclarse en las operaciones de la herencia aceptada por éste a beneficio de inventario hasta que sean pagados los acreedores de la misma y los legatarios; pero podrán pedir la retención o embargo del remanente que pueda resultar a favor del heredero.

CAPÍTULO VI. DE LA COLACIÓN Y PARTICIÓN

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA COLACIÓN

Artículo 1035.

El heredero forzoso que concurra, con otros que también lo sean, a una sucesión, deberá traer a la masa hereditaria los bienes y valores que hubiese recibido del causante de la herencia, en vida de éste, por dote, donación, u otro título lucrativo, para computarlo en la regulación de las legítimas y en la cuenta de partición.

Artículo 1036.

La colación no tendrá lugar entre los herederos forzosos si el donante así lo hubiese dispuesto expresamente o si el donatario repudiare la herencia, salvo el caso en que la donación deba reducirse por inoficiosa.

Artículo 1037.

No se entiende sujeto a colación lo dejado en testamento si el testador no dispusiere lo contrario, quedando en todo caso a salvo las legítimas.

158

Artículo 1038.

Cuando los nietos sucedan al abuelo en representación del padre, concurriendo con sus tíos o primos, colacionarán todo lo que debiera colacionar el padre si viviera, aunque no lo hayan heredado.

También colacionarán lo que hubiesen recibido del causante de la herencia durante la vida de éste, a menos que el testador hubiese dispuesto lo contrario, en cuyo caso deberá respetarse su voluntad si no perjudicare a la legítima de los coherederos.

Artículo 1039.

Los padres no estarán obligados a colacionar en la herencia de sus ascendientes lo donado por éstos a sus hijos.

Artículo 1040.

Tampoco se traerán a colación las donaciones hechas al consorte del hijo; pero, si hubieren sido hechas por el padre conjuntamente a los dos, el hijo estará obligado a colacionar la mitad de la cosa donada.

Artículo 1041.

No estarán sujetos a colación los gastos de alimentos, educación, curación de enfermedades, aunque sean extraordinarias, aprendizaje, equipo ordinario, ni los regalos de costumbre.

Artículo 1042.

No se traerán a colación, sino cuando el padre lo disponga o perjudiquen a la legítima, los gastos que éste hubiere hecho para dar a sus hijos una carrera profesional o artística: pero cuando proceda colacionarlos, se rebajará de ellos lo que el hijo habría gastado viviendo en la casa y compañía de sus padres.

Artículo 1043.

Serán colacionables las cantidades satisfechas por el padre para redimir a sus hijos de la suerte de soldado, pagar sus deudas, conseguirles un título de honor y otros gastos análogos.

Artículo 1044.

Los regalos de boda, consistentes en joyas, vestidos y equipos, no se reducirán como inoficiosos sino en la parte que excedan en un décimo o más de la cantidad disponible por testamento.

Artículo 1045.

No han de traerse a colación y partición las mismas cosas donadas, sino su valor al tiempo en que se evalúen los bienes hereditarios.

El aumento o deterioro físico posterior a la donación y aun su pérdida total, casual o culpable, será de cargo y riesgo o beneficio del donatario.

Artículo 1046.

La dote o donación hecha por ambos cónyuges se colacionará por mitad en la herencia de cada uno de ellos, la hecha, por uno solo se colacionará en su herencia.

159

Artículo 1047.

El donatario tomará de menos en la masa hereditaria, tanto como ya hubiese recibido, percibiendo sus coherederos el equivalente, en cuanto sea posible, en bienes de la misma naturaleza, especie y calidad.

Artículo 1048.

No pudiendo verificarse lo prescrito en el artículo anterior, si los bienes donados fueren inmuebles, los coherederos tendrá derecho a ser igualados en metálico o valores mobiliarios al tipo de cotización; y, no habiendo dinero ni valores cotizables en la herencia se venderán otros bienes en pública subasta en la cantidad necesaria.

Cuando los bienes donados fueren muebles, los coherederos sólo tendrán derecho a ser igualados en otros muebles de la herencia por el justo precio, a su libre elección.

Artículo 1049.

Los frutos e intereses de los bienes sujetos a colación no se deben a la masa hereditaria sino desde el día en que se abra la sucesión.

Para regularlos, se atenderá a las rentas e intereses de los bienes hereditarios de la misma especie que los colacionados.

Artículo 1050.

Si entre los coherederos surgiere contienda sobre la obligación de colacionar o sobre los objetos que han de traerse colación, no por eso dejará de proseguirse la partición, prestando la correspondiente fianza.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA PARTICIÓN

Artículo 1051.

Ningún coheredero podrá ser obligado a permanecer en la indivisión de la herencia, a menos que el testador prohíba expresamente la división.

Pero, aun cuando la prohíba, la división tendrá siempre lugar mediante alguna de las causas por las cuales se extingue la sociedad.

Artículo 1052.

Todo coheredero que tenga la libre administración y disposición de sus bienes, podrá pedir en cualquier tiempo la partición de la herencia.

Por los incapacitados y por los ausentes deberán pedirla sus representantes legítimos.

Artículo 1053.

Cualquiera de los cónyuges podrá pedir la partición de la herencia sin intervención del otro.

Artículo 1054.

Los herederos bajo condición no podrán pedir la partición hasta que aquélla se cumpla. Pero podrán pedirla

160

los otros coherederos, asegurando competentemente el derecho de los primeros para el caso de cumplirse la condición; y, hasta saberse que ésta ha faltado o no puede ya verificarse, se entenderá provisional la partición.

Artículo 1055.

Si antes de hacerse la partición muere uno de los coherederos, dejando dos o más herederos, bastará que uno de éstos la pida; pero todos los que intervengan en este último concepto deberán comparecer bajo una sola representación.

Artículo 1056.

Cuando el testador hiciere, por acto entre vivos o por última voluntad, la partición de sus bienes, se pasará por ella, en cuanto no perjudique a la legítima de los herederos forzosos.

El padre que en interés de su familia quiera conservar indivisa una explotación agrícola, industrial o fabril, podrá usar de la facultad concedida en este artículo, disponiendo que se satisfaga en metálico su legítima a los demás hijos.

Artículo 1057.

El testador podrá encomendar por acto inter vivos o mortis causa para después de su muerte la simple facultad de hacer la partición a cualquier persona que no sea uno de los coherederos.

No habiendo testamento, contador−partidor en él designado o vacante el cargo, el Juez, a petición de herederos y legatarios que representen, al menos, el 50 por 100 del haber hereditario, y con citación de los demás interesados, si su domicilio fuere conocido, podrá nombrar un contador−partidor dativo, según las reglas que la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil establece para la designación de Peritos, la partición así realizada requerirá aprobación judicial, salvo confirmación expresa de todos los herederos y legatarios.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo y en el anterior se observará aunque entre los coherederos haya alguno sometido a patria potestad o tutela, o a curatela por prodigalidad o por enfermedades o deficiencias físicas o psíquicas pero el contador partidor deberá en estos casos inventariar los bienes de la herencia, con citación de los representantes legales o curadores de dichas personas.

Artículo 1058.

Cuando el testador no hubiese hecho la partición, ni encomendado a otro esta facultad, si los herederos fueren mayores y tuvieren la libre administración de sus bienes, podrán distribuir la herencia de la manera que tengan por conveniente.

Artículo 1059.

Cuando los herederos mayores de edad no se entendieren sobre el modo de hacer la partición, quedará a salvo su derecho para que le ejerciten en la forma prevenida en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 1060.

Cuando los menores o incapacitados estén legalmente representados en la partición, no será necesaria la intervención ni la aprobación judicial.

El defensor judicial designado para representar a un menor o incapacitado en una partición, deberá obtener la aprobación del Juez, si éste no hubiera dispuesto otra cosa al hacer el nombramiento.

161

Artículo 1061.

En la partición de la herencia se ha de guardar la posible igualdad, haciendo lotes o adjudicando a cada uno de los coherederos cosas de la misma naturaleza, calidad o especie.

Artículo 1062.

Cuando una cosa sea indivisible o desmerezca mucho por su división, podrá adjudicarse a uno, a calidad de abonar a los otros el exceso en dinero.

Pero bastará que uno solo de los herederos pida su venta en pública subasta, y con admisión de licitadores extraños, para que así se haga.

Artículo 1063.

Los coherederos deben abonarse recíprocamente en la partición las rentas y frutos que cada uno haya percibido de los bienes hereditarios, las impensas útiles y necesarias hechas en los mismos, y los daños ocasionados por malicia o negligencia.

Artículo 1064.

Los gastos de partición, hechos en interés común de todos los coherederos, se deducirán de la herencia; los hechos en interés particular de uno de ellos, serán a cargo del mismo

Artículo 1065.

Los títulos de adquisición o pertenencia serán entregados al coheredero adjudicatario de la finca o fincas a que se refieran

Artículo 1066.

Cuando el mismo título comprenda varias fincas adjudicadas a diversos coherederos, o una sola que se haya dividido entre dos o más, el título quedará en poder del mayor interesado en la finca o fincas, y se le facilitarán a los otros copias fehacientes, a costa del caudal hereditario. Si el interés fuere igual, el título se entregará, a falta de acuerdo, a quien por suerte corresponda.

Siendo original, aquel en cuyo poder quede deberá también exhibirlo a los demás interesados cuando lo pidieren.

Artículo 1067.

Si alguno de los herederos vendiere a un extraño su derecho hereditario antes de la partición, podrán todos o cualquiera de los coherederos subrogarse en lugar del comprador, reembolsándole el precio de la compra, con tal que lo verifiquen en término de un mes, a contar desde que esto se les haga saber.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA PARTICIÓN

Artículo 1068.

La partición legalmente hecha confiere a cada heredero la propiedad exclusiva de los bienes que le hayan sido adjudicados

162

Artículo 1069.

Hecha la partición, los coherederos estarán recíprocamente obligados a la evicción y saneamiento de los bienes adjudicados.

Artículo 1070.

La obligación a que se refiere el artículo anterior sólo cesará en los siguientes casos:

Cuando el mismo testador hubiese hecho la partición, a no ser que aparezca, o racionalmente se presuma, haber querido lo contrario, y salva siempre la legítima.

Cuando se hubiese pactado expresamente al hacer la partición.• Cuando la evicción proceda de causa posterior a la partición, o fuere ocasionada por culpa del adjudicatario.•

Artículo 1071.

La obligación recíproca de los coherederos a la evicción es proporcionada a su respectivo haber hereditario; pero si alguno de ellos resultare insolvente, responderán de su parte los demás coherederos en la misma proporción, deduciéndose la parte correspondiente al que deba ser indemnizado.

Los que pagaren por el insolvente conservarán su acción contra él para cuando mejore de fortuna.

Artículo 1072.

Si se adjudicare como cobrable un crédito, los coherederos no responderán de la insolvencia posterior del deudor hereditario, y sólo serán responsables de su insolvencia al tiempo de hacerse la partición Por los créditos calificados de incobrables no hay responsabilidad; pero, si se cobran en todo o en parte, se distribuirá lo percibido proporcionalmente entre los herederos.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA RESCISIÓN DE LA PARTICIÓN

Artículo 1073.

Las particiones pueden rescindirse por las mismas causas que las obligaciones.

Artículo 1074.

Podrán también ser rescindidas las particiones por causa de lesión en más de la cuarta parte, atendiendo el valor de las cosas cuando fueron adjudicadas.

Artículo 1075.

La partición hecha por el difunto no puede ser impugnada por causa de lesión, sino en el caso de que perjudique la legítima de los herederos forzosos o de que aparezca, o racionalmente se presuma, que fue otra la voluntad del testador.

Artículo 1076.

La acción rescisoria por causa de lesión durará cuatro años, contados desde que se hizo la partición.

Artículo 1077.

163

El heredero demandado podrá optar entre indemnizar el daño o consentir que se proceda a nueva partición.

La indemnización puede hacerse en numerario o en la misma cosa en que resultó el perjuicio.

Si se procede a nueva partición, no alcanzará ésta a los que no hayan sido perjudicados ni percibido más de lo justo.

Artículo 1078.

No podrá ejercitar la acción rescisoria por lesión el heredero que hubiese enajenado el todo o una parte considerable de los bienes inmuebles que le hubieren sido adjudicados.

Artículo 1079.

La omisión de alguno o algunos objetos o valores de la herencia no da lugar a que se rescinda la partición por lesión, sino a que se complete o adicione con los objetos o valores omitidos.

Artículo 1080.

La partición hecha con preterición de alguno de los herederos no se rescindirá, a no ser que se pruebe que hubo mala fe o dolo por parte de los otros interesados; pero éstos tendrán la obligación de pagar al preterido la parte que proporcionalmente le corresponda.

Artículo 1081.

La partición hecha con uno a quien se creyó heredero sin serlo será nula.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DEL PAGO DE LAS DEUDAS HEREDITARIAS

Artículo 1082.

Los acreedores reconocidos como tales podrán oponerse a que se lleve a efecto la partición de la herencia hasta que se les pague o afiance el importe de sus créditos.

Artículo 1083.

Los acreedores de uno o más de los coherederos podrán intervenir a su costa en la partición para evitar que ésta se haga en fraude o perjuicio de sus derechos.

Artículo 1084.

Hecha la partición, los acreedores podrán exigir el pago de sus deudas por entero de cualquiera de los herederos que no hubiere aceptado la herencia a beneficio de inventario, o hasta donde alcance su porción hereditaria, en el caso de haberla admitido con dicho beneficio.

En uno y otro caso el demandado tendrá derecho a hacer citar y emplazar a sus coherederos, a menos que por disposición del testador, o a consecuencia de la partición, hubiere quedado él solo obligado al pago de la deuda.

Artículo 1085.

El coheredero que hubiese pagado más de lo que corresponda a su participación en la herencia, podrá reclamar

164

de los demás su parte proporcional.

Esto mismo se observará cuando, por ser la deuda hipotecaria o consistir en cuerpo determinado, la hubiese pagado íntegramente. El adjudicatario, en este caso, podrá reclamar de sus coherederos sólo la parte proporcional, aunque el acreedor le haya cedido sus acciones y subrogándole en su lugar.

Artículo 1086.

Estando alguna de las fincas de la herencia gravada con renta o carga real perpetua, no se procederá a su extinción, aunque sea redimible, sino cuando la mayor parte de los coherederos lo acordare.

No acordándolo así, o siendo la carga irredimible, se rebajará su valor o capital de la finca, y ésta pasará con la carga al que le toque en lote o por adjudicación.

Artículo 1087.

El coheredero acreedor del difunto puede reclamar de los otros el pago de su crédito, y sin perjuicio de lo establecido en la sección quinta, capítulo V de este título.

LIBRO CUARTO. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES Y CONTRATOS

TÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1088.

Toda obligación consiste en dar, hacer o no hacer alguna cosa.

Artículo 1089.

Las obligaciones nacen de la ley, de los contratos y cuasicontratos, y de los actos y omisiones ilícitos o en que intervenga cualquier género de culpa o negligencia.

Artículo 1090.

Las obligaciones derivadas de la ley no se presumen. Sólo son exigibles las expresamente determinadas en este Código o en las leyes especiales, y se regirán por los preceptos de la Ley que las hubiere establecido; y, en lo que ésta no hubiere previsto, por las disposiciones del presente libro.

Artículo 1091.

Las obligaciones que nacen de los contratos tienen fuerza de ley entre las partes contratantes, y deben cumplirse al tenor de los mismos.

Artículo 1092.

Las obligaciones civiles que nazcan de los delitos o faltas se regirán por las disposiciones del Código Penal.

165

Artículo 1093.

Las que se deriven de actos u omisiones en que intervenga culpa o negligencia no penadas por la Ley, quedarán sometidas a las disposiciones del capítulo II de este libro.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA NATURALEZA Y EFECTO DE LAS OBLIGACIONES

Artículo 1094.

El obligado a dar alguna cosa lo está también a conservarla con la diligencia propia de un buen padre de familia.

Artículo 1095.

El acreedor tiene derecho a los frutos de la cosa desde que nace la obligación de entregarla. Sin embargo, no adquirirá derecho real sobre ella hasta que le haya sido entregada.

Artículo 1096.

Cuando lo que deba entregarse sea una cosa determinada, el acreedor, independientemente del derecho que le otorga el artículo 1.101, puede compeler al deudor a que realice la entrega.

Si la cosa fuere indeterminada o genérica, podrá pedir que se cumpla la obligación a expensas del deudor.

Si el obligado se constituye en mora, o se halla comprometido a entregar una misma cosa a dos o más personas diversas, serán de su cuenta los casos fortuitos hasta que se realice la entrega.

Artículo 1097.

La obligación de dar cosa determinada comprende la de entregar todos sus accesorios, aunque no hayan sido mencionados.

Artículo 1098.

Si el obligado a hacer alguna cosa no la hiciere, se mandará ejecutar a su costa.

Esto mismo se observará si la hiciere contraviniendo al tenor de la obligación. Además podrá decretarse que se deshaga lo mal hecho.

Artículo 1099.

Lo dispuesto en el párrafo segundo del artículo anterior se observará también cuando la obligación consista en no hacer y el deudor ejecutare lo que le había sido prohibido.

Artículo 1100.

Incurren en mora los obligados a entregar o a hacer alguna cosa desde que el acreedor les exija judicial o extrajudicialmente el cumplimiento de su obligación.

No será, sin embargo, necesaria la intimación del acreedor para que la mora exista:

166

Cuando la obligación o la ley lo declaren así expresa mente.• Cuando de su naturaleza y circunstancia resulte que la designación de la época en que había de entregarse la cosa o hacerse el servicio, fue motivo determinante para establecer la obligación.

En las obligaciones recíprocas ninguno de los obligados incurre en mora si el otro no cumple o no se allana a cumplir debidamente lo que le incumbe. Desde que uno de los obligados cumple su obligación, empieza la mora para el otro.

Artículo 1101.

Quedan sujetos a la indemnización de los daños y perjuicios causados los que en el cumplimiento de sus obligaciones incurrieren en dolo, negligencia o morosidad, y los que de cualquier modo contravinieren al tenor de aquéllas.

Artículo 1102.

La responsabilidad procedente del dolo es exigible en todas las obligaciones. La renuncia de la acción para hacerla efectiva es nula.

Artículo 1103.

La responsabilidad que proceda de negligencia es igualmente exigible en el cumplimiento de toda clase de obligaciones; pero podrá moderarse por los Tribunales según los casos.

Artículo 1104.

La culpa o negligencia del deudor consiste en la omisión de aquella diligencia que exija la naturaleza de la obligación y corresponda a las circunstancias de las personas, del tiempo y del lugar.

Cuando la obligación no exprese la diligencia que ha de prestarse en su cumplimiento, se exigirá la que correspondería a un buen padre de familia.

Artículo 1105.

Fuera de los casos expresamente mencionados en la Ley y de los en que así lo declare la obligación, nadie responderá de aquellos sucesos que no hubieran podido preverse, o que, previstos, fueran inevitables.

Artículo 1106.

La indemnización de daños y perjuicios comprende, no sólo el valor de la pérdida que hayan sufrido, sino también el de la ganancia que haya dejado de obtener el acreedor, salvas las disposiciones contenidas en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1107.

Los daños y perjuicios de que responde el deudor de buena fe son los previstos o que se hayan podido prever al tiempo de constituirse la obligación y que sean consecuencia necesaria de su falta de cumplimiento.

En caso de dolo responderá el deudor de todos los que conocidamente se deriven de la falta de cumplimiento de la obligación.

Artículo 1108.

167

Si la obligación consistiere en el pago de una cantidad de dinero, y el deudor incurriere en mora, la indemnización de daños Y perjuicios, no habiendo pacto en contrario, consistirá en el pago de las intereses convenidos, y a falta de convenio, en el interés legal.

Artículo 1109.

Los intereses vencidos devengan el interés legal desde que son judicialmente reclamados, aunque la obligación haya guardado silencio sobre este punto.

En los negocios comerciales se estará a lo que dispone el Código de Comercio.

Los Montes de Piedad y Cajas de Ahorro se regirán por sus reglamentos especiales.

Artículo 1110.

El recibo del capital por el acreedor, sin reserva alguna respecto a los intereses, extingue la obligación del deudor en cuanto a éstos.

El recibo del último plazo de un débito, cuando el acreedor tampoco hiciere reservas, extinguirá la obligación en cuanto a los plazos anteriores.

Artículo 1111.

Los acreedores, después de haber perseguido los bienes de que esté en posesión el deudor para realizar cuanto se les debe, pueden ejercitar todos los derechos y acciones de éste con el mismo fin, exceptuando los que sean inherentes a su persona; pueden también impugnar los actos que el deudor haya realizado en fraude de su derecho.

Artículo 1112.

Todos los derechos adquiridos en virtud de una obligación son transmisibles con sujeción a las leyes, si no se hubiese pactado lo contrario.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LAS DIVERSAS ESPECIES DE OBLIGACIONES

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES PURAS Y DE LAS CONDICIONALES

Artículo 1113.

Será exigible desde luego toda obligación cuyo cumplimiento no dependa de un suceso futuro o incierto, o de un suceso pasado, que los interesados ignoren.

También será exigible toda obligación que contenga condición resolutoria, sin perjuicio de los efectos de la resolución.

Artículo 1114.

En las obligaciones condicionales la adquisición de los derechos, así como la resolución o pérdida de los ya adquiridos, dependerán del acontecimiento que constituya la condición.

Artículo 1115.

168

Cuando el cumplimiento de la condición dependa de la exclusiva voluntad del deudor, la obligación condicional será nula. Si dependiere de la suerte o de la voluntad de un tercero, la obligación surtirá todos sus efectos con arreglo a las disposiciones de este Código.

Artículo 1116.

Las condiciones imposibles, las contrarias a las buenas costumbres y las prohibidas por la ley anularán la obligación que de ellas dependa.

La condición de no hacer una cosa imposible se tiene por no puesta.

Artículo 1117.

La condición de que ocurra algún suceso en un tiempo determinado extinguirá la obligación desde que pasare el tiempo o fuere ya indudable que el acontecimiento no tendrá lugar.

Artículo 1118.

La condición de que no acontezca algún suceso en tiempo determinado hace eficaz la obligación desde que pasó el tiempo señalado o sea ya evidente que el acontecimiento no puede ocurrir. Si no hubiere tiempo fijado, la condición deberá reputarse cumplida en el que verosímilmente se hubiese querido señalar, atendida la naturaleza de la obligación.

Artículo 1119.

Se tendrá por cumplida la condición cuando el obligado impidiese voluntariamente su cumplimiento.

Artículo 1120.

Los efectos de la obligación condicional de dar, una vez cumplida la condición, se retrotraen al día de la constitución de aquélla. Esto no obstante, cuando la obligación imponga recíprocas prestaciones a los interesados, se entenderán compensados unos con otros los frutos e intereses del tiempo en que hubiese estado pendiente la condición. Si la obligación fuere unilateral, el deudor hará suyos los frutos e intereses percibidos, a menos que por la naturaleza y circunstancias de aquélla deba inferirse que fue otra la voluntad del que la constituyó.

En las obligaciones de hacer y no hacer los Tribunales determinarán, en cada caso, el efecto retroactivo de la condición cumplida.

Artículo 1121.

El acreedor puede, antes del cumplimiento de las condiciones, ejercitar las acciones procedentes para la conservación de su derecho.

El deudor puede repetir lo que en el mismo tiempo hubiese pagado.

Artículo 1122.

Cuando las condiciones fueren puestas con el intento de suspender la eficacia de la obligación de dar, se observarán las reglas siguientes, en el caso de que la cosa mejore o se pierda o deteriore pendiente la condición:

169

Si la cosa se perdió sin culpa del deudor, quedará extinguida la obligación.• Si la cosa se perdió par culpa del deudor, éste queda obligado al resarcimiento de daños y perjuicios.•

Entiéndese que la cosa se pierde cuando perece, queda fuera del comercio o desaparece de modo que se ignora su existencia, o no se puede recobrar.

Cuando la cosa se deteriora sin culpa del deudor, el menoscabo es de cuenta del acreedor.• Deteriorándose por culpa del deudor, el acreedor podrá optar entre la resolución de la obligación y su cumplimiento, con la indemnización de perjuicios en ambos casos.

Si la cosa se mejora por su naturaleza, o por el tiempo, las mejoras ceden en favor del acreedor.• Si se mejora a expensas del deudor, no tendrá éste otro derecho que el concedido al usufructuario.•

Artículo 1123.

Cuando las condiciones tengan por objeto resolver la obligación de dar, los interesados, cumplidas aquéllas, deberán restituir lo que hubiesen percibido.

En el caso de pérdida, deterioro o mejora de la cosa, se aplicarán al que deba hacer la restitución las disposiciones que respecto al deudor contiene el artículo precedente.

En cuanto a las obligaciones de hacer y no hacer, se observará, respecto a los efectos de la resolución, lo dispuesto en el párrafo segundo del artículo 1.120.

Artículo 1124.

La facultad de resolver las obligaciones se entiende implícita en las recíprocas, para el caso de que uno de los obligados no cumpliere lo que le incumbe.

El perjudicado podrá escoger entre exigir el cumplimiento o la resolución de la obligación, con el resarcimiento de daños y abono de intereses en ambos casos. También podrá pedir la resolución, aun después de haber optado por el cumplimiento, cuando éste resultare imposible.

El Tribunal decretará la resolución que se reclame, a no haber causas justificadas que le autoricen para señalar plazo.

Esto se entiende sin perjuicio de los derechos de terceros adquirentes, con arreglo a los artículos 1.295 y 1.298 y a las disposiciones de la Ley Hipotecaria.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES A PLAZO

Artículo 1125.

Las obligaciones para cuyo cumplimiento se haya señalado un día cierto, sólo serán exigibles cuando el día llegue. Entendiéndose por día cierto aquel que necesariamente ha de venir, aunque se ignore cuándo.

Si la incertidumbre consiste en si ha de llegar o no el día, la obligación es condicional, y se regirá por las reglas de la sección precedente.

Artículo 1126.

Lo que anticipadamente se hubiese pagado en las obligaciones a plazo, no se podrá repetir.

170

Si el que pagó ignoraba, cuando lo hizo, la existencia del plazo, tendrá derecho a reclamar del acreedor los intereses o los frutos que éste hubiese percibido de la cosa.

Artículo 1127.

Siempre que en las obligaciones se designa un término, se presume establecido en beneficio de acreedor y deudor, a no ser que del tenor de aquellas o de otras circunstancias resultara haberse puesto en favor del uno o del otro.

Artículo 1128.

Si la obligación no señalare plazo, pero de su naturaleza y circunstancia se dedujere que ha querido concederse al deudor, los Tribunales fijarán la duración de aquél.

También fijarán los Tribunales la duración del plazo cuando éste haya quedado a voluntad del deudor.

Artículo 1129.

Perderá el deudor todo derecho a utilizar el plazo:

Cuando, después de contraída la obligación, resulte insolvente, salvo que garantice la deuda.• Cuando no otorgue al acreedor las garantías a que estuviese comprometido.• Cuando por actos propios hubiese disminuido aquellas garantías después de establecidas, y cuando por caso fortuito desaparecieran, a menos que sean inmediatamente sustituidas por otras nuevas e igualmente seguras.

Artículo 1130.

Si el plazo de la obligación está señalado por días a contar desde uno determinado, quedará éste excluido del cómputo, que deberá empezar en el día siguiente.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES ALTERNATIVAS

Artículo 1131.

El obligado alternativamente a diversas prestaciones debe cumplir por completo una de éstas.

El acreedor no puede ser compelido a recibir parte de una y parte de otra.

Artículo 1132.

La elección corresponde al deudor, a menos que expresamente se hubiese concedido al acreedor.

El deudor no tendrá derecho a elegir las prestaciones imposibles, ilícitas o que no hubieran podido ser objeto de la obligación.

Artículo 1133.

La elección no producirá efecto sino desde que fuere notificada.

Artículo 1134.

171

El deudor perderá el derecho de elección cuando de las prestaciones a que alternativamente estuviese obligado, sólo una fuere realizable.

Artículo 1135.

El acreedor tendrá derecho a la indemnización de daños y perjuicios cuando por culpa del deudor hubieran desaparecido todas las cosas que alternativamente fueron objeto de la obligación, o se hubiera hecho imposible el cumplimiento de ésta.

La indemnización se fijará tomando por base el valor de la última cosa que hubiese desaparecido, o el del servicio que últimamente se hubiera hecho imposible.

Artículo 1136.

Cuando la elección hubiere sido expresamente atribuida al acreedor, la obligación cesará de ser alternativa desde el día en que aquélla hubiese sido notificada al deudor.

Hasta entonces las responsabilidades del deudor se regirán por las siguientes reglas:

Si alguna de las cosas se hubiese perdido por caso fortuito, cumplirá entregando la que el acreedor elija entre las restantes, o la que haya quedado, si una sola subsistiera.

Si la pérdida de alguna de las cosas hubiese sobrevenido por culpa del deudor, el acreedor podrá reclamar cualquiera de las que subsistan, o el precio de la que, por culpa de aquél, hubiera desaparecido.

Si todas las cosas se hubiesen perdido por culpa del deudor, la elección del acreedor recaerá sobre su precio.

Las mismas reglas se aplicarán a las obligaciones de hacer o de no hacer, en el caso de que algunas o todas las prestaciones resultaren imposibles.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES MANCOMUNADAS Y DE LAS SOLIDARIAS.

Artículo 1137.

La concurrencia de dos o más acreedores o de dos o más deudores en una sola obligación no implica que cada uno de aquéllos tenga derecho a pedir, ni cada uno de éstos deba prestar íntegramente las cosas objeto de la misma. Sólo habrá lugar a esto cuando la obligación expresamente lo determine, constituyéndose con el carácter de solidaria.

Artículo 1138.

Si del texto de las obligaciones a que se refiere el artículo anterior no resulta otra cosa, el crédito o la deuda se presumirán divididos en tantas partes iguales como acreedores o deudores haya. reputándose créditos o deudas distintos unos de otros.

Artículo 1139.

Si la división fuere imposible, sólo perjudicarán al derecho de los acreedores los actos colectivos de éstos y sólo podrá hacerse efectiva la deuda procediendo contra todos los deudores. Si alguno de éstos resultare insolvente, no estarán los demás obligados a suplir su falta.

Artículo 1140.

172

La solidaridad podrá existir aunque los acreedores y deudores no estén ligados del propio modo y por unos mismos plazos y condiciones.

Artículo 1141.

Cada uno de los acreedores solidarios puede hacer lo que sea útil a los demás, pero no lo que les sea perjudicial.

Las acciones ejercitadas contra cualquiera de los deudores solidarios perjudicarán a todos éstos.

Artículo 1142.

El deudor puede pagar la deuda a cualquiera de los acreedores solidarios pero, si hubiere sido judicialmente demandado por alguno, a éste deberá hacer el pago.

Artículo 1143.

La novación, compensación, confusión o remisión de la deuda, hechas por cualquiera de los acreedores solidarios o con cualquiera de los deudores de la misma clase, extinguen la obligación, sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.146.

El acreedor que haya ejecutado cualquiera de estos actos, así como el que cobre la deuda, responderá a los demás de la parte que les corresponde en la obligación.

Artículo 1144.

El acreedor puede dirigirse contra cualquiera de los deudores solidarios o contra todos ellos simultáneamente. Las reclamaciones entabladas contra uno no serán obstáculo para las que posterior mente se dirijan contra los demás, mientras no resulte cobrada la deuda por completo.

Artículo 1145.

El pago hecho por uno de los deudores solidarios extingue la obligación.

El que hizo el pago sólo puede reclamar de sus codeudores la parte que a cada uno corresponda, con los intereses del anticipo.

La falta de cumplimiento de la obligación por insolvencia del deudor solidario será suplida por sus codeudores, a prorrata de la deuda de cada uno.

Artículo 1146.

La quita o remisión hecha por el acreedor de la parte que afecte a uno de los deudores solidarios, no libra a éste de su responsabilidad para con los codeudores, en el caso de que la deuda haya sido totalmente pagada por cualquiera de ellos.

Artículo 1147.

Si la cosa hubiese perecido o la prestación se hubiese hecho imposible sin culpa de los deudores solidarios, la obligación quedará extinguida.

Si hubiese mediado culpa de parte de cualquiera de ellos, todos serán responsables, para con el acreedor, del

173

precio y de la indemnización de daños y abono de intereses, sin perjuicio de su acción contra el culpable o negligente.

Artículo 1148.

El deudor solidario podrá utilizar, contra las reclamaciones del acreedor, todas las excepciones que se deriven de la naturaleza de la obligación y las que le sean personales. De las que personalmente correspondan a los demás sólo podrá servirse en la parte de deuda de que éstos fueren responsables.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DIVISIBLES Y DE LAS INDIVISIBLES

Artículo 1149.

La divisibilidad o indivisibilidad de las cosas objeto de las obligaciones en que hay un solo deudor y un solo acreedor no altera ni modifica los preceptos del Capítulo II de este Título.

Artículo 1150.

La obligación indivisible mancomunada se resuelve en indemnizar daños y perjuicios desde que cualquiera de los deudores falta a su compromiso. Los deudores que hubiesen estado dispuestos a cumplir los suyos, no contribuirán a la indemnización con más cantidad que la porción correspondiente del precio de la cosa o del servicio en que consistiere la obligación.

Artículo 1151.

Para los efectos de los artículos que preceden, se reputarán indivisibles las obligaciones de dar cuerpos ciertos y todas aquellas que no sean susceptibles de cumplimiento parcial.

Las obligaciones de hacer serán divisibles cuando tengan por objeto la prestación de un número de días de trabajo, la ejecución de obras por unidades métricas u otras cosas análogas que por su naturaleza sean susceptibles de cumplimiento parcial.

En las obligaciones de no hacer, la divisibilidad o indivisibilidad se decidirá por el carácter de la prestación en cada caso particular.

SECCIÓN SEXTA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES CON CLÁUSULA PENAL

Artículo 1152.

En las obligaciones con cláusula penal, la pena sustituirá a la indemnización de daños y al abono de intereses en caso de falta de cumplimiento, si otra cosa no se hubiere pactado.

Sólo podrá hacerse efectiva la pena cuando ésta fuere exigible conforme a las disposiciones del presente Código.

Artículo 1153.

El deudor no podrá eximirse de cumplir la obligación pagando la pena, sino en el caso de que expresamente le hubiese sido reservado este derecho. Tampoco el acreedor podrá exigir conjuntamente el cumplimiento de la obligación y la satisfacción de la pena, sin que esta facultad le haya sido claramente otorgada.

Artículo 1154.

174

El Juez modificará equitativamente la pena cuando la obligación principal hubiera sido en parte o irregular mente cumplida por el deudor.

Artículo 1155.

La nulidad de la cláusula penal no lleva consigo la de la obligación principal.

La nulidad de la obligación principal lleva consigo la de la cláusula penal.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA EXTINCIÓN DE LAS OBLIGACIONES

Disposiciones generales

Artículo 1156.

Las obligaciones se extinguen:

Por el pago o cumplimiento.• Por la pérdida de la cosa debida.• Por la confusión de los derechos de acreedor y deudor.• Por la compensación.• Por la novación.•

SECCIÓN PRIMERA.

Del pago

Artículo 1157.

No se entenderá pagada una deuda sino cuando completamente se hubiese entregado la cosa o hecho la prestación en que la obligación consistía.

Artículo 1158.

Puede hacer el pago cualquier persona, tenga o no interés en el cumplimiento de la obligación, ya lo conozca y lo apruebe, o ya lo ignore el deudor.

El que pagare por cuenta de otro podrá reclamar del deudor lo que hubiese pagado, a no haberlo hecho contra su expresa voluntad.

En este caso sólo podrá repetir del deudor aquello en que le hubiera sido útil el pago.

Artículo 1159.

El que pague en nombre del deudor, ignorándolo éste, no podrá compeler al acreedor a subrogarle en sus derechos.

Artículo 1160.

En las obligaciones de dar no será válido el pago hecho por quien no tenga la libre disposición de la cosa debida y capacidad para enajenarla. Sin embargo, si el pago hubiere consistido en una cantidad de dinero o

175

cosa fungible, no habrá repetición contra el acreedor que la hubiese gastado o consumido de buena fe.

Artículo 1161.

En las obligaciones de hacer el acreedor no podrá ser compelido a recibir la prestación o el servicio de un tercero, cuando la calidad y circunstancias de la persona del deudor se hubiesen tenido en cuenta al establecer la obligación.

Artículo 1162.

El pago deberá hacerse a la persona en cuyo favor estuviese constituida la obligación, o a otra autorizada para recibirla en su nombre.

Artículo 1163.

El pago hecho a una persona incapacitada para administrar sus bienes será válido en cuanto se hubiere convertido en su utilidad.

También será válido el pago hecho a un tercero en cuanto se hubiere convertido en utilidad del acreedor.

Artículo 1164.

El pago hecho de buena fe al que estuviere en posesión del crédito, liberará al deudor.

Artículo 1165.

No será válido el pago hecho al acreedor por el deudor después de habérsele ordenado judicialmente la retención de la deuda.

Artículo 1166.

El deudor de una cosa no puede obligar a su acreedor a que reciba otra diferente, aun cuando fuere de igual o mayor valor que la debida.

Tampoco en las obligaciones de hacer podrá ser sustituido un hecho por otro contra la voluntad del acreedor.

Artículo 1167.

Cuando la obligación consista en entregar una cosa indeterminada o genérica, cuya calidad y circunstancias no se hubiesen expresado, el acreedor no podrá exigirla de la calidad superior, ni el deudor entregarla de la inferior.

Artículo 1168.

Los gastos extrajudiciales que ocasione el pago serán de cuenta del deudor. Respecto de los judiciales, decidirá el Tribunal con arreglo a la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 1169.

A menos que el contrato expresamente lo autorice, no podrá compelerse al acreedor a recibir parcialmente las prestaciones en que consista la obligación.

176

Sin embargo, cuando la deuda tuviere una parte liquida y otra ilíquida, podrá exigir el acreedor y hacer el deudor el pago de la primera sin esperar a que se liquide la segunda.

Artículo 1170.

El pago de las deudas de dinero deberá hacerse en la especie pactada y, no siendo posible entregar la especie, en la moneda de plata u oro que tenga curso legal en España.

La entrega de pagarés a la orden, o letras de cambio u otros documentos mercantiles, sólo producirá los efectos del pago cuando hubiesen sido realizados, o cuando por culpa del acreedor se hubiesen perjudicado.

Entre tanto la acción derivada de la obligación primitiva quedará en suspenso.

Artículo 1171.

El pago deberá ejecutarse en el lugar que hubiese designado la obligación.

No habiéndose expresado y tratándose de entregar una cosa determinada, deberá hacerse el pago donde ésta existía en el momento de constituirse la obligación.

En cualquier otro caso, el lugar del pago será el del domicilio del deudor.

De la imputación de pagos

Artículo 1172.

El que tuviere varias deudas de una misma especie en favor de un solo acreedor, podrá declarar, al tiempo de hacer el pago, a cuál de ellas debe aplicarse.

Si aceptare del acreedor un recibo en que se hiciese la aplicación del pago, no podrá reclamar contra ésta, a menos que hubiera mediado causa que invalide el contrato.

Artículo 1173.

Si la deuda produce interés, no podrá estimarse hecho el pago por cuenta del capital mientras no estén cubiertos los intereses.

Artículo 1174.

Cuando no pueda imputarse el pago según las reglas anteriores, se estimará satisfecha la deuda más onerosa al deudor entre las que estén vencidas.

Si éstas fueren de igual naturaleza y gravamen, el pago se imputará a todas a prorrata.

Del pago por cesión de bienes

Artículo 1175.

El deudor puede ceder sus bienes a los acreedores en pago de sus deudas. Esta cesión, salvo pacto en contrario, sólo libera a aquél de responsabilidad por el importe liquido de los bienes cedidos. Los convenios que sobre el efecto de la cesión se celebren entre el deudor y sus acreedores se ajustarán a las disposiciones del título XVII de este Libro, y a lo que establece la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

177

Del ofrecimiento del pago y de la consignación

Artículo 1176.

Si el acreedor a quien se hiciere el ofrecimiento de pago se negare sin razón a admitirlo, el deudor quedará libre de responsabilidad mediante la consignación de la cosa debida.

La consignación por sí sola producirá el mismo efecto cuando se haga estando el acreedor ausente o cuando esté incapacitado para recibir el pago en el momento en que deba hacerse, y cuando varias personas pretendan tener derecho a cobrar, o se haya extraviado el título de la obligación.

Artículo 1177.

Para que la consignación de la cosa debida libere al obligado, deberá ser previamente anunciada a las personas interesadas en el cumplimiento de la obligación.

La consignación será ineficaz si no se ajusta estrictamente a las disposiciones que regulan el pago.

Artículo 1178.

La consignación se hará depositando las cosas debidas a disposición de la Autoridad judicial, ante quien se acreditará el ofrecimiento, en su caso. y el anuncio de la consignación en los demás. Hecha la consignación, deberá notificarse también a los interesados.

Artículo 1179.

Los gastos de la consignación, cuando fuere procedente, serán de cuenta del acreedor.

Artículo 1180.

Hecha debidamente la consignación, podrá el deudor pedir al Juez que mande cancelar la obligación.

Mientras el acreedor no hubiere aceptado la consignación, o no hubiere recaído la declaración judicial de que está bien hecha, podrá el deudor retirar la cosa o cantidad consignada, dejando subsistente la obligación.

Artículo 1181.

Si, hecha la consignación, el acreedor autoriza se al deudor para retirarla, perderá toda preferencia que tuviere sobre la cosa. Los codeudores y fiadores quedarán libres.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA PÉRDIDA DE LA COSA DEBIDA.

Artículo 1182.

Quedará extinguida la obligación que consista en entregar una cosa determinada cuando ésta se perdiere o destruyere sin culpa del deudor y antes de haberse éste constituido en mora.

Artículo 1183.

Siempre que la cosa se hubiese perdido en poder del deudor, se presumirá que la pérdida ocupó por su culpa y no por caso fortuito, salvo prueba en contrario, y sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.096.

178

Artículo 1184.

También quedará liberado el deudor en las obligaciones de hacer cuando la prestación resultare legal o físicamente imposible.

Artículo 1185.

Cuando la deuda de cosa cierta y determinada procediere de delito o falta, no se eximirá el deudor del pago de su precio, cualquiera que hubiese sido el motivo de la pérdida, a menos que, ofrecida por él la cosa al que la debía recibir, éste se hubiese sin razón negado a aceptarla.

Artículo 1186.

Extinguida la obligación por la pérdida de la cosa, corresponderán al acreedor todas las acciones que el deudor tuviere contra terceros por razón de ésta.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA CONDONACIÓN DE LA DEUDA

Artículo 1187.

La condonación podrá hacerse expresa o tácitamente. Una y otra estarán sometidas a los preceptos que rigen las donaciones inoficiosas. La condonación expresa deberá, además, ajustarse a las formas de la donación.

Artículo 1188.

La entrega del documento privado justificativo de un crédito, hecha voluntariamente por el acreedor al deudor, implica la renuncia de la acción que el primero tenía contra el segundo.

Si para invalidar esta renuncia se pretendiere que es inoficiosa, el deudor y sus herederos podrán sostenerla probando que la entrega del documento se hizo en virtud del pago de la deuda.

Artículo 1189.

Siempre que el documento privado de donde resulte la deuda se hallare en poder del deudor, se presumirá que el acreedor lo entregó voluntariamente, a no ser que se pruebe lo contrario.

Artículo 1190.

La condonación de la deuda principal extinguirá las obligaciones accesorias; pero la de éstas dejará subsistente la primera.

Artículo 1191.

Se presumirá remitida la obligación accesoria de prenda cuando la cosa pignorada, después de entregada al acreedor, se hallare en poder del deudor.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA CONFUSIÓN DE DERECHOS

Artículo 1192.

Quedará extinguida la obligación desde que se reúnan en una misma persona los conceptos de acreedor y de deudor.

179

Se exceptúa el caso en que esta confusión tenga lugar en virtud de título de herencia, si ésta hubiese sido aceptada a beneficio de inventario.

Artículo 1193.

La confusión que recae en la persona del deudor o del acreedor principal, aprovecha a los fiadores. La que se realiza en cualquiera de éstos no extingue la obligación.

Artículo 1194.

La confusión no extingue la deuda mancomunada sino en la porción correspondiente al acreedor o deudor en quien concurran los dos conceptos.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LA COMPENSACIÓN

Artículo 1195.

Tendrá lugar la compensación cuando dos personas, por derecho propio, sean recíprocamente acreedoras y deudoras la una de la otra.

Artículo 1196.

Para que proceda la compensación, es preciso:

Que cada uno de los obligados lo esté principalmente, y sea a la vez acreedor principal del otro.• Que ambas deudas consistan en una cantidad de dinero, o, siendo fungibles las cosas debidas, sean de la misma especie y también de la misma calidad, si ésta se hubiese designado.

Que las dos deudas estén vencidas.• Que sean liquidas y exigibles.• Que sobre ninguna de ellas haya retención o contienda promovida por terceras personas y notificada oportunamente al deudor.

Artículo 1197.

No obstante lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, el fiador podrá oponer la compensación respecto de lo que el acreedor debiere a su deudor principal.

Artículo 1198.

El deudor que hubiere consentido en la cesión de derechos hecha por un acreedor a favor de un tercero, no podrá oponer al cesionario la compensación que le correspondería contra el cedente. Si el acreedor le hizo saber la cesión y el deudor no la consintió, puede oponer la compensación de las deudas anteriores a ella, pero no la de las posteriores.

Si la cesión se realiza sin conocimiento del deudor, podrá éste oponer la compensación de los créditos anteriores a ella y de los posteriores hasta que hubiese tenido conocimiento de la cesión.

Artículo 1199.

Las deudas pagaderas en diferentes lugares pueden compensarse mediante indemnización de los gastos de transporte o cambio al lugar del pago.

180

Artículo 1200.

La compensación no procederá cuando alguna de las deudas proviniere de depósito o de las obligaciones del depositario o comodatario.

Tampoco podrá oponerse al acreedor por alimentos debidos por título gratuito.

Artículo 1201.

Si una persona tuviere contra si varias deudas compensables, se observará en el orden de la compensación lo dispuesto respecto a la imputación de pagos.

Artículo 1202.

El efecto de la compensación es extinguir una y otra deuda en la cantidad concurrente. aunque no tengan conocimiento de ella los acreedores y deudores.

SECCIÓN SEXTA. DE LA NOVACIÓN

Artículo 1203.

Las obligaciones pueden modificarse:

Variando su objeto o sus condiciones principales.• Sustituyendo la persona del deudor.• Subrogando a un tercero en los derechos del acreedor.•

Artículo 1204.

Para que una obligación quede extinguida por otra que la sustituya, es preciso que así se declare terminante mente, o que la antigua y la nueva sean de todo punto incompatibles.

Artículo 1205.

La novación, que consiste en sustituirse un nuevo deudor en lugar del primitivo, puede hacerse sin el conocimiento de éste, pero no sin el consentimiento del acreedor.

Artículo 1206.

La insolvencia del nuevo deudor, que hubiese sido aceptado por el acreedor, no hará revivir la acción de éste contra el deudor primitivo, salvo que dicha insolvencia hubiese sido anterior y pública o conocida del deudor al delegar su deuda.

Artículo 1207.

Cuando la obligación principal se extinga por efecto de la novación, sólo podrán subsistir las obligaciones accesorias en cuanto aprovechen a terceros que no hubiesen prestado su consentimiento.

Artículo 1208.

La novación es nula si lo fuere también la obligación primitiva, salvo que la causa de nulidad sólo pueda ser invocada por el deudor, o que la ratificación convalide los actos nulos en su origen.

181

Artículo 1209.

La subrogación de un tercero en los derechos del acreedor no puede presumirse fuera de los casos expresamente mencionados en este Código.

En los demás será preciso establecerla con claridad para que produzca efecto.

Artículo 1210.

Se presumirá que hay subrogación:

Cuando un acreedor pague a otro acreedor preferente.• Cuando un tercero, no interesado en la obligación, pague con aprobación expresa o tácita del deudor.• Cuando pague el que tenga interés en el cumplimiento de la obligación, salvos los efectos de la confusión en cuanto a la porción que le corresponda.

Artículo 1211.

El deudor podrá hacer la subrogación sin consentimiento del acreedor, cuando para pagar la deuda haya tomado prestado el dinero por escritura pública, haciendo constar su propósito en ella, y expresando en la carta de pago la procedencia de la cantidad pagada.

Artículo 1212.

La subrogación transfiere al subrogado el crédito con los derechos a él anexos, ya contra el deudor, ya contra los terceros, sean fiadores o poseedores de las hipotecas.

Artículo 1213.

El acreedor, a quien se hubiere hecho un pago parcial, puede ejercitar su derecho por el resto con preferencia al que se hubiere subrogado en su lugar a virtud del pago parcial del mismo crédito.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LA PRUEBA DE LAS OBLIGACIONES

Disposiciones generales

Artículo 1214.

Incumbe la prueba de las obligaciones al que reclama su cumplimiento, y la de su extinción al que la opone.

Artículo 1215.

Las pruebas pueden hacerse: por instrumentos, por confesión, por inspección personal del Juez, por peritos, por testigos y por presunciones.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LOS DOCUMENTOS PÚBLICOS

Artículo 1216.

Son documentos públicos los autorizados por un Notario o empleado público competente, con las solemnidades requeridas por la ley.

182

Artículo 1217.

Los documentos en que intervenga Notario público se regirán por la legislación notarial.

Artículo 1218.

Los documentos públicos hacen prueba, aun contra tercero del hecho que motiva su otorgamiento y la fecha de éste. También harán prueba contra los contratantes y sus causahabientes, en cuanto a las declaraciones que en ellos hubiesen hecho los primeros.

Artículo 1219.

Las escrituras hechas para desvirtuar otra escritura anterior entre los mismos interesados, sólo producirán efecto contra terceros cuando el contenido de aquéllas hubiese sido anotado en el registro público competente o al margen de la escritura matriz y del traslado o copia en cuya virtud hubiera procedido el tercero.

Artículo 1220.

Las copias de los documentos públicos de que exista matriz o protocolo, impugnadas por aquellos a quienes perjudiquen, sólo tendrán fuerza probatoria cuando hayan sido debidamente cotejadas. Si resultare alguna variante entre la matriz y la copia, se estará al contenido de la primera.

Artículo 1221.

Cuando hayan desaparecido la escritura matriz, el protocolo, o los expedientes originales, harán prueba:

Las primeras copias, sacadas por el funcionario público que las autorizara.• Las copias ulteriores, libradas por mandato judicial, con citación de los interesados.• Las que, sin mandato judicial, se hubiesen sacado en presencia de los interesados y con su conformidad.•

A falta de las copias mencionadas, harán prueba cualesquiera otras que tengan la antigüedad de treinta o más años, siempre que hubiesen sido tomadas del original por el funcionario que lo autorizó u otro encargado de su custodia.

Las copias de menor antigüedad, o que estuviesen autorizadas por funcionario público en quien no concurran las circunstancias mencionadas en el párrafo anterior, sólo servirán como un principio de prueba por escrito.

La fuerza probatoria de las copias de copia será apreciada por los Tribunales según las circunstancias.

Artículo 1222.

La inscripción, en cualquier registro público, de un documento que haya desaparecido, será apreciada según las reglas de los dos últimos párrafos del artículo precedente.

Artículo 1223.

La escritura defectuosa, por incompetencia del Notario o por otra falta en la forma, tendrá el concepto de documento privado, si estuviese firmada por los otorgantes.

Artículo 1224.

Las escrituras de reconocimiento de un acto o contrato nada prueban contra el documento en que éstos

183

hubiesen sido consignados, si por exceso u omisión se apartaren de él, a menos que conste expresamente la novación del primero.

De los documentos privados

Artículo 1225.

El documento privado, reconocido legalmente, tendrá el mismo valor que la escritura pública entre los que lo hubiesen suscrito y sus causahabientes.

Artículo 1226.

Aquel a quien se oponga en juicio una obligación por escrito que aparezca firmada por él, está obligado a declarar si la firma es o no suya. Los herederos o causahabientes del obligado podrán limitarse a declarar si saben que es o no de su causante la firma de la obligación. La resistencia, sin justa causa, a prestar la declaración mencionada en los párrafos anteriores podrá ser estimada por los Tribunales como una confesión de la autenticidad del documento.

Artículo 1227.

La fecha de un documento privado no se contará respecto de terceros sino desde el día en que hubiese sido incorporado o inscrito en un registro público, desde la muerte de cualquiera de los que lo firmaron, o desde el día en que se entregase a un funcionario público por razón de su oficio.

Artículo 1228.

Los asientos, registros y papeles privados únicamente hacen prueba contra el que los ha escrito en todo aquello que conste con claridad; pero el que quiera aprovecharse de ellos habrá de aceptarlos en la parte que le perjudiquen.

Artículo 1229.

La nota escrita o firmada por el acreedor a continuación, al margen o al dorso de una escritura que obre en su poder, hace prueba en todo lo que sea favorable al deudor.

Lo mismo se entenderá de la nota escrita o fijada por el acreedor al dorso, al margen o a continuación del duplicado de un documento o recibo que se halle en poder del deudor.

En ambos casos, el deudor que quiera aprovecharse de lo que le favorezca, tendrá que pasar por lo que le perjudique.

Artículo 1230.

Los documentos privados hechos para alterar lo pactado en escritura pública, no producen efecto contra tercero.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA CONFESIÓN

Artículo 1231.

La confesión puede hacerse judicial o extrajudicialmente. En uno y otro caso, será condición indispensable, para la validez de la confesión, que recaiga sobre hechos personales del confesante, y que éste tenga

184

capacidad legal para hacerla.

Artículo 1232.

La confesión hace prueba contra su autor.

Se exceptúa el caso en que por ella pueda eludirse el cumplimiento de las leyes.

Artículo 1233.

La confesión no puede dividirse contra el que la hace, salvo cuando se refiera a hechos diferentes, o cuando una parte de la confesión esté probada por otros medios, o cuando en algún extremo sea contraria a la naturaleza o a las leyes.

Artículo 1234.

La confesión sólo pierde su eficacia probando que al hacerla se incurrió en error de hecho.

Artículo 1235.

La confesión judicial debe hacerse ante Juez competente, bajo juramento y hallándose personado en autos aquel a quien ha de aprovechar.

Artículo 1236.

Cuando se solicite la confesión judicial bajo juramento decisorio, la parte a quien se pida podrá referir el juramento a la contraria y, si ésta se negare a prestarlo, se la tendrá por confesa.

Artículo 1237.

No puede pedirse juramento decisorio sobre hechos punibles ni sobre cuestiones acerca de las cuales las partes no puedan transigir.

Artículo 1238.

La confesión prestada bajo juramento decisorio, ya sea deferido o referido, sólo constituye prueba a favor o en contra de las partes que a él se sometieron y de sus herederos o causahabientes. No se admitirá prueba sobre la falsedad de dicho juramento.

Artículo 1239.

La confesión extrajudicial se considera como un hecho sujeto a la apreciación de los Tribunales según las reglas establecidas sobre la prueba.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA INSPECCIÓN PERSONAL DEL JUEZ

Artículo 1240.

La prueba de inspección personal del Juez sólo será eficaz en cuanto claramente permita al Tribunal apreciar, por las exterioridades de la cosa inspeccionada, el hecho que trate de averiguar.

Artículo 1241.

185

La inspección practicada por un Juez podrá ser apreciada en la sentencia que otro dicte, siempre que el primero hubiera consignado con perfecta claridad en la diligencia los detalles y circunstancias de la cosa inspeccionada.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA PRUEBA DE PERITOS

Artículo 1242.

Sólo se podrá utilizar este medio de prueba cuando para apreciar los hechos sean necesarios o convenientes conocimientos científicos, artísticos o prácticos.

Artículo 1243.

El valor de esta prueba y la forma en que haya de practicarse son objeto de las disposiciones de la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LA PRUEBA DE TESTIGOS

Artículo 1244.

La prueba de testigos será admisible en todos los casos en que no se halle expresamente prohibida.

Artículo 1245.

Podrán ser testigos todas las personas de uno y otro sexo que no fueren inhábiles por incapacidad natural o disposición de la ley.

Artículo 1246.

Son inhábiles por incapacidad natural:

Los locos o dementes.• Los ciegos y sordos, en las cosas cuyo conocimiento depende de la vista y el oído.• Los menores de catorce años.•

Artículo 1247.

Son inhábiles por disposición de la Ley:

Los que tienen interés directo en el pleito.• Los ascendientes en los pleitos de los descendientes, y éstos en los de aquéllos.• El suegro o suegra en los pleitos del yerno o nuera y viceversa.• El marido en los pleitos de la mujer y la mujer en los del marido.• Los que están obligados a guardar secreto, por su estado o profesión, en los asuntos relativos a su profesión o estado.

Los especialmente inhabilitados para ser testigos en ciertos actos.•

Lo dispuesto en los números 2), 3) y 4) no es aplicable a los pleitos en que se trate de probar el nacimiento o defunción de los hijos o cualquiera hecho íntimo de familia que no sea posible justificar por otros medios.

Artículo 1248.

186

La fuerza probatoria de las declaraciones de los testigos será apreciada por los Tribunales conforme a lo establecido en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil, cuidando de evitar que por la simple coincidencia de algunos testimonios, a menos que su veracidad sea evidente, queden definitivamente resueltos los negocios en que de ordinario suelen intervenir escrituras. documentos privados o algún principio de prueba por escrito.

SECCIÓN SEXTA. DE LAS PRESUNCIONES

Artículo 1249.

Las presunciones no son admisibles sino cuando el hecho de que han de deducirse esté completamente acreditado.

Artículo 1250.

Las presunciones que la ley establece dispensan de toda prueba a los favorecidos por ellas.

Artículo 1251.

Las presunciones establecidas por la ley pueden destruirse por la prueba en contrario, excepto en los casos en que aquélla expresamente lo prohíba.

Contra la presunción de que la cosa juzgada es verdad, sólo será eficaz la sentencia ganada en juicio de revisión.

Artículo 1252.

Para que la presunción de cosa juzgada surta efecto en otro juicio, es necesario que, entre el caso resuelto por la sentencia y aquel en que ésta sea invocada, concurra la más perfecta identidad entre las cosas, las causas, las personas de los litigantes y la calidad con que lo fueron.

En las cuestiones relativas al estado civil de las personas y en las de validez o nulidad de las disposiciones testamentarias, la presunción de cosa juzgada es eficaz contra terceros, aunque no hubiesen litigado.

Se entiende que hay identidad de personas siempre que los litigantes del segundo pleito sean causahabientes de los que contendieron en el pleito anterior o estén unidos a ellos por vínculos de solidaridad o por los que establece la indivisibilidad de las prestaciones entre los que tienen derecho a exigirlas u obligación de satisfacerlas.

Artículo 1253.

Para que las presunciones no establecidas por la ley sean apreciables como medio de prueba, es indispensable que entre el hecho demostrado y aquel que se trate de deducir haya un enlace preciso y directo según las reglas del criterio humano.

TÍTULO II. DE LOS CONTRATOS

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1254.

187

El contrato existe desde que una o varias personas consienten en obligarse, respecto de otra u otras, a dar alguna cosa o prestar algún servicio.

Artículo 1255.

Los contratantes pueden establecer los pactos, cláusulas y condiciones que tengan por conveniente, siempre que no sean contrarios a las leyes, a la moral ni al orden público.

Artículo 1256.

La validez y el cumplimiento de los contratos no pueden dejarse al arbitrio de uno de los contratantes.

Artículo 1257.

Los contratos sólo producen efecto entre las partes que los otorgan y sus herederos; salvo, en cuanto a éstos, el caso en que los derechos y obligaciones que proceden del contrato no sean transmisibles, o por su naturaleza, o por pacto, o por disposición de la ley. Si el contrato contuviere alguna estipulación en favor de un tercero, éste podrá exigir su cumplimiento siempre que hubiese hecho saber su aceptación al obligado antes de que haya sido aquélla revocada.

Artículo 1258.

Los contratos se perfeccionan por el mero consentimiento, y desde entonces obligan, no sólo al cumplimiento de lo expresamente pactado, sino también a todas las consecuencias que, según su naturaleza, sean conformes a la buena fe, al uso y a la ley.

Artículo 1259.

Ninguno puede contratar a nombre de otro sin estar por éste autorizado o sin que tenga por la ley su representación legal. El contrato celebrado a nombre de otro por quien no tenga su autorización o representación legal será nulo, a no ser que lo ratifique la persona a cuyo nombre se otorgue antes de ser revocado por la otra parte contratante.

Artículo 1260.

No se admitirá juramento en los contratos. Si se hiciere, se tendrá por no puesto.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS REQUISITOS ESENCIALES PARA LA VALIDEZ DE LOS CONTRATOS

Disposición general

Artículo 1261.

No hay contrato sino cuando concurren los requisitos siguientes:

Consentimiento de los contratantes.• Objeto cierto que sea materia del contrato.• Causa de la obligación que se establezca.•

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DEL CONSENTIMIENTO

188

Artículo 1262.

El consentimiento se manifiesta por el concurso de la oferta y de la aceptación sobre la cosa y la causa que han de constituir el contrato.

La aceptación hecha por carta no obliga al que hizo la oferta sino desde que llegó a su conocimiento. El contrato, en tal caso, se presume celebrado en el lugar en que se hizo la oferta.

Artículo 1263.

No pueden prestar consentimiento

Los menores no emancipados.• Los incapacitados.•

Artículo 1264.

La incapacidad declarada en el artículo anterior está sujeta a las modificaciones que la ley determina, y se entiende sin perjuicio de las incapacidades especiales que la misma establece.

Artículo 1265.

Será nulo el consentimiento prestado por error, violencia, intimidación o dolo.

Artículo 1266.

Para que el error invalide el consentimiento, deberá recaer sobre la sustancia de la cosa que fuere objeto del contrato, o sobre aquellas condiciones de la misma que principal mente hubiesen dado motivo a celebrarlo.

El error sobre la persona solo invalidará el contrato cuando la consideración a ella hubiere sido la causa principal del mismo.

El simple error de cuenta sólo dará lugar a su corrección.

Artículo 1267.

Hay violencia cuando para arrancar el consentimiento se emplea una fuerza irresistible.

Hay intimidación cuando se inspira a uno de los contratantes el temor racional y fundado de sufrir un mal inminente y grave en su persona o bienes, o en la persona o bienes de su cónyuge, descendientes u ascendientes.

Para calificar la intimidación debe atenderse a la edad y a la condición de la persona.

El temor de desagradar a las personas a quienes se debe sumisión y respeto no anulará el contrato.

Artículo 1268.

La violencia o intimidación anularán la obligación, aunque se hayan empleado por un tercero que no intervenga en el contrato.

Artículo 1269.

189

Hay dolo cuando, con palabras o maquinaciones insidiosas de parte de uno de los contratantes, es inducido el otro a celebrar un contrato que, sin ellas, no hubiera hecho.

Artículo 1270.

Para que el dolo produzca la nulidad de los contratos, deberá ser grave y no haber sido empleado por las dos partes contratantes.

El dolo incidental sólo obliga al que lo empleó a indemnizar daños y perjuicios.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL OBJETO DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1271.

Pueden ser objeto de contrato todas las cosas que no estén fuera del comercio de los hombres, aun las futuras.

Sobre la herencia futura no se podrá, sin embargo, celebrar otros contratos que aquellos cuyo objeto sea practicar entre vivos la división de un caudal conforme al artículo 1.056.

Pueden ser igualmente objeto de contrato todos los servicios que no sean contrarios a las leyes o a las buenas costumbres.

Artículo 1272.

No podrán ser objeto de contrato las cosas o servicios imposibles.

Artículo 1273.

El objeto de todo contrato debe ser una cosa determinada en cuanto a su especie. La indeterminación en la cantidad no será obstáculo para la existencia del contrato, siempre que sea posible determinarla sin necesidad de nuevo convenio entre los contratantes.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LA CAUSA DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1274.

En los contratos onerosos se entiende por causa, para cada parte contratante, la prestación o promesa de una cosa o servicio por la otra parte; en los remuneratorios, el servicio o beneficio que se remunera, y en los de pura beneficencia, la mera liberalidad del bienhechor.

Artículo 1275.

Los contratos sin causa, o con causa ilícita, no producen efecto alguno. Es ilícita la causa cuando se opone a las leyes o a la moral.

Artículo 1276.

La expresión de una causa falsa en los contratos dará lugar a la nulidad, si no se probase que estaban fundados en otra verdadera y lícita.

Artículo 1277.

190

Aunque la causa no se exprese en el contrato, se presume que existe y que es lícita mientras el deudor no pruebe lo contrario.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA EFICACIA DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1278.

Los contratos serán obligatorios, cualquiera que sea la forma en que se hayan celebrado, siempre que en ellos concurran las condiciones esenciales para su validez.

Artículo 1279.

Si la ley exigiera el otorgamiento de escritura u otra forma especial para hacer efectivas las obligaciones propias de un contrato, los contratantes podrán compelerse recíprocamente a llenar aquella forma desde que hubiese intervenido el consentimiento y demás requisitos necesarios para su validez.

Artículo 1280.

Deberán constar en documento público:

Los actos y contratos que tengan por objeto la creación, transmisión, modificación o extinción de derechos reales sobre bienes inmuebles.

Los arrendamientos de estos mismos bienes por seis o más años, siempre que deban perjudicar a terceros.• Las capitulaciones matrimoniales y sus modificaciones.• La cesión, repudiación y renuncia de los derechos hereditarios o de los de la sociedad conyugal.• El poder para contraer matrimonio, el general para pleitos y los especiales que deban presentarse en juicio, el poder para administrar bienes, y cualquier otro que tenga por objeto un acto redactado o que deba redactarse en escritura pública, o haya de perjudicar a tercero.

La cesión de acciones o derechos procedentes de un acto consignado en escritura pública.•

También deberán hacerse constar por escrito, aunque sea privado, los demás contratos en que la cuantía de las prestaciones de uno o de los dos contratantes exceda de 1.500 pesetas.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA INTERPRETACIÓN DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1281.

Si los términos de un contrato son claros y no dejan duda sobre la intención de los contratantes se estará al sentido literal de sus cláusulas.

Si las palabras parecieren contrarias a la intención evidente de los contratantes, prevalecerá ésta sobre aquéllas.

Artículo 1282.

Para juzgar de la intención de los contratantes, deberá atenderse principalmente a los actos de éstos, coetáneos y posteriores al contrato.

Artículo 1283.

191

Cualquiera que sea la generalidad de los términos de un contrato, no deberán entenderse comprendidos en él cosas distintas y cosas diferentes de aquellos sobre que los interesados se propusieron contratar.

Artículo 1284.

Si alguna cláusula de los contratos admitiere diversos sentidos, deberá entenderse en el más adecuado para que produzca efecto.

Artículo 1285.

Las cláusulas de los contratos deberán interpretarse las unas por las otras, atribuyendo a las dudosas el sentido que resulte del conjunto de todas.

Artículo 1286.

Las palabras que puedan tener distintas acepciones serán entendidas en aquella que sea más conforme a la naturaleza y objeto del contrato.

Artículo 1287.

El uso o la costumbre del país se tendrán en cuenta para interpretar las ambigüedades de los contratos, supliendo en éstos la omisión de cláusulas que de ordinario suelen establecerse.

Artículo 1288.

La interpretación de las cláusulas oscuras de un contrato no deberá favorecer a la parte que hubiese ocasionado la oscuridad.

Artículo 1289.

Cuando absolutamente fuere imposible resolver las dudas por las reglas establecidas en los artículos precedentes, si aquéllas recaen sobre circunstancias accidentales del contrato, y éste fuere gratuito, se resolverán en favor de la menor transmisión de derechos e intereses. Si el contrato fuere oneroso, la duda se resolverá en favor de la mayor reciprocidad de intereses.

Si las dudas de cuya resolución se trata en este artículo recayesen sobre el objeto principal del contrato, de suerte que no pueda venirse en conocimiento de cuál fue la intención o voluntad de los contratantes, el contrato será nulo.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LA RESCISIÓN DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1290.

Los contratos validamente celebrados pueden rescindirse en los casos establecidos por la Ley.

Artículo 1291.

Son rescindibles:

Los contratos que pudieren celebrar los tutores sin autorización judicial, siempre que las personas a quienes representan hayan sufrido lesión en más de la cuarta parte del valor de las cosas que hubiesen sido objeto de

192

aquéllos. Los celebrados en representación de los ausentes, siempre que éstos hayan sufrido la lesión a que se refiere el número anterior.

Los celebrados en fraude de acreedores, cuando éstos no puedan de otro modo cobrar lo que se les deba.• Los contratos que se refieran a cosas litigiosas, cuando hubiesen sido celebrados por el demandado sin conocimiento y aprobación de las partes litigantes o de la Autoridad judicial competente.

Cualesquiera otros en que especialmente lo determine la Ley.•

Artículo 1292.

Son también rescindibles los pagos hechos en estado de insolvencia por cuenta de obligaciones a cuyo cumplimiento no podría ser compelido el deudor al tiempo de hacerlos.

Artículo 1293.

Ningún contrato se rescindirá por lesión, fuera de los casos mencionados en los números 1) y 2) del artículo 1.291.

Artículo 1294.

La acción de rescisión es subsidiaria; no podrá ejercitarse sino cuando el perjudicado carezca de todo otro recurso legal para obtener la reparación del perjuicio.

Artículo 1295.

La rescisión obliga a la devolución de las cosas que fueron objeto del contrato con sus frutos, y del precio con sus intereses; en consecuencia, sólo podrá llevarse a efecto cuando el que la haya pretendido pueda devolver aquello a que por su parte estuviese obligado.

Tampoco tendrá lugar la rescisión cuando las cosas, objeto del contrato, se hallaren legalmente en poder de terceras personas que no hubiesen procedido de mala fe.

En este caso podrá reclamarse la indemnización de perjuicios al causante de la lesión.

Artículo 1296.

La rescisión de que trata el número 2) del artículo 1.291 no tendrá lugar respecto de los contratos celebrados con autorización judicial.

Artículo 1297.

Se presumen celebrados en fraude de acreedores todos aquellos contratos por virtud de los cuales el deudor enajenare bienes a título gratuito.

También se presumen fraudulentas las enajenaciones a título oneroso, hechas por aquellas personas contra las cuales se hubiese pronunciado antes sentencia condenatoria en cualquier instancia o expedido mandamiento de embargo de bienes.

Artículo 1298.

El que hubiese adquirido de mala fe las cosas enajenadas en fraude de acreedores, deberá indemnizar a éstos de los daños y perjuicios que la enajenación les hubiese ocasionado, siempre que por cualquier causa le fuere

193

imposible devolverlas.

Artículo 1299.

La acción para pedir la rescisión dura cuatro años.

Para las personas sujetas a tutela y para los ausentes, los cuatro años no empezarán hasta que haya cesado la incapacidad de los primeros, o sea conocido el domicilio de los segundos.

CAPÍTULO VI. DE LA NULIDAD DE LOS CONTRATOS

Artículo 1300.

Los contratos en que concurran los requisitos que expresa el artículo 1.261 pueden ser anulados, aunque no haya lesión para los contratantes, siempre que adolezcan de alguno de los vicios que los invalidan con arreglo a la ley.

Artículo 1301.

La acción de nulidad sólo durará cuatro años. Este tiempo empezará a correr:

En los casos de intimidación o violencia, desde el día en que éstas hubieren cesado.

En los de error, o dolo, o falsedad de la causa, desde la consumación del contrato.

Cuando la acción se refiere a los contratos celebrados por los menores o incapacitados, desde que salieren de la tutela.

Si la acción se dirigiese a invalidar actos o contratos realizados por uno de los cónyuges sin consentimiento del otro, cuando este consentimiento fuere necesario, desde el día de la disolución de la sociedad conyugal o del matrimonio salvo que antes hubiese tenido conocimiento suficiente de dicho acto o contrato.

Artículo 1302.

Pueden ejercitar la acción de nulidad de los contratos los obligados principal o subsidiariamente en virtud de ellos. Las personas capaces no podrán, sin embargo, alegar la incapacidad de aquellos con quienes contrataron; ni los que causaron la intimidación o violencia, o emplearon el dolo o produjeron el error, podrán fundar su acción en estos vicios del contrato.

Artículo 1303.

Declarada la nulidad de una obligación, los contratantes deben restituirse recíprocamente las causas que hubiesen sido materia del contrato, con sus frutos, y el precio con los intereses, salvo lo que se dispone en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1304.

Cuando la nulidad proceda de la incapacidad de uno de los contratantes, no está obligado el incapaz a restituir sino en cuanto se enriqueció con la cosa o precio que recibiera.

Artículo 1305.

194

Cuando la nulidad provenga de ser ilícita la causa u objeto del contrato, si el hecho constituye un delito o falta común a ambos contratante, carecerán de toda acción entre sí, y se procederá contra ellos, dándose, además, a las cosas o precio que hubiesen sido materia del contrato, la aplicación prevenida en el Código Penal respecto a los efectos o instrumentos del delito o falta.

Esta disposición es aplicable al caso en que sólo hubiere delito o falta de parte de uno de los contratantes; pero el no culpado podrá reclamar lo que hubiese dado, y no estará obligado a cumplir lo que hubiera prometido.

Artículo 1306.

Si el hecho en que consiste la causa torpe no constituyere delito ni falta, se observarán las reglas siguientes:

Cuando la culpa esté de parte de ambos contratantes, ninguno de ellos podrá repetir lo que hubiera dado a virtud del contrato, ni reclamar el cumplimiento de lo que el otro hubiese ofrecido.

Cuando esté de parte de un solo contratante, no podrá éste repetir lo que hubiese dado a virtud del contrato, ni pedir el cumplimiento de lo que se le hubiera ofrecido. El otro, que fuera extraño a la causa torpe, podrá reclamar lo que hubiera dado, sin obligación de cumplir lo que hubiera ofrecido.

Artículo 1307.

Siempre que el obligado por la declaración de nulidad a la devolución de la cosa no pueda devolverla por haberse perdido, deberá restituir los frutos percibidos y el valor que tenía la cosa cuando se perdió, con los intereses desde la misma fecha.

Artículo 1308.

Mientras uno de los contratantes no realice la devolución de aquello a que en virtud de la declaración de nulidad esté obligado, no puede el otro ser compelido a cumplir por su parte lo que le incumba.

Artículo 1309.

La acción de nulidad queda extinguida desde el momento en que el contrato haya sido confirmado validamente.

Artículo 1310.

Sólo son confirmables los contratos que reúnan los requisitos expresados en el artículo 1.261.

Artículo 1311.

La confirmación puede hacerse expresa o tácitamente. Se entenderá que hay confirmación tácita cuando, con conocimiento de la causa de nulidad, y habiendo ésta cesado, el que tuviese derecho a invocarla ejecutase un acto que implique necesariamente la voluntad de renunciarlo.

Artículo 1312.

La confirmación no necesita el concurso de aquel de los contratantes a quien no correspondiese ejercitar la acción de nulidad.

Artículo 1313.

La confirmación purifica al contrato de los vicios de que adoleciera desde el momento de su celebración.

195

Artículo 1314.

También se extinguirá la acción de nulidad de los contratos cuando la cosa, objeto de éstos, se hubiese perdido por dolo o culpa del que pudiera ejercitar aquélla.

Si la causa de la acción fuere la incapacidad de alguno de los contratantes, la pérdida de la cosa no será obstáculo para que la acción prevalezca, a menos que hubiese ocurrido por dolo o culpa del reclamante después de haber adquirido la capacidad.

TÍTULO III. DEL RÉGIMEN ECONÓMICO MATRIMONIAL

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1315.

El régimen económico del matrimonio será el que los cónyuges estipulen en capitulaciones matrimoniales, sin otras limitaciones que las establecidas en este Código.

Artículo 1316.

A falta de capitulaciones o cuando éstas sean ineficaces, el régimen será el de la sociedad de gananciales.

Artículo 1317.

La modificación del régimen económico matrimonial realizada durante el matrimonio no perjudicará en ningún caso los derechos ya adquiridos por terceros.

Artículo 1318.

Los bienes de los cónyuges están sujetos al levantamiento de las cargas del matrimonio.

Cuando uno de los cónyuges incumpliere su deber de contribuir al levantamiento de estas cargas, el Juez, a instancia del otro, dictará las medidas cautelares que estime conveniente a fin de asegurar su cumplimiento y los anticipos necesarios o proveer a las necesidades futuras.

Cuando un cónyuge carezca de bienes propios suficientes, los gastos necesarios causados en litigios que sostenga contra el otro cónyuge sin mediar mala fe o temeridad, o contra tercero si redundan en provecho de la familia, serán a cargo del caudal común y, faltando éste, se sufragarán a costa de los bienes propios del otro cónyuge cuando la posición económica de éste impida al primero, por imperativo de la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil, la obtención del beneficio de justicia gratuita.

Artículo 1319.

Cualquiera de los cónyuges podrá realizar los actos encaminados a atender las necesidades ordinarias de la familia, encomendadas a su cuidado, conforme al uso del lugar y a las circunstancias de la misma.

De las deudas contraídas en el ejercicio de esta potestad responderán solidariamente los bienes comunes y los del cónyuge que contraiga la deuda y, subsidiariamente, los del otro cónyuge.

El que hubiere aportado caudales propios para satisfacción de tales necesidades tendrá derecho a ser

196

reintegrado de conformidad con su régimen matrimonial.

Artículo 1320.

Para disponer de los derechos sobre la vivienda habitual y los muebles de uso ordinario de la familia, aunque tales derechos pertenezcan a uno sólo de los cónyuges, se requerirá el consentimiento de ambos o, en su caso, autorización judicial.

La manifestación errónea o falsa del disponente sobre el carácter de la vivienda no perjudicará al adquirente de buena fe.

Artículo 1321.

Fallecido uno de los cónyuges, las ropas, el mobiliario y enseres que constituyan el ajuar de la vivienda habitual común de los esposos se entregarán al que sobreviva, sin computárselo en su haber.

No se entenderán comprendidos en el ajuar las alhajas, objetos artísticos, históricos y otros de extraordinario valor.

Artículo 1322.

Cuando la Ley requiera para un acto de administración o disposición que uno de los cónyuges actúe con el consentimiento del otro, los realizados sin él y que no hayan sido expresa o tácitamente confirmados podrán ser anulados a instancia del cónyuge cuyo consentimiento se haya omitido o de sus herederos.

No obstante, serán nulos los actos a título gratuito sobre bienes comunes si falta, en tales casos, el consentimiento del otro cónyuge.

Artículo 1323.

El marido y la mujer podrán transmitirse por cualquier título bienes y derechos y celebrar entre si toda clase de contratos.

Artículo 1324.

Para probar entre cónyuges que determinados bienes son propios de uno de ellos, será bastante la confesión del otro, pero tal confesión por sí sola no perjudicará a los herederos forzosos del confesante, ni a los acreedores, sean de la comunidad o de cada uno de los cónyuges.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS CAPITULACIONES MATRIMONIALES

Artículo 1325.

En capitulaciones matrimoniales podrán los otorgantes estipular, modificar o sustituir el régimen económico de su matrimonio o cualesquiera otras disposiciones por razón del mismo.

Artículo 1326.

Las capitulaciones matrimoniales podrán otorgarse antes o después de celebrado el matrimonio.

Artículo 1327.

197

Para su validez, las capitulaciones habrán de constar en escritura pública.

Artículo 1328.

Será nula cualquier estipulación contraria a las leyes o a las buenas costumbres o limitativa de la igualdad de derechos que corresponda a cada cónyuge.

Artículo 1329.

El menor no emancipado que con arreglo a la Ley pueda casarse podrá otorgar capitulaciones, pero necesitará el concurso y consentimiento de sus padres o tutor, salvo que se limite a pactar el régimen de separación o el de participación.

Artículo 1330.

El incapacitado judicialmente sólo podrá otorgar capitulaciones matrimoniales con la asistencia de sus padres, tutor o curador.

Artículo 1331.

Para que sea válida la modificación de las capitulaciones matrimoniales deberá realizarse con la asistencia y concurso de las personas que en éstas intervinieron como otorgantes si vivieren y la modificación afectare a derechos concedidos por tales personas.

Artículo 1332.

La existencia de pactos modificativos de anteriores capitulaciones se indicará mediante nota en la escritura que contenga la anterior estipulación, y el Notario lo hará constar en las copias que expida.

Artículo 1333.

En toda inscripción de matrimonio en el Registro Civil se hará mención, en su caso, de las capitulaciones matrimoniales que, se hubieren otorgado, así como de los pactos, resoluciones judiciales y demás hechos que modifiquen el régimen económico del matrimonio. Si aquéllas o éstos afectaren a inmuebles, se tomará razón en el Registro de la Propiedad, en la forma y a los efectos previstos en la Ley Hipotecaria.

Artículo 1334.

Todo lo que se estipule en capitulaciones bajo el supuesto de futuro matrimonio quedará sin efecto en el caso de no contraerse en el plazo de un año.

Artículo 1335.

La invalidez de las capitulaciones matrimoniales se regirá por las reglas generales de los contratos. Las consecuencias de la anulación no perjudicarán a terceros de buena fe.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LAS DONACIONES POR RAZÓN DE MATRIMONIO

Artículo 1336.

Son donaciones par razón de matrimonio las que cualquier persona hace, antes de celebrarse, en consideración

198

al mismo y en favor de uno o de los dos esposos.

Artículo 1337.

Esas donaciones se rigen por las reglas ordinarias en cuanto no se modifiquen por los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1338.

El menor no emancipado que con arreglo a la Ley pueda casarse, también puede en capitulaciones matrimoniales o fuera de ellas hacer donaciones por razón de su matrimonio, con la autorización de sus padres o del tutor. Para aceptarlas, se estará a lo dispuesto en el título II del Libro tercero de este Código.

Artículo 1339.

Los bienes donados conjuntamente a los esposos pertenecerán a ambos en pro indiviso ordinario y por partes iguales, salvo que el donante haya dispuesto otra cosa.

Artículo 1340.

El que diere o prometiere por razón de matrimonio sólo estará obligado a saneamiento por evicción o vicios ocultos si hubiere actuado con mala fe.

Artículo 1341.

Por razón de matrimonio los futuros esposos podrán donarse bienes presentes.

Igualmente podrán donarse antes del matrimonio en capitulaciones bienes futuros, sólo para el caso de muerte, Y en la medida marcada por las disposiciones referentes a la sucesión testada.

Artículo 1342.

Quedarán sin efecto las donaciones por razón de matrimonio si no llegara a contraerse en el plazo de un año.

Artículo 1343.

Estas donaciones serán revocables por las causas comunes. excepto la supervivencia o superveniencia de hijos.

En las otorgadas por terceros, se reputará incumplimiento de cargas, además de cualesquiera otras específicas a que pudiera haberse subordinado la donación, la anulación del matrimonio por cualquier causa, la separación y el divorcio si al cónyuge donatario le fueren imputables, según la sentencia, los hechos que los causaron.

En las otorgadas por los contrayentes, se reputará incumplimiento de cargas, además de las especificas, la anulación del matrimonio si el donatario hubiere obrado de mala fe. Se estimará ingratitud, además de los supuestos legales, el que el donatario incurra en causa de desheredación del artículo 855 o le sea imputable según la sentencia. la causa de separación o divorcio.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA SOCIEDAD DE GANANCIALES

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

199

Artículo 1344.

Mediante la sociedad de gananciales se hacen comunes para el marido y la mujer las ganancias o beneficios obtenidos indistintamente por cualquiera de ellos, que le serán atribuidos por mitad al disolverse aquélla.

Artículo 1345.

La sociedad de gananciales empezará en el momento de la celebración del matrimonio o, posteriormente, al tiempo de pactarse en capitulaciones.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS BIENES PRIVATIVOS Y COMUNES

Artículo 1346.

Son privativos de cada uno de los cónyuges:

Los bienes y derechos que le pertenecieran al comenzar la sociedad.• Los que adquiera después por título gratuito.• Los adquiridos a costa o en sustitución de bienes privativos.• Los adquiridos por derecho de retracto perteneciente a uno solo de los cónyuges.• Los bienes y derechos patrimoniales inherentes a la persona y los no transmisibles inter vivos.• El resarcimiento por daños inferidos a la persona de uno de los cónyuges o a sus bienes privativos.• Las ropas y objetos de uso personal que no sean de extraordinario valor.• Los instrumentos necesarios para el ejercicio de la profesión u oficio, salvo cuando éstos sean parte integrante o pertenencias de un establecimiento o explotación de carácter común.

Los bienes mencionados en los apartados 4) y 8) no perderán su carácter de privativos por el hecho de que su adquisición se haya realizado con fondos comunes; pero en este caso, la sociedad será acreedora del cónyuge propietario por el valor satisfecho.

Artículo 1347.

Son bienes gananciales:

Los obtenidos por el trabajo o la industria de cualquiera de los cónyuges.• Los frutos, rentas o intereses que produzcan tanto los bienes privativos como los gananciales.• Los adquiridos a título oneroso a costa del caudal común, bien se haga la adquisición para la comunidad, bien para uno de los esposos.

Los adquiridos por derecho de retracto de carácter ganancial, aun cuando lo fueran con fondos privativos, en cuyo caso la sociedad será deudora del cónyuge por el valor satisfecho.

Las empresas y establecimientos fundados durante la vigencia de la sociedad por uno cualquiera de los cónyuges a expensas de los bienes comunes. Si a la formación de la empresa o establecimiento concurren capital privativo y capital común, se aplicará lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.354.

Artículo 1348.

Siempre que pertenezcan privativamente a uno de los cónyuges una cantidad o crédito pagaderos en cierto número de años, no serán gananciales las sumas que se cubren en los plazos vencidos durante el matrimonio, sino que se estimarán capital del marido o de la mujer, según a quien pertenezca el crédito.

Artículo 1349.

200

El derecho de usufructo o de pensión, perteneciente a uno de los cónyuges, formará parte de sus bienes propios; pero los frutos, pensiones o intereses devengados durante el matrimonio serán gananciales.

Artículo 1350.

Se reputarán gananciales las cabezas de ganado que al disolverse la sociedad excedan del número aportado por cada uno de los cónyuges con carácter privativo.

Artículo 1351.

Las ganancias obtenidas por el marido o la mujer en el juego o las procedentes de otras causas que eximan de la restitución, pertenecerán a la sociedad de gananciales.

Artículo 1352.

Las nuevas acciones u otros títulos o participaciones sociales suscritos como consecuencia de la titularidad de otros privativos serán también privativos. Asimismo lo serán las cantidades obtenidas por la enajenación del derecho a suscribir.

Si para el pago de la suscripción se utilizaren fondos comunes o se emitieran las acciones con cargo a los beneficios, se reembolsará el valor satisfecho.

Artículo 1353.

Los bienes donados o dejados en testamento a los cónyuges conjuntamente y sin especial designación de partes, constante la sociedad, se entenderán gananciales, siempre que la liberalidad fuere aceptada por ambos y el donante o testador no hubiere dispuesto lo contrario.

Artículo 1354.

Los bienes adquiridos mediante precio o contraprestación, en parte ganancial y en parte privativo, corresponderán pro indiviso a la sociedad de gananciales y al cónyuge o cónyuges en proporción al valor de las aportaciones respectivas.

Artículo 1355.

Podrán los cónyuges, de común acuerdo, atribuir la condición de gananciales a los bienes que adquieran a título oneroso durante el matrimonio, cualquiera que sea la procedencia del precio o contraprestación y la forma y plazo en que se satisfaga.

Si la adquisición se hiciere en forma conjunta y sin atribución de cuotas, se presumirá su voluntad favorable al carácter ganancial de tales bienes.

Artículo 1356.

Los bienes adquiridos por uno de los cónyuges, constante la sociedad, por precio aplazado, tendrán naturaleza ganancial si el primer desembolso tuviera tal carácter, aunque los plazos restantes se satisfagan con dinero privativo. Si el primer desembolso tuviera carácter privativo, el bien será de esta naturaleza.

Artículo 1357.

Los bienes comprados a plazos por uno de los cónyuges antes de comenzar la sociedad tendrán siempre

201

carácter privativo, aun cuando la totalidad o parte del precio aplazado se satisfaga con dinero ganancial. Se exceptúan la vivienda y ajuar familiares respecto de los cuales se aplicará el artículo 1.354.

Artículo 1358.

Cuando conforme a este Código los bienes sean privativos o gananciales, con independencia de la procedencia del caudal con que la adquisición se realice, habrá de reembolsarse el valor satisfecho a costa, respectivamente, del caudal común o del propio, mediante el reintegro de su importe actualizado al tiempo de la liquidación.

Artículo 1359.

Las edificaciones, plantaciones y cualesquiera otras mejoras que se realicen en los bienes gananciales y en los privativos tendrán el carácter correspondiente a los bienes a que afecten, sin perjuicio del reembolso del valor satisfecho. No obstante, si la mejora hecha en bienes privativos fuese debida a la inversión de fondos comunes o a la actividad de cualquiera de los cónyuges, la sociedad será acreedora del aumento del valor que los bienes tengan como consecuencia de la mejora, al tiempo de la disolución de la sociedad o de la enajenación del bien mejorado.

Artículo 1360.

Las mismas reglas del artículo anterior se aplicarán a los incrementos patrimoniales incorporados a una explotación, establecimiento mercantil u otro género de empresa.

Artículo 1361.

Se presumen gananciales los bienes existentes en el matrimonio mientras no se pruebe que pertenecen privativa mente al marido o a la mujer.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LAS CARGAS Y OBLIGACIONES DE LA SOCIEDAD DE GANANCIALES

Artículo 1362.

Serán de cargo de la sociedad de gananciales los gastos que se originen por alguna de las siguientes causas:

El sostenimiento de la familia, la alimentación y educación de los hijos comunes y las atenciones de previsión acomodadas a los usos y circunstancias de la familia.

La alimentación y educación de los hijos de uno sólo de los cónyuges correrá a cargo de la sociedad de gananciales cuando convivan en el hogar familiar. En caso contrario, los gastos derivados de estos conceptos serán sufragados por la sociedad de gananciales pero darán lugar a reintegro en el momento de la liquidación.

La adquisición, tenencia y disfrute de los bienes comunes.• La administración ordinaria de los bienes privativos de cualquiera de los cónyuges.• La explotación regular de los negocios o el desempeño de la profesión, arte u oficio de cada cónyuge.•

Artículo 1363.

Serán también de cargo de la sociedad las cantidades donadas o prometidas por ambos cónyuges de común acuerdo, cuando no hubiesen pactado que hayan de satisfacerse con los bienes privativos de uno de ellos en todo o en parte.

202

Artículo 1364.

El cónyuge que hubiere aportado bienes privativos para los gastos o pagos que sean de cargo de la sociedad tendrá derecho a ser reintegrado del valor a costa del patrimonio común.

Artículo 1365.

Los bienes gananciales responderán directamente frente al acreedor de las deudas contraídas por un cónyuge:

En el ejercicio de la potestad doméstica o de la gestión o disposición de gananciales, que por ley o por capítulos le corresponda.

En el ejercicio ordinario de la profesión, arte u oficio o en la administración de los bienes propios.•

Si el marido o la mujer fueran comerciantes, se estará a lo dispuesto en el Código de Comercio.

Artículo 1366.

Las obligaciones extracontractuales de un cónyuge, consecuencia de su actuación en beneficio de la sociedad conyugal o en el ámbito de la administración de los bienes, serán de la responsabilidad y cargo de aquélla, salvo si fuesen debidas a dolo o culpa grave del cónyuge deudor.

Artículo 1367.

Los bienes gananciales responderán en todo caso de las obligaciones contraídas por los dos cónyuges conjuntamente o por uno de ellos con el consentimiento expreso del otro.

Artículo 1368.

También responderán los bienes gananciales de las obligaciones contraídas por uno solo de los cónyuges en caso de separación de hecho para atender a los gastos de sostenimiento, previsión y educación de los hijos que estén a cargo de la sociedad de gananciales.

Artículo 1369.

De las deudas de un cónyuge que sean, además, deudas de la sociedad responderán también solidariamente los bienes de ésta.

Artículo 1370.

Por el precio aplazado del bien ganancial adquirido por un cónyuge sin el consentimiento del otro responderá siempre el bien adquirido, sin perjuicio de la responsabilidad de otros bienes según las reglas de este Código.

Artículo 1371.

Lo perdido y pagado durante el matrimonio por alguno de los cónyuges en cualquier clase de juego no disminuirá su parte respectiva de los gananciales siempre que el importe de aquella pérdida pudiere considerarse moderada con arreglo al uso y circunstancias de la familia.

Artículo 1372.

De lo perdido y no pagado por alguno de los cónyuges con los juegos en que la Ley concede acción para reclamar lo que se gane responden exclusivamente los bienes privativos del deudor.

203

Artículo 1373.

Cada cónyuge responde con su patrimonio personal de las deudas propias y, si sus bienes privativos no fueran suficientes para hacerlas efectivas, el acreedor podrá pedir el embargo de bienes gananciales, que será inmediatamente notificado al otro cónyuge, y éste podrá exigir que en la traba se sustituyan los bienes comunes por la parte que ostenta el cónyuge deudor en la sociedad conyugal, en cuyo caso el embargo llevará consigo la disolución de aquélla.

Si se realizase la ejecución sobre bienes comunes, se reputará que el cónyuge deudor tiene recibido a cuenta de su participación el valor de aquéllos al tiempo en que los abone con otros caudales propios o al tiempo de liquidación de la sociedad conyugal.

Artículo 1374.

Tras la disolución a que se refiere el artículo anterior se aplicará el régimen de separación de bienes, salvo que, con el plazo de tres meses, el cónyuge del deudor opte en documento público por el comienzo de una nueva sociedad de gananciales.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LA ADMINISTRACIÓN DE LA SOCIEDAD DE GANANCIALES

Artículo 1375.

En defecto de pacto en capitulaciones, la gestión y disposiciones de los bienes gananciales corresponde conjuntamente a los cónyuges, sin perjuicio de lo que se determina en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1376.

Cuando en la realización de actos de administración fuere necesario el consentimiento de ambos cónyuges y uno se hallare impedido para prestarlo, o se negare injustificadamente a ello, podrá el Juez suplirlo si encontrare fundada la petición.

Artículo 1377.

Para realizar actos de disposición a título oneroso sobre bienes gananciales se requerirá el consentimiento de ambos cónyuges. Si uno lo negare o estuviere impedido para prestarlo, podrá el Juez, previa información sumaria, autorizar uno o varios actos dispositivos cuando los considere de interés para la familia. Excepcionalmente acordará las limitaciones o cautelas que estime convenientes.

Artículo 1378.

Serán nulos los actos a título gratuito si no concurre el consentimiento de ambos cónyuges. Sin embargo, podrá cada uno de ellos realizar con los bienes gananciales liberalidades de uso.

Artículo 1379.

Cada uno de los cónyuges podrá disponer por testamento de la mitad de los bienes gananciales.

Artículo 1380.

La disposición testamentaria de un bien ganancial producirá todos sus efectos si fuere adjudicado a la herencia del testador. En caso contrarío se entenderá legado el valor que tuviera al tiempo del fallecimiento.

204

Artículo 1381.

Los frutos y ganancias de los patrimonios privativos y las ganancias de cualquiera de los cónyuges forman parte del haber de la sociedad y están sujetos a las cargas y responsabilidades de la sociedad de gananciales. Sin embargo, cada cónyuge, como administrador de su patrimonio privativo, podrá, a este solo efecto, disponer de los frutos y productos de sus bienes.

Artículo 1382.

Cada cónyuge podrá, sin el consentimiento del otro, pero siempre con su conocimiento, tomar como anticipo el numerario ganancial que le sea necesario, de acuerdo con los usos y circunstancias de la familia, para el ejercicio de su profesión o la administración ordinaria de sus bienes.

Artículo 1383.

Deben los cónyuges informarse recíproca y periódicamente sobre la situación y rendimientos de cualquier actividad económica suya.

Artículo 1384.

Serán válidos los actos de administración de bienes y los de disposición de dinero o títulos valores realiza dos por el cónyuge a cuyo nombre figuren o en cuyo poder se encuentren.

Artículo 1385.

Los derechos de crédito, cualquiera que sea su naturaleza, serán ejercidos por aquel de los cónyuges a cuyo nombre aparezcan constituidos.

Cualquiera de los cónyuges podrá ejercitar la defensa de los bienes y derechos comunes por vía de acción o de excepción.

Artículo 1386.

Para realizar gastos urgentes de carácter necesario, aun cuando sean extraordinarios, bastará el consentimiento de uno solo de los cónyuges.

Artículo 1387.

La administración y disposición de los bienes de la sociedad de gananciales se transferirá por ministerio de la ley al cónyuge que sea tutor o representante legal de su consorte.

Artículo 1388.

Los Tribunales podrán conferir la administración a uno solo de los cónyuges cuando el otro se encontrare en imposibilidad de prestar consentimiento o hubiere abandonado la familia o existiere separación de hecho.

Artículo 1389.

El cónyuge en quien recaiga la administración en virtud de lo dispuesto en los dos artículos anteriores tendrá para ello plenas facultades, salvo que el Juez, cuando lo considere de interés para la familia, y previa información sumaria establezca cautelas o limitaciones. En todo caso, para realizar actos de disposición sobre inmuebles, establecimientos mercantiles, objetos preciosos o valores mobiliarios, salvo el derecho de

205

suscripción preferente, necesitará autorización judicial.

Artículo 1390.

Si como consecuencia de un acto de administración o de disposición llevado a cabo por uno solo de los cónyuges hubiere éste obtenido un beneficio o lucro exclusivo para él y ocasionado dolosamente un daño a la sociedad, será deudor a la misma por su importe, aunque el otro cónyuge no impugne cuando proceda la eficacia del acto.

Artículo 1391.

Cuando el cónyuge hubiere realizado un acto en fraude de los derechos de su consorte, será, en todo caso, de aplicación lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior y, además, si el adquirente hubiere procedido de mala fe, el acto será rescindible.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DE LA DISOLUCIÓN Y LIQUIDACIÓN DE LA SOCIEDAD DE GANANCIALES

Artículo 1392.

La sociedad de gananciales concluirá de pleno derecho:

Cuando se disuelva el matrimonio.• Cuando sea declarado nulo.• Cuando judicialmente se decrete la separación de los cónyuges.• Cuando los cónyuges convengan un régimen económico distinto en la forma prevenida en este Código.•

Artículo 1393.

También concluirá por decisión judicial la sociedad de gananciales, a petición de uno de los cónyuges, en alguno de los casos siguientes

Haber sido el otro cónyuge judicialmente incapacitado, declarado pródigo, ausente o en quiebra o concurso de acreedores, o condenado por abandono de familia.

Para que el Juez acuerde la disolución bastará que el cónyuge que la pidiere presente la correspondiente resolución judicial.

Venir el otro cónyuge realizando por sí solo actos dispositivos o de gestión patrimonial que entrañen fraude, daño o peligro para los derechos del otro en la sociedad.

Llevar separado de hecho más de un año por acuerdo mutuo o por abandono del hogar.• Incumplir grave y reiteradamente el deber de informar sobre la marcha y rendimientos de sus actividades económicas.

En cuanto a la disolución de la sociedad por el embargo de la parte de uno de los cónyuges por deudas propias, se estará a lo especialmente dispuesto en este Código.

Artículo 1394.

Los efectos de la disolución prevista en el artículo anterior se producirán desde la fecha en que se acuerde. De seguirse pleito sobre la concurrencia de la causa de disolución, iniciada la tramitación del mismo, se practicará el inventario, y el Juez aplicará las medidas necesarias para la administración del caudal, requiriéndose

206

licencia judicial para todos los actos que excedan de la administración.

Artículo 1395.

Cuanto la sociedad de gananciales se disuelva por nulidad del matrimonio y uno de los cónyuges hubiera sido declarado de mala fe, podrá optar el otro por la liquidación del régimen matrimonial según las normas de esta Sección o por las disposiciones relativas al régimen de participación, y el contrayente de mala fe no tendrá derecho a participar en las ganancias obtenidas por su consorte.

Artículo 1396.

Disuelta la sociedad se procederá a su liquidación, que comenzará por un inventario del activo y pasivo de la sociedad.

Artículo 1397.

Habrán de comprenderse en el activo:

Los bienes gananciales existentes en el momento de la disolución.• El importe actualizado del valor que tenían los bienes al ser enajenados por negocio ilegal o fraudulento si no hubieran sido recuperados.

El importe actualizado de las cantidades pagadas por la sociedad que fueran de cargo sólo de un cónyuge y en general las que constituyen créditos de la sociedad contra éste.

Artículo 1398.

El pasivo de la sociedad será integrado por las siguientes partidas:

Las deudas pendientes a cargo de la sociedad.• El importe actualizado del valor de los bienes privativos cuando su restitución deba hacerse en metálico por haber sido gastados en interés de la sociedad.

Igual regla se aplicará a los deterioros producidos en dichos bienes por su uso en beneficio de la sociedad.

El importe actualizado de las cantidades que, habiendo sido pagadas por uno solo de los cónyuges, fueran de cargo de la sociedad y, en general, las que constituyan créditos de los cónyuges contra la sociedad.

Artículo 1399.

Terminado el inventario se pagarán en primer lugar las deudas de la sociedad, comenzando por las alimenticias que, en cualquier caso, tendrán preferencia.

Respecto de las demás, si el caudal inventariado no alcanzase para ello, se observará lo dispuesto para la concurrencia y prelación de réditos.

Artículo 1400.

Cuando no hubiere metálico suficiente para el pago de las deudas podrán ofrecerse con tal fin adjudicaciones de bienes gananciales, pero si cualquier participe o acreedor lo pide se procederá a manejarlos y pagar con su importe.

Artículo 1401.

207

Mientras no se hayan pagado por entero las deudas de la sociedad, los acreedores conservarán sus créditos contra el cónyuge deudor. El cónyuge no deudor responderá con los bienes que le hayan sido adjudicados, si se hubiere formulado debidamente inventario judicial o extrajudicial.

Si como consecuencia de ello resultare haber pagado uno de los cónyuges mayor cantidad de la que le fuere imputable, podrá repetir contra el otro.

Artículo 1402.

Los acreedores de la sociedad de gananciales tendrán en su liquidación los mismos derechos que le reconocen las Leyes en la participación y liquidación de las herencias.

Artículo 1403.

Pagadas las deudas y cargas de la sociedad, se abonarán as indemnizaciones y reintegros debidos a cada cónyuge hasta donde alcance el caudal inventariado, haciendo las compensaciones que correspondan cuando el cónyuge sea deudor de la sociedad.

Artículo 1404.

Hechas las deducciones en el caudal inventariado que prefijan los artículos anteriores, el remanente constituirá el haber de la sociedad de gananciales, que se dividirá por mitad entre marido y mujer o sus respectivos herederos.

Artículo 1405.

Si uno de los cónyuges resultare en el momento de la liquidación acreedor personal del otro, podrá exigir que se le satisfaga su crédito adjudicándole bienes comunes, salvo que el deudor pague voluntariamente.

Artículo 1406.

Cada cónyuge tendrá derecho a que se incluyan con preferencia en su haber, hasta donde éste alcance:

Los bienes de uso personal no incluidos en el número 7 del artículo 1.346.• La explotación agrícola, comercial o industrial que hubiera llevado con su trabajo.• El local donde hubiese venido ejerciendo su profesión.• En caso de muerte del otro cónyuge, la vivienda donde tuviese su residencia habitual.•

Artículo 1407.

En los casos de los números 3 y 4 del artículo anterior podrá el cónyuge pedir, a su elección, que se le atribuyan los bienes en propiedad o que se constituya sobre ellos a su favor un derecho de uso o habitación. Si el valor de los bienes o el derecho superara al del haber del cónyuge adjudicatario, deberá éste abonar la diferencia en dinero.

Artículo 1408.

De la masa común de bienes se darán alimentos a los cónyuges o, en su caso, al sobreviviente y a los hijos mientras se haga la liquidación del caudal inventariado y hasta que se les entregue su haber; pero se les rebajarán de éste en la parte que excedan de los que les hubiese correspondido en razón de frutos y rentas.

Artículo 1409.

208

Siempre que haya de ejecutarse simultáneamente la liquidación de gananciales de dos o más matrimonios contraídos por una misma persona para determinar el capital de cada sociedad se admitirá toda clase de pruebas en defecto de inventarios. En caso de duda se atribuirán los gananciales a las diferentes sociedades proporcionalmente, atendiendo al tiempo de su duración y a los bienes e ingresos de los respectivos cónyuges.

Artículo 1410.

En todo lo no previsto en este capítulo sobre formación de inventario, reglas sobre tasación y venta de bienes, división del caudal, adjudicaciones a los partícipes y demás que no se halle expresamente determinado, se observará lo establecido para la participación y liquidación de la herencia.

CAPÍTULO V. DEL RÉGIMEN DE PARTICIPACIÓN

Artículo 1411.

En el régimen de participación cada uno de los cónyuges adquiere derecho a participar en las ganancias obtenidas por su consorte durante el tiempo en que dicho régimen haya estado vigente.

Artículo 1412.

A cada cónyuge le corresponde la administración, el disfrute y la libre disposición tanto de los bienes que le pertenecían en el momento de contraer matrimonio como de los que pueda adquirir después por cualquier título.

Artículo 1413.

En todo lo no previsto en este capítulo se aplicarán, durante la vigencia del régimen de participación, las normas relativas al de separación de bienes.

Artículo 1414.

Si los casados en régimen de participación adquirieran conjuntamente algún bien o derecho, les pertenece en pro indiviso ordinario.

Artículo 1415.

El régimen de participación se extingue en los casos prevenidos para la sociedad de gananciales, aplicándose lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.394 y 1.395.

Artículo 1416.

Podrá pedir un cónyuge la terminación del régimen de participación cuando la irregular administración del otro comprometa gravemente sus intereses.

Artículo 1417.

Producida la extinción se determinarán las ganancias por las diferencias entre los patrimonios inicial y final de cada cónyuge.

Artículo 1418.

209

Se estimará constituido el patrimonio inicial de cada cónyuge:

Por los bienes y derechos que le pertenecieran al empezar el régimen.• Por los adquiridos después a título de herencia, donación o legado.•

Artículo 1419.

Se deducirán las obligaciones del cónyuge al empezar el régimen y, en su caso, las sucesorias o las cargas inherentes a la donación o legado, en cuanto no excedan de los bienes heredados o donados.

Artículo 1420.

Si el pasivo fuese superior al activo no habrá patrimonio inicial.

Artículo 1421.

Los bienes constitutivos del patrimonio inicial se estimarán según el estado y valor que tuvieran al empezar el régimen o, en su caso, al tiempo en que fueron adquiridos.

El importe de la estimación deberá actualizarse el día en que el régimen haya cesado.

Artículo 1422.

El patrimonio final de cada cónyuge estará formado por los bienes y derechos de que sea titular en el momento de la terminación del régimen, con deducción de las obligaciones todavía no satisfechas.

Artículo 1423.

Se incluirá en el patrimonio final el valor de los bienes de que uno de los cónyuges hubiese dispuesto a título gratuito sin el consentimiento de su consorte, salvo si se tratase de liberalidades de uso.

Artículo 1424.

La misma regla se aplicará respecto de los actos realizados por uno de los cónyuges en fraude de los derechos del otro.

Artículo 1425.

Los bienes constitutivos del patrimonio final se estimarán según el estado y valor que tuvieren en el momento de la terminación del régimen, y los enajenados gratuita o fraudulentamente, conforme al estado que tenían el día de la enajenación y por el valor que hubieran tenido si se hubiesen conservado hasta el día de la terminación.

Artículo 1426.

Los créditos que uno de los cónyuges tenga frente al otro, por cualquier título, incluso por haber atendido o cumplido obligaciones de aquél, se computarán también en el patrimonio final del cónyuge acreedor y se deducirán del patrimonio del cónyuge deudor.

Artículo 1427.

Cuando la diferencia entre los patrimonios final e inicial de uno y otro cónyuge arroje resultado positivo, el

210

cónyuge cuyo patrimonio haya experimentado menor incremento percibirá la mitad de la diferencia entre su propio incremento y el del otro cónyuge.

Artículo 1428.

Cuando únicamente uno de los patrimonios arroje resultado positivo, el derecho de la participación consistirá, para el cónyuge no titular de dicho patrimonio, en la mitad de aquel incremento.

Artículo 1429.

Al constituirse el régimen podrá pactarse una participación distinta de la que establecen los dos artículos anteriores, pero deberá regir por igual y en la misma proporción respecto de ambos patrimonios y en favor de ambos cónyuges.

Artículo 1430.

No podrá convenirse una participación que no sea por mitad sí existen descendientes no comunes.

Artículo 1431.

El crédito de participación deberá ser satisfecho en dinero. Si mediaren dificultades graves para el pago inmediato, el Juez podrá conceder aplazamiento, siempre que no exceda de tres años y que la deuda y sus intereses legales queden suficientemente garantizados.

Artículo 1432.

El crédito de participación podrá pagarse mediante la adjudicación de bienes concretos, por acuerdo de los interesados o si lo concediese el Juez a petición fundada del deudor.

Artículo 1433.

Si no hubiese bienes en el patrimonio deudor para hacer efectivo el derecho de participación en ganancias, el cónyuge acreedor podrá impugnar las enajenaciones que hubieren sido hechas a título gratuito sin su consentimiento y aquellas que hubieren sido realizadas en fraude de sus derechos.

Artículo 1434.

Las acciones de impugnación a que se refiere el artículo anterior caducarán a los dos años de extinguido el régimen de participación y no se darán contra los adquirentes a título oneroso y de buena fe.

CAPÍTULO VI. DEL RÉGIMEN DE SEPARACIÓN DE BIENES

Artículo 1435.

Existirá entre los cónyuges separación de bienes:

Cuando así lo hubiesen convenido.• Cuando los cónyuges hubieren pactado en capitulaciones matrimoniales que no regirá entre ellos la sociedad de ganancia les, sin expresar las reglas por que hayan de regirse sus bienes.

Cuando se extinga, constante matrimonio, la sociedad de gananciales o el régimen de participación, salvo que por voluntad de los interesados fuesen sustituidos por otro régimen distinto.

211

Artículo 1436.

La demanda de separación de bienes y la sentencia firme en que se declare se deberán anotar e inscribir, respectivamente en el Registro de la Propiedad que corresponda, si recayere sobre bienes inmuebles. La sentencia firme se anotará también en el Registro.

Artículo 1437.

En el régimen de separación pertenecerán a cada cónyuge los bienes que tuviese en el momento inicial del mismo y los que después adquiera por cualquier título. Asimismo corresponderá a cada uno la administración, goce y disfrute.

Artículo 1438.

Los cónyuges contribuirán al sostenimiento de las cargas del matrimonio. A falta de convenio lo harán proporcionalmente a sus respectivos recursos económicos. El trabajo para la casa será computado como contribución a las cargas y dará derecho a obtener una compensación que el Juez señalará, a falta de acuerdo, a la extinción del régimen de separación.

Artículo 1439.

Si uno de los cónyuges hubiese administrado o gestionado bienes o intereses del otro, tendrá las mismas obligaciones y responsabilidades que un mandatario, pero no tendrá obligación de rendir cuentas de los frutos percibidos y consumidos, salvo cuando se demuestre que los invirtió en atenciones distintas del levantamiento de las cargas del matrimonio.

Artículo 1440.

Las obligaciones contraídas por cada cónyuge serán de su exclusiva responsabilidad.

En cuanto a las obligaciones contraídas en el ejercicio de la potestad doméstica ordinaria responderán ambos cónyuges en la forma determinada por los artículos 1.319 y 1.438 de este Código.

Artículo 1441.

Cuando no sea posible acreditar a cuál de los cónyuges pertenece algún bien o derecho, corresponderá a ambos por mitad.

Artículo 1442.

Declarado un cónyuge en quiebra o concurso, se presumirá, salvo prueba en contrario, en beneficio de los acreedores, que fueron en su mitad donados por él los bienes adquiridos a título oneroso por el otro durante el año anterior a la declaración o en el período a que alcance la retroacción de la quiebra. Esta presunción no regirá si los cónyuges están separados judicialmente o de hecho.

Artículo 1443.

La separación de bienes decretada no se alterará por la reconciliación de los cónyuges en caso de separación personal o por la desaparición de cualquiera de las demás causas que la hubiesen motivado.

Artículo 1444.

212

No obstante lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior, los cónyuges pueden acordar en capitulaciones que vuelvan a regir las mismas reglas que antes de la separación de bienes.

Harán constar en las capitulaciones los bienes que cada uno aporte de nuevo y se considerarán privativos, aunque, en todo en parte, hubieran tenido carácter ganancial antes de la liquidación practicada por causa de la separación.

TÍTULO IV. DEL CONTRATO DE COMPRA Y VENTA

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA NATURALEZA Y FORMA DE ESTE CONTRATO

Artículo 1445.

Por el contrato de compra y venta uno de los contratantes se obliga a entregar una cosa determinada y el otro a pagar por ella un precio cierto, en dinero o signo que lo represente.

Artículo 1446.

Si el precio de la venta consistiera parte en dinero y parte en otra cosa, se calificará el contrato por la intención manifiesta de los contratantes. No constando ésta, se tendrá por permuta, si el valor de la cosa dada en parte del precio excede al del dinero o su equivalente; y por venta en el caso contrario.

Artículo 1447.

Para que el precio se tenga por cierto bastará que lo sea con referencia a otra cosa cierta, o que se deje su señalamiento al arbitrio de persona determinada.

Si ésta no pudiere o no quisiere señalarlo, quedará ineficaz el contrato.

Artículo 1448.

También se tendrá por cierto el precio en la venta de valores, granos, líquidos y demás cosas fungibles, cuando se señale el que la cosa vendida tuviera en determinado día, Bolsa o mercado, o se fije un tanto mayor o menor que el precio del día, Bolsa o mercado, con tal que sea cierto.

Artículo 1449.

El señalamiento del precio no podrá nunca dejarse al arbitrio de uno de los contratantes.

Artículo 1450.

La venta se perfeccionará entre comprador y vendedor, y será obligatoria para ambos, si hubieren convenido en la cosa objeto del contrato y en el precio, aunque ni la una ni el otro se hayan entregado.

Artículo 1451.

La promesa de vender o comprar, habiendo conformidad en la cosa y en el precio, dará derecho a los contratantes para reclamar recíprocamente el cumplimiento del contrato.

Siempre que no pueda cumplirse la promesa de compra y venta, regirá para vendedor y comprador, según los

213

casos, lo dispuesto acerca de las obligaciones y contratos en el presente libro.

Artículo 1452.

El daño o provecho de la cosa vendida, después de perfeccionado el contrato, se regulará por lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.096 y 1.182.

Esta regla se aplicará a la venta de cosas fungibles hecha aisladamente y por un solo precio, o sin consideración a su peso, número o medida.

Si las cosas fungibles se vendieren por un precio fijado con relación al peso, número o medida, no se imputará el riesgo al comprador hasta que se hayan pesado, contado o medido, a no ser que éste se haya constituido en mora.

Artículo 1453.

La venta hecha a calidad de ensayo o prueba de la cosa vendida, y la venta de las cosas que es costumbre gustar o probar antes de recibirlas, se presumirán hechas siempre bajo condición suspensiva.

Artículo 1454.

Si hubiesen mediado arras o señal en el contrato de compra y venta, podrá rescindirse el contrato allanándose el comprador a perderlas, o el vendedor a devolverlas duplicadas.

Artículo 1455.

Los gastos de otorgamiento de escrituras serán de cuenta del vendedor, y los de la primera copia y los demás posteriores a la venta serán de cuenta del comprador, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 1456.

La enajenación forzosa por causa de utilidad pública se regirá por lo que establezcan las leyes especiales.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA CAPACIDAD PARA COMPRAR O VENDER

Artículo 1457.

Podrán celebrar el contrato de compra y venta todas las personas a quienes este Código autoriza para obligarse, salvo las modificaciones contenidas en los artículos siguientes.

Artículo 1458.

El marido y la mujer podrán venderse bienes recíprocamente.

Artículo 1459.

No podrán adquirir por compra, aunque sea en subasta pública o judicial, por sí ni por persona alguna intermedia:

Los que desempeñen algún cargo tutelar, los bienes de la persona o personas que estén bajo su guarda o protección.

214

Los mandatarios, los bienes de cuya administración o enajenación estuviesen encargados.• Los albaceas, los bienes confiados a su cargo.• Los empleados públicos, los bienes del Estado, de los Municipios, de los pueblos y de los establecimientos también públicos, de cuya administración estuviesen encargados.

Esta disposición regirá para los Jueces y peritos que de cualquier modo intervinieren en la venta.

Los Magistrados, Jueces, individuos del Ministerio fiscal, Secretarios de Tribunales y Juzgados y Oficiales de justicia, los bienes y derechos que estuviesen en litigio ante el Tribunal, en cuya jurisdicción o territorio ejercieran sus respectivas funciones, extendiéndose esta prohibición al acto de adquirir por cesión.

Se exceptuará de esta regla el caso en que se trate de acciones hereditarias entre coherederos, o de cesión en pago de créditos, o de garantía de los bienes que posean.

La prohibición contenida en este número 5) comprenderá a los Abogados y Procuradores respecto a los bienes y derechos que fueren objeto de un litigio en que intervengan por su profesión y oficio.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS EFECTOS DEL CONTRATO DE COMPRA Y VENTA CUANDO SE HA PERDIDO LA COSA VENDIDA

Artículo 1460.

Si al tiempo de celebrarse la venta se hubiese perdido en su totalidad la cosa objeto de la misma, quedará sin efecto el contrato. Pero si se hubiese perdido sólo en parte, el comprador podrá optar entre desistir del contrato o reclamar la parte existente, abonando su precio en proporción al total convenido.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL VENDEDOR

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIÓN GENERAL

Artículo 1461.

El vendedor está obligado a la entrega y saneamiento de la cosa objeto de la venta.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LA ENTREGA DE LA COSA VENDIDA

Artículo 1462.

Se entenderá entregada la cosa vendida cuando se ponga en poder y posesión del comprador.

Cuando se haga la venta mediante escritura pública, el otorgamiento de ésta equivaldrá a la entrega de la cosa objeto del contrato, si de la misma escritura no resultare o se dedujere claramente lo contrario.

Artículo 1463.

Fuera de los casos que expresa el artículo precedente, la entrega de los bienes muebles se efectuará: por la entrega de las llaves del lugar o sitio donde se hallan almacenados o guardados; y por el solo acuerdo o conformidad de los contratantes, si la cosa vendida no puede trasladarse a poder del comprador en el instante de la venta, o si éste la tenía ya en su poder por algún otro motivo.

215

Artículo 1464.

Respecto de los bienes incorporales, regirá lo dispuesto en el párrafo segundo del artículo 1.462. En cualquier otro caso en que éste no tenga aplicación se entenderá por entrega el hecho de poner en poder del comprador los títulos de pertenencia, o el uso que haga de su derecho el mismo comprador, consintiéndole el vendedor.

Artículo 1465.

Los gastos para la entrega de la cosa vendida serán de cuenta del vendedor, y los de su transporte o traslación de cargo del comprador, salvo el caso de estipulación especial.

Artículo 1466.

El vendedor no estará obligado a entregar la cosa vendida si el comprador no le ha pagado el precio o no se ha señalado en el contrato un plazo para el pago.

Artículo 1467.

Tampoco tendrá obligación el vendedor de entregar la cosa vendida cuando se haya convenido en un aplaza miento o término para el pago, si después de la venta se descubre que el comprador es insolvente, de tal suerte que el vendedor corre inminente riesgo de perder el precio. Se exceptúa de esta regla el caso en que el comprador afiance pagar en el plazo convenido.

Artículo 1468.

El vendedor deberá entregar la cosa vendida en el estado en que se hallaba al perfeccionarse el contrato.

Todos los frutos pertenecerán al comprador desde el día en que se perfeccionó el contrato.

Artículo 1469.

La obligación de entregar la cosa vendida comprende la de poner en poder del comprador todo lo que exprese el contrato, mediante las reglas siguientes:

Si la venta de bienes inmuebles se hubiese hecho con expresión de su cabida, a razón de un precio por unidad de medida o número, tendrá obligación el vendedor de entregar al comprador, si éste lo exige, todo cuanto se haya expresado en el contrato; pero si esto no fuere posible, podrá el comprador optar entre una rebaja proporcional del precio o la rescisión del contrato, siempre que, en este último caso, no baje de la décima parte de la cabida la disminución de la que se le atribuyera al inmueble.

Lo mismo se hará, aunque resulte igual cabida, si alguna parte de ella no es de la calidad expresada en el contrato.

La rescisión, en este caso, sólo tendrá lugar a voluntad del comprador, cuando el menos valor de la cosa vendida exceda de la décima parte del precio convenido.

Artículo 1470.

Si, en el caso del artículo precedente, resultare mayor cabida o número en el inmueble que los expresados en el contrato, el comprador tendrá la obligación de pagar el exceso de precio si la mayor cabida o número no pasa de la vigésima parte de los señalados en el mismo contrato; pero si excedieren de dicha vigésima parte, el comprador podrá optar entre satisfacer el mayor valor del inmueble, o desistir del contrato.

216

Artículo 1471.

En la venta de un inmueble, hecha por precio alzado y no a razón de un tanto por unidad de medida o número, no tendrá lugar el aumento o disminución del mismo, aunque resulte mayor o menor cabida o número de los expresados en el contrato.

Esto mismo tendrá lugar cuando sean dos o más fincas las vendidas por un solo precio, pero si, además de expresarse los linderos, indispensables en toda enajenación de inmuebles, se designaren en el contrato su cabida o número, el vendedor estará obligado a entregar todo lo que se comprenda dentro de los mismos linderos, aun cuando exceda de la cabida o número expresados en el contrato; y, si no pudiere, sufrirá una disminución en el precio, proporcional a lo que falte de cabida o número, a no ser que el contrato quede anulado por no conformarse el comprador con que se deje de entregar lo que se estipuló.

Artículo 1472.

Las acciones que nacen de los tres artículos anteriores prescribirán a los seis meses, contados desde el día de la entrada.

Artículo 1473.

Si una misma cosa se hubiese vendido a diferentes compradores, la propiedad se transferirá a la persona que primero haya tomado posesión de ella con buena fe, si fuere mueble.

Si fuere inmueble, la propiedad pertenecerá al adquirente que antes la haya inscrito en el Registro.

Cuando no haya inscripción, pertenecerá la propiedad a quien de buena fe sea primero en la posesión; y, faltando ésta, a quien presente título de fecha más antigua, siempre que haya buena fe.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DEL SANEAMIENTO

Artículo 1474.

En virtud del saneamiento a que se refiere el artículo 1.461, el vendedor responderá al comprador:

De la posesión legal y pacifica de la cosa vendida.• De los vicios o defectos ocultos que tuviere.•

Del saneamiento en caso de evicción

Artículo 1475.

Tendrá lugar la evicción cuando se prive al comprador, por sentencia firme y en virtud de un derecho anterior a la compra, de todo o parte de la cosa comprada.

El vendedor responderá de la evicción aunque nada se haya expresado en el contrato.

Los contratantes, sin embargo, podrán aumentar, disminuir o suprimir esta obligación legal del vendedor.

Artículo 1476.

Será nulo todo pacto que exima al vendedor de responder de la evicción, siempre que hubiere mala fe de su parte.

217

Artículo 1477.

Cuando el comprador hubiese renunciado el derecho al saneamiento para el caso de evicción, llegado que sea éste, deberá el vendedor entregar únicamente el precio que tuviere la cosa vendida al tiempo de la evicción, a no ser que el comprador hubiere hecho la renuncia con conocimiento de los riesgos de la evicción y sometiéndose a sus consecuencias.

Artículo 1478.

Cuando se haya estipulado el saneamiento o cuando nada se haya pactado sobre este punto, si la evicción se ha realizado, tendrá el comprador derecho a exigir del vendedor:

La restitución del precio que tuviere la cosa vendida al tiempo de la evicción, ya sea mayor o menor que el de la venta.

Los frutos o rendimientos, si se le hubiere condenado a entregarlos al que le haya vencido en juicio.• Las costas del pleito que haya motivado la evicción, y, en su caso, las del seguido con el vendedor para el saneamiento.

Los gastos del contrato, si los hubiese pagado el comprador.• Los daños e intereses v los gastos voluntarios o de puro recreo u ornato, si se vendió de mala fe.•

Artículo 1479.

Si el comprador perdiere, por efecto de la evicción, una parte de la cosa vendida de tal importancia con relación al todo que sin dicha parte no la hubiera comprado, podrá exigir la rescisión del contrato; pero con la obligación de devolver la cosa sin más gravámenes que los que tuviese al adquirirla.

Esto mismo se observará cuando se vendiesen dos o más cosas conjuntamente por un precio alzado, o particular para cada una de ellas, si constase claramente que el comprador no habría comprado la una sin la otra.

Artículo 1480.

El saneamiento no podrá exigirse hasta que haya recaído sentencia firme, por la que se condene al comprador a la pérdida de la cosa adquirida o de parte de la misma.

Artículo 1481.

El vendedor estará obligado al saneamiento que corresponda, siempre que resulte probado que se le notificó la demanda de evicción a instancia del comprador. Faltando la notificación, el vendedor no estará obligado al saneamiento.

Artículo 1482.

El comprador demandado solicitará, dentro del término que la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil señala para contestar a la demanda, que ésta se notifique al vendedor o vendedores en el plazo más breve posible.

La notificación se hará como la misma ley establece para emplazar a los demandados.

El término de contestación para el comprador quedará en suspenso ínterin no expiren los que para comparecer y contestar a la demanda se señalen al vendedor o vendedores, que serán los mismos plazos que determina para todos los demandados la expresada Ley de Enjuicia miento Civil, contados desde la notificación establecida por el párrafo primero de este artículo.

218

Si los citados de evicción no comparecieren en tiempo y forma, continuará, respecto del comprador, el término para contestar a la demanda.

Artículo 1483.

Si la finca vendida estuviese gravada, sin mencionarlo la escritura, con alguna carga o servidumbre no aparente, de tal naturaleza que deba presumirse no la habría adquirido el comprador si la hubiera conocido, podrá pedir la rescisión del contrato, a no ser que prefiera la indemnización correspondiente.

Durante un año, a contar desde el otorgamiento de la escritura, podrá el comprador ejercitar la acción rescisoria, o solicitarla indemnización.

Transcurrido el año, sólo podrá reclamar la indemnización dentro de un período igual, a contar desde el día en que haya descubierto la carga o servidumbre.

Del saneamiento por los defectos o gravámenes ocultos de la cosa vendida.

Artículo 1484.

El vendedor estará obligado al saneamiento por los defectos ocultos que tuviere la cosa vendida, si la hacen impropia para el uso a que se la destina, o si disminuyen de tal modo este uso que, de haberlos conocido el comprador, no la habría adquirido o habría dado menos precio por ella; pero no será responsable de los defectos manifiestos o que estuvieren a la vista, ni tampoco de los que no lo estén, si el comprador es un perito que, por razón de su oficio o profesión, debía fácilmente conocerlos.

Artículo 1485.

El vendedor responde al comprador del saneamiento por los vicios o defectos ocultos de la cosa vendida, aunque los ignorase. Esta disposición no regirá cuando se haya estipula do lo contrario, y el vendedor ignorara los vicios o defectos ocultos de lo vendido.

Artículo 1486.

En los casos de los dos artículos anteriores, el comprador podrá optar entre desistir del contrato, abonándose le los gastos que pagó, o rebajar una cantidad proporcional del precio, a juicio de peritos.

Si el vendedor conocía los vicios o defectos ocultos de la cosa vendida y no los manifestó al comprador, tendrá éste la misma opción y además se le indemnizará de los daños y perjuicios, si optare por la rescisión.

Artículo 1487.

Sí la cosa vendida se perdiere por efecto de los vicios ocultos, conociéndolos el vendedor, sufrirá éste la pérdida, y deberá restituir el precio y abonar los gastos del contrato, con los daños y perjuicios. Si no los conocía, debe sólo restituir el precio y abonar los gastos del contrato que hubiese pagado el comprador.

Artículo 1488.

Si la cosa vendida tenía algún vicio oculto al tiempo de la venta, y se pierde después por caso fortuito o por culpa del comprador, podrá éste reclamar del vendedor el precio que pagó con la rebaja del valor que la cosa tenía al tiempo de perderse.

Si el vendedor obró de mala fe, deberá abonar al comprador los daños e intereses.

219

Artículo 1489.

En las ventas judiciales nunca habrá lugar a la responsabilidad por daños y perjuicios; pero sí a todo lo demás dispuesto en los artículos anteriores.

Artículo 1490.

Las acciones que emanan de lo dispuesto en los cinco artículos precedentes se extinguirán a los seis meses, contados desde la entrega de la cosa vendida.

Artículo 1491.

Vendiéndose dos o más animales juntamente, sea en un precio alzado, sea señalándolo a cada uno de ellos, el vicio redhibitorio de cada uno dará solamente lugar a su redhibición, y no a la de los otros, a no ser que aparezca que el comprador no habría comprado el sano o sanos sin el vicioso.

Se presume esto último cuando se compra un tiro, yunta, pareja o juego, aunque se haya señalado un precio separado a cada uno de los animales que lo componen.

Artículo 1492.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior respecto de la venta de animales se entiende igualmente aplicable a la de otras cosas.

Artículo 1493.

El saneamiento por los vicios ocultos de los animales y ganados no tendrá lugar en las ventas hechas en feria o en pública subasta, ni en la de caballerías enajenadas como de desecho, salvo el caso previsto en el artículo siguiente.

Artículo 1494.

No serán objeto del contrato de venta los ganados y animales que padezcan enfermedades contagiosas. Cualquier contrato que se hiciere respecto de ellos será nulo.

También será nulo el contrato de venta de los ganados y animales, si, expresándose en el mismo contrato el servicio o uso para que se adquieren, resultaren inútiles para prestarlo.

Artículo 1495.

Cuando el vicio oculto de los animales, aunque se haya practicado reconocimiento facultativo, sea de tal naturaleza que no basten los conocimientos periciales para su descubrimiento, se reputará redhibitorio.

Pero si el profesor, por ignorancia o mala fe, dejara de descubrirlo o manifestarlo, será responsable de los daños y perjuicios.

Artículo 1496.

La acción redhibitoria que se funde en los vicios o defectos de los animales, deberá interponerse dentro de cuarenta días, contados desde el de su entrega al comprador, salvo que, por el uso en cada localidad, se hallen establecidos mayores o menores plazos. Esta acción en las ventas de animales sólo se podrá ejercitar respecto de los vicios y defectos de los mismos que estén determinados por la ley o por los usos locales.

220

Artículo 1497.

Si el animal muriese a los tres días de comprado, será responsable el vendedor, siempre que la enfermedad que ocasionó la muerte existiera antes del contrato, a juicio de los facultativos.

Artículo 1498.

Resuelta la venta, el animal deberá ser devuelto en el estado en que fue vendido y entregado, siendo responsable el comprador de cualquier deterioro debido a su negligencia, y que no proceda del vicio o defecto redhibitorio.

Artículo 1499.

En las ventas de animales y ganados con vicios redhibitorios. gozará también el comprador de la facultad expresada en el artículo 1.486; pero deberá usar de ella dentro del mismo término que para el ejercicio de la acción redhibitoria queda respectivamente señalado.

CAPÍTULO V. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL COMPRADOR

Artículo 1500.

El comprador está obligado a pagar el precio de la cosa vendida en el tiempo y lugar fijado por el contrato.

Si no se hubieren fijado, deberá hacerse el pago en el tiempo y lugar en que se haga la entrega de la cosa vendida.

Artículo 1501.

El comprador deberá intereses por el tiempo que medie entre la entrega de la cosa y el pago del precio, en los tres casos siguientes:

Si así se hubiere convenido.• Si la cosa vendida y entregada produce fruto o renta.• Si se hubiere constituido en mora, con arreglo al artículo 1.100.•

Artículo 1502.

Si el comprador fuere perturbado en la posesión o dominio de la cosa adquirida, o tuviere fundado temor de serlo por una acción reivindicatoria o hipotecaria, podrá suspender el pago del precio hasta que el vendedor haya hecho cesar la perturbación o el peligro, a no ser que afiance la devolución del precio en su caso, o se haya estipulado que, no obstante cualquiera contingencia de aquella clase, el comprador estará obligado a verificar el pago.

Artículo 1503.

Si el vendedor tuviere fundado motivo para temer la pérdida de la cosa inmueble vendida y el precio, podrá promover inmediatamente la resolución de la venta.

Si no existiere este motivo, se observará lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.124.

Artículo 1504.

221

En la venta de bienes inmuebles, aun cuando se hubiera estipulado que por falta de pago del precio en el tiempo convenido tendrá lugar de pleno derecho la resolución del contrato, el comprador podrá pagar, aun después de expirado el término, ínterin no haya sido requerido judicialmente o por acta notarial. Hecho el requerimiento, el Juez no podrá concederle nuevo término.

Artículo 1505.

Respecto de los bienes muebles, la resolución de la venta tendrá lugar de pleno derecho, en interés del vendedor, cuando el comprador, antes de vencer el término fijado para la entrega de la cosa, no se haya presentado a recibirla, o, presentándose, no haya ofrecido al mismo tiempo el precio, salvo que para el pago de éste se hubiese pactado mayor dilación.

CAPÍTULO VI. DE LA RESOLUCIÓN DE LA VENTA

Artículo 1506.

La venta se resuelve por las mismas causas que todas las obligaciones y, además, por las expresadas en los capítulos anteriores. y por el retracto convencional o por el legal.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DEL RETRACTO CONVENCIONAL.

Artículo 1507.

Tendrá lugar el retracto convencional cuando el vendedor se reserve el derecho de recuperar la cosa vendida, con obligación de cumplir lo expresado en el artículo 1.518 y lo demás que se hubiese pactado.

Artículo 1508.

El derecho de que trata el artículo anterior durará, a falta de pacto expreso, cuatro años contados desde la fecha del contrato. En caso de estipulación, el plazo no podrá exceder de diez años.

Artículo 1509.

Si el vendedor no cumple lo prescrito en el artículo 1.518, el comprador adquirirá irrevocablemente el dominio de la cosa vendida.

Artículo 1510.

El vendedor podrá ejercitar su acción contra todo poseedor que traiga su derecho del comprador, aunque en el segundo contrato no se haya hecho mención del retracto convencional; salvo lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria respecto de terceros.

Artículo 1511.

El comprador sustituye al vendedor en todos sus derechos y acciones.

Artículo 1512.

Los acreedores del vendedor no podrán hacer uso del retracto convencional contra el comprador, sino después de haber hecho excusión en los bienes del vendedor.

222

Artículo 1513.

El comprador con pacto de retroventa de una parte de finca indivisa que adquiera la totalidad de la misma en el caso del artículo 404, podrá obligar al vendedor a redimir el todo, si éste quiere hacer uso del retracto.

Artículo 1514.

Cuando varios, conjuntamente y en un solo contrato, vendan una finca indivisa con pacto de retro, ninguno de ellos podrá ejercitar este derecho más que por su parte respectiva.

Lo mismo se observará si el que ha vendido por sí solo una finca ha dejado varios herederos, en cuyo caso cada uno de éstos sólo podrá redimir la parte que hubiese adquirido.

Artículo 1515.

En los casos del artículo anterior, el comprador podrá exigir de todos los vendedores o coherederos que se pongan de acuerdo sobre la redención de la totalidad de la cosa vendida, y, si así no lo hicieren, no se podrá obligar al comprador al retracto parcial.

Artículo 1516.

Cada uno de los copropietarios de una finca indivisa, que hubiese vendido separadamente su parte, podrá ejercitar, con la misma separación, el derecho de retracto por su porción respectiva, y el comprador no podrá obligarle a redimir la totalidad de la finca.

Artículo 1517.

Si el comprador dejare varios herederos, la acción de retracto no podrá ejercitarse contra cada uno sino por su parte respectiva, ora se halle indivisa, ora se haya distribuido entre ellos. Pero si se ha dividido la herencia, y la cosa vendida se ha adjudicado a uno de los herederos, la acción de retracto podrá intentarse contra él por el todo.

Artículo 1518.

El vendedor no podrá hacer uso del derecho de retracto sin reembolsar al comprador el precio de la venta, y además:

Los gastos del contrato y cualquier otro pago legítimo hecho para la venta.• Los gastos necesarios y útiles hechos en la cosa vendida.•

Artículo 1519.

Cuando al celebrarse la venta hubiese en la finca frutos manifiestos o nacidos, no se hará abono ni prorrateo de los que haya al tiempo del retracto.

Si no los hubo al tiempo de la venta, y los hay al del retracto, se prorratearán entre el retrayente y el comprador, dando a éste la parte correspondiente al tiempo que poseyó la finca en el último año, a contar desde la venta.

Artículo 1520.

El vendedor que recobre la cosa vendida, la recibirá libre de toda carga o hipoteca impuesta por el comprador,

223

pero estará obligado a pasar por los arriendos que éste haya hecho de buena fe y según costumbre del lugar en que radique.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL RETRACTO LEGAL

Artículo 1521.

El retracto legal es el derecho de subrogarse, con las mismas condiciones estipuladas en el contrato, en lugar del que adquiere una cosa por compra o dación en pago.

Artículo 1522.

El copropietario de una cosa común podrá usar del retracto en el caso de enajenarse a un extraño la parte de todos los demás condueños o de alguno de ellos.

Cuando dos o más copropietarios quieran usar del retracto, sólo podrán hacerlo a prorrata de la porción que tengan en la cosa común.

Artículo 1523.

También tendrán el derecho de retracto los propietarios de las tierras colindantes cuando se trate de la venta de una finca rústica cuya cabida no exceda de una hectárea.

El derecho a que se refiere el párrafo anterior no es aplicable a las tierras colindantes que estuvieren separadas por arroyos, acequias, barrancos, caminos y otras servidumbres aparentes en provecho de otras fincas.

Si dos o más colindantes usan del retracto al mismo tiempo será preferido el que de ellos sea dueño de la tierra colindante de menor cabida; y si las dos la tuvieran igual, el que primero lo solicite.

Artículo 1524.

No podrá ejercitarse el derecho de retracto legal sino dentro de nueve días contados desde la inscripción en el Registro, y en su defecto, desde que el retrayente hubiera tenido conocimiento de la venta.

El retracto de comuneros excluye el de colindantes.

Artículo 1525.

En el retracto legal tendrá lugar lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.511 y 1.518.

CAPÍTULO VII. DE LA TRANSMISIÓN DE CRÉDITOS Y DEMÁS DERECHOS INCORPORALES

Artículo 1526.

La cesión de un crédito, derecho o acción no surtirá efecto contra tercero sino desde que su fecha deba tenerse por cierta en conformidad a los artículos 1.218 y 1.227.

Si se refiere a un inmueble, desde la fecha de su inscripción en el Registro.

Artículo 1527.

224

El deudor que antes de tener conocimiento de la cesión satisfaga al acreedor quedará libre de la obligación.

Artículo 1528.

La venta o cesión de un crédito comprende la de todos los derechos accesorios, como la fianza, hipoteca, prenda o privilegio.

Artículo 1529.

El vendedor de buena fe responderá de la existencia y legitimidad del crédito al tiempo de la venta, a no ser que se haya vendido como dudoso; pero no de la solvencia del deudor, a menos de haberse estipulado expresamente, o de que la insolvencia fuese anterior y pública.

Aun en estos casos sólo responderá del precio recibido y de los gastos expresados en el número primero del artículo 1.518.

El vendedor de mala fe responderá siempre del pago de todos los gastos y de los daños y perjuicios.

Artículo 1530.

Cuando el cedente de buena fe se hubiese hecho responsable de la solvencia del deudor, y los contratantes no hubieran estipulado nada sobre la duración de la responsabilidad, durará ésta sólo un año, contado desde la cesión del crédito, si estaba ya vencido el plazo.

Si el crédito fuere pagadero en término o plazo todavía no vencido, la responsabilidad cesará un año después del vencimiento.

Si el crédito consistiere en una renta perpetua, la responsabilidad se extinguirá a los diez años. contados desde la fecha de la cesión.

Artículo 1531.

El que venda una herencia sin enumerar las cosas de que se compone, sólo estará obligado a responder de su cualidad de heredero.

Artículo 1532.

El que venda alzadamente o en globo la totalidad de ciertos derechos, rentas o productos, cumplirá con responder de la legitimidad del todo en general; pero no estará obligado al saneamiento de cada una de las partes de que se componga, salvo en el caso de evicción del todo o de la mayor parte.

Artículo 1533.

Si el vendedor se hubiese aprovechado de algunos frutos o hubiese percibido alguna cosa de la herencia que vendiere, deberá abonarlos al comprador si no se hubiese pactado lo contrario.

Artículo 1534.

El comprador deberá, por su parte, satisfacer al vendedor todo lo que éste haya pagado por las deudas y cargas de la herencia y por los créditos que tenga contra la misma, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 1535.

225

Vendiéndose un crédito litigioso, el deudor tendrá derecho a extinguirlo, reembolsando al cesionario el precio que pagó, las costas que se le hubiesen ocasionado y los intereses del precio desde el día en que éste fue satisfecho.

Se tendrá por litigioso un crédito desde que se conteste a la demanda relativa al mismo.

El deudor podrá usar de su derecho dentro de nueve días, contados desde que el cesionario le reclame el pago.

Artículo 1536.

Se exceptúan de lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior la cesión o ventas hechas:

A un coheredero o condueño del derecho cedido.• A un acreedor en pago de su crédito.• Al poseedor de una finca sujeta al derecho litigioso que se ceda.•

CAPÍTULO VIII. DISPOSICIÓN GENERAL

Artículo 1537.

Todo lo dispuesto en este título se entiende con sujeción a lo que respecto de bienes inmuebles se determina en la Ley Hipotecaria.

TÍTULO V. DE LA PERMUTA

Artículo 1538.

La permuta es un contrato por el cual cada uno de los contratantes se obliga a dar una cosa para recibir otra.

Artículo 1539.

Si uno de los contratantes hubiese recibido la cosa que se le prometió en permuta, y acreditase que no era propia del que la dio, no podrá ser obligado a entregar la que él ofreció en cambio, y cumplirá con devolver la que recibió.

Artículo 1540.

El que pierda por evicción la cosa recibida en permuta, podrá optar entre recuperar la que dio en cambio, o reclamar la indemnización de daños y perjuicios: pero sólo podrá usar del derecho a recuperar la cosa que él entregó mientras ésta subsista en poder del otro permutante, y sin perjuicio de los derechos adquiridos entre tanto sobre ella con buena fe por un tercero.

Artículo 1541.

En todo lo que no se halle especialmente determinado en este título, la permuta se regirá por las disposiciones concernientes a la venta.

TÍTULO VI. DEL CONTRATO DE ARRENDAMIENTO.

226

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1542.

El arrendamiento puede ser de cosas, o de obras o servicios.

Artículo 1543.

En el arrendamiento de cosas, una de las partes se obliga a dar a la otra el goce o uso de una cosa por tiempo determinado y precio cierto.

Artículo 1544.

En el arrendamiento de obras o servicios, una de las partes se obliga a ejecutar una obra o a prestar a la otra un servicio por precio cierto.

Artículo 1545.

Los bienes fungibles que se consumen con el uso no pueden ser materia de este contrato.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS ARRENDAMIENTOS DE FINCAS RÚSTICAS Y URBANAS

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1546.

Se llama arrendador al que se obliga a ceder el uso de la cosa, ejecutar la obra o prestar el servicio, y arrendatario al que adquiere el uso de la cosa o el derecho a la obra o servicio que se obliga a pagar.

Artículo 1547.

Cuando hubiese comenzado la ejecución de un contrato de arrendamiento verbal y faltare la prueba del precio convenido, el arrendatario devolverá al arrendador la cosa arrendada, abonándole, por el tiempo que la haya disfrutado, el precio que se regule.

Artículo 1548.

Los padres o tutores, respecto de los bienes de los menores o incapacitados, y los administradores de bienes que no tengan poder especial, no podrán dar en arrendamiento las cosas por término que exceda de seis años.

Artículo 1549.

Con relación a terceros, no surtirán efecto los arrendamientos de bienes raíces que no se hallen debidamente inscritos en el Registro de la Propiedad.

Artículo 1550.

Cuando en el contrato de arrendamiento de cosas no se prohíba expresamente, podrá el arrendatario subarrendar en todo o en parte la cosa arrendada, sin perjuicio de su responsabilidad al cumplimiento del contrato para con el arrendador.

227

Artículo 1551.

Sin perjuicio de su obligación para con el subarrendador, queda el subarrendatario obligado a favor del arrendador por todos los actos que se refieran al uso y conservación de la cosa arrendada en la forma pactada entre el arrendador y el arrendatario.

Artículo 1552.

El subarrendatario queda también obligado para con el arrendador por el importe del precio convenido en el subarriendo que se halle debiendo al tiempo del requerimiento, considerando no hechos los pagos adelantados, a no haberlos verificado con arreglo a la costumbre.

Artículo 1553.

Son aplicables al contrato de arrendamiento las disposiciones sobre saneamiento contenidas en el título de la compraventa. En los casos en que proceda la devolución del precio, se hará la disminución proporcional al tiempo que el arrendatario haya disfrutado de la cosa.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS DERECHOS Y OBLIGACIONES DEL ARRENDADOR Y DEL ARRENDATARIO.

Artículo 1554.

El arrendador está obligado:

A entregar al arrendatario la cosa objeto del contrato.• A hacer en ella durante el arrendamiento todas las reparaciones necesarias a fin de conservarla en estado de servir para el uso a que ha sido destinada.

A mantener al arrendatario en el goce pacifico del arrendamiento por todo el tiempo del contrato.•

Artículo 1555.

El arrendatario está obligado:

A pagar el precio del arrendamiento en los términos convenidos.• A usar de la cosa arrendada como un diligente padre de familia, destinándola al uso pactado; y, en defecto de pacto, al que se infiera de la naturaleza de la cosa arrendada según la costumbre de la tierra.

A pagar los gastos que ocasione la escritura del contrato.•

Artículo 1556.

Si el arrendador o el arrendatario no cumplieren las obligaciones expresadas en los artículos anteriores, podrán pedir la rescisión del contrato y la indemnización de daños y perjuicios, o sólo esto último, dejando el contrato subsistente.

Artículo 1557.

El arrendador no puede variar la forma de la cosa arrendada.

Artículo 1558.

Si durante el arrendamiento es necesario hacer alguna reparación urgente en la cosa arrendada que no pueda

228

diferirse hasta la conclusión del arriendo, tiene el arrendatario obligación de tolerar la obra, aunque le sea muy molesta, y aunque durante ella se vea privado de una parte de la finca.

Si la reparación dura más de cuarenta días, debe disminuirse el precio del arriendo a proporción del tiempo y de la parte de la finca de que el arrendatario se vea privado.

Si la obra es de tal naturaleza que hace inhabitable la parte que el arrendatario y su familia necesitan para su habitación, puede éste rescindir el contrato.

Artículo 1559.

El arrendatario está obligado a poner en conocimiento del propietario, en el más breve plazo posible, toda usurpación o novedad dañosa que otro haya realizado o abiertamente prepare en la cosa arrendada.

También está obligado a poner en conocimiento del dueño, con la misma urgencia, la necesidad de todas las reparaciones comprendidas en el número segundo del artículo 1.554.

En ambos casos será responsable el arrendatario de los daños y perjuicios que por su negligencia se ocasionaren al propietario.

Artículo 1560.

El arrendador no está obligado a responder de la perturbación de mero hecho que un tercero causare en el uso de la finca arrendada; pero el arrendatario tendrá acción directa contra el perturbador.

No existe perturbación de hecho cuando el tercero, ya sea la Administración, ya un particular, ha obrado en virtud de un derecho que le corresponde.

Artículo 1561.

El arrendatario debe devolver la finca, al concluir el arriendo, tal como la recibió, salvo lo que hubiese perecido o se hubiese menoscabado por el tiempo o por causa inevitable.

Artículo 1562.

A falta de expresión del estado de la finca al tiempo de arrendarla, la ley presume que el arrendatario la recibió en buen estado, salvo prueba en contrario.

Artículo 1563.

El arrendatario es responsable del deterioro o pérdida que tuviere la cosa arrendada, a no ser que pruebe haberse ocasionado sin culpa suya.

Artículo 1564.

El arrendatario es responsable del deterioro causado por las personas de su casa.

Artículo 1565.

Si el arrendamiento se ha hecho por tiempo determinado, concluye el día prefijado sin necesidad de requerimiento.

229

Artículo 1566.

Si al terminar el contrato, permanece el arrendatario disfrutando quince días de la cosa arrendada con aquiescencia del arrendador, se entiende que hay tácita reconducción por el tiempo que establecen los artículos 1.577 y 1.581, a menos que haya precedido requerimiento.

Artículo 1567.

En el caso de la tácita reconducción, cesan respecto de ella las obligaciones otorgadas por un tercero para la seguridad del contrato principal.

Artículo 1568.

Si se pierde la cosa arrendada o alguno de los contratantes falta al cumplimiento de lo estipulado, se observará respectivamente lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.182 y 1.183 y en los 1.101 y 1.124.

Artículo 1569.

El arrendador podrá desahuciar judicialmente al arrendatario por alguna de las causas siguientes:

Haber expirado el término convencional o el que se fija para la duración de los arrendamientos en los artículos 1.577 y 1.581.

Falta de pago en el precio convenido.• Infracción de cualquiera de las condiciones estipuladas en el contrato.• Destinar la cosa arrendada a usos o servicios no pactados que la hagan desmerecer, o no sujetarse en su uso a lo que se ordena en el número segundo del artículo 1.555.

Artículo 1570.

Fuera de los casos mencionados en el artículo anterior, tendrá el arrendatario derecho a aprovechar los términos establecidos en los artículos 1.577 y 1.581.

Artículo 1571.

El comprador de una finca arrendada tiene derecho a que termine el arriendo vigente al verificarse la venta, salvo pacto en contrario y lo dispuesto en la Ley Hipotecaria.

Si el comprador usare de este derecho, el arrendatario podrá exigir que se le deje recoger los frutos de la cosecha que le corresponda al año agrícola corriente y que el vendedor le indemnice los daños y perjuicios que se le causen.

Artículo 1572.

El comprador con pacto de retraer no puede usar de la facultad de desahuciar al arrendatario hasta que haya concluido el plazo para usar del retracto.

Artículo 1573.

El arrendatario tendrá respecto de las mejoras útiles y voluntarias. el mismo derecho que se concede al usufructuario.

Artículo 1574.

230

Si nada se hubiere pactado sobre el lugar y tiempo del pago del arrendamiento, se estará, en cuanto al lugar, a lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.171; y, en cuanto al tiempo, a la costumbre de la tierra.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DISPOSICIONES ESPECIALES PARA LOS ARRENDAMIENTOS DE PREDIOS RÚSTICOS.

Artículo 1575.

El arrendatario no tendrá derecho a rebaja de la renta por esterilidad de la tierra arrendada o por pérdida de frutos provenientes de casos fortuitos ordinarios; pero sí, en caso de pérdida de más de la mitad de frutos, por casos fortuitos extraordinarios e imprevistos, salvo siempre el pacto espacial en contrario.

Entiéndese por casos fortuitos extraordinarios: el incendio, guerra, peste, inundación insólita, langosta, terremoto u otro igualmente desacostumbrado, y que los contratantes no hayan podido racionalmente prever.

Artículo 1576.

Tampoco tiene el arrendatario derecho a rebaja de la renta cuando los frutos se han perdido después de estar separados de su raíz o tronco.

Artículo 1577.

El arrendamiento de un predio rústico, cuando no se fija su duración, se entiende hecho por todo el tiempo necesario para la recolección de los frutos que toda la finca arrendada diere en un año o pueda dar por una vez, aunque pasen dos o más años para obtenerlos.

El de tierras labrantías, divididas en dos o más hojas, se entiende por tantos años cuantas sean éstas.

Artículo 1578.

El arrendatario saliente debe permitir al entrante el uso del local y demás medios necesarios para las labores preparatorias del año siguiente; y, recíprocamente, el entrante tiene obligación de permitir al colono saliente lo necesario para la recolección y aprovechamiento de los frutos, todo con arreglo a la costumbre del pueblo.

Artículo 1579.

El arrendamiento por aparcería de tierras de labor, ganados de cría o establecimientos fabriles e industria les, se regirá por las disposiciones relativas al contrato de sociedad y por las estipulaciones de las partes, y, en su defecto, por la costumbre de la tierra.

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DISPOSICIONES ESPECIALES PARA EL ARRENDAMIENTO DE PREDIOS URBANOS.

Artículo 1580.

En defecto de pacto especial, se estará a la costumbre del pueblo para las reparaciones de los predios urbanos que deban ser de cuenta del propietario. En caso de duda se entenderán de cargo de éste.

Artículo 1581.

Si no se hubiese fijado plazo al arrendamiento, se entiende hecho por años cuando se ha fijado un alquiler anual, por meses cuando es mensual, por días cuando es diario.

231

En todo caso cesa el arrendamiento, sin necesidad de requerimiento especial, cumplido el término.

Artículo 1582.

Cuando el arrendador de una casa, o de parte de ella, destinada a la habitación de una familia, o de una tienda, o almacén, o establecimiento industrial, arrienda también los muebles, el arrendamiento de éstos se entenderá por el tiempo que dure el de la finca arrendada.

CAPÍTULO III. DEL ARRENDAMIENTO DE OBRAS Y SERVICIOS.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DEL SERVICIO DE CRIADOS Y TRABAJADORES ASALARIADOS.

Artículo 1583.

Puede contratarse esta clase de servicios sin tiempo fijo, por cierto tiempo, o para una obra determinada. El arrendamiento hecho por toda la vida es nulo.

Artículo 1584.

El criado doméstico destinado al servicio personal de su amo. o de la familia de éste, por tiempo determinado, puede despedirse y ser despedido antes de expirar el término; pero, si el amo despide al criado sin justa causa, debe indemnizarle pagándole el salario devengado y el de quince días más.

El amo será creído, salvo prueba en contrario:

Sobre el tanto del salario del sirviente doméstico.• Sobre el pago de los salarios devengados en el año corriente.•

Artículo 1585.

Además de lo prescrito en los artículos anteriores, se observará acerca de los amos y sirvientes lo que determinen las leyes y reglamentos especiales.

Artículo 1586.

Los criados de labranza, menestrales, artesanos y demás trabajadores asalariados por cierto término para cierta obra, no pueden despedirse ni ser despedidos antes del cumplimiento del contrato, sin justa causa.

Artículo 1587.

La despedida de los criados, menestrales, artesanos y demás trabajadores asalariados, a que se refieren los artículos anteriores, da derecho para desposeerles de la herramienta y edificios que ocuparen por razón de su cargo.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LAS OBRAS POR AJUSTE O PRECIO ALZADO

Artículo 1588.

Puede contratarse la ejecución de una obra conviniendo en que el que la ejecute ponga solamente su trabajo o su industria, o que también suministre el material.

232

Artículo 1589.

Si el que contrata la obra se obligó a poner el material, debe sufrir la pérdida en el caso de destruirse la obra antes de ser entregada, salvo si hubiese habido morosidad en recibirla.

Artículo 1590.

El que se ha obligado a poner sólo su trabajo o industria, no puede reclamar ningún estipendio si se destruye la obra antes de haber sido entregada, a no ser que haya habido morosidad para recibirla, o que la destrucción haya provenido de la mala calidad de los materiales, con tal que haya advertido oportunamente esta circunstancia al dueño.

Artículo 1591.

El contratista de un edificio que se arruinase por vicios de la construcción, responde de los daños y perjuicios si la ruina tuviere lugar dentro de diez años, contados desde que concluyó la construcción; igual responsabilidad, y por el mismo tiempo, tendrá el arquitecto que la dirigiere, si se debe la ruina a vicio del suelo o de la dirección.

Si la causa fuere la falta del contratista a las condiciones del contrato, la acción de indemnización durará quince años.

Artículo 1592.

El que se obliga a hacer una obra por piezas o por medida, puede exigir del dueño que la reciba por partes y que la pague en proporción. Se presume aprobada y recibida la parte satisfecha.

Artículo 1593.

El arquitecto o contratista que se encarga por un ajuste alzado de la construcción de un edificio u otra obra en vista de un plano convenido con el propietario del suelo, no puede pedir aumento de precio aunque se haya aumentado el de los jornales o materiales; pero podrá hacerlo cuando se haya hecho algún cambio en el plano que produzca aumento de obra, siempre que hubiese dado su autorización el propietario.

Artículo 1594.

El dueño puede desistir, por su sola voluntad, de la construcción de la obra aunque se haya empezado, indemnizando al contratista de todos sus gastos, trabajo y utilidad que pudiera obtener de ella.

Artículo 1595.

Cuando se ha encargado cierta obra a una persona por razón de sus cualidades personales, el contrato se rescinde por la muerte de esta persona.

En este caso el propietario debe abonar a los herederos del constructor, a proporción del precio convenido, el valor de la parte de obra ejecutada y de los materiales preparados, siempre que de estos materiales reporte algún beneficio.

Lo mismo se entenderá si el que contrató la obra no puede acabarla por alguna causa independiente de su voluntad.

Artículo 1596.

233

El contratista es responsable del trabajo ejecutado por las personas que ocupare en la obra.

Artículo 1597.

Los que ponen su trabajo y materiales en una obra ajustada alzadamente por el contratista no tienen acción contra el dueño de ella sino hasta la cantidad que éste adeude a aquél cuando se hace la reclamación.

Artículo 1598.

Cuando se conviniere que la obra se ha de hacer a satisfacción del propietario, se entiende reservada la aprobación, a falta de conformidad, al juicio pericial correspondiente.

Si la persona que ha de aprobar la obra es un tercero, se estará a lo que éste decida.

Artículo 1599.

Si no hubiere pacto o costumbre en contrario, el precio de la obra deberá pagarse al hacerse la entrega.

Artículo 1600.

El que ha ejecutado una obra en cosa mueble tiene el derecho de retenerla en prenda hasta que se le pague.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LOS TRANSPORTES POR AGUA Y TIERRA TANTO DE PERSONAS COMO DE COSAS

Artículo 1601.

Los conductores de efectos por tierra o por agua están sujetos, en cuanto a la guarda y conservación de las cosas que se les confían, a las mismas obligaciones que respecto a los posaderos se determinan en los artículos 1.783 y 1.784.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo se entiende sin perjuicio de lo que respecto a transportes por mar y tierra establece el Código de Comercio.

Artículo 1602.

Responden igualmente los conductores de la pérdida y de las averías de las cosas que reciben, a no ser que prueben que la pérdida o la avería ha provenido de caso fortuito o de fuerza mayor.

Artículo 1603.

Lo dispuesto en estos artículos se entiende sin perjuicio de lo que prevengan las leyes y los reglamentos especiales.

TÍTULO VII. DE LOS CENSOS

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1604.

234

Se constituye el censo cuando se sujetan algunos bienes inmuebles al pago de un canon o rédito anual en retribución de un capital que se reciba en dinero, o del dominio pleno o menos pleno que se transmite de los mismos bienes.

Artículo 1605.

Es enfitéutico el censo cuando una persona cede a otra el dominio útil de una finca, reservándose el directo y el derecho a percibir del enfiteuta una pensión anual en reconocimiento de este mismo dominio.

Artículo 1606.

Es consignativo el censo cuando el censatario impone sobre un inmueble de su propiedad el gravamen del canon o pensión que se obliga a pagar al censualista por el capital que de éste recibe en dinero.

Artículo 1607.

Es reservativo el censo cuando una persona cede a otra el pleno dominio de un inmueble, reservándose el derecho a percibir sobre el mismo inmueble una pensión anual que deba pagar el censatario.

Artículo 1608.

Es de la naturaleza del censo que la cesión del capital o de la cosa inmueble sea perpetua o por tiempo indefinido; sin embargo, el censatario podrá redimir el censo a su voluntad aunque se pacte lo contrario, siendo esta disposición aplicable a los censos que hoy existen.

Puede, no obstante, pactarse que la redención del censo no tenga lugar durante la vida del censualista o de una persona determinada, o que no pueda redimirse en cierto número de años, que no excederá de veinte en el consignativo, ni de sesenta en el reservativo y enfitéutico.

Artículo 1609.

Para llevar a efecto la redención, el censatario deberá avisarlo al censualista con un año de antelación o anticiparle el pago de una pensión anual.

Artículo 1610.

Los censos no podrán redimirse parcialmente sino en virtud de pacto expreso.

Tampoco podrán redimirse contra la voluntad del censualista sin estar al corriente el pago de las pensiones.

Artículo 1611.

Para la redención de los censos constituidos antes de la promulgación de este Código, si no fuere conocido el capital, se regulará éste por la cantidad que resulte, computada la pensión al 3 por 100.

Si la pensión se paga en frutos, se estimarán éstos, para determinar el capital, por el precio medio que hubiesen tenido en el último quinquenio.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo no será aplicable a los foros, subforos, derechos de superficie y cualesquiera otros gravámenes semejantes, en los cuales el principio de la redención de los dominios será regulado por una ley especial.

235

Artículo 1612.

Los gastos que se ocasionen para la redención y liberación del censo serán de cuenta del censatario, salvo los que se causen por oposición temeraria, a juicio de los Tribunales.

Artículo 1613.

La pensión o canon de los censos se determinará por las partes al otorgar el contrato.

Podrá consistir en dinero o frutos.

Artículo 1614.

Las pensiones se pagarán en los plazos convenidos; y, a falta de convenio, si consisten en dinero, por años vencidos, a contar desde la fecha del contrato, y, si en frutos, al fin de la respectiva recolección.

Artículo 1615.

Si no se hubiere designado en el contrato el lugar en que hayan de pagarse las pensiones, se cumplirá esta obligación en el que radique la finca gravada con el censo, siempre que el censualista o su apoderado tuvieren su domicilio en el término municipal del mismo pueblo. No teniéndolo, y sí el censatario, en el domicilio de éste se hará el pago.

Artículo 1616.

El censualista, al tiempo de entregar el recibo de cualquier pensión, puede obligar al censatario a que le dé un resguardo en el que conste haberse hecho el pago.

Artículo 1617.

Pueden transmitirse a título oneroso o lucrativo las fincas gravadas con censos, y lo mismo el derecho a percibir la pensión.

Artículo 1618.

No pueden dividirse entre dos o más personas las fincas gravadas con censo sin el consentimiento expreso del censualista, aunque se adquieran a título de herencia.

Cuando el censualista permita la división, se designará con su consentimiento la parte del censo con que quedará gravada cada porción, constituyéndose tantos censos distintos cuantas sean las porciones en que se divida la finca.

Artículo 1619.

Cuando se intente adjudicar la finca gravada con censo a varios herederos, y el censualista no preste su consentimiento para la división, se pondrá a licitación entre ellos.

A la falta de conformidad, o no ofreciéndose por alguno de los interesados el precio de tasación, se venderá la finca con la carga, repartiéndose el precio entre los herederos.

Artículo 1620.

236

Son prescriptibles tanto el capital como las pensiones de los censos, conforme a lo que se dispone en el título XVIII de este libro.

Artículo 1621.

A pesar de lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.110, será necesario el pago de dos pensiones consecutivas para suponer satisfechas todas las anteriores.

Artículo 1622.

El censatario está obligado a pagar las contribuciones y demás impuestos que afecten a la finca acensuada.

Al verificar el pago de la pensión podrá descontar de ella la parte de los impuestos que corresponda al censualista.

Artículo 1623.

Los censos producen acción real sobre la finca gravada. Además de la acción real podrá el censualista ejercitar la personal para el pago de las pensiones atrasadas y de los daños e intereses cuando hubiere lugar a ello.

Artículo 1624.

El censatario no podrá pedir perdón o reducción de la pensión por esterilidad accidental de la finca, ni por la perdida de sus frutos.

Artículo 1625.

Si por fuerza mayor o caso fortuito se pierde o inutiliza totalmente la finca gravada con censo, quedará éste extinguido, cesando el pago de la pensión.

Si se pierde sólo en parte, no se eximirá el censatario de pagar la pensión, a no ser que prefiera abandonar la finca al censualista. Interviniendo culpa del censatario, quedará sujeto, en ambos casos, al resarcimiento de daños y perjuicios.

Artículo 1626.

En el caso del párrafo primero del artículo anterior, si estuviere asegurada la finca, el valor del seguro quedará afecto al pago del capital del censo y de las pensiones vencidas, a no ser que el censatario prefiera invertirlo en reedificar la finca, en cuyo caso revivirá el censo con todos sus efectos, incluso el pago de las pensiones no satisfechas. El censualista podrá exigir del censatario que asegure la inversión del valor del seguro en la reedificación de la finca.

Artículo 1627.

Si la finca gravada con censo fuere expropiada por causa de utilidad pública, su precio estará afecto al pago del capital del censo y de las pensiones vencidas, quedando éste extinguido.

La precedente disposición es también aplicable al caso en que la expropiación forzosa sea solamente de parte de la finca, cuando su precio baste para cubrir el capital del censo.

Si no bastare, continuará gravando el censo sobre el resto de la finca, siempre que su precio sea suficiente para cubrir el capital censual y un 25 por 100 más del mismo. En otro caso estará obligado el censatario a sustituir

237

con otra garantía la parte expropiada, o a redimir el censo, a su elección, salvo lo dispuesto para el enfitéutico en el artículo 1.631.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL CENSO ENFITÉUTICO

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DISPOSICIONES RELATIVAS A LA ENFITEUSIS

Artículo 1628.

El censo enfitéutico sólo puede establecerse sobre bienes inmuebles y en escritura pública.

Artículo 1629.

Al constituirse el censo enfitéutico se fijará en el contrato, bajo pena de nulidad, el valor de la finca y la pensión anual que haya de satisfacerse.

Artículo 1630.

Cuando la pensión consista en una cantidad determinada de frutos, se fijarán en el contrato su especie y calidad.

Si consiste en una parte alícuota de los que produzca la finca, a falta de pacto expreso sobre la intervención que haya de tener el dueño directo, deberá el enfiteuta darle aviso previo, o a su representante, del día en que se proponga comenzar la recolección de cada clase de frutos, a fin de que pueda, por sí mismo o por medio de su representante, presenciar todas las operaciones hasta percibir la parte que le corresponda.

Dado el aviso, el enfiteuta podrá levantar la cosecha, aunque no concurra el dueño directo ni su representante o interventor.

Artículo 1631.

En el caso de expropiación forzosa se estará a lo dispuesto en el párrafo primero del artículo 1.627, cuando sea expropiada toda la finca.

Si sólo lo fuere en parte, se distribuirá el precio de lo expropiado entre el dueño directo y el útil, recibiendo aquél la parte del capital del censo que proporcionalmente corresponda a la parte expropiada, según el valor que se dio a toda la finca al constituirse el censo o que haya servido de tipo para la redención, y el resto corresponderá al enfiteuta.

En este caso continuará el censo sobre el resto de la finca, con la correspondiente reducción en el capital y las pensiones, a no ser que el enfiteuta opte por la redención total o por el abandono a favor del dueño directo.

Cuando, conforme a lo pactado, deba pagarse laudemio, el dueño directo percibirá lo que por este concepto le corresponda sólo de la parte del precio que pertenezca al enfiteuta.

Artículo 1632.

El enfiteuta hace suyos los productos de la finca y de sus accesiones.

Tiene los mismos derechos que corresponderían al propietario en los tesoros y minas que se descubran en la finca enfitéutica.

238

Artículo 1633.

Puede el enfiteuta disponer del predio enfitéutico y de sus accesiones, tanto por actos entre vivos como de última voluntad, dejando a salvo los derechos del dueño directo, y con sujeción a lo que establecen los artículos que siguen.

Artículo 1634.

Cuando la pensión consista en una parte alícuota de los frutos de la finca enfitéutica, no podrá imponerse servidumbre ni otra carga que disminuya los productos sin consentimiento expreso del dueño directo.

Artículo 1635.

El enfiteuta podrá donar o permutar libremente la finca, poniéndolo en conocimiento del dueño directo.

Artículo 1636.

Corresponden recíprocamente al dueño directo y al útil el derecho de tanteo y el de retracto, siempre que vendan o den en pago su respectivo dominio sobre la finca enfitéutica.

Esta disposición no es aplicable a las enajenaciones forzosas por causa de utilidad pública.

Artículo 1637.

Para los efectos del artículo anterior, el que trate de enajenar el dominio de una finca enfitéutica deberá avisarlo al otro condueño, declarándole el precio definitivo que se le ofrezca, o en que pretenda enajenar su dominio.

Dentro de los veinte días siguientes al del aviso, podrá el condueño hacer uso del derecho de tanteo, pagando el precio indicado. Si no lo verifica, perderá este derecho y podrá llevarse a efecto la enajenación.

Artículo 1638.

Cuando el dueño directo o el enfiteuta, en su caso, no haya hecho uso del derecho de tanteo a que se refiere el artículo anterior, podrá utilizar el de retracto para adquirir la finca por el precio de la enajenación.

En este caso deberá utilizarse el retracto dentro de los nueve días útiles siguientes al del otorgamiento de la escritura de venta. Si ésta se ocultare, se contará dicho término desde la inscripción de la misma en el Registro de la Propiedad.

Se presume la ocultación cuando no se presenta la escritura en el Registro dentro de los nueve días siguientes al de su otorgamiento. Independientemente de la presunción, la ocultación puede probarse por los demás medios legales.

Artículo 1639.

Si se hubiere realizado la enajenación sin el previo aviso que ordena el artículo 1.637, el dueño directo, y en su caso el útil, podrán ejercitar la acción de retracto en todo tiempo hasta que transcurra un año, contando desde que la enajenación se inscriba en Registro de la Propiedad.

Artículo 1640.

239

En las ventas judiciales de fincas enfitéuticas, el dueño directo y el útil, en sus casos respectivos, podrán hacer uso del derecho de tanteo, dentro del término fijado en los edictos para el remate, pagando el precio que sirva de tipo para la subasta, y del de retracto dentro de los nueve días útiles siguientes al del otorgamiento de la escritura.

En este caso no será necesario el aviso previo que exige el artículo 1.637.

Artículo 1641.

Cuando sean varias las fincas enajenadas sujetas a un mismo censo, no podrá utilizarse el derecho de tanteo ni el de retracto respecto de unas con exclusión de las otras.

Artículo 1642.

Cuando el dominio directo o el útil pertenezca pro indiviso a varias personas, cada una de ellas podrá hacer uso del derecho de retracto con sujeción a las reglas establecidas para el de comuneros, y con preferencia el dueño directo, si se hubiese enajenado parte del dominio útil; o el enfiteuta, si la enajenación hubiese sido del dominio directo.

Artículo 1643.

Si el enfiteuta fuere perturbado en su derecho por un tercero que dispute el dominio directo o la validez de la enfiteusis, no podrá reclamar la correspondiente indemnización del dueño directo si no le cita de evicción conforme a lo prevenido en el artículo 1.481.

Artículo 1644.

En las enajenaciones a título oneroso de fincas enfitéuticas sólo se pagará laudemio al dueño directo cuando se haya estipulado expresamente en el contrato de enfiteusis.

Si al pactarlo no se hubiera señalado cantidad fija, ésta consistirá en el 2 por 100 del precio de la enajenación.

En las enfiteusis anteriores a la promulgación de este Código, que estén sujetas al pago de laudemio, aunque no se haya pactado, seguirá esta prestación en la forma acostumbrada, pero no excederá del 2 por 100 del precio de la enajenación cuando no se haya contratado expresamente otra mayor.

Artículo 1645.

La obligación de pagar el laudemio corresponde al adquirente, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 1646.

Cuando el enfiteuta hubiese obtenido del dueño directo licencia para la enajenación o le hubiese dado el aviso previo que previene el artículo 1.637, no podrá el dueño directo reclamar, en su caso, el pago de laudemio sino dentro del año siguiente al día en que se inscriba la escritura en el Registro de la Propiedad. Fuera de dichos casos, esta acción estará sujeta a la prescripción ordinaria.

Artículo 1647.

Cada veintinueve años podrá el dueño directo exigir el reconocimiento de su derecho por el que se encuentre en posesión de la finca enfitéutica.

240

Los gastos del reconocimiento serán de cuenta del enfiteuta, sin que pueda exigírsele ninguna otra prestación por este concepto.

Artículo 1648.

Caerá en comiso la finca, y el dueño directo podrá reclamar su devolución:

Por falta de pago de la pensión durante tres años consecutivos.• Si el enfiteuta no cumple la condición estipulada en el contrato o deteriora gravemente la finca.•

Artículo 1649.

En el caso primero del artículo anterior, para que el dueño directo pueda pedir el comiso, deberá requerir de pago al enfiteuta judicialmente o por medio de Notario; y, si no paga dentro de los treinta días siguientes al requerimiento, quedará expedito el derecho de aquél.

Artículo 1650.

Podrá el enfiteuta librarse del comiso en todo caso redimiendo el censo y pagando las pensiones vencidas dentro de los treinta días siguientes al requerimiento de pago o al emplazamiento de la demanda.

Del mismo derecho podrán hacer uso los acreedores del enfiteuta hasta los treinta días siguientes al en que el dueño directo haya recobrado el pleno dominio.

Artículo 1651.

La redención del censo enfitéutico consistirá en la entrega en metálico, y de una vez, al dueño directo del capital que se hubiese fijado como valor de la finca al tiempo de constituirse el censo, sin que pueda exigirse ninguna otra prestación, a menos que haya sido estipulada.

Artículo 1652.

En el caso de comiso, o en el de rescisión por cualquier causa del contrato de enfiteusis, el dueño directo deberá abonar las mejoras que hayan aumentado el valor de la finca, siempre que este aumento subsista al tiempo de devolverla.

Si ésta tuviese deterioros por culpa o negligencia del enfiteuta, serán compensables con las mejoras, y en lo que no basten quedará el enfiteuta obligado personalmente a su pago, y lo mismo al de las pensiones vencidas y no prescritas.

Artículo 1653.

A falta de herederos testamentarios descendientes, aseen dientes, cónyuge supérstite y parientes dentro del sexto grado del último enfiteuta, volverá la finca al dueño directo en el estado en que se halle, si no dispuso de ella el enfiteuta en otra forma.

Artículo 1654.

Queda suprimido para lo sucesivo el contrato de subenfiteusis.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS FOROS Y OTROS CONTRATOS ANÁLOGOS AL DE ENFITEUSIS.

241

Artículo 1655.

Los foros y cualesquiera otros gravámenes de naturaleza análoga que se establezcan desde la promulgación de este Código, cuando sean por tiempo indefinido, se regirán por las disposiciones establecidas para el censo enfitéutico en la sección que precede. Si fueren temporales o por tiempo limitado, se estimarán como arrendamientos y se regirán por las disposiciones relativas a este contrato.

Artículo 1656.

El contrato en cuya virtud el dueño del suelo cede su uso para plantar viñas por el tiempo que vivieren las primeras cepas, pagándole el cesionario una renta o pensión anual en frutos o en dinero, se regirá por las reglas siguientes:

Se tendrá por extinguido a los cincuenta años de la concesión. cuando en ésta no se hubiese fijado expresamente otro plazo.

También quedará extinguido por muerte de las primeras cepas o por quedar infructíferas las dos terceras partes de las plantadas.

El cesionario o colono puede hacer renuevos y mugrones durante el tiempo del contrato.• No pierde su carácter este contrato por la facultad de hacer otras plantaciones en el terreno concedido, siempre que sea su principal objeto la plantación de viñas.

El cesionario puede transmitir libremente su derecho a título oneroso o gratuito, pero sin que pueda dividirse el uso de la finca, a no consentirlo expresamente su dueño.

En las enajenaciones a título oneroso, el cedente y el cesionario tendrán recíprocamente los derechos de tanteo y de retracto. conforme a lo prevenido para la enfiteusis y con la obligación de darse el aviso previo que se ordena en el artículo 1.637.

El colono o cesionario puede dimitir o devolver la finca al cedente cuando le convenga, abonando los deterioros causados por su culpa.

El cesionario no tendrá derecho a las mejoras que existan en la finca al tiempo de la extinción del contrato, siempre que sean necesarias o hechas en cumplimiento de lo pactado.

En cuanto a las útiles y voluntarias, tampoco tendrá derecho a su abono, a no haberlas ejecutado con consentimiento por escrito del dueño del terreno, obligándose a abonarlas. En este caso se abonarán dichas mejoras por el valor que tengan al devolver la finca.

El cedente podrá hacer uso de la acción de desahucio por cumplimiento del término del contrato.• Cuando después de terminado el plazo de los cincuenta años o el fijado expresamente por los interesados, continuare el cesionario en el uso y aprovechamiento de la finca por consentimiento tácito del cedente. no podrá aquél ser desahuciado sin el aviso previo que éste deberá darle con un año de antelación para la conclusión del contrato.

CAPÍTULO III. DEL CENSO CONSIGNATIVO

Artículo 1657.

Cuando se pacta el pago en frutos de la pensión del censo consignativo, deberá darse la especie, cantidad y calidad de los mismos, sin que pueda consistir en una parte alícuota de los que produzca la finca acensuada.

Artículo 1658.

La redención del censo consignativo consistirá en la devolución al censualista, de una vez y en metálico, del capital que hubiese entregado para constituir el censo.

242

Artículo 1659.

Cuando se proceda por acción contra la finca acensuada para el pago de pensiones, si lo que reste del valor de la misma no fuera suficiente para cubrir el capital del censo y un 25 por 100 más del mismo, podrá el censualista obligar al censatario a que, a su elección,. redima el censo o complete la garantía, o abandone el resto de la finca a favor de aquél.

Artículo 1660.

También podrá el censualista hacer uso del derecho establecido en el artículo anterior en los demás casos en que el valor de la finca sea insuficiente para cubrir el capital del censo y un 25 por 100 más, sin concurre alguna de las circunstancias siguientes:

Que haya disminuido el valor de la finca por culpa o negligencia del censatario.•

En tal caso éste será además responsable de los daños y perjuicios.

Que haya dejado de pagar la pensión por dos años consecutivos.• Que el censatario haya sido declarado en quiebra, concurso o insolvencia.•

CAPÍTULO IV. DEL CENSO RESERVATIVO

Artículo 1661.

No puede constituirse validamente el censo reservativo sin que preceda la valoración de la finca por estimación conforme de las partes o por justiprecio de peritos.

Artículo 1662.

La redención de este censo se verificará entregando el censatario al censualista, de una vez y en metálico, el capital que se hubiese fijado conforme al artículo anterior.

Artículo 1663.

La disposición del artículo 1.657 es aplicable al censo reservativo.

Artículo 1664.

En los casos previstos en los artículos 1.659 y 1.660, el deudor del censo reservativo sólo podrá ser obligado a redimir el censo, o a que abandone la finca a favor del censualista.

TÍTULO VIII. DE LA SOCIEDAD

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES.

Artículo 1665.

La sociedad es un contrato por el cual dos o más personas se obligan a poner en común dinero, bienes o industria, con ánimo de partir entre sí las ganancias.

243

Artículo 1666.

La sociedad debe tener un objeto lícito y establecerse en interés común de los socios.

Cuando se declare la disolución de una sociedad ilícita, las ganancias se destinarán a los establecimientos de beneficencia del domicilio de la sociedad, y, en su defecto, a los de la provincia.

Artículo 1667.

La sociedad civil se podrá constituir en cualquiera forma, salvo que se aportaren a ella bienes inmuebles o derechos reales, en cuyo caso será necesaria la escritura pública.

Artículo 1668.

Es nulo el contrato de sociedad, siempre que se aporten bienes inmuebles, si no se hace un inventario de ellos, firmado por las partes, que deberá unirse a la escritura.

Artículo 1669.

No tendrán personalidad jurídica las sociedades cuyos pactos se mantengan secretos entre los socios, y en que cada uno de éstos contrate en su propio nombre con los terceros.

Esta clase de sociedades se regirá por las disposiciones relativas a la comunidad de bienes.

Artículo 1670.

Las sociedades civiles, por el objeto a que se consagren, pueden revestir todas las formas reconocidas por el Código de Comercio. En tal caso, les serán aplicables sus disposiciones en cuanto no se opongan a las del presente Código.

Artículo 1671.

La sociedad es universal o particular.

Artículo 1672.

La sociedad universal puede ser de todos los bienes presentes, o de todas las ganancias.

Artículo 1673.

La sociedad de todos los bienes presentes es aquella por la cual las partes ponen en común todos los que actualmente les pertenecen, con ánimo de partirlos entre sí, como igualmente todas las ganancias que adquieran con ellos.

Artículo 1674.

En la sociedad universal de todos los bienes presentes, pasan a ser propiedad común de los socios los bienes que pertenezcan a cada uno, así como todas las ganancias que adquieran con ellos. Puede también pactarse en ella la comunicación recíproca de cualesquiera otras ganancias; pero no pueden comprenderse los bienes que los socios adquieran posteriormente por herencia, legado o donación. aunque si sus frutos.

Artículo 1675.

244

La sociedad universal de ganancias comprende todo lo que adquieran los socios por su industria o trabajo mientras dure la sociedad.

Los bienes muebles o inmuebles que cada socio posee al tiempo de la celebración del contrato, continúan siendo de dominio particular, pasando sólo a la sociedad el usufructo.

Artículo 1676.

El contrato de sociedad universal, celebrado sin determinar su especie, sólo constituye la sociedad universal de ganancias.

Artículo 1677.

No pueden contraer sociedad universal entre sí las personas a quienes está prohibido otorgarse recíprocamente alguna donación o ventaja.

Artículo 1678.

La sociedad particular tiene únicamente por objeto cosas determinadas, su uso, o sus frutos, o una empresa señalada, o el ejercicio de una profesión o arte.

CAPÍTULO SEGUNDO. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DE LOS SOCIOS

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DE LOS SOCIOS ENTRE SÍ.

Artículo 1679.

La sociedad comienza desde el momento mismo de la celebración del contrato, si no se ha pactado otra cosa.

Artículo 1680.

La sociedad dura por el tiempo convenido; a falta de convenio, por el tiempo que dure el negocio que haya servido exclusivamente de objeto a la sociedad, si aquél por su naturaleza tiene una duración limitada; y en cualquier otro caso, por toda la vida de los asociados, salvo la facultad que se les reserva en el artículo 1.700 y lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.704.

Artículo 1681.

Cada uno es deudor a la sociedad de lo que ha prometido aportar a ella.

Queda también sujeto a la evicción en cuanto a las cosas ciertas y determinadas que haya aportado a la sociedad, en los mismos casos y de igual modo que lo está el vendedor respecto del comprador.

Artículo 1682.

El socio que se ha obligado a aportar una suma en dinero y no la ha aportado, es de derecho deudor de los intereses desde el día en que debió aportarla, sin perjuicio de indemnizar, además, los daños que hubiera causado.

Lo mismo tiene lugar respecto a las sumas que hubiese tomado de la caja social, principiando a contarse los intereses desde el día en que las tomó para su beneficio particular.

245

Artículo 1683.

El socio industrial debe a la sociedad las ganancias que durante ella haya obtenido en el ramo de industria que sirve de objeto a la misma.

Artículo 1684.

Cuando un socio autorizado para administrar cobra una cantidad exigible, que le era debida en su propio nombre, de una persona que debía a la sociedad otra cantidad también exigible, debe imputarse lo cobrado en los dos créditos a proporción de su importe, aunque hubiese dado el recibo por cuenta de sólo su haber; pero, si lo hubiere dado por cuenta del haber social. se imputará todo en éste. Lo dispuesto en este artículo se entiende sin perjuicio de que el deudor pueda usar de la facultad que se le concede en el artículo 1.172, en el solo caso de que el crédito personal del socio le sea más oneroso.

Artículo 1685.

El socio que ha recibido por entero su parte en un crédito social sin que hayan cobrado la suya los demás socios, queda obligado, si el deudor cae después en insolvencia, a traer a la masa social lo que recibió, aunque hubiera dado el recibo por sola su parte.

Artículo 1686.

Todo socio debe responder a la sociedad de los daños y perjuicios que ésta haya sufrido por culpa del mismo y no puede compensarlos con los beneficios que por su industria le haya proporcionado.

Artículo 1687.

El riesgo de las cosas ciertas y determinadas, no fungibles, que se aportan a la sociedad para que sólo sean comunes su uso y sus frutos, es del socio propietario.

Si las cosas aportadas son fungibles, o no pueden guardarse sin que se deterioren, o si se aportaron para ser vendidas, el riesgo es de la sociedad. También lo será, a falta de pacto esencial, el de las cosas aportadas con estimación hecha en el inventario, y en este caso la reclamación se limitará al precio en que fueron tasadas.

Artículo 1688.

La sociedad responde a todo socio de las cantidades que haya desembolsado por ella y del interés correspondiente; también le responde de las obligaciones que con buena fe haya contraído para los negocios sociales y de los riesgos inseparables de su dirección.

Artículo 1689.

Las perdidas y ganancias se repartirán en conformidad a lo pactado. Si sólo se hubiera pactado la parte de cada uno en las ganancias, será igual su parte en las pérdidas.

A falta de pacto, la parte de cada socio en las ganancias y pérdidas debe ser proporcionada a lo que haya aportado. El socio que lo fuere sólo de industria tendrá una parte igual a la del que menos haya aportado. Si además de su industria hubiere aportado capital, recibirá también la parte proporcional que por él le corresponda.

Artículo 1690.

246

Si los socios se han convenido en confiar a un tercero la designación de la parte de cada uno en las ganancias y pérdidas, solamente podrá ser impugnada la designación hecha por él cuando evidentemente haya faltado a la equidad. En ningún caso podrá reclamar el socio que haya principiado a ejecutar la decisión del tercero, o que no la haya impugnado en el término de tres meses. contados desde que le fue conocida.

La designación de pérdidas y ganancias no puede ser encomendada a uno de los socios.

Artículo 1691.

Es nulo el pacto que excluye a uno o más socios de toda parte en las ganancias o en las pérdidas.

Sólo el socio de industria puede ser eximido de toda responsabilidad en las pérdidas.

Artículo 1692.

El socio nombrado administrador en el contrato social puede ejercer todos los actos administrativos, sin embargo de la oposición de sus compañeros, a no ser que proceda de mala fe; y su poder es irrevocable sin causa legítima.

El poder otorgado después del contrato, sin que en éste se hubiera acordado conferirlo, puede revocarse en cualquier tiempo.

Artículo 1693.

Cuando dos o más socios han sido encargados de la administración social sin determinarse sus funciones, o sin haberse expresado que no podrán obrar los unos sin el consentimiento de los otros, cada uno puede ejercer todos los actos de administración separadamente; pero cualquiera de ellos puede oponerse a las operaciones del otro antes de que éstas hayan producido efecto legal.

Artículo 1694.

En el caso de haberse estipulado que los socios administradores no hayan de funcionar los unos sin el consentimiento de los otros, se necesita el concurso de todos para la validez de los actos, sin que pueda alegarse la ausencia u imposibilidad de alguno de ellos, salvo si hubiere peligro inminente de un daño grave o irreparable para sociedad.

Artículo 1695.

Cuando no se haya estipulado el modo de administrar, se observarán las reglas siguientes:

Todos los socios se considerarán apoderados, y lo que cualquiera de ellos hiciere por sí solo, obligará a la sociedad; pero cada o podrá oponerse a las operaciones de los demás antes que hayan producido efecto legal.

Cada socio puede servirse de las cosas que componen el fondo social según costumbre de la tierra, con tal que no lo haga contra el interés de la sociedad, o de tal modo que impida el uso a que tienen derecho sus compañeros.

Todo socio puede obligar a los demás a costear con él los gastos necesarios para la conservación de las cosas comunes.

Ninguno de los socios puede, sin el consentimiento de los otros, hacer novedad en los bienes inmuebles sociales, aunque alegue que es útil a la sociedad.

Artículo 1696.

247

Cada socio puede por sí solo asociarse un tercero en su parte; pero el asociado no ingresará en la sociedad sin el consentimiento unánime de los socios, aunque aquél sea administrador.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DE LOS SOCIOS CON UN TERCERO.

Artículo 1697.

Para que la sociedad quede obligada con un tercero por los actos de uno de los socios, se requiere:

Que el socio haya obrado en su carácter de tal, por cuenta de la sociedad.• Que tenga poder para obligar a la sociedad en virtud de un mandato expreso a tácito.• Que haya obrado dentro de los límites que le señala su poder o mandato.•

Artículo 1698.

Los socios no quedan obligados solidariamente respecto de las deudas de la sociedad y ninguno puede obligar a los otros por un acto personal, si no le han conferido poder para ello.

La sociedad no queda obligada respecto a tercero por actos que un socio haya realizado en su propio nombre o sin poder de la sociedad para ejecutarlo, pero queda obligada para con el socio en cuanto dichos actos hayan redundado en provecho de ella.

Lo dispuesto en este artículo se entiende sin perjuicio de lo establecido en la regla 1) del artículo 1.695.

Artículo 1699.

Los acreedores de la sociedad son preferentes a los acreedores de cada socio sobre los bienes sociales. Sin perjuicio de este derecho, los acreedores particulares de cada socio pueden pedir el embargo y remate de la parte de éste en el fondo social.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LOS MODOS DE EXTINGUIRSE LA SOCIEDAD

Artículo 1700.

La sociedad se extingue:

Cuando expira el término por que fue constituida.• Cuando se pierde la cosa, o se termina el negocio que le sirve de objeto.• Por muerte, insolvencia, incapacitación o declaración de prodigalidad de cualquiera de los socios, y en el caso previsto en el artículo 1.699.

Por voluntad de cualquiera de los socios, con sujeción a lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.705 y 1.707.•

Se exceptúan de lo dispuesto en los números 3) y 4) de este artículo las sociedades a que se refiere el artículo 1.670, en los casos en que deban subsistir con arreglo al Código de Comercio.

Artículo 1701.

Cuando la cosa especifica, que un socio había prometido aportar a la sociedad, perece antes de efectuada la entrega, su pérdida produce la disolución de la sociedad.

También se disuelve la sociedad en todo caso por la pérdida de la cosa, cuando, reservándose su propiedad el

248

socio que la aporta, sólo ha transferido a la sociedad el uso o goce de la misma.

Pero no se disuelve la sociedad por la pérdida de la cosa cuando ésta ocurre después que la sociedad ha adquirido la propiedad de ella.

Artículo 1702.

La sociedad constituida por tiempo determinado puede prorrogarse por consentimiento de todos los socios.

El consentimiento puede ser expreso o tácito. y se justificará por los medios ordinarios.

Artículo 1703.

Si la sociedad se prorroga después de expirado el término, se entiende que se constituye una nueva sociedad. Si se prorroga antes de expirado el término, continúa la sociedad primitiva.

Artículo 1704.

Es válido el pacto de que, en el caso de morir uno de los socios, continúe la sociedad entre los que sobrevivan. En este caso el heredero del que haya fallecido sólo tendrá derecho a que se haga la partición, fijándola en el día de la muerte de su causante; y no participará de los derechos y obligaciones ulteriores sino en cuanto sean una consecuencia necesaria de lo hecho antes de aquel día. Si el pacto fuere que la sociedad ha de continuar con el heredero, será guardado, sin perjuicio de lo que se determina en el número 4) del artículo 1.700.

Artículo 1705.

La disolución de la sociedad por la voluntad o renuncia de uno de los socios únicamente tiene lugar cuando no se ha señalado término para su duración, o no resulta éste de la naturaleza del negocio.

Para que la renuncia surta efecto, debe ser hecha de buena fe en tiempo oportuno; además debe ponerse en conocimiento de los otros socios.

Artículo 1706.

Es de mala fe la renuncia cuando el que la hace se propone apropiarse para sí solo el provecho que debía ser común. En este caso el renunciante no se libra para con sus socios, y éstos tienen facultad para excluirle de la sociedad.

Se reputa hecha en tiempo inoportuno la renuncia, cuando, no hallándose las cosas íntegras, la sociedad está interesada en que se dilate su disolución. En este caso continuará la sociedad hasta la terminación de los negocios pendientes.

Artículo 1707.

No puede un socio reclamar la disolución de la sociedad que, ya sea por disposición del contrato, ya por la naturaleza del negocio, ha sido constituida por tiempo determina do, a no intervenir justo motivo, como el de faltar uno de los compañeros a sus obligaciones, el de inhabilitarse para los negocios sociales, u otro semejante, a juicio de los Tribunales.

Artículo 1708.

La partición entre socios se rige por las reglas de la de las herencias, así en su forma como en las obligaciones

249

que de ella resultan. Al socio de industria no puede aplicarse ninguna parte de los bienes aportados, sino sólo sus frutos y los beneficios, conforme a lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.689, a no haberse pactado expresamente lo contrario.

TÍTULO IX. DEL MANDATO

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA NATURALEZA, FORMA Y ESPECIES DEL MANDATO

Artículo 1709.

Por el contrato de mandato se obliga una persona a prestar algún servicio o hacer alguna cosa, por cuenta o encargo de otra.

Artículo 1710.

El mandato puede ser expreso o tácito.

El expreso puede darse por instrumento público o privado y aun de palabra.

La aceptación puede ser también expresa o tácita, deducida esta última de los actos del mandatario.

Artículo 1711.

A falta de pacto en contrario, el mandato se supone gratuito.

Esto no obstante, si el mandatario tiene por ocupación el desempeño de servicios de la especie a que se refiera el mandato, se presume la obligación de retribuirlo.

Artículo 1712.

El mandato es general o especial.

El primero comprende todos los negocios del mandato.

El segundo, uno o más negocios determinados.

Artículo 1713.

El mandato, concebido en términos generales, no comprende más que los actos de administración.

Para transigir, enajenar, hipotecar o ejecutar cualquier otro acto de riguroso dominio, se necesita mandato expreso.

La facultad de transigir no autoriza para comprometer en árbitros o amigables componedores.

Artículo 1714.

El mandatario no puede traspasar los límites del mandato.

Artículo 1715.

250

No se consideran traspasados los límites del mandato si fuese cumplido de una manera más ventajosa para el mandante que la señalada por éste.

Artículo 1716.

El menor emancipado puede ser mandatario, pero el mandante sólo tendrá acción contra él en conformidad a lo dispuesto respecto a las obligaciones de los menores.

Artículo 1717.

Cuando el mandatario obra en su propio nombre, el mandante no tiene acción contra las personas con quienes el mandatario ha contratado, ni éstas tampoco contra el mandante.

En este caso el mandatario es el obligado directamente en favor de la persona con quien ha contratado, como si el asunto fuera personal suyo. Exceptúase el caso en que se trate de cosas propias del mandante. Lo dispuesto en este artículo se entiende sin perjuicio de las acciones entre mandante y mandatario.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL MANDATARIO

Artículo 1718.

El mandatario queda obligado por la aceptación a cumplir el mandato, y responde de los daños y perjuicios que, de no ejecutarlo, se ocasionen al mandante.

Debe también acabar el negocio que ya estuviese comenzado al morir el mandante, si hubiere peligro en la tardanza.

Artículo 1719.

En la ejecución del mandato ha de arreglarse el mandatario a las instrucciones del mandante.

A falta de ellas, hará todo lo que, según la naturaleza del negocio, haría un buen padre de familia.

Artículo 1720.

Todo mandatario está obligado a dar cuenta de sus operaciones y a abonar al mandante cuanto haya recibido en virtud del mandato, aun cuando lo recibido no se debiera al segundo.

Artículo 1721.

El mandatario puede nombrar sustituto si el mandante no se lo ha prohibido; pero responde de la gestión del sustituto:

Cuando no se le dio facultad para nombrarlo.• Cuando se le dio esta facultad, pero sin designar la persona, y el nombrado era notoriamente incapaz o insolvente.

Lo hecho por el sustituto nombrado contra la prohibición del mandante será nulo.

Artículo 1722.

251

En los casos comprendidos en los dos números del artículo anterior puede además el mandante dirigir su acción contra el sustituto.

Artículo 1723.

La responsabilidad de dos o más mandatarios, aunque hayan sido instituidos simultáneamente, no es solidaria, si no se ha expresado así.

Artículo 1724.

El mandatario debe intereses de las cantidades que aplicó a usos propios desde el día en que lo hizo, y de las que quede debiendo después de fenecido el mandato, desde que se haya constituido en mora.

Artículo 1725.

El mandatario que obre en concepto de tal no es responsable personalmente a la parte con quien contrata, sino cuando se obliga a ello expresamente o traspasa los límites del mandato sin darle conocimiento suficiente de sus poderes.

Artículo 1726.

El mandatario es responsable no solamente del dolo, sino también de la culpa, que deberá estimarse con más o menos rigor por los Tribunales según que el mandato haya sido o no retribuido.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL MANDANTE

Artículo 1727.

El mandante debe cumplir todas las obligaciones que el mandatario haya contraído dentro de los límites del mandato.

En lo que el mandatario se haya excedido, no queda obligado el mandante sino cuando lo ratifica expresa o tácitamente.

Artículo 1728.

El mandante debe anticipar al mandatario, si éste lo pide, las cantidades necesarias para la ejecución del mandato.

Si el mandatario las hubiera anticipado, debe reembolsarlas el mandante, aunque el negocio no haya salido bien, con tal que esté exento de culpa el mandatario.

El reembolso comprenderá los intereses de la cantidad anticipada, a contar desde el día en que se hizo la anticipación.

Artículo 1729.

Debe también el mandante indemnizar al mandatario de todos los daños y perjuicios que le haya causado el cumplimiento del mandato, sin culpa ni imprudencia del mismo mandatario.

Artículo 1730.

252

El mandatario podrá retener en prenda las cosas que son objeto del mandato hasta que el mandante realice la indemnización y reembolso de que tratan los dos artículos anteriores.

Artículo 1731.

Si dos o más personas han nombrado un mandatario para un negocio común, le quedan obligadas solidariamente para todos los efectos del mandato.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LOS MODOS DE ACABARSE EL MANDATO

Artículo 1732.

El mandato se acaba:

Por su revocación.• Por la renuncia del mandatario.• Por muerte, incapacitación, declaración de prodigalidad, quiebra o insolvencia del mandante o del mandatario.

Artículo 1733.

El mandante puede revocar el mandato a su voluntad, y compeler al mandatario a la devolución del documento en que conste el mandato.

Artículo 1734.

Cuando el mandato se haya dado para contratar con determinadas personas, su revocación no puede perjudicar a éstas si no se les ha hecho saber.

Artículo 1735.

El nombramiento de nuevo mandatario para el mismo negocio produce la revocación del mandato anterior desde el día en que se hizo saber al que lo había recibido, salvo lo dispuesto en el artículo que precede.

Artículo 1736.

El mandatario puede renunciar al mandato poniéndolo en conocimiento del mandante. Si éste sufriere perjuicios por la renuncia, deberá indemnizarle de ellos el mandatario, a menos que funde su renuncia en la imposibilidad de continuar desempeñando el mandato sin grave detrimento suyo.

Artículo 1737.

El mandatario, aunque renuncie al mandato con justa causa, debe continuar su gestión hasta que el mandante haya podido tomar las disposiciones necesarias para ocurrir a esta falta.

Artículo 1738.

Lo hecho por el mandatario, ignorando la muerte del mandante u otra cualquiera de las causas que hacen cesar el mandato, es válido y surtirá todos sus efectos respecto a los terceros que hayan contratado con él de buena fe.

253

Artículo 1739.

En el caso de morir el mandatario, deberán sus herederos ponerlo en conocimiento del mandante y proveer entre tanto a lo que las circunstancias exijan en interés de éste.

TÍTULO X. DEL PRÉSTAMO

Disposiciones Generales

Artículo 1740.

Por el contrato de préstamo, una de las partes entrega a la otra, o alguna cosa no fungible para que use de ella por cierto tiempo y se la devuelva, en cuyo caso se llama comodato, o dinero u otra cosa fungible, con condición de devolver otro tanto de la misma especie y calidad, en cuyo caso conserva simplemente el nombre de préstamo. El comodato es esencialmente gratuito.

El simple préstamo puede ser gratuito o con pacto de pagar interés.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DEL COMODATO

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA NATURALEZA DEL COMODATO

Artículo 1741.

El comodante conserva la propiedad de la cosa prestada. El comodatario adquiere el uso de ella, pero no los frutos; si interviene algún emolumento que haya de pagar el que adquiere el uso, la convención deja de ser comodato.

Artículo 1742.

Las obligaciones y derechos que nacen del comodato pasan a los herederos de ambos contrayentes, a no ser que el préstamo se haya hecho en contemplación a la persona del comodatario, en cuyo caso los herederos de éste no tienen derecho a continuar en el uso de la cosa prestada.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL COMODATARIO

Artículo 1743.

El comodatario está obligado a satisfacer los gastos ordinarios que sean de necesidad para el uso y conservación de la cosa prestada.

Artículo 1744.

Si el comodatario destina la cosa a un uso distinto de aquel para que se prestó, o la conserva en su poder por más tiempo del convenido, será responsable de su pérdida, aunque ésta sobrevenga por caso fortuito.

Artículo 1745.

Si la cosa se entregó con tasación y se pierde, aunque sea por caso fortuito, responderá el comodatario del precio, a no haber pacto en que expresamente se le exima de responsabilidad.

254

Artículo 1746.

El comodatario no responde de los deterioros que sobrevengan a la cosa prestada por el solo efecto del uso y sin culpa suya.

Artículo 1747.

El comodatario no puede retener la cosa prestada a pretexto de lo que el comodante le deba, aunque sea por razón de expensas.

Artículo 1748.

Todos los comodatarios a quienes se presta conjuntamente una cosa responden solidariamente de ella, al tenor de lo dispuesto en esta sección.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL COMODANTE.

Artículo 1749.

El comodante no puede reclamar la cosa prestada sino después de concluido el uso para que la prestó. Sin embargo, si antes de estos plazos tuviere el comodante urgente necesidad de ella, podrá reclamar la restitución.

Artículo 1750.

Si no se pactó la duración del comodato ni el uso a que había de destinarse la cosa prestada, y éste no resulta determinado por la costumbre de la tierra, puede el comodante reclamarla a su voluntad.

En caso de duda, incumbe la prueba al comodatario.

Artículo 1751.

El comodante debe abonar los gastos extraordinarios causados durante el contrato para la conservación de la cosa prestada, siempre que el comodatario lo ponga en su conocimiento antes de hacerlos, salvo cuando fueren tan urgentes que no pueda esperarse resultado del aviso sin peligro.

Artículo 1752.

El comodante que, conociendo los vicios de la cosa prestada, no los hubiere hecho saber al comodatario, responderá a éste de los daños que por aquella causa hubiese sufrido.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL SIMPLE PRÉSTAMO

Artículo 1753.

El que recibe en préstamo dinero u otra cosa fungible, adquiere su propiedad, y está obligado a devolver al acreedor otro tanto de la misma especie y calidad.

Artículo 1754.

La obligación del que toma dinero a préstamo se regirá por lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.170 de este Código.

255

Si lo prestado es otra cosa fungible, o una cantidad de metal no amonedado, el deudor debe una cantidad igual a la recibida y de la misma especie y calidad, aunque sufra alteración en su precio.

Artículo 1755.

No se deberán intereses sino cuando expresamente se hubiesen pactado.

Artículo 1756.

El prestatario que ha pagado intereses sin estar estipulados no puede reclamarlos ni imputarlos al capital.

Artículo 1757.

Los establecimientos de préstamos sobre prendas quedan, además, sujetos a los Reglamentos que les conciernen.

TÍTULO XI. DEL DEPÓSITO

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DEL DEPÓSITO EN GENERAL Y DE SUS DIVERSAS ESPECIES

Artículo 1758.

Se constituye el depósito desde que uno recibe la cosa ajena con la obligación de guardarla y de restituirla.

Artículo 1759.

El depósito puede constituirse judicial o extrajudicialmente.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL DEPÓSITO PROPIAMENTE DICHO.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA NATURALEZA Y ESENCIA DEL CONTRATO DE DEPÓSITO.

Artículo 1760.

El depósito es un contrato gratuito, salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 1761.

Sólo pueden ser objeto del depósito las cosas muebles.

Artículo 1762.

El depósito extrajudicial es necesario o voluntario.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL DEPÓSITO VOLUNTARIO

Artículo 1763.

Depósito voluntario es aquel en que se hace la entrega por la voluntad del depositante. También puede

256

realizarse el depósito por dos o más personas que se crean con derecho a la cosa depositada, en un tercero, que hará la entrega, en su caso, a la que corresponda.

Artículo 1764.

Si una persona capaz de contratar acepta el depósito hecho por otra incapaz, queda sujeta a todas las obligaciones del depositario y puede ser obligada a la devolución por el tutor, curador o administrador de la persona que hizo el depósito, o por ésta misma, si llega a tener capacidad.

Artículo 1765.

Si el depósito ha sido hecho por una persona capaz en otra que no lo es, sólo tendrá el depositante acción para reivindicar la cosa depositada mientras exista en poder del depositario, o a que éste le abone la cantidad en que se hubiese enriquecido con la cosa o con el precio.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL DEPOSITARIO

Artículo 1766.

El depositario está obligado a guardar la cosa y restituirla, cuando le sea pedida, al depositante, o a sus causahabientes, o a la persona que hubiese sido designada en el contrato. Su responsabilidad, en cuanto a la guarda y la pérdida de la cosa, se regirá por lo dispuesto en el título I de este libro.

Artículo 1767.

El depositario no puede servirse de la cosa depositada sin permiso expreso del depositante.

En caso contrario responderá de los daños y perjuicios.

Artículo 1768.

Cuando el depositario tiene permiso para servirse o usar de la cosa depositada, el contrato pierde el concepto de depósito y se convierte en préstamo o comodato.

El permiso no se presume, debiendo probarse su existencia.

Artículo 1769.

Cuando la cosa depositada se entrega cerrada y sellada, debe restituirla el depositario en la misma forma, y responderá de los daños y perjuicios si hubiese sido forzado el sello o cerradura por su culpa.

Se presume la culpa en el depositario, salvo la prueba en contrario. En cuanto al valor de lo depositado, cuando la fuerza sea imputable al depositario, se estará a la declaración del depositante, a no resultar prueba en contrario.

Artículo 1770.

La cosa depositada será devuelta con todos sus productos y accesiones.

Consistiendo el depósito en dinero, se aplicará al depositario lo dispuesto al respecto al mandatario en el artículo 1.724.

257

Artículo 1771.

El depositario no puede exigir que el depositan te pruebe ser propietario de la cosa depositada.

Sin embargo, si llega a descubrir que la cosa ha sido hurtada y quién es su verdadero dueño, debe hacer saber a éste el depósito. Si el dueño, a pesar de esto, no reclama en el término de un mes, quedará libre de toda responsabilidad el depositario devolviendo la cosa depositada a aquel de quien la recibió.

Artículo 1772.

Cuando sean dos o más los depositantes, si no fueren solidarios y la cosa admitiere división, no podrá pedir cada uno de ellos más que su parte.

Cuando haya solidaridad, o la cosa no admita división, regirá lo dispuesto en los artículos 1.141 y 1.142 de este Código.

Artículo 1773.

Cuando el depositante pierde, después de hacer el depósito, su capacidad para contratar, no puede devolverse el depósito sino a los que tengan la administración de sus bienes y derechos.

Artículo 1774.

Cuando al hacerse el depósito se designó lugar para la devolución, el depositario debe llevar a él la cosa depositada; pero los gastos que ocasione la traslación serán de cargo del depositante. No habiéndose designado lugar para la devolución, deberá ésta hacerse en el que se halle la cosa depositada, aunque no sea el mismo en que se hizo el depósito, con tal que no haya intervenido malicia de parte del depositario.

Artículo 1775.

El depósito debe ser restituido al depositante cuando lo reclame, aunque en el contrato se haya dado un plazo o tiempo determinado para la devolución.

Esta disposición no tendrá lugar cuando judicialmente haya sido embargado el depósito en poder del depositario, o se haya notificado a éste la oposición de un tercero a la restitución o traslación de la cosa depositada.

Artículo 1776.

El depositario que tenga justos motivos para no conservar el depósito podrá, aun antes del término designado, restituirlo al depositante, y, si éste lo resiste, podrá obtener del Juez su consignación.

Artículo 1777.

El depositario que por fuerza mayor hubiese perdido la cosa depositada y recibido otra en su lugar estará obligado a entregar ésta al depositante.

Artículo 1778.

El heredero del depositario que de buena fe haya vendido la cosa que ignoraba ser depositada, sólo está obligado a restituir el precio que hubiese recibido o a ceder sus acciones contra el comprador en el caso de que el precio no se le haya pagado.

258

SECCIÓN CUARTA. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES DEL DEPOSITANTE.

Artículo 1779.

El depositante está obligado a reembolsar al depositario los gastos que haya hecho para la conservación de la cosa depositada y a indemnizarle de todos los perjuicios que se le hayan seguido del depósito.

Artículo 1780.

El depositario puede retener en prenda la cosa depositada hasta el completo pago de lo que se le deba por razón del depósito.

SECCIÓN QUINTA. DEL DEPÓSITO NECESARIO.

Artículo 1781.

Es necesario el depósito:

Cuando se hace en cumplimiento de una obligación legal.• Cuando tiene lugar con ocasión de alguna calamidad, como incendio, ruina, saqueo, naufragio u otros semejantes.

Artículo 1782.

El depósito comprendido en el número 1) del artículo anterior se regirá por las disposiciones de la ley que lo establezca, y, en su defecto, por las del depósito voluntario.

El comprendido en el número 2) se regirá por las reglas del depósito voluntario.

Artículo 1783.

Se reputa también depósito necesario el de los efectos introducidos por los viajeros en las fondas y mesones. Los fondistas o mesoneros responden de ellos como tales depositarios, con tal de que se hubiese dado conocimiento a los mismos, o a sus dependientes, de los efectos introducidos en su casa, y que los viajeros, por su parte, observen las prevenciones que dichos posaderos o sus sustitutos les hubiesen hecho sobre cuidado y vigilancia de los efectos.

Artículo 1784.

La responsabilidad a que se refiere el artículo anterior comprende los daños hechos en los efectos de los viajeros, tanto por los criados o dependientes de los fondistas o mesoneros como por los extraños, pero no los que provengan de robo a mano armada o sean ocasionados por otro suceso de fuerza mayor.

CAPÍTULO III. DEL SECUESTRO

Artículo 1785.

El depósito judicial o secuestro tiene lugar cuando se decreta el embargo o el aseguramiento de bienes litigiosos.

Artículo 1786.

259

El secuestro puede tener por objeto así los bienes muebles como los inmuebles.

Artículo 1787.

El depositario de los bienes u objetos secuestrados no puede quedar libre de su encargo hasta que se termine la controversia que lo motivó, a no ser que el Juez lo ordenare por consentir en ello todos los interesados o por otra causa legítima.

Artículo 1788.

El depositario de bienes secuestrados está obligado a cumplir respecto de ellos todas las obligaciones de un buen padre de familia.

Artículo 1789.

En lo que no se hallare dispuesto en este Código, el secuestro judicial se regirá por las disposiciones de la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

TÍTULO XII. DE LOS CONTRATOS ALEATORIOS O DE SUERTE.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIÓN GENERAL

Artículo 1790.

Por el contrato aleatorio, una de las partes, o ambas recíprocamente, se obligan a dar o hacer alguna cosa en equivalencia de lo que la otra parte ha de dar o hacer para el caso de un acontecimiento incierto o que ha de ocurrir en tiempo indeterminado.

CAPÍTULO II. DEL CONTRATO DE SEGURO

Artículo 1791. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1792. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1793. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1794. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1795. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1796. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

Artículo 1797. (Derogado por la Ley 50/1980, de 8 de Octubre del Contrato de seguro.)

CAPÍTULO III. DEL JUEGO Y DE LA APUESTA

Artículo 1798.

260

La Ley no concede acción para reclamar lo que se gana en un juego de suerte, envite o azar, pero el que pierde no puede repetir lo que haya pagado voluntariamente, a no ser que hubiese mediado dolo, o que fuera menor, o que estuviera inhabilitado para administrar sus bienes.

Artículo 1799.

Lo dispuesto en el artículo anterior respecto del juego es aplicable a las apuestas.

Se consideran prohibidas las apuestas que tienen analogía con los juegos prohibidos.

Artículo 1800.

No se consideran prohibidos los juegos que contribuyen al ejercicio del cuerpo, como son los que tienen por objeto adiestrarse en el manejo de las armas, las carreras a pie o a caballo, las de carros, el juego de pelota y otros de análoga naturaleza.

Artículo 1801.

El que pierde en un juego o apuesta de los no prohibidos queda obligado civilmente.

La Autoridad judicial puede, sin embargo, no estimar la demanda cuando la cantidad que se cruzó en el juego o en la apuesta sea excesiva, o reducir la obligación en lo que excediere de los usos de un buen padre de familia.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA RENTA VITALICIA

Artículo 1802.

El contrato aleatorio de renta vitalicia obliga al deudor a pagar una pensión o rédito anual durante la vida de una o más personas determinadas por un capital en bienes muebles o inmuebles, cuyo dominio se le transfiere desde luego con la carga de la pensión.

Artículo 1803.

Puede constituirse la renta sobre la vida del que da el capital, sobre la de un tercero o sobre la de varias personas.

También puede constituirse a favor de aquella o aquellas personas sobre cuya vida se otorga, o a favor de otra u otras personas distintas.

Artículo 1804.

Es nula la renta constituida sobre la vida de una persona muerta a la fecha del otorgamiento, o que en el mismo tiempo se halle padeciendo una enfermedad que llegue a causar su muerte dentro de los veinte días siguientes a aquella fecha.

Artículo 1805.

La falta de pago de las pensiones vencidas no autoriza al perceptor de la renta vitalicia a exigir el reembolso del capital ni a volver a entrar en la posesión del predio enajenado; sólo tendrá derecho a reclamar judicialmente el pago de las rentas atrasadas y el aseguramiento de las futuras.

261

Artículo 1806.

La renta correspondiente al año en que muere el que la disfruta se pagará en proporción a los días que hubiese vivido; si debía satisfacerse por plazos anticipados se pagará el importe total del plazo que durante su vida hubiese empezado a correr.

Artículo 1807.

El que constituye a título gratuito una renta sobre sus bienes, puede disponer, al tiempo del otorgamiento, que no estará sujeta dicha renta a embargo por obligaciones del pensionista.

Artículo 1808.

No puede reclamarse la renta sin justificar la existencia de la persona sobre cuya vida esté constituida.

TÍTULO XIII. DE LAS TRANSACCIONES Y COMPROMISOS.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LAS TRANSACCIONES

Artículo 1809.

La transacción es un contrato por el cual las partes, dando, prometiendo o reteniendo cada una alguna cosa, evitan la provocación de un pleito o ponen término al que había comenzado.

Artículo 1810.

Para transigir sobre los bienes y derechos de los hijos bajo la patria potestad se aplicarán las mismas reglas que para enajenarlos.

Artículo 1811.

El tutor no puede transigir sobre los derechos de la persona que tiene en guarda sino en la forma prescrita en el presente Código.

Artículo 1812.

Las corporaciones que tengan personalidad jurídica sólo podrán transigir en la forma y con los requisitos que necesiten para enajenar sus bienes.

Artículo 1813.

Se puede transigir sobre la acción civil proveniente de un delito; pero no por eso se extinguirá la acción pública para la imposición de la pena legal.

Artículo 1814.

No se puede transigir sobre el estado civil de las personas ni sobre las cuestiones matrimoniales, ni sobre alimentos futuros.

Artículo 1815.

262

La transacción no comprende sino los objetos expresados determinadamente en ella, o que, por una inducción necesaria de sus palabras deban reputarse comprendidos en la misma.

La renuncia general de derechos se entiende sólo de los que tienen relación con la disputa sobre que ha recaído la transacción.

Artículo 1816.

La transacción tiene para las partes la autoridad de la cosa juzgada pero no procederá la vía de apremio sino tratándose del cumplimiento de la transacción judicial.

Artículo 1817.

La transacción en que intervenga error, dolo, violencia o falsedad de documentos está sujeta a lo dispuesto en el artículo 1.265 de este Código.

Sin embargo, no podrá una de las partes oponer el error de hecho a la otra siempre que ésta se haya apartado por la transacción de un pleito comenzado.

Artículo 1818.

El descubrimiento de nuevos documentos no es causa para anular o rescindir la transacción si no ha habido mala fe.

Artículo 1819.

Si estando decidido un pleito por sentencia firme se celebrase transacción sobre él por ignorar la existencia de la sentencia firme alguna de las partes interesadas podrá ésta pedir que se rescinda la transacción.

La ignorancia de una sentencia que pueda revocarse no es causa para atacar la transacción.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS COMPROMISOS.

Artículo 1820. (derogado por la Dip. Derogatoria de la Ley 36/1988, de 5 de diciembre, de Arbitraje.)

Artículo 1821. (derogado por la Dip. Derogatoria de la Ley 36/1988, de 5 de diciembre, de Arbitraje.)

TÍTULO XIV. DE LA FIANZA

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LA NATURALEZA Y EXTENSIÓN DE LA FIANZA.

Artículo 1822.

Por la fianza se obliga uno a pagar o cumplir por un tercero, en el caso de no hacerlo éste.

Si el fiador se obligare solidariamente con el deudor principal se observará lo dispuesto en la sección cuarta, capítulo III, título primero de este libro.

Artículo 1823.

263

La fianza puede ser convencional, legal o judicial, gratuita o a título oneroso.

Puede también constituirse, no sólo a favor del deudor principal, sino al del otro fiador, consintiéndolo, ignorándolo y aun contradiciéndolo éste.

Artículo 1824.

La fianza no puede existir sin una obligación válida. Puede, no obstante, recaer sobre una obligación cuya nulidad pueda ser reclamada a virtud de una excepción puramente personal del obligado, como la de la menor edad.

Exceptúase de la disposición del párrafo anterior el caso de préstamo hecho al hijo de familia.

Artículo 1825.

Puede también prestarse fianza en garantía de deudas futuras, cuyo importe no sea aún conocido; pero no se podrá reclamar contra el fiador hasta que la deuda sea líquida.

Artículo 1826.

El fiador puede obligarse a menos, pero no a más que el deudor principal, tanto en la cantidad como en lo oneroso de las condiciones.

Si se hubiera obligado a más, se reducirá su obligación a los límites de la del deudor.

Artículo 1827.

La fianza no se presume: debe ser expresa y no puede extenderse a más de lo contenido en ella.

Si fuere simple o indefinida, comprenderá no sólo la obligación principal, sino todos sus accesorios, incluso los gastos del juicio, entendiéndose respecto de éstos, que no responderá sino de los que se hayan devengado después que haya sido requerido el fiador para el pago.

Artículo 1828.

El obligado a dar fiador debe presentar persona que tenga capacidad para obligarse y bienes suficientes para responder de la obligación que garantiza. El fiador se entenderá sometido a la jurisdicción del Juez del lugar donde esta obligación deba cumplirse.

Artículo 1829.

Si el fiador viniere al estado de insolvencia, puede el acreedor pedir otro que reúna las cualidades exigidas en el artículo anterior. Exceptúase el caso de haber exigido y pactado el acreedor que se le diera por fiador una persona determinada.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA FIANZA.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA FIANZA ENTRE EL FIADOR Y EL ACREEDOR.

Artículo 1830.

264

El fiador no puede ser compelido a pagar al acreedor sin hacerse antes excusión de todos los bienes del deudor.

Artículo 1831.

La excusión no tiene lugar:

Cuando el fiador haya renunciado expresamente a ella.• Cuando se haya obligado solidariamente con el deudor.• En el caso de quiebra o concurso del deudor.• Cuando éste no pueda ser demandado judicialmente dentro del Reino.•

Artículo 1832.

Para que el fiador pueda aprovecharse del beneficio de la excusión, debe oponerlo al acreedor luego que éste le requiera para el pago, y señalarle bienes del deudor realizables dentro del territorio español, que sean suficientes para cubrir el importe de la deuda.

Artículo 1833.

Cumplidas por el fiador todas las condiciones del artículo anterior, el acreedor negligente en la excusión de los bienes señalados es responsable hasta donde ellos alcancen, de la insolvencia del deudor que por aquel descuido resulte.

Artículo 1834.

El acreedor podrá citar al fiador cuando demande al deudor principal, pero quedará siempre a salvo el beneficio de excusión, aunque se dé sentencia contra los dos.

Artículo 1835.

La transacción hecha por el fiador con el acreedor no surte efecto para con el deudor principal.

La hecha por éste tampoco surte efecto para con el fiador, contra su voluntad.

Artículo 1836.

El fiador de un fiador goza del beneficio de excusión, tanto respecto del fiador como del deudor principal.

Artículo 1837.

Siendo varios los fiadores de un mismo deudor y por una misma deuda, la obligación a responder de ella se divide entre todos. El acreedor no puede reclamar a cada fiador sino la parte que le corresponde satisfacer, a menos que se haya estipulado expresamente la solidaridad. El beneficio de división contra los cofiadores cesa en los mismos casos y por las mismas causas que el de excusión contra el deudor principal.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA FIANZA ENTRE EL DEUDOR Y EL FIADOR.

Artículo 1838.

El fiador que paga por el deudor debe ser indemnizado por éste.

265

La indemnización comprende:

La cantidad total de la deuda.• Los intereses legales de ella desde que se haya hecho saber el pago al deudor, aunque no los produjese para el acreedor.

Los gastos ocasionados al fiador después de poner éste en conocimiento del deudor que ha sido requerido para el pago.

Los daños y perjuicios, cuando procedan.•

La disposición de este artículo tiene lugar aunque la fianza se haya dado ignorándolo el deudor.

Artículo 1839.

El fiador se subroga por el pago en todos los derechos que el acreedor tenía contra el deudor.

Si ha transigido con el acreedor no puede pedir al deudor más de lo que realmente haya pagado.

Artículo 1840.

Si el fiador paga sin ponerlo en noticia del deudor, podrá éste hacer valer contra él todas las excepciones que hubiera podido oponer al acreedor al tiempo de hacerse el pago.

Artículo 1841.

Si la deuda era a plazo y el fiador la pagó antes de su vencimiento, no podrá exigir reembolso del deudor hasta que el plazo venza.

Artículo 1842.

Si el fiador ha pagado sin ponerlo en noticia del deudor, y éste, ignorando el pago, lo repite por su parte, no queda al primero recurso alguno contra el segundo, pero sí contra el acreedor.

Artículo 1843.

El fiador, aun antes de haber pagado, puede proceder contra el deudor principal:

Cuando se ve demandado judicialmente para el pago.• En caso de quiebra, concurso o insolvencia.• Cuando el deudor se ha obligado a relevarle de la fianza en un plazo determinado, y este plazo ha vencido• Cuando la deuda ha llegado a hacerse exigible, por haber cumplido el plazo en que debe satisfacerse.• Al cabo de diez años, cuando la obligación principal no tiene término fijo para su vencimiento, a menos que sea de tal naturaleza que no pueda extinguirse sino en un plazo mayor de los diez años.

En todos estos casos la acción del fiador tiende a obtener relevación de la fianza o una garantía que lo ponga a cubierto de los procedimientos del acreedor y del peligro de insolvencia en el deudor.

SECCIÓN TERCERA. DE LOS EFECTOS DE LA FIANZA ENTRE LOS COFIADORES.

Artículo 1844.

Cuando son dos o más los fiadores de un mismo deudor y por la misma deuda, el que de ellos haya pagado podrá reclamar de cada uno de los otros la parte que proporcionalmente le corresponda satisfacer.

266

Si alguno de ellos resultare insolvente la parte de éste recaerá sobre todos en la misma proporción.

Para que pueda tener lugar la disposición de este artículo, es preciso que se haya hecho pago en virtud de demanda judicial, o hallándose el deudor principal en estado de concurso o quiebra.

Artículo 1845.

En el caso del artículo anterior podrán los cofiadores oponer al que pagó las mismas excepciones que habrían correspondido al deudor principal contra el acreedor y que no fueren puramente personales del mismo deudor.

Artículo 1846.

El subfiador, en caso de insolvencia del fiador por quien se obligó, queda responsable a los cofiadores en los mismos términos que lo estaba el fiador.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA EXTINCIÓN DE LA FIANZA

Artículo 1847.

La obligación del fiador se extingue al mismo tiempo que la del deudor, y por las mismas causas que las demás obligaciones.

Artículo 1848.

La confusión que se verifica en la persona del deudor y en la del fiador cuando uno de ellos hereda al otro, no extingue la obligación del subfiador.

Artículo 1849.

Si el acreedor acepta voluntariamente un inmueble, u otros cualesquiera efectos en pago de la deuda, aunque después los pierda por evicción, queda libre el fiador.

Artículo 1850.

La liberación hecha por el acreedor a uno de los fiadores sin el consentimiento de los otros, aprovecha a todos hasta donde alcance la parte del fiador a quien se ha otorgado.

Artículo 1851.

La prórroga concedida al deudor por el acreedor sin el consentimiento del fiador extingue la fianza.

Artículo 1852.

Los fiadores, aunque sean solidarios, quedan libres de su obligación siempre que por algún hecho del acreedor no puedan quedar subrogados en los derechos, hipotecas y privilegios del mismo.

Artículo 1853.

El fiador puede oponer al acreedor todas las excepciones que competan al deudor principal y sean inherentes a la deuda; mas no las que sean puramente personales del deudor.

267

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA FIANZA LEGAL Y JUDICIAL

Artículo 1854.

El fiador que haya de darse por disposición de la ley o de providencia judicial, debe tener las cualidades prescritas en el artículo 1.828.

Artículo 1855.

Si el obligado a dar fianza en los casos del artículo anterior no la hallase se le admitirá en su lugar una prenda o hipoteca que se estime bastante para cubrir su obligación.

Artículo 1856.

El fiador judicial no puede pedir la excusión de bienes del deudor principal.

El subfiador, en el mismo caso, no puede pedir ni la del deudor ni la del fiador.

TÍTULO XV. DE LOS CONTRATOS DE PRENDA, HIPOTECA Y ANTICRESIS.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES COMUNES A LA PRENDA Y A LA HIPOTECA

Artículo 1857.

Son requisitos esenciales de los contratos de prenda e hipoteca:

Que se constituyan para asegurar el cumplimiento de una obligación principal.• Que la cosa pignorada o hipotecada pertenezca en propiedad al que la empeña o hipoteca.• Que las personas que constituyan la prenda o hipoteca tengan la libre disposición de sus bienes o, en caso de no tenerla, se hallen legalmente autorizadas al efecto.

Las terceras personas extrañas a la obligación principal pueden asegurar ésta pignorando o hipotecando sus propios bienes.

Artículo 1858.

Es también de esencia de estos contratos que, vencida la obligación principal, puedan ser enajenadas las cosas en que consiste la prenda o hipoteca para pagar al acreedor.

Artículo 1859.

El acreedor no puede apropiarse las cosas dadas en prenda o hipoteca, ni disponer de ellas.

Artículo 1860.

La prenda y la hipoteca son indivisibles, aunque la deuda se divida entre los causahabientes del deudor o del acreedor.

No podrá, por tanto, el heredero del deudor que haya pagado parte de la deuda pedir que se extinga

268

proporcionalmente la prenda o la hipoteca mientras la deuda no haya sido satisfecha por completo. Tampoco podrá el heredero del acreedor que recibió su parte de la deuda devolver la prenda ni cancelar la hipoteca en perjuicio de los demás herederos que no hayan sido satisfechos.

Se exceptúa de estas disposiciones el caso en que, siendo varias las cosas dadas en hipoteca o en prenda, cada una de ellas garantice solamente una porción determinada del crédito.

El deudor, en este caso, tendrá derecho a que se extinga la prenda o la hipoteca a medida que satisfaga la parte de deuda de que cada cosa responda especialmente.

Artículo 1861.

Los contratos de prenda e hipoteca pueden asegurar toda clase de obligaciones, ya sean puras, ya estén sujetas a condición suspensiva o resolutoria.

Artículo 1862.

La promesa de constituir prenda o hipoteca sólo produce acción personal entre los contratantes, sin perjuicio de la responsabilidad criminal en que incurriere el que defraudase a otro ofreciendo en prenda o hipoteca como libres las cosas que sabía estaban gravadas, o fingiéndose dueño de las que no le pertenecen.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA PRENDA

Artículo 1863.

Además de los requisitos exigidos en el artículo 1.957, se necesita, para constituir el contrato de prenda, que se ponga en posesión de ésta al acreedor, o a un tercero de común acuerdo.

Artículo 1864.

Pueden darse en prenda todas las cosas muebles que están en el comercio, con tal que sean susceptibles de posesión.

Artículo 1865.

No surtirá efecto la prenda contra tercero si no consta por instrumento público la certeza de la fecha.

Artículo 1866.

El contrato de prenda da derecho al acreedor para retener la cosa en su poder o en el de la tercera persona a quien hubiese sido entregada, hasta que se le pague el crédito.

Si mientras el acreedor retiene la prenda, el deudor contrajese con él otra deuda exigible antes de haberse pagado la primera, podrá aquél prorrogar la retención hasta que se le satisfagan ambos créditos, aunque no se hubiese estipulado la sujeción de la prenda a la seguridad de la segunda deuda.

Artículo 1867.

El acreedor debe cuidar de la cosa dada en prenda con la diligencia de un buen padre de familia; tiene derecho al abono de los gastos hechos para su conservación, y responde de su pérdida o deterioro conforme a las disposiciones de este Código.

269

Artículo 1868.

Si la prenda produce intereses, compensará el acreedor los que perciba con los que se le deben; y, si no se le deben, o en cuanto excedan de los legítimamente debidos, los imputará al capital.

Artículo 1869.

Mientras no llegue el caso de ser expropiado de la cosa dada en prenda, el deudor sigue siendo dueño de ella.

Esto no obstante, el acreedor podrá ejercitar las acciones que competan al dueño de la cosa pignorada para reclamarla o defenderla contra tercero.

Artículo 1870.

El acreedor no podrá usar la cosa dada en prenda sin autorización del dueño, y si lo hiciere o abusare de ella en otro concepto, puede el segundo pedir que se la constituya en depósito.

Artículo 1871.

No puede el deudor pedir la restitución de la prenda contra la voluntad del acreedor mientras no pague la deuda y sus intereses, con las expensas en su caso.

Artículo 1872.

El acreedor a quien oportunamente no hubiese sido satisfecho su crédito, podrá proceder por ante Notario a la enajenación de la prenda. Esta enajenación habrá de hacerse precisamente en subasta pública y con la citación del deudor y del dueño de la prenda en su caso. Si en la primera subasta no hubiese sido enajenada la prenda, podrá celebrarse una segunda con iguales formalidades; y, si tampoco diere resultado, podrá el acreedor hacerse dueño de la prenda. En este caso estará obligado a dar carta de pago de la totalidad de su crédito.

Si la prenda consistiere en valores cotizables, se venderán en la forma prevenida por el Código de Comercio.

Artículo 1873.

Respecto a los Montes de Piedad y demás establecimientos públicos que, por instituto o profesión, prestan sobre prendas, se observarán las leyes y reglamentos que les conciernan y, subsidiariamente, las disposiciones de este título.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA HIPOTECA

Artículo 1874.

Sólo podrán ser objeto del contrato de hipoteca:

Los bienes inmuebles.• Los derechos reales enajenables con arreglo a las leyes, impuestos sobre bienes de aquella clase.•

Artículo 1875.

Además de los requisitos exigidos en el artículo 1.857, es indispensable, para que la hipoteca quede validamente constituida, que el documento en que se constituya sea inscrito en el Registro de la Propiedad.

270

Las personas a cuyo favor establece hipoteca la ley no tienen otro derecho que el de exigir el otorgamiento e inscripción del documento en que haya de formalizarse la hipoteca, salvo lo que dispone la Ley Hipotecaria en favor del Estado, las provincias y los pueblos, por el importe de la última anualidad de los tributos, así como de los aseguradores por el premio del seguro.

Artículo 1876.

La hipoteca sujeta directa e inmediatamente los bienes sobre que se impone, cualquiera que sea su poseedor, al cumplimiento de la obligación para cuya seguridad fue constituida.

Artículo 1877.

La hipoteca se extiende a las accesiones naturales, a las mejoras, a los frutos pendientes y rentas no percibidas al vencer la obligación y al importe de las indemnizaciones concedidas o debidas al propietario por los aseguradores de los bienes hipotecados o en virtud de expropiación por causa de utilidad pública, con las declaraciones, ampliaciones y limitaciones establecidas por la ley, así en el caso de permanecer la finca en poder del que la hipotecó como en el de pasar a manos de un tercero.

Artículo 1878.

El crédito hipotecario puede ser enajenado o cedido a un tercero en todo o en parte, con las formalidades exigidas por la Ley.

Artículo 1879.

El acreedor podrá reclamar del tercer poseedor de los bienes hipotecados el pago de la parte de crédito asegurada con los que el último posee, en los términos y con las formalidades que la ley establece.

Artículo 1880.

La forma, extensión y efectos de la hipoteca, así como lo relativo a su constitución, modificación y extinción y a lo demás que no haya sido comprendido en este capítulo, queda sometido a las prescripciones de la Ley Hipotecaria, que continúa vigente.

CAPÍTULO IV. DE LA ANTICRESIS

Artículo 1881.

Por la anticresis el acreedor adquiere el derecho de percibir los frutos de un inmueble de su deudor, con la obligación de aplicarlos al pago de los intereses, si se debieren, y después al del capital de su crédito.

Artículo 1882.

El acreedor, salvo pacto en contrario, esta obligado a pagar las contribuciones y cargas que pesen sobre la finca.

Lo está asimismo a hacer los gastos necesarios para su conservación y reparación. Se deducirán de los frutos las cantidades que emplee en uno y otro objeto.

Artículo 1883.

271

El deudor no puede readquirir el goce del inmueble sin haber pagado antes enteramente lo que debe a su acreedor.

Pero éste, para librarse de las obligaciones que le impone el artículo anterior, puede siempre obligar al deudor a que entre de nuevo en el goce de la finca salvo pacto en contrario.

Artículo 1884.

El acreedor no adquiere la propiedad del inmueble, por falta de pago de la deuda dentro del plazo convenido.

Todo pacto en contrario será nulo. Pero el acreedor en este caso podrá pedir en la forma que previene la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil, el pago de la deuda o la venta del inmueble.

Artículo 1885.

Los contratantes pueden estipular que se compensen los intereses de la deuda con los frutos de la finca dada en anticresis.

Artículo 1886.

Son aplicables a este contrato el último párrafo del artículo 1.857, el párrafo segundo del artículo 1.866 y los artículos 1.860 y 1.861.

TÍTULO XVI. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES QUE SE CONTRAEN SIN CONVENIO.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DE LOS CUASICONTRATOS.

Artículo 1887.

Son cuasi contratos los hechos lícitos y puramente voluntarios, de los que resulta obligado su autor para con un tercero y a veces una obligación recíproca entre los interesados.

SECCIÓN PRIMERA. DE LA GESTIÓN DE NEGOCIOS AJENOS.

Artículo 1888.

El que se encarga voluntariamente de la agencia o administración de los negocios de otro, sin mandato de éste, está obligado a continuar su gestión hasta el término del asunto y sus incidencias, o a requerir al interesado para que le sustituya en la gestión, si se hallase en estado de poder hacerlo por sí.

Artículo 1889.

El gestor oficioso debe desempeñar su encargo con toda la diligencia de un buen padre de familia, e indemnizar los perjuicios que por su culpa o negligencia se irroguen al dueño de los bienes o negocios que gestione.

Los Tribunales, sin embargo, podrán moderar la importancia de la indemnización según las circunstancias del caso.

Artículo 1890.

272

Si el gestor delegare en otra persona todos o algunos de los deberes de su cargo, responderá de los actos del delegado, sin perjuicio de la obligación directa de éste para con el propietario del negocio.

La responsabilidad de los gestores, cuando fueren dos o más, será solidaria.

Artículo 1891.

El gestor de negocios responderá del caso fortuito cuando acometa operaciones arriesgadas que el dueño no tuviese costumbre de hacer, o cuando hubiese pospuesto el interés de éste al suyo propio.

Artículo 1892.

La ratificación de la gestión por parte del dueño del negocio produce los efectos del mandato expreso.

Artículo 1893.

Aunque no hubiese ratificado expresamente la gestión ajena, el dueño de bienes o negocios que aproveche las ventajas de la misma será responsable de las obligaciones contraídas en su interés, e indemnizará al gestor los gastos necesarios y útiles que hubiese hecho y los perjuicios que hubiese sufrido en el desempeño de su cargo. La misma obligación le incumbirá cuando la gestión hubiera tenido por objeto evitar algún perjuicio inminente y manifiesto, aunque de ella no resultase provecho alguno.

Artículo 1894.

Cuando, sin conocimiento del obligado a prestar alimentos, los diese un extraño, éste tendrá derecho a reclamar los de aquél, a no constar que los dio por oficio de piedad y sin ánimo de reclamarlos. Los gastos funerarios proporcionados a la calidad de la persona y a los usos de la localidad deberán ser satisfechos, aunque el difunto no hubiese dejado bienes, por aquellos que en vida habrían tenido la obligación de alimentarle.

SECCIÓN SEGUNDA. DEL COBRO DE LO INDEBIDO.

Artículo 1895.

Cuando se recibe alguna cosa que no había derecho a cobrar, y que por error ha sido indebidamente entrega da, surge la obligación de restituirla.

Artículo 1896.

El que acepta un pago indebido, si hubiera procedido de mala fe, deberá abonar el interés legal cuando se trate de capitales, o los frutos percibidos o debidos percibir cuando la cosa recibida los produjere.

Además responderá de los menoscabos que la cosa haya sufrido por cualquiera causa, y de los perjuicios que se irrogaren al que la entregó, hasta que la recobre. No se prestará el caso fortuito cuando hubiese podido afectar del mismo modo a las cosas hallándose en poder del que las entregó.

Artículo 1897.

El que de buena fe hubiera aceptado un pago indebido de cosa cierta y determinada, sólo responderá de las desmejoras o pérdidas de ésta y de sus accesiones, en cuanto por ellas se hubiese enriquecido. Si la hubiese enajenado, restituirá el precio o cederá la acción para hacerlo efectivo.

273

Artículo 1898.

En cuanto al abono de mejoras y gastos hechos por el que indebidamente recibió la cosa, se estará a lo dispuesto en el título V del libro segundo.

Artículo 1899.

Queda exento de la obligación de restituir el que, creyendo de buena fe que se hacia el pago por cuenta de un crédito legítimo y subsiguiente, hubiese inutilizado el título, o dejado prescribir la acción, o abandonado las prendas, o cancelado las garantías de su derecho. El que pagó indebidamente sólo podrá dirigirse contra el verdadero deudor o los fiadores respecto de los cuales la acción estuviese viva.

Artículo 1900.

La prueba del pago incumbe al que pretende haberlo hecho. También corre a su cargo la del error con que lo realizó, a menos que el demandado negare haber recibido la cosa que se le reclame. En este caso, justificada por el demandante la entrega, queda relevado de toda prueba. Esto no limita el derecho del demandado para acreditar que le era debido lo que se supone que recibió.

Artículo 1901.

Se presume que hubo error en el pago cuando se entregó cosa que nunca se debió o que ya estaba pagada; pero aquel a quien se pida la devolución puede probar que la entrega se hizo a título de liberalidad o por otra causa justa.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LAS OBLIGACIONES QUE NACEN DE CULPA O NEGLIGENCIA

Artículo 1902.

El que por acción u omisión causa daño a otro, interviniendo culpa o negligencia, está obligado a reparar el daño causado.

Artículo 1903.

La obligación que impone el artículo anterior es exigible, no sólo por los actos u omisiones propios, sino por los de aquellas personas de quienes se debe responder.

Los padres son responsables de los daños causados por los hijos que se encuentren bajo su guarda.

Los tutores lo son de los perjuicios causados por los menores o incapacitados que están bajo su autoridad y habitan en su compañía. Lo son igualmente los dueños o directores de un establecimiento y empresa respecto de los perjuicios causados por sus dependientes en el servicio de los ramos en que los tuvieran empleados, o con ocasión de sus funciones.

Las personas o entidades que sean titulares de un Centro docente de enseñanza no superior responderán por los daños y perjuicios que causen sus alumnos menores de edad durante los períodos de tiempo en que los mismos se hallen bajo el control o vigilancia del profesorado del Centro, desarrollando actividades escolares o extraescolares y complementarias.

La responsabilidad de que trata este artículo cesará cuando las personas en él mencionadas prueben que emplearon toda la diligencia de un buen padre de familia para prevenir el daño.

274

Artículo 1904.

El que paga el daño causado por sus dependientes puede repetir de éstos lo que hubiese satisfecho.

Cuando se trate de Centros docentes de enseñanza no superior, sus titulares podrán exigir de los profesores las cantidades satisfechas, si hubiesen incurrido en dolo o culpa grave en el ejercicio de sus funciones que fuesen causa del daño.

Artículo 1905.

El poseedor de un animal, o el que se sirve de él, es responsable de los perjuicios que causare, aunque se le escape o extravíe. Sólo cesará esta responsabilidad en el caso de que el daño proviniera de fuerza mayor o de culpa del que lo hubiese sufrido.

Artículo 1906.

El propietario de una heredad de caza responderá del daño causado por ésta en las fincas vecinas, cuando no haya hecho lo necesario para impedir su multiplicación o cuando haya dificultado la acción de los dueños de dichas fincas para perseguirla.

Artículo 1907.

El propietario de un edificio es responsable de los daños que resulten de la ruina de todo o parte de él, si ésta sobreviniere por falta de las reparaciones necesarias.

Artículo 1908.

Igualmente responderán los propietarios de los daños causados:

Por la explosión de máquinas que no hubiesen sido cuidadas con la debida diligencia, y la inflamación de sustancias explosivas que no estuviesen colocadas en lugar seguro y adecuado.

Por los humos excesivos, que sean nocivos a las personas o a las propiedades.• Por la caída de árboles colocados en sitios de tránsito, cuando no sea ocasionada por fuerza mayor.• Por las emanaciones de cloacas o depósitos de materias infectantes, construidos sin las precauciones adecuadas al lugar en que estuviesen.

Artículo 1909.

Si el daño de que tratan los dos artículos anteriores resultare por defecto de construcción, el tercero que lo sufra sólo podrá repetir contra el arquitecto, o, en su caso, contra el constructor, dentro del tiempo legal.

Artículo 1910.

El cabeza de familia que habita una casa o parte de ella, es responsable de los daños causados por las cosas que se arrojaren o cayeren de la misma.

TÍTULO XVII. DE LA CONCURRENCIA Y PRELACIÓN DE CRÉDITOS.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

275

Artículo 1911.

Del cumplimiento de las obligaciones responde el deudor con todos sus bienes, presentes y futuros.

Artículo 1912.

El deudor puede solicitar judicialmente de sus acreedores quita y espera de sus deudas, o cualquiera de las dos cosas; pero no producirá efectos jurídicos el ejercicio de este derecho sino en los casos y en la forma previstos en la Ley de Enjuiciamiento Civil.

Artículo 1913.

El deudor cuyo pasivo fuese mayor que el activo y hubiese dejado de pagar sus obligaciones corrientes, deberá presentarse en concurso ante el Tribunal competente luego que aquella situación le fuere conocida.

Artículo 1914.

La declaración de concurso incapacita al concursado para la administración de sus bienes y para cualquiera otra que por ley le corresponda. Será rehabilitado en sus derechos, terminado el concurso, si de la calificación de éste no resultase causa que lo impida.

Artículo 1915.

Por la declaración de concurso vencen todas las deudas a plazo del concursado.

Si llegaron a pagarse antes del tiempo prefijado en la obligación, sufrirán el descuento correspondiente al interés legal del dinero.

Artículo 1916.

Desde la fecha de la declaración de concurso dejarán de devengar interés todas las deudas del concurso, salvo los créditos hipotecarios y pignoraticios hasta donde alcance su respectiva garantía.

Si resultare remanente después de pagado el capital de deudas, se satisfarán los intereses, reducidos al tipo legal, salvo si el pactado fuere menor.

Artículo 1917.

Los convenios que el deudor y sus acreedores celebraren judicialmente, con las formalidades de la ley, sobre la quita y espera, o en el concurso, serán obligatorios para todos los concurrentes y para los que, citados y notificados en forma no hubieren protestado en tiempo. Se exceptúan los acreedores que, teniendo derecho de abstenerse, hubiesen usado de él debidamente. Tienen derecho de abstenerse los acreedores comprendidos en los artículos 1.922,1.923 y 1.924.

Artículo 1918.

Cuando el convenio de quita y espera se celebre con acreedores de una misma clase, será obligatorio para todos el acuerdo legal de la mayoría, sin perjuicio de la prelación respectiva de los créditos.

Artículo 1919.

Si el deudor cumpliere el convenio, quedarán extinguidas sus obligaciones en los términos estipulados en el

276

mismo; pero, si dejare de cumplirlo en todo o en parte, renacerá el derecho de los acreedores por las cantidades que no hubiesen percibido de su crédito primitivo, y podrá cualquiera de ellos pedir la declaración o continuación del concurso.

Artículo 1920.

No mediando pacto expreso en contrario entre deudor y acreedores, conservarán éstos su derecho, terminado el concurso, para cobrar, de los bienes que el deudor pueda ulteriormente adquirir, la parte de crédito no realizada.

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA CLASIFICACIÓN DE CRÉDITOS.

Artículo 1921.

Los créditos se clasificarán, para su graduación y pago, por el orden y en los términos que en este capitulo se establecen.

Artículo 1922.

Con relación a determinados bienes muebles del deudor gozan de preferencia:

Los créditos por construcción, reparación, conservación o precio de venta de bienes muebles que estén en poder del deudor, hasta donde alcance el valor de los mismos.

Los garantizados con prenda que se halle en poder del acreedor, sobre la cosa empeñada y hasta donde alcance su valor.

Los garantizados con fianza de efectos o valores, constituida en establecimiento público o mercantil, sobre la fianza y por el valor de los efectos de la misma.

Los créditos por transporte, sobre los efectos transportados, por el precio del mismo, gastos y derechos de conducción y conservación, hasta la entrega y durante treinta días después de ésta.

Los de hospedaje, sobre los muebles del deudor existentes en la posada.• Los créditos por semillas y gastos de cultivo y recolección anticipados al deudor, sobre los frutos de la cosecha para que sirvieron.

Los créditos por alquileres y rentas de un año, sobre los bienes muebles del arrendatario existentes en la finca arrendada y sobre los frutos de la misma.

Si los bienes muebles sobre que recae la preferencia hubieren sido sustraídos, el acreedor podrá reclamarlos de quien los tuviese, dentro del término de treinta días, contados desde que ocurrió la sustracción.

Artículo 1923.

Con relación a determinados bienes inmuebles y derechos reales del deudor, gozan de preferencia:

Los créditos a favor del Estado, sobre los bienes de los contribuyentes, por el importe de la última anualidad vencida y no pagada, de los impuestos que graviten sobre ellos.

Los créditos de los aseguradores, sobre los bienes asegurados, por los premios del seguro de dos años; y, si fuere el seguro mutuo, por los dos últimos dividendos que se hubiesen repartido.

Los créditos hipotecarios y los refaccionarios, anotados e inscritos en el Registro de la Propiedad, sobre los bienes hipotecados o que hubiesen sido objeto de la refacción.

Los créditos preventivamente anotados en el Registro de la Propiedad, en virtud de mandamiento judicial, por embargos, secuestros o ejecución de sentencias, sobre los bienes anotados, y sólo en cuanto a créditos posteriores.

277

Los refaccionarios no anotados ni inscritos sobre los inmuebles a que la refacción se refiera y sólo respecto a otros créditos distintos de los expresados en los cuatro números anteriores.

Artículo 1924.

Con relación a los demás bienes muebles e inmuebles del deudor, gozan de preferencia;

Los créditos a favor de la provincia o del municipio, por los impuestos de la última anualidad vencida y no pagada no comprendidos en el artículo 1.923, número 1.

Los devengados:• Por gastos de justicia y de administración del concurso en interés común de los acreedores, hechos con la debida autorización o aprobación.

Por los funerales del deudor, según el uso del lugar, y también los de su cónyuge y los de sus hijos constituidos bajo su patria potestad, si no tuviesen bienes propios.

Por gastos de la última enfermedad de las mismas personas, causados en el último año, contado desde el día del fallecimiento.

Por los salarios y sueldos de los trabajadores por cuenta ajena y del servicio doméstico correspondientes al último año.

Por las cuotas correspondientes a los regímenes obligatorios de subsidios, seguros sociales y mutualismo laboral por el mismo período de tiempo que señala el apartado anterior, siempre que no tengan reconocida mayor preferencia con arreglo al artículo precedente.

Por anticipaciones hechas al deudor, para sí y su familia constituida bajo su autoridad, en comestibles, vestido o calzado, en el mismo período de tiempo.

Por pensiones alimenticias durante el juicio de concurso, a no ser que se funden en un título de mera liberalidad.

Los créditos que sin privilegio especial consten:• En escritura pública.• En sentencia firme, si hubiesen sido objeto de litigio.•

Estos créditos tendrán preferencia entre sí por el orden de antigüedad de las fechas de las escrituras y de las sentencias.

Artículo 1925.

No gozarán de preferencia los créditos de cualquier otra clase, o por cualquiera otro título, no comprendidos en los artículos anteriores.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA PRELACIÓN DE CRÉDITOS.

Artículo 1926.

Los créditos que gozan de preferencia con relación a determinados bienes muebles excluyen a todos los demás hasta donde alcance el valor del mueble a que la preferencia se refiere.

Si concurren dos o más respecto a determinados muebles, se observarán, en cuanto a la prelación para su pago, las reglas siguientes:

El crédito pignoraticio excluye a los demás hasta donde alcance el valor de la cosa dada en prenda.• En el caso de la fianza, si estuviere ésta legítimamente constituida a favor de más de un acreedor, la prelación entre ellos se determinará por el orden de fechas de la prestación de la garantía.

Los créditos por anticipos de semillas, gastos de cultivo y recolección serán preferidos a los de alquileres y•

278

rentas sobre los frutos de la cosecha para que aquéllos sirvieron. En los demás casos, el precio de los muebles se distribuirá a prorrata entre los créditos que gocen de especial preferencia con relación a los mismos.

Artículo 1927.

Los créditos que gozan de preferencia con relación a determinados bienes inmuebles o derechos reales excluyen a todos los demás por su importe hasta donde alcance el valor del inmueble o derecho real a que la preferencia se refiera.

Si concurrieren dos o más créditos respecto a determinados inmuebles o derechos reales, se observarán, en cuanto a su respectiva prelación, las reglas siguientes:

Serán preferidos, por su orden, los expresados en los números 1) y 2) del artículo 1.923 a los comprendidos en los demás números del mismo.

Los hipotecarios y refaccionarios, anotados o inscritos, que se expresan en el número 3) del citado artículo 1.923 y en los comprendidos en el número 4) del mismo, gozarán de prelación entre sí por el orden de antigüedad de las respectivas inscripciones o anotaciones en el Registro de la Propiedad.

Los refaccionarios no anotados ni inscritos en el Registro a que se refiere el número 5) del artículo 1.923, gozarán de prelación entre si por el orden inverso de su antigüedad.

Artículo 1928.

El remanente del caudal del deudor, después de pagados los créditos que gocen de preferencia con relación a determinados bienes, muebles o inmuebles, se acumulará a los bienes libres que aquél tuviere para el pago de los demás créditos.

Los que, gozando de preferencia con relación a determinados bienes, muebles o inmuebles, no hubiesen sido totalmente satisfechos con el importe de éstos, lo serán, en cuanto al déficit, por el orden y en el lugar que les corresponda según su respectiva naturaleza.

Artículo 1929.

Los créditos que no gocen de preferencia con relación a determinados bienes, y los que gozaren, por la cantidad no realizada o cuando hubiese prescrito el derecho a la preferencia, se satisfarán conforme a las reglas siguientes:

Por el orden establecido en el artículo 1.924.• Los preferentes por fechas, por el orden de éstas; y los que la tuviesen común, a prorrata.• Los créditos comunes a que se refiere el artículo 1.925, sin consideración a sus fechas.•

TÍTULO XVIII. DE LA PRESCRIPCIÓN.

CAPÍTULO PRIMERO. DISPOSICIONES GENERALES

Artículo 1930.

Por la prescripción se adquieren, de la manera y con las condiciones determinadas en la ley, el dominio y demás derechos reales.

279

También se extinguen del propio modo por la prescripción los derechos y las acciones, de cualquier clase que sean.

Artículo 1931.

Pueden adquirir bienes o derechos por medio de la prescripción las personas capaces para adquirirlos por los demás modos legítimos.

Artículo 1932.

Los derechos y acciones se extinguen por la prescripción en perjuicio de toda clase de personas, inclusas las jurídicas, en los términos prevenidos por la ley.

Queda siempre a salvo, a las personas impedidas de administrar sus bienes, el derecho para reclamar contra sus representantes legítimos. cuya negligencia hubiese sido causa de la prescripción.

Artículo 1933.

La prescripción ganada por un copropietario o comunero aprovecha a los demás.

Artículo 1934.

La prescripción produce sus efectos jurídicos a favor y en contra de la herencia antes de haber sido aceptada y durante el tiempo concedido para hacer inventario y para deliberar.

Artículo 1935.

Las personas con capacidad para enajenar pueden renunciar la prescripción ganada; pero no el derecho de prescribir para lo sucesivo.

Entiéndese tácitamente renunciada la prescripción cuando la renuncia resulta de actos que hacen suponer el abandono del derecho adquirido.

Artículo 1936.

Son susceptibles de prescripción todas las cosas que están en el comercio de los hombres.

Artículo 1937.

Los acreedores, y cualquiera otra persona interesada en hacer valer la prescripción, podrán utilizarla a pesar de la renuncia expresa o tácita del deudor o propietario.

Artículo 1938.

Las disposiciones del presente título se entienden sin perjuicio de lo que en este Código o en leyes especiales se establezca respecto a determinados casos de prescripción.

Artículo 1939.

La prescripción comenzada antes de la publicación de este Código se regirá por las leyes anteriores al mismo; pero si desde que fuere puesto en observancia transcurriese todo el tiempo en él exigido para la prescripción, surtirá ésta su efecto, aunque por dichas leyes anteriores se requiriese mayor lapso de tiempo.

280

CAPÍTULO II. DE LA PRESCRIPCIÓN DEL DOMINIO Y DEMÁS DERECHOS REALES.

Artículo 1940.

Para la prescripción ordinaria del dominio y demás derechos reales se necesita poseer las cosas con buena fe y justo título por el tiempo determinado en la ley.

Artículo 1941.

La posesión ha de ser en concepto de dueño, pública, pacífica y no interrumpida.

Artículo 1942.

No aprovechan para la posesión los actos de carácter posesorio ejecutados en virtud de licencia o por mera tolerancia del dueño.

Artículo 1943.

La posesión se interrumpe, para los efectos de la prescripción , natural o civilmente.

Artículo 1944.

Se interrumpe naturalmente la posesión cuando por cualquier causa se cesa en ella por más de un año.

Artículo 1945.

La interrupción civil se produce por la citación judicial hecha al poseedor, aunque sea por mandato de Juez incompetente.

Artículo 1946.

Se considerará no hecha y dejará de producir interrupción la citación judicial:

Si fuere nula por falta de solemnidades legales.• Si el actor desistiere de la demanda o dejare caducar la instancia.• Si el poseedor fuere absuelto de la demanda.•

Artículo 1947.

También se produce interrupción civil por el acto de conciliación, siempre que dentro de dos meses de celebrado se presente ante el Juez la demanda sobre posesión o dominio de la cosa cuestionada.

Artículo 1948.

Cualquier reconocimiento expreso o tácito que el poseedor hiciere del derecho del dueño interrumpe asimismo la posesión.

Artículo 1949.

Contra un título inscrito en el Registro de la Propiedad no tendrá lugar la prescripción ordinaria del dominio o derechos reales en perjuicio de tercero, sino en virtud de otro título igualmente inscrito, debiendo empezar a

281

correr el tiempo desde la inscripción del segundo.

Artículo 1950.

La buena fe del poseedor consiste en la creencia de que la persona de quien recibió la cosa era dueño de ella y podría transmitir su dominio.

Artículo 1951.

Las condiciones de la buena fe exigidas para la posesión en los artículos 433, 434, 435 y 436 de este Código, son igualmente necesarias para la determinación de aquel requisito en la prescripción del dominio y demás derechos reales.

Artículo 1952.

Entiéndese por justo título el que legalmente baste para transferir el dominio o derecho real de cuya prescripción se trate.

Artículo 1953.

El título para la prescripción ha de ser verdadero y válido.

Artículo 1954.

El justo título debe probarse; no se presume nunca.

Artículo 1955.

El dominio de los bienes muebles se prescribe por la posesión no interrumpida de tres años con buena fe.

También se prescribe el dominio de las cosas muebles por la posesión no interrumpida de seis años, sin necesidad de ninguna otra condición.

En cuanto al derecho del dueño para reivindicar la cosa mueble perdida o de que hubiese sido privado ilegalmente, así como respecto a las adquiridas en venta pública, en bolsa, feria o mercado, o de comerciante legalmente establecido y dedicado habitualmente al tráfico de objetos análogos, se estará a lo dispuesto en el artículo 464 de este Código.

Artículo 1956.

Las cosas muebles hurtadas o robadas no podrán ser prescritas por los que las hurtaron o robaron, ni por los cómplices o encubridores, a no haber prescrito el delito o falta, o su pena, y la acción para exigir la responsabilidad civil, nacida del delito o falta.

Artículo 1957.

El dominio y demás derechos reales sobre bienes inmuebles se prescriben por la posesión durante diez años entre presentes y veinte entre ausentes, con buena fe y justo título.

Artículo 1958.

Para los efectos de la prescripción se considera ausente al que reside en el extranjero o en ultramar.

282

Si parte del tiempo estuvo presente y parte ausente, cada dos años de ausencia se reputarán como uno para completar los diez de presente.

La ausencia que no fuere de un año entero y continuo, no se tomará en cuenta para el cómputo.

Artículo 1959.

Se prescriben también el dominio y demás derechos reales sobre los bienes inmuebles por su posesión no interrumpida durante treinta años, sin necesidad de título ni de buena fe, y sin distinción entre presentes y ausentes, salvo la excepción determinada en el artículo 539.

Artículo 1960.

En la computación del tiempo necesario para la prescripción se observarán las reglas siguientes:

El poseedor actual puede completar el tiempo necesario para la prescripción, uniendo al suyo el de su causante.

Se presume que el poseedor actual, que lo hubiera sido en época anterior, ha continuado siéndolo durante el tiempo intermedio, salvo prueba en contrario.

El día en que comienza a contarse el tiempo se tiene por entero; pero el último debe cumplirse en su totalidad.

CAPÍTULO III. DE LA PRESCRIPCIÓN DE LAS ACCIONES.

Artículo 1961.

Las acciones prescriben por el mero lapso del tiempo fijado por la ley.

Artículo 1962.

Las acciones reales sobre bienes muebles prescriben a los seis años de perdida la posesión, salvo que el poseedor haya ganado por menos término el dominio conforme al artículo 1.955, y excepto los casos de extravío y venta pública, y los de hurto o robo, en que se estará a lo dispuesto en el párrafo 3) del mismo artículo citado.

Artículo 1963.

Las acciones reales sobre bienes inmuebles prescriben a los treinta años.

Entiéndese esta disposición sin perjuicio de lo establecido para la adquisición del dominio o derechos reales por prescripción.

Artículo 1964.

La acción hipotecaria prescribe a los veinte años, y las personales que no tengan señalado término especial de prescripción, a los quince.

Artículo 1965.

No prescribe entre coherederos, condueños o propietarios de fincas colindantes la acción para pedir la partición de la herencia, la división de la cosa común o el deslinde de las propiedades contiguas.

283

Artículo 1966.

Por el transcurso de cinco años prescriben las acciones para exigir el cumplimiento de las obligaciones siguientes:

La de pagar pensiones alimenticias.• La de satisfacer el precio de los arriendos, sean éstos de fincas rústicas o de fincas urbanas.• La de cualesquiera otros pagos que deben hacerse por años o en plazos más breves.•

Artículo 1967.

Por el transcurso de tres años prescriben las acciones para el cumplimiento de las obligaciones siguientes:

La de pagar a los jueces, abogados, registradores, notarios, escribanos, peritos, agentes y curiales sus honorarios y derechos, y los gastos y desembolsos que hubiesen realizado en el desempeño de sus cargos u oficios en los asuntos a que las obligaciones se refieran.

La de satisfacer a los farmacéuticos las medicinas que suministraron; a los profesores y maestros sus honorarios y estipendios por la enseñanza que dieron, o por el ejercicio de su profesión, arte u oficio.

La de pagar a los menestrales, criados y jornaleros el importe de sus servicios, y el de los suministros o desembolsos que hubiesen hecho concernientes a los mismos.

La de abonar a los posaderos la comida y habitación, y a los mercaderes el precio de los géneros vendidos a otros que no lo sean, o que siéndolo se dediquen a distinto tráfico.

El tiempo para la prescripción de las acciones a que se refieren los tres párrafos anteriores se contará desde que dejaron de prestarse los respectivos servicios.

Artículo 1968.

Prescriben por el transcurso de un año:

La acción para recobrar o retener la posesión.• La acción para exigir la responsabilidad civil por injuria o calumnia y por las obligaciones derivadas de la culpa o negligencia de que se trata en el artículo 1.902, desde que lo supo el agraviado.

Artículo 1969.

El tiempo para la prescripción de toda clase de acciones, cuando no haya disposición especial que otra cosa determine, se contará desde el día en que pudieron ejercitarse.

Artículo 1970.

El tiempo para la prescripción de las acciones, que tienen por objeto reclamar el cumplimiento de obligaciones de capital, con interés o renta, corre desde el último pago de la renta o del interés. Lo mismo se entiende respecto al capital del censo consignativo. En los censos enfitéutico y reservativo se cuenta asimismo el tiempo de la prescripción desde el último pago de la pensión o renta.

Artículo 1971.

El tiempo de la prescripción de las acciones para exigir el cumplimiento de obligaciones declaradas por sentencia, comienza desde que la sentencia quedó firme.

Artículo 1972.

284

El término de la prescripción de las acciones para exigir rendición de cuentas corre desde el día en que cesaron en sus cargos los que debían rendirlas.

El correspondiente a la acción por el resultado de las cuentas, desde la fecha en que fue éste reconocido por conformidad de las partes interesadas.

Artículo 1973.

La prescripción de las acciones se interrumpe por su ejercicio ante los Tribunales, por reclamación extrajudicial del acreedor y por cualquier acto de reconocimiento de la deuda por el deudor.

Artículo 1974.

La interrupción de la prescripción de acciones en las obligaciones solidarias aprovecha o perjudica por igual a todos los acreedores y deudores.

Esta disposición rige igualmente respecto a los herederos del deudor en toda clase de obligaciones.

En las obligaciones mancomunadas, cuando el acreedor no reclame de uno de los deudores más que la parte que le corresponda, no se interrumpe por ello la prescripción respecto a los otros codeudores.

Artículo 1975.

La interrupción de la prescripción contra el deudor principal por reclamación judicial de la deuda, surte efecto también contra su fiador; pero no perjudicará a éste la que se produzca por reclamaciones extrajudiciales del acreedor o reconocimientos privados del deudor

Artículo 1976.

Quedan derogados todos los cuerpos legales, usos y costumbres que constituyen el derecho civil común en todas las materias que son objeto de este Código, y quedarán sin fuerza y vigor, así en su concepto de leyes directamente obligatorias como en el de derecho supletorio. Esta disposición no es aplicable a las leyes que en este Código se declaran subsistentes.

DISPOSICIONES TRANSITORIAS.

Las variaciones introducidas por este Código, que perjudiquen derechos adquiridos según la legislación civil anterior, no tendrán efecto retroactivo.

Para aplicar la legislación que corresponda, en los casos que no estén expresamente determinados en el Código, se observarán las reglas siguientes:

Se regirán por la legislación anterior al Código los derechos nacidos, según ella, de hechos realizados bajo su régimen, aunque el Código los regule de otro modo o no los reconozca. Pero si el derecho apareciere declarado por primera vez en el Código tendrá efecto, desde luego, aunque el hecho que lo origine se verificara bajo la legislación anterior, siempre que no perjudique a otro derecho adquirido, de igual origen.

Los actos y contratos celebrados bajo el régimen de la legislación anterior, y que sean válidos con arreglo a ella, surtirán todos sus efectos según la misma, con las limitaciones establecidas en estas reglas. En su consecuencia serán válidos los testamentos aunque sean mancomunados, los poderes para testar y las memorias testamentarias que se hubiesen otorgado o escrito antes de regir el Código y producirán su efecto las cláusulas ad cautelam, los fideicomisos para aplicar los bienes según instrucciones reservadas del testador y cualesquiera otros permitidos por la legislación precedente; pero la revocación o modificación de

285

estos actos o de cualquiera de las cláusulas contenidas en ellos no podrá verificarse, después de regir el Código, sino testando con arreglo al mismo. Las disposiciones del Código que sancionan con penalidad civil o privación de derechos actos u omisiones que carecían de sanción en las leyes anteriores, no son aplicables al que, cuando éstas se hallaban vigentes, hubiese incurrido en la omisión o ejecutado el acto prohibido por el Código.

Cuando la falta esté también penada por la legislación anterior, se aplicará la disposición más benigna.

Las acciones y los derechos nacidos y no ejercitados antes de regir el Código subsistirán con la extensión y en los términos que les reconociera la legislación precedente; pero sujetándose, en cuanto a su ejercicio, duración y procedimientos para hacerlos valer, a lo dispuesto en el Código. Si el ejercicio del derecho o de la acción se hallara pendiente de procedimientos oficiales empezados bajo la legislación anterior, y éstos fuesen diferentes de los establecidos por el Código, podrán optar los interesados por unos o por otros.

Quedan emancipados y fuera de la patria potestad los hijos que hubiesen cumplido veintitrés años al empezar a regir el Código; pero si continuaren viviendo en la casa y a expensas de sus padres, podrán éstos conservar el usufructo, la administración y los demás derechos que estén disfrutando sobre los bienes de su peculio, hasta el tiempo en que los hijos deberían salir de la patria potestad según la legislación anterior.

El padre que voluntariamente hubiese emancipado a un hijo, reservándose algún derecho sobre sus bienes adventicios, podrá continuar disfrutándolo hasta el tiempo en que el hijo debería salir de la patria potestad con arreglo a la legislación anterior.

Los padres, las madres y los abuelos que se hallen ejerciendo la curatela de sus descendientes, no podrán retirar las fianzas que tengan constituidas, ni ser obligados a constituirlas si no las hubieran prestado, ni a completarlas si resultaren insuficientes las prestadas.8) Los tutores y curadores nombrados bajo el régimen de la legislación anterior y con sujeción a ella conservarán su cargo, pero sometiéndose, en cuanto a su ejercicio, a las disposiciones del Código. Esta regla es también aplicable a los poseedores y a los administrado res interinos de bienes ajenos, en los casos en que la ley los establece.

Las tutelas y curatelas, cuya constitución definitiva esté pendiente de la resolución de los Tribunales al empezar a regir el Código, se constituirán con arreglo a la legislación anterior, sin perjuicio de lo dispuesto en la regla que precede.

Los jueces y los fiscales municipales no procederán de oficio al nombramiento de los consejos de familia sino respecto a los menores cuya tutela no estuviere aún definitivamente constituida al empezar a regir el Código. Cuando el tutor o curador hubiere comenzado ya a ejercer su cargo, no se procederá al nombramiento del Consejo hasta que lo solicite alguna de las personas que deban formar parte de él, o el mismo tutor o curador existente; y entre tanto quedará en suspenso el nombramiento del protutor.

Los expedientes de adopción, los de emancipación voluntaria y los de dispensa de ley pendientes ante el Gobierno o los Tribunales, seguirán su curso con arreglo a la legislación anterior, a menos que los padres o solicitantes de la gracia desistan de seguir este procedimiento y prefieran el establecido en el Código.

Los derechos a la herencia del que hubiese fallecido, con testamento o sin él, antes de hallarse en vigor el Código, se regirán por la legislación anterior. La herencia de los fallecidos después, sea o no con testamento, se adjudicará y repartirá con arreglo al Código, pero cumpliendo, en cuanto éste lo permita, las disposiciones testamentarias. Se respetarán, por lo tanto, las legítimas, las mejoras y los legados, pero reduciendo su cuantía, si de otro modo no se pudiera dar a cada partícipe en la herencia lo que le corresponda según el Código.

Los casos no comprendidos directamente en las disposiciones anteriores se resolverán aplicando los principios que les sirven de fundamento.

Disposiciones Adicionales

Disposición Adicional Primera. El Presidente del Tribunal Supremo y los de las Audiencias Territoriales elevarán al Ministerio de Gracia y Justicia, al fin de cada año, una Memoria, en la que, refiriéndose a los negocios de que hayan conocido durante el mismo las Salas de lo civil, señalen las deficiencias y dudas que hayan encontrado al aplicar este Código. En ella harán constar detalladamente las cuestiones y puntos de

286

derecho controvertidos y los artículos u omisiones del Código que han dado ocasión a las dudas del Tribunal.

Disposición Adicional Segunda. El Ministro de Gracia y Justicia pasará estas Memorias y un ejemplar de la Estadística civil del mismo año a la Comisión general de Codificación.

Disposición Adicional Tercera. En vista de estos datos, de los progresos realiza dos en otros países que sean utilizables en el nuestro de la jurisprudencia del Tribunal Supremo, la Comisión de Codificación formulará y elevará al Gobierno cada diez años las reformas que convenga introducir.

287


立法 取代 (1 文本) 取代 (1 文本) 被以下文本取代 (3 文本) 被以下文本取代 (3 文本)
无可用数据。

WIPO Lex编号 ES122